MRS M L E S L I E A R C H I V E S C H A N C E L R Y A NU

THE

AUSTRALIAN NATIONAL U N I V E R S I T Y

1972

FACULTY

H ANDB OOK

ooMoz◄53

><HPPU<Uh

Nt"-©vM

>-Hc«OSw>HH

ZP

P◄zoH<Z

ZC

P<OShV)P<

w53H

FacultyHandbook1972

The Australian National University Canberra 1971

Published and produced by:The Academic Registrar Designed by:University Design Section Set by:Computype, Sydney Printed by:Mockridge, Bulmer Pty Ltd, Sydney.

Contents

Officers and Staff

General Information 13

Faculty of Arts

Faculty of Asian Studies 185

Faculty of Economics 233

Faculty of Law 297

Faculty of Science

Time-table 425

Index 449

Site map inside back cover

Calendar 1972

J A N U A R Y F E B R U A R Y M A R C H

S M T W T F S S M T W T F S S M T W T F S

3 0 31 1 1 2 3 4 5 1 2 3 4

2 3 4 5 6 7 8 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 5 6 7 8 9 10 11

9 10 11 12 13 14 15 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 12 13 1 4 15 16 17 18

16 17 18 19 2 0 21 22 2 0 21 22 23 2 4 25 26 19 2 0 21 22 23 2 4 25

2 3 24 25 26 27 2 8 29 27 2 8 2 9 2 6 27 2 8 29 3 0 31

A P R I L M A Y J U N E

S M T W T F S S M T W T F S S M T W T F S

3 0 . . 1 1 2 3 4 5 6 1 2 3

2 3 4 5 6 7 8 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

9 10 11 12 13 14 15 14 15 16 17 18 19 2 0 11 12 13 14 15 16 17

16 17 18 19 2 0 21 22 21 2 2 23 24 2 5 26 27 18 19 2 0 21 22 2 3 2 4

23 24 2 5 26 27 2 8 29 2 8 2 9 3 0 31 2 5 2 6 2 7 28 29 3 0

J U L Y A U G U S T S E P T E M B E R

S M T W T F S S M T W T F S S M T W T F S

3 0 31 1 1 2 3 4 5 1 2

2 3 4 5 6 7 8 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

9 10 11 12 13 14 15 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 10 11 12 13 14 15 16

16 17 18 19 2 0 21 22 2 0 21 2 2 23 24 25 26 17 18 19 20 21 22 23

2 3 24 25 26 27 28 29 2 7 2 8 2 9 3 0 31 24 2 5 2 6 27 28 2 9 30

O C T O B E R N O V E M B E R D E C E M B E R

S M T W T F S S M T W T F S S M T W T F S

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 1 2 3 4 31 1 2

8 9 10 11 12 13 14 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

15 16 17 18 19 2 0 21 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 10 11 12 13 14 15 16

2 2 23 24 25 2 6 27 28 19 2 0 21 22 23 2 4 25 17 18 19 20 21 2 2 23

2 9 3 0 31 2 6 2 7 2 8 29 30 2 4 2 5 2 6 27 28 2 9 3 0

IV

Im portant Dates in 1972

U n i v e r s i t y O f f i c e o p e n s T u e s . 4 J a n .

Last d a y fo r re c e ip t o f a p p lic a tio n s to re -e n ro l Tues. 4 J a n .

Last da y fo r re c e ip t o f a p p lic a tio n s to en ro l fo r n e w s tu d e n ts w h o in 1971 sat s ta te m a tr ic u la t io n e x a m in a tio n s o r end o f year e x a m in a tio n s at a n o th e r u n ive rs ity . Fri. 21 J a n .

O r ie n ta tio n W e e k b e g in s M o n . 2 8 Feb.

F irs t te rm an d f irs t sem este r b e g in M o n . 6 M a rc h

Last d a y fo r p a y m e n t b y re -e n ro llin g s tu d e n ts o f fees fo r f irs t te rm and f irs t sem este r Thurs . 3 0 M a rc h

Easter v a c a tio n : N o classes 31 M a r-3 A p r il in c l.

F irs t te rm en d s Sat. 13 M a y

Q u e e n 's B ir th d a y H o lid a y : N o classes M o n . 12 J u n e

S e co n d te rm b e g in s M o n . 5 J u n e

Last d a y fo r p a y m e n t o f fees fo r s e co n d te rm Fri. 16 J u n e

F irs t se m es te r en ds Sat. 2 4 J u n e

S e co n d se m e s te r b e g in s M o n . 10 J u ly

B ush W e e k a c tiv it ie s : N o classes Fri. 2 8 J u ly

S e co n d te rm en d s Sat. 5 A u g u s t

T h ird te rm b e g in s M o n . 4 S ep t.

Last d a y fo r p a y m e n t o f fees fo r th e th ird te rm and se co n d sem este r Fri. 1 5 S ept.

L a b o u r D a y H o lid a y : N o classes M o n . 2 O ct.

N o n -s e m e s te r c lasses end Sat. 21 O ct.

S em este r c lasses end Sat. 2 8 O ct.

Last da y fo r re c e ip t o f a p p lic a tio n s to e n ro l in 1 9 7 3 fro m overseas s tu d e n ts and fro m all a p p lic a n ts o th e r th a n th o s e w h o in 1 9 7 2 sat s ta te m a tr ic u la t io n e x a m in a tio n s o r end o f year e x a m in a tio n s at a n o th e r u n iv e rs ity . 1 N ov. 1 9 7 2

A n n u a l E x a m in a tio n s b e g in T h urs . 2 N ov.

E x a m in a tio n s c o n c lu d e Sat. 25 N ov.

U n iv e rs ity O ff ic e c lo se d (b u t m a il re c e iv e d ) 2 5 D e c .-1 J a n .1 9 7 3 inc l.

v

A careful reading of this Handbook will greatly assist a student.

InquiriesAll inquiries including requests for residential accommodation should be addressed to:The Academic Registrar,The Australian National University,Box 4, PO,Canberra, ACT, 2600.

The telephone number of the Student Administration office, which is located in the Chancelry, is 49 3339.

The Australian National University Calendar includes the University Act and the Statutes, Rules and Regulations of the University.It may be consulted in the University Library.

VI

1O fficers and S ta ff

Officers and Staff

Officers of the University!ChancellorH. C. Coombs, MA (WAust), PhD (Lond), Hon DLitt (WAust),Hon LLD (Melb, Syd and ANU), FAA

Pro-ChancellorThe Honourable Sir Richard Eggleston, LLB (Melb)

Vice-ChancellorEmeritus Professor Sir John Crawford, CBE, MEc (Syd), Hon DSc (N'cle(NSW)), HonDEc (NE)

Deputy Vice-ChancellorProfessor D. N. F. Dunbar, MSc (NZ),PhD (Melb)

SecretaryR. A. Höhnen, OBE, BEc (Syd)

LibrarianJ. J. Graneek, BA, DipEd (Liv),MA (Birm)

RegistrarD. K. R. Hodgkin, BSc (Econ), (Lond)

BursarW. S. Hamilton, AAUQ, FASA

Registrar (Property and Plans)D. St A. Dexter, BA (Melb)

Academic RegistrarC. G. Plowman, BEc (Syd)

tF o r o ther senior adm inistrative staff see The Australian National University Calendar.

3

Officers and Staff

S ta ff of the School of General S tudiest

Jane D. Crisp, MA (Auck), PhD

TutorStephanie J. Dien, BA (Adel)

Deputy Chairman of the Board Professor C. A. Gibb, OBE, MA, BEc (Syd), PhD (III), FBPsS

Faculty o f A rtsDeanProfessor R. St C. Johnson Sub-Dean and Faculty Secretary Patricia M. White, BA (Melb)

ClassicsProfessor and Head of Department R. St C. Johnson, MA, DipEd (Syd)ReaderK. L. McKay, BA (Syd), MA (Cantab) Senior LecturersBeryl M. Rawson, BA (Q'ld), MA,PhD (Bryn Mawr Coll)E. L. Burge, BA (Q'ld), MA (Oxon), MA, PhD (Prin)LecturersC. M. Mayrhofer, BA (WAust and Cantab), MA (Cantab)R. W. Barnes, BA (Q'ld and Oxon),ThM (Harv)Marjorie A. Moffatt, BA (Melb), MA

EnglishProfessor and Head of Department To be appointed.ProfessorsC. I. E. Donaldson, BA (Melb),MA (Oxon)W. Milgate, MA (Syd)ReadersR. F. Brissenden, MA (Syd), PhD (Leeds)F. H. Langman, BA (Rand)W. S. Ramson, MA (NZ), PhD (Syd)Reader in Medieval StudiesL. J. Downer, MA (Oxon), BA, LLB (Syd)Senior LecturersA. Hope Hewitt, MA (Syd), BCom (Melb) Dorothy Green, MA (Syd)LecturersJ. Miriam Benn, MA (Lond)A. J. Robbins, BA (Oxon)W. A. Krebs, BA (Q'ld), MA (Leeds) Temporary Senior Tutors Elizabeth A. Kilcullen, MA (Q'ld),PhD (Tor)■(•Information compiled as at 1 September 1971.

4

FrenchProfessor and Head of DepartmentD. P. Scales, BA (Syd), DU (Paris)

Senior LecturersEthel E. Tory, BA, DipEd (WAust),DU (Paris)G. J. Halligan, MA (NZ), MLitt (Cantab) J. A. Grieve, BA (Belf), MA

LecturersC. G. Crisp, MA (NZ), DU (Aix-Marseille) Viviane M. Smith, DES (Rennes)

GeographyProfessor and Head of DepartmentB. L. C. Johnson, BA, PhD (Lond),MA (Birm)ReaderE. C. Chapman, MA, DipEd (Syd)

Senior LecturerL. Sternstein, BS (NY), MA (Syracuse), PhDLecturersN. S. McDonald, MSc (NE)J. M. A. Chappell, MSc (Auck.)M. J. Webber, BA (Cantab), PhD J. K. Johnson, BA (Cantab)Temporary LecturerR. M. Steele, MA (NE)

Senior TutorMargaret P. M. Le M. Scrivenor, BSc (Syd), DipEd (Melb)TutorR. J. Sloan, BAPart-time Lecturer W. P. Packard, MA (NZ)

Germanic LanguagesProfessor and Head of DepartmentH. Kuhn, DrPhil (Zür)Senior LecturerMargaret J. Stoljar, MA, PhD (Melb) LecturersMyra M. Graneek, MA, DipEd (Birm)C. H. Cull, BA, PhD (Q'ld)R. F. Holt, BA, DipEd (Melb),BEd, MA (Monash)Temporary Lecturer E. Burgstaller, DrPhil (Vienna)

HistoryProfessor and Head of Department C. M. H. Clark, MA (Melb)

Officers and Staff

ProfessorC. M. Williams, BA (Melb), DPhil (Oxon)Professor of PrehistoryD. J. Mulvaney, MA (Melb), MA, PhD (Cantab)

ReadersD. W. A. Baker, MA (Melb)E. C. Fry, BA, BEc, DipEd (Syd), PhD

Senior LecturersH. G. Kinloch, BA (Cantab), MA,PhD (Yale)B. E. Kent, BA (Melb and Oxon), PhD G. F. Fairbairn, BA (Cantab)W. F. Mandle, BA (Oxon)I. R. Hancock, BA (Melb), BPhil (Oxon) Dorothy L. Shineberg, BA, PhD (Melb), MA (Smith Coll)G. R. Bartlett, BA (Oxon), PhDLecturersBarbara R. Penny, MA (Melb)J. N. Molony, STL, JCL, (Pontificia Univ Urbaniana), MAJ. D. Ritchie, BA, DipEd (Melb), PhDJ. H. Tillotson, BA, DipEd (Oxon), PhDC. C. Macknight, BA (Melb), PhD Daphne E. Gollan, BA (Syd) MA Senior TutorsJudith A. Jones, BA, DipSocStud (Melb)H. D. McQueen, BA (Q'ld)L. J. Louis, MA (Melb)W. G. Craven, BA (Melb)L. S. Launitz-Schurer, BA (SirGWms), MA, PhD (McG)TutorDiana J. Waterhouse, DipEd (Syd), BA Part-time LecturerG. G. Rossiter, DFC, BA (WAust), MA (Oxon)

LinguisticsProfessor and Head o f DepartmentR. M. W. Dixon, MA (Oxon), PhD (Lond)Senior LecturerH. Bluhme, Dr phil (Mün)K. H. M. Rensch, Dr phil (Mün)LecturerJ. Harris, BA (Syd), MA (Mich)J. M. Haiman, BA (Tor), PhD (Harv) Honorary Research Fellow J. B. Haviland, AB, PhD (Harv)

Mathematics(Department of Applied Mathematics and Department of Pure Mathematics)

Applied MathematicsProfessor and Head of DepartmentA. Brown, MA (Glas), PhD (Cantab)ReaderJ. E. Drummond, MSc (NZ), BA (Cantab)Senior LecturersS. M. A. Meggitt, MA (Oxon),MSc (Natal), PhDB. Davies, BSc, PhD (NSW)

LecturerH. F. Petersons, MSc, PhD (Syd)TutorK. Sanders, BSc (Syd)

Pure MathematicsProfessor and Head of Department Hanna Neumann, DPhil, DSc (Oxon), FAASenior LecturersM. A. Ward, BSc (Melb), BA, PhD P J. Cossey, BSc (Q'ld), PhD R. A. Bryce, MSc (Q'ld), PhDLecturersC. Christensen, MScTech, PhD (Mane)T, K. Donaldson, BS (Kentucky), MS PhD (Chic)A. Howe, BSc (NE), PhDJ. M. McPherson, BSc, PhD (NSW)R. J. Loy, BSc (Melb), MSc, PhD (Monash)Senior TutorsLynette M. Butler, BSc (Q'ld), MScD. B. Shield, BSc, DipEd (Q'ld), MA

PhilosophyProfessor and Head of DepartmentP. Herbst, MA (Melb), BA (Oxon)Associate ProfessorQ. B. Gibson, BA (Melb), MA (Oxon)ReaderW. J. Ginnane, MA (Melb), BPhil (Oxon) Senior LecturerK. Lycos, BA (Syd), BPhil (Oxon) LecturersT. R Mautner, fil kand (Lund), fil lie (Gothenburg)P. Thom, MA (Syd),BPhil (Oxon) Genevieve M. Small, BA (Syd),BPhil (Oxon)R. J. Campbell, BD, MA (Syd)DPhil (Oxon)P. Roeper, Dr phil (Frankfurt), BPhil (Oxon)Senior TutorBobbie K. Gledhill, BA (Syd)

5

Officers and Staff

Political ScienceProfessor and Head of DepartmentG. S. Reid, BCom (Melb), PhD (Lond) ProfessorL. F. Crisp, MA (Oxon and Adel) ReadersL. J. Hume, MEc (Syd), PhD (Lond)J. H. Grainger, MA (Cantab)Senior LecturersI. F. H. Wilson, MA (Melb), MIA (Col)J. A. A. Stockwin, MA (Oxon), PhD B. J. McFarlane, MEc (Syd)Katharine 0, West, MA (Melb)Thelma A. C. Hunter, MA DipEd (Glas) LecturersE. A, Lyall, BA (Melb), BEcR. J. Cooksey, BA (Syd)S. C. Bennett, BA (Tas), MAH. N. Collins, BA (WAust), AM (Harv) Janette Woodward, DipEd (Syd), BEc Senior TutorSally-Ann Ray, BA TutorSusan C. Read, BA

Psychology(See Faculty of Science)

RussianProfessor and Head of Department R. G. A. de Bray, BA, PhD (Lond)Senior LecturersP. R. Ireland, MA (Cantab)Margaret B. Travers, MA (Melb), DipSlavStud (Oxon)LecturerTo be appointed.

SociologyProfessor and Head of Department J. Zubrzycki, MBE, MSc (Econ) (Lond)Senior LecturerR. G. Cushing, AB (Dartmouth), MA, PhD (Indiana)

LecturerL. J. Saha, AB (Notre Dame), STL (Pontifical Gregorian Univ), MA, PhD (Texas)Temporary Lecturer P. E. Glasner, BSc (Lond)Wool Board FellowG. B. Fox, BRurSc, PhD (NE)Research Fellow (Drug Education Project)R. P. Irwin, MSc, PhD (III)

F acu lty o f A s ian S tu d iesDeanProfessor Liu Ts'un-yan Sub-Dean Dr J. G. Caiger Faculty SecretaryNora F. Dixon, LLB (Syd), Barrister- at-Law (NSW)

Asian CivilizationsProfessor and Head of Department A. L. Basham, BA, PhD, DLit (Lond),Hon DLit (Kuruk), FSA, FAHAAssociate ProfessorO. B. van der Sprenkel,BSc (Econ) (Lond), FAHA (Till Dec. 1971)ReadersS. A. A. Rizvi, MA, PhD, DLitt (Agra), FAHAH. H. E. Loofs, DipOrLang (Paris),DrPhil (Frib)Senior LecturersR. H. P. Mason, MA (Cantab), PhDJ. T. F. Jordens, Lie en Philos, PhD (Louvain), DipEd (Melb)LecturersK. H. J. Gardiner, BA, PhD (Lond)J. G. Caiger, BA (Syd and Lond), PhDSenior TutorAnn L. Kumar, BA, PhD

ChineseProfessor and Head o f Department Liu Ts'un-yan, BA (Peking), BA, PhD,DLit (Lond), DipEd (HK), FAHA ReaderJ. D. Frodsham, MA (Cantab), PhD, FAHASenior LecturersR. R. C. de Crespigny, BA (Melb), MA (Cantab), BA, MA (Oriental Studies), PhDP. Ryckmans, LLD, PhD (Louvain)

Temporary LecturerJulia Ching, BA (New Rochelle),MA (CUA)Senior TutorWinifred Chang, BEd (National Taiwan Normal Univ), MA (Philippine Normal Coll)

Indonesian Languages and LiteraturesProfessor and Head of Department A. H. Johns, BA, PhD (Lond)

6

Officers and Staff

Senior LecturersSoebardi, MA (Indonesia), PhDSoewito-Santoso, MA (Indonesia), PhDD. J. Prentice, BA (Lond), PhD LecturersS. Supomo, MA (Gadjah Mada)Senior Tutor Yohanni JohnsTutorElly H. Soebardi

JapaneseProfessor and Head of DepartmentE. S. Crawcour, BA (Melb), MA (Cantab), PhDReaderA. Alfonso (Pardavila), MA (Mich),PhLic, DPhil (Pontifical Univ of Camillas) Senior LecturerH. Mukai, BA (Keio)LecturerAyako Saito, BA (Kobe Women's Coll)Senior Tutor H. Kaneko, LLB (Chüö)

Linguistics(See Faculty of Arts)

South Asian and Buddhist StudiesProfessor and Head of Department J. W. de Jong, DrPhil (Ley)Senior LecturerLuise A. Hercus, MA (Oxon)A. Yuyama, BA (Osaka-Gaigo and Tokyo), MA (Tokyo) PhDLecturerT. Rajapatirana, MA (Ceyl)

F a c u lty o f Econom icsDeanProfessor B. D. Cameron Sub-Dean Dr R. V.Jackson Faculty SecretaryPenelope M. Richardson, BA (Syd)

A ccounting and Public FinanceProfessor and Head of Department R. L, Mathews, BCom (Melb)ReaderW, R. C. Jay, BA, BCom (Q'ld)Senior LecturersP, E. M, Standish, BA, BEc (Syd)R. A. Ma, BCom (Lond), MBA (Br Col)LecturersJ. Y. Henderson,BEc (Adel)H. G. Brennan, BEcTemporary LecturerJ. K. Henderson, BA (Macquarie)Senior TutorI. G. Tilley, BCom (Q'ld)

Econom ic H istoryProfessor and Head of DepartmentG. S. L. Tucker, BCom (Melb),PhD (Cantab)ReaderC. Forster, BCom (Melb), PhD LecturersS. H. Cornish, BEc (WAust)R. V. Jackson, BE, PhD (Syd)A. Martina, BCom (Rhodes), MA (Essex)J. E. S. Gagg, BA (Mane)H. M. Boot, BSc (Econ) (Lond)

EconomicsProfessor (Applied Economics) and Head o f DepartmentB. D. Cameron, MEc (Syd),PhD (Cantab)ProfessorJ. D. Pitchford, MCom (Tas), PhD ReaderC. A. Tisdell, BCom (NSW), PhDSenior LecturersP, D. Drysdale, BA (NE), PhDC, T. Edwards, BCom (Melb), PhDD. W. Stammer, MA (NE), PhDJ. R. Niland, MCom (NSW), PhD (III)LecturersA. H. Chisholm, MAgSc (NZ)J. G, Logan, BCom (NSW)G. C. Ford, BCom (Melb)

7

Officers and Staff

O. G. P. Stanley, BEc (Syd)C. Walsh, MSc (Lond)N. J. Vousden, BASenior TutorsB. Smith, MA (Aberd)Jill I. Coat, BEc (Adel)Susan C. Bambrick, BEcon (G'ld), PhDD. W. James, BA (N'cle(NSW)), MEc K. T. Davis, BEc (Flinders)

Political Science(See Faculty of Arts)

StatisticsProfessor of Mathematical Statistics and Head of DepartmentC. R. Heathcote, BA (WAust), MA (Melb), PhDProfessor of EconometricsR. D. Terrell, BEc (Adel), PhD

ReaderC. C. Heyde, MSc (Syd), PhD Senior LecturersS. John, MSc (Trav), PhD (Indian Statistical Institute)P. Winer, BSc (Rand)E. Seneta, MSc (Adel), PhD Senior Lecturer in Computer Science R, A. Jarvis, BE, PhD (WAust)J. H. T. Morgan, BA (Cantab), MSc (Case Institute of Technology)LecturerP. N. Creasy, BSc (Adel)Senior TutorNora F. MacNally, BSc (Lond)

F a c u lty o f L a wDeanProfessor FI. Whitmore Sub-Dean Mr D. C. Pearce Faculty Secretary Jane Flecknoe, MA (NZ)

Robert Garran ProfessorJ. E. Richardson, BA, LLM (Melb),Barrister and Solicitor (Vic)ProfessorsH. Whitmore, LLB (Syd), LLM (Yale), Barrister-at-Law (NSW)L. R. Zines, LLB (Syd), LLM (Harv), Barrister-at-Law (NSW)P. S. Atiyah, BCL, MA (Oxon), Barrister- at-Law, (Inner Temple).ReaderD. W. Smith, BCom, LLB (Melb), Barrister-at-Law (NSW)Senior LecturersD. O'Connor, BA, LLB (Syd), LLM, PhD (Lond), Barrister-at-Law (NSW)D. L. Pape, BSc (SA), LLB (Natal), Barrister-at-Law (Natal)A. D. Hambly, LLB (Melb), LLM (Harv) Barrister and Solicitor (Vic)J. L. R. Davis, BA, LLB (NZ), LLB DipComparLegalStud (Cantab), Barrister and Solicitor (NZ and Vic)J. Dixon, BEc (Adel), LLB (Syd), FASA, Barrister-at-Law (NSW)W. E. Holder, BA, LLB (Melb), LLM (Yale), Barrister and Solicitor (Vic)D. E. Harding, BA, LLB (Syd), LLM (Calif), Solicitor (NSW)F. Rinaldi, MA (WAust), LLB (Q'ld), Barrister-at-Law (Q'ld)Alice E.-S. Tay, PhD, Barrister-at-Law (Lincoln’s Inn and NSW)D. C. Pearce, LLB (Adel) LLM, Barrister and Solicitor (SAust)J. F. Hookey, BA (Melb), LLB. PhD (Lond), DipEd (Melb), Barrister-at-Law (NSW), Barrister and Solicitor (TPNG)

LecturersG. J. Davies, BA, LLM, Barrister-at- Law (NSW)C. Turner, LLB (Birm), PhDRobin Burnett, LLB (NZ), LLM (Well),Barrister and Solicitor (NZ)Temporary Lecturer R. S. Geddes, LLB

8

Officers and Staff

Senior Tutor G. J. Kelly, LLB

Legal WorkshopDirectorK. F. O'Leary, LLB (Syd), Barrister- Law (NSW)

F acu lty o f S cienceDeanProfessor I. G Ross Sub-Dean Dr D L. Scott Faculty Secretary Mr D. I. McAlpin

BiochemistryProfessor and Head of Department L. M. Birt, BAgrSc, BSc, PhD (Melb), DPhil (Oxon)Senior LecturersL. Dalgarno, BAgrSc, PhD (Melb)F. L. Bygrave, BSc (NZ), MSc (Otago), PhD (Q'ld)M. J. Weidemann, BAgrSc, PhD (Melb) LecturersA. J. Howells, BAgrSc, PhD (Melb)R. C. Weir, BSc (Adel), PhD (Lond)Senior Demonstrators T. D. Rainforth, MSc (Well)K. C. Reed, MSc (Melb)DemonstratorMary W. Kelly, BSc (Q'ld)

BotanyProfessor and Head of DepartmentL. D. Pryor, DSc (Adel)ReaderD. M. Paton, BSc, PhD (Tas)Senior LecturersJ. A. Carnahan, MSc, PhD (NZ)E. G. Brittain, BSc, PhD (Melb)0. R. Byrne, BSc (Q'ld), BSc, PhD (Adel) (Genetics)R. B. Knox, BSc (Edin), PhD (Birm) LecturersG. A. Chilvers, BScAgr (Syd)M. I. Whitecross, MSc (Q'ld), PhD (Syd)M. J. Aston, MScAgr (Syd), PhD (Calif)Senior DemonstratorsC. R. Geard, BAgrSc (Melb), MSc (Tas)Helen J. Hewson, BSc, PhD (Syd)R. J. Seviour, BSc, PhD (Bath)

ChemistryProfessor and Head of Department1. G. Ross, MSc (Syd), PhD (Lond), FRACIProfessorA. N. Hambly, MSc, DipEd (Melb), FRACIAssociate ProfessorW. D. L. Crow, MSc (Syd), PhD (Sheff), FRACI (Organic Chemistry)

9

Officers and Staff

ReaderJ. H. Bradbury, DSc (Melb), PhD (Birm), FRACI (Physical Chemistry)R. N. Warrener, MSc (Syd), PhD (NSW)(Organic Chemistry)

Senior LecturersNaida S. Gill, MSc, PhD (Syd){Inorganic Chemistry)J. A. Broomhead, MSc (Syd), PhD {Inorganic Chemistry)D. L. Scott, BSc, PhD (Tas) {Inorganic Chemistry)N. J. Daly, BSc, PhD (WAust){Physical Chemistry)B. K. Selinger, MSc (Syd), Dr rer nat (Technical Univ of Stuttgart){Physical Chemistry)J. A. Elix, BSc, PhD (Adel) {Organic Chemistry)LecturerM. Rasmussen, MSc, PhD (Syd){Organic Chemistry)

Senior DemonstratorsMeta Sterns, MSc, PhD (Melb)J. J. Foster, BSc (Syd), MScK. H. J. Bryant, BSc (Adel), MScH. J. J.-B. Martel, BSc (Laval),MSc (BrCol)Postdoctoral FellowsM. N. Paddon-Row, BSc (Lond), PhDV. G. Kulkarni, BSc, BSc (Tech), MSc (Tech) (Bombay) PhD (Leeds)

ForestryProfessor and Head of DepartmentJ. D. Ovington, PhD, DSc (Sheff),FFS, FIBiolReaderL. T. Carron, MScFor (Q'ld),DipFor (Oxon)Senior LecturersW. A. Heather, BScFor, MSc (Syd), PhD R. G. Florence, MScFor (Q'ld),PhD (Syd)E. P. Bachelard, BScF (Melb), MF,PhD (Yale)M. T. Tanton, BSc, PhD, DIC (Lond), ARCSK. W. Groves, BSc (Wales)D. M. Stodart, BE (Adel), MS (Texas)K. R. Shepherd, BScFor (Syd),PhD (Melb)I. S. Ferguson, BScF (Melb), MF,DFor (Yale)LecturersE. D. Parkes, BAgrSc (NZ),MAgrSc (Cant)10

G. B. Wood, BScFor (Q'ld), DipFor (Oxon), PhDP. R. Stevens, MAgrSc (NZ)PhD (Cantab)W Aust Forest Service Postdoctoral FellowB. H. Pratt, BSc (Syd), BAgSc,PhD (Adel)Senior DemonstratorsM. U. Slee, MA (Oxon) MScJ. C. G. Banks, BSc (Forestry)R G. Buick, BSc (Cant), BSc (Forestry) T. J. Blake, BScFor (Syd), MFor (Yale)

Part-time LecturerD. M. Griffin, MA, PhD, ScD (Cantab)

GeologyProfessor and Head of Department D. A. Brown, MSc (NZ), PhD,DIC (Lond)ReadersK. S. W. Campbell, MSc, PhD (Q'ld)A. J. R. White, BSc (Adel), PhD (Lond)K. A. W. Crook, MSc (Syd),PhD (NE), BASenior LecturersC. E. B. Conybeare, MSc (Alta),PhD (Washington State)M. J, Rickard, BSc, PhD, DIC (Lond)B. W. Chappell, MSc (NE), PhDR. A. Eggleton, BSc (Adel), PhD (Wis)J. A. McDonald, MSc (Manit), P-hD (Wis)Senior DemonstratorsJ. L. Funk, BS, MA (Missouri), DIC (Lond)G. M. Taylor, BSc (NSW)I. E. Smith, BSc (Well)

M ath em atics(See Faculty of Arts)

PhysicsProfessor and Head of DepartmentS. Hinds, BSc, PhD (Liv)ProfessorD. N. F. Dunbar, MSc (NZ), PhD (Melb) ReadersA. J. Mortlock, MSc (Syd), PhD (R'dg), FAIPR. J. Stalker, BSc, MEngSc, PhD (Syd) Senior LecturersL. 0. Brown, MSc (NZ), PhD (Edin)C. E. Dahlstrom, MA (Sask), PhD (McG) R. J. Sandeman, BSc (Adel), MSc (Melb), PhD (Cantab)

Officers and Staff

M. M. Gore, BSc, PhD (Leeds)H. G. Hornung, BE, MEngSc (Melb),PhD (Lond)LecturersR. J. MacDonald, BSc, PhD (NSW)A. M. Baxter, MSc, PhD (Melb)Senior DemonstratorsJ. P. Rayner, MScB. C. Harding, BSc (Brist),BA (Oxon), MScW. E. Tiller, MSc (Clemson, S. Carolina)

PsychologyProfessor and Head of DepartmentC. A. Gibb, OBE, MA, BEc (Syd), PhD (III), FBPsS, FAPSProfessorK. A. Provins, MA (Oxon), PhD (R'dg)Associate Professors P. Pentony, MA (W. Aust)G. N. Seagrim, BA (Lond), MSc (Melb)Senior LecturersMargaret R. Middleton, MA (Melb),PhD (WAust)J. R. Trotter, BA (R'dg), DPhil (Oxon)W. H. Gladstones, MA (WAust),PhD (Tufts)D. G. Beswick, MA (Melb), PhD (Harv) M. L. Cook, BSc (Mane), MSc, PhDLecturersW. P. Bellingham, BA (Calif), PhD (New Mexico)Darroch, R. K., BA (Car.), MA, PhD (III)Temporary LecturerMay-Jane Chen, MSc (National Taiwan Univ)Research Fellow, Aboriginal InfantMorbidity ProjectSarah H. Francis, PhD (Cantab)Senior Demonstrators M. D. Hills, MA (Well)J. D. Kaye, BA (Stell), MA (CapeT) Bridget Farrer, BA (Syd), MPhil (Lond)L. H. Storlien, BSc (Lethbridge) DemonstratorsHelen M. Clark, BSc (N'cle (NSW))K. P. Chamberlain, MA (Cant)

Statis tics(See Faculty of Economics)

T heoretical PhysicsProfessor and Head of DepartmentH. A. Buchdahl, DSc (Lond), FAA

Senior LecturerD. B. Melrose, BSc (Tas), DPhil (Oxon) LecturerM. Andrews, MSc (Q'ld), PhD (Birm) Temporary LecturerR. T. Cahill, BSc, PhD (NSW) Postdoctoral FellowP. J. Sands, BSc, PhD

ZoologyProfessor and Head of DepartmentS. A. Barnett, MA (Oxon)ReadersW. L. Nicholas, BSc, PhD (Liv)C. H. Tyndale-Biscoe, MSc (NZ),PhD (WAust)A. H. Weatherley, BSc (Syd), MSc (Tas), PhD (Glas)Senior LecturersJ. R, T. Short, BSc (WAust), DPhil (Oxon), DSc (Aberd)R. E. Barwick, MSc (NZ), PhDC. Bryant, MSc, PhD (Lond)V. A. P. Harris, BSc, PhD (Lond)P. A. Janssens, BSc, PhD (Sheff) LecturersT. G. Marples, MSc (NZ), PhD (Georgia) M. J. Howell, BSc (NZ), MSc(Well), PhDSenior Demonstrator J. L. Carstairs, BA (Dub)Demonstrator Ruth H. Prowse, BSc Research FellowD. D. Heath, MRurSc (NE)

11

Officers and Staff

Univers i ty LibraryLibrarianJ. J. Graneek, BA, DipEd (Liv),MA (Birm)

Advanced Studies C ollectionAssociate Librarian Jean M. Waller, MA (Melb)ALA, A LA A

General S tudies C ollectionAssociate LibrarianClare Campbell-Smith, BA, DipEd (Tas), A LA ASenior Librarian (Reference)Dorothy M. Enderby, BA (Melb), ALA,A LA A

Asian Studies DivisionSenior LibrarianEnid Bishop, BA (Melb), MS (Col)

Law C ollectionSenior LibrarianP. Biskup, JUDr (Comenius), MA (WAust), A LA A

S tu d e n t ServicesDean of StudentsProfessor C. M. Williams, BA (Melb), DPhil (Oxon)

University Health ServiceDirectorS. B. Furnass, BM, BCh, MA (Oxon), MRCP, FRACPMargaret Wallner, MB, BS (Syd)

U niversity Counselling ServiceCounsellorsJ. E. Gough, MA, DCP (WAust) Margaret H. Evans, BA (NZ), DipPsych (Lond)D. H. Judge, BA (Q'ld)Careers and Appointments Officer S. J. Rawling, BA, DipEd (Syd)Lecturer in Efficient Reading Lyndon Rose, BA (Q'ld)Lecturer in Efficient English B, G. Palfrey, BA (Wales)

12

ResidencesH a lls Bruce HallWardenW. P. Packard, MA (NZ)

Burton HallWardenG. G. Rossiter, DFC, BA (WAust),MA (Oxon)

Garran HallWardenJ, R. T. Short, BSc (WAust), DPhil (Oxon), DSc (Aberd)

A ffilia te d Colleges

John X X III CollegeMasterFather Thomas Hegarty, OP

Ursula CollegePrincipalSister Angela Cooney, OSU, BA, BPhty (Q'ld) MSS (Rome)

Burgm ann CollegeMasterD. M. Griffin, MA, FCD PhD, ScD (Cantab)

General In fo rm ation

Contents

T h e U n iv e rs ity 15

A d m is s io n a n d E n ro lm e n t

U n d e rg ra d u a te A d m is s io n 18

P o s tg ra d u a te A d m is s io n 19

E n ro lm e n t 20

A d m is s io n R e q u ire m e n ts 27

S c h o la rs h ip s a n d F in a n c ia l A s s is ta n c e

U n d e rg ra d u a te S c h o la rs h ip s 29

P o s tg ra d u a te S c h o la rs h ip s 33

S tu d e n t L o an F und 35

V ic e -C h a n c e llo r 's D is c re tio n a ry F u nd 35

S tu d e n t F a c ilit ie s

S tu d e n t R es ide nce 36

The L ib ra ry 37

U n iv e rs ity U n io n 38

S tu d e n t S e rv ices 39

S tu d e n t O rg a n is a tio n 40

U n iv e rs ity C o -o p e ra tiv e B o o k s h o p 42

E xa m in a tio n s 4 3

Prizes 47

The University

Its structureThe Australian National University consists of its governing body, its staff and its students. As a teaching and research institution, it is divided into an Institute of Advanced Studies which is concerned with advanced research and the training of students for doctoral degrees, and a School of General Studies which is made up of five Faculties (Arts, Asian Studies, Economics, Law and Science). Each of the faculties in the School is concerned with the instruction of students for the degrees of bachelor and master and with research and the supervision of candidates for doctoral degrees.

The principal academic body of the School of General Studies is the Board of the School which is res­ponsible to the Council for all aca­demic matters of concern to the School. Under the Board the faculties have immediate control of such academic matters as the rules for degree courses, syllabuses, pre­scribed books, etc. Within each faculty, except the Faculty of Law, there are teaching departments with kindred interests, and the head of each department is responsible for the work of his department.

Each faculty has a dean who is the chief executive officer of the faculty and who can normally act for the faculty in a wide range of matters. The dean has an assistant, the sub­dean, who also acts as a student adviser and who is expert in dealing with the various academic problems with which students are often con­fronted. Each faculty has a faculty secretary who assists the dean and sub-dean with administrative matters and services the faculty at its meetings.

The administration of the Univer­sity is in the hands of the Vice- Chancellor who is its chief executive officer. He is assisted in academic matters by the Deputy Vice-Chan­cellor and in administrative matters by the Secretary of the University. The day-to-day business of the University is conducted by the Registrar and the Academic Registrar.

Students should address all in­quiries of an official nature through the Academic Registrar. On academic matters they may approach either the dean, the sub-dean, the head of a department or any member of the lecturing staff. The usual approach is to the lecturer or to the head of the department concerned where it is a query about the work in a particular unit of a course; or to the sub-dean or the dean (normally only to the dean on the advice of the sub-dean) on matters which relate to the course as a whole. The Vice-Chancellor is normally approached only on vital matters and after the student has stated his problem to the dean and it has been dealt with by the appropriate faculty. Any student may seek the advice of the Director of the University Health Service on health problems. Counsellors from the University Counselling Service are available to discuss with students their per­sonal difficulties, study methods, problems of adjustment to academic life and to advise them on career opportunities.

Its aimsIn general the function of a univer­sity is the theoretical study of general principles. The faculties of the School of General Studies are concerned with the pursuit of liberal

15

General Information

and general knowledge and their courses are designed to promote in a student a spirit of critical apprecia­tion and impartial inquiry and research. In some faculties the courses offered are designed also to give professional qualifications.

A university course seeks to intro­duce the student to new facts and theories and to encourage the stu­dent to assess for himself the importance of the facts and the validity of the theories. Some of the facts may be learned by rote but the ability to know which to accept or reject and the ability to uncover facts which are not given directly by his instructors will be required of a student if he is to gain the most from his university course. It is in this respect that study in a univ­ersity differs from study at school.

A student will be expected to read and work by himself and to prepare essays and assignments without assistance. This calls for the maxi­mum of self-reliance on the part of the student and a willingness to discuss with his instructor those parts of the work which he does not understand.

A student will not be subject to the same regular audits by way of tests as he was at school. Even those students who have the ability and the will to work may not succeed unless they are aware of what is expected of them and learn how to organise their time in relation to their work. Each student should make every effort to learn as much as he can about the University generally, the best methods of study, and in particular about the course for which he is enrolled.

The University offers more than study alone; it allows also for a full development of interests, but the

successful student will be the one who learns how much time to give to study and how much to other pursuits.

Its degreesThe degrees awarded by the University are:Bachelor of Arts (BA)Bachelor of Arts (Asian Studies)(BA (Asian Studies) )

Bachelor of Economics (BEc) Bachelor of Laws (LLB)Bachelor of Science (BSc)Bachelor of Science (Forestry)(BSc (Forestry))

Combined Bachelor of Arts/Bach­elor of Laws (BA/LLB)

Combined Bachelor of Arts (Asian Studies)/Bachelor of Laws (BA (Asian Studies)/LLB)Combined Bachelor of Economics/ Bachelor of Laws (BEc/LLB)

Master of Arts (MA)Master of Arts (Asian Studies)(MA (Asian Studies) )

Master of Economics (MEc)Master of Laws (LLM)Master of Science (MSc)Doctor of Philosophy (PhD)Doctor of Letters (D Litt)Doctor of Laws (LLD)Doctor of Science (DSc)The courses leading to the degrees of bachelor and master are described fully in later sections of this hand­book under respective faculty headings.

The University undertakes the research training of graduate candi­dates for the degree of Doctor of Philosophy. Candidates for this degree may undertake research within one of the research schools of the Institute of Advanced Studies or within one of the faculties of the School of General Studies. A can­didate normally must be an honours

16

The University

graduate of a recognised univer­sity. The course extends over three years although, in special cases, this may be shortened to a minimum of two years or lengthened to a maximum of four years. With certain exceptions covering field work and work at other institutions, candidates must be in attendance at the University for not less than forty weeks and may be required to attend for up to forty-six weeks a year. Candidates are required to prepare a thesis based upon research work undertaken under the direction of a supervisor. Examination for the degree is primarily an examination of a thesis; a written examination may be required. With the approval of the head of his department a can­didate for the degree of Doctor of Philosophy may enrol in a unit/sub­ject offered in the School of General Studies.

The higher doctorates: Doctor of Letters, Doctor of Laws, Doctor of Science, are awarded by the Univ­ersity on rare occasions to persons who have made an original and substantial contribution to know­ledge and scholarship.

The academic yearThe academic year begins with an introductory week-Orientation Week. For students in faculties other than the Faculty of Science this week is followed by first term extending over ten weeks; there follows a three weeks' vacation after which there is a second term of nine weeks, a further vacation of four weeks, and a third term of fourteen weeks, which includes the Annual Examinations; then follows the long vacation of twelve weeks, before the beginning of the next academic year.

The dates of terms and vacations for 1 972 are as follows:First Term: Monday, 6 March toSaturday, 1 3 MaySecond Term: Monday, 5 June toSaturday, 5 AugustThird Term: Monday, 4 September toSaturday, 9 DecemberStudy Vacation: 23 October to1 November.Under the semester time-table in the Faculty of Economics and the Faculty of Science the first semester will extend over thirteen weeks. It is interrupted by a vaca­tion of three weeks. The second semester will commence on 10 July. There will be a vacation period of four weeks from 7 August to2 September followed by seven weeks of teaching term time until the semester study vacation commences on 30 October.

Students will find the vacation periods provide an excellent oppor­tunity for reviewing the work done during term and for reading more widely; this is especially so in the long vacation when a student is expected to do the preliminary reading for the courses which are to be given in the following academic year.

17

Admission and enrolm ent

U N D ER G R A D U A TEA D M IS S IO NAny person seeking enrolment in a course leading to a bachelor's degree must first have his or her application for admission to the University approved by the Admissions Committee. The detailed admission requirements in terms of the New South Wales Higher School Certificate and the University of Sydney Matriculation Examina­tion together with a brief des­cription of the requirements that apply to applications from other states are set out at the end of this chapter.

The University recognises that some persons who are unable to meet the formal requirements for admission may have an educational background or experience which suggest that they have the capacity to benefit from and be successful in a University course. Its Admission Rules permit the Admissions Com­mittee to admit any person provided it is satisfied that he has an adequate educational background and capacity for university work.

The university admission qualifications of certain overseas institutions may be accepted as grounds for admitting applicants to the University if the standards achieved in qualifying examinations reach a minimum set by this University. An overseas applicant is, however, required to show that he has an adequate knowledge of the English language by passing a test. The University arranges for such a test to be taken by an applicant before he leaves his native land.

Overseas students must lodge applications for admission before 1 November in the year before the first enrolment. An overseas applicant

who has completed an Australian matriculation qualifying examination in 1971 will be permitted to lodge an application up to and including 21 January 1 972.

Personal interviews and inquiries are handled by the Admissions office.

A person who has been enrolled at another university must supply the Academic Registrar with full details of his previous academic record when applying for admission, whether status in a course is being sought or not. The faculty con­cerned with the admission will determine under what conditions status will be granted having in mind the merit of a particular appli­cant. A person whose record at another university has been unsatis­factory may be refused admission to the University.

Authoritative information can be given in writing only by the Aca­demic Registrar. The University cannot accept responsibility for consequences which may arise if advice is sought from any other source.

N on-degree studentsNon-degree students enrolled for

any course will be entitled to the same privileges and will be subject to the same discipline and obliga­tions as apply to students pro­ceeding to a degree.

The Faculty of Arts will not accept for enrolment any applicant whose admission to the University has not been approved by the Admissions Committee. A person who is eligible for admission may be accepted as a non-degree student with the approval of the head of the depart­ment concerned.

18

Admission and Enrolment

Save in exceptional circumstances any person wishing to enrol in the Faculty of Asian Studies must be approved for admission to the University by the Admissions Committee. But with the permission of the head of the department concerned and the Dean of the Faculty a person may enrol as a non-degree non-examination student in individual subjects under certain conditions.

Applicants for enrolment as non-degree students will not be accepted by the Faculty of Eco­nomics unless their admission to the University has been approved by the Admissions Committee. Applicants accepted as non-degree students may formally enrol as non-degree/examination or non­degree/non-examination students.

An applicant for enrolment in the Faculty of Law as a non-degree student may be accepted if his admission to the University has been approved by the Admissions Committee. Only in very special circumstances will the Faculty of Law accept applications to under­take non-degree work from persons whose admission has not been approved by the Admissions Committee.

The Faculty of Science may accept applications for enrolment as non-degree students from persons whose admission to the University has been approved by the Admissions Committee. With the permission of the head of the department concerned applicants whose admission has not been approved by the Admissions Com­mittee may also be accepted as non-degree/non-examination students.

POSTGRADUATE ADMISSIONThe University welcomes applica­tions from suitably qualified persons for admission to postgraduate courses either as candidates for the degree of Doctor of Philosophy or as candidates for the degree of master. Application forms and further information may be obtained on application to the Academic Registrar. Applications should be made as early as possible in the year preceding that in which admission is being sought. A stu­dent intending to enrol for a quali­fying or a preliminary course, or as a candidate proceeding by course work leading to the degree of master, may be required to submit an application before the closing date for undergraduate applications. Inquiries about closing dates should be made at the Student Administra­tion office.

Acceptance of candidature for the degree of Doctor of Philosophy is determined by the Board of the Institute of Advanced Studies after the applicant has been accepted as a research student by the Faculty Board, Director or Dean of a Research School in the Institute.

Acceptance of an applicant for the degree of master is determined by the faculty concerned, on the recommendation of the head of the appropriate department. The selec­tion of the department in which the applicant will work is made after consideration of the applicant's academic record and proposed field of research or course of study. A candidate for the degree of master may undertake his research in the School of General Studies, or, in certain cases, in the Institute of Advanced Studies. Upon admission

19

General Information

to the University, a student may be classified as follows:(a) a candidate: a student who has fully satisfied the head of the appro­priate department of his qualifica­tions and ability to undertake research or proceed with a course of study or a combination of both(b) a preliminary or qualifying stu­dent: a student who is required to undertake a preliminary or quali­fying course and pass specified examinations before proceeding as a candidate. A student who does not complete a preliminary or qualifying course may have his status w ith­drawn.

Where a student is not accepted by the head of a department for admis­sion to a preliminary or qualifying course, he may be advised to com­plete certain undergraduate work and to reapply at a later date.

ENROLMENT New applicationsApplications for enrolment for courses for the degree of bachelor should be made on the prescribed form which is available on request from the Academic Registrar or on personal application at the Student Administration office (telephone inquiries: Canberra 49 3339 or 49 5111).(i) Forms to be used by full-time school students who intend to sit the state matriculation examinationsat the end of the year and wish to be considered for an early offer of admission to the University in 1 972, become available in June. The student should complete the application form according to instructions attached to it, and then hand it to the school principal who will mail it to the University.

As a result of receiving these

forms the University will in September 1971 offer places in the University for the 1 972 academic year to a number of students currently enrolled in their final secondary school year.

Full-time school students who do not seek early offers of admis­sion by using the June enrolment form may still request enrolment forms from the University until the closing date for full-time school students, which is 21 January 1972. (ii) Forms for all applicants who are not full-time school students are available in September. These forms should be completed and returned as soon as possible. The closing date for return of these forms is 1 November 1971. A person awaiting notification of examination results must still submit a form before the closing date.

Application forms should be completed carefully with full and complete information. The giving of false or incomplete information may lead to refusal of the applica­tion or cancellation of the enrol­ment.

A student seeking status for work done elsewhere should lodge an application well before the closing date.

Applications from overseas students for the 1 972 academic year will close on 1 November 1971. Overseas students must have confirmation of their qualifications by the closing date of 1 November.

All applicants will be advised as early as possible of the result of their applications and, if accepted, will be required to register an enrolment during a specified period. Registration also includes the payment of fees.

An applicant wishing to enrol in

20

Admission and Enrolment

semester units (i.e. units extending over half the academic year only) may, as an alternative, enrol for the second semester beginning 10 July 1 972. Applications close on 24 June 1972. Inquiries for enrolment on this basis should be addressed to the Academic Registrar.

Enrolment restrictionsIn 1 972 the number of places available for students newly enrolling in the Faculty of Law will be limited. Similar restrictions may apply to the Faculty of Economics and the Faculty of Arts. There may also be restrictions on enrolments in some first year units. Full information on these restrictions as they affect the new applicant will be supplied with enrolment forms.

PhotographsAll students enrolling in 1972 for the first time must supply a recent passport photograph with their completed enrolment application.The photograph should be black and white, 2" x 2J" in size and showing only head and shoulders.

Re-enro lm ent applicationsA student previously enrolled for an undergraduate course at the Australian National University wish­ing to enrol in 1972 must complete an application to re-enrol and mail it to the Academic Registrar, or lodge it personally at the Student Admin­istration office not later than Tuesday. 4 January 1972.

Forms of application for re­enrolment will be sent to all students presenting for Annual Examination in 1971. Other students may obtain forms on personal application at the Student Administration office or by

written application to the Academic Registrar.

Late applications for re­enro lm ent w ill not be accepted after 4 January 1972 except in special circumstances.

Defin it ion of termsThe references to degree courses later in the handbook contain references to certain terms with which students must become familiar. They are:A unit is a year's work in a subject such as English IA, Japanese II or French Language and Literature III, except where it is specified as a semester unit.A subject is a field of study, such as economics or chemistry.A course is an arrangement of units which qualifies a student to proceed to a degree.A major is normally a sequence of three years' study in a subject, such as Russian I, Russian II, Russian III. Not all majors are numbered in this way; Philosophy I, Logic, and History of Philosophy, for instance, make up a major. A major may also be three years' study in an approved sequence of related units. A sub-major is normally a sequence of two years' study in a subject, such as Economics I and Economics II.A single unit is one year's study in a subject, such as Political Science I, except where it is a semester unit.

Sub-DeansArts:Miss P. M. White Haydon-Allen Building

21

General Information

Asian Studies:Dr J. G. CaigerFaculty office, Asian StudiesBuildingEconomics:Dr. R. V. Jackson Department of Economics,Copland Building Law:Mr D. C. PearceFaculty of Law, Law BuildingScience:Dr D. L. ScottFaculty office, Botany Building.Students should read the Faculty Handbook carefully, and then, if they would like some guidance in the selection of units or in the actual choice of a degree course, arrange to see the appropriate Sub-Dean. During the first few months of the year, it is advisable to make an appointment. A person requesting advanced status should consult the sub-dean of the faculty in which admission is being sought before lodging an application.

In general, a person planning to take an honours degree course should consult the head of the department responsible for the honours school before completing an application.

Time-tablesStudents will find a copy of the 1 972 lecture time-table at the end of the Faculty Handbook.

The lecture time-table should be used in conjunction with informa­tion concerning units which appears under the appropriate Faculty entries.

Change of enrolmentFaculty change: A student wishing to transfer from one faculty to another faculty must make an 22

application to do so on a variation form at the Faculty office or at the Student Administration office. The transfer must be approved by the faculty to which the student pro­poses to transfer.Alteration or cancellation of enrolment: Applications to alter or cancel an application to enrol or an enrolment registration must be made on a variation form at the appropriate Faculty office or at the Student Administration office. Alterations are subject to the approval of the Sub-Dean or Faculty Secretary of the faculty concerned.

For the purpose of determining academic progress, the effective date of a cancellation is the date on which the Student Administra­tion office receives the notification in writing. A cancellation made after the last day of second term will normally be classified as a failure.In some cases earlier withdrawal may also be classified as a failure.A student who cancels his enrol­ment in a semester unit will be regarded as having failed in that unit if the cancellation is made after: Faculty of Economics:First semester 12 May Second semester 4 September Faculty of Science:First semester 31 May Second semester 30 September

Where an enrolment is cancelled before the fourth Friday of a term or semester, a student may be eligible for a refund of the whole or a part of the fees paid. An applica­tion for a refund should be made at the Student Administration office.

A student remains liable and will be required to pay fees for any cancellation made after the fourth Friday of the term (or semester).

Admission and Enrolment

Change of addressIt is essential that a variation form should be completed at the Student Administration office to notify a change in the student's term address or the address of the next of kin. During the academic year all correspondence, including fee invoice statements, from the Univ­ersity to a student will be sent to the student's current term address.

DisciplineUpon enrolling, a student signs a declaration that he will observe the Statutes and Rules of the University and the directions of the constituted authorities of the University.

Students will be expected to observe the terms of this declaration and the University may refuse to admit to lectures for such periods as it thinks fit any student who commits any serious breach of discipline. No part of any lecture fees paid will be returned to a student who has been excluded from lectures.

Where the Vice-Chancellor is satisfied that a student is in default of an obligation to the University, a certificate in writing to that effect will be issued to the student and a degree shall not be conferred upon a student while this certificate is in force. A student may appeal in writing to the Council against the issue of the certificate, such an appeal to reach the Registrar within six months of the certificate being issued.

The Discipline Rules made by Council under the Discipline Statutes, are set out in the Austra­lian National University Calendar.

Smoking in classroomsStudents are reminded that smoking in classrooms during classes is not permitted.

Care of propertyStudents are requested to observe care in the use of University prop­erty. Any student who damages University furniture, fittings or other property will be required to pay for the repair of the damage.

Traffic controlThe roads within the University are subject to the ACT Road Traffic Ordinance and Regulations. The traffic and parking signs and red kerb markings in streets throughout the University have the force of law and are subject to control and enforcement by the ACT Police Force.

Students are expected to drive carefully and observe the regula­tions at all times.

FeesExcept for semester units the tuition fees given in the schedule are for a full academic year and may be paid in fu ll or in three equal term instalments in advance. Tuition fees for semester units are not payable in instalments. Annual compulsory fees must be paid in full at the time of registration.

The payment of fees is governed by Rules made by the Council and by statements issued under these Rules by the Academic Registrar, setting out dates for payment, the late fee which may be assessed and the circumstances in which a refund of fees may be allowed. The Fees Rules may be found in the Univ­ersity Calendar and fees statements are sent to all enrolling students early in the academic year.

23

General Information

Schedule o f fees 1972Fees are subject to alteration w ithout notice

For th e d eg ree o f bache lo r

C o m p u l s o r y f e e s $

A d m is s io n fe e (p a y a b le by e ve ry s tu d e n t e n ro ll in g in th is U n iv e rs ity fo r th e f irs t t im e and n o rm a lly n o t re fu n d a b le ) 8 .0 0

U n iv e rs ity U n io n e n tra n c e (p a y a b le by eve ry s tu d e n t e n ro ll in g in th is U n iv e rs ity fo r th e f irs t t im e ) 1 1 .0 0

U n iv e rs ity U n io n m e m b e rsh ip : F u ll- t im e s tu d e n t 2 2 .0 0 per a n n u mP a rt- t im e s tu d e n t(C la s s if ic a tio n is s h o w n on th e to p o f th e re g is tra t io n fo rm )

1 4 .0 0 pe r a n n u m

S p o rts U n io n : F u ll- t im e s tu d e n t 1 2 .0 0P a rt- t im e s tu d e n t 1 0 .0 0

S tu d e n ts ' A s s o c ia t io n 9 .0 0 per a n n u m

L a w S o c ie ty(p a y a b le b y a ll s tu d e n ts e n ro lle d in o n e o r m o re u n its p re sc rib e d fo r th e d e g ree o f B a c h e lo r o f L a w s)

2 .0 0 per a n n u m

T u i t i o n f e e s

Arts

S em e ste r u n its 4 8 .0 0 per sem este rA ll o th e r u n its 9 6 .0 0 per u n it

F o u rth (h o n o u rs ) year 2 7 0 .0 0 in c lu s iv e

H a lf fe e u n its ( th e fees fo r c e rta in p h ilo s o p h y u n its a v a ila b le to th ir d -y e a r h o n o u rs s tu d e n ts are $1 6 pe r te rm o r $ 4 8 .0 0 pe r a n n u m )

Asian Studies

A ll u n its 9 6 .0 0 pe r u n it

F o u rth (h o n o u rs ) yea r 2 7 0 .0 0 in c lu s iv e

Economics

S em e ste r u n its 4 8 .0 0 pe r sem es te rA ll o th e r u n its 9 6 .0 0 per u n it

F o u rth (h o n o u rs ) year 2 7 0 .0 0 in c lu s iv e

24

Admission and enrolment

L a w $

F irs t year:C o n tra c ts , Lega l M e th o d , Lega l and C o n s t itu t io n a l H is to ry , C r im in a l L a w and P ro ce d u re 9 6 .0 0 per s u b je c t

S e c o n d year:A d m in is tra t iv e La w , C o m m e rc ia l L a w 1, T o rts , P ro p e rty 1 6 0 .0 0 per s u b je c t

T h ird year:C o m m e rc ia l La w II, C o m p a ra tiv e L a w , C r im in o lo g y ,F a m ily L a w , In te rn a tio n a l B u s in e ss T ra n s a c tio n s ,L a w o f E m p lo y m e n t, La w o f In d u s tr ia l P rop e rty ,Lo ca l G o v e rn m e n t and T o w n P la n n in g La w , M ilita ryL a w , P ro p e rty II, P u b lic In te rn a tio n a l L a w 1, S o v ie t L a w , T ru s ts

S u c c e s s io n

6 0 .0 0 per s u b je c t

3 0 .0 0

F o u rth year:A ir and S pace La w , C o m m o n w e a lth C o n s t itu t io n a l L a w , C o m m e rc ia l L a w III, C o m p a ra tiv e Law , C o n f lic t o f Law s, In te rn a tio n a l B u s in e ss T ra n s a c tio n s , J u r is p ru d e n c e , L a b o u r R e la tio n s , L a w o f In d u s tr ia l P ro p e rty , P ra c tice and P ro ce d u re , P u b lic In te rn a tio n a l L a w II, T a x a tio n ,T h e L e g is la tiv e P rocess

E v idence

6 0 .0 0 per s u b je c t

6 0 .0 0 in c lu s iv e

Lega l D ra ft in g

S c ie n c e

2 1 .0 0

G ro u p A u n its :A p p lie d M a th e m a tic s 1 (P ass o r H o n o u rs ) , B o ta n y A 0 1 , C h e m is try A 0 1 , C h e m is try A 0 2 , G enera l M a th e m a tic s ,G e o lo g y A 0 1 , H u m a n B io lo g y A 0 2 , P hys ics A 0 1 , P hys ics A 0 2 , P s y c h o lo g y A 0 1 , P ure M a th e m a tic s I (Pass o r H o n o u rs ) , Z o o lo g y A01

S c ie n c e G erm an

9 6 .0 0 per u n it

4 8 .0 0

G ro u p B un its : (P a rt 1 )B io c h e m is try B 01 , B o ta n y B 0 1 , B o ta n y B 02 , B o ta n y B 03 ,B o ta n y B 04 , C h e m is try B 0 1 , C h e m is try B 02 , C h e m is try B 03 , C h e m is try B 0 4 , G e o lo g y B 0 1 , G e o lo g y B 02 , G e o lo g y B 03 ,P hys ics B 0 1 , P hys ics B 02 , P hys ics B 03 , P s y c h o lo g y B 01 , P s y c h o lo g y B 02 , P s y c h o lo g y B 04, P s y c h o lo g y B 0 6 , Z o o lo g y B 01, Z o o lo g y B 02 , Z o o lo g y B 0 3 , Z o o lo g y B 0 4 , Z o o lo g y B 0 5 6 0 .0 0 per u n it

G ro u p B u n its : (P a rt 2 )P hys ics B 04 , P s y c h o lo g y B 0 3 , P s y c h o lo g y B 0 5

C o m p u te r S c ie n ce I

4 8 .0 0 per u n it

9 6 .0 0

G ro u p C u n its :B io c h e m is try C 01 , B io c h e m is try C 03, B io c h e m is try C 04 , B io c h e m is try C 05, B o ta n y C 01 , B o ta n y C 02 , B o ta n y C 03 ,

25

General Information

Botany C04, Botany C05, Botany C06, Botany C07,Chemistry C01, Chemistry C02, Chemistry C03, Chemistry C04, Chemistry C05, Physics C01, Physics, C02, Physics C03,Physics C04, Psychology C01, Psychology C02, Psychology C03, Psychology C04, Psychology C05, Psychology C06, Psychology C08, Psychology C10, Zoology C01, Zoology C02, Zoology C03,

$

Zoology C04, Zoology C05, Zoology C06, Zoology C07 60.00 per unit

Geology C01, Geology C02, Geology C03, Geology C04, Geology C05, Geology C07, Geology C08, Geology C09, Geology C10, Geology C12, Geology C1 3

Geology C06

30.00 per unit

24.00

Biochemistry C02, Chemistry C06, Theoretical Physics C01, Theoretical Physics C02, Theoretical Physics C03, Theoretical Physics C04, Zoology C08

Computer Science II

48.00 per unit

96.00

Fourth (honours) year 270.00 inclusive

ForestryAll Forestry units 60.00 per unit

Science Russian(Note: No charge for degree students)

39.00

M axim u m lecture fees

No student w ill be required to pay more than $384 for one year. Honours and distinction units: A student enrolled for an honoursdegree or for a unit at distinction level w ill be charged fees for units for which he is enrolled as though they were taken for a pass degree or at the pass level; where a student is required to take additional distinction or honours w ork no charge w ill be made for that work.Students taking honours in Forestry or Law are not charged fees additional to those charged for the pass course.

Field w o rkAdditional costs, mainly for food and accommodation, are incurred in attending field excursions form ing part of courses in Botany, Forestry, Geography, Geology and Zoology. Details are available from the departments concerned.

For th e degree o f m aster, fo r p re lim inary or qualify ing studies fo r the degree o f m aster and fo r Legal W orkshop students

Admission fee (to be paid by all students admitted as candidates for the degree of master or as students undertaking preliminary or qualifying studies for the degree of master or as students in the Legal W orkshop). 8.00

26

Admission and enrolment

S tu d e n ts (o th e r th a n F a cu lty o f L a w ) u n d e rta k in g p re lim in a ry o r q u a lify in g s tu d ie s an d Legal W o rk s h o p s tu d e n ts

$1 8 0 .0 0 in c lu s iv e p a y a b le in no m o re th a n tw o in ­s ta lm e n ts , th e firs t p a y m e n t b e in g n o t less th a n $90 .00 .

S tu d e n ts u n d e rta k in g p re lim in a ry s tu d ie s in th e F a c u lty o f L a w 9 0 .0 0 in c lu s iv e

S tu d e n ts a d m itte d as c a n d id a te s fo r th e d e g ree o f m aste r 2 1 6 .0 0 in c lu s iv e p a y a b le in no m o re th a n tw o in ­s ta lm e n ts , the f irs t p a y m e n t b e in g n o t less th a n 7 2 .0 0

A n n u a l G en e ra l S e rv ice Fee to be p a id b y a ll s tu d e n ts e n ro lle dfo r p re lim in a ry o r q u a lify in g cou rses , by a ll c a n d id a te sfo r th e d e g ree o f m a s te r an d b y a ll Lega l W o rk s h o p s tu d e n ts 2 6 .0 0

Detailed admission require­ments in terms of the New South Wales Higher School Certificate and the University of Sydney M atriculation ExaminationA person is eligible to apply for admission if, at the one examination:(a) he has passed the NSW Higher School Certificate Examination or the University of Sydney Matricula­tion Examination in at least five of the subjects set out below; and(b) the aggregate of the marks that he has attained in those subjects exceeds a number of marks determined by the University.

Subjects which may be presented at the NSW Higher School Certificate or the University of Sydney Matriculation Examination for the purpose of admission to this University:Agriculture Ancient History Art

Bahasa IndonesiaChineseDutchEconomicsEnglishFrenchGeographyGermanGreekHebrewIndustrial ArtsItalianJapaneseLatinMathematicsModern HistoryMusicRussianScienceSpanish

The subjects passed must include English and:(a) if English is passed at first or second level, two other subjects passed at first or second level and

27

General Information

two other subjects passed at any level; or(b ) if English is passed at third level, three other subjects passed at first or second level and one other subject passed at any level.

If the subjects mathematics and science are both passed at first level or second level full or if one of those subjects is passed at first level and the other at second level full, those subjects will be treated as if they are three subjects but other­wise each subject will be treated as if it is one subject only.

A person who has attempted five or more subjects for the NSW Higher School Certificate Examina­tion at the one examination and who would have been admitted if he had passed those subjects at the required levels but who failed to do so may, on application, be admitted if he has passed meritoriously in four subjects including English.

States Other Than New South WalesApplicants who apply for admission on the basis of matriculation qualifications gained in states (or territories) other than New South Wales are required to have met the matriculation requirements within their own state, and in addition, to have achieved an aggregate of marks set by the Admissions Committee of this University.

Admission Rules1. These Rules shall be deemed to have come into operation on the first day of July 1 970.2. In these Rules, unless the contrary intention appears 'admission' means admission to the University in accordance with these Rules; 'the Committee'28

means the Admissions Committee established under the next succeeding rule.3. (1) There shall be an Admissions Committee consisting of such persons as the Board of the School of General Studies appoints.3A. The Board of the School of General Studies shall, from time to time, with the advice of the Committee, establish criteria for the admission of students.4. Subject to the rules from time to time governing the courses of study in the School of General Studies, a person is not eligible, in any year, to commence such a course of study unless he has, in relation to that year, been admitted to the University in accordance with these Rules.5. (1) The Committee may, at such times as it thinks fit, call for applications for admission in relation to a particular year.(2) An application for admission shall be in such form, and contain such information, as the Committee requires.6. The Committee shall consider each application for admission and may admit such applicants as it considers are suitable for admission, having regard to the criteria referred to in rule 3A of these Rules.7. (1) The Committee shall cause to be given to each applicant for admission whom it has admitted to the University in accordance with the last preceding rule notice in writing of his admission.(2) The notice referred to in the last preceding sub-rule shall specify the year in relation to which the admission is effective.

Scholarships and Financial Assistance

UNDERGRADUATESCHOLARSHIPSIf a student has a good scholastic record, he may qualify for financial assistance by way of a scholarship during his course at the University.

The following scholarships are available and tenable in the School of General Studies:

Commonwealth University ScholarshipsThe Commonwealth Government makes available a large number of scholarships each year (12,500 for 1971) to provide assistance to students taking courses at Australian universities. These scholarships, known as Commonwealth Uni­versity Scholarships, are allocated among the States in proportion to population, and are then awarded on merit.

Most of the scholarships are Open Entrance awards for students who have completed one of the prescribed selection examinations and are about to begin a university course. A number of scholarships known as Later Year awards is available for students who have already completed one or more years of a university course. A small number of Mature Age scholarships is reserved for students beyond the age limit for Open Entrance and Later Year awards.

Commonwealth University Scholarships are awarded on merit to applicants who meet certain conditions of eligibility in terms of age and residence. The adminis­tration of the Commonwealth Uni­versity Scholarship Scheme in New South Wales and the Australian Capital Territory is controlled by the Department of Education and Science which operates through its

New South Wales State Office in Sydney.

Persons eligible to apply for the award of a Commonwealth Uni­versity Scholarship are students who are sitting for the Higher School Certificate examination in New South Wales and the Australian Capital Territory (or the matriculation examination set by an Australian university in a state other than New South Wales) and students who have completed part of an approved university course or other tertiary course.

The following types of award are available:(a) Open Entrance Scholarships: These are awarded in order of merit to applicants who sit for a matricu­lation qualifying examination in their own state. (Candidates in New South Wales and the Australian Capital Territory are usually con­sidered on the basis of results obtained in the New South Wales Higher School Certificate Examina­tion.) Candidates must be under thirty years of age on 1 January in the year in which they begin their studies.(b) Later Year Scholarships: These are awarded to students who have completed the full first year of an approved university course and who are making satisfactory progress. Part-time applicants must have completed two part-time years equivalent to one year of the fu ll­time course. Applicants must be under thirty years of age on 1 January of the year in which they take up the award.

(c) Mature Age Scholarships:These are designed to cater for candidates who did not undertake university or tertiary studies on

29

General Information

leaving school but who decided to do so at a more advanced age. Applicants who wish to begin a course must be over the age of thirty years on 1 January of the year in which the scholarship is taken up. Only in exceptional cases will consideration be given to applicants who are over forty years of age. Mature age applicants may compete on the basis of matriculation results but preference is given to those who have already completed part of their course.

A Commonwealth University Scholarship covers the cost of tuition and other compulsory fees but does not cover the cost of instruments, books or accommoda­tion. Subject to a means test, a living allowance may be paid to a full-time student.

Applications must reach the Department of Education and Science by 30 September each year. Further information may be obtained from the Academic Registrar or from the Regional Director, New South Wales State Office, Department of Education and Science, Lasalle Building, 70 Castlereagh Street, Sydney, NSW 2000.

Forestry ScholarshipsThe Commonwealth Government provides at least ten Commonwealth Forestry Scholarships each year for award to Australian citizens desiring to take the course at this University. Particulars of the scholarships may be obtained from the Director- General, Forestry and Timber Bureau, Canberra, ACT 2600. Applications close on 1 November each year.30

National Undergraduate and Asian Studies ScholarshipsIn 1972 the University will offer about twenty National Under­graduate Scholarships to students who propose to proceed to any of the following degrees with honours: Bachelor of Arts, Bachelor of Arts (Asian Studies), Bachelor of Economics, Bachelor of Laws, Bachelor of Science, Bachelor of Science (Forestry). Consideration will also be given to the award of scholarships for combined honours courses, i.e. Bachelor of Arts/ Bachelor of Laws, Bachelor of Arts (Asian Studies)/Bachelor of Laws, Bachelor of Economics/Bachelor of Laws.

Because of the University's special interest in Asian studies, a small number of scholarships is available in 1972 for award to students who are already undergraduates or graduates of a university to commence or continue a course leading to the degree of Bachelor of Arts (Asian Studies) with honours. Persons awarded these scholarships may specialise in one of the follow­ing fields: Asian Civilizations, Chinese Studies, Japanese Studies, South-East Asian Studies (Bahasa Indonesia and Malay), South Asian and Buddhist Studies (Sanskrit) and Linguistics. In special cases, such scholars may enrol for the degree of Bachelor of Arts with honours in certain honours schools in the Faculty of Arts provided that the proposed course includes a major in an Asian language and one unit of Asian Civilization in the background of the relevant area. An applicant who proposes such an enrolment must state the honours

Scholarships and Financial Assistance

school in the Faculty of Arts in which he expects to enrol and nominate the Asian language which he will study. The honours schools available to Asian Studies Scholars are Economics, Geography, History, Political Science or Sociology (combined with Chinese, Japanese or Bahasa Indonesia and Malay as the Asian language); and Latin or Greek (combined with Sanskrit). Other combinations can sometimes be taken with the approval of the faculty or faculties concerned.

Subject to satisfactory progress, the scholarships are tenable for the period of the honours degree (i.e. four years) or of an approved combined course (up to six years).

Applications are accepted from persons ordinarily resident in Australia or in a Territory of the Commonwealth who sit for a qualifying examination for matricu­lation in the state in which they live (e.g. Higher School Certificate or Matriculation) in the year prior to that in which they take up an award. For scholarships leading to the degree of Bachelor of Arts (Asian Studies) with honours, applications are also accepted from undergraduates or graduates of a university or persons already eli­gible to matriculate.

The value of each scholarship is $250 per annum, with free accommodation in a University hall of residence during term and for up to thirty-seven days during first and second term vacations, and free travel to and from home twice each year during the University vacations. Scholars may live in an affiliated college on the campus if they wish to do so. Scholars are exempt from

the payment of tuition and other compulsory fees. A scholar who is eligible to hold a Commonwealth University Scholarship is expected to do so and compulsory fees are claimed under the Commonwealth University Scholarship Scheme. Except with the permission of the University, the scholarship may not be held in conjunction with any other scholarship or award.

Applications close on 30 Novem­ber each year. Application forms may be obtained from the Academic Registrar.

Final Honours Year ScholarshipsThe University offers about ten scholarships each year to assist students of the University to enrol for the final honours year.

Scholars must enrol full-time to complete their honours degree, but a student who has been enrolled as a part-time student may apply. The scholarship is not tenable with any other major scholarship or cadet­ship, but in some cases arrange­ments can be made to have these awards suspended for the year of tenure of the Final Honours Year Scholarship.

The value of each scholarship is $250 per annum, with free accom­modation in a University hall of residence during term or an assessed equivalent amount; tuition and other compulsory fees not paid by another award; fares to and from home twice each year during the University vacations; and free residence in a hall for up to thirty- seven days in the first and second term vacations.

Application forms may be obtained

31

General Information

from the Academic Registrar, with whom applications close on 31 December. Applicants must be recommended by the head of the proposed honours school.

U ndergraduate AssistantshipsThe University offers about four Undergraduate Assistantships each year for award to students of the University who have completed the second academic year of their course with distinction and are intending to enrol in the third year.

An Undergraduate Assistantship is awarded for a period of one year. The holder of an award must enrol as a full-time student. He is, however, expected to participate to a small extent in the activities of the department in which the award is made. The amount of departmental work undertaken by Undergraduate Assistants does not exceed three hours per week.

The value of an Undergraduate Assistantship is the same as that of a Final Honours Year Scholarship and the same general conditions apply to both awards. Further information and application forms are available from the Academic Registrar with whom applications close on 31 December.

N ew South W ales D epartm ent of Education Teachers College ScholarshipsStudents holding Teachers College Scholarships of the New South Wales Department of Education and nominated by the Minister for Edu­cation for New South Wales may enrol at the Australian National University if they meet the resi­dential requirements of the New South Wales Department of Edu­cation.

Such students receive free tuition and a living allowance while training, and hold their scholarships subject to the Department's normal bond conditions. Details of these bond conditions and living allow­ances may be consulted in the brochure Teachers College Scholarships' issued by the New South Wales Department of Edu­cation. After graduation, students will be required to attend another institution for a further period of twelve months to complete their professional training. Further information may be obtained from the Academic Registrar or from the Officer-in-Charge, Teachers College Scholarships Section, NSW Department of Education, Blackfriars Street, Chippendale, NSW 2008.

U niversity Scholarships in the ACTA number of scholarships (cur­rently twenty) known as University Scholarships in the ACT is awarded annually by the Department of Edu­cation and Science on the results of the New South Wales Higher School Certificate Examination. Scholarships are available only to the children of Canberra residents who have been educated at Canberra schools, but under cer­tain circumstances the children of Canberra residents who have been educated at schools other than in Canberra are also eligible.

The scholarships cover payment of tuition and other compulsory fees for an approved course and provide a living allowance of $200 per annum. Further information may be obtained from the Student Assist­ance Branch, Department of Education and Science, Phillip Offices, Phillip, ACT 2606.

32

Scholarships and Financial Assistance

POSTGRADUATES CHOLARSHIPS

Ampol ScholarshipThe Ampol Scholarship is available for award to a student who has completed the course for the pass degree of Bachelor of Science or the degree of Bachelor of Science with honours in any Australian university.

The purpose of the scholarship is to assist a student to undertake a further year of study in the field of geology at the Australian National University. The scholarship is valued at $1,200 and is tenable for one year. The University may supplement the allowance of a scholar enrolled for the degree of master.

Further information may be obtained from the Academic Registrar.

Australian National University Research Scholarships for the Degree of Doctor of PhilosophyEach year the University offers about one hundred scholarships for award to persons wishing to study for the degree of Doctor of Philos­ophy in the Institute of Advanced Studies and the School of General Studies. Applications are invited by advertisement in the press and notification to universities.

A scholarship is awarded initially for two years, subject to satis­factory progress, but normally will be extended for the whole period of the course, usually three years. The course for the degree of Doctor of Philosophy requires the submission of a thesis.

The present basic value of a scholarship is $2,710 per annum tax free. A married scholar without

children whose wife is unemployed may apply for an extra $585 per annum. Married scholars with dependent children receive $825 per annum for the first child and $240 per annum for each other child. For scholars with appropriate qualifications in medicine the basic allowance is $3,900 per annum, but additional allowances are restricted to $1,065 per annum. Scholars are exempt from University fees. Fares to and from Canberra are paid and assistance with housing is given to scholars whenever pos­sible.

Applications should preferably be made in January, April or Sep­tember, but consideration is also given to those made at other times. Further information may be obtained from the Academic Registrar.

Australian National University M asters Degree ScholarshipsThe University offers about twenty scholarships each year to persons proceeding by research and thesis to a degree of master in the Faculties of Arts, Asian Studies, Economics, Law, and Science. Scholars may also proceed by course work to the degrees of Master of Economics and Master of Agricultural Development Economics, and by a combination of course work and research to a degree of master in the departments of English, Linguistics, Psychology and Sociology.

Applicants are expected to have graduated with first class or upper second class honours from a recognised university. Final year students are eligible to apply.

Scholarships are awarded for a period of one year to students proceeding to the degree of master

33

General Information

in Economics, Law or Science, and may, in special circumstances, be extended for a limited period. They are awarded for an initial period of one year to students proceeding to the degree of master in Arts or Asian Studies, and may, subject to satisfactory progress, be extended for a period of up to twelve months.

Scholarship holders receive a living allowance of $2,485 per annum tax free. Married scholars are paid additional allowances on the same basis as those granted to scholars proceeding to the degree of Doctor of Philosophy. Scholars are exempt from University fees and a contribution is made towards fares within Australia.

Applications for Masters Degree Scholarships close on 31 October each year. Subject to the availability of scholarships, applications sub­mitted at other times will be considered. Further information may be obtained from the Academic Registrar.

C om m onw ealth Postgraduate Research AwardsEach year the Commonwealth Government makes available a large number of awards (700 for 1 971) for full-time postgraduate research, normally leading to the degree of master and/or the degree of Doctor of Philosophy at an Australian university. Applicants must be permanently resident in Australia, but this does not exclude Australians temporarily resident abroad.

Preference is given by the Uni­versity to students who will be enrolling for the degree of Doctor of Philosophy. Applicants for Aus­tralian National University Research Scholarships for the degree of

Doctor of Philosophy are auto­matically considered for Common­wealth Postgraduate Research Awards. Students offered Common­wealth Postgraduate Research Awards are normally paid the same allowances as recipients of the University's scholarships. A scholar­ship will normally be extended for the whole period of the approved course, usually three years.

Applications for Commonwealth Postgraduate Research Awards close on 31 October each year. Further information may be obtained from the Academic Registrar.

C om m onw ealth Postgraduate Course AwardsIn 1 971 for the first time the Commonwealth Government made available one hundred awards for full-time postgraduate study in courses leading to the degree of master at Australian universities.The scholarships, known as Commonwealth Postgraduate Course Awards, are tenable for one academic year and provide a living allowance, tuition and other compulsory fees, and fares to and from Canberra. In 1971 the living allowance was $2,600.

Commonwealth Postgraduate Course Awards are administered by the New South Wales State Office of the Department of Education and Science. Applications for 1972 awards will close on 30 September 1971. Further information may be obtained from the Academic Registrar or from the Regional Director, New South Wales State Office, Department of Education and Science, Lasalle Building,70 Castlereagh Street, Sydney,NSW, 2000.

34

Scholarships and Financial Assistance

University Travelling ScholarshipsThe University is offering two University Travelling Scholarships in 1972 for competition among graduates of the University who have completed within two years of the closing date for applications the requirements for a degree of bachelor with first class honours or the requirements for a degree of master. Not more than one scholar­ship may be awarded in any one year to the holder of a master's degree.

The scholarships are offered to enable the successful applicants to continue their studies abroad at universities or other educational institutions approved by the University.

The scholarships are tenable for two years in the first instance but may be renewed for a third year.The value of each scholarship is $2,800 per annum, all compulsory fees and a grant of inot more than $1,000 towards fare:s, payable in such manner as the Vice-Chancellor determines.

Applications close on 31 December. Further information may be obtained from the Academic Registrar.

S TU D EN T LOAN FU N DA loan fund, run by the Students' Representative Council, is available to students in the School of General Studies who are in need of monet­ary assistance. Money from this fund is distributed by a committee con­sisting of two members of the University academic staff and a member of the Students' Repre­sentative Council. All meetings of this Committee are strictly confi­dential and any papers submitted by

applicants are returned to them in due course.

The conditions and amounts of loans are flexible to cater for the needs of individual students.

Further information and applica­tion forms may be obtained from the Students' Representative Council office on the ground floor of the University Union.

The Australian National University Research Students' Association also operates a loan fund for its mem­bers.

V IC E-C H A N C E LLO R ’S D ISCRETIONARY FUNDThe Vice-Chancellor has at his disposal a Discretionary Fund from which he can make grants, or more usually loans, to staff and students of the University who are suffering particular financial hardship.

Inquiries and applications should be made through the Academic Registrar to the Vice-Chancellor.

35

Student Facilities

S TU D EN T RESIDENCEStudents can be assisted to find suitable residential accommodation in Canberra but the University can­not guarantee a place for each applicant.Accommodation is available in:(a) University controlled hails of residence(b) Affiliated colleges(c) University approved private lodgings.Applications for admission to a hall of residence or affiliated college should be made to the Academic Registrar on the prescribed form which is available from Student Administration. Applications should be lodged by 1 5 December each year.

Bruce Hall, Burton Hall and Garran HallThese halls of residence are situated on the University site at the western end of University Avenue and along Daley Road. They are specially designed to meet the needs of students and are equipped with single study-bedrooms providing accommodation for both men and women as follows:Bruce Hall: 216 students Burton Hall: 244 students Garran Hall: 230 students.Each of the three halls is in the charge of a warden and governing body assisted by deputy wardens and sub-wardens. The halls also accommodate a number of teaching staff of the University.

Residence fees, exclusive of vaca­tions, payable at Bruce Hall, Burton Hall and Garran Hall are at present as follows:First Residence Term: $245 Second Residence Term: $1 95

Third Residence Term: $245.Residence fees become due and

payable on the first day of each residence term and must be paid within two weeks of the commence­ment of each residence term. In addition, on first accepting a place at a hall of residence, a registration fee of $15, and a deposit of $20 (which is returnable on finally leaving the hall) are required. Stu­dents readmitted to a hall of residence will be required to pay an advance of $30 on their residence fees for the first term, the payment to be made not later than 13 January 1972. The advance will be forfeited should a student not come into residence.

Students in residence in a Uni­versity hall are required to become members of the Bruce Hall, Burton Hall or Garran Hall Junior Common Room and to possess an approved undergraduate gown which can be obtained from the hall.

Affi l ia ted collegesTwo affiliated colleges have been established on behalf of the Roman Catholic Church on the University site. John XXIII College has places for 300 men students in single study-bedrooms. Ursula College has places for 200 women students.

Further information may be obtained from the Master, John XXIII College or the Principal,Ursula College.

A third affiliated college, Burgmann College, jointly spon­sored by six other Australian churches, has recently been established. This residence provides accommodation for 250 men and women students. Further informa­tion may be obtained from the Master of Burgmann College.

36

Student Facilities

Private lodgingsEach year the University seeks for students private lodgings which it inspects and approves. Information concerning such accommodation is available from the Accommodation Officer, Student Administration.Good lodgings providing a single room and full board cost approxi­mately $20 per week.

THE LIBRARYThe University Library has three main collections-those of the Institute of Advanced Studies, the School of General Studies and the Division of Asian Studies.

The Advanced Studies collection contains some 285,000 volumes, housed mainly in the R. G. Menzies Building with branch libraries in the John Curtin School of Medical Research, the Research School of Physical Sciences, the Research School of Chemistry and at Mount Stromlo Observatory.

The Asian Studies collection (about 90,000 volumes) contains books mainly in Chi nese and Japanese and is housed on the first floor of the R. G. Menzies Building.

These libraries are primarily for the use of academic staff and graduate students but under­graduates from second-year honours onwards are permitted to use them.

The General Studies collection, housed in the J. B. Chifley Building, comprises 175,000 books and carries subscriptions to some 2,400 periodicals which cover all aspects of the work of the Faculties of Arts, Economics and Science. The Library holdings have largely been selected to meet the needs of undergraduates in the existing faculties, but increasing emphasis is being placed on

developing bibliographical resources and research material in the human­ities. The Law library (of over 30,000 volumes) is separately housed in the Law School.

Students needing more informa­tion about the various library collections should consult the Student Library Adviser, who has been appointed to help students with library problems.

The Library provides the quiet atmosphere, comfortable accom­modation and necessary books to enable a student to pursue his studies. Provided he observes the rules of the Library, a student may refer to any of the books in the Library or borrow almost any of them, and he may use the Library as his study centre. A student may also take his own books into the Library and read them there.

All students, particularly those in arts, economics and law, will find that in the course of their studies they will spend a considerable amount of their time in the Library.It is therefore vital that a student should understand how the Library works so that he may use it to the best advantage. A student may not count his university education to be complete unless he has, by the end of his course, acquired an intimate knowledge of the services which a library offers and an ability to use these services with profit.

During Orientation Week new stu­dents are introduced to the resources and facilities of the Library by formal lectures, conducted tours and by the printed guide, copies of which may be obtained at any time on application at the circulation desk. This introduction is followed later in first term by lectures on the general use of the

37

General Information

catalogue and an introduction to reference and bibliographical aids in the various subjects.

The School of General Studies Building of the University Library is open during the following hours in term time:Monday to Friday: 8.30 am

to 11 pmSaturday: 10 am to 10 pm Sunday: 10 am to 6 pmNotification of any modification of these hours is posted on Library notice-boards.

UNIVERSITY UNIONThe Union is the community centre of the University and provides a common meeting ground and amenities for students and staff in their daily life on the campus. The Union operates under an interim constitution approved by the Council of the University and is governed by the Board of Management. The Secretary, Mr E. C. de Totth, is the chief executive officer of the Board and is responsible for the day to day running of the Union.

The Union encourages the self- directed activities of various clubs and of the general membership, thereby attempting to give ample opportunity for the free development of persons as well as intellects. Located in Ellery Circuit between University Avenue and the Chan­cery, it provides the following recreational facilities: a reading room with daily papers, periodicals and student publications; a games room with two billiard and two table tennis tables; a music practice room with a piano. Members and clubs may also practise their own instruments. General common room facilities are available in the upstairs

coffee lounge; a television room; a meeting room, accommodating approximately eighty people; a committee room available for serious committee work; societies lockers are available on the lower ground floor, and club secretaries may obtain these through the SRC; a limited number of individual lockers is also available for hire from the Union office.

On the ground floor a refectory with seating for 250 provides morning and afternoon teas, lunches and evening meals. On the first floor there is a lounge/common room accommodating approximately fifty people, and a bar with a seating capacity of about eighty, operates during times determined by the Board with the concurrence of the Vice-Chancellor. During week-day lunch times (12 noon-2 pm) beer, wine, cider and sherry are served there to members over 18 years of age and to their guests, provided that they consume a bona fide meal. After 5 pm the bar serves all types of liquor to eligible persons. This service closes at 7.30 pm between Monday and Thursday and at 10 pm on Fridays. On Saturdays there is no lunch-time service in the bar.It opens at 5 pm and closes at 10 pm, except during functions when service is extended until midnight. On some week-ends the Union features Club Nights with dance music or other entertainment in this area. The bar does not operate on Sundays or at other times when the building is normally closed.

A milkbar close to the main entrance operates at all times when the Union is open, including Saturday and Sunday.

38

Student Facilities

The Union shop stocks second­hand books, stationery, greeting cards, souvenirs, ANU sweat shirts, stamps, dissecting sets, geological hammers and caters for other needs such as toilet articles, cosmetics, cigarettes, records and dry cleaning. A gown hiring service is available. Cigarettes and confectionery are available both at the milkbar and in the Union shop.

The main rooms are available for hire by clubs, societies and other University organisations. Bookings must be made at the Union office. The hiring of premises for social functions, involving the consump­tion of liquor or otherwise, is subject to the Secretary's approval and the payment of a deposit. Social functions during which liquor is to be consumed must be subject to the issue of a written Instrument by the Secretary, approved by the Board, permitting variations of certain clauses of the Union's Liquor Order. Organisers and hirers are responsible for conduct at functions.

A copy of the interim constitution of the Union and copies of the House and Games Rules authorised by the constitution are available to members on request at the Union office.

Also located in the University Union are, the University Co­operative Bookshop Ltd., the AUS Travel office and the premises of the student newspaper, Woroni, on the lower ground floor; the Stu­dents' Representative Council office, on the ground floor at the end of the corridor displaying students' notice- boards and the Sports Union office, on the ground floor, opposite the Students' Representative Council office.

S TU D E N T SERVICES

Dean of StudentsThe Dean of Students, who is a full-time member of the academic staff, is appointed by the Council. The Dean is responsible for the coordinated functioning and development of the following stu­dent welfare services:{a) a University Health Service(b) a University Counselling Service including a Careers and Appoint­ments office, Efficient Reading Courses and Efficient English(c) assistance with lodgings.The Dean also maintains liaison with the Chaplains to the University and with student activities not con­trolled directly by the University. These include the University Union and student associations. The Dean is concerned generally with all matters connected with the welfare of the student body.

University Health ServiceThe University Health Service is staffed by a Director, Dr S. B. Furnass, a second doctor, Dr Margaret Wallner, and a nursing sister, Sister P. Sorby, and is located in the south wing of the Copland Building. Any student, part-time or full-time, under­graduate or postgraduate may seek advice on health problems without charge, consultations being com­pletely confidential as between any patient and doctor.

Clinical investigation and treat­ment of established illness is available at the Health Centre although the main emphasis is on preventive medicine and on health education in the sense of enabling students to make the most of their personal potential while at the

39

General Information

university. An outpatients Clinic is held from 9.1 5 am to 10.30 am on Mondays to Fridays, a Sports Clinic, in the Kingsley Street Hall from 8.30 am to 9 am on Mondays and an Inoculation Clinic, including advice for overseas visits, on Tuesdays 2.30 pm to 3.30 pm. Consultation is otherwise by appointment, (telephones 49 3598 and 49 4098 between 9 am and 5 pm), except in emergency.Fitness testing and physiotherapy treatment are also by special arrangement.

Students are advised to be covered by a medical and hospital insurance scheme in the event of the need for admission to the Canberra Hospital or for specialist referral.

University Counselling ServiceThe University Counselling Service, located in the south wing of the Copland Building, is available to both undergraduate and post­graduate students of the University, and members of staff. Appointments to see Mr J. E. Gough, Mrs M. Evans or Mr D. H. Judge may be made between 9 am and 5 pm in room 229 or by telephoning 49 2442.For the convenience of part-time students a counsellor will be avail­able for evening appointments when necessary.

In addition to discussing study methods, adjustment to academic life and research, or personal diffi­culties, the service will offer from time to time group sessions dealing with study skills and related issues.

Careers and Appointments OfficeA Careers and Appointments officer, Mr S. J. Rawling, in the Counselling

Service is available to advise students about job opportunities open to them after graduation. Appointments to see him may be made in room 229 or by telephon­ing 49 2442.

Students may obtain help in finding part-time and vacation employment from Mrs S. Krai whose office is on the ground floor of the southern wing of the Copland Building, telephone 49 3674.

Efficient Reading CoursesThese are offered to students during first and second term at the Efficient Reading Laboratory at present situated in the Kingsley Street cottage. The courses are conducted by Mrs. L. Rose who provides instruction which aims at increasing speed, comprehension and flexi­bility of approach to reading tasks. Registration for reading courses may be made at the University Counselling Service or the Efficient Reading Laboratory.

Efficient English TutorialsGroup tutorials and individual tutorial assistance in English expres­sion are offered throughout the year. Any student who feels the need for help with his English expression or style of writing, or who is recommended by his lecturers to seek such help, may attend courses or receive private tuition free of charge. The courses are conducted by Mr B. Palfrey, room 227, Copland Building, telephone 49 3661.

STUDENT ORGANISATIONIn addition to the formal courses of study there are opportunities for the student to be active in cultural,

40

Student Facilities

social, religious and student- political groups and to take part in organised sport.

An undergraduate or a non-degree student is required to become a member of the Australian National University Students' Association, of the Sports Union and the University Union. A student enrolled in the Legal Workshop, for pre­liminary or qualifying studies for the degree of master, as a candidate for the degree of master or the degree of Doctor of Philosophy, is required to pay a general services fee which covers membership of the Research Students' Association, the University Union and the Sports Union.

Students enrolled for one or more units prescribed for the degree of Bachelor of Laws are required to pay a compulsory annual fee of $2.00 for membership of the Law Society.

The Australian National Univer­sity Students' AssociationThe Students' Association affords a recognised means of communica­tion between the students and the various other sections of the Univer­sity, including the Council. It aims to promote the welfare of the student body in social life and encourages and actively supports over twenty-five clubs and societies such as the debating club, faculty and departmental societies, religious and political societies.

The Students' Representative Council is a small body of students elected from and by the members of the Students' Association. It acts on behalf of the Students' Associa- in all matters. It aims to maintain the place of student-organised activities in the School of General

Studies and seeks to improve living and working conditions for the students generally.

At the beginning of each academic year the Students' Representative Council organises an Orientation Week program which is designed to introduce new students to the University. During the year it arranges for the periodical publica­tion of a student newspaper, Woroni, which is staffed and managed by students.

The Students' Association is a constituent member of the Australian Union of Students, a union which brings student representatives of all Australian universities together to discuss matters of common interest.

Office bearers of the Students' Association, 1 971:President: Mr W. Wright Vice-President: Mr M. Lamb Secretary: Mr R. Refshauge Treasurer: Mr L. Karavis

Related to the SRC is the Cultural Affairs Committee which promotes and co-ordinates cultural activity on-campus through its affiliated clubs. Enquiries should be made at the Cultural Affairs Committee office, lower ground floor, Union Building.

The Sports UnionSport in the University is organised and encouraged by the Sports Union, through its elected execu­tive, the Sports Council. All students, on enrolling and paying fees, auto­matically become members of the Sports Union and are entitled to join any Sports Club affiliated with it. These are: Rugby Union, National Football, Women's Hockey, Men's Hockey, Soccer, Cricket, Ski,Athletic (Cross Country), Tennis,

41

General Information

Squash, Baseball, Men's and Women's International Rules Basket­ball, Women's Basketball, Boat, Bush-walking, Caving, Climbing, Golf, Judo, Rifle, Sailing, Table Tennis. Clubs take part in local competition and also send teams to intervarsity carnivals. The latter are organised by the Australian Univer­sities Sports Association to which the Australian National University Sports Union is affiliated.

The day-to-day affairs of the Sports Union are the responsibility of a fu ll-tim e Executive Secretary,Mr Neil Gray.

The Sports Union office is located in the University Union.

Office bearers of the Sports Council for 1 971:President: Mr A. Proctor Vice-President: Mr E. Boyce Treasurer: Dr M. Aston

and reference titles and, in addition, a representative range of interest to staff and students. Any title not carried in stock can be ordered.

On payment of a $5 fee a student may join the Co-operative Bookshop and receive a dividend at the end of the year which in 1 970 was 18 per cent on the year's purchases. An academic discount is made to non-members of the Co-operative among the student body.

Membership of the University Co-operative Bookshop Ltd, which operates in all universities in New South Wales (including Canberra College of Advanced Education) as well as in the Australian National University, now totals over 93,000.

Hours of operation are 9 am to 5 pm Monday to Friday. During term the Bookshop remains open until 6.30 pm on Tuesday.

U n i v e r s i t y C o - o p e r a t i v e B o o k s h o pThe University Co-operative Book­shop Ltd is located on the lower ground floor of the University Union and carries all recommended texts

B A N K I N G A N D P O S T A L

F A C I L I T I E SBanking and postal facilities are located adjacent to the Asian Studies Building. Hours of operation are:

Commercial Banking Company of Sydney Ltd

10 am to 3 pm Monday to Thursday 10 am to 5 pm Friday.

Commonwealth Trading Bank of Australia

10 am to 3 pm Monday to Thursday 10 am to 5 pm Friday.

Commonwealth Savings Bank of Australia

10 am to 3 pm Monday to Thursday 10 am to 5 pm Friday.

Bank of New South Wales 10 am to 3 pm Monday to Thursday 10 am to 5 pm Friday.

National Bank of Australasia Ltd 12 noon to 3 pm Monday to Friday

Australia and New Zealand Bank Ltd 12.30 pm to 3 pm Monday to Friday

University Post Office 9 am to 5 pm Monday to Friday 9 am to 11 am Saturday

There is a mail box outside the Post Office. 42

Examinations

Examination entriesAll students enrolled in the School for a degree course, a diploma course or for a single unit are expected, except where otherwise stated, to sit for degree or diploma examinations during the academic year. Students are not required to submit entry forms to attempt examinations. Entry to first semes­ter, second semester and annual examinations is subject to the approval of the appropriate Head of Department.

Advice about eligibility to attempt first semester examinations and if necessary the level at which each examination may be attempted will be posted on a notice-board outside the J. B. Chifley Building of the University Library during the month of June. The advice about eligibility to attempt the second semester and annual examinations will be forwarded to each student's term address during the month of August.

A student may be excluded from sitting for an examination if he has not attended lectures or performed practical or other work as prescribed by the department concerned.

A student who cancels his enrol­ment in a unit or subject after the last day of second term will normally be regarded as having failed in that unit or subject.

A student who cancels his enrolment in a first semester unit after 31 May (Science Faculty) 12 May (Economics Faculty) or after 30 September (Science Faculty)4 September (Economics Faculty) for a second semester unit will be regarded as having failed in that unit.

The Examinations (School of General Studies) Rules are set out

at the end of this chapter.

Examination t im e-tab leA preliminary time-table, in draft form for the first semester examina­tions will be posted on a notice- board outside the J. B. Chifley Building of the University Library during May. A similar preliminary time-table for the second semester and annual examinations will be posted on a notice-board outside the J. B. Chifley Building of the University Library as soon as possible after the commencement of third term.

Each preliminary time-table is subject to alteration and any clashes or inconsistencies should be reported to the Examinations Section. This time-table will remain on the notice-board for approximately ten days when it will be replaced with a final time-table. Copies will be available from the J. B. Chifley Building of the University Library, University Union Building and the Student Administration office.

Examination results Students are reminded that exam­ination results are determined not only on their performance at written examinations but also on the satis­factory completion of essays, class exercises and practical work as prescribed by the department concerned.

The official examination results, excluding any failure in a subject or unit, will be posted on notice- boards at the J. B. Chifley Building of the University Library as soon as possible after the conclusion of the first semester examinations and the annual and second semester examinations. A 'Notifica­tion of Academic Results' form

43

General Information

showing the academic results in all subjects which the student attempted will be mailed to each student at approximately the same time as the results are published on the notice-boards.

Conferring of degreesEach student who completes a

degree course at the time the examination results are published will have that degree conferred at the next appropriate ceremony unless he specifically makes an election to the Academic Registrar to have the degree conferred in absentia.

Degree conferring ceremonies are usually held during the first and third terms of the academic year. Information about each ceremony is sent to the last known address of each graduand in sufficient time for him to indicate whether or not he will be present at the ceremony.

Further information about the conferring of a degree can be obtained from the Student Admin­istration office.

Academic progress Rules dealing with the academic progress of students are published in the Handbook after the Courses of Study Rules for each faculty. Students enrolling should make themselves conversant with these rules. Copies of the working rules governing academic progress in the faculties of Arts and Economics, are available from the sub-deans of these faculties.

Examinations (School of General Studies) RulesPart 1-General1.(1) In these Rules, unless the 44

contrary intention appears-(a) 'subject' includes a unit within the meaning of any Courses of Study Rules; and(b ) a reference to the Head of the Department shall be read as includ­ing a reference to the Dean of the Faculty in which there are no departments.(2) For the purposes of these Rules, where an examination is required to be taken in several parts, each part shall be deemed to be a separate examination.2. (1) A Faculty may, by resolution, delegate all or any of its powers or functions under these Rules with respect to an examination in a sub­ject to the Head of the Department responsible for that subject.(2) A delegation under this rule is revocable by resolution of the Faculty and does not prevent the exercise of a power or function by the Faculty.

Part II—Examinations in subjects for Bachelors' Degrees or for Diplomas3. This part applies to examinations in subjects for the degree of bachelor or for diplomas.4. An examination in a subject to which this part applies, shall, subject to any directions of the Board of the School of General Studies, be held at such time and place, and in such manner, as the Faculty responsible for the teaching of that subject directs.5. (1) Subject to this rule, a Faculty shall permit a student who —(a) has enrolled for a subject in that Faculty(b) has complied with the appro­priate Courses of Study Rules of that Faculty with respect to that subject

Examinations

(c) has attended lectures and classes in that subject as required by the the Faculty; and(d) has performed such practical or other work in that subject as the Faculty requires,to sit for an examination in that subject upon making an application! in accordance with this rule,

t (2) An application for permission to sit for an examination shall be made to the Academic Registrar, and be accompanied by any prescribed fee for the examination, not later than the last day of the second term in a year.

t(3) An application that is not accompanied by the prescribed fee shall, for the purposes of this rule, be deemed not to have been made. (4) A Faculty may refuse a student permission to sit for an examination in a subject if the student has not paid the feesf prescribed for that subject.

t(5) Where a student fails to make an application within ihe time speci­fied in sub-rule (2) of this rule, the Faculty may permit him to sit for the examination if—(a) he makes the application accompanied by the prescribed fee before the examination is held(b ) he pays any additional pre­scribed fee; and(c) the Faculty is satisfied that the granting of permission to the student to sit for the examination will not interfere with the arrangements for holding the examination.6. (1) There shall be not less than two examiners for an examination in a subject, who shall be appointed by the Faculty concerned on the recommendation of the Head of the Department concerned.(2) The Head of the Department concerned or, if he is not one of the

examiners, one of the examiners appointed by him, shall be the chair­man of the examiners.(3) The examiners shall classify the results of an examination in accord­ance with the appropriate Courses of Study Rules.(4) The results of an examination shall be reported by the chairman of the examiners to the Head of the Department concerned, who shall forward them to the Faculty con­cerned for its approval.(5) After a Faculty has approved the results of an examination, the Dean of the Faculty shall transmit the results to the Academic Registrar for publication.7. (1) A Faculty may, in special circumstances, permit a student who appliedt to sit for an examination in a subject but failed to attend the examination to sit for a special examination in that subject.(2) A student seeking such permis­sion shall lodge an application with the Academic Registrar in writing within seventy-two hours after the time fixed for the commencement of the examination that he failed to attend or within such further time as the Faculty, in special circum­stances, allows.(3) An application under the last preceding sub-rule shall be accom­panied by a statement in writing of the circumstances that prevented the student attending the examina­tion and any evidence in support of the application.

8. (1) A student who considers that his studies during a year in respect of a subject have been adversely affected by illness or other cause, or who is adversely affected by illness

tAmendment pending. See page 43 for Entry to Examinations.

45

General Information

or other cause in the course of an examination in that subject, may furnish a statement of the circum­stances in writing to the Academic Registrar, together with any medical or other evidence, before the examination is held, or may inform the supervisor at any time in the course of the examination.(2) Where a student so informs the supervisor during the course of an examination, the supervisor shall notify the Academic Registrar accordingly.(3) Upon receiving such notifica­tion the Academic Registrar shall furnish a report to the Dean of the Faculty concerned, who shall inform the examiners and the Faculty of the details of the report.(4) The examiners may take the report into account in examining the student in the subject.(5) The Faculty may permit the student to sit for a special examina­tion in the subject.

9 . (1) A candidate at an examina­tion shall not communicate with the examiners concerning the examination.(2) After the results of an examina­tion have been published, a candi­date at the examination who desires to obtain information concerning the results obtained by him at the examination shall address any inquiries or communications for that purpose to the Academic Registrar.

Part Ill-E xam inations fo r degree of m aster10 . (1) Where it is provided by any rules made under the Enrolment, Courses and Degrees Statute that a candidate for the degree of master shall submit a thesis or perform any other work, the appointment of examiners for that thesis or work 46

shall be made by the faculty concerned on the recommendation of the Head of the Department concerned.(2) The Head of the Department concerned or, if he is not one of the examiners, one of the examiners appointed by him, shall be the chairman of the examiners.

11 . (1) The examiners shall examine the thesis or other work and shall make separate reports, which shall be furnished by the chairman of the examiners to the Head of the Department.(2) The examiners may consult or communicate with each other before making their reports and shall state in their reports whether they have so consulted or communicated.(3) The Head of the Department shall forward the examiners' reports to the faculty and, if the examiners' reports differ as to the result of the examination, shall inform the Faculty of that fact.(4) Where the examiners' reports differ, the faculty may invite the examiners to consult, or consult further, with the object of resolving their differences or submitting a joint report, or may take such other action as it thinks fit.

12 . (1) Unless the faculty con­cerned otherwise determines, a thesis or other work submitted for the degree of master shall be in the English language.(2) Except with the permission of the faculty concerned, a candidate shall furnish to the Academic Registrar three typewritten or printed copies of his thesis or other work, one of which shall be lodged by the faculty with the Librarian after it has been accepted for the degree for which it was submitted.

(3) The form of typewriting or printing in which copies of a thesis or other work are to be furnished shall be as determined by the Board of the School of General Studies.

13. Where it is provided by any rules made under the Enrolment, Courses and Degrees Statute that a candidate for the degree of master shall be examined for that degree in a manner other than by the sub­mission of a thesis or other work, or shall be examined on the subject of his thesis or other work, the examination shall be held at such time and place as the faculty con­cerned, subject to any directions of the Board of the School of General Studies, determines.

Prizes

The following prizes are awarded to students of the University:

The Alliance Franpaise de Canberra PrizesThe Alliance Francaise de Canberra provides annual prizes for award to students who have most distin­guished themselves in each year of the French course and who has reached a sufficiently high standard to merit the award. The value of the prize is $10 in the first, second and third years, and $20 in the fourth year.

Ansett A ir and Space Law PrizeAnsett Transport Industries Ltd pro­vides an annual prize for award to the student who achieves the best result in the Annual Examination of Air and Space Law. The value of the prize is $50 and, if the scholar agrees to undertake a research pro­ject arranged by the Faculty of Law with Ansett Transport Industries Ltd in relation to air or space law or the air transport industry, such free air travel to assist the prizewinner with the project as the Company may determine.

Australian-Am erican Association Prize fo r American StudiesThe Australian-American Associa­tion provides an annual prize of $50 for the student who achieves the best results in American Literature and in each alternative year American History. In 1972 the prize will be awarded for the best result in American Literature.

The Australian Capital Territory Bar Association Prize fo r EvidenceThe Australian Capital Territory Bar

47

General Information

Association provides an annual prize for award to the student in the Faculty of Law who achieves the best results in the Annual Examina­tion in Evidence. The value of the prize is determined annually by the Australian Capital Territory Bar Association (currently $40).

The A ustralian Institu te of Physics PrizeThe Australian Capital Territory Branch of the Australian Institute of Physics provides an annual prize of $21 for award to the student who achieves the best results in three Group B units in Physics in the Annual Examination.

The A ustralian Psychological Society PrizeThe Australian Psychological So­ciety presents an annual prize of $20 for award to the student who has pursued with most distinction the final honours year of the course in psychology.

A ustralian Society of A ccountants ' PrizesThe Australian Society of Account­ants has provided prizes for award to students enrolled in the subject of Accounting in any course leading to a degree of bachelor.The awards will be made on the following basis: to the student who, in taking the unit for the first time, achieves the best results in Account­ing I; to the student who, in taking the unit for the first time, achieves the best results in Accounting II; to the student who, in taking the semester unit for the first time, achieves the best results in Financial Accounting Theory; and to the student who, in taking the semester unit for the first time, achieves the

best results in Company Finance.

B. C. M eagher Prize fo r C om m onw ealth C onstitu tional LawThe Law Society of the Australian Capital Territory provides an annual prize of $100 for award to the student who achieves the best results in the subject of Common­wealth Constitutional Law. The prize is a memorial to Mr Bryan C. Meagher who held executive office in the Society over a number of years.

Canberra Association o f U niversity W om en PrizeThe Canberra Association of Uni­versity Women provides an annual prize of $50 for award to the most outstanding woman student who has completed the course for the degree of Bachelor of Arts (Asian Studies) with honours and who has also made a worthwhile contribution to university life during the course of her studies.

The CSR Chem icals PrizeCSR Chemicals Limited presents an annual prize of $100 for award to the student enrolled for the degree of Bachelor of Science with honours who obtains the best result in Chemistry.

The C om m onw ealth Forestry Bureau Book PrizeThe Commonwealth Forestry Bureau, Oxford, England, offers an annual prize for award to a student completing a Forestry course during the year and who is adjudged by the Department of Forestry to be outstanding by virtue of the stan­dard of proficiency attained, general approach to forestry and attitude of

48

Prizes

genuine enquiry to forestry matters in the broadest sense. The prize consists of forestry publications donated by the Bureau.

The Economic Society PrizesThe Canberra Branch of the Econ­omic Society of Australia and New Zealand provides two annual prizes at $50 each for the students achieving the best results in Economics II and Economics IV (Honours).

The Geological Society of Australia PrizeThe Commonwealth Territories Division of the Geological Society of Australia presents an annual prize of $50 for award to the stu­dent who achieves the best results in Geology A01 in the Annual Examination and intends to proceed to further studies in Geology.

The George Knowles M em oria l PrizeThe George Knowles Memorial Prize is awarded annually to the student proceeding to the degree of Bachelor of Laws who has done the best academic work in that year. The prize of approximately $21 is a memorial to Sir George Knowles who was a member of the Council of the Canberra University College from 1930 to 1946.

The Goethe Society PrizesThe Canberra Branch of the Australian Goethe Society provides annual prizes for award to students who have most distinguished them­selves in each year of the German Language and Literature course.The value of the prize is $10 in the first, second and third years and $20 in the fourth year.

The In s titu te Prize fo r Economic H istoryThe Department of Economic History, Institute of Advanced Studies, provides an annual prize of $50 for award to the student enrol­led in either Economic History II or Economic History III who sub­mits the best essay on a topic in Economic History nominated by the Professor of Economic History, School of General Studies.

The Lady Isaacs' PrizeThe Lady Isaacs' Prize is awarded annually to the student who achieves the best result in History IA in the Annual Examination.The prize commemorates the work of Sir Isaac and Lady Isaacs. Its value is approximately $12.

The Law Society of the Australian Capital T errito ry Prize fo r C ontractsThe Law Society of the Australian Capital Territory provides an annual prize of $50 for award to the stu­dent who achieves the best result in the Annual Examination of Con­tracts.

The Leslie H oldsw orth Allen M em oria l PrizeThe Leslie Holdsworth Allen Memorial Prize is awarded annually to the student who achieves the best results in the final examina­tions in English IV and whose work is of outstanding merit. The prize of $30 is a memorial to Dr L. H. Allen, the first Head of the Department of English in the Canberra University College.

The M arie Halford M em oria l PrizeThe Business and Professional

49

General Information

Women's Club of Canberra provides an annual prize of $40, known as the Marie Halford Memorial Prize, for award to the woman student who has in that year pursued with most distinction any one of the units offered in the Department of English. The prize is not normally awarded to the same student on more than one occasion.

Permanent Trustee Company (Canberra) Limited PrizesThe Permanent Trustee Company (Canberra) Limited provides two annual prizes of $100 each. One prize is for award to the student who most distinguishes himself in the Annual Examination in Trusts and the other to the student who most distinguishes himself in the Annual Examination in Property II.

Priscilla Fairfield Bok PrizeThe Priscilla Fairfield Bok Prize is awarded annually to the woman student who, in completing the requirements for the pass degree of Bachelor of Science, achieves the best results in Group C units offered by any department in the Faculty of Science, with preference being given to the physical sciences. The value of the prize (currently $64) is the annual income of a trust fund established to commemorate the work of Professor Bart J. Bok and his wife, Dr Priscilla F. Bok, in the Department of Astronomy from 1957 to 1966.

The Professional Officers' Association PrizesThe Canberra Branch of the Pro­fessional Officers' Association provides two annual prizes, each of $20, for award to outstanding first- year students who are proceeding

to the degree of Bachelor of Science. One of the prizes is awarded in the units Pure or Applied Mathematics I, Physics A01 and Chemistry A01 in rotation; the other is awarded in the units Botany A01, Geology A01 and Zoology A01 in rotation.

The Pure M athem atics PrizesTwo prizes are awarded each year in the Department of Pure Mathe­matics to full-time students who achieve the best examination results in Pure Mathematics III (Honours) and Pure Mathematics IV (Honours). The value of the prizes is $20 and $30, respectively.

Rachel Dorph M em oria l PrizeThe Rachel Dorph Memorial Prize is awarded each year to the student who, enrolled for English IA as part of a course of study for a degree, submits the best essay on a topic prescribed as part of the requirements for that unit. The value of the prize is approximately $ 10 .

The Ramsay PrizeRamsay Surgical Limited provides an annual prize of $21 for award to the best student completing a pass degree in the field of biological sciences.

The Royal Australian Chemical Institute PrizeThe Canberra Section of the Royal Australian Chemical Institute provides an annual prize of $20 for award to the student who achieves the best results in Group C units of chemistry.

50

Prizes

The Royal Institute of Public Administration PrizeThe Australian Capital Territory Group of the Royal Institute of Public Administration provides an annual prize of $21 for award to the student who achieves the best honours result in Public Policy and Administration.

Schlich Mem oria l Trust PrizeThe University is responsible for the administration of a trust fund collected by public subscription in memory of Sir William Schlich, a pioneer of British forestry, from which a gold medal is awarded annually to the student who has completed in that year the require­ments for admission to the degree of Bachelor of Science (Forestry) with honours and who shows the most promise in forestry.

The Shell Company PrizesThe Shell Company of Australia Ltd presents two prizes each year for award to students proceeding to a degree of bachelor, one in the Faculty of Economics and the other in the Faculty of Science. A prize of $50 is awarded to the student who has pursued with most dis­tinction the first year of the course for the degree of Bachelor of Economics; a prize of $63 is awarded to the student who, in the year in which he completes the requirements for the pass degree of Bachelor of Science, in the opinion of the Faculty of Science achieves the best result of those students enrolled in the Departments of Chemistry, Physics and Theore­tical Physics.

The Statistical Societyof Australia (Canberra Branch)PrizeThe Statistical Society of Australia (Canberra Branch) provides an annual prize of $30 for award to the student who achieves the best results in Statistics III Honours in the Annual Examination.

The Supreme Court Judges' PrizeThe judges of the Supreme Court of the Australian Capital Territory provide an annual prize (currently $100) for award to the honours student in the Faculty of Law who has achieved the most distinction on graduation.

The Tillyard PrizeThe Tillyard Prize is awarded to a student who has completed a course for a degree of bachelor with honours and whose work, personal qualities and contribution to univ­ersity life have been outstanding.A fund to provide this prize was established by the University Asso­ciation of Canberra to serve as a memorial to the late Dr Robin John Tillyard and his widow, Mrs Patricia Tillyard. The value of the prize is approximately $50.

The Timbind Util isation PrizeTimber Industries Pty Ltd provides an annual prize of $50 for award to the student who achieves the best result in the field of forest utilisation. In addition a medal is awarded to the prizewinner.

The Trustees Executors and Agency Company (Canberra) Limited Prize fo r TaxationThe Trustees Executors and Agency Company (Canberra) Limited

51

General Information

provides an annual prize of $100 for award to the student who in a first attempt achieves the best results in Taxation.

The United Commercial Travel­lers' Association PrizeThe United Commercial Travellers' Association of Australia provides an annual prize of $50 for award to the student who achieves the best results in Economics III.

The University MedalThe University awards a medal to recognise the top candidate or candidates for the degree of bachelor, in departments or faculties of the University, provided they obtain first class honours of sufficient distinction supported by a distinguished academic record. A notation is made on the degree certificate of the graduate, who also receives an award of an amount of money to a value determined by the Council from time to time.

The W. B. Clarke Prize in GeologyAn annual sum of $50 is subscribed by members of the staff of the Department of Geology in com­memoration of the pioneer geo­logical work carried out in Australia by the Reverend W. B. Clarke.The prize is awarded to the student who achieves the best results in at least three Group B units in geology and intends to include further study of geology in his course.

52

Faculty o f Arts

ContentsIT h e A rts D egrees 55

D e ta ils o f u n its a n d b o o k lis ts

A c c o u n t in g and P u b lic F in a n ce 57

C lass ics 57

C o m p u te r S c ie n c e 65

E c o n o m ic H is to ry 65

E c o n o m ic s 6 6

E ng lish 66

F rench 71

G e o g ra p h y 7 7

G e rm a n ic L a n g u a g e s 83

H is to ry 9 4

L in g u is t ic s 10 7

M a th e m a tic s 11 2

M e d ie v a l S tu d ie s 12 2

P h ilo s o p h y 1 2 3

P o lit ic a l S c ie n c e 1 3 3

P s y c h o lo g y 14 2

R uss ian 151

S o c io lo g y 1 5 4

S ta tis tic s 16 2

D egree R u les 1 6 3

A c a d e m ic P rog ress R ules 1 8 4

The Faculty of ArtsThe Arts degrees

A student who has gained ad­mission to the University may apply for admission to the course for the degree of Bachelor of Arts, which may be taken as the pass degree or as the degree with honours.Students enrolling in the Faculty for the first time are required to have their choice of units approved at a personal interview with the Sub- Dean or a student adviser. Success­ful applicants will be told by letter of the days set aside for course approval and registration of enrolment.

The distinction between the pass degree and the honours degree may be expressed thus: the pass degree is designed to give the student a sound general education in the fields covered by the Faculty of Arts (i.e. the humanities, mathematics and the social sciences) whereas the honours degree aims to provide a thorough scholarly training in one or two subjects, with a more restricted choice of supporting subjects than is possible in the pass degree.

In 1971, the Faculty of Arts adopted a grading system for examination results in the units it offers of High Distinction, Distinction, Credit, Pass and Fail.A unit taken at honours level is designated '(H )' after the unit title.

The pass degreeA student can qualify for this degree by completing one of the following courses:

either three majors and a single unit

or two majors and two sub­majors

or two majors, one sub-major and two single units.

Each of these courses adds up to ten units, which is the number required for the degree. Full-time students can complete the course in three years, taking four units in first year, three in second year and three in third year. Part-time students require at least five years to complete the course, taking two units each year. All students, whether studying part-time or full­time, are expected to finish their courses within eight years.

As there are no compulsory subjects or groups of subjects in the Arts course, the student's choice is very wide indeed. As well as units offered by the Departments of the Faculty, students may choose units offered by the Faculties of Asian Studies, Economics and Science. In some ways this freedom of choice makes for difficulties, especially for first-year students, who should seek as much guidance as they need from the Faculty before the start of first term. The Courses of Study Rules set out on pp. 163-79 list the approved sequences of units and prerequisites in the Arts course.

The degree w ith honoursThe honours degree is somewhat differently arranged from the pass degree and takes four years of fu ll­time study. Most departments admit students to the honours course at the end of first-year, on the basis of their results. The honours course in one subject is most common, though combined honours courses in two subjects can be arranged in consultation with the departments concerned. The general require­ments for the honours course in each subject are set out in the

55

Faculty of Arts

departmental sections of the Handbook.

It is usually possible to change from a pass degree to an honours degree course, though changes made after the end of second year could involve lengthening the course by a year. A student who decides to transfer from an honours course to a pass course can also do so; though here again, the earlier the decision is made, the less difficulty.

H igher degreesThe degree of Master of Arts may only be taken after the bachelor's degree of this or another university has been obtained.

Com bined degreeFor law students who desire to widen their field of study and enrol for a combined Arts/Law degree course, the conditions are set out under the Faculty of Law.

E ffective w ritin gMany students fail not because they have spent too few hours at study, but because they have not learned how to write clearly enough to be understood. A student should take his writing quite as seriously as his reading. He should not imagine that good writing is a mysterious gift, which comes either unearned or not at all: few people write well without effort, and anybody's writing can be improved by hard work. Nor should he think of style as something to be sprayed on the surface of completed thoughts. Jonathan Swift, who wrote plainly, said: 'Proper words in proper places, make the true definition of a style.'

Three useful books, available in paperback editions, are:

56

Gowers, E., The Complete Plain Words.Bowden, E. T., An Introduction to Prose Style, Holt Rinehart & Winston.Strunk, W„ & White, E. B„ The Elements of S tyle .

It is essential to have a good dictionary, such as the Concise Oxford Dictionary, within reach. Young writers and old writers alike can learn from H. W. Fowler,A Dictionary o f Modern English Usage.

Details of units and book lists

Accounting and Public FinanceR. L. Mathews, B.Com(Melb) Professor and Head of the Department

The following units, details of which are given under the Faculty of Economics are available as units for the degree of Bachelor of Arts: Accounting I Accounting IIPublic Authority Accounting, and

National Economic Accounting Financial Accounting Theory, and

Company Finance Welfare and Taxation, and Expendi­

ture and Fiscal Institutions

ClassicsR. St. C. Johnson, MA,DipEd (Syd)Professor and Head of the Department

IntroductionGreece and Rome are the founda­tions of western civilisation, Greece mainly in the realm of thought, and Rome in that of action. For two thousand years thinkers, writers, artists, lawyers and statesmen have looked to them and studied them as models; moreover, our own language owes most of its literary tradition to Latin and Greek. For these reasons the study of their literature, thought, art and history has special value for all who wish to understand the development of our western tradition.

Latin and Greek are particularly valuable for those studying modern literature, Greek for philosophy and theology, Latin for law, scholastic philosophy and medieval history.A knowledge of Latin is required of all honours students in French, and is highly desirable for English and for Italian and other Romance languages.

Courses in Greek and Roman Civilization comprising Greek and Roman art (including architecture), history, thought and literature in translation are available as single units or as a sub-major.They may form a major with the unit Classical Tradition.

Three-year pass courses are available in both Latin and Greek, either of which may be taken as a major (or parts I and II of either as a sub-major) by candidates for the degree of Bachelor of Arts. One or more years of Latin or Greek may be

57

Faculty of Arts

included as part of any bachelor's course. Four-year honours courses in Latin and Greek are available. Supervision of candidates for MA and PhD degrees can be arranged.

Candidates taking Latin lb or Greek lb should have reached the New South Wales Higher School Certificate at second level (or a similar standard) in Latin or Greek. For those with no previous know­ledge of the language, there are one-year preliminary courses, Latin la and Greek la, which count for credit as single units. Students who pass either unit and undertake further prescribed study during the following vacation, and pass a further examination at the end of the vacation, with the approval of the Head of the Department may proceed to the second-year units in the subject concerned. Alternatively they may proceed from la to lb without further vacation study or examination; on passing lb such students receive credit for two single units.

Students of Latin II and III and Greek II and III may write extra essays during the year instead of one of the examination papers at the end of the year. Details are circulated to the students concerned.

A student in any unit who has not handed in a satisfactory proportion of the prescribed written work or who has not attended a satisfactory number of tutorials and classes may be excluded from the examination in that unit.

For the pass degreeThe major in Greek is Greek I (at or b), II and III. The sub-major is Greek I (a t or b) and II, in that order.

The major in Latin is Latin I (at or b), II and III. The sub-major is Latin I (at or b) and II, in that order.

The Greek and Roman Civiliza­tion sub-major is either Greek Civilization followed by Roman Civilization (S) or Roman Civiliza­tion followed by Greek Civilization (S). This sub-major followed by Classical Tradition constitutes a major.

Mixed language and civilization sub-majors and majors are also possible when Greek lb or Latin lb is taken first. Thus either Latin lb followed by Greek Civilization(S) or Greek lb followed by Roman Civilization(S) counts as a sub­major. Either mixed sub-major followed by Classical Tradition constitutes a major.

The single units offered are: Greek Civilization, Roman Civilization, Greek I (a or b), Latin I (a or b).

From 1972, students cannot normally count both Greek Civilization and Greek lb or Roman Civilization and Latin lb as two separate units. Only students who have passed the equivalent of Latin lb elsewhere, or at this University in 1971 or earlier, may count Latin lb and Roman Civilization as two units; similarly for Greek lb and Greek Civilization.

Classical Tradition may by special permission of the Head of the Department be taken as a single unit by students who have com­pleted Greek II or Latin II and have the necessary background for the course.

fSee conditions in Introduction (paragraph 5), above.

58

Classics

Greek CivilizationGreek art, history, thought and literature in translation.

Two lectures and one tutorial a week.Syllabus:(a) Literature in translation.(i) Homer, Iliad(ii) Greek drama(iii) Herodotus.(b) Art and Architecture. A series of illustrated lectures.(c) Thought. The political and ethical thought of Plato and Aristotle.(d) History. Critical periods of Greek history, based on a study of Herodotus,Thucydides and Xenophon. Prescribed Books□ Aeschylus, The Oresteian Triology, Penguin.□ Aristophanes, The Frogs and Other Plays, Penguin.□ Aristotle, Ethics; Politics,Penguin.□ Boardman, J., Greek Art, Thames S Hudson.□ Burn, A. R., Pelican History of Greece, Penguin.□ Euripides, Medea and Other Plays, Penguin.□ Herodotus, The Histories, tr. de Selincourt, Penguin.□ Homer, The Iliad, tr. Lattimore, Phoenix Books.□ Plato, The Republic, tr. Cornford, Oxford UP.□ Sophocles, The Theban Plays, tr. Watling, Penguin.□ Thucydides, The Peloponnesian War, tr. Warner, Penguin.□ Xenophon, A History of my Times, tr. Warner, Penguin. Examination: Two three-hour papers. Written work throughout the year will be taken into account, as

will attendance at tutorials and contribution to tutorial discussion.

Greek Civilization(S)As for Greek Civilization, with a series of extra classes and assignments on Greeks in the Roman world.Prescribed Books As for Greek Civilization.Additional texts may be prescribed by the Department. Details will be available towards the end of 1971 within the Department.Examination: Two three-hour papers. Written work throughout the year will be taken into account, as will attendance at tutorials and contribution to tutorial discussion.

Roman CivilizationRoman art, history, thought and literature in translation.

Two lectures and one tutorial a week.Syllabus(a) History. An outline of the history of Roman civilisation with particular attention to the political and social life of the Roman world from 82BC to the end of the second century AD.(b) Art and Architecture. A series of illustrated lectures.(c) Thought. The philosophical works of Cicero and the influence of Stoicism and Epicureanism.(d) Literature in translation. Selections from Roman writers with emphasis on Cicero, Tacitus, Vergil, Lucan, Ovid and Juvenal.Prescribed Books□ Hadas, M. (ed.), The Basic Works of Cicero, Random House.□ Juvenal, The Sixteen Satires, tr. Green, Penguin.□ Kagan, D., The Roman World, Collier- Macmillan.

59

Faculty of Arts

□ Lucan, Pharsalia, tr. Graves, Penguin.□ Ovid, Metamorphoses, tr.Gregory, Mentor.□ Tacitus, The Annals of Imperial Rome, tr. Grant, Penguin.□ Virgil, The Aeneid, tr. Jackson Knight, Penguin.□ Wheeler, Roman Art and Archi­tecture, Thames & Hudson. Examination: Two three-hour papers. Written work throughout the year will be taken into account, as will attendance at tutorials and contribution to tutorial discussion.

Roman Civilization (S)As for Roman Civilization, with additional classes and assignments on the Greeks in the Roman world. Prescribed Books As for Roman Civilization.Additional texts may be prescribed by the Department. Details will be available towards the end of 1971 within the Department.Examination: Two three-hour papers, as for Roman Civilization. Written work throughout the year, will be taken into account, as will attendance at tutorials and contribution to tutorial discussion.

Classical TraditionTwo lectures and one tutorial a week.Syllabus: The influence of selected aspects of classical civilisation on later European civilization. In 1972 the topics studied will be: Platonism, education, aspects of Christian thought.Prescribed Books□ Beck, F. A. G., Greek Education 450-350 BC, Methuen.□ Boethius, The Consolation of Philosophy, tr. Watts, Penguin.

□ Kuhn, T. S., The Copernican Revolution, Vintage.□ O'Brien, E., The Essential Plotinus, Mentor.□ Plato, The Symposium, tr. Hamilton; Timaeus, tr. Lee,Penguin; The Republic, tr. Cornford, Oxford UP.□ Stevenson, J. (ed.), A New Eusebius, SPCK.Examination: Two three-hour papers. Written work throughout the year will also be taken into account.

Greek laFour hours a week. The course is designed for candidates with no previous knowledge of Greek. Students intending to take this course are advised to consult the Department as early as possible before the beginning of first term.Syllabus: An introduction to classi­cal Attic Greek with practice in idiomatic translation from and into Greek, culminating in the study of simple Greek texts with reference to the language and cultural background, and in the translation of connected passages of English prose into Greek.Prescribed Books□ McKay, K. L., A Greek Grammar for Beginners (supplied by the Department); Croesus of Lydia, ANUP.□ Kennedy, E. C., Scenes from Euripides' /phigenia, Macmillan. Examination(a) One three-hour paper on unseen translation into English and Greek with questions on Greek accidence and syntax(b) one three-hour paper on the prescribed texts, with questions on Greek life and thought.

60

Classics

Vacation Studyt; As prescribed by the Head of the Department.Further Examinationt; One three- hour paper.

Greek lbFour hours a week.Syllabus:(a) Two lectures a week in common with Greek Civilization (see syllabus above) on Greek literature, history, art and architecture, and thought(b ) two lectures a week devoted to intensive reading and study in the Greek language, as follows:

(i) Reading from Xenophon,Lysias and Aristophanes on the theme Reform and Revolution in Athens

(ii) Aspects of Greek language. Prescribed BooksAs for Greek Civilization above, plus□ Xenophon, Hellenica I and II, ed. Edwards, Pitt Press.□ Lysias, Orationes XVI, ed. Shuckburgh, Macmillan.□ Aristophanes, The Frogs, ed. Stanford, Macmillan.Written work:(i) Two essays (each 1500-2000

words), one on Greek literature and one on Greek thought

(ii) three art assignments, as for Greek Civilization

(iii) about seventeen language exercises, largely unseen translation.

Examination: Two three-hour papers:

(i) Greek unseen translation(ii) questions on Greek literature,

history, art and thought.Written work and tests on the prescribed books during the year will also be taken into account.

fFor students intending to proceed to Greek II. (See page 58).

Greek IIFour hours a week.Syllabus(a) Greek language and prose composition(b) a period of classical Greek History(c) three special studies chosen from the list offered by the Depart­ment, which will include tragedy, Plato, New Testament and education.Examination: During the year there will be a one-hour examination on each of the special studies. Prose composition will be examined throughout the year. An essay on Greek history will be required. At the end of the year there will be two three-hour papers, one on Greek language and unseen trans­lation and one of essays on the year's work. In place of the essay paper, students may submit four essays during the year as pre­scribed in the details circulated within the Department early in 1972.

Greek IIIFour hours a week.Syllabus(a) Greek Literature: extensive read­ing under individual direction by the Head of the Department(b) five special studies chosen from the list offered by the Department, which will include Greek language and prose composition, tragedy, Plato, New Testament and education.Examination: During the year there will be a one-hour examination on each of the special studies. At the end of the year there will be two three-hour papers, one on Greek unseen translation and one of essays on the year's work. In place

61

Faculty of Arts

of the essay paper, students may submit four essays during the year as prescribed in the details circulated within the Department early in 1 972.

Latin laFour hours a week. The course is designed for candidates with no previous knowledge of Latin. Students intending to take this course are advised to consult the Department as early as possible before the beginning of first term.Syllabus: A rapid survey of the accidence and syntax of the Latin language, leading to the study of simple Latin texts.Prescribed Book□ Thompson, G. S. & Craddock,C. H., Latin: Book 1, Blackie.□ Balme, M. G., Intellegenda,Oxford UP.□ Peckett, C. W. E. 8- Munday,A. R., A Basic Latin Grammar, Rivingtons.Examination: Two three-hour papers. Vacation Studyi: As prescribed by the Head of the Department.Further Examinationt; One three- hour paper.

Latin lbFour hours a week.Syllabus:(a) Two lectures a week in common with Roman Civilization (see syllabus above) on Roman history, art and architecture, thought and literature(b) two lectures a week devoted to intensive reading and study in the Latin language. The syllabus for1 972 comprises:(i) Cicero: an Introduction

fFor students intending to proceed to Latin II. (See page 58).62

(about seventeen hours). Selections from Cicero's writings to illustrate his place in Roman history and literature.

(ii) Vergil's Aeneid (about seven­teen hours). Reading of the whole Aeneid in translation and of selections in Latin with special attention to Book 6; the structure and literary values of the Aeneid.

(iii) Imperial literature (eight hours). Selections from Tacitus and Juvenal.

(iv) Latinity (nine hours). Aspects of the Latin language, e.g. sentence-structure, words and concepts, scansion.

Written work:(i) Two essays (each 1500-2000

words), one on Roman History and one on Vergil

(ii) three art assignments, as for Roman Civilization

(iii) about seventeen exercises, largely unseen translation.

Prescribed Books:As for Roman Civilization (above), plus□ Selections from Cicero, Tacitus and Juvenal supplied by the Department.□ Wilson, S. J., (ed.) The Thought of Cicero, Bell.□ Vergil, Aeneid VI, ed. Fletcher, Oxford UP.Examination: Two three-hour papers:

(i) Latin unseen translation(ii) questions on Roman literature,

history, art and thought.Written work and tests on the prescribed books during the year will also be taken into account.

Latin II

Four hours a week.

Classics

Syllabus:(a) Latin language and prose composition(-b) four special studies chosen from the list offered by the Department, which will include Tacitus, Imperial Women, Juvenal, Roman philosophy, Art.Examination: During the year there will be a one-hour examination on each of the special studies. Prose composition will be examined throughout the year. At the end of the year there will be two three- hour papers, one on Latin language and unseen translation and one consisting of essays on the year's work with a wide choice available.In place of the essay paper, students may submit four essays during the year as prescribed in the details circulated within the Department early in 1972.

Latin IIIAs for Latin II, but with examinations of a higher standard.

For the degree w ith honoursThe Department offers a choice of three honours courses: Classical Studies, Greek Studies and Latin Studies, as set out in the syllabus below.

Admission to the higher years of all honours courses is conditional upon satisfactory performance in the first year, and students must be approved by the Faculty of Arts as candidates for the degree with honours before entering the second year of the honours school.

A student who has not enrolled for honours but who wishes to enter an honours school during his course must make special application to the Faculty (through the Sub-Dean) for permission to do so. If permis­

sion is granted, the Faculty will prescribe what further work must be completed before the student is allowed to proceed to the final examination.

Candidates for honours will norm­ally be required to undertake exten­sive reading in the classical lan­guages during the long vacations between their first and third years. Before 31 October in their third year candidates for honours are required to name the subject of a special study in which they will submit an essay of approximately 9,000 words by the end of the second term of their final year.

Greek II (Honours) and

Greek III (Honours)As for the pass course in Greek II and Greek III, with one additional hour a week.Syllabus: An intensive study of selected Greek texts.Books: To be prescribed.Examination: As for the pass courses in Greek II and III, with one additional three-hour paper.

Latin II (Honours) and

Latin III (Honours)As for the pass course in Latin II and Latin III, with one additional hour a week.Syllabus: The silver age of Latin literature and its background.Books: To be prescribed. Examination: As for the pass courses in Latin II and III, with one additional three-hour paper.

Honours School in Greek StudiesThe course for the degree with honours in Greek Studies will com­prise the following units:

63

Faculty of Arts

(a) Greek I (a or b), II and III(b) additional honours work as set out above for Greek II (Honours) and Greek III (Honours).(c) Greek IV(d) two approved majors or one approved major, one sub-major and one single unit.

Honours School in Latin StudiesThe course for the degree with honours in Latin Studies will com­prise the following units:(a) Latin I (a or b), II and III(b) additional honours work as set out above for Latin II (Honours) and Latin III (Honours)(c) Latin IV(d) two approved majors or one approved major, one sub-major and one single unit. Candidates for honours are strongly recommended to take at least one unit of Greek.

Honours School in Classical Studies(a) Greek I (a or b), II and III,Latin I (a or b), II and III(b) additional honours work set out above for Greek II (Honours) and Greek III (Honours), and Latin II (Honours) and Latin III (Honours)(c) a combined course based on Greek IV and Latin IV as arranged by the Head of the Department.(d) two approved single units chosen by the candidate in con­sultation with the Head of the Department.

Greek IV (Honours)Classes to be arranged.Syllabus: An intensive study of the history, literature, thought, art and language of a selected period by the student in consultation with the Head of the Department. The course will include a thesis on an 64

agreed topic. (See notes on the honours schools above.) Examination: Five three-hour papers.

Latin IV (Honours)Classes to be arranged.Syllabus: An intensive study of the history, literature, thought, art and language of a period selected by the student in consultation with the Head of the Department. The course will include a thesis on an agreed topic. (See notes on the honours schools above.)Examination: Five three-hour papers.

For the degree of Master of ArtsDetails will be arranged by the Professor of Classics.

Com puter Science

The two units of Computer Science are available as units for the degree of Bachelor of Arts. Details are given under the Faculty of Economics.

Computer Science B01 and B02 comprise a second-year unit and students must have completed at least one of the following units before they are eligible to take it: Pure Mathematics I Applied Mathematics I two of Statistics A01, A02, A03 Philosophy I Linguistics I English IBa unit in a language other

than English.

Pure Mathematics I and Computer Science B01 and B02 are pre­requisites for the second unit, which comprises Computer Science C01 and either Computer Science C02 or Computer Science C03. Computer Science B01 and B02 and Computer Science C01 and either C02 or C03 constitute a sub-major and Computer Science B01 and B02 a single unit.

The Faculty is currently considering possible combinations of units to form mixed majors and mixed sub-majors with units of Computer Science.

Economic History

G. S. L. Tucker, BCom (Melb),PhD (Cantab)Professor and Head of the DepartmentThe following units, details of which are given under the Faculty of Economics are available as pass or honours units for the degree of Bachelor of Arts:Economic History I Economic History II The Economic Development of

Modern Japan (semester unit) Recent Economic Experience in

Europe and North America (semester unit)

Problems of Under-development: India (semester unit)

History of Economic Thought Economic History IV

65

Economics English

B. D. Cameron, MEc (Syd)PhD (Cantab)Professor of Applied Economics and Head of the DepartmentThe following units, details of which are given under the Faculty of Economics are available as units for the degree of Bachelor of Arts: Economics A Economics I Economics il Economics IIIEconomics IV (Honours only) Mathematical Economics A Mathematical Economics IA and IB Mathematical Economics 11A and

IIBAgriculture in the National Economy Agricultural Production and Prices Labour Economics A and B Economic Policy

Students wishing to take an honours degree in the field of economics will normally be expected to take this course in the Faculty of Economics. They may, however, take honours in economics in the Faculty of Arts provided certain conditions are met:(a) they may be required to take the first year of Statistics before their final honours year (and preferably in their first year)(if?) their passes in the economics major must be of a sufficient stan­dard for the Head of the Department to allow them to proceed to the fourth honours year.Students are advised to consult with the Sub-Dean of the Faculty of Economics.

C. I. E. Donaldson, BA (Melb),MA (Oxon)Professor and Acting Head of the Department

IntroductionThe Department of English offers courses in English Language and Literature, both modern and medieval, American Literature and Australian Literature for the pass degree of Bachelor of Arts, the degree with honours, and for the degree of Master of Arts.For admission to English IA or English IB the prerequisite is English, Level II, at the NSW Higher School Certificate Examination, or some equivalent.

In each of the units written work is required and is taken into account at the final examinations. A student who fails to submit the set work by the due dates, or to participate regularly in the tutorial program, may be excluded from the examination.

For the pass degreeThe majors are:(a) English IA, IIA and IIIA, in that order(f?) English IB, MB and IIIB, in that order(c) English IB, MB and Old English, in that order.The sub-majors are:(a) English IA, followed by English MA or American Literature or Aus­tralian Literature(f?) English IB and MB, in that order, (c) English IB and Old English, in that order.Mixed majors and sub-majors are:(a) Medieval Studies A and B, and Old English, in that order (f?) Medieval Studies A or B, and Old English, in any order

66

English

(c) Australian Literature and History IA. in either order(d) Australian Literature and American Literature, in either order(e) American Literature and History MB, in either order.The single units are:(a) English IA (.b) English IB(c) American Literature(d) Australian Literature(e) Old English.Note: (a) Neither American Litera­ture nor Australian Literature may be taken as a single unit or as part of a sub-major except by a student who has already passed English IA,(b) in certain cases, with the per­mission of the Head of the Depart­ment, any English unit may be taken as a single unit.

Full details of texts prescribed fo r the fo llow ing units are available from th e departm ent or from the Sub-Dean's office.

Note: Students undertaking courses in English should be prepared to read extensively, and not confine themselves merely to texts prescribed for particular study.

English IATwo lectures and two tutorials a week throughout the year.Syllabus: An introduction to the aims and methods of literary criticism. The course will examine selected novels, poems and plays from the modern period, including work by Thomas Hardy, Henry James, Joseph Conrad, James Joyce, D. H. Lawrence, William Faulkner, T. S. Eliot, W. H. Auden, and Robert Graves. Anthologies of modern drama and poetry will also be set for study.

Examination: Candidates will be assessed on their performance in work submitted during the year, and by final examination. The method of assessment is set out in the full class prescription supplied in the first week of first term.

English IIAThree lectures and at least one tutorial a week throughout the year. Tutorials will be held on two different topics each week, and students will be encouraged to attend more than one tutorial group.

Syllabus: The course will have three components:(a) Poetry: A special study of the work of Donne, Milton, and Pope, supplemented by work from an anthology of seventeenth century poetry.{b) Novel: A special study of the work of Fielding, Jane Austen, and Dickens.(c) Drama: Shakespeare: selected plays.Students will be required to take each component, but may specialise in one. Work done in the special component will count for 50% of the final marks; work done in each of the other components will count for 25%.Examination: Candidates will be assessed on their performance in work submitted during the year, and by final examination. The method of assessment is set out in the full class prescription supplied in the first week of first term.

English III AThree classes a week throughout the year.

67

Faculty of Arts

Syllabus: The course will consist of two components:(a) a study of the work of selected poets of the nineteenth century, including Wordsworth, Coleridge, Keats, Byron, Tennyson, Clough, and Yeats.(b ) a study of the work of selected dramatists or poets of the nineteenth and twentieth centuries, with special reference to the work ofG. B. Shaw, the Abbey Theatre dramatists, T. S. Eliot, Samuel Beckett, Harold Pinter, and selected modern dramatists; and of Ezra Pound, Robert Lowell, Wallace Stevens, W. H. Auden and selected modern poets.Examination: Candidates will be assessed on their performance in work submitted during the year, and by final examination. The method of assessment is set out in the full class prescription supplied in the first week of first term.

English IBThree lectures and one tutorial a week throughout the year.Syllabus: An introduction to earlier English literature and civilisation with particular emphasis on the late medieval ballad, lyric and drama.

Examination: Candidates will be assessed on their performance in work submitted during the year, and by final examination. The method of assessment is set out in the full class prescription supplied in the first week of first term.

English II BThree classes a week throughout the year.

Syllabus: The literature and civilisa- 68

tion of medieval England, with particular emphasis on Chaucer and selected post-Chaucerian Scottish poets including James I, Henryson and Dunbar.Examination: Candidates will be assessed on their performance in work submitted during the year, and by final examination. The method of assessment is set out in the full class prescription supplied in the first week of first term.

English III BThree classes a week throughout the year.

Syllabus: The literature and civilisa­tion of medieval England; a study of selected texts including Troilus and Criseyde, Sir G a wain and the Green Knight, Piers Plowman and Le Morte D ‘Arthur.Examination: Candidates will be assessed on their performance in work submitted during the year, and by final examination. The method of assessment is set out in the full class prescription supplied in the first week of first term.

Old English .Three classes a week throughout the year.Syllabus: The language and litera­ture of the Anglo-Saxons. Examination: Candidates will be assessed on their performance in work submitted during the year, and by final examination. The method of assessment is set out in the full class prescription supplied in the first week of first term.

A ustralian L iteratureThree classes a week throughout the year.Syllabus: Australian poetry, fiction,

English

drama and general prose, including a special study of a set topic. Novelists studied will include Alexander Harris, Catherine Spence, Joseph Furphy, Marcus Clarke, Martin Boyd, Christina Stead and Patrick White. Poets will include Christopher Brennan, Shaw Neilson, Kenneth Slessor, A. D. Hope, Judith Wright, J. P.McAuley, Rosemary Dobson and Francis Webb; three anthologies of nineteenth and twentieth century Australian verse will also be set.The short stories of Henry Lawson, the essays of Walter Murdoch, and non-fictional work by W. K. Hancock, Mary Durack and Judith Wright will also be included for study.Examination: Candidates will be assessed on their performance in work submitted during the year, and by final examination. The method of assessment is set out in the full class prescription supplied in the first week of first term.

Am erican L iteratureThree classes a week throughout the year.Syllabus: American poetry, fiction and drama. Novelists studied will include James Fenimore Cooper, Nathaniel Hawthorn, Herman Melville, Mark Twain, Henry James, F. Scott Fitzgerald, Ernest Hemingway, William Faulkner,Ralph Ellison and James Baldwin. The following poets will be studied: Walt Whitman, Emily Dickinson, Robert Frost, Ezra Pound, Hart Crane, Wallace Stevens and a selection of contemporary writers. A special study will be made of the poetry of Robert Lowell.

Examination: Candidates will be assessed on their performance in work submitted during the year, and by final examination. The method of assessment is set out in the full class prescription supplied in the first week of first term.

For the degree w ith honours

Honours School in EnglishThe course for the degree with honours in English extends over four years and normally consists of: eitherfor those whose interests lie primarily in modern English literature:(a) English IA, IIA and MIA {b) English IIB and NIB or Austra­lian Literature or American Literature(c) additional honours work in English IIA and IIIA(d) English IV(e) four approved single units (one of which must be a second-year unit).orfor those whose interests lie primarily in medieval English literature:(a) English IA, IIA, IIIA or Old English{b) English IIB, IIIB (c) additional honours work in English IIB and IIIB {d) English IV(e) four approved single units (one of which must be a second-year unit).

First YearStudents contemplating honours will take English IA and three other units. It is strongly recommended that one of these be English IB. Admission to English II (Honours) is at the discretion of the Head of the Department.

69

Faculty of Arts

Second YearHonours students will take English 11A and English MB and one other unit. Those studying modern literature will take the honours course attached to English 11A (seventeenth century poetry), those studying medieval literature the honours course attached to English MB (an introduction to Old and Middle English). With special permission from the Head of the Department, honours students in this year may take both English 11A and English MB at honours level. Admission to English III (Honours) is at the discretion of the Head of the Department.

Third YearHonours students will take one or (with special permission from the Head of the Department) both of the following programs:(a) English MIA honours (a seminar meeting three times a week to discuss poetry and prose of the Romantic and Victorian periods, and poetry or drama of the twentieth century), and either English IIIB or American Literature or Australian Literature(b ) English IIIB plus one honours paper and either English MIA or Old English.

English IV (Honours)In the fourth year honours students take a selection of the following seminar courses:1. Old English Literature2. Old Norse or Celtic or Gothic or Medieval Latin or Medieval French3. Medieval Literature4. Sixteenth Century Literature5. Shakespeare6. English Literature, 1600-1660

7. Two major novelists8. American Literature9. Australian Literature10. Twentieth Century Literature11. History and Theory of Literary Criticism12. Linguistic History of English. (To meet special circumstances, details of these courses may be changed from year to year.)

Candidates whose primary interests are in the modern period normally take English Literature,1600-1 660 (a major course examined in two papers) and three other courses of their own choice.

Candidates whose primary interests are in the medieval period normally take Medieval Literature and Sixteenth Century Literature (which together become a major course examined in two papers) and three other courses of their own choice.

Intending candidates should make their selection of courses, and nominate an essay topic, in consultation with the Head of the Department before 30 November 1971. Candidates will be notified of the Department's approval and course prescriptions when admission to English IV is confirmed.

Candidates are assessed on their performance in five final examinations and one 10,000 word essay. The essay should be submitted by the end of the first week of third term. Candidates will take two papers on their major course and one on each of the three other courses selected.

Candidates will not normally be permitted to take either American or Australian Literature in English IV (Honours) without having

70

French

passed the corresponding pass unit at distinction level.

For the degree of M aster of ArtsAdmission to candidature for the master's degree is normally granted to a person with an honours degree of sufficient standard. A pass grad­uate who wishes to become a candidate must complete a quali­fying course of two years at hon­ours level, and pass the examina­tions in it at a satisfactory standard, before admission to candidature.The master's degree may be obtained by thesis or course work or both.

Students taking the MA by course work are required to present an essay of 20,000 words on a subject of their own choice, and to take any two of the following courses: (i) Medieval literature; (ii) Seventeenth century literature; (iii) Shakespeare; (iv) Eighteenth century literature; (v) History and theory of literary criticism; (vi) two major novelists. Performance is assessed by work submitted during the year, and by final examination. All MA candidates may be required to follow courses, and attend classes; they must furnish reports on their work, and meet their supervisors as required by the Head of the Department, whose approval must be obtained for the topic of any thesis undertaken.

D. P. Scales, BA (Syd), DU (Paris) Professor and Head of the Department

IntroductionThe courses in the Department are designed to ensure proficiency in spoken and written French, an acquaintance with French civilisa­tion, a knowledge of literary history, a training in the methods of literary criticism and a personal apprecia­tion of significant works of literature.

For the pass degree of Bachelor of Arts the Department offers a three- year sequence known as French Language and Literature I, II and III, and a second major, called French Studies A, B and C.

The first year of French Language and Literature comprises the study of selected prose and verse texts of the nineteenth and twentieth cent­uries, aspects of French civilisation, translation from French into English and from English into French, free composition, phonetics, dictation and conversation. In the second and third years the principal literary studies relate to the seventeenth and eighteenth centuries, but the pre­scriptions also include a number of nineteenth and twentieth-century texts. French is the working lang­uage for about half of the lectures and tutorials in the second and third years. Essays in French, along with prose composition and trans­lation from French, make up the remainder of the syllabus.

In French Studies A an introduc­tion is given to the early history of the French language, and selected texts of the medieval period are studied. The Renaissance and the Reformation in France, the litera­ture and thought of the sixteenth century, are the subject of French

71

Faculty of Arts

Studies B. French Studies C con­sists of the study in depth of aspects of the literature of the nineteenth century.

Candidates for the degree with honours in French, after taking French Language and Literature I, go on in their second and third years to French Language and Literature II and III, together with French Studies A, B and C. The fourth-year syllabus comprises literature of the twentieth century, medieval and modern options, advanced exercises in literary com­mentary, lengthy essays, prose composition and translation from French into English.

For admission to French Language and Literature I the prerequisite is French, Level II at the N.S.W.Higher School Certificate Examination, or a pass at the same standard at an equivalent examination. Students who have not reached this standard may be admitted only by special permission of the Head of Department; they may be required to take an entrance test.

Students enrolling for French Studies A must have some knowledge of Latin; those who have not studied Latin before coming to the University are advised to take Latin la as one of their first-year units. Except by special permission of the Head of the Department, a pass in French Language and Literature I is a prerequisite for French Studies A, B and C, which are second or third-year units.

In all units, work done during the year will be taken into account in the determination of examination results. Any student who fails to hand in the set essays by the due date, or to participate regularly in

the weekly exercises and dis­cussions, may be excluded from the Annual Examination.

For the pass degreeThe principal major is French Language and Literature I, II and III, in that order. The second major is French Studies A, B and C, in any order.The sub-majors are: French Language and Literature I and II, in that order; French Studies A and B, A and C, B and C, each in either order.The single units are:French Language and Literature I French Studies A French Studies B French Studies C.

French Language and Literature IThree lectures and two tutorials a week throughout the year.Syllabus(a) Study of selected texts of the nineteenth and twentieth centuries(b) translation from French into English(c) translation from English into French(d) free composition(e) phonetics, conversation and dictation.Prescribed Books□ Hugo, V., Poesies, Nouveaux Classiques Larousse.□ Musset, A. de, On ne badine pas avec I'amour, Bordas.□ Anouilh, J., La Sauvage & L'/nvitat/on au chateau, Livre de Poche.□ Duhamel, G., Confession de Minuit, Livre de Poche.□ Mauriac, F., Therese Desquey-

roux, Livre de Poche Universite.

72

French

□ Radiguet, R., Le Diable au corps, Livre de Poche Universite.□ Saint-Exupery, A. de, Vo! de Nuit, Livre de Poche Universite.Examination: Three three-hour papers (the first on translation from French into English, prepared and unseen; the second on translation from English into French and free composition; the third on the prescribed books); tests in phonetics, reading aloud, con­versation and dictation.

French Language and Literature IIThree lectures and two tutorials a week throughout the year.Syllabus(a) Literature of the seventeenth or eighteenth century (in alternate years){b) selected texts of the nineteenth and twentieth centuries(c) essays in French(d) translation from French into English(e) translation from English into French(f) discussions in French, and dictation.Prescribed Books□ Lagarde, A. & Michard, L.,XVIIe siede, Bordas.□ Corneille, P., Le Cid, Nicomede, Bordas.□ Racine, J., Andromaque,Phedre, Bordas.□ Moliere, Dom Juan, Le Misanthrope, Les Femmes savantes, Bordas.□ La Fayette, Mme de, La Princesse de Cleves. Harrap.□ Balzac, H. de, Le Pere Goriot, Harrap.□ Baudelaire, C., Les Fleurs du Mat, Classiques Gamier.

□ Gide, A., L Immoraliste, Livre de Poche.□ Giraudoux, J., Intermezzo,Harrap.□ Malraux, A„ La Condition humaine, Livre de Poche Universite.□ Ionesco, E., Rhinoceros,Livre de Poche.□ Sartre, J. -P., Les Mouches.Harrap.Examination: One three-hour paper on translation from French into English and from English into French; two three-hour papers on the literature of the seventeenth or eighteenth century; one three-hour paper on the nineteenth and twentieth-century texts; tests in spoken French, reading aloud and dictation.

French Language and Literature IIIThree lectures and two tutorials a week throughout the year.Syllabus: As for French Language and Literature II.Prescribed Books□ Lagarde, A. &- Michard, L.,XI/He siede, Bordas.□ Corneille, P., Le Cid, Nicomede. Bordas.□ Racine, J. Andromaque, Phedre, Bordas.□ Moliere, Dorn Juan, Le Misanthrope, Les Femmes savantes, Bordas.□ La Fayette, Mme de, La Princesse de Cleves, Harrap.□ Flaubert, G., Madame Bovary, Gamier-Flammarion.□ Verlaine et les poetes symbo/istes, Classiques Larousse.□ Alain-Fournier, Le Grand Meaulnes, Livre de Poche Universite.

73

Faculty of Arts

□ Proust, M., Du cöte de chez Swann, Livre de Poche.□ Anouilh, J., La Repetition, Classiques Larousse.

Sartre. J. -P., La Nausee, Livre de Poche Universite.□ Camus, A., Caligula, Livre de Poche.Examination: One three-hour paper on translation from French into English and from English into French; two three-hour papers on the literature of the seventeenth or eighteenth century; one three- hour paper on the nineteenth and twentieth-century texts; tests in spoken French, reading aloud and dictation.

French Studies AThis unit w ill be offered in 1972 and alternate years.

Two lectures and two tutorials a week throughout the year.Syllabus: The literature and civilisation of the Middle Ages, and the early history of the French language.Prescribed Books□ Chevaillier, J. -R. & Audiat, P., Les Textes franqais— Moyen age Hachette.□ Roques, M. (ed.), Aucassin et Nicolette, 2nd ed., Cfma.□ Johnson, R. C. & Owen, D. D.R. (eds.), Fabliaux, Blackwell.□ Studer, P. (ed.), Le Mystere d'Adam, Manchester U P.□ Villon, F., OEuvres, 4th ed.,Cfma.Examination: Two three-hour papers.

French Studies BTwo lectures and one tutorial a week throughout the year.Syllabus'. The literature and

language of the sixteenth century; the Reformation and the Renais­sance in France.Prescribed Books□ Boase, A. M. (ed.), The Poetry of France, vol. I: 1400-1600, University Paperbacks.□ Marot, Poesies choisies, Classiques Larousse.□ Du Bellay, OEuvres choisies, Classiques Larousse.□ Ronsard, Poesies choisies, 2 vols., Classiques Larousse.□ Rabelais, OEuvres completes, 2 vols., Classiques Gamier.□ Montaigne, Essais, 2 vols., Classiques Gamier.□ La Tragedie au XVIe siede, Classiques Larousse.Examination: Two three-hour papers.

French Studies CThree classes a week throughout the year.Syllabus: Literature of the nineteenth century.

Prescribed Books□ Lagarde, A. & Michard, L.,XIXe siede, Bordas.□ Nerval, G. de Sylvie—Les Chimeres— Aurelia, Bordas.□ Chateaubriand, F. -R. de,Atala— Rene, Gamier-Flammarion.□ Stendhal, Le Rouge et le Noir, La Chartreuse de Parme, Garnier- Flammarion; Luden Leuwen,Livre de Poche.□ Balzac, H. de, La Peau de chagrin, Livre de Poche;Eugenie Grandet, Garnier- Flammarion; Le Pere Goriot, Harrap; Illusions perdues, Garnier-Flammarion; La Cousine Bette, Livre de Poche.□ Flaubert, G., Madame Bovary; Sa/ammbö; L'Education

74

French

sentimentale. Gamier-Flammarion.□ Zola, E., L'Assommoir; Germinal, Gamier-Flammarion.□ Maupassant, G. de, Pierre et Jean, Classiques Gamier.□ Hugo, V., Preface de ‘Cromwell', Classiques Larousse; Hernani; Ruy Bias, Bordas.□ Vigny, A. de, Chatterton, Univ. London Press or Bordas.□ Musset, A. de, Fantasio; Lorenzaccio, Bordas.□ Labiche, E., Le Voyage de M. Perrichon, Classiques Larousse.□ Becque, H., Les Corbeaux,Harrap.□ Jarry, A., Tout Ubu, Livre de Poche.□ *C6ard, H„ Une belle journee, Slatkine Reprints.□ *Dujardin, E., Les Lauriers sont coupäs. Union generale d'Eüdition. *to be supplied by the Department.Examination: Two three-hour papers.

For the degree w ith honours Honours School in FrenchFor the degree with honours in French the course extends over four years and consists of(a) French Language and Literature I, II and III(b ) French Studies A, B and C(c) French IV (Honours)(d) an approved sub-major and two approved single units.

Students wishing to take a major (rather than a sub-major) outside the Department, and any interested in combined honours courses, should consult the Head of the Department.

To continue in the Honours School a student must in each year of his course reach a standard satisfactory to the Head of the

Department. Admission to the final honours year requires a recom­mendation by the Head of the Department and is subject to approval by the Faculty.

First Year: In their first year prospective honours students take French Language and Literature I, the first part of their sub-major, and the two single units.Second Year: In their second year honours students take French Language and Literature II, French Studies A o r B (these units being offered in alternate years), and the second part of their sub-major.Third Year: In their third year honours students take French Language and Literature III, French Studies A or B (these units being offered in alternate years), and French Studies C.

French IV (Honours)Classes to be arranged.Syllabus(a) The novel in the twentieth century{b) the theatre in the twentieth century(c) special medieval or modern studies(d) substantial essays in French on aspects of (a), (b) and (c)(e) translation from French into English and from English into French(f) spoken French.Examinations: Six three-hour papers, as follows:

(i) translation from French(ii) translation into French(iii) the twentieth-century novel(iv) the twentieth-century theatre(v) 8- (vi) special medieval or

modern studies.In addition, candidates take an

75

Faculty of Arts

oral examination in French on the year's work.

For the degree of M aster of ArtsPersons who have been awarded first or good second class honours at the final examination for the degree of Bachelor of Arts with honours in French may proceed at once to the course for the degree of Master of Arts by thesis. The subject of the thesis must be approved by the Head of the Department. The candidate receives guidance from his supervisor in critical and biblio­graphical method, and is expected to furnish progress reports on his work at regular intervals. The thesis is to be written in French, and the candidate may also be required to present himself for an oral examina­tion.

Other persons who wish to be accepted as candidates for the degree of Master of Arts may be admitted to a qualifying course, the details of which are determined by the Head of the Department.

76

Geography

B. L. C . J o h n s o n , B A , P h D

( L o n d ) , M A ( B i r m )

P ro fe s s o r a n d H e a d o f t h e

D e p a r t m e n t

I n t r o d u c t i o nG e o g r a p h y is c o n c e r n e d w i t h

u n d e r s t a n d in g t h e sp a t ia l p a t te r n s

o f p h y s ic a l a n d h u m a n p h e n o m e n a

o n t h e e a r th 's s u r fa c e . T h e u n i t s

o f fe re d p r o v id e t h e s t u d e n t w i t h

th e o p p o r t u n i t y t o s p e c ia l is e in

s e ve ra l f i e ld s o f s y s te m a t ic

g e o g r a p h y , b o th h u m a n a n d

p h y s ic a l , a n d t o s t u d y

g e o g r a p h ic a l a s p e c ts o f d e v e l o p ­m e n t p a r t i c u la r l y in S o u th A s ia ,

S o u th e a s t A s ia a n d A u s t ra l ia . P ro v is io n is m a d e fo r s t u d e n t s t o be

t r a in e d in t h e q u a n t i t a t i v e

t e c h n i q u e s a p p ro p r ia te t o th e

v a r i o u s s y s te m a t ic f i e ld s a n d to th e u n i t in A p p l i e d G e o g r a p h y w h i c h

i n t r o d u c e s s t u d e n t s t o m o d e r n

re se a rch m e th o d s . S tu d e n t s

p r o p o s in g t o e n te r ca re e rs as

p ro fe s s io n a l g e o g r a p h e r s s h o u ld p la n t h e i r c o u rs e s w i t h a v i e w to

t a k in g th e d e g re e w i t h h o n o u rs .

T h e re are se v e n u n i t s o f g e o g r a p h y

a t t h e pass d e g re e leve l , a v a i la b le

as f o l l o w s :

G e o g r a p h y 1 A s a s in g le u n i t o r as th e b e g in n i n g

o f a m a jo r o r s u b - m a jo r , w i t h a n y o f t h e f o l l o w i n g :

S y s te m a t ic G e o g r a p h y A

S y s te m a t ic G e o g r a p h y Bta k e n t o c o m p le t e a m a jo r o r

s u b - m a jo r , b u t n o t in t h e s a m e year;

R e g io n a l G e o g r a p h y A

R e g io n a l G e o g r a p h y B

ta k e n t o c o m p le t e a m a jo r o r a s u b - m a jo r , b u t n o t in th e s a m e year;

S y s te m a t ic G e o g r a p h y C ta k e n t o c o m p le t e a m a jo r or s u b - m a j o r p ro v id e d S y s te m a t ic G e o g r a p h y A a n d B h a v e be e n

c o m p le t e d ;

A p p l i e d G e o g r a p h y t o c o m p le t e a m a jo r w h i c h in c lu d e s

o n e u n i t o f S y s te m a t ic G e o g r a p h y in a d d i t i o n t o G e o g r a p h y 1;

E c o n o m ic G e o g r a p h y t h is u n i t f o r s t u d e n t s o f e c o n o m ic s m a y be ta k e n as a s in g le u n i t o r as p a r t o f a s u b - m a j o r w i t h

G e o g r a p h y 1, p ro v id e d t h a t E c o n o m ic s II has b e e n p a sse d

b e fo re o r is t a k e n c o n c u r r e n t l y .

It m a y n o t c o u n t t o w a r d s a d e g re e

w h i c h i n c lu d e s S y s te m a t ic G e o g r a p h y A.

T u to r ia ls : A t t e n d a n c e at t u t o r ia l c la sse s is c o m p u ls o r y .

L a b o ra to ry w o r k : U p t o th re e h o u rs

e a c h w e e k is r e q u i r e d o f a l l

s tu d e n t s in u n i t s e x c e p t R e g io n a l G e o g r a p h y . In t h e R e g io n a l

G e o g r a p h y u n i ts , p ro je c t a n d essay w o r k re p la c e s l a b o ra to r y w o r k .

77

Faculty of Arts

Field work is a compulsory part of several units. Up to ten days per unit may be required. Camping is often necessary. The costs to students will be mainly for food, and for hotel accommodation where necessary. Transport will normally be provided for field work but students may be required to arrange their own transport to a field centre.Honours: All students intending to major in Geography are regarded as potential honours students. Formal admission to the honours course takes place at the beginning of fourth year, and depends on the student's performance in specified units in his first three years.(For details see below p. 81). Examinations: For the pass degree, two three-hour papers in each unit, one at mid-year and one at the end of the year; each examination relates normally only to the work of the preceding semester (half year). Students in Applied Geography are examined at the end of the year. Satisfactory completion of practical work and all other class assignments is required: perform­ance in practical work, tutorials and other assignments will count towards a student's final assessment.

Any student who fails to hand in set work by the due dates and to participate in field excursions, or who does not perform satisfactorily in the mid-term examinations, may be excluded from the unit.Choice of units: Geography I provides an introduction to aspects of human and physical geography.

The units in Systematic and Applied Geography generally involve the use of quantitative

techniques. The Systematic Geography units and the Applied Geography unit also require a good deal of laboratory and field work, together with knowledge of related fields (e.g. as appropriate, biology, geology, physics, economics, sociology). The other units, of equal weight, place rather more emphasis on library, project and essay work. From 1973, a student taking Systematic Geography A will be required to have passed in two sequential semester units of first-year Statistics (two of Statistics A01, A02 and A03).A unit of Mathematics (General, Pure or Applied) is an acceptable alternative to first-year Statistics. First-year Statistics (or an approved unit of Mathematics) may be counted towards a second major or sub-major in Geography. With the permission of the Head of the Department the prerequisite units of Statistics or Mathematics may be taken concurrently with Systematic Geography A.

In selecting other units towards his degree course, a student will find it valuable to include subjects which have a bearing on his proposed studies in Geography (e g. as appropriate, botany, geology, physics, economics, economic history, political science, sociology, psychology, prehistory, etc.).

The units in Regional Geography place an emphasis on development problems. These units could with advantage be included in a degree course containing appropriate units offered by the Faculty of Asian Studies.

Students who have taken units in the Department of Geography prior to 1972 should consult the

78

Geography

Head of the Department about their choice of units.

For th e pass degree

Geography ITwo hours of lectures and one hour of tutorial, and two hours of laboratory work each week, throughout the year.Syllabus: In one semester the lectures are concerned with the geography of settlement, mainly urban; in the other, with an aspect of physical geography. Practical work is designed to demonstrate further the matter introduced in lectures and to introduce the student to essential cartographic skills.Field work: Depending on the nature of the course being offered students may be required to attend field classes and to complete assignments arising therefrom.Such classes may be held up to five days during the session; costs to students are normally quite small.Prescribed Books: Students are expected to build up their own library on a scale appropriate to their individual interests, but they will invest more wisely and avoid purchasing overlapping works if they get to know the books through library copies before buying their own.

The books listed below are complemented by considerable reading from monographs and journal articles. Books marked f are preliminary reading.Urban Geography□ Hall, Peter, The World Cities, World University Library.□ Hauser, P. M., & Schnore,

L. F„ The Study of Urbanization, Wiley.□ Hoover, E. M. & Vernon, R. Anatomy of a Metropolis, Anchor.□ Johnson, J. H., Urban Geography, Pergamon.□ fJones, Emrys, Towns and Cities.□ Murphy, R E., The American City, McGraw-Hill.□ j Rose, A. J., Patterns of Cities, Nelson.□ Thomlinson, R., Urban Structure, Random House.

Physical Geography□ fStrahler, A. N., Introduction to Physical Geography, Wiley.□ Barry, R. G. & Chorley, R. J., Atmosphere, Weather and Climate, Methuen.□ Flohn, H., Climate and Weather, Weidenfeld 8- Nicolson.Examination: One three-hour paper at mid-year and a second three-hour paper at the end of the year.

System atic Geography AUp to three hours of lectures and one hour of tutorial each week throughout the year. (See pages 77-8 for laboratory and field work requirements.)Prerequisites: Geography I and first-year Statistics (or a unit in Mathematics). With the permission of the Head of the Department, first-year Statistics may be taken concurrently with Systematic Geography A.Syllabus: Two semester courses to be chosen from geomorphology, climatology, biogeography, social geography, economic geography and political geography. Courses may be added to, or subtracted from this list, depending on

79

Faculty of Arts

availability of staff. Not all of these options may be offered in any one year. In 1972 it is expected that the following semester courses will be offered: in the first semester, biogeography and political geography; in the second semester, geomorphology and economic geography. In 1973 it is expected that geomorphology and political geography will be offered in one semester; climatology and social geography in the other semester. Outlines of semester courses and reading guides will be made available to students at the end of the preceding year.Examinations: One three-hour paper at mid-year, and a second three-hour paper at the end of the year.

Systematic Geography BUp to three hours of lectures and one hour of tutorial each week throughout the year. (See pages 77-8 for laboratory and field work requirements.)Syllabus: Two further sections chosen from the list given under Systematic Geography A.Examinations: One three-hour paper at mid-year, and a second three- hour paper at the end of the year.

Systematic Geography CUp to three hours of lectures and one hour of tutorial each week throughout the year. (See pages 77-8 for laboratory and field work requirements.) This unit is avail­able only to students who extend their studies over four or more years and who have taken Systematic Geography A and B.Syllabus: Two sections from the list given under Systematic Geography 80

A not already completed. Examinations: One three-hour paper at mid-year, and a second three- hour paper at the end of the year.

Applied GeographyTwo hours of lectures and one three-hour workshop session throughout the year. (See page 78 for field work requirements.) Syllabus: An analysis of geographic methods; an application of these methods in a selected group project. Examination: One three-hour paper.

Regional Geography AUp to three hours of lectures and one hour of tutorial each week throughout the year. Field work may be required.Syllabus: Two semester courses will be offered each year. Courses may be varied depending on availability of staff. Semester courses offered in 1972 are South Asia, and Regional Development and Planning. In 1973 courses on Southeast Asia and possibly Australasia will be available.Course outlines and reading guides will be issued to intending students at the end of the previous year. Examinations: One three-hour paper at mid-year and a second three-hour paper at the end of the year.

Regional Geography BUp to three hours of lectures and one hour of tutorial each week throughout the year. Field work may be required.Syllabus: Students take two semester courses not studied under Regional Geography A. See Regional Geography A for courses available.

Geography

Examinations: One three-hour paper at mid-year and a second three-hour paper at the end of the year.

Economic GeographyPrerequisite: Economics II must have been passed or be taken concurrently. Economic Geography cannot be counted towards a degree which includes Systematic Geography A.Syllabus: Students are required to take the economic geography semester course from Systematic Geography A, and one other semester course, to be chosen from those available in Systematic Geography A, or an approved semester course from Regional Geography A. For lecture, tutorial and laboratory work requirements, see the requirements listed under the appropriate units. It is proposed to offer Economic Geography in 1972 and again in 1974, but not in 1973.Examinations: One three-hour paper at mid-year and an additional three- hour paper at the end of the year.

For the degree w i th honoursThere is no additional formal work in the first three years.Students wishing to take the honours course musit include in their course the following units in which they will be expected to achieve a good level of performance (normally a credit or better): Geography I, Systematic Geography A, Systematic Geography B, Applied Geography. Six additional approved units must be taken, including first-year Statistics or a Mathematics unit (prerequisite for Systematic

Geography A). Students may also wish to include units in Regional Geography.

Combined honours courses in Geography and another discipline may be available, with the approval of Faculty acting on the recommendation of the Heads of the two Departments concerned.The units to be taken in a combined honours course will be determined in each case.

Geography IV (Honours)Admission to the fourth year of the honours course requires the approval of Faculty acting on the recommendation of the Head of the Department. The prerequisites for entry are noted in the preceding paragraph.

The fourth-year honours course begins on the first Monday in February, and for several weeks students will concentrate on the preparation of a paper for presentation to the seminar on the theory and practice of geography which continues into July. In the period March to July honours students take three courses. As far as practicable, some choice of courses will be available. Normally a student will select courses based on semester courses previously taken in Systematic Geography or for which he is considered by the Head of the Department to have adequate background. Mathematical Geography, when available, may be included among the three courses selected.

Subject to availability of staff the following courses, and possibly others, will be offered in 1972: biogeography, climatology, geomorphology, economic geography, political geography,

81

Faculty of Arts

mathematical geography.During July students will, after

discussion with members of staff, decide on the topic of their dissertation. This will normally be an essay, limited to 10,000 words. The dissertation topic must be approved and a supervisor appointed by the Head of the Department before the end of second term. The expenses involved in any field work and in the presentation of the dissertation must be borne by the student. The dissertation must be handed in by the end of the sixth week of third term.Examinations: Courses, seminar work and any group or individual field work during the fourth year will be assessed, by tests where necessary, during the academic year. The final examination will consist of two three-hour essay papers covering the whole field of geography as studied through the student's university course.

The assessments on courses and seminars will be valued as a total of two units, the dissertation as two units, and the final examina­tion as two units, giving an overall total of six units.Combined honours: The courses, seminars, dissertations and examinations to be taken by a student taking a combined honours degree course will be jointly determined in each case by the Heads of the Departments concerned.

For the degree of M aster of ArtsA graduate with at least second class honours division A in geography— or exceptionally in a cognate disci­pline— may proceed directly to the

course for the degree of Master of Arts by thesis (or examination) on an approved topic, provided he satisfies the Head of the Department as to his background and compe­tence in the field of study proposed. Students may be required to com­plete specified course work, e.g. on research methodology.

Master of Arts— Qualifying ExaminationA graduate with a pass degree including at least a major in geo­graphy from this or any recognised university may, with the approval of the Head of the Department, pro­ceed to the course for the degree of Master of Arts by first passing a qualifying course with the standard of at least an upper second class honours degree.

The subjects for the qualifying examination will be prescribed by the Head of the Department after taking into consideration the nature of the work already done and the student's proposed field of study.

For the degree of D octor of PhilosophyA graduate with at least second class honours division A or holding a master's degree in geography— or exceptionally in a cognate disci­pline— may proceed to a course of study towards the degree of Doctor of Philosophy by thesis. Students may be required to undertake specified course work, e.g. on research methodology.

Candidates should consult the Head of the Department concerning the fields of supervision available.

82

Germanic Languages

H. Kuhn, DrPhil, (Zur)Professor and Head of the Department

IntroductionA student with a first or second level pass in German in the New South Wales Higher School Certificate Examination or an equivalent qualification can enter a three, two or one-year pass course starting with German Language I and German Literature I. As from 1971, the language and literature components of German Language and Literature are gradually being split into separate half units and the Courses of Study (Degree of Bachelor of Arts) Rules amended accordingly. In the language components the aim is an active mastery of present-day German and a passive mastery of texts going back as far as the eighteenth century. Native German speakers are excluded from taking German Language I; admittance to German Language III and III will depend on the levell of education they received in a German-speaking country and the time elapsed since their residence in such a country. German Literature I provides a general introduction into German literature on the basis mostly of contemporary texts; German Literature II provides a more systematic treatment of works from the Classical and Romantic period (1770-1830), and in German Literature III works of the nine­teenth and twentieth centuries are studied. Students with a native language other than German are required to take the corresponding language course either in con­junction with, or previously to, the corresponding literature course.

Only students with no or little previous knowledge of German are admitted to Elementary German, an intensive language course designed to bring students within one year to a level of proficiency comparable to that of high school graduates. Students who reach credit level in the examinations and wish to proceed to German Language and/ or Literature I are required to do some work during the long vacation and pass an entrance test at the beginning of first term. Elementary German can be combined into a sub-major either with German Language I and either German Language II or German Literature I or German l(S); except for the German Language I/ll combination, the student will have to study some additional material so as to make it a course of second-year standard.

German I(S) is a half unit where historical and political texts are studied instead of works of literature. Except in the case of native German students, it has to be taken in conjunction with, or subsequent to, German Language I.

German Studies A and B and German Literature 11H and 111H are in the nature of distinction courses and should not be attempted by students who have not reached credit standard in German Language and/or Literature I. German Literature 11H and 111H are half units providing for the deepened study of additional works from the periods treated in German Literature II and III. German Studies A and B are full units providing an introduction to German Language and Literature from the twelfth to the sixteenth centuries as well as a systematic history of the German language. All

83

Faculty of Arts

these courses can be taken independently.

Dutch I and Swedish I are single units open to any student who has done at least one foreign language at second level in a New South Wales high school or holds equivalent qualifications, with the exception of native speakers of the respective language. Swedish I and Swedish II are offered in alternate years and form a sub-major; native Swedish speakers are admitted to Swedish II. It is expected that the Department will be able to offer a unit Dutch II in 1974.

Old Norse I and II are half units offered in alternate years and can be combined with Swedish I/ll into a purely Scandinavian major. They are in the nature of distinction courses; Old Norse I should not be attempted by anyone who has not reached credit level in a first-year foreign language or English unit. The Old Norse units can serve as linguistic substitutes for German Literature 11H and 111H.

An honours degree in German language and literature comprises German Language I and II,German Literature I and II and German Language and Literature III (with the exceptions mentioned for native speakers), German Studies A and B, and German Literature 11H and 111H. For students whose main interest is linguistics, alternatives may be provided for German Literature 11H and 111H. Students who wish to keep a Scandinavian component in their fourth-year work can substitute Swedish I/ll for German Studies A/B. The fourth-year syllabus offers, in addition to the three 'compulsory' components Gothic and Old High German, Stylistics, and History of

Criticism, three 'free' components determined in consultation with each year's students.

Students who wish to do a combined honours degree in German and another subject are normally required to do German Language I and II, German Literature I and II and German Language and Literature III, either of the German Studies courses, and either of the Literature Honours half units during their first three years of study; their fourth year includes two of the 'compul­sory' components and one 'free' component.

Elementary GermanSix hours a week throughout the year.Syllabus(a) Grammar and syntax(b) translation from and into German and free composition(c) reading of selected texts(d) phonetics, conversation and dictation, and(e) language laboratory.Prescribed BooksNote: Books marked t are for stu­dents intending to proceed to German Language I and/or German Literature I or German l(S) after successfully completing the course.□ Taeni-Clyne, Efficient German, Macmillan.□ Cassell's New German Dic­tionary, rev. Betteridge.□ Hearn and Seidmann, Graded German Composition, Macmillan.□ Orton, E., Reise nach Hamburg, Longmans.□ Böll, H., Abenteuer eines Brot­beutels, Twentieth Century Texts.□ fNeuse, E. K., Modern German:A Grammar Review, Appleton- Century-Crofts.

84

Germanic Languages

□ tFrisch, M., Biedermann und die Brandstifter, Twentieth Century Texts.□ f Bihl, J., In deutschen Landen, Houghton Mifflin.Term Tests: Written tests in first and second term; oral tests in second and third term.End-of-year examination: Two three-hour papers covering:(a) translation from and into German(b) comprehension, grammar and syntax.

German Language I(Half unit)Native German speakers are excluded from this course.

Three hours a week throughout the year.Prerequisite: Second or first level pass in German at the New South Wales Higher School Certificate (or equivalent qualification), or Elementary German plus entrance test.Corequisite: (recommended)German Literature I or German l(S).Syllabus:(a) Translation from German and written expression in German(b) comprehension and language laboratory work(c) oral expression.Prescribed Books□ Cassell's New German Dictionary, rev. Betteridge.□ Der Sprach-Brockhaus, Brockhaus.□ Meil, K. & Arndt, M., ABC der schwachen Verben, Hueber.□ Schmitz, W., Der Gebrauch der deutschen Präpositionen, Hueber. First term□ Brecht, B., Herr PuntHa und sein

Knecht Matti, Twentieth Century Texts.Second term□ Böll, H., Wo warst du, Adam? Ullstein.

Third term□ Carossa, H., Eine Kindheit, Blackwell (German Texts).Written work: Week-to-week exercises.Term Tests: Translation from and into German and oral work. End-of-year examination: One three-hour paper (unseen transla­tion and free composition).

German Literature I(Half unit)Three hours a week throughout the year.Prerequisite: Second or first level pass in German at the New South Wales Higher School Certificate (or equivalent qualification), or Ele­mentary German plus entrance test. Corequisite: (recommended) German Language I (except for German speakers).

Syllabus:(a) Survey of the history of German literature and civilisation from the eighteenth century to the present day{b) study of selected twentieth century authors.Prescribed Books General□ Forster, L. (ed.), The Penguin Book of German Verse.First term:□ Kusenberg, K., Mal was andres, Harrap.□ Dürrenmatt, F., Drei Hörspiele, Holt, Rinehart & Winston.□ Frisch, M., Andorra, Twentieth Century Texts.

85

Faculty of Arts

□ Brecht, B„ Herr PuntHa und sein Knecht Matti, Twentieth Century Texts.Second term□ Kafka, F., Das Urteil, Fischer- Bücherei.□ Boll, H., Wo warst du, Adam? Ullstein.□ Gaiser, G., Schlussball, Fischer- Bücherei.Third term□ Brüder Grimm, Ausgewählte Kinder und Hausmärchen, Reclam.□ Bergengruen, W., Das Hornunger Heimweh, Reclam.□ Carossa, H., Eine Kindheit, Blackwell (German Texts).Written Work: Five comment questions and one essay. End-of-year examination: One three-hour paper.

German l(S)(Half unit)This course will be offered only if at least six students enrol for it.

Three hours a week throughout the year.Prerequisite: Second or first level pass in German at the New South Wales Higher School Certificate (or equivalent qualification), or Elementary German plus entrance test.Corequisite: (recommended) German Language I (except for German speakers).Syllabus:A study of selected texts illustrating the political, intellectual and social history of the German-speaking countries.

In the second half of the year students have an opportunity to specialise in an area of their choice.

Prescribed Books□ Putzger, F. W., Historischer Schulatlas, Velhagen & Klasing.□ Damals und heute, Klett/ Harrap.□ Brett-Evan, D., Makers of the Twentieth Century, Prentice-Hall. Other texts set individually. Written work: Five comment questions and one essay.End-of-year examination: One three-hour paper.

German Language II(Half unit)Two to three hours a week plus a common hour with German Literature II.Prerequisite: German Language I or equivalent qualification. Corequisite: (recommended) German Literature II.Syllabus:(a) Written expression(ib) oral work(c) a survey of Germancivilisation in the 15th, 16th and1 7th centuries.Prescribed Books General□ Duden: Stilwörterbuch der deutschen Sprache, Bibliographisches Institut.□ Kolisko, G. &■ Yuill, W. E„ Practice in German Prose.□ Schmitz, W., Übungen zu synonymen Verben, Hueber.□ Forster, L., (ed.), The Penguin Book of German Verse.First term --Lessing, G. E., Nathan der Weise, Reclam.Second term-.□ Goethe, J. W., Wilhelm Meisters Lehrjahre, Goldmann (Taschenbücher).

86

Germanic Languages

Third term--□ Hoffmann, E. T. A., Der goldene Topf, Reclam.Written work: Week-to-week exercises.Term tests: Translation into German and oral expression. End-of-year examination: fTwo three-hour papers covering

(a) unseen translation and free composition;t(£ ) survey course and translation from prescribed texts, ffo r students who do not take German Literature II concurrently.

German Literature II(Half unit)Two to three hours a week plus a common hour with German Language II.Prerequisite: German Literature I or equivalent qualification.Syllabus:(a) German literature 1750-1830(b ) a survey of German civilisation in the 15th, 16th and 17th centuries.Prescribed Books A student is required to study all the 'intensive' texts, of which he has to purchase his own copies, and five of the 'extensive' texts (at least one from each term list), of which any edition may be used. General□ Frenzel, H. A. & E., Daten deutscher Dichtung I: Von den Anfängen bis zur Romantik, dtv.□ Die Bibel nach der deutschen Übersetzung Martin Luthers (billige Ausgabe), Wüttembergische Bibelanstalt.□ Forster, L. (ed.), The Penguin Book of German Verse.First term— Intensive□ Lessing, G. E., Minna von

Barnhelm; Nathan der Weise,Reclam.□ Schiller, F., Kabale und Liebe, Reclam or Blackwell (German Texts).□ Goethe, J. W., Poems,Blackwell (German Texts).First term— Extensive□ Lessing, G. E., Emilia Galotti.□ Dufner & Hubbs, German Essays /. Aufklärung.□ Goethe, J. W., Die Leiden des jungen Werthers.□ Goethe, J. W., Götz von Berlichingen.□ Schiller, F., Die Räuber.Second term— Intensive□ Goethe, J. W., Faust Part /,Heath.□ Goethe, J. W., Wilhelm Meisters Lehrjahre, Goldmann (Taschenbücher).□ Schiller, F., Wallenstein,Rowohlt Klassiker.Second term— Extensive□ Goethe, J. W., Egmont; Tasso; Fiermann und Dorothea.□ Schiller, F., Maria Stuart; Die Jungfrau von Orleans.Third term— Intensive□ Hölderlin, F., Poems, Penguin.□ Kleist, H. v., Das Erdbeben in Chili, Reclam; Der zerbrochene Krug, ed. R. Samuel, Macmillan.□ Hoffmann, E. T. A„ Der goldene Topf, Reclam.Third term— Extensive□ Kleist, H. v., Michael Kohlhaas; Amphitryon.□ Tieck, L. Der blonde Eckbert, and Eichendorff, J. v., Aus dem Leben eines Taugenichts.□ Brentano, C. Gedichte (selection) and Geschichten vom braven Kasperl und dem schönen Annerl. Written work: Five comment questions and a 2000-word essay.

87

Faculty of Arts

Term tests: Translation from prescribed texts.End-of-year examination: Two three-hour papers covering(a) literature (intensive)(b) literature (extensive) and survey course.

Germ an Literature 11H(Half unit)A two-hours seminar throughout the year.

Prerequisite: German Language I and German Literature I at credit level or equivalent qualification. Corequisite: (recommended)German Language II and German Literature II.Syllabus: A deepened study of German literature 1720-1830.

Prescribed Books First term□ Elschenbroich, A., Deutsche Dichtung im 18. Jahrhundert (available through the Department). Second term□ Goethe, J. W., Iphigenie auf Tauris, Reclam; West-östlicher Divan, dtv.□ Schiller, F., Wilhelm Tell,Reclam.Third term□ Novalis, Heinrich von Ofterdingen, Reclam.□ Kleist, H. v., Prinz Friedrich von Homburg, ed. R. Samuel, Harrap.□ Jean Paul, Dr Katzenbergers Badereise, Reclam.Written work: One long or two short essays.Term tests: Translation from prescribed texts.End-of-year examination: One three-hour paper.

Germ an Language and Literature IIIFive to six hours a week throughout the year.Prerequisite: German Language and Literature II.Syllabus:(a) A survey of German civilisation in the 1 5th, 1 6th and 1 7th centuries.(b ) German literature from 1830 to the present(c) written expression(d) oral work.Preliminary Reading:□ Treue, W., Deutschland seit 1848, Steiner.

Prescribed Books A student is required to study all the 'intensive' texts, of which he has to purchase his own copies, and five of the 'extensive' texts (at least one from each term list), of which any edition may be used.

General□ Frenzel, H. A. & E., Daten deutscher Dichtung II; Vom Biedermeier bis zur Gegenwart, dtv.□ Forster, L. (ed.), Penguin Book of German Verse.First term—Intensive□ Mörike, E., Gedichte, Reclam.□ Heine, H., Poems, ed. K. Webber, Blackwell (German Texts).□ Deutschland erzählt: Von Büchner bis Hauptmann, Fischer-Bücherei.□ Gotthelf, J., Die schwarze Spinne, Blackwell (German texts).□ Mörike, E., Mozart auf der Reise nach Prag, Reclam.

First term— Extensive□ Büchner, G., Woyzeck.□ Grillparzer, F., König Ottokars Glück und Ende.□ Hebbel, F., Maria Magdalena.

88

Germanic Languages

□ Raimund, F., Der Alpenkönig und der Menschenfeind.Second term—Intensive□ Rilke, R. M., Gedichte, Reclam.□ Hofmannsthal, H. v., Gedichte und kleine Dramen, Bibliothek Suhrkamp.□ Fontane, Th., (title to be announced).□ Mann, Th., Bekenntnisse des Hochstaplers Felix Krull, Fischer- Bücherei.□ Kafka, F., Der Prozess, Fischer- Bücherei.Second term—Extensive□ Rilke, R. M., Malte Laurids Brigge.□ Hofmannsthal, H. v., Four Stories.□ Mann, Th., Der Tod in Venedig.□ Schnitzler, A., Anatol—Anatols Grössen wahn— Der grüne Kakadu.Third term—Intensive□ Trakl, G., Gedichte, Fischer- Bücherei.□ Hauptmann, G., Die Ratten, Ullstein- Bücher.□ Brecht, B., Mutter Courage und ihre Kinder, Suhrkamp.□ Zuckmayer, C., Des Teufels General, Fischer (Schulausgabe). Third term—Extensive□ Hesse, H., Der Steppenwolf.□ Broch, H., Die Schlafwandler I: Pasenow oder Die Romantik.□ Brecht, B., Kalendergeschichten.□ Böll, H., Ende einer Dienstfahrt.Written work: Week-to-week assignments in languages; one 2500-word essay in literature.Term tests: Translation from and into German and oral work. End-of-year examination: Three papers covering

(a) unseen translation and free composition(b) literature (intensive)(c) literature (extensive) and survey course.

German Literature IIIH(Half unit)A two-hour seminar throughout the year.Prerequisite: German Language and Literature II at credit level. Corequisite: (recommended)German Language and Literature III. Syllabus:(a) A deepened study of German Literature 1830-1930(b) modern German essays. Prescribed BooksFirst term□ Keller, G., Gedichte, Reclam.□ Droste-Hülshoff, A. v., Gedichte, Reclam.□ Busch, W., Die Kirmes, Reclam.□ Nestroy, J., Lumpazivagabundus, Reclam.□ Stifter, A., Bunte Steine, Goldmann (Taschenbücher).□ Meyer, C. F., Jürg Jenatsch, Reclam.Second term□ Nietzsche, F., Die Geburt der Tragödie, Reclam.□ George, S., Gedichte, Reclam.□ Morgenstern, Ch., Galgenlieder, dtv.□ Hauptmann, G., Der Biberpelz, Ullstein-Bücher.□ Walser, R., Kleine Wanderung, Reclam.□ Barlach, E., Der arme Vetter, Reclam.Third termTo be announced later.Written work: One long or two short essays.

89

Faculty of Arts

Term tests: Translation from prescribed texts.End-of-year examination: One three-hour paper.

German Studies AThis unit w ill not be offered in 1972.Three hours a week throughout the year.

Prerequisite: German Language I and German Literature I at credit level.Corequisite: (recommended)German Language II and German Literature II or German Language and Literature III.Syllabus:(a) Middle High German Language and Literature(b) history of the German Language I: phonology, morphology, vocabulary.Written work: One 2,000-2,500- word essay.Term tests: Translation from prescribed texts in first and second term.End-of-year examination: Two three-hour papers.

German Studies BThree hours a week throughout the year.Syllabus:(a) German literature from the middle of the fifteenth to the end of the seventeenth century {b) history of the German Language II: syntax, word-formation, dialects.Prescribed Books First term:□ Johannes von Tepl, Der Ackermann aus Böhmen, Blackwell (German Texts).

Hist or ia von D. Johann

Fausten, Reclam.□ Luther, M., An den christlichen Adel deutscher Nation und andere Schriften, Reclam.□ Das Zürcher Spiel vom reichen Mann und vom armen Lazarus, Reclam.

Dal I., Kurze deutsche Syntax, Niemeyer, Tübingen.

Second term:Epochen der deutschen Lyrik 4:

1600-1700, dtv.Gryphius, A., Cardenio und

Celinde, Reclam.Gryphius, A., Papinianus,

Reclam.Third term:

Lohenstein, D. C. v., Cleopatra, Reclam.

Grimmelshausen, H. J. C. v.,Der abenteuerliche Simp/icissimus (Auswahl), Reclam.

Reuter, C., Schelmuffsky,Reclam.

Hebel, J. P., Alemannische Gedichte, Reclam.□ Niebergall, E. E., Datterich, Komedia.□ Groth, K., Quickborn, Reclam. Written work: One 2,000-2,500- word essay.Term tests: Translation from prescribed texts in first and second term.End-of-year examination: Two three-hour papers.

Swedish IThis course will be offered only if at least six students enrol in it.

Five hours a week throughout the year.Syllabus:(a) Grammar(b) reading(c) written expression in Swedish(d) oral work including dictation

90

Germanic Languages

(e) language laboratory practice.Prescribed Books

Björkhagen, I., Modern Swedish Grammar, Svenska Bökforlaget.

Modern engelsk-svensk ordbok, Prisma.

Modern svensk-engelsk ordbok. Prisma.First term:□ Hildeman-Beite-Higelin,Learn Swedish: Swedish Reader for Beginners, Almqvist & Wiksell.□ Hildeman-Hedbäck, Lär er svenska: Övningsbok, Almqvist & Wiksell.Second term:□ Hildeman-Hildeman-Olsson, Practise Swedish, Almqvist & Wiksell.

Jansson, T., Pappan och havet, Gebers.Third term:

Söderberg, H., Historietter, Aldus/Bonniers (Delfin Serien).Term tests: Written tests in first and second term; oral tests in second and third term.End-of-year examination: Two three-hour papers covering:(a) translation from and into Swedish(b ) comprehension, grammar and syntax.

Swedish IIThis unitwill not be offered in 1972.

Five hours a week throughout the year.Prerequisite: Swedish I (or equiva­lent qualification).Syllabus:(a) A survey of the history of Swedish civilisation (one hour a week)(b) an introduction into Swedish literature by a study of selected

authors of the modern period (two hours a week)(c) further language work designed to strengthen the student's active command of Swedish; in third term the distinctive features of Danish and Norwegian are introduced (two hours a week).Written work: Five comment questions and one essay on literature.Term tests: Translation from and into Swedish and oral expression.In third term, Danish and Norwegian texts are included for translation into English.End-of-year examination: Two three-hour papers covering (a) unseen translation and free composition{b) literature and civilisation.

Old Norse I(Half unit)This course will not be offered in 1972.

Two hours a week throughout the year.Syllabus: An introduction into the Old Norse language and the literature and civilisation of Iceland during the Middle Ages.Written work: One 2,000-2,500- word essay.End-of-year examination: One three-hour paper.

This half-unit is restricted to second and third-year students who have reached credit level in a language course.

Old Norse II(Half unit)One weekly seminar throughout the year.Prerequisite: Old Norse I or equivalent qualification.

91

Faculty of Arts

Syllabus:(a) A study of the Icelandic saga, with emphasis on the family saga(b) an introduction into Eddie and Skaldic poetry.Prescribed Books: To be determined in consultation with the students taking the course.Written work: One 2,500-word essay.End-of-year examination: One three-hour paper.

This half unit is restricted to third and fourth-year students.

Dutch IThis course will be offered only if at least six students enrol in it.

Five hours a week throughout the year.Syllabus:(a) Grammar{b) reading and translation from Dutch(c) written expression in Dutch {d) oral work and language laboratory practice.Prescribed Books□ Smit, J. & Meijer, R. P„Dutch Grammar and Reader, Melbourne UP.□ Renier, F. G., Dutch-Engiish and English-Dutch Dictionary, Wolters.□ Lagerwey, W., Speak Dutch, Meulenhoff.□ Haasse, H. S., Oeroeg, Salamander Pockets.Further texts may be announced later.Term tests: Translation from and into Dutch and oral work. End-of-year examination: Two three-hour papers covering(a) translation from and into Dutch(b) comprehension, grammar and syntax.

For the degree w ith honours Honours School in GermanFor the degree with honours in German the course extends over four years and consists of:(a) German Language I, German Literature I, German Language II, German Literature II and German Language and Literature III, in this order(ib) German Studies A and B, in either order(c) German Literature 11H and 111H, in this order{d) German IV (Honours), and (e) at least an approved sub-major and two approved single units.

Admission to the Honours School, which is normally at the end of first year, and admission to fourth year is at the discretion of the Head of the Department and normally requires at least credit standard in the previous year.

If German Literature 11H is cancelled because of too small an enrolment (the normal minimum is three), there will be no German Literature 111H in the following year, and students are required to substitute an approved alternative unit.

Students whose main interest is linguistic may be able to replace German Literature 11H and 111H by an alternative arrangement.

Students are strongly advised to enrol in one course outside their German work in third year, even if they should not need an additional unit.

German IV (Honours)Normally seven hours a week in first and second term; in third term classes by arrangement.Syllabus:'Compulsory' components

92

Germanic Languages

(a) History and methods of German literary criticism(b) stylistics(c) Gothic and Old High German. 'Free' components(a) Three topics for special study determined in consultation with the students. The Department will permit students to include among these, studies in fields other than German language and literature if they bear some relevance to their German studies. If two or more components are outside the German field, the number of 'compulsory' components may be reduced to two.(b ) A thesis bearing on some aspects of German (or Germanic) language or literature (excluding the topics for special study).Prescribed Books□ Anderegg, I., Leseübungen, Vandenhoeck u. Ruprecht.□ Braune-Ebbinghaus, Gotische Grammatik; Althochdeutsches Lesebuch, Niemeyer, Tübingen.□ Eggers, H., Deutsche Sprach­geschichte /: Das Althochdeutsche, rororo.□ Killy, W., Deutscher Kitsch, Vandenhoeck u. Ruprecht (Kleine Vandenhoeck-Reihe).Other books set individually Examination: No less than three and no more than six three-hour papers, depending on the number and quality of essays written during the year.

Honours School in Germanic Languages and LiteraturesStudents with a sub-major in Swedish who want to pursue their interest in the Scandinavian field can do so within the basic framework provided by the Honours School in German. They can substitute

their Swedish sub-major for German Studies A and B, they may be provided with a special honours half unit instead of German Literature 111H if teaching staff is available, and they are required to devote at least one third of their honours year to the Scandinavian languages.

Similar arrangements will be made for students of Dutch when a Dutch sub-major is introduced.

Combined honoursThe German component in the course of a student who wishes to do combined honours in this and another department is the following:(a) German Language I and II, German Literature I and II,German Language and Literature III(b) German Studies A or B(c) German Literature 11H or 111H {d) two 'compulsory' components and one 'free' component of German IV(e) the topic of the thesis to be determined in consultation with the two departments concerned.

For the degrees of M aster of Arts and Doctor of PhilosophyCandidates normally take an active part in the postgraduate seminar and in a weekly postgraduate reading course in addition to their thesis work. Details are arranged by the Head of the Department.

93

History

C. M . H. Clark, MA (Melb.) Professor and Head of the Department

IntroductionStudents can study history as part of their work for a degree at the pass level in arts, Asian studies, economics or law. There are sixteen units available for such students. In the first year they can choose between History IA, History IB, History 1C, and History ID. The second-year units are History IIA, History MB, History 11C, History IID, History HE and History IIF. The third-year units are History 111 A, History IIIB, History 111C, History HID (not taught in 1972),History HIE (not taught in 1 972) and History 111F.

Students can also take the degree with honours in the Honours School in History (see page 101).

Students who have taken the pass degree with a major in history can proceed to the degree of Master of Arts in two stages (see page 105).

The following units are taught in the Department of History:For pass and honours students History IA (Australian)History IB (Prehistory)History IC (British)History ID (Rise of Christendom) History IIA (Australian 1835-1854) History IIB (American)History 11C (African)History IID (Modern Revolutions) History HE (Merrie Englande 1154-

1399)History IIF (Renaissance and

Reformation)History 111A (Australian 1919-

1971)History IIIB (American 1919-1971) History INC (Revolts and Insur­

gencies)

History HID (The English Revolu­tion) (not taught in 1972)

History IIIE (Pacific) (not taught in 1972)

History IMF (Hellenistic World)For students proceeding to the degree with honours:Thesis of 1 5,000 words Historiography (including historical

method)Special subject.General Requirements In all units in history students will be required to submit written work. Students who fail to submit such work by the due dates may be excluded from the Annual Examina­tion. Students are also required to attend tutorial classes and to pre­sent prescribed tutorial exercises.In all units students will be expected to possess the prescribed textbooks as they will be expected to use them both in tutorials and, in some cases, at the Annual Examination.

History IA(Australian)

Two lectures and one tutorial a week throughout the year.Syllabus: The history of Australia from the eighteenth century to the present.

Students are required to submit one 3,000 word essay and other written work during the year. Preliminary Reading: One or more from:□ Blainey, G., The Tyranny of Distance, Sun Books.□ Clark, M., A Short History of Australia, Mentor.□ Hancock, W. K., Australia, Jacaranda.□ Pike, D., Australia: The Quiet Continent, Cambridge UP.

94

History

Prescribed Books□ Clark, C. M. H. (ed.), Select Documents in Australian History 1788-1850; Select Documents in Australian History 1851-1900,A & R.□ Historical Studies: Select Articles, First and Second Series, Melbourne UP.Examination: One three-hour paper. Some examination credit will be given for work done during the year.

History IB(Prehistory)

Up to two lectures and one tutorial a week throughout the year.Syllabus: An introduction to prehistory and to the methods and theory of archaeology, intended to serve both as an introduction to history and to subsequent specialised subjects in prehistory.

The theme will be the origin and growth of human societies in the Old World from the earliest traces of hunting and food gathering activities, through early plant and animal domestication to the beginnings of urban life.

Students are required to write two essays, each of about 1,500 words, and some shorter tutorial papers.Preliminary Reading□ Braid wood, R. J., Prehistoric Men, Scott.

Bibby, G., The Testimony of the Spade, Fontana.□ Clark, G., Archaeology and Society, University Paperbacks. Prescribed Books□ Clark, G. & Piggot, S., Pre­historic Societies, Pelican.□ Hole, F. & Heizer, R. F., An

Introduction to Prehistoric Archaeology, Holt, Rinehart & Winston.Examination: One three-hour paper. Some examination credit will be given for work done during the year.

History IC(British)

Two lectures and one tutorial a week throughout the year.Syllabus: Victorian England: a study of men, ideas and movements in the years 1837-1901, together with the theme of doubt and certainty. Emphasis will be given to politicians such as Peel, Palmerston, Disraeli and Gladstone; to writers and thinkers such as Owen, Darwin, Marx, Arnold, Freud and Oscar Wilde; and to subjects such as Chartism and crime, industrialism and imperialism.

Students are required to submit one 3,000 word essay and three 1,500 word tutorial papers during the year.Preliminary Reading□ Briggs, A., Victorian People, Pelican.□ Cantor, N., The English Tradition, vol. 2, Macmillan.□ Woodward, E. L, The Age of Reform, 1815-1870, Oxford UP.□ Young, G. M., Victorian England Portrait of an Age, Oxford UP. Prescribed BooksFirst term□ Dickens, C., The Personal History of David Copperfield, Penguin.Second term□ Arnold, M„ Culture and Anarchy, Cambridge UP.

95

Faculty of Arts

Third term□ Gosse, E., Father and Son, Penguin.Examination: One three-hour paper. Some examination credit will be given for work done during the year.

History ID(Rise of Christendom)

Two lectures and one tutorial a week throughout the year.Syllabus: A study of the rise of Christendom from the beginnings of the Christian era to the age of the Reformation.

Students are required to submit two 2,000-word essays and two 1,000-word papers during the year. Prescribed Books□ Barraclough, G., The Medieval Papacy, Thames 8- Hudson.□ Barry, C. J. (ed.), Readings in Church History, vol. I. Newman Press.□ Bettenson, H. (ed.), Documents of the Christian Church, Oxford UP.□ Deanesly, M., A History of the Medieval Church, Methuen.□ Eusebius, The History of the Church, Penguin.□ Frend, W. H. C., The Early Church, Hodder 8 Stoughton.□ Trevor-Roper, H., The Rise of Christian Europe, Thames 8 Hudson. Examination: One three-hour paper. Some examination credit will be given for work done during the year.

History IIA(Australian 1835-1854)

Two lectures and one tutorial a week throughout the year.Syllabus: The history of Australia from 1 835 to 1854.

Students are required to submit two 3,000 word essays and two short papers during the year.

Preliminary Reading: Students should read one of the outline histories of Australia, and C. M. H. Clark, A History of Australia, vol. 2. Melbourne UP.Prescribed Books□ Clark, M., (ed.), Sources of Australian History, World's Classics.□ Knight, R. L, Illiberal Liberal, Melbourne UP.□ Pike, D. H., Paradise of Dissent, Melbourne UP.□ Roe, 0. M., Quest for Authority in Eastern Australia, Melbourne UP.□ Melbourne, A. C. V., Early Constitutional Development in Australia, Queensland UP. Examination: One three-hour paper. Some examination credit will be given for work done during the year.

History IIB(American)

Two lectures and one tutorial a week throughout the year.Syllabus: The history of colonial North America and the United States of America, 1 760-1840.

Students are required to write one 3,000 and one 3,000-5,000 word essay and at least one tutorial paper.Preliminary Reading□ Blum, J., Catton, B., et al., The American Experience, Harcourt Brace 8 World.□ Boorstin, D., The Americans:The Colonial Experience, Penguin.□ Morgan, E., Birth of the Republic, Chicago UP.Prescribed Books□ Borden, M., Parties and Politics in the Early Republic, Crowell.□ Brown, R. E., Middle Class Democracy and the Revolution in

96

History

Massachusetts, Harper Torchbooks.□ Gatell, F. 0., Essays on Jacksonian America, Holt, Rinehart & Winston.□ Greene, J. P., Colonies to Nation, McGraw-Hill.□ Jordan, W., White over Black, Penguin.□ Land, A. C., Bases of the Plantation Society, Harper Torchbooks.□ McCormick, R. P., The Second American Party System, North Carolina UP.□ Smelser, M., The Democratic Republic, Harper Torchbooks.□ Ubbellodhe, C.( The American Colonies and the British Empire, Crowell.Examinations: One three-hour paper half-way through the year; and another three-hour paper at the end of third term. Some examination credit will be given for work done during the year.

History IIC(African)

Two lectures and one tutorial a week throughout the year. Syllabus: Black Africa: a survey of change and continuity in African political and social systems from c. 1800 to the present day through a study of trade and politics before European rule, the imposition and impact of colonialism, the rise of nationalism and the experience of independence.

Students are required to submit three 1,500-word class papers during the year. They may also submit a long essay of 3,000- 5,000 words.Preliminary Reading □ Lloyd, P. C., Africa in Social Change, Penguin.

□ Oliver, R. & Fage, J. D., A Short History of Africa, Pelican.□ Ogot, B. & Kiernan, J. A.,Zamani: A Survey of East African History, East African Publishing House.□ Webster, J. B. & Boahen, A. A., The Revolutionary Years, West Africa since 1800, Longmans.Examination: One three-hour paper. Class papers will count for 30% in the final assessment. If a long essay is submitted it will count for an extra 20%. Credit will also be given for contributions to tutorial discussions.

History IID(Modern Revolutions)

Two lectures and one tutorial a week throughout the year.Syllabus: A survey of revolutionary upheaval from the late eighteenth to mid-twentieth century. Emphasis will be placed upon the French Revolution of 1789, and upon the socialist and fascist movements in Germany, Russia and China in the nineteenth and twentieth centuries.

Students are required to submit two 3,000 word essays and tutorial papers as required during the year.Preliminary Reading□ Brinton, C., The Anatomy of Revolution, Vintage.□ Kamenka, E. (ed.), A World in Revolution ?, AN UP.Prescribed Books□ Rude, G., Revolutionary Europe 1783-1815, Fontana.□ Stewart, J. H., A Documentary Survey of the French Revolution, Collier-Macmillan.□ Marx, K., Selected Works,Foreign Languages Publishing House, Moscow.□ Florinsky, M., Russia: a history

97

Faculty of Arts

and an interpretation, 2 vols. Macmillan.□ Seton-Watson, H., The Russian Empire 1801-1917, Oxford UP.□ Friguglietti, J. & Kennedy, E. (eds.), The Shaping of Modern France, Collier-Macmillan.□ Lenin, V. I., Selected Works, Foreign Languages Publishing House, Moscow.□ Schurmann, F. & Schell, 0.(eds.), China Readings, 3 vols, Pelican.□ Mao Tse-tung, Selected Works, Foreign Languages Press, Peking. Examination: One three-hour paper. Some examination credit will be given for work done during the year.

History ME(Merrie Englande 1154-1399)

One lecture and one tutorial of up to two hours per week throughout the year.Syllabus: England under the Plantagenets: a study of a medieval society. Emphasis will be given to subjects such as the relations of crown and baronage, the origins of parliament, the manorial system, and the relations of Church and State.

Students are required to submit two 3,000-word essays and to contribute short papers to tutorials.Prescribed Books□ Bennett, H. S., Life on the English Manor, Cambridge UP.□ Myers, A. R.( England in the late Middle Ages, Pelican.□ Spufford, P., Origins of the English Parliament, Longmans.□ Stenton, D. M., English Society in the Early Middle Ages, Pelican.□ Titow, J. Z., English Rural Society 1200-1350, Allen & Unwin.

Reading guides will be distributed throughout the year.Examination: One three-hour paper. Some examination credit will be given for work done during the year.

History IIF(Renaissance and Reformation)

Two lectures and one tutorial throughout the year.Syllabus: European history,1300 to 1600, with particular attention to cultural history.

Students are required to submit two 3,000-word essays, and to present reports on selected topics in tutorials.Preliminary Reading

Burckhardt, Jacob, The Civilization of the Renaissance in Italy, Harper or Phaidon.

Dickens, A. G., Reformation and Society in Sixteenth-Century Europe, Thames & Hudson. Prescribed Books □ Gilmore, Myron, The World of Humanism, 1453-1517, Harper.

Hurstfield, Joel, (ed ), The Reformation Crisis, Edward Arnold or Harper.Examination: One three-hour paper at the end of the year. Some examination credit will be given for work done during the year.

History MIA(Australian 1919-1971)

Two lectures and one tutorial a week throughout the year.Syllabus: Selected themes from the history of Australia, 1 91 9-1 971, including Australia's position in the world.

Students are required to submit two 3,000-word essays and shorter written papers during the year.

98

History

Prescribed BooksReading lists will be issued prior to the commencement of the unit. Examination: One three-hour paper. Some examination credit will be given for work done during the year.

History NIB(American 1 91 9-1 971)

One lecture per week and one tutorial per fortnight throughout the year; and individual tutorials from time to time.Syllabus: The history of the United States of America from 1 91 9 to 1971, especially on the period 1 945 to 1 971; on themes of social, religious and 'cultural' history; and not on politics and international relations.

Students are required to write at least three short essays (1,500 to 2,000 words each.)Preliminary Reading Either□ Blum, J., Catton B., et al.,The American Experience. Harcourt Brace & World.or Link, A., American Epoch, Knopf. Prescribed Books

Fishel, L. & Quarles, B., Black Americans. Scott.

May, E. R., Anxiety and Affluence, McGraw-Hill . Examination: One three-hour paper half-way through the year; and another three-hour paper at the end of third term. Some examination credit will be given for work done during the year.

History MIC(Revolts and Insurgencies)

Two lectures and one tutorial a week throughout the year.Syllabus: The Indian Nationalist Struggles, the Vietminh, and the

Malayan Insurgency 1948-1960.Students are required to submit

one 6,000-word essay during the year.Preliminary Reading:□ Isaacs, H. R., No Peace for Asia, Collier- Macmillan.□ Wint, G., The British in Asia,Faber.

Panikkar, K. M., Asia and Western Dominance, Allen & Unwin.□ Spencer Chapman, F., The Jungle is Neutral, Corgi.□ Bodard, L., The Quicksand War: Prelude to Vietnam, Faber.Prescribed Books□ de Bary, W. T., Sources of the Indian Tradition, vol. 2, Columbia UP.□ Sitaramayya, P., The History of the Indian National Congress,Padma.□ Sharma, J. S. (ed.), India's Struggle for Freedom, Select Documents and Sources, Chand.□ Chinh, T., Primer for Revolt, Praeger.□ Duncanson, D. J., Government and Revolution in Vietnam, Oxford UP.□ Cole, A. B. (ed.), Conflict in Indo-China, A Documentary History 1945-1955, Cornell UP.□ Pomeroy, W. J. (ed.), Guerrilla Warfare and Marxism, International Publishers.Examination: One three-hour paper. Some examination credit will be given for work done during the year.

History MID(The English Revolution)(Not taught in 1 972)

One lecture, one seminar and one tutorial a week throughout the year. Syllabus: A study of selected political, religious, economic and

99

Faculty of Arts

social problems in England from the Short Parliament of 1640 to the Restoration of Charles II in 1660.

Students are required to submit two 3,000-word essays and to contribute shorter papers to seminars.Preliminary Reading□ Hill, C., The Century of Revolu­tion, Sphere Books.Prescribed Books□ Gardiner, S. R., Constitutional Documents of the Puritan Revolu­tion, Oxford UP.□ Ives, E. W. (ed.), The English Revolution 1600-1660, Edward Arnold.□ Roots, I., The Great Rebellion, 1642-1660, Batsford.□ Stone, L, Social Change and Revolution in England 1540-1640, Longmans.□ Wedgwood, C. V., The Trial of Charles I, Fontana.Examination. One three-hour paper. Some examination credit will be given for work done during the year.

History HIE(Pacific)(Not taught in 1 972)

Two lectures and one tutorial throughout the year.Syllabus: The Pacific islands since European contact, with a brief survey of present knowledge of the pre-history of the area.

Students are required to submit two 3,000-word essays and to present reports on selected topics in tutorials.Preliminary Reading□ Suggs, R. C., The Island Civilisa­tions of Polynesia, Mentor.□ Oliver, D., The Pacific Islands, Doubleday.□ Davidson, J. W., 'Problems of

Pacific History', Journal o f Pacific History, vol. 1 (1966).

Reading guides will be distributed throughout the year.Examination: One three-hour paper. Some examination credit will be given for work done during the year.

History IMF(Hellenistic World)

Seminars, tutorials and lectures equivalent to three hours teaching a week.Syllabus: The history and civilisa­tion of the Graeco-Oriental and Mediterranean world from Alexander the Great to the Emperor Hadrian, with especial reference to the interpenetration of cultures and the development of thought and religion. Each student will also specialise in a limited topic, to be arranged with the lecturer, if possible before first term.

Written work will consist of one supervised essay of 7,000 words or one of 5,000 and one of 3,000 with a few short papers.Preliminary Reading□ Farrington, B., The Faith of Epicurus, Weidenfeld Goldbacks.□ Hadas, M„ Hellenistic Culture, Columbia.□ Tarn, W. W. & Griffith, G. T„ Hellenistic Civilization, University Paperbacks.□ Tcherikover, V., Hellenistic Civilization and the Jews,(tr. Appelbaum, S.), Athenaeum. Prescribed Books□ The Apocrypha: An American Translation (tr. Goodspeed, E. J.), Vintage.□ Arrian, Alexander, Penguin.□ The New English Bible: The New Testament, Penguin.□ Philo Judaeus, The Essentia!

100

History

Philo (ed. Glatzer N. N., tr. Yonge C D.), Schocken Paperbacks.

Plutarch, On Love, the Family and the Good Life (tr. Hadas M.), Mentor.□ Plutarch, Plutarch's Lives, vols.2 & 3, Everyman.□ Polybius, The Histories (ed.Badian E., tr. Chambers M.), Washington Square Press.□ Saunders, J. L, Greek and Roman Philosophy After Aristotle, Collier-Macmillan. Recommended ReadingIn general students will be required to compile their own biblio­graphies. However, those with no previous knowledge of some or all of the civilisations concerned should read whichever of these are appropriate:□ Bowra, C. M., The Greek Experience, Mentor.□ Frankfort, H., Ancient Egyptian Religion, Harper Torch books.□ Frye, R. N., The Persian Heritage, Mentor.□ Hexter, J. A., The Judaeo- Christian Tradition, Harper.□ Lewis, N. &• Reinhold, M„Roman Civilization: Sourcebook I: The Republic, Harper Torchbooks.□ Oppenheim, A. Leo, Ancient Mesopotamia, Phoenix Books. Assessment: Based equally upon written work, class work, and a final examination comprising s three- hour paper and an oral.

For the degree w ith honours Honours School in HistoryThe course for the degree with honours in the Honours School in History comprises:(a) at least one of the following units passed with high distinction or distinction:

History IA (Australian)History IB (Prehistory)History 1C (British)History ID (Rise of Christendom){b) four of the following units taken at honours level with passes at credit grade or higher in all four: History 11A (Australian 1835-1854) History 11B (American)History 11C (African)History IID (Modern Revolutions) History ME (Merrie Englande

1154-1399)History 11F (Renaissance and

Reformation)History 111A (Australian 1919-1971) History NIB (American 1919-1971) History IIIC (Revolts and

Insurgencies)History HID (The English

Revolution) (not taught in 1972) History HIE (Pacific) (not taught

in 1972)History IMF (Hellenistic World)(c) either an approved major and an approved single unit, taken at pass level;or an approved sub-major and two approved single units, taken at pass levelor two approved sub-majors taken at pass level(d) History IV as prescribed from year to year by the Head of the History Department

In 1972, History IV comprises:A thesis of 15,000 words on an approved topic (IVA)Historiography (including historical method) (IVB)Special Subject (Students may choose one of the following: Literature and Society in Britain between the Wars, Weimar Germany.(IVC)

Except with the permission of the Faculty, no candidate for honours in

101

Faculty of Arts

this school may sit for examination without first completing the essay work prescribed and attending the tutorial classes in the courses of the School. The Head of the Depart­ment may allow a change at the end of the first year in the suppor­ting units.

The units chosen for the degree with honours must be approved by the Head of the Department and will normally be taken in the following order:First year: one of History IA (Australian)History IB (Prehistory)History 1C (British)History ID (Rise of Christendom) and at pass level, three other approved units (one of which may be a first-year History unit) chosen in accordance with the above rules.Second and third years: at honours level, four ofHistory 11A (Australian 1835-1854) History MB (American)History 11C (African)History 11D (Modern Revolutions) History HE (Merrie Englande

1154-1399)History 11F (Renaissance and

Reformation)History MIA (Australian 1919-1971) History NIB (American 1919-1971) History MIC (Revolts and

Insurgencies)History HID (The English

Revolution) (not taught in 1972) History HIE (Pacific) (not taught

in 1972)History IMF (Hellenistic World) and not less than one other approved unit.

Fourth year: History IV as prescribed in accordance with the above rules.

Comments{a) A candidate who does not achieve the grades of pass pre­scribed in the above rules may enter or continue in the Honours School only at the express invitation of the Head of the History Department. Students who have completed the first year must be approved by the Head of the Department as candi­dates for the degree with honours before proceeding in the Honours School. The Head of the Department will normally approve students with at least one high distinction or dis­tinction in a first-year History unit, provided that their general academic record is satisfactory.(ö) A student who has completed the requirements for the degree with honours up to the end of the third year and who does not wish to pro­ceed to the fourth honours year may, with the approval of the Faculty be admitted to the pass degree of Bachelor of Arts.(c) A student who has attempted to complete the requirements for the degree with honours up to the end of the third year, but has not quali­fied to enter the fourth honours year may be considered by the Faculty of Arts for admission to the pass degree of Bachelor of Arts.

History IIA (Honours)(Australian 1835-1854)

Lectures and tutorials as for the pass degree.Syllabus: As for the pass degree together with more advanced work. Students are required to submit one 7,000-word essay and two short papers.Examination: There will be no special honours examination. Students will be judged on the

102

History

pass examination in combination with their essay work.

History MB (Honours)(American)

Lectures and tutorials in American History as for the pass degree, together with additional honours tutorials throughout the year. Syllabus: As for the pass degree, together with more advanced work. Examination: One three-hour paper in addition to the examinations for the pass degree. Some examination credit will be given for work done during the year.

History IIC (Honours)(African)

Lectures in African History as for the pass degree together with a weekly tutorial throughout the year. Syllabus: Seminars on special subjects will be held in second and third terms. The subjects will be chosen after consultations with honours students.Books: Reading lists will be issued. Examination: One three-hour paper in addition to the paper for the pass degree. Class papers will count for 30%, the long essay (mandatory for honours students) will count for 20%, the two papers will each count for 25%. Credit will be given for contributions to tutorial discussions.

History IID (Honours)(Modern Revolutions)

Lectures in Modern Revolutions as for the pass degree, together with a weekly tutorial throughout the year.Syllabus: A special study of selected social and political thinkers from the Enlightenment to Mao Tse-tung.

Prescribed Books□ Cole, G. D. H A History of Socialist Thought, 5 vols.,Macmillan.□ Dan, T., The Origins of Bolshev­ism, Seeker 8- Warburg.□ Lichtheim, G., The Origins of Socialism, Praeger.□ Schurmann, F. & Schell, 0.,China readings, 3 vols., Pelican. Examination: One three-hour paper in addition to the paper for the pass degree. Some examination credit will be given for work done during the year.

History HE (Honours)(Merrie Englande 1154-1399)

Lecture and tutorial as for the pass course, together with a fortnightly honours tutorial.Syllabus: As for the pass course, together with a special study of selected aspects of the ecclesiastical history of the period.Preliminary Reading□ Southern, R. W., Western Society and the Church in the Middle Ages, Pelican.Examination: One three-hour paper in addition to the paper for the pass degree. Some examination credit will be given for work done during the year.

History 11F (Honours)(Renaissance and Reformation)

Lectures and tutorials in Renaissance and Reformation History as for the pass degree, together with additional honours tutorials.Syllabus: As for the pass degree, together with special study of literary sources.Prescribed Books

Calvin, J. & Sadoleto, J.,103

Faculty of Arts

A Reformation Debate, (ed. John C. Olin), Harper.□ Castiglione, B., The Book of the Courtier, Penguin.□ The Essential Erasmus, ed.John P. Dolan, Mentor-Omega.□ Guicciardini, F., Maxims and Reflections of a Renaissance Statesman, tr. Mario Domandi, Harper.□ Martin Luther, ed. J. Dillenberger, Doubleday Anchor.□ Machiavelli, N„ The Prince and the Discourses, introd. Max Lerner, ML.□ More, T„ Utopia, Penguin.□ The Portable Rabelais, tr.S. Putman, Viking.Examination: One three-hour paper in addition to the paper for the pass degree. Some examination credit will be given for work done during the year.

History MIA (Honours)(Australian 1919-1971)

Lectures and tutorials as for the pass degree, and a weekly honours seminar.Syllabus: As for the pass degree, together with more advanced work. Books: Reading lists will be issued prior to the commencement of the unit.Examination: One three-hour paper in addition to the paper for the pass degree. Some examination credit will be given for work done during the year.

History NIB (Honours)(American 1919-1971)

Lectures and tutorials as for the pass degree, together with additional honours tutorials throughout the year.Syllabus: As for the pass degree,

104

together with more advanced work, especially on(a) The Truman years; 1945-1952(b) the Negro American, 1944- 1971.Prescribed Books□ Myrdal, G., An American Dilemma, 2 vols., McGraw-Hill.□ Report of the National Advisory Commission on Civil Disorders 1968, Bantam.□ Truman, Harry S., Memoirs, vols 1 & II, Signet.□ The Pentagon Papers, New York Times, 1 971.Examination: One three-hour paper in addition to the examination for the pass degree. Some examination credit will be given for work done during the year.

History MIC (Honours)(Revolts and Insurgencies)

Lectures in Revolts and Insurgencies as for the pass degree, together with a weekly tutorial throughout the year. Syllabus: A study of some theorists and practitioners of revolt and insurgency.Prescribed Books□ Chinh, T., Primer for Revolt, Praeger.□ Minh, H. C., On Revolution,Pall Mall.□ Mukherjee, H. & U., Sri Aurobindo and the New Thought in Indian Politics, Firma K. L. Mukhopadhay.□ Lenin, V. I., The National Liberation Movement in the East, Foreign Languages Publishing House, Moscow.□ Norman, D., Nehru: The First Sixty Years, Bod ley Head.□ Gandhi, M. K., An Autobiography, Cape.

History

Examination: One three-hour paper in addition to the paper for the pass degree. Some examination credit will be given for work done during the year.

History MID (Honours)(The English Revolution)(Not taught in 1 972)

One lecture and one seminar (as for pass students) plus a special honours seminar each week. Syllabus: As for pass students, but with the addition of an intensive study of relations between church, state and society in the period 1640-1660.

One 3,000-word and one 6,000- word essay to be submitted. Shorter papers for pass and honours seminars.Prescribed BooksAs for pass students, plus:G Woodhouse, A. S. P. (ed.), Puritanism and Liberty, Dent. Examination: One three-hour paper in addition to the paper for the pass degree. Some examination credit will be given for work done during the year.

History HIE (Honours)(Pacific)(Not taught in 1 972)

Lectures and tutorials as for the pass degree.Syllabus: As for the pass degree together with more advanced work.

Students are required to submit one of the pass essays and in addition one 6,000-word essay.Examination There will be no special honours examination. Students will be judged on the pass examination in combination with their essay work.

History IMF (Honours)(Hellenistic World)

Classes as for the pass degree, together with additional honours seminars.Syllabus: As for the pass degree, together with more advanced work. The 7,000-word essay to be mandatory.Assessment: As for the pass degree.

For the degree of M aster of ArtsStudents who have received at least second class honours Division A in the final examination for the degree with honours in the Honours School in History or its equivalent in an approved university, may proceed to the degree of Master of Arts by thesis followed where necessary by an oral examination. Students with second class honours Division B may be required to take a qualifying examination and would require Faculty approval in order to proceed without it. Students with third class honours would be required to take a qualifying examination. The subject for their thesis must be approved by the Head of the Department.

The thesis must not exceed 60,000 words.

The Head of the Department may with the approval of the Faculty require a student to attend classes in units related to the thesis, and acquire a reading knowledge of any language considered relevant for the thesis.

A postgraduate seminar is held weekly during term. Candidates for the degree of Master of Arts are advised to attend relevant meetings and will be required to present papers from time to time.

105

Prehistory

Master of Arts— Qualifying ExaminationA graduate of this or another approved university may be admit­ted as a candidate in the Master of Arts qualifying course if he has completed a major in history with a credit or similar grade in the second-year or third-year components of that major, or if he has completed courses which in the opinion of the Head of the Department are the equivalent of this requirement.

Unless the requirements are varied by the Head of the Department, the units of the qualifying course will be:(a) Historiography(b) a history unit (other than a first-year unit) approved by the Head of the Department(c) a thesis of not less than 12,000 and not more than 1 5,000 words on a subject approved by the Head of the Department(d) a course of instruction in the techniques of historical research.

A candidate who completes the qualifying course at a standard equivalent to second class honours division A will be admitted as a candidate for the degree of Master of Arts in history.

It is intended that in the next Triennium Prehistory will offer a sequence of units leading to a major or a sub-major, and with full honours options. During 1972 Prehistory will be taught within the Department of History (History IB). In 1 973 the course offered in 1972 as History IB will be repeated, while a second-year unit, Pacific and Australian Prehistory, will be introduced. In subsequent years teaching will commence in further subjects, with special emphasis on the archaeology of hunting, gathering and horticultural societies. Physical anthropology will form a basic segment of the course.

Prehistory is conventionally described as the study of those periods of human society before the advent of written records. On current evidence this possibly amounts to 99.7 per cent of human existence. However, this definition cannot be followed arbitrarily, because while prehistory ended in the Middle East about five thousand years ago, British prehistory is said to end with the Romans, and Australian prehistory lasted until AD 1788. Prehistorians need to take into account contemporary or recent societies whose technological and economic bases are relevant to the reconstruction of past societies.They also need to evaluate those written records which describe non-literate peoples, such as past observers like Caesar on Britain and Cook on the Pacific, or recent studies by anthropologists.

Prehistory is interdisciplinary in nature and students will be encouraged to combine their work in prehistory with at least one of the

106

other Faculty disciplines (especially History, Sociology, Geography and Linguistics), or with subjects offered in the Faculty of Science or in the Faculty of Asian Studies.

The pass degree courses will not be planned with a view to providing specialised professional training in archaeology, but will present students of various disciplines with a useful perspective of the past, in a subject which combines research techniques taken from both the social and natural sciences. Honours courses will emphasise the prehistory of the Pacific Basin and will offer professional training in field and laboratory techniques and in the theoretical basis of archaeology.

Linguistics

R. M. W. Dixon, MA(Oxon), PhD(Lond)Professor and Head of Department

IntroductionLanguage is man's most imports t skill. It is language which serves to distinguish him from other animals, enables him to live in large, com­plexly integrated communities, and to develop literature, laws and science. Each man can speak a language, and communicate efficiently with his fellows; but few understand exactly how language works.

Linguistics studies the general nature of human language. It promotes phonetic, grammatical and semantic studies of individual languages, and then seeks to discover 'linguistic universal', features that are common to all languages. A general characterisa­tion of the underlying structure of any human language is first provided; individual languages are described in terms of this general model. Approached in this way, languages which on the surface appear to be very different often show important deep similarities, in terms of the ways they organise meanings, and so on.

Linguistics provides a general theory of language that can be drawn on by many other disciplines. Many philosophical problems involve consideration of linguistic distinctions. The study of linguistic universal can suggest hypotheses concerning man's patterns of thought, with psychological and eventually neuro-physiological implications. Anthropologists and sociologists are concerned, amongst other things, with variations in language use in different social

107

Faculty of Arts

contexts. Effective language teach­ing demands a sound general linguistic background, in terms of which the structural features of a given language can properly be understood and related to proper­ties of other languages.

The Department provides a basic three-year course in the general principles of linguistics. Emphasis is placed on teaching students how to think and reason, and on sharpening their linguistic intuitions, rather than on the brute learning of facts. They are exposed to problems in a wide variety of languages and do detailed work on two or three languages and language families. Thorough training is given in the methods and results of transformational grammar, work which has during the last decade revolutionised linguistics and adjacent fields.

Linguistics I involves a general survey of the established results of linguistics, leading into an intro­duction to transformational grammar. Throughout, theoretical discussion is reinforced by application to practical problems; lectures focus not only on how linguistics explains a certain set of data, but on why the problems are solved in this way and not in some other manner. There is concurrent instruction in general phonetics, with lectures supple­mented by performance classes, in which students learn to make, recognise and transcribe sounds from a wide variety of languages.

The second year centres on a field methods course, in which students work in small groups on a language unknown to them, eliciting some aspect of the struc­ture from a native informant. In this way, they are able to apply the theoretical ideas they have been

taught. Linguistics II also provides an introduction to semantics, and further work on transformational theory, on the historical relation­ships of languages, and on phonology.

Linguistics III involves an inten­sive course on English grammar, mainly concentrating on recent transformational work; the study of a selected language family; either further comparative linguistics or a survey of the history of linguistics; and seminar discussions of current issues in semantics and the study of universals.

Honours students go more deeply into some of the topics covered in the second and third years and do further intensive work on linguistic theory in their fourth year. They can, in their final year thesis, relate linguistics to other fields that they may have studied, investigating sociolinguistic, psycholinguistic, applied linguistic or other problems.

Linguistics I, II and III replace General Linguistics I, A and B which were offered in 1970 and earlier years; a transitional syllabus will be in operation in Linguistics III in 1972 to cater for students who took General Linguistics I in 1970 and Linguistics II in 1971.

For the pass degree

Linguistics IThree lectures and one tutorial a week throughout the year.Syllabus(a) Introduction to linguistics. The nature of language. Language and culture. Syntax; morphology; phonology. How a language changes. Language families of the world. History of linguistics. Semantics and linguistic universals. (2 hours per week for two terms).

108

Linguistics

(b) Introduction to transformational grammar. Motivation. Phrase- structure grammars. Context-free and context-sensitive rules. Trees. Transformations; elementary types. Ordering of rules. (2 hours per week for one term).(c) Elements of general phonetics. Articulatory criteria. Notation. Transcription of Australian English.(1 hour per week for three terms, alternating lectures and performance classes).Prescribed Books□ Langacker, R. W., Language and its Structure, Harcourt Brace & World.□ Abercrombie, D., Elements of General Phonetics, Edinburgh UP.□ Sapir, E.( Language, Harcourt Brace 8- World.□ Bolinger, D., Aspects of Language, Harcourt Brace & World.□ Jones, D., The Pronunciation of English, Cambridge UP.□ Jacobs, R. A. & Rosenbaum,P. S., English Transformational Grammar, Ginn.Examination: One three-hour paper. Account will be takenof performance in practical assignments throughout the year in assessing the final result. There will also be a short practical phonetics test.

Linguistics IIThree lectures a week throughout the year.Syllabus(a) Further transformational theory. Development of the theory since 1957. Alternative proposals. Generative semantics. Derivational constraints.(-b) Comparative linguistics. Types of sound change. Comparative and

internal reconstruction, both phono­logical and morphological.(c) Further phonology and phonetics.(d) Field methods. Analysis of an unknown language, within an up-to-date theoretical framework.(e) Methods of linguistic descrip­tion. Study of some of the following models: tagmemic, structural, systemic, prosodic, stratificational.(0 Introduction to semantics. Sense and reference; semantic relations. Dictionary and componential methods. The optimum method of semantic description — nuclear words, types of definitions. Inter­relations with syntax.Prescribed Books□ Chomsky, N., Syntactic Structures, Mouton.□ Samarin, W. J., Field Linguistics, Harcourt Brace & World.□ Wurm, S. A., Linguistic Field­work Methods in Australia, Aust. Inst, of Aboriginal Studies.□ Meillet, A., La methode comparative en linguistique historique or the translation The Comparative Method in Historical Linguistics, Champion.□ Bloomfield, L., Language, Holt, Rinehart & Winston.□ Lyons, J., Introduction to Theoretical Linguistics, Cambridge UP.

Further reading will be assigned at the beginning of the course. Examination: One three-hour paper. In assessing the final result, account will be taken of performance in practical assignments, notably the field methods project.

Linguistics IIIThree lectures a week throughout the year.

109

Faculty of Arts

Syllabus (from 1973)(a) English grammar. Discussion of recent transformational work and its wider implications.(b) Advanced phonetics— lectures and performance classes.(c) Detailed study of a chosen language family.(d) Further comparative linguistics or History of Linguistics (given in alternate years).(e) Linguistic universals.Transitional syllabus for 1 972, for students who have previously taken General Linguistics I and Linguistics II.(a), (b), (c), (d) as above.(f) Introduction to semantics. Sense and reference; semantic relations. Dictionary and componential methods. The optimum method of semantic description — nuclear words, types of definitions. Interrelations with syntax. Prescribed Books□ Reibel, D. A. & Schane, S. A., Modern Studies in English — Readings in Transformational Grammar, Prentice-Hall.□ Lyons, J., Introduction to Theoretical Linguistics, Cambridge UP.Further reading will be assigned during the course.Examination: One three-hour paper. In assessing the final result, account will be taken of perform­ance in practical assignments.

Australian LinguisticsThis unit will normally be offered in alternate years; it will probably not be offered again until 1974.

Three lectures a week. Prerequisite: Linguistics I must be passed before this unit is taken; Australian Linguistics is a demand­ing course, and only students who 110

have a good pass in Linguistics I are recommended to attempt it; the Head of Department will be glad to advise.Syllabus: Detailed study of a selected language. Typological survey of the continent. The common 'deep grammar' of Australian languages. Genetic and areal relationships; reconstruction. Preliminary Reading: Before beginning the course, students are advised to gain some background information by reading one of the standard anthropological texts:□ Elkin, A. P., The Australian Aborigines: how to understand them, A & R.□ Berndt, R. M. & C. H„ The World of the First Australians,Ure Smith.□ Abbie, A. A., The original Australians, Muller.

A list of prescribed and recommended reading will be available from the department during February.The Result will be based on three assignments, one each term. Assignments in the first and second terms each count 25%; the final assignment counts 50%. There will be no obligatory examination. However, any student may request a three-hour final examination (which will count 50% towards the result) in place of the final assignment; such a request must be made before 4 September.

For the degree w ith honoursFirst year: There is no additional formal work, although wider and deeper reading will be expected on the ground covered by the Linguistics I course.Second and third year: As for the pass course in Linguistics II and III,

Linguistics

with one additional hour each week of tutorial discussion and extension of topics covered in lectures. Examination: Honours candidates will take one two-hour paper, in addition to the regular three-hour pass paper, at the end of their second and third years.

Honours School of Linguistics The course for the degree with honours in Linguistics comprises— (a) Linguistics I, II and III.{b) additional honours work set out above for these units.(c) Linguistics IV.(d) six further units, as approved by the Department. These should normally include Australian Linguistics and a major in a language; or in a subject related to linguistics, such as Philosophy, Psychology, Sociology or Prehistory.

Linguistics IV (Honours)Classes to be arranged.Syllabus(a) Intensive study of linguistic theory and its applications.(b) A special subject, to be arranged between the student and the Head of Department.Examination: Three three-hour papers, spaced through the year. Students will also do a practical assignment; and write a thesis on an agreed topic.

For the degree of M aster of Arts(1) A graduate with at least second class honours division A in linguistics may be enrolled as a candidate for the degree of Master of Arts by thesis; such a course will take at least one year.(2) A graduate with at least second class honours division A i n a subject

other than linguistics, who has had some linguistic training, may be enrolled as a candidate for the degree of Master of Arts by course work and thesis; such a course will take at least two years.(3) Graduates other than those covered above will be required to complete a qualifying course, arranged by the Head of the Department, before being enrolled as a candidate for the degree of Master of Arts. The qualifying course will be at least one year's full-time study. Whether the student then proceeds to the course for the degree of Master of Arts by thesis alone, as in (1),or by course work and thesis, as in (2) will depend on the result of his qualifying course.(4) In exceptional circumstances, and with the approval of the Faculty, students who have second class honours division B, but who have had further thorough training in linguistics (for instance, several years supervised field work) may be directly enrolledas a candidate for the degree of Master of Arts by course work and thesis, as in (2).

For the degree of Doctor of PhilosophyA graduate with at least second class honours division A in linguistics, or holding a degree of Master of Arts or equivalent qualification in linguistics, may proceed to a course of study towards the degree of Doctor of Philosophy. Students may be required to undertake some course work. Supervision can be provided for theses on Australian Aboriginal Linguistics, or semantics, and on some other areas of linguistic theory.

111

M athem atics

A. Brown, MA (Gias),PhD (Cantab)Professor and Head of the Depart­ment of Applied Mathematics

Hanna Neumann, DPhil,DSc (Oxon), FAA Professor and Head of the Depart­ment of Pure Mathematics

IntroductionMathematics may be studied either for the intellectual pleasure derived from the elegance and precision of its many techniques or because a mastery of some of these techniques provides a powerful tool for solving many of the problems of science, engineering and economics. Because these two aspects of mathematics overlap considerably the Depart­ments are able to offer general courses designed to cater for both these aspects.

For the pass degreeThe main courses available for the pass degree are Pure MathematicsI, II, III and Applied Mathematics I,II, III. These may be taken concur­rently, as two majors, by students specialising in mathematics. Parts of these courses are suitable as sub­sidiaries for students specialising in other subjects or, in some cases, are prerequisites.

A one-year course, General Mathe­matics, is offered in the Department of Pure Mathematics. It is designed as a short introduction to mathe­matical ideas for students who have spent less time on mathematics at school. It is meant to enable students to understand mathematical ideas and terminology that now occur in a wide range of contexts.

For the degree w ith honoursBoth departments offer honours units preparing for the degree with honours in mathematics. The course extends over four years and is of great value to all those who want to go more deeply into the subject and in particular those who may want to proceed to research work in mathematics or the theoretical sciences. The course can be designed in a number of ways leading to specialised work in the fourth year in either pure mathe­matics or applied mathematics, or in a combination of any two of pure mathematics, applied mathematics and statistics. Besides there is a combined honours degree in pure mathematics and philosophy.

For the honours degree in mathe­matics students will complete two majors in the first three years includ­ing at least one of Pure Mathe­matics I, II, III and Applied Mathe­matics I, II, III, subject to the conditions for admission to honours work in pure mathematics, or in applied mathematics, set out below. In addition students must complete two first-year units and one second- year unit. The latter can, with the consent of the Heads of Depart­ments, be replaced by additional work in one or both of the majors. The course must include Pure Mathematics I and either Applied Mathematics I or Statistics II. The fourth year will consist of lectures, readings and seminars on topics of the student's special subject or sub­jects arranged in consultation with the Heads of the Departments.

Students will be required to pass a test conducted by the Departments, consisting of a translation into English of a mathematical text in

112

Mathematics

French, German, Russian or some other approved language.

For both the pass degree and the honours degree, work done during the year and the results of occa­sional tests will be taken into account in assessing the final results of each unit. Students whose work during the year is unsatisfactory may be excluded from the Annual Examination.

For the honours degree in pure mathematics and philosophy students must complete a major in pure mathematics and philosophy subject to the general conditions appertaining to honours courses in the Departments of Pure Mathe­matics and Philosophy. In addition students must complete two first- year units, one of which will nor­mally be a science unit, and addi­tional work in pure mathematics and philosophy. The fourth year will consist of lectures, readings and seminars on specialised topics in pure mathematics and philosophy arranged in consultation with the Heads of the Departments.

Details of units offered for the pass and honours degrees are given below in separate entries for the two Departments.

For the degree of M aster of ArtsExamination for the degree of Master of Arts is by thesis and can­didates will be required to undertake research and to write a thesis on a topic approved by the Head of the Department. For a full-time student the work for the degree will nor­mally extend over one year.

Candidates will be required to satisfy the Head of the Department of their knowledge of German, French, Russian or some other approved language and may be

required to pass a test conducted by the Department, consisting of a translation of a mathematical text into English.

Details will be arranged by the Heads of the Departments.

For the degree of Doctor of PhilosophyDetails will be arranged by the Heads of the Departments.

DETAILS OF UNITS IN PURE MATHEMATICS

General M athem aticsThis unit is a terminal course whose successful completion does not qualify for entry into Pure Mathe­matics II.Prerequisite: A pass in Mathematics Level 2S or better in the New South Wales Higher School Certificate or an equivalent qualification.

The unit General Mathematics will consist of an elementary introduc­tion to some of the tools and ideas in common use, including in particular calculus, vector algebra, linear algebra, probability. There will be additional practice classes.Examination: Each term's work will be assessed separately by assign­ments and tests. Some students may be permitted to sit one three- hour paper at the end of the year to improve their result.

Pure M athem atics I (Pass)Prerequisite: A pass in Mathematics Level 2F or better in the New South Wales Higher School Certificate or some equivalent. A good pass in Mathematics Level 2S may be accepted for entry into this course.

This unit will normally consist of the sections: Introduction to Pure

113

Faculty of Arts

Mathematics, Linear Algebra 1 and Calculus 1. There will be additional practice classes.Examination: Various tests will be conducted throughout the year as sections and topics are completed. Some students may be permitted to sit one three-hour paper at the end of the year to improve their result.

Pure M athem atics I (Honours)

Prerequisite: A pass in Mathematics Level 2F or better in the New South Wales Higher School Certificate or some equivalent.

This unit will normally consist of the sections: Introduction to Pure Mathematics, ‘ Techniques of Several Variable Calculus, ‘ Linear Algebra, ‘ Elements of Complex Calculus and ‘ Analysis 1. There will be additional practice classes or tutorial periods.Examination: Various tests will be conducted throughout the year as sections are completed. Some stu­dents may be permitted to sit one three-hour paper at the end of the year to improve their result.

Pure M athem atics II (Pass)This unit will normally consist of the sections: Calculus 2a, Calculus 2b, Complex Calculus, Abstract Algebra 1, Abstract Algebra 2 and Numerical Methods. Other combi­nations of sections may be taken with approval. There will be addi­tional practice classes.Examination: Various tests will be conducted throughout the year as sections are completed. Some stu­dents may be permitted to sit one three-hour paper at the end of the year to improve their result.

Pure M athem atics II (Honours)This unit will normally consist of the sections: ‘ Analysis 2, ‘ Abstract Algebra 1, ‘ Abstract Algebra 2, ‘ Measure and Integration, ‘ Com­plex Analysis 1 and ‘ Set Theory. Other combinations of sections may be taken with approval. There will be additional tutorial periods.Examination: Various tests will be conducted throughout the year as sections are completed. Some students may be permitted to sit one three-hour paper at the end of the year to improve their result.

Pure M athem atics III (Pass)This unit will normally consist of the sections: Uniformity and General Topology, Linear Algebra 2, Gen­eralized Functions 1, Generalized Functions 2 and two other sections not previously taken. Other com­binations of sections may be taken with approval. There will be addi­tional tutorial periods.Examination: Various tests will be conducted throughout the year as sections are completed. Some stu­dents may be permitted to sit one three-hour paper at the end of the year to improve their result.

Pure M athem atics III (Honours)This unit will normally consist of the sections: ‘ Introduction to Functional Analysis, ‘ Group Repre­sentations, ‘ Complex Analysis 2, ‘ Algebraic Topology 1, ‘ Algebraic Topology 2 and ‘ Differential Equa­tions. Other combinations of sec­tions may be taken with approval. There will be additional tutorial periods.Examination: Various tests will be conducted throughout the year as sections are completed. Some stu­dents may be permitted to sit one

114

Mathematics

three-hour paper at the end of the year to improve their result.A student who has successfully completed Pure Mathematics II (Honours) and Pure Mathematics III (Honours) will be permitted to count this work as constituting three units towards the requirements of a pass degree.

Pure M athem atics IV (H onours)For admission to honours work in pure mathematics in the fourth year a student will normally be required to have completed successfully the work for starred sections (see the table of sections on page 119) adding up to not less than four periods a week for six terms.

Sections and seminars for this unit will be arranged from year to year.A substantial part of the student's work will consist of supervised work on a selected topic and a written report on this work. The student's work throughout the year will be assessed from time to time in various ways.

D etails of sections o ffered in Pure M athem aticsThe sections are listed term by term and for each term in the order in which they appear in the table on page 119.

FIRST TERM:In troduction to Pure M athem aticsFour lectures a week.

Notation and terminology of ele­mentary logic and set theory.Natural numbers, mathematical induction and rational numbers. A very brief look at rings and fields. Isomorphism. Real numbers, sup- remum and infimum. Complex numbers. Factorisation of integers

and polynomials. Relations and functions.

‘ Techniques of Several V ariab le CalculusOne lecture a week.

Some familiarity with calculus as applied to functions of one variable is an essential prerequisite.

‘ Topics in C om binatoria l TheoryOne lecture a week.

Calculus 2aTwo lectures a week.

Properties of real functions. Riemann integration, line integrals, multiple integrals; Jacobians.

Calculus 2bTwo lectures a week.

Convergence of sequences and series. Power series. Fourier series.

‘ Analysis 2Two lectures a week.

A brief discussion of uniform convergence. The basic concepts of general topology.

‘ A bstract A lgebra 1Two lectures a week.

Algebraic structures (e.g. groups, rings, fields); substructures and quotient (or factor) structures. Polynomials; root adjunction.

U n ifo rm ity and General TopologyTwo lectures a week.

Uniform continuity, uniform con­vergence of series and integrals; applications. Elements of general topology.

Linear A lgebra 2Two lectures a week.

115

Faculty of Arts

The structure of linear operators or quadratic forms.

'G roup RepresentationsTwo lectures a week.

' In troduction to Functional AnalysisTwo lectures a week.

Introduction to functional analysis and Banach space techniques with reference to existence theorems in the theory of linear differential equations.

SECOND TERM:Linear Algebra IFour lectures a week.

Vector spaces, linear mappings and matrices, linear equations. Applications to linear differential equations.

'L inear AlgebraThree lectures a week.

Vector spaces, linear mappings, matrices, linear equations; orthogonal transformation. Application to linear differential equations.

'E lem ents of Complex CalculusOne lecture a week.

Continuity, differentiability.The elementary functions.

Complex CalculusTwo lectures a week.

Differentiation of functions of a complex variable. Elementary func­tions. Complex integration. Residues

Abstract Algebra 1Two lectures a week.

Algebraic structures (e.g. groups, rings, fields); substructures and quotient (or factor) structures.

Preliminary Reading □ Sawyer, W. W., A Concrete Approach to Abstract Algebra, Freeman.

'M easure and IntegrationTwo lectures a week.

'A bstract Algebra 2Two lectures a week.

Algebraic fields and the theory of equations. Finite fields.

Integral TransformsTwo lectures a week.

The study of functions through their integral transforms. Laplace, Fourier, Stieltjes transforms. Exam­ples from the theory of characteris­tic functions. Solutions of some boundary value problems to illu­strate applications.

Theory of NumbersIn 1972 and alternate years.Two lectures a week.

The theory of congruences. Topics selected from the theory of arith­metic functions, quadratic residues, continued fractions, diophantine equations.

Games and Linear ProgrammingIn 1973 and alternate years.Two lectures a week.

An introduction to the mathe­matical theory of games and linear programming, with emphasis on existence theory.

Generalised Functions 1Two lectures a week.

The theory of Schwartz's distribu­tions.

'A lgebraic Topology 1Two lectures a week.

Homotopy, fundamental groups, van Kämpen theorem.

116

Mathematics

‘ Complex Analysis 2Two lectures a week.

Conformal mapping, analytic con­tinuation.

‘ Fourier Analysis 1Fourier analysis and its ramifica­tions as part of functional analysis.

THIRD TERM:Calculus 1Four lectures a week.

The elements of one-variable calculus as taught at school will be assumed and briefly revised during the treatment of the following topics. Partial derivatives and differentiability of two-variable real functions; maxima and minima. Differentiability of complex functions; the elementary functions.

‘ Analysis 1Four lectures a week.

Analysis of real one-variable functions: point sets in real spaces, continuity, differentiability. The Riemann integral, its connection with antidifferentiation. Mean value theorems and their applications; Taylor's theorem. The elementary functions. Sequences, series and improper integrals.

Abstract Algebra 2Two lectures a week.

Field extensions. Adjunction of roots to polynomials.

Numerical M ethodsTwo lectures a week.

Algorithmic methods for numeri­cal solution of problems of various types; iterative solution of equa­tions, interpolation, differential equations.

‘ Complex Analysis 1Three lectures a week.

The complex plane and extended complex plane. Mappings of the plane. Holomorphic functions.Power series. Elementary functions of a complex variable. Complex integration.

‘ Set TheoryTwo lectures a week.

Cardinality, well-ordering, transfinite induction, ordinals. The axiom of choice and Zorn's Lemma.

Topics in Elementary M a th e ­matics from an Advanced V iew po in tTwo lectures a week.

Introduction to Galois TheoryTwo lectures a week.

Field theory, extension fields. Fundamental theorem of Galois theory.

Generalised Functions 2Two periods a week.

The theory of Mikusinski's convolution quotients.

‘ Algebraic Topology 2Two lectures a week.

Covering spaces and some applications.

‘ D ifferentia l EquationsTwo lectures a week.

Existence and uniqueness theo­rems of differential equations and discussion of singularities.

‘ Fourier Analysis 2Two lectures a week.Continuation of Fourier Analysis 1.In addition there w il l be fourth -

117

Faculty of Arts

year courses and seminars th roughout the year (to be arranged).

DETAILS OF UNITS IN APPLIED MATHEMATICSApplied M athem atics IThree lectures and one tutorial a week.

It will be assumed that students attending this course have a know­ledge of the work prescribed for Mathematics Level 2F in the New South Wales Higher School Certi­ficate Examination.

For students who wish to brush up their knowledge of this work, suitable reading is Mullhall, H. & Smith-White, W. B., A New Mathematics for Senior Forms, ch. 12, 15, 16, 17, 18, A. & R.Syllabus(a) Dynamics. Vector algebra, with application to displacements, velo­cities, accelerations and forces. Motion of a particle and of systems of particles. Motion of a rigid body (two-dimensional problems).(b) Statics. Centre of gravity. Equilibrium of particles and rigid bodies under coplanar forces. Stability of equilibrium. Hydro­statics.(c) Differential Equations. First order equations and simple types of second order equations. Linear equations with constant coefficients.(d) Numerical Methods. Numerical integration and numerical solution of differential equations.Prescribed Books□ Bullen, K. E., Introduction to the Theory of Mechanics, Science Press.□ Spiegel, M. R., Vector Analysis, Schaum.□ Boyce, W. E. & Diprima, R. C., Introduction to Differential Equations, Wiley.118

Examination Two term tests and two three-hour papers at end of year, plus the results of assignments during the year. Students whose attendance at tutorial classes or whose work during the year is unsatisfactory may be excluded from the Annual Examination.

Applied M athem atics IIThree lectures and one tutorial a week.Syllabus(a) Differential Equations. Revision of first year work on differential equations. General properties of linear equations. Solution in series for linear equations. Legendre polynomials and Bessel functions. {b) Vector Analysis. Differential operators and their applications. Gauss's theorem. Stokes's theorem.(c) Partial Differential Equations. Solutions of wave equation, heat conduction equation and Laplace equation, in two-coordinate cases.(d) Dynamics. Motion of a body with varying mass. Central force problems. Oscillatory systems, with damping and forced oscillations. Generalised coordinates and Lagrange's equations.Preliminary ReadingCourant, R., Differential and Integral Calculus, vol. I, ch. 3, 4, 6, 8, 10, Blackie.Prescribed Book□ Jaeger, J. C., Introduction to Applied Mathematics, Oxford U P.□ Spiegel, M. R., Vector Analysis, Schaum.Examination: Two term tests and two three-hour papers at end of year, plus the results of assignments during the year. Students whose attendance at tutorial classes or whose work during the year is

Mathematics

T a b le o f s e c tio n s o ffe re d fo r u n its in P ure M a th e m a tic s in 1 9 7 2 (N u m b e rs in b ra cke ts in d ic a te th e n u m b e r o f le c tu re h o u rs a w e e k )

U n it F irst Term S e co n d Term T h ird T e rm

PureM a th e m a tic s I (pass an d h o n o u rs )

In t ro d u c t io n to Pure M a th e m a tic s (4 )

e ith e r: L ine a r A lg e b ra 1 (4 ) o r: 'L in e a r A lg e b ra (3 )'E le m e n ts o f C o m p le x C a lc u lu s (1 )

e ith e r: C a lc u lu s 1 (4 ) o r: 'A n a ly s is 1 (4 )

‘ T e c h n iq u e s o f S evera l V a ria b le C a lc u lu s (1 )

PureM a th e m a tic s II and III (pass an d h o n o u rs )

C a lc u lu s 2a (2 ) C o m p le x C a lc u lu s (2 ) A b s tra c t A lg e b ra 2 (2 )

C a lc u lu s 2 b (2 ) A b s tra c t A lg e b ra 1 (2 ) N u m e ric a l M e th o d s (2 )

’ C o m b in a to r ia l T h e o ry (1 )

* M e a su re and In te g ra tio n (2 )

' C o m p le x A n a ly s is 1 (3 )

'A n a ly s is 2 (2 ) 'A b s tra c t A lg e b ra 2 (2 )

‘ S et T h e o ry (2 )

'A b s tra c t A lg e b ra 1 (2 )

In te g ra lT ra n s fo rm s (2 )

E le m e n ta ry M a th e m a tic s (2 )

U n ifo rm ity an d G enera l T o p o lo g y (2 )

N u m b e r T h e o ry (2 )

In t ro d u c t io n to G a lo is T h e o ry (2 )

L ine a r A lg e b ra 2 (2 ) G e n e ra lise d F u n c tio n s 1 (2 )

G en e ra lise d F u n c tio n s 2 (2 )

'G r o u p R e p re s e n ta ­t io n s (2 )

'A lg e b ra ic T o p o lo g y 1 (2 )

A lg e b ra ic T o p o lo g y 2 (2 )

‘ In t ro d u c t io n to F u n c tio n a l A n a ly s is (2 )

C o m p le x A n a ly s is 2 (2 )

'D if fe re n t ia l E q u a tio n s (2 )

* F o u rie r A n a ly s is 1 (2 )

'F o u r ie r A n a ly s is 2 (2 )

P ureM a th e m a tic s IV (h o n o u rs )

T o be a rrang ed T o be a rra n g e d T o be a rra n g e d

119

Faculty of Arts

unsatisfactory may be excluded from the Annual Examination.

Applied Mathematics IIIThree lectures and one tutorial a week.Syllabus: A selection of topics from:(a) Differential Equations. Existence theorem. Sturm-Liouville system. Special functions. Approximations. Operational methods.(b) Mechanics. Moving axes. Corio­lis and centrifugal forces. Holonomic systems. Lagrange's and Hamilton's equations. Calculus of variations.(c) Elasticity. Analysis of stress and strain. Cylindrical and spherical co-ordinates. Bending and vibration of thin plates and rods.(d) Hydrodynamics. Equations of motion. Two-dimensional flow. Waves. Viscous flow.(e) Numerical Analysis: Direct and iterative methods for the solution of various problems.(/) Geomagnetism. Forces between dipoles. Intensity of magnetisation. Magnetic intensity of uniformly magnetised bodies. Spherical harmonic analysis.Preliminary Reading: EITHER Kreyszig, ch. 7, 10 OR Wylie, ch.10, 11, 14; the full description of these books is given below under Prescribed Books.Prescribed Books

Kreyszig, E., Advanced Engin- erring Mathematics, Wiley, or Wylie, C. R., Advanced Engin­eering Mathematics, 3rd ed., McGraw-Hill.Examination: Two term tests and two three-hour papers at end of year, plus the results of assignments during the year. Students whose attendance at tutorial classes or whose work during the year is

120

unsatisfactory may be excluded from the Annual Examination.

Honours course in Applied Mathem aticsFor admission to honours work in applied mathematics in the fourth year a student must normally have taken the honours course in Applied Mathematics I, II and III. The honours courses involve a wider range of reading than the pass courses and, especially in the second and third years, the syllabus contains additional material which is not included in the pass course. Students in the honours course in Applied Mathematics III will be expected to prepare a seminar paper on a topic approved by the Head of the Department.

Students who successfully com­plete the honours courses in Applied Mathematics II and Applied Mathe­matics III will be allowed to count the additional work in these two courses as one unit towards the arts degree, i.e. Applied Mathematics II (Honours) and Applied Mathe­matics III (Honours) will together count as three units towards the arts degree.

Applied Mathem atics I (Honours)Three lectures and one tutorial a week.Syllabus: The subject matter in Applied Mathematics I treated at a more advanced level, together with selected topics from:(a) ordinary differential equations and applications {b) planetary and satellite orbits (c) hydrodynamics.Prescribed Books □ Bullen, K. E., Introduction to the

Mathematics

Theory of Mechanics, Science Press.□ Spiegel, M. R., Vector Analysis, Schaum.□ Boyce, W. E. & Diprima, R. C., Introduction to Differential Equations, Wiley.Examination: Two term tests and two three-hour papers at end of year, plus the results of assignments during the year. Students whose attendance at tutorial classes or whose work during the year is unsatisfactory may be excluded from the Annual Examination.

Applied Mathematics II (Honours)Three lectures and one tutorial a week.Syllabus(a) Differential Equations. General properties of linear equations. Use of Laplace transform to solve linear equations. Solution in series. Com­parison theorems and Sturm- Liouville Theory.(b) Dynamics. Dynamics of a rigid body (in three dimensions). Euler's equations. Motion of a top. General­ised co-ordinates and Lagrange's equations. General theory of vibrational systems, with applications.(c) Vector Analysis. Differential operators and their applications. Gauss' theorem. Stokes' theorem.(d) Partial Differential Equations. Wave equation (one dimension), heat conduction equation, Laplace equation. Solution by separation of variables, with discussion of Fourier series, Legendre poly­nomials and Bessel functions. Use of Fourier transforms.(e) Hydrodynamics. Equations of motion. Motion with spherical symmetry. Two-dimensional flow, complex potential and their integrals.

Preliminary Reading□ Agnew, R. P., Calculus, ch. 8-13, McGraw-Hill.or Courant, R., Differential and Integral Calculus, vol. I, ch. 3, 4,6, 8, 10, Blackie.Prescribed Books□ Jaeger J. C., An Introduction to Applied Mathematics, Oxford UP.□ Rutherford, D. E., Fluid Dynamics, Oliver & Boyd.Examination: Two term tests and two three-hour papers at end of year, plus the results of assignments during the year. Students whose attendance at tutorial classes or whose work during the year is unsatisfactory may be excluded from the Annual Examination.

Applied Mathematics III (Honours)Three lectures and one tutorial a week.Syllabus: A selection of topics from: theory of differential equations, special functions, operational methods, tensor calculus, quantum mechanics, elasticity, fluid mechanics, electro-magnetic theory, relativity theory, astro­physics, numerical analysis, geomagnetism.Examinations: Two term tests and two three-hour papers at end of year, plus the results of assignments, projects or other work during the year. Students whose attendance at tutorial classes or whose work during the year is unsatisfactory may be excluded from the Annual Examination.

Applied Mathematics IV (Honours)Details to be arranged by the Head of the Department.

121

Medieval Studies

Medieval Studies is an independent subject, the teaching of which is in the hands of one full-time member of staff, with assistance from members of the Departments of Classics, English, French, Germanic Languages, History, Political Science and Philosophy. It aims to deal with the rise of medieval civilisation in Europe and the politics, thought, religion, literature and society of that period. It thus provides a continuation of classical studies and can be a complement to specialised medieval work in the above depart­ments.

There are two courses, Medieval Studies A and Medieval Studies B. Medieval Studies A may be taken as a single unit, or Medieval Studies A followed by Medieval Studies B may constitute a sub­major. In 1972 students who have previously passed in Medieval Studies B may complete a sub­major by taking Medieval Studies A.

Medieval Studies ATwo lectures and one tutorial a week throughout the year. Prerequisite: This subject may be taken only on the completion of at least one year of university studies. Students proposing to enrol are recommended to take in their first year either History ID or (if they have no Latin) Latin la. Syllabus: Aspects of twelth and thirteenth century Europe, with particular reference to the twelfth century Renaissance.

This will include education and the universities, English law and legal literature, Icelandic literature and history, Latin literature,

monasticism, and philosophical movements.Prescribed Books□ Waddell, H., Mediaeval Latin Lyrics, Penguin Classics.□ Brittain, F., Penguin Book of Latin Verse, Penguin.□ Hight, G. A., The Saga of Grettir the Strong, Everyman.□ Magnusson, M. & Pälsson, H., Nja/'s Saga, Penguin Classics;The Vinland Sagas; King Harold's Saga, Penguin.Examination: One three-hour paper. During the year students will be required to submit written work. Their results for the year will be assessed on their performance in this and in the final examination. The method of assessment will be made known in advance each year.

Medieval Studies BThis unit will not be offered in 1972.

Two lectures and one tutorial throughout the year.Prerequisite: Medieval Studies A. Syllabus: The Age of Dante. This will involve:(a) the study of some of Dante's work in translation, including the Divine Comedy and De Monarchia(b) the study of Dante in his time, with particular reference to Italian history and classical literature, and also later influences of Dante.Examination: As for Medieval Studies A.

122

Philosophy

P. Herbst, MA (Melb), BA (Oxon). Professor and Head of the Department.

IntroductionThe study of philosophy consists principally of an investigation into certain fundamental problems which underlie the various special studies which are pursued in a university, together with a study of logic, which is relevant to all studies and research. Philosophy is not com­monly taught outside universities and for this reason there are no special prerequisites for admission to a philosophy course. Therefore, for students in their first year, there is a unified, non-technical intro­ductory course, called Philosophy I.

This course is designed to be of use both to students who intend to specialise in philosophy and to students who intend to take only a sub-major or a single unit. The course is fairly flexible. It consists of a number of distinct components between which the students have an option. The fields which are covered are roughly; Ethics,Political Philosophy, Philosophical Psychology, Logic, Theory of Knowledge, and Philosophy of Religion. Some of the options are designed to throw light on topical problems, or on studies pursued in other parts of the university.

Philosophy I is designed to be of interest to students from all faculties and at the same time it serves as a foundation for all further philoso­phical studies. Building on this foundation, students for the pass degree may proceed in any of a number of directions to complete a major or a sub-major. Thus, they may take Logic, or History of Philosophy, or Greek Philosophy, or

Ethics and Politics, or Philosophy of Science. In certain special circum­stances students for the pass degree may also obtain permission to take an honours unit in lieu of a pass unit to complete a major.

Subject to certain restrictions (which are recorded in the Courses of Study (Degree of Bachelor of Arts) Rules, Section 9(1 )(m)), all pass subjects in philosophy may be taken in any desired order for a major in philosophy. Philosophy I is to be regarded as the normal preparation for other units, but for most of these units alternative pre­requisites are recognised, and these also are recorded in the degree rules, Section 11(2).

Philosophy repays an intensive study, which is best obtained in a pure or combined honours course. The normal entry to an honours course is through Philosophy I. If at the end of his first year a student passes in that subject at a sufficient standard (and otherwise completes first year requirements) he may be admitted to the Honours School in Philosophy. In that case a special course of study will be mapped out for him, consisting of three ordinary philosophy units and one other unit in the student's second year, and a series of special honours units in the student's third and fourth years. Second-year honours students are not expected to take any special honours units or any special com­ponents added to pass units, but there is an honours seminar to allow for intensive discussion. There is a good deal of choice amongst honours units.

Combined honours courses with most other arts subjects can be arranged, and may be of interest to some students. Philosophy lends

123

Faculty of Arts

itself to combined study with other subjects. The Department of Philo­sophy also provides opportunities for postgraduate work.Explanatory pamphlet It is not possible in this handbook to explain all the courses offered by the Department of Philosophy in sufficient detail. Especially the honours course is difficult to explain; for this reason the department has prepared a pamphlet which explains the course structure and the contents of the courses in detail. This pamphlet is available (gratis) from the departmental secretary or from the office of the Sub-Dean.

For the pass degreeUnits in philosophy available for students taking a course for the pass degree are:Philosophy I LogicEthics and Politics History of Philosophy Philosophy of Science Greek Philosophy.

Philosophy I will normally form the first part of a major or sub­major, but there are certain alterna­tives (see degree rules, Section9 (1) (m ) ).

The second and third parts of a major may then be made up by selecting any two of the five remaining units. The second part of a sub-major may be made up by selecting any one of the five remaining units.

Some of the special honours units listed in the section on honours courses may, with the permission of the Head of the Department, be taken by students for the pass degree, and will then count as the third part of a major. Where this is 124

done, two majors may be taken in philosophy.

In each unit written class work will be prescribed, completion of which is a condition of entry for the Annual Examination.

Philosophy ITwo lectures and one tutorial weekly throughout the year.

A seminar for prospective honours students is also provided.Syllabus:The course will consist of four phases. The first phase, which will be taken by all students who are enrolled for the course, will consist of a discussion of dialectic (the art of reasoning). This phase occupies the first five weeks of first term.

Phases two, three and four will each occupy seven weeks of teaching time. During each of these phases five options will be offered; each will involve one lecture per week. Of these five, students will be expected to opt for two. All options except (h) (Predicate Logic) will be offered twice. The lectures will take place in successive phases and in different time-table slots. Thus if a student is prevented from taking a given option during one phase because of time-table clashes, he should be able to take it in the next phase.

In order to be able to take fullest advantage of the options available, it is suggested that intending students should keep open three of the lecture times set down for Philosophy I (although, of course, students will only need to attend two lectures per week at any particular time throughout the year).

The options available for students in phases two, three, and four are: (a) Doubt and Certainty. A study,

Philosophy

centred on Descartes' Meditations, of the problem of knowledge: What are the conditions for genuine knowledge as against mere opinion, and which propositions, if any, can be known with absolute certainty?Is it possible that all our apparent knowledge is illusory?(b ) Language and the World. An introduction to the philosophy of language and to the relation between philosophical and other (e.g. grammatical and psychological) enquiries into the nature of language and language-use. In particular there will be exploration of the question: What is the nature of linguistic communication and what are its conditions?(c) Propositional Logic. Special attention will be given to the development of logic as the study of the forms of necessary proposi­tion, as the study of the logical relations between forms of proposi­tion, and as the study of the valid forms of argument. This will be pursued by taking into account the way in which a proposition may be compounded out of other proposi­tions.(d) Fact and Value. An enquiry into the nature of moral questions and value questions generally and into the possibility of separating such value questions from questions of fact and from theories of nature and society. In particular, an investiga­tion into the possibility of ridding the social sciences of value judgments.(e) Freedom, Power and Authority. Following an analysis of two different kinds of social structure— that based on power and that based on authority—the question will be raised as to the ways in which the concept of freedom might be given

different content in the two struc­tures. The aim of this enquiry will be to seek to understand the nature of the relationships between political ideals and conceptions of social structure. Illustrative reference will be made to the classical political systems of Plato, Hobbes and Rousseau.(f) The Explanation of Man. An introduction to the idea of explana­tion in general and a critical study of the differences between explana­tions of human behaviour and explanations of 'natural' events. Particular attention will be paid to types of explanations occurring in psychology, the social sciences and history, and to the relations between them.(g) God and Nature. An introduc­tory investigation into what is involved in religious claims of a relationship between God and the world. The course will examine the traditional arguments for the existence of God (e.g. Aquinas'Five Ways) and the standard objections to them (e.g. Hume and Kant), and will discuss the logical status of theological explanations of historical events (miracles, mythic explanations, etc.).(h) Predicate Logic. Further study of formal logic taking particular account of the internal structures of non-compound propositions.

None of the options except option (/?) carry any prerequisites. Option (/?) Predicate Logic is offered only in the final phase and in order to qualify for it students must have taken option (c) Propositional Logic.

The list of optional topics may vary from year to year.

125

Faculty of Arts

Recommended Preliminary Reading: □ Rush Rhees, Without Answers, Routledge & Kegan Paul.Prescribed BooksThere will be no general text book. The department will provide duplicated material on the various options to enable lectures, as much as possible, to be devoted to the discussion of difficulties. Lists of recommended reading will be attached to this duplicated material. Examination: At the end of the first term there will be an examination on the material from phase one. The November examinations will consist of material from phases two, three and four only. The grades for each student will be compounded from the results of the first term and November examinations, together with an assessment for exercises, essays, other assignments, and contributions to tutorials.

Ethics and PoliticsTwo lectures and one tutorial class a week throughout the year. Prerequisites: see degree rules,11 (2) Item 13.Syllabus: Philosophical problems arising out of questions of morals, conduct and evaluation, and out of some of the principal theories of politics and society. Topics will be selected from the following: moral rules and principles, rights and duties, obligation, appraisals, punishment, moral and legal res­ponsibility, conscience, utility, moral acts, virtues and excellences, ideology, government, sovereignty, law, authority, power, the popular will, natural rights, liberty, demo­cracy, interests, social and political evolution and revolution and the

justification of political acts. Some of the principal theories of ethics and political philosophy will also be discussed.Preliminary Reading□ MacIntyre, A., A Short History of Ethics, Routledge, Paperback.□ Huby, P., Greek Ethics,Macmillan, Paperback.Prescribed Books□ Aristotle, Aristotle's Ethics,tr. Thomson, Penguin, Paperback, or Aristotle, Nichomachean Ethics, tr. Ostwald, Library of Liberal Arts, Bobbs Merrill, Paper­back.□ Hobbes, T., Leviathan, ed. MacPherson, Penguin, Paperback.□ Locke, J., Two Treatises of Government, ed. Laslett, Mentor, Paperback.□ Kant, L, The Moral Law, tr.Paton, Hutchinson, Paperback.□ Austin, J., The Province of Jurisprudence, ed. Hart, Weidenfeld & Nicolson.□ Hare, R. M„ The Language of Morals, Oxford UP, Paperback.□ Olivecrona, K., Law as Fact 2nd ed., Stevens.□ Warnock, G. J., Contemporary Moral Philosophy, Macmillan, Paperback.Although it is not essential for a student to buy all these books, possession of them will prove useful. In some cases the full text is not prescribed: advice on this and on further prescribed reading can be obtained from the Department of Philosophy. Examination: One three-hour paper.

H istory of PhilosophyTwo lectures and one tutorial class a week throughout the year. Prerequisites: see degree rules,11 (2) Item 22.

126

Philosophy

Syllabus: Developments in meta­physics and in the theory of knowledge in the philosophies of Aquinas, Descartes, Leibniz, Locke, Berkeley, Hume.Prescribed Books□ Descartes, R., Descartes' Phil­osophical Writings, tr. An scorn be & Geach, Nelson, or Philosophical Works of Descartes, tr. Haldane & Ross, Dover.□ Leibniz, G., Discourse on Meta­physics and Correspondence with Arnauld, tr. Montgomery, Open Court.□ Locke, J., Essay Concerning Human Understanding, Pringle- Pattison's abridged ed„ Oxford UP.□ Berkeley, G., Berkeley's Philo­sophical Writings, ed. D. M. Arm­strong, Collier-Macmillan.□ Hume, D A Treatise of Human Nature, Book 1, ed. D. G. C. Macnabb, Fontana.Examination: One three-hour paper.

LogicTwo lectures and one tutorial class a week throughout the year. Prerequisites: see degree rules,11 (2) Item 25.Syllabus: More advanced work in formal logic with special attention to the variety of logical systems and the philosophical problems of their interpretation.(a) A detailed study of classical propositional and predicate calculus developed both in the manner of natural deduction and axiomatically; the development of syllogistic(b ) a review of many-valued, modal, truth-functional and strict-implica- tional systems, both traditional and modern, particularly in relation to the concept of entailment(c) the relations between syllogistic

and the predicate calculus; the interpretations of their connectives and quantifiers; medieval and modern views on referring. Related problems of metaphysics (e.g. existence, objects, determinacy) will be discussed wherever possible.Prescribed Book□ Hughes, G. E. &• Londey, D. G., The Elements of Formal Logic, Methuen.Reading lists, detailing further reading, may be obtained from the Department of Philosophy. Examination: A two-hour test will be set at the end of first and second terms on formal logic.

A three-hour paper on meta-logic and philosophical logic will be set at the end of the year.

Greek PhilosophyTwo lectures and one tutorial class a week throughout the year. Prerequisites: see degree rules,11 (2) Item 19.Syllabus: Socrates, Plato and, optionally, the Pre-Socratics and Aristotle.Preliminary Reading□ Cornford, F. M., Before and After Socrates

Crombie, I. M., The Midwife's Apprentice, Routledge & Kegan Paul.Prescribed Books A collection of Plato's dialogues. Recommended collections are:□ The Dialogues of Plato, tr.Jowett, B., edd. Hare, R. M. & Russell, D. A., Sphere Books, 1970. (This consists of seven paperback volumes of which vols. 1, 11, IV,V, VI will be used in class.) or Plato: The Collected Dialogues, ed. Hamilton, E. &-

127

Faculty of Arts

Cairns, H„ Bollingen Series LXXI, Pantheon Books, 1961.(This is a single volume but is not easily obtainable in Australia.)□ Raven, J. E., Plato's Thought in the Making, Cambridge UP.A fuller reading list may be obtained from the Department of Philosophy. Selected passages from the Pre-Socratic thinkers and Aristotle will be issued during the year as they become required. Examination: Work submitted during the year and one take-away paper. The time available for a take-away paper is eight hours.

Philosophy of ScienceTwo lectures and one tutorial class a week throughout the year. Prerequisites: see degree rules,11(2) Item 32.Syllabus(a) A consideration of the general principles of scientific discovery and explanation, including discussion of scientific laws, confirmation, the structure of scientific theories and disputes about their interpretation, prediction, probability, and the justification of scientific procedure(b ) A consideration of specific issues related to the physical and the social sciences, in particular, the viability of the Newtonian world­view, the applicability of scientific methods to human behaviour, and the unity of the sciences.

No special knowledge of any given science, whether natural or social, will be presupposed. The course, however, is so designed as to assist those who have such knowledge to enquire critically into its founda­tions.Prescribed Books□ Hempel, C. G„ Philosophy of Natural Science, Prentice Hall.128

□ Harre, R., An Introduction to the Logic o f the Sciences, Macmillan. Further specific reading will be pre­scribed during the year from other books and from journal articles.Examination: One three-hour paper.

For the degree w ith honoursHonours School in PhilosophyThe course for the degree with honours in the Honours School in Philosophy extends over four years.

In their first year, students are not expected to specialise in philosophy. However, in order to qualify for entry into the second year of the course, they should in their first year enrol for Philosophy I, together with three other units. All these units may be taken at the pass standard. In order to be admitted to the second year of the course, students will normally be required to have obtained at least a credit in the philosophy unit. It is also advisable for them to attend first-year honours seminars.

In the second year, students will take three philosophy units and one other unit. Subject to the approval of the Head of the Department, honours students may choose their second-year units. At the end of the year they will be examined at hon­ours standard, but they will not be expected to cover any extra ground, and will therefore attend the same classes as pass degree students during their second year. There will be fortnightly seminars for second- year honours students.

In the third and fourth years, stu­dents for the honours degree will undertake a full year's work upon completion of which they shall be credited with having completed Philosophy III (Honours) in the case of third-year students and

Philosophy

Philosophy IV (Honours) in the case of honours finalists. The internal structure of Philosophy III (Honours) and Philosophy IV (Honours) will vary from student to student depending on the student's previous work in the department and on his interests and aptitudes.

A great part of the third and fourth-year honours teaching shall proceed by way of honours tutorials and essay work instead of the traditional lectures. Students shall normally attend tutorials in pairs and shall submit fortnightly essays in each course, to be discussed during the tutorial period. In addition there will be non-compulsory supplementary lectures open to all those who are interested and not necessarily specifically addressed to those students enrolled in the course. Where it seems appropriate parts of the course will be offered in the form of lectures.

Details of the syllabus and reading lists for honours units and their respective options are available from the Department of Philosophy.

Philosophy III (Honours)Honours students will take Modern Post-Kantian Philosophy, and three other options. Of these three options, one may be the Group A and two from the remaining groups, or, as an alternative possibility, two may be from Group A and one from the remaining groups.Examination: Work submitted during the year will be counted towards the result. There will be three take­away papers at the end of the year. The time available for a

take-away paper is eight hours.

Philosophy IV (Honours)Honours students will take two options from Group A and two from the remaining groups. Where two options from Group A have been taken in Philosophy III, one Group A option will be being repeated, but with a new course content. Normally each student will be expected to cover at least three options from Group A during the two years, but under exceptional circumstances, and subject to approval by the Head of the Department, a student may be permitted to cover two options from Group A over the two years and the rest of his options from Groups B and C.Examination: Candidates for the final honours examination in Philosophy will normally be required to sit for five take-away papers. The performance of final honours candidates in essays and class-work during their final year will be taken into account in assessing the results of their final examinations, and will be treated as equivalent to one full examination paper. Subject to the approval of and in consultation with the Head of the Department a final honours candidate may opt to do a sub-thesis in lieu of one of the examination papers.

Honours OptionsThe options listed below are intended primarily as components in the third and fourth year of Pure and Combined Honours. However, with the permission of the Head of the Department they are also available to pass students. For instance, they may be taken

129

Faculty of Arts

in lieu of pass units in Philosophy towards a major or a sub-major.If a student obtains the permission of the Head of the Department to take an honours option as a pass unit, he will be required to do additional work in the area. Such a student's final assessment will be based on a three-hour examination paper together with essay and tutorial work. A student who has satisfactorily completed an honours option together with the extra work prescribed shall be credited in the academic record with a pass unit bearing the name of the honours option. In the case of some of the options listed below permission to take them will only very rarely be granted.Group A(a) Metaphysics and Philosophical

Logic(b ) Epistemology and the

Philosophy of Mind(c) Ethical and Political

PhilosophyGroup B(a) Greek Philosophy(b) Medieval Philosophy(c) The Empiricists(d) The Rationalists(e) Kant(f) Phenomenology Group C(a) Aesthetics(b ) The Philosophy of Language(c) The Philosophy of Religion(d ) The Philosophy of Law(e) The Philosophy of History(f) The Philosophy of Science

(Natural or Social){g) The Philosophy of Mathematics {h) Logic(/) Philosophical Psychology An honours course will in each case be agreed between the student

and the Head of the Department, and the Head of the Department may direct a student to certain options if he deems it desirable.The availability of options will be determined by demand and the presence of sufficient teaching strength in the area. The options listed above are not necessarily exhaustive and others may be considered from time to time.

A pamphlet which explains the honours course in greater detail may be obtained from the Secretary of the Department.

Combined honours course in Philosophy and Pure M athem aticsStudents must complete a major in each of pure mathematics and philosophy subject to the general conditions appertaining to honours courses in the Departments of Pure Mathematics and Philosophy. In addition, students must complete two first-year units, one of which will normally be a science unit, and additional work in pure mathematics and philosophy. The fourth year will consist of lectures, readings and seminars on specialised topics in pure mathematics and philosophy arranged in consultation with the Head of Departments.

Modern (Post-Kantian) PhilosophyTwo lecture-seminar classes a week for honours students in their third year.Syllabus: The study of some major philosophical theories cf the nineteenth and twentierh centuries, up to and including logical positivism.

130

Philosophy

M etaphysics and Philosophical LogicSyllabus: A study of contemporary discussion of such topics as existence, determinism, truth, predication, the analytic/synthetic distinction, categories, universals, negation, entailment, identity and individuation, causality, sensible qualities, etc.

Epistemology and the Philosophy of MindSyllabus: A study of contemporary discussions of such topics as knowledge and belief, perception, intentionality, action, theories of the mind-body relationship, personal identity.

Ethical and Political PhilosophySyllabus: A study of contemporary discussions in the area of moral, political and social theory including such topics as fact and value, the is-ought dichotomy, virtues and vices, moral rules, obligation, rationality, theories of punishment, law and morality, ideology, power and authority, social movements and political justification.

Greek PhilosophySyllabus: A study of some major themes in Plato's later dialogues (e.g. Parmenides, Sophist,Theatetus and Philebus). or A study of some central doctrines in Aristotle's work such as those concerning the notions of substance, essence and accident, change, matter and form, potentiality and actuality.

Medieval PhilosophySyllabus: A study of some major philosophical controversies during

the Middle Ages concerning such topics as existence, universals, contingency and necessity, eternity, etc.

The EmpiricistsSyllabus: A study of the empirical tradition in modern philosophy with special reference to Hume and Mill.

The RationalistsSyllabus: A study of rationalist thought in the seventeenth century (particularly that of Leibniz).

KantSyllabus: A detailed study of Kant's Critique of Pure Reason.

PhenomenologySyllabus: A study of some leading ideas in phenomenology from Husserl to Merleau-Ponty.

AestheticsSyllabus: A discussion of the main concepts employed in the appreciation and evaluation of works of art. Major aesthetic theories will be discussed in this light.

Philosophy of ReligionSyllabus: An investigation of the principal concepts of religion and of some of the problems of theology. God's nature, existence and relation to the universe. The doctrines of creation, incarnation, divine grace and salvation. Immanence and transcendence, Pantheism and polytheism. Faith, reason and revelation. The nature of religious belief. The problem of evil. Religion, morality and ideology. Divine love, mercy and punish­ment. The doctrine of analogical

131

Faculty of Arts

predication. Religion as a way of life.

Philosophy of LawSyllabus: A study of some of the most important theories of law: natural law theory, legal positivism, realism, Kelsen, Hart. Among the problems to be discussed are the relation between law and morality, the nature of central legal concepts, e.g. obligation, right, validity, sovereignty, the justification of punishment.

Philosophy of HistorySyllabus: Consideration of problems concerning historical explanation, retrodictive inference, objectivity hermeneutics, and overall inter­pretations of history.

Philosophy of Science (Natural or Social)Syllabus: Either a detailed inquiry into some of the concepts of natural science such as space, time and measurement, especially in connection with the theory of relativity and the classical and quantum theories of mechanics.Or a study of problems connected with the social sciences such as the nature of social facts, methodological individualism, objectivity and value-neutrality of the social scientist, the place of rationality empathy and rules in the explanations of social phenomena, functionalism and prediction in the social sciences, etc.

Philosophy of M athem aticsSyllabus: A study of topics drawn from the philosophy of various branches of mathematics, and axiomatic systems, together with

an account of the relation of mathematics to the empirical sciences on the one hand, and to logic on the other.

Philosophy of LanguageSyllabus: A study of contemporary theories of meaning and communication. Topics to be discussed will include Wittgenstein on meaning, later philosophers' writing on speech acts and their illocutionary force, and a study of some aspects of contemporary linguistics and their relation to problems in the philosophy of language and philosophical psychology.

LogicSyllabus: A detailed and critical investigation of certain fundamental problems in logic. Discussions could centre on such topics as: problems of extensionality and intensionality, propositional identity, theories of truth, pre­suppositions, the principles of logic, necessary and contingent propositions, necessity and language. Attention may also be given to the historical evaluation of these topics.

Philosophical PsychologySyllabus: A detailed investigation of such concepts as thinking, emotion, memory, imagination, mental objects, motives and mental causes, behaviour. Behaviourist and non-behaviourist theories of mental concepts will be considered in the light of such an investigation.

For the degree of M aster of ArtsStudents who have qualified for the degree of Bachelor of Arts with

132

Political Science

at least second class honours in the honours course in philosophy or in an approved combined honours course may proceed to the course for the degree of Master of Arts by thesis and oral examination or alternatively by thesis and written examination. The subject for a thesis must be approved by the Head of the Department. Students may be required by the Head of the Department to attend seminars or discussion classes relevant to their theses.

Master o f Arts—Qualifying Examination Students who have qualified for the pass degree of Bachelor of Arts with at least a major in philosophy from this University or its equivalent from any other recognised university may, with the approval of the Head of the Department, proceed to the course for the degree of Master of Arts by first passing a qualifying examination.

The subjects for such an examina­tion will be prescribed by the Head of the Department after taking into consideration the nature of the work already done and the student's particular interests in further study.

G. S. Reid, BCom(Melb), PhD(Lond)Professor and Head of the Department

IntroductionPolitical science units may be taken towards arts, Asian studies, econ­omics or law degrees. Seven units are offered towards a pass degree. Political Science I (the prerequisite for units in second and third years in the subject) provides an intro­duction to the study of politics and a study of the Australian political system. The second first-year unit, An Introduction to Modern Political Thought, presented for the first time in 1 972, is especially recommended to students contemplating an honours degree in political science. Political Science II is a study of the theory and practice of government in the United States and Russia; Political Sociology emphasises the sociological approaches to the study of politics; and Public Policy and Administration (available as a second or third-year unit) covers the theory and practice of government in its administrative aspects. At third year, Asian Government offers students a choice of two out of four half-year courses, namely — modern government in Japan,India, China and Comparative Communism; and International Relations provides a study of the politics of international society. Additional honours work, involving more advanced studies, is provided in all second and third-year units. Political Science IV, offered for those seeking the degree with honours, is made up of honours- level seminar work and a sub-thesis of about eighty quarto pages. In

133

Faculty of Arts

addition to the undergraduate units in political science, supervision is provided for preliminary studies and thesis work towards the degree of Master of Arts.Tutorials, Reading lists, etc. for Political Science / and II Students enrolled for Political Science I or II should call at the seminar room of the Department (Block D, Childers Street) between 10 am and 5.1 5 pm on the Tuesday, Wednesday or Thursday of Orienta­tion Week without fail to collect roneoed material on their course and register their preferences for tutorial and honours class times. Tutorials in all political science units commence in the second week of first term and a weekly tutorial is then given throughout the year. Attendance at tutorials in Political Science I is compulsory.Books for Political Science Students should not feel an obliga­tion to purchase all books listed below. Those which should, if possible, be bought are those in the category 'Prescribed Books', which students cannot expect to find available on demand in the Library. Even here, two students living and working close to each other might well economise by purchasing half the list each and sharing. Some former students possess copies and may be willing to sell. Unselfishly prompt use of books from the Library (including the National Library of Australia) should enable students to have reasonable access. The reading is the core of all work in political science.

For the pass degreePolitical Science ITwo lectures and one tutorial class a week throughout the year.134

Syllabus: A study of:(a) the nature and uses of political power, who competes for it, how and why.(b) methodology in political analysis(c) liberal democracy, its basic beliefs and assumptions, and some conflicting ideologies(d) the Australian political system in its domestic and international contexts, relating political institutions (parliaments, public services, judiciary, etc.) and political processes (such as elections, pressure group activity and policy making) to the Australian social structure, and to the earlier parts of the course. Preliminary Reading□ Ball, A. R., Modern Politics and Government, Macmillan.□ Pickles, D., Democracy, University Paperbacks.□ McGregor, C., Profile of Australia, Penguin.□ Sawer, G., Australian Government To-day, 9th ed., Melbourne UP.Prescribed Books□ Christenson, R. M. et. al., Ideologies and Modern Politics, Dodd Mead.□ Conn, P. H., Conflict and Decision Making: An Introduction to Political Science, Harper.□ Fried, R. C., Comparative Political Institutions, Macmillan.□ Moodie, G. C. Et Studdert- Kennedy, G., Opinions, Politics and Pressure Groups, Allen & Unwin.□ Tawney, R. H., Equality, 5th ed„ Allen & Unwin.□ Birch, A. H., Representative and Responsible Government,Allen & Unwin.□ Crisp, L. F„ Australian National

Political Science

Government, 2nd ed., Longmans.□ Jupp, J., Australian Party Politics, Melbourne UP.□ Hughes, C. A., (ed.), Readings in Australian Government, Queensland UP.□ Mayer, H., (ed.), Australian Politics: a Second Reader,Cheshire.□ Encel, S., Equality and Authority, Cheshire.A detailed reading list will be distributed at the beginning of the course.

Students will be required to submit written work punctually during the year.Examination: Two three-hour papers.

Introduction to Modern Polit ical ThoughtTwo lectures and one tutorial class a week throughout the year. Syllabus: The study of some of the important texts in the European political tradition. This is followed by an analysis of democratic and anti-democratic theory and an appraisal of the character of liberalism, conservatism and socialism.

Strongly recommended to students contemplating an honours degree in Political Science.Students may include this unit as part of a second major in Political Science.Preliminary Reading□ Field, G. C., Political Theory, University Paperbacks.□ Watkins, Frederick M., The Age of Ideology—Political Thought 1750 to the Present, Prentice-Hall. Prescribed Books□ Locke, J., Two Treatises of Government, ed. P. Laslett, Mentor.

□ Rousseau, J. J., The Social Contract, (translated and introduced by M. Cranston), Penguin.□ Watkins, F„ (ed.), Hume:Theory of Politics, Nelson.□ Bredvold, L. I. & Rose, R. G„ (eds.), The Philosophy of Edmund Burke: A Selection from his Speeches and Writings, Michigan UP, Paperback.□ Mill, J. S., Utilitarianism. On Liberty and Essay on Bentham, Fontana.□ Marx, K. & Engels, F., The Communist Manifesto, Penguin.□ Macfarlane, L. J., Modern Political Theory, Nelson,University Paperbacks.□ Jones, W. T. & Lancaster, L. W., Masters of Political Thought, vols. 2 and 3, Harrap.□ McDonald, L. C., Western Political Theory from the Origins to the Present, Harcourt Brace & World (1968).□ Lindsay, A. D„ The Modern Democratic State. Oxford UP.□ Mayo, Henry B., An Introduction to Democratic Theory, Oxford UP.□ Rejai, M., Democracy: The Contemporary Theories, Atherton Press.□ Hobhouse, L. T., Liberalism, Galaxy, Paperback.□ Viereck, P., Conservatism,Anvil.□ Crosland, C. A. R., The Future of Socialism, Cape, Paperback. Examination: Two three-hour papers.

Polit ical Science IITwo lectures and one tutorial class a week throughout the year.Prerequisite: Political Science I must be passed before this unit is taken. Syllabus: A study of modern govern-

135

Faculty of Arts

merit in the USA and the USSR, including the general principles of the American and Russian govern­mental systems and constitutions, the main political institutions of the two countries, the party systems, public opinion and the context of the major issues in contemporary American and Russian political life.

Students are required to submit written work punctually during the year.Preliminary Reading□ Lerner, M., America as a Civiliza­tion, Cape.□ White, T. H., The Making of the President, 1968, Cape.□ Deutscher, I., Stalin, rev. ed., Penguin.□ Frankland, M., Kruschev,Penguin.Prescribed Books□ Heffner, R. D A Documentary History of the United States, Mentor.□ Irish, M. & Prothro, J., The Poli­tics of American Democracy,5th ed., Prentice-Hall.□ Irish, M., Lineberry, R. & Prothro, J., The Politics of American Democracy, Prentice-Hall.□ Fainsod, M., How Russia is Ruled, rev. ed., Harvard UP.□ Schapiro, L, The Communist Party of the Soviet Union, Univer­sity Paperbacks.□ Daniels, R. V. (ed.). Documen­tary History of Communism, Vintage.□ Churchward, L. G„ Contemporary Soviet Government, Routledge & Kegan Paul.□ Cornell, R., The Soviet Political System, Prentice-Hall.Examination: Two three-hour papers.

Political SociologyTwo lectures and one tutorial class a week throughout the year.

Prerequisite: Political Science I must be passed before this unit is taken.Syllabus: A study of topics covered by modern writers using sociological approaches to the study of politics. The course will cover general aspects of sociological theory, functionalist theories, conflict theories and theories of mass society, the concepts of power, authority and influence, classes and elites, the role of ideology in politics, pressure groups, political parties, political factionalism and small group conflict.

Students will be required to submit written work during the year. Recommended Reading□ Cohen, P. S., Modern Social Theory, Heinemann.□ Rex, J., Key Problems in Socio­logical Theory, Routledge £t Kegan Paul.□ Runciman, W. G., Social Science and Political Theory, Cambridge UP.□ Popper, K., The Poverty of Historicism, Routledge & Kegan Paul.□ Kuper, L. & Smith, M. G., Pluralism in Africa, California UP.□ La Palombara, J. & Weiner, M„ Political Parties and Political Development, Princeton UP.□ Bailey, F. G., Stratagems and Spoils: A Social Anthropology of Politics, Blackwell.□ Coser, L. A. & Rosenberg, B., Readings in Sociological Theory.2nd ed., Collier-Macmillan. Examination: Two three-hour papers.

Asian G overnm entTwo lectures and one tutorial class a week throughout the year. Prerequisite: Political Science I and II must be passed before this unit is taken.

136

Political Science

Option: Two half-year courses will be presented in each half of the academic year. Enrolling students will select one half-year course in each half of the year from the following:First half— India or China Second half—Japan or Comparative

CommunismStudents will be required to submit written work punctually during the year.IndiaTwo lectures and one tutorial class during the first half of the year.Syllabus: The Indian political system since Independence (1947). The social structure as it affects political activities, political elites, the party system and pressure groups; aspects of economic planning and foreign policy. Preliminary Reading□ Forster, E. M., Passage to India, Penguin.□ Naipaul, V. S., An Area of Darkness, Penguin.□ Spear, P., India, Pakistan and the West, Oxford UP.□ Segal, R., The Crisis of India, Penguin.Prescribed Books□ Morris Jones, W. H„ The Government and Politics of India, Hutchinson U.L.□ Park, R. L, The Indian Political System, Prentice-Hall.□ Kothari, R., Politics in India,Little, Brown.ChinaTwo lectures and one tutorial class during the first half of the year. Syllabus: The Chinese political system, particularly its develop­ment since 1959. Attention will be given to political and social change,

ideology, political elites, centripetal and centrifugal forces in the system and specific policy problems of modernisation in a post­revolutionary environment. Preliminary Reading□ Schram, S. R., Mao Tse-tung, Penguin.□ Fitzgerald, C. P., The Birth of Communist China, Penguin. Prescribed Books□ Schurmann, H. F„ Ideology and Organisation in Communist China, California UP.□ Lewis, J. W., Leadership in Communist China, Cornell UP; Revolutionary Power and Leader­ship in Communist China,Oxford UP.□ Schurmann, H. F. &- Schell, 0. (eds.), China Readings 3: Communist China, PelicanJapanTwo lectures and one tutorial class during the second half of the year. Syllabus: The Japanese political system since 1945 with background material from 1868. The social structure seen as a dynamic and changing element affecting politics. Postwar political reforms; elites, the bureaucracy, parties and pressure groups. Political issues and ideologies, aspects of economic planning and foreign policy. Preliminary Reading□ Beasley, W., The Modern History of Japan, Weidenfeld Goldback.□ Storry, R., A History of Modern Japan, Penguin.Prescribed Books□ Ward, R. Er Macridis, R. C., Modern Political Systems: Asia, Prentice-Hall.□ Langdon, F., Politics in Japan, Little, Brown.

137

Faculty of Arts

□ Fukui, H.( Party in Power.The Japanese Liberal—Democrats and Policy Making, AN UP.□ Scalapino, R. A. & Masumi, J., Politics and Parties in Contemporary Japan, California UP.C om parative Com m unismTwo lectures and one tutorial class during the second half of the year. Syllabus: Communism in China and North Vietnam will be compared with selected political systems in Eastern Europe and with Cuba. In each case there will be an examination of the nature of power, bureaucracy, ideology and change.Preliminary Reading□ Meyer, A. G., Communism, Random House.□ Lowenthal, R., World Communism, Oxford UP.Prescribed Books□ Johnson, C. (ed.), Change in Communist Systems, Stanford.□ Rubinstein, A. Z., Communist Political Systems. Prentice-Hall.□ Kautsky, J. H., Communism and the Politics of Development,Wiley.□ Drachkovitch, M., Marxism in the Modern World, Stanford. Examination: Two three-hour papers.

In ternational RelationsTwo lectures and one tutorial class a week throughout the year. Prerequisite: Political Science I and II must be passed before this unit is taken.Syllabus: An introduction to basic concepts in the theory of inter­national relations, followed by studies of problems in world politics since 1945, international relations in the Asian and Pacific region since 138

1945 and Australian foreign policy.Students are required to submit

written work punctually during the year.Preliminary Reading□ Carr, E. H., Nationalism and After, or, The Twenty Years' Crisis, Macmillan.□ Kennan, G. F., American Diplo­macy 1900-1950, Mentor.□ Gordon, B. K., The Dimensions of Conflict in Southeast Asia,Spectrum.Prescribed Books: ( t = should be possessed by each student or shared by two).□ fMorgenthau, H. J., Politics Among Nations, 4th ed., Knopf.□ tRobertson, C. L, International Politics Since World War II, Wiley.□ Aron, R., Peace and War, Weid­enfeld & Nicolson.□ Butterfield, H. et al (eds.), Diplo­matic Investigations, Allen & Unwin.□ Huck, E. A., The Security of China, Chatto & Windus.□ Barnett, A. D., Communist Strategies in Asia, Praeger.□ Stoessinger, J. G., Nations in Darkness, Random House.□ Fifield, R., Southeast Asia in U S. Policy, Praeger.□ Harper, N. D. &■ Greenwood, G., Australia in World Affairs, Cheshire. Examination: Two three-hour papers.

Public Policy and A dm in istrationTwo lectures and one tutorial class a week throughout the year. Prerequisite: Political Science I must be passed before this unit is taken. Syllabus{a) Theoretical approaches to the study of organisation and bureaucracy(,b) the development, nature and

Political Science

role of the 'Commonwealth Bureaucracy'(c) the nature and operation of the policy-m aking process, w ith special reference to selected areas of Australian policy(d ) historical sources of the principles and practice of bureaucracy, investigated through the development of British administration in the eighteenth and nineteenth centuries.

Students are required to submit written work punctually during the year.Preliminary Reading□ Waldo, D., The Study o f Public Administration, Doubleday.□ Blau, P. M „ Bureaucracy in Modern Society, Random House.□ Kitson Clark, G. S. R., An Expanding Society, Melbourne UP.

Prescribed BooksEtzioni, A., Modern Organisations,

Prentice- Hall.AI brow, M., Bureaucracy.

Papermac.Mouzelis, N. P., Organisation

and Bureaucracy, Routledge & Kegan Paul.□ Caiden, G. E., Career Service;The Commonwealth Bureaucracy, Melbourne UP.□ Lindblom, C. E., The P o licy­making Process, Prentice-Hall.□ Robbins, L , The Theory o f Economic Policy in English Classical Politica l Economy, Macmillan.□ Bowditch, J. & Ramsland, C., Voices o f the Industrial Revolution, M ichigan UP, Paperback.□ Hanham, H. J., The Nineteenth Century Constitution, Cambridge UP.□ Parris, H., Constitutional Bureaucracy, Allen & Unwin.

Examination: Two three-hour papers.

For the degree w ith honours

Honours School in Political ScienceThe units for the degree w ith honours in Political Science comprise:(a) In the Faculty o f Arts Political Science I, II, and any one of the third-year options (i.e. Public Policy and Administration, Asian Government or International Relations).A second approved major.Four further units, including either an approved major or an approved sub-major (at least one more of the above mentioned third-year options must be included somewhere in these four units).

The unit, Introduction to Modern Political Thought is strongly recommended to students con­templating honours in Political Science.Political Science IV (in the honours year).

(b ) In the Faculty o f Economics Political Science I, II and any tw o of the above mentioned third-year options.Economics I, II, III.First year of Statistics (or, in certain cases, Statistics II).One o f Economic History I,

Accounting I, Pure Mathematics I or General Mathematics.

One later year unit offered by the Faculty of Economics.

Political Science IV (in the honours year).

(c) In either Faculty(i) The full course as selected shall be approved by the Head of the Department. When approval of the course is given, the candidate w ill be

139

Faculty of Arts

informed of the minimum standard which he must achieve in each unit of the course.

Additional honours work is provided in all second and third-year units. Honours students take an additional examination paper.(ii) The Faculty may, at the con­clusion of either the second or third full-time year (or its equivalent), upon the advice of the Head of the Department, refuse to allow a candi­date to proceed further towards a degree with honours.(iii) A student who has not under­taken the honours course in his second year but at its conclusion wishes to enter for the degree with honours must make special application to the Faculty. If such permission is given, the Head of the Department shall prescribe the further work in which he must be satisfied before the candidate shall be deemed to have completed the first three years of the honours course and be allowed to proceed to the fourth year of the course (i.e. Political Science IV (Honours) ).A pass student who wishes to take the honours course in a second or third-year unit of Political Science may do so with the approval of the Head of the Department. A pass degree student shall not be admitted to take the honours course in a second or third-year unit unless he has passed the earlier unit(s) in the subject with credit.

Polit ical Science II (Honours)Lectures as for the pass degree, together with one honours class a week throughout the year. Honours candidates will undertake written

work distinct from that of the pass course.Syllabus(a) As for the pass degree(b) a study of American and Marxist political theory. The American sec­tion of the work will consider major contributions to the development of the theory of American democracy. The Marxist section will include a study of th.e relation of Marxist theory to Russian conditions and to the theories of Lenin, Trotsky and Stalin, particularly as they bear on the proletarian revolution, and the dictatorship of the proletariat.

Books(а) As for the pass degree.(б) Recommended texts in relation to the honours work include:□ Grimes, A. P., American Political Thought, 1967 rev. ed., Holt Rinehart & Winston.□ Hofstadter, R., The American Political Tradition, Vintage.□ Hamilton, A. et al., The Federalist Papers, Blackwell.□ Padover, S. K. (ed.), Thomas Jefferson on Democracy, Mentor.□ Tocqueville, A. de, Democracy in America, Vintage.

Marx, K„ Selected Works, 2 vols, Moscow.□ Plamenatz, J., Man and Society, vol. II, Longmans□ Lichtheim, G., Marxism: An His­torical and Critical Study, Routledge & Kegan Paul.Examination: Two three-hour papers as for the pass degree and a third three-hour paper upon the subject matter of the honours work.

Polit ical Sociology (Honours)Lectures as for the pass degree, together with one honours class a week, throughout the year. Honours

140

Political Science

candidates will undertake written work distinct from that of the pass course.Syllabus(a) As for the pass degree(b ) A study in greater depth of selected themes from the pass course.Examination: Two three-hour papers as for the pass degree and a three- hour paper upon the subject matter of the honours work.

Asian Government (Honours)Lectures as for the pass degree, together with one honours class a week throughout the year. Honours candidates will undertake written work distinct from that of the pass course.Syllabus(a) As for the pass degree(b) textual studies of specific works by writers in the respective fields. A list of works to be studied will be issued at the beginning of each half-year course.Examination: Two three-hour papers as for the pass degree and a third three-hour paper upon the subject matter of the honours work.

International Relations (Honours)Lectures as for the pass degree, together with one honours class a week throughout the year.Honours candidates will undertake written work distinct from that of the pass course.Syllabus(a) As for the pass degree(b) a detailed study of some theoretical issues of international politics.BooksReading guides will be distributed

to honours candidates at the begin­ning of the academic year.

Examination: Two three-hour papers as for the pass degree and a third three-hour paper upon the subject- matter of the honours work.

Public Policy and Adm in istra­tion (Honours)Lectures as for the pass degree, together with one honours class a week throughout the year.Syllabus(a) As for the pass degree(b ) the nature of bureaucracy in modern society(c) economic planning in theory and practice.Preliminary Reading

Albrow, M., Bureaucracy, Papermac.Prescribed Books

Mouzelis, N. P., Organizations & Bureaucracy, Routledge &Kegan Paul.□ Merton, R. K. et al., Reader in Bureaucracy, Free Press.

Crozier, M , The Bureaucratic Phenomenon, Tavistock.□ Tinbergen, J., Central Planning, Yale UP.□ Halm, G. N., Economic Systems, 3rd ed., Holt, Rinehart & Winston.

Examination: Two three-hour papers as for the pass degree and a three- hour paper upon the subject matter of the honours work.

Polit ical Science IV (Honours)This course will embrace the whole fourth honours year. Only those students proceeding to the honours degree who have satisfied the Faculty in their first three years will be entitled to enrol for it.

The subject matter of this course w ill include advanced units in

141

Psychology

selected fields of political study. Candidates will be required to undertake, inter alia, extended written work, usually in the form of a sub-thesis.

For the degree of MasterCandidates who have gained an honours bachelor's degree with at least second class honours, division A with at least a major in Political Science, may be admitted to proceed by thesis (not exceeding 60,000 words) for the degree of Master of Arts or Master of Econ­omics, provided that there is a senior member of staff qualified to supervise their work on the topic proposed and provided that it can be demonstrated that there is acces­sible sufficient essential primary source material on that topic. The subject of the thesis must be approved by the Head of the Department. Thesis candidates may be required to attend seminars or other discussions.

Aspiring candidates with honours bachelor's degrees second class, division B, or third class or pass bachelor's degrees, whose results in the immediately relevant units clearly indicate a capacity to achieve second class honours division A standard-provided in all cases that they have already at least a major in Political Science-may be admit­ted to take a master's qualifying course to be approved by the Head of the Department. Should they reach second class honours divi­sion A standard in this course they will be eligible for admission to thesis work for the master's degree upon conditions outlined in the previous paragraph.

C. A. Gibb, OBE, MA, BEc (Syd), PhD (III), FBPsS,Professor and Head of the Department

IntroductionPsychology may be studied either as a single unit, designed to give some insight into the objective and scientific study of human behaviour, or as a major field of concentration in either an arts or science degree. The first year of the course is largely an introduction to the methods used in psychological science and to the type of problems with which it deals. However, a good deal of substan­tive information is included upon such subjects as motivation, per­ceiving, learning, remembering, thinking, individual differences, and personality. Subsequent courses treat more specialised subject matter and offer training in more advanced techniques. Laboratory and practical work are a normal part of courses in psychology and attendance at practical classes is compulsory.

A student with leanings towards the biological sciences will ordinarily study psychology within a Bachelor of Science degree course. One whose interests incline him rather to the social sciences may pursue the Bachelor of Arts degree course with a concentration or honours in psychology.

The pass degree courses are not planned with a view to providing specialised professional training. Students who wish to become practising psychologists will usually need to pursue an honours course and, in most circumstances, to proceed to postgraduate studies in psychology.

In general, a student who has a good honours degree in arts or

142

Psychology

science may enrol directly for the degree of Doctor of Philosophy. The pass degree student with at least a major in psychology may enrol for a master's degree in arts or science (depending upon the faculty in which his first degree was taken) after completing a qualifying course but may not enrol directly for the degree of Doctor of Philosophy.

For the pass degree Psychology A01 (1 unit)Full year.

Three lectures and one three-hour laboratory each week.Syllabus: An introduction to behaviour and methods of observ­ing it; the biological and social bases of behaviour; physical stimuli and the senses; perception, motiva­tion and emotion; learning; thinking; intelligence and ability; nature and development of personality; indivi­dual differences in abilities and personality; psychological measure­ment; the individual in society; elementary statistics.Examination: Assignments and tests during the year, one half-year and one final three-hour examination paper.

Human Biology A02+ (1 unit)Full year.

Three lectures and one three-hour laboratory each week.Syllabus: Anatomy, histology and physiology of vertebrates with special reference to man. Cellular and genetic basis of human sexuality, sex determination and diversity. Population genetics, linkage. The place of primates in the classification of animals.

tCourse run jointly by the Departments of Psychology and Zoology.

Human evolution including ethnic differences in structure and behaviour. Biological and cultural basis of human behaviour.Perceptual and motor skills, emo­tion, motivation, higher mental processes. Disease. Ecology and man, including utilisation of resources and energy, population growth, pollution, conservation.

Psychology B01 unit)(Intermediate Psychology)First semester

Three lectures and four hours of laboratory work a week.Prerequisite: Human Biology A02 or Psychology A01.Syllabus: The study of three partic­ular areas within Psychology:(a) Learning: Basic principles of learning; reinforcement; extinction; learnable drives and rewards; aversive control; generalisation and discrimination; concept formation; verbal learning, retention and forgetting.(b) Psychophysiology: Gross nervous anatomy, neuronal physio­logy methods of study in neuro­psychology; relations between the autonomic and endocrine systems and behaviour; anatomical and physiological bases of perceptual and motor skills.(c) Psychological Statistics: Des­criptive statistics—frequency distri­butions, central tendency, dispersion, correlation, regression and pre­diction. Inferential statistics— sampling distributions and hypothesis testing. Non- parametric statistics.Examination: One three-hour paper and assessment of laboratory and class work.

143

Faculty of Arts

Psychology B02 ( i unit)(Personality and Assessment)Second semester

Three lectures and three hours of laboratory work each week. Prerequisite: Psychology B01 Syllabus: The nature of personality. Personality theory—psycho-analytic theory; social psychological theories; phenomenological theories; factor theories; learning theories. Deter­minants of personality differences- biological, experiential, social. Personality assessment-aptitude and ability testing; personality ques­tionnaire; objective personality tests; projective techniques; rating methods; interviewing.Examination: One three-hour paper and assessment of laboratory and class work.

Psychology B03 ( i unit)(Intelligence and Ability)First semesterThis unit will not be offered in 1972.

Two lectures and one seminar each week.Prerequisite: Psychology A01 or Human Biology A02.Corequisite: Psychology B01. Syllabus: Intelligence-its nature and development. Structure of abilities. Genetics and individuality. Nature-nurture interaction. Learning and human ability. Ability and experience. Intelligence and creati­vity. Ability and performance. Con­stancy of IQ intellectual superiority. Mental retardation and mental deficiency. Mental deficiency and specific brain pathology. Sex, age, social class and race differences in human abilities. Talent and society. Examination: One three-hour paper and assessment of class work and essays.144

Psychology B04 ( i unit)(Developmental Psychology)Second semester

Three lectures and four hours of laboratory work a week.Prerequisite: Psychology B01. Syllabus: The concept of develop­ment. Genetic and constitutional factors in development-prenatal developmental sequences, structure- function relationships, critical periods, species-specific behaviour patterns. Developmental processes, including learning, imitation, identi­fication, maturation. Components of development-perception and cognition, including language; emotional development; social development, including social relationships, attitudes and values.

Environmental determinants- cultural; social; physical; inter­personal, with particular reference to the mother-child relationships. Theoretical approaches to develop­ment.Examination: One three-hour paper and assessment of laboratory and class work.

Psychology B05 (J unit)(Comparative Behaviour)First semester

Two lectures and a two-hour seminar a week.Prerequisite: Psychology A01 or Human Biology A02.Corequisite: Psychology B01. Syllabus: A close examination in depth of one major area of behaviour common to species at various levels, including man. Examination: One three-hour paper and assessment of laboratory and class work.

Psychology

Psychology B06 (J unit)(Sensation and Perception)Second semester

Three lectures and three hours of laboratory work each week. Prerequisite: Psychology B01. Syllabus: An examination of the mechanisms by which perceptual systems receive sensory informa­tion and employ this to construct a model of the external world. The course will consider the physical basis of stimulation; anatomical, physiological and behavioural aspects of receptor systems; mechanisms underlying the perception of form and optional relationships; attentional mechanisms; perceptual learning and development.Examination: One three-hour paper and assessment of laboratory and class work.

Psychology C01 ( i unit)(Learning and Motivation)First semester

Three lectures and six hours of practical work each week.Prerequisite: Psychology B02 or B04 or B06.Syllabus: Verbal learning; learning of skills; transfer; classical and instrumental conditioning; dis­crimination learning; emotion and conflict; systematic theories of learning; behaviourist, cognitive, mathematical.Examination: One three-hour paper and assessment of laboratory and class work.

Psychology C02 ( i unit)(Human Skills and Applied Experimental Psychology)Second semester

Three lectures and six hours of

practical work each week. Prerequisite: Psychology C01 or B06.Syllabus: Analysis of man-machine systems. Theories of communica­tion and control. Creation of optimum environments for living and work. Criteria for automation. Attention will be devoted to such functions, with their related concept and theories, as signal detection, information transmission, skill, learning, decision making and monitoring.Examination: One three-hour paper and assessment of laboratory and class work.

Psychology C03 (^ unit)(Social Psychology)First semester

Three lectures and two two-hour laboratory classes each week.Prerequisite: Psychology B02 or B04 or B06.Syllabus: Concepts of social psychology. The individual in society. Culture, class and family— their nature and their role in the socialisation of the individual. Pro­cesses of social learning. Social influences including language on intra-individual processes such as perception, cognition and motiva­tion. Person-perception and stereo­types. Attitudes— their nature, assessment and change. Communi­cation and effects of mass media. Theoretical approaches to social psychology. Research methods in social psychology. Applied social psychology.Examination: One three-hour paper and assessment of laboratory and class work.

145

Faculty of Arts

Psychology C04 (J unit)(Cognitive Processes)Second semester

Three lectures and four hours of laboratory work each week. Prerequisite: Psychology B02 or B04 or B06 or C01 or C03.Syllabus: Theoretical approaches to the conceptualisation and explanation of human cognitive activities such as concept forma­tion, reasoning, problem solving and meaningful verbal learning. Be­haviourist and neo-behaviourist theories and mediating processes. Cognitive, non-associative theories and cognitive structures. Informa­tion processing approaches. Com­puter and symbolic models. Lan­guage in cognitive functioning. Cognition in children and cognitive development. Educational implica­tions of research findings. Examination: One three-hour paper and assessment of laboratory and class work.

Psychology C05 ( i unit)(Advanced Personality)First semester

Three lectures and three hours of laboratory work each week. Prerequisite: Psychology B02. Syllabus: Experimental research in social motivation and personality dynamics. Multivariate statistical techniques and case study methods of assessment, prediction and hypo­thesis testing. Basic problems in personality research and theory concerned with integration and purposive behaviour. Interpersonal and individual aspects of self- concept, decision making, anxiety, stress and conflict. The relationship between experimental and survey methods. Introduction to interdis­

ciplinary work in study of the person in the social context. Educational implications of personality research findings.Examination: One three-hour paper and assessment of laboratory and class work.

Psychology C06 (^ unit)(Group Dynamics)Second semester

Three lectures and two two-hour laboratory classes each week.Prerequisite: Psychology C03 or C05.Syllabus: The concept of group- definitions, nature, inter-personal perception and attraction. Group process development. Group and individual performance. Group problem solving. Communication. Group productivity. Norms, Roles, Role Strain and Conformity.Deviant behaviour and social con­trol. Leadership. Intergroup rela­tions.Examination: One three-hour paper and assessment of laboratory and class work.

Psychology C08 ( i unit)(Psychopathology)This unit will not be offered in 1 972. Second semester

Three lectures and six hours of laboratory work a week.Prerequisite: Psychology C03 or C05.Syllabus: Introduction to basic con­siderations in the description and measurement of abnormal behav­iour, its causes and determinants and in the study and modification of psychopathology. The course will include an examination of some systems of treatment including

146

Psychology

group methods. Areas of social psychology relevant to an under­standing of deviant behaviour and its treatment will be included in the course.Examination: One three-hour paper and assessment of laboratory and class work.

Psychology C10 ( i unit)(Experimental Neuropsychology) Second semester

Eight hours of lecture, seminar, laboratory work a week arranged as two four-hour periods.Prerequisites: Either Psychology B02, B04 or B06; or Psychology A01 and Zoology C06.Syllabus: Structure of the central nervous system— surface features, dissection and examination of the internal structure. Principles of neurosurgery— electrodes, anaes- thetisation, placing of lesions, implanting electrodes, perfusion and removal of the brain, histology. Experiments in neuropsychology— changes in behaviour related to feeding, mating, general activity and intra-cranial stimulation. Examination: One three-hour paper and assessment of laboratory and class work.

Further elaborationAs a further guide to the choice of courses the following chart shows the usual progression. Note that not all arrows imply prerequisites. It will also be of assistance to note that all first semester courses have odd numbers while even numbers denote courses offered in the second semester. A full unit in Arts ordinarily consists of one odd and one even numbered course but there is no restriction to this pattern except that

Psychology B01 must be taken by all students proceeding beyond first year in Psychology. A major and a sub-major or a major and a mixed major are available to all students. These are achieved simply by electing any two courses in each semester or indeed any eight courses in the second and third years provided, of course, the pre­requisites are satisfied the necessary first-year unit is taken for the mixed major and the time-table allows.

147

Faculty of Arts

Year II Year III

Semester IISemester ISemester IISemester I

-C05 C06Advanced Personality—»-Group Dynamics

B02Personality.

£ 0 3Social rCognition

C02Human Skills

B04-Development'

B01IntermediatePsychology

-►Learning and M otivation

C10ExperimentalNeuropsychology

C08Psychopathology

C04Cognition

C02Human Skills

B03Intelligence and Ability

fB06Sensation and Perception

C01■Learning and Motivation

Comparative ExperimentalBehaviour Neuropsychology

For the degree w ith honoursHonours School in PsychologyIn the case of the degree w ith honours in psychology, no speciai or additional work is required.Each student w ill enrol for a normal first year of four units: Psychology I or Human Biology and three others. Distinction and credit w ill be awarded in Psychology I on the results of the examinations and on records of class work.

Note: A student planning a major and a mixed major in Psychology should consult the degree rules to

ensure that he has a suitable first-year unit to his mixed major.

After electing psychology honours at the beginning of second year the course w ill then normally be:

In the second year(a) Psychology B01(b ) Psychology B03 or B05(c) tw o of Psychology B02, B04 and B06(d ) the second unit of a major or sub-major other than Psychology.

In the th ird year(a) Four of Psychology C01, C02, C03, C04, C05, C06, C08 and C10

148

Psychology

(b) the third unit of a major or the second unit of a second sub-major other than psychology.In the fourth year: Psychology IV (Honours).Of the ten units normally required for the arts degree, the psychology honours course usually comprises five units, and five others are re­quired. Three of these others will normally be done in the first year.The other two may be so chosen as to constitute a second major or may be chosen to give two sub-majors. Which of these choices is made will ordinarily depend on the vocational plans of the student who is advised to discuss this matter with the Professor of Psychology.

Psychology IV (Honours)Candidates for the degree with honours must devote their full time in the honours year to the study of psychology and it will not ordinarily be possible to do this work part- time.

The work of the honours year will consist of selected topics in psych­ology taken at an advanced level. There will be few formal lectures, and the material will be covered by directed reading, seminars, tutorials, laboratory and research work. Can­didates will be required to submit a substantial theoretical essay and to undertake original (but guided) research on a selected problem and to submit a report on it which must be satisfactory to the examiners.

In outline the work of the honours year will consist of:(a) Research Methods in Psychology: One seminar through­out the year will be devoted to problems of method and research techniques. Topics will be selected

within areas of multivariate statistics, electronic data process­ing, sample survey methods, instrumentation and automatic monitoring and recording techniques. A three-hour written examination will be set.(b ) Current Problems in Psychology: This seminar will be conducted each week throughout the year to examine areas of rapid growth or particular current interest in psych­ology.

Practical work will accompany certain aspects of the course and in some cases will involve particular research techniques.

Students will be expected to contribute papers from time to time (in relation to their essay topics) and to undertake reading as required. A comprehensive examina­tion in psychology will be required of all honours candidates.(c) Theoretical Essays: These are designed to provide training in understanding, analysing and evaluating the state of knowledge in chosen areas of psychology. Two substantial essays of not more than 6,000 words will be set in consultation with an agreed super­visor.(d) Research Project: An indepen­dent research project will be carried out by each student under the direction of a staff member, arranged according to area of specialisation. The area of research and choice of supervisor should be made before Christmas in the student's third year so that details may be worked outin the long vacation. The report of the research must be finalised and submitted for examination by an agreed date in third term.

149

Faculty of Arts

(e) Staff Seminar: Students are required to attend the staff seminar which is held during term to discuss the research work in progress in the Department.Examination: Written examinations may be held from time to time throughout the year and laboratory work, research reports and essays will be assessed.

For the degree of M aster of ArtsA student who has qualified for the Bachelor of Arts degree with at least good second class honours in psychology may, provided he satisfies the Head of the Depart­ment as to his knowledge of psych­ology, proceed directly to the course for the degree of Master of Arts by seminar, thesis and examination.

Facilities exist in the Department for work towards the degree of Master of Arts in the areas of social psychology, group dynamics, personality, cognitive processes, human skills, physiological psychology, general experimental psychology and counselling.

Subject to the permission of the Head of the Department, stu­dents with at least a good second class honours in psychology may proceed to the degree of Master of Arts in psychological counselling by seminar, practicum, examination and theoretical thesis. The course is of twelve months duration for full-time students. Part-time students may be accepted provided that the work may be spread over two years.

Master of Arts— Qualifying ExaminationA student who has qualified for a

pass degree of Bachelor of Arts with at least a major in psychology from this or any recognised university may, with the approval of the Head of the Department, proceed to the course for the degree of Master of Arts by first passing a qualifying examination.

The subjects for such an examina­tion will be prescribed by the Head of the Department after taking into consideration the nature of the work already done and the stu­dent's specialised plans for advanced study.

For the degree of D octor o f Philosophy-Candidates for this degree will usually hold the degree of Bachelor of Science with honours or the degree of Bachelor of Arts with honours, though candidates with degrees of Master of Science or Master of Arts may be admitted to the program.

Facilities exist in the Department for work towards the degree of Doctor of Philosophy in the areas of social psychology, group dynamics, personality, psychological development, counselling, cognitive processes, human skills, physiological psychology and general experimental psychology.

150

Russian

R. G. A. de Bray, BA, PhD (Lond) Professor and Head of the Department

IntroductionFor the pass degree of Bachelor of Arts there is a three-year course in Russian. The object of the course is to provide facility in reading, writing and speaking Russian and a critical appreciation of representative works of Russian literature.

To be admitted to Russian I, a stu­dent should have obtained a pass at Level 2 in a language other than English at the New South Wales Higher School Certificate Examina­tion or have reached the same standard at an equivalent examina­tion. Students lacking this qualifica­tion may be admitted only by special permission of the Head of the Department. No prior knowledge of Russian is necessary.

Russian I is devoted to an intensive study of modern written and spoken Russian; in addition, the student reads some short works of modern Russian prose and verse. Practical language study continues in Russian II and III, and is accompanied by studies in modern Russian literature, in which special attention is given to the classical writers of the nineteenth century.

To ensure continuity of study, all students are expected to read addi­tional prescribed texts during the long vacations and complete assignments set.

Students wishing to attempt honours in Russian take Russian I, and then go on to take Russian II and III together with additional honours work before entering Russian IV. To qualify for admission to each successive year of the

honours course at least a credit must be obtained at the Annual Examination.

Russian I is normally a prerequisite for Russian II. This prerequisite may be waived, however, in the case of a student who demonstrates that he possesses sufficient knowledge of Russian to proceed direct to Russian II, by passing a test similar to and of the same standard as the Annual Examination in Russian I. Students desiring exemption from this pre­requisite should make application to the Head of the Department as soon as possible.

In all units, work done during the year will be taken into account in the determining of examination results. During 1971, specific proportions of marks were allotted for the year's work and for the Annual Examinations in Russian II and Russian III. This arrangement will be continued in 1972.

Any student who fails to hand in assignments by the due dates, to attend for class tests or to par­ticipate regularly in language classes, except by specific per­mission of the Head of the Department, may be excluded from the Annual Examination.

For the pass degreeThe major in Russian is Russian I,II and III in that order. The sub­majors are:(a) Russian I and II in that order(b ) Russian II and III in that order (where exemption is granted from the prerequisite Russian I under conditions mentioned above).The single units are:(a) Russian I(b ) Russian II (where exemption is granted from the prerequisite Russian I).

Faculty of Arts

Russian ISix hours a week throughout the year.Syllabus(a) Phonetics and grammar(b ) drill in basic speech patterns(c) study of selected texts(d) dictation, reading aloud and conversation(e) language laboratory work.Prescribed Book To be announced.Examination Two three-hour papers; oral examination and dictation.

Russian IISix hours a week throughout the year.Syllabus(a) Study of selected texts(b) more advanced grammar and syntax(c) translation from English into Russian and prose composition(d) translation from Russian into English(e) dictation, conversation, and language laboratory work.Prescribed Books□ Chekhov, A. P., Three SistersBradda.Penguin Book of Russian Verse. Penguin Russian Reader.Examination: Three three-hour papers; oral examination and dictation.

Russian IIISix hours a week throughout the year.Syllabus(a) Study of selected works of modern Russian authors(b) translation from English into Russian and prose composition

(c) translation from Russian into English(d) dictation, conversation, and language laboratory work.Books: A reading list will be issued by the Department.Examination: Three three-hour papers; oral examination and dic­tation.

For the degree w ith honours

Honours School in RussianFor the degree with honours in Russian the course extends over four years and consists of:(a) Russian I, II and III(b) additional honours work as specified below(c) five other units, comprising either a major and two single units, or two sub-majors and a single unit(d) Russian IV.Students should consult the Head of the Department on the selection of non-Russian units.firs t Year. In their first year pro­spective honours students take Russian I and three other units.To be admitted to Russian II (Honours), students must reach at least credit level in Russian I.

Russian II (Honours)In their second year students take Russian II (pass course), additional honours courses as specified below, and the second part of a major or sub-major.

The additional honours courses consist of;(a) Selected Russian short stories from Pushkin to the present day (ib) selected Russian verse of the nineteenth and twentieth century (c) advanced composition,

152

Russian

translation and oral work.Prescribed reading is notified in class.Examination: One or two three- hour papers.

Russian III (Honours)In their third year students take Russian III (pass course), addi­tional honours courses as specified below, and the third part of a major or the second part of a sub­major.

The additional honours courses consist of two of the following:(a) Russian literature of the nineteenth century(b ) Russian society and thought 1800-1905(c) introduction to comparative Slavonic philologyand(d) introduction to the history of the Russian language(e) advanced composition, translation and oral work.Prescribed reading is notified in class.Examination: One or two three- hour papers and an oral examina­tion in Russian on any aspects of the year's work.

Russian IV (Honours)In their fourth year students take the following courses:(a) History of the language(b ) either Russian literature since1890 or the comparative philology of the Slavonic languages including Old Church Slavonic(c) advanced composition, translation, and oral work.Prescribed reading is notified in class.

Russian on any aspects of the year's work; two or more sub­stantial essays or a short thesis.

For the degree of M aster of ArtsAn honours degree is the normal qualification for a student pro­ceeding to the degree of Master of Arts. A student with the pass degree who wishes to read for the master's degree may do so by com­pleting a qualifying course at hon­ours level after he has finished his pass degree.

Candidates proceed to the master's degree by thesis. Proposed topics must be submitted to the Head of the Department, who will give his approval only if a senior member of staff is qualified to supervise work on the topic and if sufficient source material is available.

Candidates may be required to attend seminars or other classes. They must furnish progress reports at regular intervals and meet their supervisor to discuss these reports.

Examination: Three or four three- hour papers; an oral examination in

153

Sociology

J. Zubrzycki, MBE, MSc(Econ) (Lond)Professor and Head of the Department

IntroductionIn simplest terms, sociology is the study of general or recurrent human relationships. Two basic assumptions lie at the foundation of sociology. The first is that human behaviour follows a pattern or order similar to the patterning of natural phenomena. The process whereby this patterning comes about makes up an integral part of the subject matter of sociology.

The second factual basis of sociology is that man is a social creature. Numerous scholars, tracing back to Aristotle, have observed and recorded what has been called a natural tendency for men to associate themselves in groups. These accounts lead the sociologist to look for descriptions and explanations of human behaviour in the group setting.

Within the framework of this definition of subject matter the teaching of sociology aims at guiding the student to select certain fact out of the unmarked con­tinuity of social reality, to interpret it for its varied meanings, to relate

it to other social facts, and to give it perspective. The discipline of sociology, then, seeks to establish a body of knowledge about human society which will be of use in explaining and predicting human behaviour.

Students can study sociology as part of their work for a degree at the pass level in Arts, Asian Studies, Science or Economics. Sociology I is designed to be of interest to students from all faculties and at the same time it serves as a foundation (and a prerequisite) to all further sociological studies. Sociology II and Sociology III are core units designed to give vocationally oriented students training by teach­ing them basic elements of the scientific method in sociology. This training can be supplemented by the study of selected substantive areas of sociology, i.e. electives grouped under the heading of Social Organisation A, B, C and D. There will be no separate units for students proceeding to an honours course. Admission to the fourth- year honours year will be restricted to students with good passes in Sociology I, II, III and Social Organisation A, B, C, D (see below).

The following combination of units will be available to students:

Sociology I As a single unit or with any of the following:

(a) Sociology II Sociology III

taken to complete a major designed to give a general vocational orientation

(b) Sociology II Social Organisation A Social Organisation B

taken to complete a major designed for students not primarily interested in further studies or a career which would presuppose the use of sociological research techniques

154

Sociology

(c) Any first year unit in the faculties of Arts, Asian Studies, Science or Economics

Sociology II Sociology III Social Organisation A Social Organisation B Social Organisation C Social Organisation D

taken to complete a double major in Sociology and as a prerequisite to honours work

(d ) Sociology II to complete a sub-major w ith some vocational orientation

(e) Social Organisation A Social Organisation B

to complete a sub-major w ith no vocational content

(/) Social Organisation A Social Organisation B Social Organisation C Social Organisation D

taken as single units in one or tw o years but not counting as a major.

Units to be offered in 1972The Department w ill offer Sociology I, Sociology II and four electives under Social Organisation A, B, C and D. The list of electives may be extended if new staff appointments can be made early in 1972

Further information w ill be supplied by the Head of the Department to all students who pass in Sociology I in 1971.A complete sequence of pass units w ill be developed by 1973; Sociology IV (Honours) w ill be taught for the first time in 1 974. In 1972 the Department w ill again invite applications from suitably qualified graduates who wish to enrol for the tw o year MA in Sociology by course work and thesis, or by thesis alone (see below). Applications w ill also be invited from prospective candidates for the degree of Doctor of Philosophy. (see below).

For the pass degree

Sociology ITwo lectures and one compulsory tutorial a week throughout the year, divided into tw o sections.Syllabus:(a) Introduction to the study o f man in society (taught in the first halfof the year)

Following a general introduction to the field of sociology, students w ill investigate the elements of social interaction (norms, roles and values) and how these elements are manifested in the structure of society. Socialisation, primary and secondary groups, social stratification, social movements, and population and ecology w ill be some of the topics considered. Where possible, practical applications w ill be made, w ith specific attention given to Australian society.(b ) Introduction to sociological

155

Faculty of Arts

research (taught in the second half of the year)

Students will first investigate the logic of scientific research and research design, as well as ethical and political problems associated with such research. This will be followed by the study of principal research methods: participant observation, the interview, the mail questionnaire, and the use of documents. Where feasible, examples of these techniques will be analysed and criticised. Research projects involving field experience will be organised in the tutorials. Preliminary Reading□ Inkeles, A., What is Sociology, Prentice-Hall, Paperback.Prescribed Reading□ Broom, L. & Selznick, P., Sociology, 4th ed., Harper.□ Davis, A. F. & Encel, S. (eds.), Australian Society, 2nd ed., Cheshire.□ Moser, C. A. & Kalton, G.,Survey Methods in Social Investigation, 2nd ed., Heinemann, Paperback.Examinations: Students will be expected to submit one essay (not exceeding 2,000 words) in each section of the course. Also, at the end of each section there will be one three-hour examination. The final grade for the course will consist of an average of the two sections. The relative weighting given to each area in the final assessment of the student will be 30% for the essay, 40% for the examination and 30% for participation in tutorial work.

Sociology IIThis unit consists of two sections offered concurrently over one year.

(a) The foundations of sociological theoryOne lecture and one tutorial class per week.Syllabus: An examination of the social and intellectual context which has shaped the development of sociological studies from their inception in the writings of the Scottish moral philosophers and and in the works of the French philosophers of the Enlighten­ment. The pioneers of sociology: Comte, Spencer, Tocqueville. Sociological theories of Marx,Weber, Dürkheim and Simmel. Pareto's systematic sociology. The social survey tradition. Functional­ism, behaviourism and the 'conflict' theory of society. Contemporary convergence in sociological theory. Prescribed Reading□ Aron, R., Main Currents in Sociological Thought, 2 vols. Penguin.□ Cohen, P. S., Modern Social Theory, Heinemann.□ Weber, M., The Protestant Ethic and the Spirit of Capitalism, Unwin University Paperback.(b) Research design, data collection and analysisOne lecture and two hours of practical work per week throughout the year.Syllabus: Fundamentals of statistical analysis: enumeration procedures, measures of central tendency, linear regression and correlation statistical inference, parameter estimation, hypothesis testing. Further enquiry into survey sampling, case study, participant observation, content analysis. Sociometric techniques. Projective techniques. Index construction. Attitude scaling. The logic of survey analysis.

156

Sociology

Prescribed Reading□ Moser, C. A. & Kalton, G.,Survey Methods in Social Investigation, 2nd ed., Heinemann, Paperback.□ Guilford, J. P., Fundamental Statistics in Psychology and Education, McGraw-Hill.□ Kish, L, Survey Sampling,Wiley.□ Rosenberg, M„ The Logic of Survey Analysis, Basic Books. Examinations: There will be two three-hour examinations in each section of the course, one examina­tion session in mid-year and oneat the end of the year. The average mark for these examinations will account for 50% of the total grade. The other 50% will accrue from two essays in Sociology II(i) and the laboratory exercises in Sociology ll(ii).

Sociology IIIThis unit consists of two sections offered concurrently over one year, (i) Theory construction in sociologyOne lecture and one tutorial class per week throughout the year. Syllabus: The process of theory construction in contemporary sociological research: scientific concepts, conceptualisation of variables, causal hypotheses and models, classification and typologies. Explanation and prediction. The logic of functional and historial explanation. The comparative method. The value dilemma in sociological theory.The empirical testing of theory. Prescribed Reading□ Brown, R., Explanation in Social Science, Routledge & Kegan Paul.□ Merton, R ..On Theoretical

Sociology, Free Press.□ Parsons, T., The Social System, Routledge & Kegan Paul.(ii) Advanced methods of sociological measurement and analysisOne lecture and two hours of practical work per week throughout the year.Syllabus:(a) Development of research design for class project.(b) Intermediate statistical analysis procedures: correlation, multiple linear regression, analysis of variance and covariance.(c) Applied regression analysis.{d) Execution of research design for class project.(e) Advanced statistical analysis procedures: multivariate analysis, factor analysis, multiple classifica­tion analysis.(0 Fundamentals of data processing.(g) Analysis of class project data. Prescribed Reading□ Guilford, J. P., Fundamental Statistics in Psychology and Education, McGraw-Hill,(purchased for Sociology II).

Kelley, F. J. et. al., Research Design in the Behavioral Sciences. Multiple Regression Approach, Southern Illinois.□ Draper, N. R. & Smith, H., Applied Regression Analysis,Wiley.□ Blalock, R. & Blalock, A., Methodology in Social Research, McGraw-Hill.Examinations: There will be two three-hour examinations in each section of the course, one examination session in mid-year and one at the end of the year.The average mark for these

157

Faculty of Arts

examinations will account for 50% of the total grade. The other 50% will accrue from two essays in Sociology lll(i) and the laboratory exercises in Sociology lll(ii).

Social Organisation A Social Organisation B Social Organisation C Social Organisation DFour half units (i.e. semester length courses) may be taken from the following list of electives: sociology of rural-urban com­munities, social stratification, sociology of religion, sociology of education, man and his environ­ment, sociology of minority groups, population trends and policies, philosophy of the social sciences; sociology of deviance and social control.

Electives available in 1972

Sociology of Rural and Urban CommunitiesFirst semester.Two lectures and one tutorial per week.Syllabus: After discussing defini­tions of community and an investigation of community-study methodologies, students will examine the major processes affecting community in con­temporary societies. Urbanisation, ecology, stratification, power structure, and community participation will be some of the topics treated. Finally, attention will be given to community conflict and its resolution, planned com­munities and community change. Where possible, Australian communities will be compared with those in other societies.

Prescribed Reading□ Frankenberg, R., Communities in Britain, Pelican, Paperback.□ French, R. M. (ed.), The Community: A Comparative Perspective, Peacock Publishers, Itasca, Illinois.□ Rose, A. J., Patterns of Cities, Nelson, Paperback.Course Assessment: There will be one essay (not more than 3,000 words) and one three-hour examination at the conclusion of the semester. The final grade will be determined as follows: 30% essay, 30% tutorial, 40% examina­tion.

Sociology of ReligionFirst semester.Two lectures and one tutorial per week.Syllabus: The course will be aimed primarily at analysing religious phenomena in a broad comparative perspective, though necessarily much of the material will be drawn from discussions of the Judaeo- Christian tradition. The major ordering perspective will be strictly sociological, rather than theological or historical, with an emphasis on theory and methodology. The following main areas will be covered: theories of the origin and development of religion; varieties of religious experience; religious functionaries; religion, culture and society; and secularisation and modernity. Prescribed Reading□ O'Dea, T. F., Sociology of Religion, Prentice-Hall.□ Yinger, J. M., Religion, Society and the Individual, Macmillan.□ Knudten, R. D„ The Sociology of Religion: An Anthropology,

158

Sociology

Appleton-Century-Crofts.□ Robertson, R., Sociology of Religion, Penguin.Course Assessment: Examination — 40%, extended essay—30%, tutorial work—30%.

Sociology of EducationSecond semester.Two lectures and one tutorial per week.Syllabus: The analysis of education as a social institution will be divided into three parts:(a) education and society; educational functions, uses, and relationship to the economy;(b ) social determinants of educational selection, differentiation, and achievement (Who gets educated? What are the deter­minants of high educational performance?);(c) educational institutions as formal organisations, with specific emphasis on educational climate, administrative styles, and teacher- student roles. Wherever possible, comparisons will be made between the educational systems of Australia, Great Britain, the United States and Russia.Prescribed Reading□ Banks, Olive., The Sociology of Education, Batsford.□ Katz, F. M. & Browne, R. K. (eds.), Sociology of Education: Readings Pertinent to the Australian Education System, Macmillan, Paperback.□ Young, M„ The Rise of the Meritocracy, Pelican, Paperback. Suggested Reading□ Halsey, A. H., Floud, J. & Anderson, C. A. (eds.), Education Economy and Society, Collier- Macmillan, Paperback.

Course Assessment: There will be one essay (not more than 3,000 words) and one three-hour examination at the conclusion of the semester. The final grade will be determined as follows: 30% essay, 30% tutorial, 40% examina­tion.

Man and His EnvironmentSecond semester.Two lectures and one tutorial per week.Syllabus: The course will be concerned with the interplay between biological and cultural processes since the neolithic transition, and especially with the biological implications of recent technological developments. This will involve a study of: the biological history of man; the biologically-determined responses of the human organism and of human populations to environ­mental change; the processes of adaptation (biological and cultural) in man, and their limitations; principles of ecology, especially as they relate to the impact of human society on the biosphere; the flow of energy through human society and the biosphere; specific examples of continuing interactions between cultural and biological processes—past and present. The course will conclude with dis­cussion on contemporary thought and controversy relevant to the environmental situation.Prescribed Reading□ Ehrlich, P. R. & Ehrlich, Anne H., Population Resources Environ­ment: Issues in human ecology, Freeman.□ Barnett, A., The Human Species, Pelican, Paperback.

159

Faculty of Arts

□ Boyden, S. V. (ed), The Impact of Civilisation on the Biology of Man, AN UP.Course Assessment: One essay submitted during the semester and one three-hour examination at the end of the semester. The relative weighting given to each area of the final assessment of the student will be 25% for essay, 50% for examination and 25% for tutorial work.

For the degree w ith honours(a) Sociology I, II, III, Social Organisation A, B, C, D, (i.e., five units).(ib) Five further units, including at least one major or sub-major taken in the Faculties of Arts,Asian Studies, Economics or Science.(c) Sociology IV (Honours)(i) Seminar in Method and

Theory in Sociology.(ii) Advanced study of one of the

electives listed under Social Organisation A, B, C, D.

(iii) Honours thesis.

For the degree of Master of Arts(1) Candidates who have gained a bachelor's degree with at least second class honours division A in sociology or sociology and anthro­pology in an approved university, may be admitted to proceed by thesis (not exceeding 75,000 words) for the degree of Master of Arts provided that the subject of the thesis is approved by the Head of the Department. Thesis candidates may be required to attend seminars.(2) Candidates with at least a second class honours division A bachelor's degree or its equivalent in subjects other than sociology 160

may be admitted to proceed by course work and thesis provided that their previous degree work and/or professional experience is considered suitable by the Head ol the Department. The requirements for the degree will be as follows:(a) Courses in the following subjects (each contributing the stated percentage of the total possible mark):

(i) Sociological theory (25%).(ii) Methods of Sociological

Investigation (15%).(iii) Social organisation (25%).

Candidates will be required to select two topics from a list which in 1972 will include: urban sociology, social strati­fication, sociology of minority groups, demography, political sociology, sociology of education, sociology of com­munity, sociology of religion.

(h) Thesis on a topic approved by the Head of the Department not exceeding 25,000 words (35% of the total grade).(c) Additional work in statistics may be prescribed for those students who have not reached an appropriate level in their under­graduate course.(3) Aspiring candidates with a bachelor's degree second class honours division B, or third class, or a pass bachelor's degree in sociology or sociology and anthropology, whose results in the immediately relevant units or professional experience clearly indicate a capacity to achieve second class honours division A standard, may be admitted to take a master's qualifying course to be approved by the Head of the Department. The subjects to be taken in the qualifying course will

Sociology

be prescribed by the Head of the Department from among those listed under (2) above after taking into consideration the nature of the work already done and the candi­date's specialised plans for advanced study. Candidates may also be required to submit a substantial essay on an approved topic or undertake original research on a selected problem and submit a report. Candidates whose work reaches second class honours division A standard will be eligible for admission to thesis work for the master's degree upon conditions outlined under (1) above.(4) Aspiring candidates with a bachelor’s degree second class honours division B, or third class, or a pass bachelor's degree in subjects other than sociology, whose results in the immediately relevant units or professional experience clear indicate a capacity to achieve second class honours division A standard may be admitted to take a master's qualifying course to be approved by the Head of the Department. The subjects to be taken in the qualifying course will be prescribed by the Head of the Department from among those listed under (2) above after taking into consideration the nature of the work already done and the candidate's specialised plans for advanced study. Candidates who reach second class honours division A standard will be eligible for admission to thesis work for the master's degree upon conditions outlined under (1) above.

usually hold a master's degree or equivalent qualification in Sociology. Students may be required to undertake limited course work. The course ordinarily takes three years of full-time study.

Facilities exist in the Department for work towards the degree of Doctor of Philosophy in the areas of sociology of religion, sociology of education, research methodology and mathematical sociology, sociology of minority groups. Joint supervision may be arranged with the Department of Sociology in the Research School of Social Sciences in urban sociology and social stratification.

For the degree of D octor of PhilosophyCandidates for this degree will

161

Statistics

C. R. Heathcote, BA (WAust), MA (Melb), PhD Professor and Head of the Department The Department of Statistics has replanned its courses as semester units. Details are given under the Faculty of Economics.

The Faculty of Arts was unable to consider the course changes before the Faculty Handbook went to the printer. Intending students should consult the Sub-Dean, Faculty of Arts for details of the approved sequences of semester units for 1 972.

162

Degree Rules

Courses of Study (Degree of Bachelor o f Arts) Rules1 In these Rules, unless the con­trary intention appears, 'the Faculty' means the Faculty of Arts.2. The degree of Bachelor of Arts may be conferred either as a pass degree or as a degree with honours.3. A candidate for the degree shall, unless he has been admitted to advanced status, pursue a course of s:udy approved by the Faculty—(i) in the case of a candidate for

the pass degree— for at least three years; or

( i) in the case of a candidate for the honours degree— for at least four years if he is a full-time student and for at least five years if he is a part-time student;

after his admission to the course and submit himself for the examinations prescribed for the degree.4. Except as the Faculty otherwise determines a candidate shall be deemed to be pursuing the first year of his course until he has received credit towards the degree for at least two units of his course, there­after to be pursuing the second year of his course until he has received credit towards the degree for at least six units of his course and thereafter to be pursuing the third year of his course until he has received credit towards the degree for ten units of his course and thereafter if he is a candidate for honours, to be pursuing the fourth year of his course.5. A candidate shall submit for the approval of the Faculty his proposed course for the degree and shall thereafter also submit any proposed alterations to the course for the approval of the Faculty.

6. (1) A candidate shall not be admitted to examination in any unit of the course unless he has attended such classes and performed such work in the unit as is required by the head of the department responsible for that unit.(2) A candidate shall not be refused admission to an examina­tion in a unit under the last pre­ceding sub-rule—(a) by reason only of the failure of the candidate to attend a class in that unit unless the candidate was given reasonable notice before the class was held that he was required to attend the class; or(b ) by reason only of the failure of the candidate to perform any work in that unit unless the candidate was given reasonable notice that he was required to perform that work.

The pass degree7. (1) Subject to these Rules, a candidate shall not be admitted to the degree unless he has passed examinations in at least ten units, which shall, except with the approval of the Faculty, be taken in three years.(2) Except with the approval of the Faculty, a candidate shall take four units in the first year of his course and three units in each of the second and third years of his course.(3) The course for the degree shall consist of—

(i) three majors and one single unit

(ii) two majors and two sub-majors; or

(iii) two majors, one sub-major and two single units.

8. A major shall consist of a sequence of three units, and a sub­major shall consist of a sequence of

163

Faculty of Arts

two units, as provided by these Rules.9. (1) Subject to these Rules, the units and the approved sequences of units are as follows:

(a) Accounting and Public FinanceMajor:

Accounting I and IIand any two of the followinghalf units:

Company Finance Financial Accounting Theory National Economic Accounting Public Authority Accounting

Accounting I and the following half units:

National Economic Accounting Public Authority Accounting Expenditure and Fiscal

Institutions Welfare and Taxation

Sub-Major:Accounting I and II Accounting I and the following half units:

National Economic Accounting Public Authority Accounting

Single Units:Accounting IThe following two half units:

Expenditure and Fiscal Institutions

Welfare and Taxation

(aa) Classics Majors:

Greek la or lb, II and III Greek lb, Roman Civilization (S)

and Classical Tradition Greek Civilization, Roman

Civilization (S) and Classical Tradition

Latin la or lb, II and III Latin lb, Greek Civilization (S)

and Classical Tradition

Roman Civilization, Greek Civilization (S) and Classical Tradition

Mixed Majors:Greek Civilization, Greek Philo­

sophy and History of Philo­sophy

Latin la or lb and Medieval Studies A and B

Sub-Majors:Greek la or lb, and II Greek lb and Roman Civilization

(S)Greek Civilization and Roman

Civilization (S)Latin la or lb, and II Latin lb and Greek Civilization (S) Roman Civilization and Greek

Civilization (S)Mixed Sub-Majors:

Greek Civilization and Greek Philosophy

Latin la or lb and Medieval Studies A

Single Units:Greek la Greek lb Latin la Latin lbGreek Civilization Roman Civilization

The sequences Latin la, Latin II and Latin III, and Greek la, Greek II and Greek III are approved majors, and the sequences Latin la and Latin II, and Greek la and Greek II are approved sub-majors only for a student who, having completed Latin la, in the case of the major and sub-major in Latin, or Greek la, in the case of the major and sub­major in Greek, at the Annual Examinations, subsequently satisfies the Head of the Department of Classics that he is qualified to proceed to Latin II or Greek II, as the case may be.

164

Degree Rules

(ab) -j-Computer ScienceSub-Major:

Computer Science I and II Single Unit:

Computer Science I

(b) fEconomics Major:

Economics I, II and III Mixed Major:

Pure Mathematics I, Mathematical Economics I and Operational Research

Sub-Majors:Economics I and II Mathematical Economics I and II

Mixed Sub-Major:Mathematical Economics I and

Operational Research Single Units:

Economics I Economics AMathematical Economics I Mathematical Economics A and any two of the following half units:

Agricultural Production and Prices

Agriculture in the National Economy

Labour Economics

(c) Economic HistoryMajors:

Economic History I and II and two of the following half units:

Economic Development of Modern Japan

Problems of Under-development: India

Recent Economic Experience in Europe and North America

Economic History I and II and History of Economic Thought

f Amendments to these rules are under consideration.

Mixed Majors:Economic History I and II and

History 11 A, IID or MIA Economics I and Economic

History I and II Economics A and Economic

History I and II Sub - Major:

Economic History I and II Mixed Sub-Major:

Economics I and Economic History I

Economics A and Economic History I

Single Units:Economic History I History of Economic Thought

(d) EnglishMajors:

English IA, 11A and IMA English IB, MB and IIIB English IB and MB, and Old

English Mixed Major:

Medieval Studies A and B, and Old English (subject to rule 11 of these Rules, in any order)

Sub-Majors:English IA and IIA English IB and MB English IA and American Litera­

tureEnglish IA and Australian Litera­

tureEnglish IB and Old English American Literature and

Australian Literature (in either order)

Mixed Sub-Majors:As provided in paragraph (g) of this ruleMedieval Studies A and Old

English (in either order)Single Units:

English IA English IB

165

Faculty of Arts

American Literature Australian Literature Old English

{da) French Majors:

French Language and Literature I, II and III

French Studies A, B and C Sub-Majors:

French Language and Literature I and II

Any two of:French Studies A French Studies B French Studies C (in either order)

Single Units:French Language and Literature I French Studies A French Studies B French Studies C

(f) GeographyMajors:1st Year:

Geography I 2nd Year: One of—

Regional Geography A Systematic Geography A

3rd Year: One of—Applied Geography Regional Geography A (if not

taken as the second part of the major)

Regional Geography B Systematic Geography A (if not

taken as the second part of the major)

Systematic Geography B Sub-Majors:1st Year:

Geography I 2nd Year: One of—

Economic Geography Regional Geography A Systematic Geography A

Single Units:Economic Geography Geography I

A candidate taking a major in accordance with the foregoing provisions of this paragraph may take an additional major in any three, or a sub-major in any two, of such of the following units as are not included in the first-mentioned major:

Applied Geography Regional Geography A Regional Geography B Systematic Geography A Systematic Geography B Systematic Geography C

A candidate in his second or third year who has not already taken Regional Geography A may, with the approval of the Head of the Department, take that unit as a single unit.

{fa) Germanic LanguagesMajor: Such combination of the

units and half-units set out in the table in this paragraph, being a combination that includes a third-year unit or half-unit, as has a total value of not less than three units

Sub-Major: Such combination of those units and half-units, being a combination that includes a second-year unit or half-unit, as has a total value of not less than two units

Single Unit: A unit, or two of the half-units, set out in the table in this paragraph

166

Degree Rules

Units Half-units

1st Year Dutch IElementary German Swedish I

German Language I German Literature I German l(S )

2nd Year: Swedish II German Studies A German Studies B

German Language II German Literature II German Literature ll(H ) Old Norse I

3rd Year: German Studies A German Studies B

German Language III German Literature III German Literature 111 ( H) Old Norse I Old Norse II

For the purposes of this paragraph: (i) tw o half-units shall be deemed

more than one of which is a first- year unit.

to have the same value as one unit; and

(li) German Language I, together w ith German Literature I or German l(S) shall be deem­ed to be a second-year unit in a sub-major in the case of a student who has completed Elementary German.

(g) HistoryMajors:1st Year:

History IA, IB, IC or ID 2nd Year:

History IIA, I IB, IIC, IID, HE or IIF 3rd Year:

History MIA, 111B, MIC, MID, HIE, or IMF

Sub-Majors:Any one of the abovementioned first-year units and any one of the abovementioned second-year units.

In the case of a candidate in his second or third year, being a candidate who is not taking a major in H istory— tw o history units, not

Single Units:Any of the abovementioned first year units.M ixed Majors:

Economic History I; History IIA, MB, IIC, IID, ME or IIF; and History MIA, IIIB, MIC, MID,HIE or IMF

Economic History I; Economic History II; and History IIA, IID or MIA

History IA, IB, IC or ID; History IIA, MB, IIC, IID, ME or IIF; and Ethics and Politics or History of Philosophy

History IB or ID; and Medieval Studies A and B

History IB or ID; and Medieval Studies A and History IIF (in either order)

Medieval Studies A and B and History IIF (subject to rule 11 of these Rules, in any order)

M ixed Sub-Majors:History IA and Australian Litera­

ture (in either order)

167

Faculty of Arts

History MB and American Litera­ture (in either order)

History ID or IID and Ethics and Politics

History IB or ID and Medieval Studies A

History 11F and Medieval Studies A (in either order)

A candidate may not—(i) take more than six history units(ii) take more than two first-year

history units; or(iii) take more than one first-year

history unit as a single unit.A candidate may, with the approval of the Head of the Department of History, take a course of study that is a course specified by the Head of the Department in pursuance of rule 18 of these Rules as a course of study for the degree with honours.

(ga ) LinguisticsMajors:

Linguistics I, II and III Linguistics I, and Linguistics II

and Australian Linguistics (in either order)

Sub-Majors:Linguistics I and II Linguistics I and Australian

Linguistics Single Units:

Linguistics I Australian Linguistics

(h ) M athem aticsMajors:

Pure Mathematics I, II and III Applied Mathematics I, II and III.

M ixed Majors:Pure Mathematics I and II and

LogicPure Mathematics I, Mathematical

Economics I and Operational Research

Sub-Majors:Pure Mathematics I and II Applied Mathematics I and II

M ixed Sub-Majors:Pure Mathematics I and Opera­

tional ResearchPure Mathematics I and Statistics

IIApplied Mathematics I and

Statistics II Single Units:

Pure Mathematics I Applied Mathematics I General Mathematics.

(/) M edieval StudiesM ixed Majors:

History IB or ID and Medieval Studies A and B

History IB or ID, Medieval Studies A and History 11F (in either order)

Medieval Studies A and B, and History 11F (subject to rule II of these Rules, in any order)

Latin la or lb and Medieval Studies A and B

Old English and Medieval Studies; A and B

Sub - Major:Medieval Studies A and B

M ixed Sub-Majors:History IB or ID and Medieval

Studies AHistory 11F and Medieval Studies

A (in either order)Latin la or lb and Medieval

Studies AOld English and Medieval Studies

A (in either order)Single Units:

Medieval Studies A Medieval Studies B

(/) Asian StudiesA candidate may, with the approval of the Faculty of Asian Studies,

168

Degree Rules

take not more than seven units offered by that Faculty in accord­ance with the Courses of Study (Degree of Bachelor of Arts (Asian Studies)) Rules but a candidate may not take more than one major offered by that Faculty.

(m) PhilosophyMajors:1st Year:

Either Philosophy I, or Logic.2nd and 3rd Years:In any sequence any two of—

Logic (if not taken as the first part of the major)

Ethics and Politics History of Philosophy Greek Philosophy History and Philosophy of

SciencePhilosophy of Science A unit consisting of certain sections of the honours course approved by the Head of the Department of Philosophy.

Mixed Majors:Statistics I, Statistics II, Logic

provided that Economics I and Economics II are also taken)

Statistics II, Statistics III, Logic Greek Civilization, Greek Philo­

sophy, History of Philosophy Pure Mathematics I, Logic,

History and Philosophy of Science

Pure Mathematics I, Logic, Philo­sophy of Science

Pure Mathematics I, Logic,History of Philosophy

Pure Mathematics I and II, Logic A sub-major in History and either

Ethics and Politics or History of Philosophy

Sub-Majors:1st Year:

Either Philosophy I or Logic.

2nd Year:Any one of—

Logic (if not taken as the first part of the sub-major)

Ethics and Politics History of Philosophy Greek Philosophy History and Philosophy of Science Philosophy of Science

Mixed Sub-MajorsStatistics I, Logic (provided

Economics I and Economics II are also taken)

Statistics II, Logic Greek Civilization, Greek Philo­

sophyHistory ID or 11D, Ethics and

PoliticsPolitical Science I, Ethics and

Politics Single Units:

Philosophy I LogicEthics and PoliticsHistory and Philosophy of ScienceGreek PhilosophyHistory of PhilosophyPhilosophy of Science

{n) Political ScienceMajors:1st Year:One of—

Introduction to Modern Political Thought

Political Science I 2nd Year:One of—

Political Science II Political Sociology Public Policy and Administration

3rd Year:One of—

Asian Government International Relations Political Communication Public Policy and Administration

169

Faculty of Arts

(if not taken as the second part of the major)

A candidate who has completed the unit Political Science I as part of a course leading to a degree may take a major consisting of the unit Political Science II and any two of the units Asian Government, International Relations, Political Communication, Political Sociology and Public Policy and Administra­tion.Sub-Majors:Any one of the above mentioned

first-year units and any one of the above mentioned second-year units

In the case of a candidate who is taking, or has taken, a major in Political Science—any other two Political Science units

Mixed Sub-Major:Political Science I and Ethics and

Politics Single Units:

Asian Government International Relations Introduction to Modern Political

ThoughtPolitical CommunicationPolitical Science IPolitical Science IIPolitical SociologyPublic Policy and Administration

(o) PsychologyMajors:1st Year:

Psychology A01 or Human Biology A01

2nd Year:The half-unit Psychology B01 (being Intermediate Psychology) and any one of the following half­units:

Psychology B02 (being Person­ality and Assessment)

Psychology B03 (being Intelli­gence and Ability)

Psychology B04 (being Develop­mental Psychology)

Psychology B05 (being Com­parative Behaviour)

Psychology B06 (being Sensa­tion and Perception)

3rd Year:Any two of the following half-units:

Psychology C01 (being Learning and Motivation)

Psychology C02 (being Human Skills and Applied Experimental Psychology)

Psychology C03 (being Social Psychology)

Psychology C04 (being Cognitive Processes)

Psychology C05 (being Ad­vanced Personality)

Psychology C06 (being Group Dynamics)

Psychology C08 (being Psycho­pathology)

Psychology C10 (being Experi­mental Neuropsychology)

Mixed Major:A candidate taking a major in Psychology in accordance with the foregoing provisions of this para­graph may take a mixed major, having as its first-year component any one of the following units:

Economics I Economics A General Mathematics Linguistics I Philosophy I Physics A01 Physics A02 Political Science I Pure Mathematics I Sociology I Statistics I Zoology A01,

and having as its second and third- year components any four half-

170

Degree Rules

units specified in this paragraph in relation to the first mentioned major, being half-units not taken in that majorSub-Majors:As for the first two years of a major, not being a mixed major.A candidate taking a major in Psychology may take as a sub­major any four half-units specified in this paragraph not taken in that major.Single Units:

Psychology A01 Human Biology A01

(oa) Russian Major:

Russian I, II and III Sub-Majors:

Russian I and IIRussian II and III (where exemp­

tion is granted from Russian I) Single Units:

Russian IRussian II (where exemption is

granted from Russian I) Exemption from Russian I will be granted to a candidate who com­pletes, to the satisfaction of the Department of Russian, a test similar to and of the same standard as, the Annual Examination in Russian I.

(p) Science Units :Where the Faculty is satisfied that the time-table of lectures and practical classes permits, a candi­date may, with the approval of the Faculty of Science, take:(i) not more than two science units as single units; or(ii) two science units that are the first and second-year units, res­pectively, of the same subject or three science units that are the

first, second and third-year units, respectively, of the same subject as a sub-major or a major, respectively, together with one other science unit that is required or recommended by the Faculty of Science to be taken before one or more of the units constituting the sub-major or major are taken.

(pa) Sociology Majors:

Sociology I, II and III Sociology I and II, and Social Organisation A and B

M ixed Major:A candidate who has taken, or is taking, the major Sociology I, II and III may take a mixed major comprising a first-year unit offered in the Faculty of Arts, Asian Studies, Economics or Science and Social Organisation A, B, C and D Sub-Majors:

Sociology I and II Sociology I and Social

Organisation A and B Single Units:

Sociology ISocial Organisation A and B Social Organisation C and D

(q) -{-Statistics:Majors:

Statistics I, II and III Statistics I and II and Operational

ResearchStatistics II and III and Opera­

tional Research M ixed Majors:

Applied Mathematics I, Statistics II and III

Statistics I and II and Logic (provided that Economics I and II are also taken)

-{-Amendments to this rule are under consideration.

171

Faculty of Arts

Statistics II and III and Logic Pure Mathematics I, Mathematical

Economics I and Operational Research

Pure Mathematics I, Statistics II and Operational Research

Sub-Majors:Statistics I and II Statistics II and III Statistics I and Operational

ResearchStatistics II and Operational

ResearchMixed Sub-Majors:

Statistics I and Logic (provided that Economics I and II are also taken)

Statistics II and Logic Pure Mathematics I and Statistics

IIApplied Mathematics I and

Statistics IIMathematical Economics I and

Operational Research Pure Mathematics I and Opera­

tional Research Single Units:

Statistics I Statistics II Operational Research

(2) A mixed major or a mixed sub­major may be taken only with the approval of the heads of the depart­ments concerned.(3) A course of study for the degree of Bachelor of Arts may contain units or subjects from another Faculty, being units or subjects approved by the Faculty of Arts and taken, in a sequence approved by the Faculty of Arts, in accordance with the Courses of Study Rules of the other Faculty.(4) For the purposes of paragraph (p) of sub-rule (1) of this rule, a unit or units specified in rule 5 of the Courses of Study (Degree of

Bachelor of Science) Rules (not being a unit or units specified in another paragraph of sub-rule (1) of this rule) the value, or the combined value of which, for the purposes of those Rules, is two points shall be deemed to be one Science unit.10. (1) Notwithstanding anything contained in the last preceding rule a candidate may not receive credit for—(a) both Economic Geography and Systematic Geography A {b) both Economics A and Economics I(c) both Etymology and either English IB, MB or NIB(d) more than one of the following units:

(1) General Mathematics(ii) Mathematical Economics A

(iii) Pure Mathematics I(e) Greek Civilization if it is taken concurrently with, or after, Greek lb(f) both History INC and Asian Civilization III (South){g) Roman Civilization if it is taken concurrently with, or after, Latin lb(h) more than five first-year units; and(/) more than seven of the following units:

Economic Geography Statistics IThe units and half-units referred

to in paragraphs (aa), (b) and (c) of sub-rule (1) of the last

preceding rule that are also units and half-units for the pass degree of Bachelor of Economics.

(2) For the purposes of paragraph(i) of the last preceding sub-rule, any two of the half-units referred to in that paragraph shall be deemed to constitute one unit.11. (1) Except with the permission

172

Degree Rules

of the Faculty, a candidate shall no t—(a) take the second-year unit of a subject unless he has completed the first-year unit of that subject; or(b ) take the third-year unit of a subject unless he has completed the second-year unit of that subject. (2) Except w ith the permission of

the Faculty, a candidate shall not take a unit or half-unit the name of which is set out in the second column of the fo llow ing table unless he satisfies the condition or con­ditions specified in the third column of that table opposite the name of that unit or half-unit.

FirstColumn

SecondColumn

ThirdColumn

Item No. Units and Half-Units Conditions

1 Accounting II Completion or concurrent taking of Economics II

2 Agricultural Produc­tion and Prices

Completion or concurrent taking of Economics II

3 Agriculture in the National Economy

Completion or concurrent taking of Economics II

4 American Literature Completion of English IA

5 Applied Geography Completion of Systematic Geography A

6 Asian Government Completion o f—(a) Political Science I; and (<6) Political Science II

6A Australian Linguistics Completion of Linguistics I

7 Australian Literature Completion of English IA

8 Computer Science I Completion o f—(a) Applied Mathematics I;(b ) English IB;(c) General Linguistics I;(d) Logic;(e) Philosophy I;(f) Pure Mathematics I;(ig) Statistics I; or(/?) a unit in a language other than English

173

Faculty of Arts

FirstColumn

SecondColumn

ThirdColumn

Item No. Units and Half-Units Conditions

9 Computer Science II Completion of Pure Mathematics I

10 Economic Geography Completion or concurrent taking of Economics II

11 Economic History II Completion or concurrent taking o f—(a) Economics I; or(b ) Economics A

12 Economic History III Completion o f—(a) Economics I; or (ib) Economics A

13 Ethics and Politics Completion o f—(a) any other philosophy unit; or(b ) w ith the permission of theHead of the Department of Philosophy, any other unit permitted to be taken for the degree of Bachelor of Arts

14 Expenditure and Fiscal Institutions

Completion or concurrent taking of Economics II

15 French Studies C Completion of French Language and Literature I

16 German l(S) Completion or concurrent taking of German Language I

17 German Language II Completion of or exemption from German Language I

17A German Language III

Completion of or exemption from German Language II

18 German Literature I Completion or concurrent taking of German Language I

18A German Literature II Completion or concurrent taking of German Language II

174

Degree Rules

FirstColumn

SecondColumn

ThirdColumn

Item No. Units and Half-units Conditions

18B German Literature 11 ( H)

1. Completion of German Literature I at not less than credit level; and2. Completion or concurrent taking of German Language II

18C German Literature III

Completion or concurrent taking of German Language III

18D German Literature IH(H)

Completion of German Literature II at not less than credit level

19 Greek Philosophy Completion o f—(a) Greek lb;(b ) Greek Civilization;(c) Classical Tradition;(d) any other philosophy unit; or(e) w ith the permission of the Head of the

Department of Philosophy, any other unit permitted to be taken for the degree of Bachelor of Arts

20 History and Philosophy of Science

Completion o f—(a) Logic;(,b) Philosophy I; or(c) any other tw o units permitted to be

taken for the degree of Bachelor of Arts, one of which is a science or mathematics unit

21 History of Economic Thought

1. Completion of Economics III; or2. W ith Faculty approval, completion or

concurrent taking of Economics II

22 History of Philosophy

Completion of any other philosophy unit

23 InternationalRelations

Completion o f—(a) Political Science I; and(b ) Political Science II

24 Labour Economics Completion or concurrent taking of Economics II

175

Faculty of Arts

FirstColumn

SecondColumn

ThirdColumn

Item No. Units and Half-Units Conditions

25 Logic 1. Completion o f—(a) any other philosophy unit;(b ) Applied Mathematics I;(c) Statistics I; or(d) Computing Science I; or2. Completion or concurrent taking of

Pure Mathematics I

26 Mathematical Economics I

1. Completion of Pure Mathematics I; and

2. Completion or concurrent taking of Economics II

27 Mathematical Economics A

Completion of Economics I

28 Medieval Studies A Completion of four other units

29 Medieval Studies B Completion of Medieval Studies A

30 Old English Completion of four other units

30A Old Norse I Completion at not less than credit level of a language unit (including a unit offered by the Department of English)

30B Old Norse II Completion of, or exemption from, Old Norse I

31 OperationalResearch

Completion o f—(a) Pure Mathematics I; and(b ) Statistics I or Statistics II

32 Philosophy of Science

Completion o f—(a) any other philosophy unit; or(b ) any other tw o units permitted to be

taken for the degree of Bachelorof Arts one of which is a science or mathematics unit

176

Degree Rules

First Second ThirdColumn Column Column

Item No. Units and Half-Units Conditions

33 Political Completion o f—Communication (a) Political Science I; and

(b ) Political Science II

34 Political Sociology Completion of Political Science I

34A Problems of Under- Completion o f—development: (a) Economics I; orIndia (h) Economics A

35 Psychology B01 Completion o f—(a) Human Biology A01; or (h) Psychology A01

36 Psychology B02 Completion of Psychology B01

37 Psychology B03 Completion of Psychology B01

38 Psychology B04 Completion of Psychology B01

39 Psychology B05 Completion of Psychology B01

40 Psychology B06 Completion of Psychology B01

41 Psychology C01 Completion o f—(a) Psychology B02;(h) Psychology B04; or (c) Psychology B06

42 Psychology C02 Completion o f—(a) Psychology B06; or (h) Psychology C01

43 Psychology C03 Completion o f—(a) Psychology B02;(h) Psychology B04; or (c ) Psychology B06

177

Faculty of Arts

First Second ThirdColumn Column Column

Item No. Units and Half-Units Conditions

44 Psychology C04 Completion o f—(a) Psychology B02;(h) Psychology B04;(c) Psychology B06;(d) Psychology C01; or(e) Psychology C03

45 Psychology C05 Completion of Psychology B02

46 Psychology C06 Completion o f—(a) Psychology C03; or(b) Psychology C05

47 Psychology C08 Completion o f—(a) Psychology C03; or(b ) Psychology C05

48 Psychology C10 Completion o f—(a) Psychology A01 and Animal Behaviour;(b) Psychology B02;(c) Psychology B04; or(d) Psychology B06

49 Public Policy and Administration

Completion of Political Science I

49A Recent Economic Completion o f—Experience in (a) Economics I; orEurope and North America

(b) Economics A

50 Regional Completion or concurrent taking ofGeography B Regional Geography A

50A SocialOrganisation A

Completion of Sociology I

50B SocialOrganisation B

Completion of Social Organisation A

50C SocialOrganisation C

Completion of Social Organisation B

178

Degree Rules

First Second ThirdColumn Column Column

Item No. Units and Half-Units Conditions

50D SocialOrganisation D

Completion of Social Organisation C

51 Statistics II Completion o f—(a) General Mathematics; or(b ) Pure Mathematics I

52 Statistics III Completion of Pure Mathematics II

53 Systematic Geography B

Completion of Systematic Geography A

54 Systematic Completion o f—Geography C (a) Systematic Geography A; and

(b ) Systematic Geography B

55 Welfare and Taxation Completion or concurrent taking of Economics II.

12. Except w ith the approval of the Faculty a candidate shall not be admitted to the degree unless he has completed the ten units of the course for the degree w ith in the period of eight years from the beginning of the academic year in which he passed the first of those units.

13 . *

14. *

15 . *

15A. A candidate who has com ­plied w ith the preceding provisions of these Rules may be admitted to the pass degree of Bachelor of Arts.

The degree w ith h o n o u rs 16. (1) A candidate for the degree w ith honours shall pursue studies in accordance w ith the succeeding provisions of these Rules, and submit himself for the examinations specified by the head of the department concerned, in an honours school, in a combined honours course in tw o or more honours schools or in such other field of study as the Faculty approves.(2) There shall be the fo llow ing honours school in the departments specified opposite to those schools:

179

Faculty of Arts

Honours Schools Department Honours Schools Department

Classical Studies Department of Economics Department ofClassics Economics

Greek Studies Department of Mathematical Department ofClassics Statistics Statistics

Latin Studies Department of Classics

English Department of English

French Department of French

Linguistics Department of Linguistics

German Language and Literature

Department ofGermanicLanguages

Germanic Languages and Literatures

Department ofGermanicLanguages

Russian Department of Russian

History Department of History

Geography Department of Geography

Mathematics Department ofAppliedMathematics

Mathematics Department of PureMathematics

Philosophy Department of Philosophy

Political Science Department ofPoliticalScience

Psychology Department of Psychology

Economic History Department ofEconomicHistory

17. The Faculty may admit a candi­date to an honours school on the recommendation of the head of the department responsible for that honours school.18. A candidate admitted to an honours school shall take, in the first three years of his course, such courses as are specified for the honours degree by the head of the department responsible for the honours course in the honours school to which the candidate is admitted.19. (1) A candidate shall not be permitted by the Faculty to take the fourth year of a course in an honours school unless he has reached a sufficiently high standard in the first three years of the course in that honours school.(2) Except with the permission of the Faculty, a candidate shall not be permitted to take the fourth yearof a course in an honours school if the pass degree of Bachelor of Arts has been conferred upon him at the end of the third year of his course.(3) The requirements for the fourth year of a course in an honours school shall be such as are deter­mined by the head of the depart­ment concerned and approvedby the Faculty.20. Except with the permission of the Faculty, a candidate for the degree with honours shall not attempt the fourth year of his course more than once.

180

Degree Rules

21. (1) Subject to the next succeed­ing sub-rule, a candidate for the degree with honours shall, unless the Faculty otherwise permits, not be admitted to the degree unless— (a) he completed the first three years of the course in not more than five years after the commencement of his course, and{b) he pursued his studies for the fourth year of the course—(i) if he is a full-time student—

throughout the period of one year next following the com­pletion by him of the require­ments for the pass degree, or

(ii) if he is a part-time student— throughout the period of two years next following the com­pletion by him of the require­ments for the pass degree and completed that fourth year of the course at the expiration of that period.

21AA. A candidate for the degree with honours shall be examined in the work prescribed for the honours course in examinations taken at the end of the course.21 A. A candidate who has com­plied with the provisions of these Rules relating to the degree with honours and has reached a standard satisfactory to the Faculty in the units of his course and in any other work that he is required to perform may be admitted to the degree of Bachelor of Arts with honours.21 B. The degree with honours may be awarded with first class honours; second class honours, division A; second class honours, division B; or third class honours.22. Where a candidate for the degree with honours abandons the course for that degree before com­

pleting ten units he may—(a) if he has completed three years of the course for that degree and, in the opinion of the Head of the Department in which he is under­taking his course, has attained a sufficiently high standard, be admitted to the pass degree, and(b) in any other case, proceed with the course for the pass degree by undertaking such further work as the Faculty determines to be neces­sary to qualify him for admissionto that degree.23. Where, after the commencement of this rule, an amendment relating to the courses of study that may be taken by candidates for the pass degree of Bachelor of Arts or the degree with honours is made to these Rules, the amendment shall not apply to such a candidate who, before the making of the amend­ment, completed one or more units of a course of study approved by the Faculty unless—(a) the student elects that the amendment apply to him and sub­mits to the Faculty proposed alterations to his course that are in accordance with these Rules as amended by the amendment and the Faculty approves those altera­tions, or(b) the Faculty otherwise

Courses of Study (Degree of M aster of Arts) Rules1.(1) The Courses of Study (Degree of Master of Arts) Rules in force immediately before the com­mencement of these rules are repealed.(2) Notwithstanding anything contained in rule 2 of these Rules, a person who has been admitted as a candidate for the degree of

181

Faculty of Arts

Master of Arts under the Rules repealed by the last preceding sub­rule shall be deemed to have been admitted as a candidate for that degree under these Rules.1A. In these Rules, unless the contrary intention appears, 'the Faculty' means the Faculty of Arts.

2. (1) The Faculty may admit a person as a candidate for the degree of Master of Arts if—(a) he has completed the require­ments for the degree of Bachelor of Arts with first class honours or with second class honours, divi­sion A,(b ) he has completed the require­ments for the degree of Bachelor of Arts with second class honours, division B and, unless the Faculty otherwise permits—(i) has subsequently pursued for

such period as the Faculty deter­mines, not being less than one year, such further studies as the Faculty, on the advice of the Head of the Department in which the person proposes to pursue his course of study for the degree, and having regard to the person's scholastic record and proposed field of study, determines, and

(ii) has, at a qualifying examination, satisfied the Faculty of his ability to undertake a course of studies for the degree of Master of Arts;

(c) he has completed the require­ments for the degree of Bachelor of Arts with third class honours or for the pass degree of Bachelor of Arts and—(i) has subsequently pursued for

such period as the Faculty determines, not being less than one year, such further studies as the Faculty, on the advice of the

182

Head of the Department in which the person proposes to pursue his course of study for the degree, and having regard to the person's scholastic record and proposed field of study, determines, and

(ii) has, at a qualifying examination, satisfied the Faculty of his ability to undertake a course of study for the degree of Master of Arts, or

(d ) he has—(1) completed the requirements for

a degree in a faculty other than the Faculty of Arts or for a degree of another university in Australia or of another university outside Australia approved by the Faculty, and

(ii) unless the Faculty otherwise permits, subsequently pursued such further studies as the Faculty determines and satisfied the Faculty, in such manner as the Faculty determines, of his ability to undertake studies for the degree of Master of Arts.

3. (1) A person may be admitted as a candidate for the degree of Master of Arts at any time in the academic year, but he shall enrol not later than the end of the third week of the first term in each of the academic years of his candidature.(2) At the time of the annual re-enrolment of a candidate the member of the academic staff appointed to be his supervisor shall report to the Dean on the progress of the candidate.(3) If the Dean of the Faculty, after consultation with the head of the department concerned, considers that a candidate is not making satis­factory progress, he may recom­mend to the Faculty the cancellation of the candidate's enrolment, and

Degree Rules

the Faculty may direct the cancella­tion of the candidate's enrolment or take such other action as it thinks fit.4. A candidate shall pursue the required studies and sit for exam­ination in one or, with the approval of the Faculty, in two of the following schools:

Classics Economics Economic History English FrenchGeneral LinguisticsGeographyGermanHistoryMathematical StatisticsMathematicsPhilosophyPolitical SciencePsychologyRussianSociology

or in such other field of study as the Faculty approves.5. (1) Subject to the next succeed­ing sub-rule, a candidate shall pursue his studies after his admis­sion as a candidate for such period, being a period of not less than one year, as the Faculty determines.(2) If a candidate is engaged in employment other than at a univer­sity, the Faculty may require him to pursue his studies for not less than two calendar years.6. (1) A candidate shall be examined in a manner determined by the Faculty on the recommendation of the head of the appropriate depart­ment or if there is no appropriate department, on the recommendation of a committee appointed by the Faculty for the purpose and the examination may comprise the pre­sentation of a thesis, written exam­

inations or both.(2) The subject of a thesis shall be approved by the Faculty on the recommendation of the head of the appropriate department or if there is no appropriate department, on the recommendation of a committee appointed by the Faculty for the purpose, not later than the end of the first term of the academic year in which the candidate begins the studies for the degree.(3) A candidate shall not submit a thesis including—(a) any work that he has submitted for the purposes of a degree or diploma of this or any other univer­sity or institution of higher learning for which he has already qualified, or(b ) except with the permission of the Faculty, any work that he has submitted for any degree or diploma of this or any other university or institution of higher learning beinga degree or diploma for which he has not qualified.(4) A candidate shall include with his thesis a declaration signed by him stating whether all the sources of the thesis have been acknow­ledged and whether the thesis is his own composition.7. (1) A thesis or the other results of research or study submitted by a candidate shall be examined by at least two examiners, of whom at least one shall be an examiner who is not a member of the academic staff of the University.(2) A candidate may be required to pass an oral examination on the subject of his research or study.(3) A candidate who complies with the requirements of these Rules and whose research or study is adjudged to be of sufficient merit may be admitted to the degree of Masterof Arts.

183

Academic Progress Rules

Academic Progress of Students (Faculty of Arts) Rules

1. (1) In these Rules—'enrol' includes re-enrol and 'enrol­ment' includes re-enrolment;'Faculty' means the Faculty of Arts in the School;'the Board' means the Board of the School.(2) A reference in these Rules to a 'course', 'subject' or 'unit' means a course or a subject or unit of a degree, as the case may be, for which the Faculty is responsible.

2. (1) Subject to this rule, where a person—(a) has previously been enrolled in the University or in another univer­sity or institute of higher learning or education, and(b) has not, in the opinion of the the Faculty, achieved satisfactory academic progress in the University or in that other university or institute of higher learning or education,the Faculty may direct that the person—(c) shall not be admitted to a course of study(d) shall not be permitted to con­tinue in a course of study(e) shall not be permitted to enrol in a subject or unit, or(f) shall be permitted to enrol in a subject or unit only upon speci­fied conditions.(2) Before giving a direction under the last preceding sub-rule, the Faculty shall give the person con­cerned an opportunity of making representations to the Faculty with respect to his enrolment and shall take into account any representa­tions so made to the Faculty by the person.

184

(3) A person in respect of whom a direction has been given under sub­rule (1) of this rule may appeal to the Board against the direction.(4) Sub-rules (2) and (3) of this rule do not apply to a person who, before applying for enrolment, had not previously been enrolled in the Faculty.

Faculty o f Asian Studies 185

C ontentsrT h e A rts (A s ia n S tu d ie s ) D egrees 18 7

D e ta ils o f u n its a n d b o o k lis ts

A s ia n C iv iliz a tio n s 1 9 2

C h ine se 2 0 1

In d o n e s ia n La ng u a g e s and L ite ra tu re s 2 0 6

J a p a n e se 21 1

L in g u is t ic s 2 1 5

S o u th A s ia n an d B u d d h is t S tu d ie s 2 2 0

D egree R u les 2 2 4

A c a d e m ic P rogress R ules 2 3 0

The Faculty of Asian StudiesThe Arts (Asian Studies) degrees

Brief HistoryThe origins of the Faculty of Asian Studies go back to 1951, when a Commonwealth Committee on the Needs of Australian Universities recommended that provision should be made for the teaching of Oriental languages in Canberra University College. As a result of these recommendations the School of Oriental Languages was established in 1952 and the Swedish scholar Professor Hans Bielenstein was appointed as Head of the School. Courses in modern and classical Chinese were introduced in 1953; these were followed by courses in Japanese in 1 955, when the title of the School was changed to School of Oriental Studies. In 1956 it began the teaching of Indonesian on a part-time basis. In 1 958 the first appointment of a senior lecturer in Indonesian was made, and courses in Bahasa Indonesia and Malay were subsequently extended to include traditional projections of the language, and modern and old Javanese. In 1957 courses were introduced in Asian Civilization. Special scholarships tenable in the School of Oriental Studies were first awarded in 1 958.

Upon the incorporation of Canberra University College in the Australian National University in 1960, the School of Oriental Studies became part of the Faculty of Arts and in 1 962 the School was constituted a separate Faculty. The new faculty was then the Faculty of Oriental Studies and contained four departments: Chinese,

Japanese, Indonesian Language and Literature (now Indonesian Languages and Literatures) and Oriental Civilization (now Asian Civilizations).

Further development occurred in 1965, when a Department of South Asian and Buddhist Studies was established, and South Asia was included in the scope of the Department of Asian Civilizations.

Approval was given in 1970 for the name of the Faculty to be changed from Oriental Studies to Asian Studies and its degrees from Bachelor of Arts (Oriental Studies) and Master of Arts (Oriental Studies) to Bachelor of Arts (Asian Studies) and Master of Arts (Asian Studies).

General In form ationStudents may take the course for the degree of Bachelor of Arts (Asian Studies) at pass or honours level. The pass degree differs from the honours degree in allowing a wider choice of subjects studied without the specific aim of the honours degree which is to produce a thorough scholarly training in one of the areas of interest to the Faculty, namely the linguistic analysis of language, the apprecia­tion of literature and the study of cultural history. It is possible to enrol in units offered by the Faculty as part of the course for the degree of Bachelor of Arts pass or honours, but students who intend to devote the larger part of their degree to Asian studies should enrol in the Faculty. Other students should enrol initially in the Faculty of Arts.

It is usual for full-time students to take four units in first year, three units in second year and three units in third year; and for part-time

187

Faculty of Asian Studies

students to attempt not more than two units in any one year. The pass degree must be completed within eight years and the honours degree within six years from the date of commencement of the course.

In their first year, undergraduate students in the Faculty must choose one Asian language around which to build their course. This choice is the most important decision to be made. There are many good reasons for the selection of one language rather than another. Since very few students have first-hand knowledge of Asian studies, the Faculty expects students to seek its advice.

Students should also choose other first-year units to allow flexibility in course structure in later years. This selection should make it possible for them to decide at the end of their first year whether their true interest lies in courses related to language and literature, to social sciences or to history.

Everyone is urged to discuss his or her course with the Sub-Dean or Faculty Secretary and should feel free to write or call at the Faculty office at any time.

The pass degreeA student can qualify for this degree by completing ten units in one of the following sequences of units: three majors and a single unit or two majors and two sub-majors or two majors, one sub-major, and two single units. One major must be an Asian language.

A student may select the units of his course solely from the units offered by the Faculty or he may take up to four units from the Faculty of Arts.

The degree w ith honoursThe course for the honours degree extends over four years of study for a full-time student and may be taken in one of the following honours schools:Asian Civilizations Modern Chinese Studies Classical Chinese Studies Japanese Studies South Asian and Buddhist Studies South-East Asian Studies (with

emphasis on Indonesia and Malaysia)

LinguisticsDetailed requirements for courses

leading to the degree with honours are set out under the various departments.

The Faculty admits students to an honours school on the basis of results at the end of first year. How­ever, in view of the special require­ments of honours schools, intending honours students should ensure that their proposed full course meets the requirements.

Com bined course in Asian Studies and LawFor students who desire to widen their field of study for academic or professional reasons the University offers a combined course leading to the degrees of Bachelor of Arts (Asian Studies) and Bachelor of Laws.

Briefly, the course comprises six Asian Studies units to be taken as two majors, one of which must be an Asian language and all the compulsory law subjects of the LLB course and five optional law subjects selected from all the optional subjects offered by the Faculty of Law.

The Asian Studies majors would normally be completed during the

188

The Arts (Asian Studies)

first three years and would be taken concurrently with certain approved law subjects.

A candidate will qualify for the degree of Bachelor of Arts (Asian Studies) when he has completed six Asian Studies units, including two majors, and any seven law subjects. Unless the Faculties in special circumstances approve, a candidate shall not be permitted to take more than eleven law subjects before completing the Asian Studies component of the course. Honours work cannot be undertaken in the Asian Studies component of the combined course.

Full details of the course are set out under the Faculty of Law entry. Students wishing to undertake the course should consult the Sub-Deans or Faculty Secretaries of both Faculties.

The number of places in the Faculty of Law in 1972 will be limited and an applicant for the combined course in Asian Studies/ Law must be selected for a place in the Faculty of Law. If he is not he cannot be accepted for the combined course.

Com bined course in Asian Studies and EconomicsDuring 1971 discussions have taken place between the Faculties of Asian Studies and Economics on the details of a combined course leading to the degrees of Bachelor of Arts (Asian Studies) and Bachelor of Economics. Interested students should consult the Faculty Secretaries and Sub-Deans of both Faculties.

ScholarshipsBecause of the University's special interest in Asian studies, several

scholarships are available each year to students who propose to proceed to the honours degree of Bachelor of Arts (Asian Studies) or to an honours degree in another faculty provided an Asian language major is taken.

H igher degreesFacilities for postgraduate work lead­ing to the degree of Master of Arts (Asian Studies) or Doctor of Philosophy are available in all departments and information is given under the individual entries.A few postgraduate scholarships are available.

Careers fo r Graduates in Asian StudiesGraduates in Asian Studies, like graduates in Arts (who have usually concentrated on European Studies), have completed a course which, by design, is non-vocational. The course does not attempt to fit graduates, ready-made, for the employment market.

This does not mean that these graduates are 'useless' or that they might not find rewarding and challenging careers. It does mean that to find such careers graduates must often add to their degree studies some other training or qualification, formal or informal, which is designed to equip them to move into a specific career area. Such a qualification may be gained through extra-curricular activities during degree studies, or through further formal studies after gradua­tion, or may consist mainly in personal qualities of drive, initiative, organising ability and so on.

Thus a degree in Asian Studies does not by itself automatically qualify the student for a professional

189

The Faculty of Asian Studies

post. However it does provide an excellent base for possible careers in a number of areas.University Teaching and Research For graduates with honours degrees, there are opportunities for post­graduate study, and eventual em­ployment in academic research or university teaching.

For such employment a post­graduate degree is virtually essential, and in fact there are signs that postgraduate students in many disciplines outnumber the positions available in universities for teachers and researchers. However, Asian Studies will clearly grow in extent and in importance, and there will be a continuing need for many good honours graduates in the academic sphere.Secondary Teaching The teaching of Asian languages and social studies is increasing in secondary schools, and most State education departments are taking some Asian Studies graduates into teacher training each year. While at present it is not usually possible for teachers to concentrate solely on Asian subjects in their work, graduates can, in teaching, con­tinue direct contact with their undergraduate subjects. To become qualified teachers, graduates must normally complete a one-year course of study for the Diploma in Education.The Commonwealth Service The Commonwealth Government has extensive contact with Asian countries in the diplomatic, trade, defence, education, and other areas. For many positions in the relevant Commonwealth Departments, studies in Asian languages and cultures provide a useful back­

ground, but such studies do not guarantee employment in closely related fields. There is a certain amount of translation work done and, especially in the Department of Defence, research work into a great many aspects of Asian life, politics, etc.

Graduates who have combined with their Asian Studies work in one or other of the social sciences, say Economics, are more likely to obtain positions in many Commonwealth Departments.Journalism and Broadcasting Entry into these fields is highly competitive, and while a back­ground in Asian Studies could clearly be very useful employers tend to place at least as much emphasis on such general qualities as initiative and on knowledge of current affairs. Extra-curricular activities such as work on student newspapers can be helpful.

For more specialised work in broadcasting to Asian countries, such as takes place through Radio Australia, a degree of verbal fluency is required which is not usually found in new graduates. Personnel for Radio Australia are more commonly recruited after several years further acquaintance with Asian languages and cultures, for example after a period of residence in an Asian country.Private Enterprise Scope for graduates in Asian Studies in commerce and industry is, again, rather dependent on additional skills. Australian firms dealing extensively with Japan, for instance, might be very interested in a graduate with courses in both Japanese and Economics, who was keen on a career in business ad­ministration. But such a firm would

190

The Arts (Asian Studies)

be unlikely to have an opening for a graduate with only the language major.

In the same way, firms dealing with Asian countries might well be interested in woman graduates who have, in addition, completed a post­graduate course in secretarial studies, but would have little scope for women with no office skills.

To find places in these and other fields, however, graduates will often have to go on from their degree studies to further, vocationally- directed courses which provide them with specific, marketable skills.

LibrarianshipAs university teaching of Asian Studies expands and as major public libraries and those of government departments and business firms collect more and more materials in Asian languages, so the scope will increase for professional librarians with some knowledge of these fields. A university graduate can become a professional librarian by completing a one-year postgraduate training course, and such courses are now available in Sydney,Melbourne and Canberra.

A common pattern is certainly clear in all these areas. Some other training or skill is usually essential for an Asian Studies graduate to find an interesting first job and a worthwhile career. At the present time, it is fairly true to say that in only two areas, in teaching (both secondary and tertiary) on the one hand and in government service on the other, do graduates find work which enables them to use directly the skills and knowledge they have acquired during their Asian Studies course.

But Australians are becoming increasingly aware of Asia, and in future it should be the case that people with a tertiary education which focuses on Asia rather than Europe will be found in the wider fields of private enterprise, journal­ism, broadcasting, librarianship, etc.

191

Details of units and book lists

Asian CivilizationsA. L. Basham, BA, PhD, DLit (Lond), HonDLit(Kuruk), FSA,FAHAProfessor and Head of the Department

In troductionIn order to acquaint the student with Asian cultures, seven main units are presented. The intro­ductory unit in Asian Civilizations includes a general survey of the geography and history of the area; its religions and philosophies; and some aspects of its material culture. In the second and third-year units the student is offered a choice of an East Asian, a South-East Asian and a South Asian specialisation. For example a student particularly interested in South-East Asia would take Introduction to Asian Civiliza­tions A followed by Asian Civiliza­tion II South-East and Asian Civilization III South-East. This constitutes a major in Asian Civiliza­tions. It would be possible for this student after passing Introduction to Asian Civilizations A to take further units in one or more of the other specialisations.

The East Asian units deal in some detail with the history, institutions and thought of China and Japan, and also Korea and Mongolia. The South-East Asian units deal with the region covered by Malaysia, Indonesia and the Philippines as well as the continental countries of Vietnam, Cambodia, Laos, Thailand and Burma. The South Asian units deal with the region now covered by India, Pakistan, Ceylon and Nepal. In all three regions, apart from political history, attention is also given to art and archaeology,

philosophy and religion, economic and institutional history, and the structure of society.

Students who wish to go more deeply into the subject should note that second and third-year units in Asian Civilizations may be taken at pass or honours level. After the first year, provided that students reach a good credit standard in Introduction to Asian Civilizations A and in the relevant language, they may choose to enrol in the honours school of Asian Civilizations.

Honours students need to com­plete a major in an Asian language, as do pass students in the Faculty of Asian Studies. In their final year honours students will write a disser­tation or translate and comment on a text in an Asian language. It is possible for students enrolled in other faculties to complete a major in Asian Civilizations without the relevant language.

For the pass degree

In troduction to AsianC ivilizations A

In troduction to AsianC ivilizations B

Two hours of lectures and one hour tutorial per week throughout the year.

The units are intended to provide a background for further study in the cultures and history of the peoples of Asia, and for a deeper understanding of contemporary Asia. Apart from conveying informa­tion, the units also give some insight into the methods of cultural history. Six segments are offered. Any three segments constitute a unit (Introduction to Asian Civilizations A). Students may take all six segments to constitute two units (Introduction to Asian

192

Asian Civilizations

Civilizations A and Introduction to Asian Civilizations B). The segments are:First Term

(i) South Asia. Social and F>olitical The origins and development of the traditional Indian social system. Traditional political concepts. Aspects of South Asian archaeology, art and literature.

(ii) China. Social and Political The origins and development of China's traditional social and political system. Aspects of Chinese literature and art.

Second Term(iii) South Asian Religion and

PhilosophyHinduism, Buddhism and Islam, with some reference to minor religions. The basic concepts of Indian philosophical systems.

(iv) China. Religion and Philosophy A survey of Chinese traditional religious beliefs, and an outline of the development of Chinese philosophy.

Third Term(v) South-East Asia

An approach to South-East Asian civilisations from the point of view of human geography and ethnology.

(vi) JapanThe history of Japanese civilisation from the earliest times to the end of the tenth century.

BooksNote: Books marked f are suitable for preliminary reading.□ tBasham, A. L, The Wonder that was India, Sidgwick & Jackson.□ Buchanan, K., The Southeast Asian World, Bell.

□ Burling, R., Hill Farms and Padi Fields, Spectrum.□ tDe Bary, T. (ed.), Sources of Chinese Tradition; Sources of Indian Tradition; Sources of Japanese Tradition, Columbia UP.□ Fung Yu-lan, A Short History of Chinese Philosophy, Collier- Macmillan.□ Gibb, H. A. R., Mohammedanism, OUP.□ Keene, D., Anthology of Japanese Literature, Tuttle.□ Reischauer, E. 0. & Fairbank,J. K., East Asia — The Great Tradi­tion, Allen & Unwin.□ Sansom, G., Japan: A Short Cultural History, Cresset 1952.□ Smith, V. A., Spear, P. (ed.),The Oxford History of India, 3rd ed. Oxford UP.□ fZaehner, R. C. (ed.), Hindu Scriptures, Everyman.Subject bibliographies will be pro­vided for students during the course. Outline maps and duplicated material will also be made available from time to time.Examination: 60% of marks will be awarded for written work through­out the year, and 40% for one three-hour paper at the end of the unit.

Asian Civilization II (East)Two hours of lectures and one hour of tutorial a week throughout the year.

For students proceeding to the degree with honours in Asian Civili­zation (East), a one hour a week seminar is provided. Such students must have passed Chinese I or Japanese I before taking this unit.Syllabus:(a) The history of China from the Han to the Yuan(b) the history of Japan up to the

193

Faculty of Asian Studies

end of the fifteenth century(c) the structure of Chinese and Japanese society, paying particular attention to the family, economic institutions, social class, govern­ment and law(d) aspects of Chinese and Japan­ese thought and art in these periods.BooksBooks marked t are suitable for preliminary reading.China□ Balazs, E., Chinese Civilization and Bureaucracy, Yale UP.□ Ch'en, K., Buddhism in China, Princeton UP.□ Grousset, R., L'Empire des Steppes, Payot, 1941.□ Lattimore, 0., Inner Asian Fron­tiers of China, 2nd ed., American Geographical Society of New York.□ Loewe, M„ Everyday Life in Early Imperial China, Batsford.□ Ssu-ma Ch'ien, Records of the Grand Historian of China, tr. B. Watson, 2 vols, Columbia UP.Japan□ Keene, D., Anthology of Japanese Literature to Nineteenth Century, Penguin.

Hall, J. W., Government and Local Power in Japan 500-1700, Princetown UP.□ tSansom, G.( Japan: A Short Cultural History, Cresset 1952; A History of Japan, vol. I and II, Cresset.□ Tsunoda, R. (ed.), Sources of Japanese Tradition, vol. I, Columbia UP.Full reading lists will be provided at the beginning of the year.Examination: 60% of marks will be awarded for written work through­out the year, and 40% for one three-hour paper at the end of the year.194

Asian Civilization III (East)Two hours of lectures and one hour of tutorial a week throughout the year.Syllabus:(a) Chinese history from the Ming to the present day (ib) Japanese history from the beginning of the sixteenth century (c) aspects of Chinese and Japanese thought and institutions in these periods.BooksBooks marked t are suitable for preliminary reading.China□ Clubb, 0. E., Twentieth Century China, Columbia UP.□ Fairbank, J. K., Reischauer, E. 0. & Craig, A. M., East Asia: The Modern Transformation, Allen & Unwin.□ Franke, W., Das Jahrhundert der chinesischen Revolution 1851-1 949, Oldenburg.□ Li Chien-nung, The Political History of China— 1840-1928, Van Nostrand.□ Morse, H. B., International Rela­tions of the Chinese Empire, Kelly & Walsh.□ Purcell, V., The Boxer Uprising: a Background Study, Cambridge UP.□ Renouvin, P., La question d'Ex- treme-Orient, Hachette.□ Teng Ssu-yü & Fairbank, J. K., China's Response to the West, Atheneum.□ Waley, A., The Opium War through Chinese Eyes, Allen & Unwin.□ Wright, M. C., The Last Stand of Chinese Conservatism, Stanford UP Japan□ fBeasley, W., The Modern History of Japan, Weidenfeld & Nicolson.

Asian Civilizations

□ fFairbank, J. K.( Reischauer, E. 0. & Craig, A. M., East Asia; The Modern Transformation, Allen & Unwin.□ Keene, D., Anthology of Modern Japanese Literature, Grove.□ Tsunoda, R. (ed.), Sources of Japanese Tradition, vols. I and II, Columbia UP.Full reading lists will be provided at the beginning of the year.Examination: 60% of marks will be awarded for written work through­out the year, and 40% for one three- hour paper at the end of the year.

Asian Civilization II (South-East) Two hours of lectures and one hour of tutorial a week throughout the year.Syllabus: Indonesian, Malaysian, Philippine and continental South- East Asian history and civilisation. The salient features of the geo­graphical position and structure of the area, the migrations of peoples into it, and the general character­istics of their social life, religion and economy are covered. Detailed attention is paid to the spread of Indian influence, bringing with it Hindu and Buddhist religious ideas, literature and elements of material culture and to the rise of kingdoms fertilised by the new ideas and the indigenous cultural response as it is reflected in the literature, archaeo­logical remains, art, social structure and politics of the area. The period covered is that up to the zenith of the 'Indianized' kingdoms in the thirteenth and fourteenth centuries.Books□ Coedes, G., The Indianized States of Southeast Asia, AN UP.□ Dobby, E. H. G„ Southeast Asia,10th ed., London UP.

□ Eliot, C. N. E., Hinduism and Buddhism, relevant parts, Routledge & Kegan Paul.□ Groslier, B. P., Indochina (Arts of the World), Methuen.□ Groslier, B. P., Indochina (Archaeoiogia Mundi), Muller.□ Hall, D. G. E A History of South- East Asia, 3rd rev. ed., Macmillan.□ Le May, R., The Culture of South East Asia; The Heritage of India, Allen & Unwin.□ Wagner, F. A., Indonesia (Arts of the World), Methuen.Examination: 60% of marks will be awarded for written work through­out the year, and 40% for one three- hour paper at the end of the year.

Asian Civilization III (South-East)Two hours of lectures and one hour of tutorial a week throughout the year.Syllabus: Indonesian, Malaysian, Philippine and continental South- East Asian history and civilisation. The period of the penetration of Islam to Indonesia in the fifteenth century, the European commercial expansion in the sixteenth century, the growth of nationalism and the end of European authority through­out this area, and the contemporary situation are covered. The main emphasis is not on European activities, but on changes in the social, cultural and political structures of the South-East Asian states during the period. Considera­tion is also paid to the history and civilisation of the continental South-East Asian states and the Philippines, to their relations and interdependencies, and to their national development in terms of their ethnological backgrounds.

195

Faculty of Asian Studies

Books□ Bastin, J. S. & Benda, H. J., A History of Modern Southeast Asia, Spectrum.□ Cady, J. F., Southeast Asia. Its Historical Development, McGraw- Hill.□ Fisher, C. A., South-East Asia, Methuen.□ FitzGerald, C. P., The Third China, Cheshire.□ Furnivall, J. S., Colonial Policy and Practice: A Comparative Study of Burma and Netherlands India, New York UP.□ Hall, D. G. E. (ed.), Historians of South-East Asia, (vol. II of Historical Writings on the Peoples of Asia), Oxford UP.□ Hunter, G., South-East Asia— Race, Culture, and Nation,Oxford UP.□ Sudjatmoko, Introduction to Indonesian Historiography, Cor­nell. UP.□ van Leur, J. C., Indonesian Trade and Society, van Hoeve.□ von der Mehden, F. R., Religion and Nationalism in Southeast Asia, Wisconsin UP.□ Wertheim, W. F., Indonesian Society in Transition, 2nd ed., van Hoeve.Examination: 60% of marks will be awarded for written work through­out the year, and 40% for one three- hour paper at the end of the year.

Asian Civilization II (South)Two hours of lectures and one hour of tutorial a week throughout the year.Syllabus(a) The history of India emphasising the period from the fall of the Mauryas to the break-up of Mughal Empire.(b ) systems of government, both 196

Hindu and Muslim, and the political ideas underlying them(c) the social order throughout the period, with reference to the system of class and caste, the family, and economic institutions(d) the development of religion and philosophy, Hindu, Buddhist and Islamic, during the period(e) outlines of the art and archi­tecture of the period.BooksNote: This booklist includes impor­tant works covering most of the topics dealt with in the year. It is in no sense either a maximum or a minimum reading list, and the student is not expected to buy every item. There are many other equally important works, titles of which will be given to the student during the year. Books marked + are basic texts.□ Ahmad, A., Studies in Islamic Culture in the Indian Environment, Oxford UP.□ fBasham, A. L, The Wonder that was India, 3rd ed., Sidgwick &■ Jackson.□ Carpenter, J. E„ Theism in Medieval India, Williams & Norgate.□ Chand, T., Influence of Islam on Indian Culture, Indian Press.□ tDavies, C. C., An Historical Atlas of the Indian Peninsula,Oxford UP.□ fde Bary, W. Th. (ed.), Sources of Indian Tradition, Columbia UP.□ Edwardes, S. M., & Garrett,H. L. 0., Mughal Rule in India, Chand.□ Farquhar, J. N., Outline of the Religious Literature of India,Oxford UP., 1920; A Primer o f H in­duism, 2nd ed., Oxford UP.□ Majumdar, R. C., Raychaudhuri, H. C. & Datta, K., An Advanced

Asian Civilizations

History of India, Macmillan.□ Mujeeb, M., The Indian Muslims, Allen 8- Unwin.□ Sarkar, Sir Jadu Nath, Mughal Administration, 5th ed., Sarkar.□ Thomas, E. J., History of Buddhist Thought, Routledge 8 Kegan Paul.□ tTripathi, R. P„ Rise and Fall of the Mughal Empire, 3rd ed., Central Book Depot.Examination: 60% of marks will be awarded for written work through­out the year, and 40% for one three- hour paper at the end of the year.

Asian Civilization III (South)Two hours of lectures and one hour of tutorial a week throughout the year.Syllabus: Indian civilisation from approximately 1707 to 1947. The course will cover: the factors leading to the disintegration of the Mughal Empire; its repercussions on the social, cultural and economic institutions of the Hindus and Muslims; European commercial activities in the eighteenth century; the gradual establishment of British rule in India; the reaction of the Hindus and Muslims to Western education and its effect on literature and art; the growth of the Indian press; the breakdown of traditional social, political and economic institutions; Hindu and Muslim religious movements; the evolution of the Hindu and Muslim middle classes; the revolt of 1857; India's political awakening and the founda­tion of the Indian National Congress; different phases of the Congress movement; the struggle for Indian independence; Muslim and other communal organisations; salient features of constitutional develop­ment in India; Indian independence; and the partition of the country.

BooksNote: This booklist includes impor­tant works covering most of the topics dealt with in the lectures. It is in no sense either a maximum or a minimum reading list, and the student is not expected to buy every item. There are many other equally important works, titles of which will be given to the student during the year. Books marked f are basic texts.□ tde Bary, W. Th. (ed.), Sources of Indian Tradition, Columbia UP.□ Edwardes, M., British India, Sidg- wick 8 Jackson.□ fFarquhar, S. N., Modern Reli­gious Movements in India, Collier- Macmillan.□ Griffiths, P., The British Impact on India, Macdonald.□ Heimsath, C. H., Indian Nationalism and Hindu Social Reform, Princeton UP.□ Metcalf, T. R., Modern India, an Interpretative Anthology, Macmillan.□ Misra, B. B., The Indian Middle Classes, Oxford UP.□ tPhilips, C. H., India, Hutchinson.□ Philips, C. H. (ed.), Evolution of India and Pakistan, Oxford UP.; Politics and Society in India, Allen 8 Unwin.□ tSmith, W. C„ Modern Islam in India and Pakistan, Gollancz.□ Spear, T. G. ?., Twilight of the Mughals, Cambridge UP.; Oxford History of Modern India, Oxford UP.□ fThompson, E. 8 Garrett, G. T., Rise and Fulfilment of British Rule in India, reprint, Central Book Depot.Examination: 60% of marks will be awarded for written work through­out the year, and 40% for one three- hour paper at the end of the year.

197

Faculty of Asian Studies

Buddhist CivilizationTwo hours of lectures and one hour of tutorial a week will be given throughout the year.

This unit is only open to second and third-year students. For possible combinations of this unit with others, to form majors and sub-majors, see below.Syllabus(a) Aspects of the history of Buddhism from its origin in early India to contemporary trends in the Buddhism of Japan, Ceylon, South- East Asia and elsewhere(b) the development of Buddhist doctrines and sects(c) the role of Buddhism in the social life of Asia(d) topics such as art, architecture and literature.Prescribed Books□ Chen, K., Buddhism in China, Princeton UP.□ de Bary, W. Th. (ed.), The Buddhist Tradition, ML.□ Dumoulin, H., History of Zen Buddhism, Faber.□ Eliot, C., Hinduism and Buddhism (relevant chapters only), Routledge Et Kegan Paul.□ Thomas, E. J., History of Buddhist Thought, Routledge & Kegan Paul.□ Thomas, E J., The Life of the Buddha in Legend and History, Routledge & Kegan Paul. Examination: 60% of marks will be awarded for written work through­out the year and 40% for one three- hour paper at the end of the year.

Islamic CivilizationTwo hours of lectures and one hour of tutorial a week wili be given throughout the year.

This is a unit offered jointly by the Department of Asian Civiliza- 198

tions and the Department of Indonesian Languages and Literatures. Normally it is open only to second and third-year students. For possible combinations of this unit with others, to form majors and sub-majors, see below. Sy/iabus(a) A survey of the rise of Islam in seventh century Arabia, and its expansion to become a major world religion(b) its role as a major cultural element in several nations(c) the evolving religious thought and structure of Islam, and its social implications(d) the tensions developing within it as a result of western dominance and the growth of secular national­ism(e) geographically the course is oriented towards South and South- East Asia but the essential unity of the Islamic world and the crucial relationships between all its parts is not overlooked.Prescribed Books□ Gibb, H. A. R., Mohammedanism, OUP (Home University Library).□ Gibb, H. A. R., Modern Trends in Islam, Chicago UP□ Nicholson, R. A., Studies in Islamic Mysticism, Chicago UP.□ Goitein, S. D., Studies in Islamic History and Institutions, Brill.□ von Grünebaum, G. E., Medieval Islam, Chicago UP.□ Smith, W. C., Islam in Modern History, Princeton UP.□ Arberry, A. J. (ed.), Religions in the Middle East, Cambridge UP.Examination: 60% of marks will be awarded for written work through­out the year and 40% for one three- hour paper at the end of the year.

Asian Civilizations

Majors and sub-majors in Asian religionsThe Faculty will admit the following combination as a major:First Year: Introduction to Asian Civilizations A or B (taking the segment South Asian Religion and Philosophy and/or the segment China. Religion and Philosophy. Second and Third Years: Buddhist Civilization; Islamic Civilization (in either order).The following combinations will be accepted as sub-majors:(a) First Year: Introduction to

Asian Civilizations A or B (taking the segment South Asian Religion and Philosophy and/or the segment China Religion and Philosophy. Second Year: Buddhist Civilisation or Islamic Civilization.

(b) Second and Third Years: Buddhist Civilization; Islamic Civilization (in either order).

For the degree w ith honoursThe course for degree with honours in Asian Civilizations extends over four years and consists of:(a) Introduction to Asian Civiliza­tions A, Asian Civilization II Honours and III Honours (East), (South-East) or (South)(b) Asian Civilization IV (Honours)(c) a major in a language offered by the Faculty, being a language relevant to the civilization that the candidate is studying(d) one other major and a single unit OR two sub-majors OR one sub-major and two single units.First Year: In their first year prospec­tive honours students take Intro­duction to Asian Civilizations A, the first year of a language offered by

the Faculty and two approved units. To qualify for admission to the honours school they must normally reach a good credit standard in Introduction to Asian Civilizations A and in the relevant language.Second Year: In their second year honours students take Asian Civil­ization I! Honours (East), (South- East) or (South), which consists of the second-year pass unit with additional work prescribed for honours students. Details concern­ing the topics to be studied may be obtained from the Department.An examination based on the honours work will be set. In addi­tion, students take the second-year unit of the language and one approved unit. In the case of Asian Civilisation (East), students will specialise in either China or Japan for their honours courses in this and third and fourth years.Third Year: In their third year honours students take Asian Civil­ization III Honours (East), (South- East) or (South) which consists of the third-year pass unit with addi­tional work prescribed for honours students. Details concerning the topics to be studied may be obtained from the Department. An examina­tion based on the honours work will be set. In addition, students take the third-year unit of the language and one approved unit.

Asian Civilization IV (Honours)(1) Either a dissertation of 1 0,000 to 20,000 words on an approved topic, using sources in a relevant language or an annotated transla­tion of an approved text in an Asian language.(2) A special subject for each area to be determined by the Department.

199

Faculty of Asian Studies

(3) A fortnightly seminar or tutorial on selected topics. The subjects for each year will be determined in the course of the previous year. Details may be obtained from the Department.Examination(1) Oral examination on dissertation or translation together with such examinations as the Department may prescribe. Written work on the subject submitted throughout the year will count appreciably towards final marking.

For the degree of M aster of Arts (Asian Studies)Candidates for the degree of Master of Arts (Asian Studies) in Asian Civilizations must already hold the degree of Bachelor of Arts from an approved university with a major in history or Asian Studies, or have done such work as the Faculty may approve for admission to the course for the degree of Master of Arts (Asian Studies). The course consists of a minimum of two years full-time work.

Candidates will be required to pass such examinations as may be pre­scribed and must submit a thesis on a topic approved by the Head of the Department. This work will normally be carried out in the Department of Asian Civilizations but in special circumstances approval may be given to undertake part of the work elsewhere. The candidate may be required to satisfy examiners in an oral examination on the field of knowledge of his thesis.

A candidate for the degree of Master of Arts (Asian Studies) may be required to satisfy the Head of the Department of his knowledge of

200

languages relevant to his chosen subject of research by passing a test.

For the degree of Doctor of PhilosophyCandidates for this degree will usually hold the degree of Master of Arts (Asian Studies), though candidates with the degree of Bachelor of Arts (Asian Studies) with first class honours may be admitted to the program.

Facilities exist in the Department for work towards the degree of Doctor of Philosophy in the history and culture of China and Japan, South Asia and South-East Asia.

Chinese

Liu Ts'un-yan, BA (Peking and Lond), PhD, DLit (Lond), DipEd (HK), FAHA Professor and Head of the DepartmentIntroductionThe majors in Chinese are Mod­ern Chinese I, II and III, and Clas­sical Chinese I, II and III, in that order. The sub-majors are (a) Mod­ern Chinese I and II in that order, and (b) Classical Chinese I and II in that order. The single units are Mod­ern Chinese I and Classical Chin­ese I.

The major in Moden Chinese aims to develop a practical skill and an active command of modern standard Chinese (Mandarin) as spoken and written today. The first year is almost wholly devoted to basic language study. Instruction includes lectures on Chinese linguis­tics, morphology and syntax, oral drill and listening to recorded speech. After having mastered the romanisation system, the student proceeds to the reading of character texts. The more advanced second and third-year courses in Modern Chinese include translation and the reading of a representative selection of contemporary literature, news­paper texts and documentary prose. A candidate taking a major in Modern Chinese must take at least Classical Chinese I which must be taken before or concurrently with Modern Chinese I as Classical Chinese terms are used extensively in Modern Chinese.

The major in Classical Chinese is envisaged as a specialist study, primarily for honours students, but available at pass level. Any student taking a major in Classical Chinese must also take a major in Modern Chinese which must be commenced

before or concurrently with Classical Chinese I, but a candidate taking a major in Classical Chinese in conjunction with a major in Sanskrit need not take Modern Chinese. The classical syllabus includes an extensive selection of classical and medieval texts com­posed by China's great philosophers, historians, essayists and poets.

A fourth-year honours course is provided for both Classical and Modern Chinese. Instruction nor­mally takes the form of seminars, some of which are conducted in Chinese.

A student in any unit who has not attended a satisfactory number of tutorials and classes may be exclud­ed from the examination in that unit.

A native speaker of Chinese who wishes to take units in this Depart­ment should discuss his enrolment with the Head of the Department before he begins his course.

For the pass degree

Modern Chinese IThree hours of lectures and two hours of tutorials in Modern Chin­ese a week throughout the year. Students are also required to spend some time on their own in the lang­uage laboratory.Syllabus(a) Phonology and grammar(b ) structure drill(c) conversation(d) analysis, memorising and writing of selected characters(e) an introduction to Chinese literature.

Prescribed Books □ De Francis, J., Beginning Chin­ese; Character Text for Beginning Chinese; Intermediate Chinese;

201

Faculty of Asian Studies

Character Text for Intermediate Chinese, Yale UP.□ Wang, Fangyu, Mandarin Chinese Dictionary (Chinese- English), Seton Hall UP.Students will also be provided with photostat and cyclostyled material for purposes of study.Examination: Two three-hour papers and an oral examination.

M odern Chinese IIThree hours of lectures and two hours of tutorials in Modern Chinese a week throughout the year. Stu­dents are also required to spend some time on their own in the language laboratory.Syllabus(a) Text-reading(b) newspaper texts(c) conversation(d) translation(e) contemporary prose essays. Prescribed Books□ De Francis, J., Advanced Chin­ese: Character Text for Advanced Chinese; Advanced Chinese Reader, Yale UP.□ Han-ying shih-shih-yung-yü tz'ü-hui (Chinese-English Glossary of Current Affairs Words and Phrases), Peking, 1964.□ Chinese-English Dictionary of Modern Communist Usage, 2nd ed., U.S. Joint Publications Research Service, 1 963.□ Kuo-yü tz'ü-tien, Commercial Press, Mainland or Taiwan editions.

Tz'u-hai, Chung-hua.□ Wang, Fangyu, Introduction to Chinese Cursive Script, Yale UP, 1958.□ Kennedy, G. A., ZH Guide : An Introduction to Sinology, Yale UP, 1953.Students will also be provided with

photostat and cyclostyled material for purposes of study.

Examination: Two three-hour papers, one two-hour paper and an oral examination.

Modern Chinese IIIThree hours of lectures and two hours of tutorials a week through­out the year.Syllabus(a) Contemporary and documentary prose(b) short stories(c) novel or drama.Prescribed Books□ Lu Hsün, Na Han.□ Pa Chin, Chia.□ Hsia, C. T., A History of Modern Chinese Fiction, Yale UP.

Ts'ao Yü, Jih-ch'u.□ Parker Po-fei Huang, TwentyTalks on Chinese Culture; Exercise Book: Twenty Talks on Chinese Culture, Yale UP.Students will be provided with photostat and cyclostyled material for purposes of study.Examination. Two three- hour papers, one two-hour paper and an oral examination.

Classical Chinese IThree hours of lectures and one hour of tutorial in Classical Chinese a week throughout the year.Syllabus(a) Phonology and grammar(b) text-reading(c) analysis of selected passages.Prescribed Books□ San-tzO ching (Elementary Chinese), Taiwan reprint.□ Liu Wu-chi, An Introduction to Chinese Literature, Indiana UP.

202

Chinese

□ Hsüeh-sheng tzü-tien, Com­mercial Press.

Tz'O-hai, Chung-hua.Mathews, R. H., A Chinese-

English Dictionary, rev. Am. ed., Harvard UP.Students w ill also be provided with photostat and cyclostyled material for purposes of study.

Examination: Two three-hour papers.

Classical Chinese IIThree hours of lectures and one hour of tutorial in Classical Chinese a week throughout the year. Syllabus(a) Selections from classical prose(b ) selection from the Lun-yU or Mencius.

Prescribed BooksChu Hsi (edited and annotated),

Ssü-shu chi-chu.Shadick, H. E., A First Course in

Literary Chinese, vols I-III, Cornell UP.

Kao Pu-ying, Meng-tzü wen-fa tu-pen, New Asia College.□ Wu Ch'u-ts'ai (ed.), Ku-wen kuan-chih.

Wang, Fangyu, Introduction to Chinese Cursive Script, Yale UP, 1958.

Kennedy, G. A., ZH Guide: An Introduction to Sinology, Yale UP, 1953.□ Shu Hsin-ch eng et al., Tz'ü-hai, Chung-hua.Students will also be provided with photostat and cyclostyled material for purposes of study.

Examination: Two three-hour papers, and one two-hour paper.

Classical Chinese IIIThree hours of lectures and one hour of tutorial in Classical Chinese a week throughout the year.

Syllabus(a) Selections from philosophical texts{b) selection from historical texts(c) selection from Chinese verse. Prescribed Books□ Frodsham, J. D., An Anthology of Chinese Verse, Oxford UP.□ Frodsham, J. D., The Poems of Li Ho, Oxford UP.□ de Crespigny, R., The Last o f the Han, Oriental Monograph Series 9, Centre of Oriental Studies, ANU.□ de Crespigny, R„ The Biography of Sun Chien, Occasional Paper 5, Centre of Oriental Studies, ANU.

Hsien - Ch 'in wen - hsüeh - shih ts an-k'ao tzü-liao, Chiao-yü,Peking or Hong Kong.□ Karlgren, B., Grammata Serica Recensa, BMFEA 29.Students will also be provided with photostat and cyclostyled material for purposes of study.

Examination: Two three-hour papers, and one two-hour paper.

For the degree w ith honours Honours School of Chinese StudiesThe Honours School is divided into two branches, Modern Chinese and Classical Chinese.

For the degree with honours in Modern Chinese the course extends over four years and consists of:(a) Modern Chinese I, Modern Chinese II (Honours) and III (Honours)(b ) another major in the Faculty(c) the first-year unit of Classical Chinese(d) Modern Chinese IV (Honours)(e) one other major or one sub­major and one single unit.

M odern Chinese II (Honours)As for the pass course in Modern

203

Faculty of Asian Studies

Chinese II, together with a seminar in bibliography one hour a week in the first two terms.Examination: One two-hour paper in Chinese bibliography and one three-hour paper in translation into Chinese.

M odern Chinese III (Honours)As for the pass course in Modern Chinese III, together with a seminar on modern Chinese historical texts and contemporary journals for one hour a week in the second and third terms.Examination: One two-hour paper in modern Chinese historical texts and contemporary journals and one three-hour paper in translation into Chinese.

Modern Chinese IV (Honours)Three hours of lectures and one tutorial a week throughout the year.

Syllabus(a) Modern prose(b ) selected writings from contemp­orary journals(c) advanced newspaper readings(d) modern literature.Prescribed Books□ Selected Works of Lu Hsün.□ Hsia, C. T„ A History of Modern Chinese Fiction, Yale UP.□ Liu Ts'un-yan, Buddhist and Taoist Influences on Chinese Novels, vol. 1, Harrassowitz.□ Liu Ts'un-yan, Chinese Popular Fiction in Two London Libraries, Lungmen.□ Mao Tun, Tzü-yeh (Midnight).□ Ts'ao Yü, Jih Ch'u (Sunrise). Examination: A thesis of about ten thousand words and four three- hour papers or six three-hour papers without a thesis.

For the degree with honours in

Classical Chinese the course extends over four years and consists of:(a) Classical Chinese I, Classical Chinese II (Honours) and III (Hon­ours)(b) Modern Chinese I, II and III(c) Classical Chinese IV (Honours)(d) one other major and one other single unit or one sub-major and two single units.All honours students are required to pass a reading and comprehension test in either Japanese, French, German or Russian before the end of the third year. A second level pass in the NSW Higher School Certificate or equivalent in these languages is considered as fulfilling this requirement.

Classical Chinese II (Honours)As for the pass course in Classical Chinese II, together with a seminar in Chinese bibliography one hour every week in the first and second terms.Recommended Reading:□ Teng Ssü-yü & Biggerstaff, K.,An Annotated Bibliography of Selected Chinese Reference Works, Harvard UP.□ Liu Ts'un-yan, Men of Letters in the Light of Chinese Historio­graphy, BMFEA 37.Examination: One two-hour paper in Chinese bibliography and one three-hour paper in translation into Chinese.

Classical Chinese III (Honours)As for the pass course in Classical Chinese III, together with a seminar on contemporary literary Chinese for one hour a week in the second and third terms.Examination: One two-hour paper in contemporary literary Chinese and

204

Chinese

one three-hour paper in translation into Chinese.

Classical Chinese IV (Honours)Three hours of lectures and one hour of tutorial will be given throughout the year.Syllabus(a) Philosophical texts, Hsün-tzü or Chuang-tzu(b ) Buddhist literature in Chinese, Miao-fa Hen-hua-ching(c) Chinese poetry(d ) literary texts(e) historical texts(f) Chinese linguistics.Prescribed Books□ Hsün-tzü, with Yang Ching's commentaries, SPTK ed.□ Kuo Ch'ing-fan, Chuang-tzü chi- shih, Chung-hua.□ Ming Shih.□ Frodsham, J. D., An Anthology of Chinese Verse; The Poems of Li Ho, Oxford UP; The Murmuring Stream, vols 1 and 2, Malaya UP. Examination: A thesis of about ten thousand words and four three- hour papers or six three-hour papers without a thesis.

For the degree of M aster of Arts (Asian Studies)

A candidate who has qualified for the degree of Bachelor of Arts (Asian Studies) with at least second class honours either in Modern Chinese or Classical Chinese may be admitted to proceed directly to the master's degree by seminar, thesis or examination.

Master of Arts (Asian Studies) — Qualifying Examination A candidate who has qualified for the degree of Bachelor or Arts (Asian Studies) with third class honours either in Modern Chinese

or Classical Chinese, the pass degree of Bachelor of Arts (Asian Studies) with a major either in Modern Chinese or Classical Chinese or a degree with a major in Chinese from this or any other recognised univer­sity may, with the approval of the Head of the Department, proceed to the master's degree by first passing a qualifying examination.

The subjects for such an examina­tion will be prescribed by the Head of the Department after taking into consideration the nature of the work already done and the student's special plans for advanced study.

For the degree of Doctor of PhilosophyCandidates for this degree will usually hold the degree of Master of Arts (Asian Studies), though can­didates with the degree of Bachelor of Arts (Asian Studies) with first class honours may be admitted to the program.

Facilities exist in the Department for work towards the degree of Doctor of Philosophy in the areas of Chinese literature, history of Chinese fiction, Taoist literature and biographical studies.

205

Indonesian Languages and Literatures

A. H. Johns, BA, PhD (Lond) Professor and Head of the Department

IntroductionThe courses offered are Bahasa Indonesia and Malayf I, II and III, and Javanese I and II. Instruction in certain other Indonesian lan­guages (Minangkabau, Sundanese, Balinese) can be arranged as required.

Bahasa Indonesia and Malay I is devoted to Bahasa Indonesia, the national language of Indonesia, as a modern language, and is designed to give the student competence in the basic skills of speech, reading and composition.

Bahasa Indonesia and Malay II is likewise modern in orientation, and aims to develop a more active com­mand of the language. During this year, emphasis is laid on the cultural and documentary aspects of the texts studied.

Bahasa Indonesia and Malay III is likewise modern in orientation with increasing emphasis on literary movements and personalities, and a greater sophistication in the discussion of grammatical features of the language. However, an important proportion of the course is given to the continued develop­ment of practical skills.

Javanese A is a course in the liter­ary language, accepted as standard since the seventeenth century. Pre­scribed texts include selections from local chronicles and Javanese religious and ethical works. Java­nese B is a course devoted to the forms of the language extant between the tenth and the six­teenth centuries. Prescribed texts include selections from Old Java­nese historical works, court poems

and renderings of the great Indian epics. In view of the importance of Sanskrit in the study of Old Java­nese, Javanese B and Sanskrit I may constitute a mixed sub-major (taken in either order).

The work of each term is examined in end of term tests throughout the year. The standard achieved in mid-term tests contributes to the final result in each term examination. The grade attained in each unit for a year's work is the average of the term tests.

In view of the importance of Islam in Indonesian life and civilisation, Elementary Literary Arabic is offered as a single unit or in combination with Javanese A as a mixed sub­major (taken in either order). This unit provides a good grounding in Arabic grammar and gives the stu­dent experience in reading secular and religious texts.

Since many of the standard works for studies in the Indonesian field (dictionaries and grammars for linguistic work, monographs and articles for historical studies) are in Dutch, the honours component of Bahasa Indonesia and Malay II is a two-hour per week course in Dutch arranged with the Depart­ment of Germanic Languages.Dutch I fulfills this requirement.

For the pass degreeBahasa Indonesia and Malay IThree hours of lectures and four hours of tutorials in Bahasa Indo­nesia a week throughout the year.

f For convenience, modern Malay and Bahasa Indonesia are grouped together. During the first two years, however, the major emphasis is laid on Bahasa Indo­nesia.

206

Indonesian Languages and Literatures

Syllabus(a) Phonology and grammar(b) drill on basic speech patterns(c) translation and study of texts(d) composition.Prescribed Books□ Johns, Y., Melawat Ke Negara Tetangga, Novak.Graded materials based on the work of modern authors are distributed throughout the year.Grammars and Dictionaries□ Wojowasito, Purwadarminta & Gaastra, Kamus Indonesia-lnggeris, Inggeris-lndonesia, 2 vols, Versluys.□ Echols, J. & Shadily, H„ An Indonesian English Dictionary, 2nd ed., Cornell UP.Examination: Three one-hour papers at the end of each term.

Bahasa Indonesia and Malay IIThree hours of lectures and four hours of tutorials in Bahasa Indo­nesia a week throughout the year.Syllabus(a) Study of texts with special reference to their literary and documentary aspects(b) grammar(c) composition and translation {d) practical skills.Prescribed Books□ Johns, Y., Melawat Ke Negara Tetangga, Novak.□ Lubis, M., Djalan tak ada Udjung, Balai Pustaka.□ Teeuw, A., Modern Indonesian Literature, Nijhoff.Collections of modern short stories and poetry are distributed in stencil form throughout the year.Grammars and Dictionaries□ Purwadarminta, W. J. S., Kamus Umum Bahasa Indonesia, 3rd ed., Kementerian PPK.

or Iskandar, T., Kamus Dewan, Dewan Bahasa dan Pustaka.□ Wojowasito, Purwadarminta & Gaastra, Kamus Indonesia-lnggeris, Inggeris-lndonesia, 2 vols, Versluys.□ Echols, J. & Shadily, H., An Indonesian English Dictionary, 2nd ed., Cornell UP.Examination: Five one-hour papers at the end of each term.

Bahasa Indonesia and Malay IIIThree hours of lectures and four hours of tutorials in Bahasa Indo­nesia and older Malay a week throughout the year.Syllabus(a) Study of modern literary works(b) more advanced grammar(c) composition and translation(d) practical skills.Prescribed Books□ Raffel, B., The Development of Modern Indonesian Poetry, New York UP.□ Teeuw, A., Modern Indonesian Literature, Nijhoff.□ Achdiat, K. M., Atheis, Abbas Mandong.□ Ahmad, S., Ranjau sa-panjang Jalan, Utusan Melayu.□ Ahmad, S., Terdedah, Abbas Bandong.Further materials, consisting of essays, poetry, modern drama and criticism are distributed throughout the year.Grammars and Dictionaries As for Bahasa Indonesia and Malay II, with the addition of:□ Macdonald, R. M. & Soenjono, D., Indonesian Reference Grammar, Georgetown UP.

Examination: Four one-hour papers at the end of each term.

207

Faculty of Asian Studies

Javanese AThree hours of lectures and two hours of tutorials a week throughout the year.Syllabus(a) Phonemics and grammar(b ) translation and study of pre­scribed texts in the modern lang­uage, i.e. post 1600(c) comprehension(d ) introduction to Javanese iiterature.Prescribed Books□ Babad Tanah Djawi, Meinsma,J. J., Nijhoff (condensation into prose with Dutch translation).□ Babad Tanah Djawi (verse version), Balai Pustaka, 1939-41.□ Jasadipura (ed. Kats), Serat Rama, Balai Pustaka. (This is a modern version in verse of the Rä may an a.)□ Poerbatjaraka, R. M. Ng, Kapustakan Djawi, Djambatan, 1952. (This work is also published con­currently in Bahasa Indonesia as Kepustakaan Djawa.)Relevant passages from these works will be stencilled and distributed as required. In addition specimen pas­sages from modern periodicals will be studied.Grammars and Dictionaries□ Purwadarminta, W. J. S., Baus- astra Djawi-Indonesia (Javanese- Bahasa Indonesia), Balai Pustaka; Bausastra Djawi (Javanese-Java- nese), Wolters, 1939; Sarining Paramasastra Djawa (Essentials of Javanese Grammar), Noordhoff- Kolff.□ Pigeaud, Th., Javaans-Neder- lands Handwoordenboek (Javanese- Dutch), Wolters, 1937.□ Uhlenbeck, E. M „ Beknopte Javaansche Grammatica (an

abridged Javanese Grammar), Balai Pustaka, 1941.□ Horne, Elinor C., Beginning Java­nese; Intermediate Javanese,Yale UP.Where these works are not in Eng­lish, they are regarded as reference works only in the first instance, and are supplemented by notes from the lecturer.Examination: Two one-hour papers at the end of each term.

Javanese BThis unit w ill be offered in 1973.

Three hours of lectures and two hours of tutorials a week through­out the year.Syllabus(a) Grammar(b) translation and study of pre­scribed texts in Old Javanese, i.e. between the tenth and sixteenth centuries(c) comprehension(d) history of Old Javanese litera­ture.Prescribed Books□ Zoetmulder, P. J., Sekar Suma- wur, vol. I and II, Obor.□ Kern, J. H. C., Rämäyana, Nijhoff.□ Juynboll, H. H..Adiparwa,Nijhoff, 1906.□ Berg, C. C„ Inleiding tot de Studie van het Oud-Javaansch, de Bliksem, 1928.Grammars and Dictionaries□ Zoetmulder, P. J., Bahasa Parwa, vol. I and II, Obor; De Taal van het Adiparwa, A. C. Nix & Co.□ Juynboll, H. H., Oudjavaansch- Neder/andsche Woordenlijst, Brill, 1923.Examination: Two one-hour papers at the end of each term.

208

Indonesian Languages and Literatures

Elementary Literary ArabicThree hours of lectures a week throughout the year.Syllabus(a) Script and sound system (.b ) grammar(c) study of selected texts(d) translation from and into Arabic.Prescribed Books□ Ziadeh, F. J. & Winder, R. B„ An Introduction to Modern Arabic, Princeton UP.□ Abdo, D. A A Course in Modern Standard Arabic, Khayats.□ McCarus, E. N., Contemporary Arabic Readers, vol. I, Michigan UP.Dictionary□ Wehr, H., A Dictionary of Modern Written Arabic, Harrassowitz.Examination: One three-hour paper.

Islamic CivilizationThis unit is offered in collaboration with the Department of Asian Civilizations. Full details are set out on p.1 98.

For the degree w i th honoursHonours School of South-East Asian Studies(With emphasis on Indonesia and Malaysia)The normal course for the degree with honours in South-East Asian Studies extends over four years and consists of:(a) Bahasa Indonesia and Malay I, Bahasa Indonesia and Malay II (Honours) and III (Honours){b) a major in Asian Civilization (South East), or a major in Linguistics(c) Bahasa Indonesia and Malay IV (Honours)(d) Javanese A and B or Javanese A and Elementary Literary Arabic or

Javanese B and Sanskrit I. Although Javanese (A or B) is normally a second-year subject it may be taken in the first year to enable a student to include in his degree a major taken in the Faculty of Arts.(e) Two approved units if Javanese A and B, or Javanese A and Ele­mentary Literary Arabic, or Javanese B and Sanskrit I are taken as a sub­major or three approved units if only one part of Javanese is taken.(f) A reading test in French and Dutch to be taken before the end of the third year of the course. A second level pass in the NSW Higher School Certificate or equivalent in these languages will be regarded as fulfilling the requirement.

Bahasa Indonesia and M alay II (Honours)As for the pass course in Bahasa Indonesia and Malay II, together with two hours of lectures in Dutch per week.Examination: An oral test of reading competence in Dutch or such other work as the Head of Depart­ment determines.

Bahasa Indonesia and Malay III (Honours)As for the pass course in Bahasa Indonesia and Malay III, together with a seminar in Traditional Malay Literature, two hours per fortnight.Examination: One two-hour paper.

Bahasa Indonesia and M alay IV (Honours)Seminars and lectures/tutorials in:(a) Sources of Indonesian Islam {b) Sundanese or Minangkabau (c) historiography (in collaboration with the Departments of History and Asian Civilizations)

209

Faculty of Asian Studies

(d) literary and historical texts (in Bahasa Indonesia and Malay and Javanese)(e) institutions, concepts and doctrinal development of Hinduism, Buddhism and Islam{f) practical modern language work (Bahasa Indonesia and Malay).

Students are provided with photo­stat and cyclostyled material for purposes of study. In addition, lists of suitable reference books are circulated during the year.Examination: Five three-hour papers, an honours sub-thesis and an oral examination.

The seminars and lectures/tutorials listed above for the fourth honours year allow of certain options and development of emphases which may be arranged in consultation with the Head of the Department. Additional options, both in the first three years of the course and during the fourth honours year, may from time to time become available.

For the degree of M aster of Arts (Asian Studies)A candidate who has qualified for the degree of Bachelor of Arts (Asian Studies) with at least second class honours in South-East Asian Studies may be admitted to proceed directly to the course for the degree of Master of Arts (Asian Studies) by thesis and examination.

Master of Arts (Asian Studies) — Qualifying Examination A candidate who has qualified for the degree of Bachelor of Arts (Asian Studies) with third class honours in South-East Asian studies, the pass degree of Bachelor of Arts (Asian Studies) with a major in Bahasa Indonesia

and Malay or a degree with a major in Bahasa Indonesia and Malay from this or any recognised Uni­versity may, with the approval of the Head of the Department, pro­ceed to the course for the degree of Master of Arts (Asian Studies) after passing specified qualifying examinations.

The subjects for such examinations will be prescribed by the Head of the Department after taking into consideration the nature of the work already done and the student's specialised plans for advanced study.

For the degree of Doctor of PhilosophyCandidates for this degree will usually hold the degree of Master of Arts (Asian Studies), though candidates with the degree of Bachelor of Arts (Asian Studies) with first class honours may be admitted to the program.

Facilities exist in the Department for work towards the degree of Doctor of Philosophy in the fields of philology, religious, literary and cultural history and modern literature.

210

Japanese

E. S. Crawcour, BA (Melb),MA (Cantab), PhD Professor and Head of the Department

IntroductionJapanese I, II and III taken at either pass or honours standard constitute a major designed to give the student control of the current standard language as a means of communi­cation or a tool of research. A stu­dent who has successfully com­pleted the major will have a useful competence both in speaking and in reading modern books, journals, and newspapers, although a short period of practice in Japan would be desirable for greater fluency in the current language. Oral drill and practice in the language labora­tory form an important part of the course, the object being to make the student's use of the patterns of spoken Japanese automatic. The number of hours of language laboratory practice will vary with the student, but three hours per week is considered a minimum.

The sub-major (Japanese I and II) is intended to give the student a competence in the standard lang­uage sufficient to enable him to improve his reading, writing, and speaking without necessarily resort­ing to further formal instruction.

Introduction to Japanese Literature followed by Literary Japanese con­stitutes a sub-major. A pass or concurrent enrolment in Japanese II is a prerequisite for Introduction to Japanese Literature and a pass or concurrent enrolment in Japanese III is a prerequisite for Literary Japanese which is intended primarily for honours students. Introduction to Japanese Literature will not be given in 1972. Pass students who

wish to take Literary Japanese should consult the Head of the Department. Japanese III and Literary Japanese are prerequisites for Japanese Literature A and Japanese Literature B which are thus normally fourth-year honours units but they may be available to pass students with the permission of the Head of the Department.

The honours course, covering four years, is designed expressly as a preparation for specialised study in the fields such as Japanese language or literature. Honours students study Japanese linguistics and literature concurrently with the language.

The fourth honours year is devoted to the study of written Japanese, Japanese linguistics, history and literature (modern or pre-modern emphasis). Fourth-year students are expected to participate in discus­sions and understand lectures in the Japanese language.

For the pass degreeThe major in Japanese is Japanese I, II and III in that order. The sub­majors are (a) Japanese I and II in that order, (b) Introduction to Japanese Literature followed by Literary Japanese, (c) Literary Jap­anese followed by Japanese Literature A or B.

Japanese IFour hours of lectures and three hours of tutorials a week in the standard spoken language through­out the year, together with regular language laboratory practice.Syllabus(a) Phonology and grammar(b ) structure drill(c) reading of graded texts in Japanese script.

211

Faculty of Asian Studies

Prescribed Books□ Alfonso, A. & Niimi, K., Japanese —A Basic Course, Sophia.University LL Center of Applied Linguistics; The Japanese Writing System, Part 1, Department of Japanese, ANU.□ Alfonso, A., Japanese Language Patterns, Sophia University LL Center of Applied Linguistics.Examination: One three-hour paper and an oral examination.

Japanese IIFour hours of lectures and three hours of tutorials a week in the standard spoken language through­out the year, together with regular language laboratory practice and an extra weekly seminar for honours students.Syllabus (a) Grammar {b) structure drill(c) reading of graded Japanese texts. Prescribed Books□ Alfonso, A., Japanese Language Patterns, Sophia University LL Center of Applied Linguistics.□ Alfonso, A. & Niimi, K., The Japanese Writing System, Part II, Department of Japanese, ANU.□ Katsumata, S., Kenkyusha's New Japanese-English Dictionary, Kenkyusha.□ Nelson, A. N., The Modern Reader's Japanese-English Charac­ter Dictionary, Tuttle.Examination: Two three-hour papers and an oral examination.

Japanese IIIFour hours of lectures and three hours of tutorials a week throughout the year devoted mainly to the current written language but includ­ing further practice in spoken Jap- 21 2

anese. Honours students will attend an extra weekly seminar.Syllabus(a) Reading of normal current.texts {b) advanced grammar, structure drill and conversation (c) composition.Prescribed BooksAs for Japanese II and in addition:□ Hattori & Oyanagi, Shökai Kanwa daijiten, Fuzambo.□ Hibbett, H. & itasaka, G.,Modern Japanese: a basic reader,2 vols, Harvard UP.□ Nishio & iwabuchi, Iwanami kokugo jiten, Iwanami.Honours students are encouraged to buy Shimmura, I., Köjien,Iwanami.Texts for reading will be distributed.Examination: Two three-hour papers and an oral examination.

Introduction to Japanese LiteratureThis unit will not be offered in 1972.

Two hours of lectures and one tutorial a week throughout the year. Syllabus: A survey of Japanese literature from earliest times to the present accompanied by reading of selected works in translation. Three essays of 2,000 words each will be required during the year.Prescribed Books□ Keene, Donaid, Japanese Litera­ture: an introduction for Western readers, Grove; Anthology of Japan­ese Literature to the mid-nineteenth Century, Penguin; Modern Japan­ese Literature: 1868 to present, Grove.Examination: One three-hour paper.

Literary JapaneseThree hours of lectures and one tutorial a week throughout the year.

Japanese

Syllabus(a) Morphology and syntax of classical Japanese (ib) a survey of the development of the literary language from classical times to the nineteenth century. Prescribed Books□ Kindaichi Kyösuke & Kindaichi Haruhiko, Meikai kogo jiten, Sanseido.□ Mitani, E. & Sugizaki, K., Hyoran kokubumpö, Yüseidö.Reading texts and material for grammatical analysis will be distributed.Examination: One three-hour paper.

Japanese L iterature AStudents wishing to take this unit must obtain the permission of the Head of the Department.

Three hours of lectures and one tutorial a week throughout the year.SyllabusJapanese literature to the Meiji period:(a) selections from Nara poetry, Heian prose and poetry, medieval literature, and the literature of the Edo period(b) history of Japanese literature to the Meiji period.Prescribed Books□ Kindaichi Kyösuke & Kindaichi Haruhiko, Meikai kogo jiten, Sanseido.□ Mitani, E. & Sugizaki, K„ Hyoran kokubumpö, Yüseidö.Japanese texts will be distributed.Examination: Two three-hour papers.

Japanese L iterature BStudents wishing to take this unit must obtain the permission of the Head of the Department.

Three hours of lectures and one tutorial a week throughout the year.

SyllabusJapanese literature from the Meiji period to the present day:(a) selections from the works of authors representative of various schools of writing(b) history of Japanese literature from the Meiji period.Prescribed Books□ Hisamatsu Sen'ichi & Yoshida Seiichi (eds.), Kindai nihon bungaku jiten, Tökyödö.□ Katö Hidetoshi, Japanese Popular Culture, Tuttle.Japanese texts will be distributed. Examination: Two three-hour papers.

For the degree w ith honoursHonours School o f Japanese StudiesThe course for the degree with honours in Japanese extends over four years and consists of:(a) Japanese I, Japanese II (Honours) and III (Honours)(b) Introduction to Japanese Litera­ture and Literary Japanese(c) Japanese IV (Honours)(d) another major in the Faculty and two approved units.First Year: In their first year pros­pective honours students take Japanese I, the first part of another major in the Faculty other than Japanese and two approved units.To qualify for admission to the honours school they must reach at least a good credit level in Japanese I.Second Year: In their second year honours students take Japanese II (Honours) which consists of Japanese II with the additional work prescribed for honours students.In addition they take Introduction to Japanese Literature and the second

213

Faculty of Asian Studies

part of their second major in the Faculty.Third Year: In their third year honours students take Japanese III (Honours) which consists of Japanese III with the additional work prescribed for honours students. In addition they take Literary Japanese and the third part of their second major in the Faculty.

Japanese II (Honours)Analysis of modern colloquial Japanese.Examination: One two-hour paper.

Japanese III (Honours)A structural analysis of the modern written ianguage as distinct from the spoken language.Examination: One two-hour paper.

Japanese IV (Honours)Four hours of lectures and two tutorials a week throughout the year.

Syllabus(a) Japanese Literature A or B; or if either of these already completed then other approved work(b ) composition(c) advanced grammar(d) bibliography(e) Japanese history or Japanese linguistics{f) special topic.Prescribed Books To be arranged.Examination: A thesis of about ten thousand words, five three-hour papers and an oral examination.

For the degree of M aster o f Arts (Asian Studies)Students who have gained first or upper second class honours in the final examination for the degree

214

of Bachelor of Arts (Asian Studies) with honours in Japanese will normally be permitted to pro­ceed to the master's degree by thesis and oral examination. The subject of the thesis must be approved by the Head of the Department, who may also prescribe course work.For a full-time student the work for the course will normally take one year.

A student who has completed a major in Japanese as part of his undergraduate degree may, at the discretion of the Head of the Department, be admitted as a can­didate for the master's degree after pursuing a further course of study and passing a qualifying examination.

For the degree of Doctor of PhilosophyFacilities exist in the Department for supervision of work towards the degree of Doctor of Philosophy in the fields of Japanese language and literature. Details will be arranged by the Head of the Department.

Linguistics

R. M. W. Dixon, MA(Oxon), PhD(Lond)Professor and Head of the Department

IntroductionLanguage is man's most important skill. It is language which serves to distinguish him from other animals, enables him to live in large, com­plexly integrated communities, and to develop literature, laws and science. Each man can speak a language, and communicate efficiently with his fellows; but few understand exactly how language works.

Linguistics studies the general nature of human language. It promotes phonetic, grammatical and semantic studies of individual languages, and then seeks to discover 'linguistic universals', features that are common to all languages. A general characterisa­tion of the underlying structure of any human language is first pro­vided; individual languages are described in terms of this general model. Approached in this way, languages which on the surface appear to be very different often show important deep similarities, in terms of the ways they organise meanings, and so on.

Linguistics may be taken as part of the course leading to the degree of Bachelor of Arts or that of Bachelor of Arts (Asian Studies). When taken as part of the course leading to the degree of Bachelor of Arts (Asian Studies) it must be taken in conjunction with an Asian language major and other units approved by the Faculty of Asian Studies.

Effective mastery of any language demands a sound general

linguistic background, in terms of which the structural features of the chosen language can properly be understood, and related to proper­ties of other languages. The Depart­ment provides a basic three-year course in the principles of linguis­tics, open to both Asian Studies and Arts students. Asian Studies students are placed in special tutorials in the first year, and discuss the application of linguistic methods to problems in the languages they are studying. In the second and third years, students are encouraged to seek advice from the staff of the Department on any point concerning the linguistics of Asian languages. Second and third-year courses include some lectures on problems of Asian linguistics.

In all linguistic courses, emphasis is placed on teaching students how to think and reason, and on sharpening their linguistic intuitions, rather than on the brute learning of facts. They are exposed to problems in a wide variety of languages and do detailed work on two or three languages and language families. Thorough training is given in the methods and results of trans­formational grammar, work which has during the last decade revo­lutionised linguistics and adjacent fields.

Linguistics I involves a general survey of the established results of linguistics, leading into an intro­duction to transformational grammar. Throughout, theoretical discussion is reinforced by application to practical problems; lectures focus not only on how linguistics explains a certain set of data, but on why the problems are solved in this way and not in some other manner. There is concurrent instruction in general

215

Faculty of Asian Studies

phonetics, with lectures supple­mented by performance classes, in which students learn to make, recognise and transcribe sounds from a wide variety of languages.

The second year centres on a field methods course, in which students work in small groups on a language unknown to them, eliciting some aspect of the structure from a native informant. In this way, they are able to apply the theoretical ideas they have been taught. Linguistics II also provides an introduction to semantics, and further work on transformational theory, on the historical relation­ships of languages, and on phonology.

Linguistics III involves an inten­sive course on English grammar, mainly concentrating on recent transformational work; the study of a selected language family; either further comparative linguistics or a survey of the history of linguistics; and seminar discussions of current issues in semantics and the study of universals.

Honours students go more deeply into some of the topics covered in the second and third years, from the vantage point of their know­ledge of Asian languages; and do further intensive work on linguistic theory in their fourth year. Their final year thesis should normally concern some aspect of the linguistics of an Asian language.

Linguistics I, II and III replace General Linguistics 1, A and B which were offered in 1970 and earlier years; a transitional syllabus will be in operation in Linguistics III in 1 972 to cater for students who took General Linguistics I in 1970 and Linguistics II in 1971.

For the pass degree Linguistics IThree lectures and one tutorial a week throughout the year.Syllabus(a) Introduction to linguistics. The nature of language. Language and culture. Syntax; morphology; phonology. How a language changes. Language families of the world. History of linguistics. Semantics and linguistic universals. (2 hours per week for two terms).(b ) Introduction to transformational grammar. Motivation. Phrase- structure grammars. Context-free and context-sensitive rules. Trees. Transformations; elementary types. Ordering of rules. (2 hours per week for one term).(c) Elements of general phonetics. Articulatory criteria. Notation. Tran­scription of Australian English (1 hour per week for three terms, alternating lectures and performance classes).Prescribed Books□ Langacker, R. W., Language and its Structure, Harcourt Brace & World.□ Abercrombie, D., Elements of General Phonetics, Edinburgh UP.□ Sapir, E., Language, Harcourt Brace Et World.□ Bolinger, D., Aspects of Lan­guage, Harcourt Brace & World.□ Jones, D., The Pronunciation of English, Cambridge’UP.□ Jacobs, R. A. & Rosenbaum,P. S., English Transformational Grammar, Ginn.Examination: One three-hour paper. Account will be taken of perform­ance in practical assignments throughout the year in assessing the final result. There will also be a short practical phonetics test.

216

Linguistics

Linguistics IIThree lectures a week throughout the year.Syllabus(a) Further transformational theory. Development of the theory since 1957. Alternative proposals. Generative semantics. Derivational constraints.(b) Comparative linguistics. Types of sound change. Comparative and internal reconstruction, both phono­logical and morphological.(c) Further phonology and phonetics.(d) Field methods. Analysis of an unknown language, within an up-to-date framework.(e) Methods of linguistic descrip­tion. Study of some of the following models: tagmemic, structural, systemic, prosodic, stratificational.(f) Introduction to semantics. Sense and reference; semantic relations. Dictionary and componential methods. The optimum method of semantic description — nuciear words, types of definition Inter­relations with syntax.Prescribed Books□ Chomsky, N., Syntactic Struc­tures, Mouton.□ Samarin, W. J., Field Linguistics, Holt, Rinehart & Winston.□ Wurm, S. A., Linguistic Fieldwork Methods in Australia, Aust. Inst, of Aboriginal Studies.□ Meillet, A., La methode com­parative en iinguistique hisiorique or the translation: The Comparative Method in Historical Linguistics, Champion.□ Bloomfield, L., Language, Holt, Rinehart & Winston.□ Lyons, J., Introduction to Theoretical Linguistics, Cambridge UP.

Further reading will be assigned at the beginning of the course.Examination: One three-hour paper.In assessing the final result, account will be taken of performance in practical assignments, notably the field methods project.

Linguistics IIIThree lectures a week throughout the year.Syllabus (from 1973)(a) English grammar. Discussion of recent transformational work and its wider implications.(b ) Advanced phonetics—lectures and performance classes.(c) Detailed study of a chosen language family.(d) Further comparative linguistics OR History of Linguistics (given in alternate years).(e) Linguistic universals.Transitional syallabus for 1 972, for students who have previously taken General Linguistics I and Linguistics II.(a) Transformational grammar. Motivation. Phrase-structure grammars. Context-free and context- sensitive rules. Trees. Transforma­tions; elementary types. Ordering of rules. Development of the theory since 1957. Generative semantics.(b ) Field methods. Analysis of an unknown language, within an up-to-date theoretical framework.(c) Comparative linguistics. Types of sound change. Comparative and internal reconstruction, both phono­logical and morphological.{d) Further work in phonetics, and in linguistic theory.(e) Introduction to semantics. Sense and reference; semantic relations. Dictionary and componential methods. The optimum method of

217

Faculty of Asian Studies

semantic description— nuclear words, types of definitions. Inter-relations with syntax. Prescribed Books□ Reibet, D. A. 8- Schane, S.A., Modern Studies in English— Readings in Transformational Grammar, Prentice-Hall.□ Lyons, J., Introduction to Theoretical Linguistics, Cambridge UP.

Further reading will be assigned during the course.Examination: One three-hour paper. In assessing the final result, account will be taken of performance in practical assignments.

Australian LinguisticsThis unit will normally be offered in alternate years; it will probably not be offered again until 1974.

Three lectures a week. Prerequisite: Linguistics I must be passed before this unit is taken; Australian Linguistics is a demand­ing course, and only students who have a good pass in Linguistics I are recommended to attempt it; the Head of Department will be glad to advise.Syllabus: Detailed study of a selected language. Typological survey of the continent. The com­mon 'deep grammar' of Australian languages. Genetic and areal relationships; reconstruction.Preliminary Reading: Before beginning the course, students are advised to gain some back­ground information by reading one of the standard anthropological texts:

Elkin, A.P., The Australian Aborigines: how to understand them, A & R.

□ Berndt, R. M. & C. H„ The World of the First Australians,U. Smith.

Abbie, A. A., The original Australians, Muller.

A list of prescribed and recommended reading will be available from the department during February.The Result will be based on three assignments, one each term. Assignments in the first and second terms each count 25%; the final assignment counts 50%.There will be no obligatory examination. However, any student may request a three-hour final examination (which will count 50% towards the result) in place of the final assignment; such a request must be made before 4 September.

For the degree w ith honoursFirst year: There is no additional formal work, although wider and deeper reading will be expected on the ground covered by the Linguistics I course.Second and third years: As for the pass course in Linguistics II and III, with one additional hour each week of tutorial discussion and extension of topics covered in lectures.Examination: Honours candidates will take one two-hour paper, in addition to the regular three-hour pass paper, at the end of their second and third years.

Honours School of LinguisticsThe course for the degree with honours in Linguistics comprises:(a) Linguistics I, II and III.(b) Additional honours work set out above for these units.(c) Linguistics IV.

218

Linguistics

(d ) A major in one Asian language which must be completed by the end of third year.(e) Three other units, as approved by the Department. It will normally be required that at least one of these be a further Asian or other language unit, and that one be Australian Linguistics.

Linguistics IV (Honours)Classes to be arranged.

Syllabus(a) Intensive study of linguistic theory and its applications.(ib) A special subject, to be arranged between the student and the Head of the Department.Examination: Three three-hour papers, spaced through the year. Students will also do a practical assignment; and write a thesis on an agreed topic.

For the degree of M aster of Arts (Asian Studies)A student with a major in an Asian language, who intends to write a thesis on the linguistics of an Asian language, will be enrolled within the Faculty of Asian Studies for the degree of Master of Arts (Asian Studies); other students will be enrolled within the Faculty of Arts for the degree of Master of Arts.(1) A graduate with at least second class honours division A in linguistics may be enrolled for the degree of Master of Arts (Asian Studies) by thesis; such a course will take at least one year.(2) A graduate with at least second class honours division A in a subject other than linguistics, who has had some linguistic training, may be enrolled for the degree of Master of Arts (Asian Studies) by

course work and thesis; such a course will take at least two years.(3) Graduates other than those covered above will be required to complete a qualifying course, arranged by the Head of Depart­ment, before being enrolled as a candidate for the Master of Arts (Asian Studies) degree. The qualifying course will be at least one year's full-time study. Whether the student then proceeds to the degree of Master of Arts (Asian Studies) by thesis alone, as in (1), or by course work and thesis, asin (2) will depend on the result of his qualifying course.(4) In exceptional circumstances, and with the approval of the Faculty, students who have second class honours division B, but who have had further thorough training in linguistics (for instance, several years supervised field work) may be directly enrolled for the degree of Master of Arts (Asian Studies)by course work and thesis, as in (2).

For the degree of D octor of PhilosophyA graduate with at least second class honours division A in linguis­tics, or holding a master's degree or equivalent qualification in linguis­tics, may proceed to a course of study towards the degree of Doctor of Philosophy. Students may be required to undertake some course work. Supervision can be provided for theses on Australian Aboriginal Linguistics, or semantics, and on some other areas of linguistic theory.

219

South Asian and Buddhist Studies

J. W. de Jong, DrPhil (Ley) Professor and Head of the Department

IntroductionThe Department is mainly con­cerned with the Old and Middle Indo-Aryan languages, i.e. Sanskrit, Prakrit and Pali.

The three-year course offered by this Department concentrates on classical Sanskrit, the main cultural language of South Asia. Sanskrit is a prerequisite for the study of the history and the cultural background of ancient India and her neighbours. It is of interest to students of his­torical and comparative linguistics and also provides a basis for the study of modern Indian languages. The first year is devoted to the study of grammar and the reading of selections from the Epics and easy prose texts. Works studied in the second and third years represent a diversity of styles and subject matter.

The additional work prescribed for the four-year honours course includes the study of Pali, Prakrit, Vedic and more difficult Sanskrit texts. While Pali and Prakrit are nec­essary for understanding Buddhist and Jain texts written in these Indie languages, Vedic is indispensable for the study of Vedic culture, the basis of Brahmanical tradition. Seminars on Chinese and Tibetan Buddhist texts are held for postgraduate students.

Units of Pali and Prakrit are offered in alternate years, Prakrit being offered in 1972. A pass in Sanskrit I is a prerequisite for either of these units.

The major in Sanskrit is Sanskrit I, II and III in that order. The sub­majors are:(a) Sanskrit I and II in that order

(b) Sanskrit I and Javanese B in either order(c) Sanskrit I and Pali(d) Sanskrit I and Prakrit(e) Pali and Prakrit in either order.

Sanskrit I may be taken as a singleunit only after consultation with the Head of the Department.

In 1972 Hindi I and Hindi II will be offered. If staff permits Hindi III will be introduced in 1973.

Literary Persian is offered as a single unit but it may not be taken in the first year.

A student in any unit who has not handed in a satisfactory proportion of the prescribed written work, or who has not attended a satisfactory number of tutorials and classes, may be excluded from the examina­tion in that unit.

The units that will be offered in 1972 and in subsequent years will depend on the staffing of the Department and students must con­sult the Head of the Department before enrolling.

For the pass degree Sanskrit IThree hours of lectures and one hour of tutorial a week throughout the year.Syllabus(a) Grammar of classical Sanskrit(b) rending of easy classical texts.Prescribed Books□ Lanman, C. R., A Sanskrit Reader with Vocabulary and Notes,Harvard UP.□ Macdonnell, A. A., A Sanskrit Grammar for Students, Oxford UP□ Keiler, A. & Masson, J„

Introduction to Classical Sanskrit (with tapes)— unpublished, copies provided by Department.Examination One three-hour paper.

220

South Asian and Buddhist Studies

Sanskrit IIFour hours of lectures a week throughout the year.Syllabus Epic and narrative poetry. Prescribed Books□ Monier-Williams, M., A Sanskrit- Eng/ish Dictionary, Oxford UP.□ Keith, A. B„ A History of Sanskrit Literature; A History of Sanskrit Drama, Oxford UP.□ Whitney, W. D., The Roots, Verb- forms and Primary Derivatives of the Sanskrit Languages, vol. XXX, American Oriental Society, 1945.Recommended Reading A reading list will be given to students at the beginning of the academic year.Examination Two three-hour papers.

Sanskrit IIIFour hours of lectures a week throughout the year.Syllabus: Prose literature, drama and more difficult poetry. History of Sanskrit literature.Prescribed Book□ Renou, Louis, Histoire de la Langue Sanskrite, I AC.Recommended Reading A reading list will be given to students at the beginning of the academic year.Examination Two three-hour papers and an oral examination.

PaliThis unit will not be offered in 1972.

Three hours of lectures and one tutorial a week throughout the year.Syllabus(a) Grammar(b ) reading of easy canonical texts.Prescribed Books

Warder, A. K., Introduction to Pali, Luzac.□ P.T.S., Pali Dictionary.

Examination: One three-hour paper.

PrakritThree hours of lectures and one tutorial a week throughout the year. Syllabus(a) Mähärästri(b) Asokan inscriptions(c) reading of canonical Jain Prakrit texts.Prescribed Books□ Jacobi, H„ Ausgewählte Erzählungen in Mähäräshtri, Wissenschaftliche Buchhandlung.□ Bloch, J., Les inscriptions d'Asoka, Paris.Examination: One three-hour paper.

Hindi IThree hours of lectures and two tutorials a week throughout the year.Syllabus{a) Hindi grammar(b) Hindi texts (introductory readings, short stories)(c) spoken language practice and conversation(d ) language laboratory practice. Prescribed Books□ McGregor, R. S., Outline of Hindi Grammar, Oxford UP; Exer­cises in spoken Hindi, Cambridge UP.□ Harris, R. & Sharma, R., Basic Hindi Reader, Cornell UP.□ Zide, N. H. & others, A Prem- chand Reader, Honolulu.Examination: One three-hour paper and an oral examination.

Hindi IIThree hours of lectures and one tutorial a week throughout the year. Syllabus(a) Selections from modern Hindi literature

221

Faculty of Asian Studies

(b ) language laboratory practice(c) conversation.Prescribed Books□ McGregor, R. S., Outline of

Hindi grammar, Oxford UP.□ McGregor, R. S., (ed.), Exercises

in spoken Hindi, Cambridge UP.□ Zide, N. H. & others, A

Premchand reader, Honolulu.□ Nilsson, U., Intermediate Hindi

Reader, Department of Indian Studies, University of Winsconsin.Examination: Two three-hour papers and an oral examination.

Literary PersianThree hours of lectures and one hour of tutorial a week throughout the year.Syllabus(a) Grammar of Literary Persian {b) reading of suitable classical Persian texts with special reference to the history of India.Prescribed Books□ Lambton, A. K., Persian Grammar, Cambridge UP.Selections from:□ Sadf, Gu/istän□ Firishtä, Gulshan-i-lbrähimi□ Abul Fazl, A'Jn-i-Ak bar! (Photostat copies of the relevant portions will be suppliedto students).Examination. One three-hour paper and an oral examination.

For the degree w ith honours

Honours School of South Asian and Buddhist StudiesThe course for the degree with honours in South Asian and Buddhist Studies covers four years and consists of:(a) Sanskrit I, Sanskrit II (Honours) and III (Honours)

(b ) Pali and Prakrit(c) Sanskrit IV (Honours){d) another major in the Faculty or a major in Latin or Greek.(e) two approved units.

All honours students are required to pass an oral reading test in French and German before the end of the third year. A second level pass in the NSW Higher School Certificate or equivalent in these languages is considered as fulfilling this requirement.

Sanskrit II (Honours)As for the pass course in Sanskrit II, together with seminars of two hours a week devoted to the study of more difficult and varied selections from Sanskrit literature.Examination. One two-hour paper.

Sanskrit III (Honours)As for the pass course in Sanskrit III, together with seminars of two hours a week devoted to the study of more difficult and varied selections from Sanskrit literature.Examination One two-hour paper.

Sanskrit IV (Honours)Five lectures a week throughout the year.Syllabus: Philosophical texts, poe­tics, difficult prose, epigraphy, Veda. Seminars in text criticism and research methods.Prescribed Books □ Macdonnell, A. A., A Vedic Grammar for Students, A Vedic Reader for Students. Oxford UP. Examination: Five three-hour papers.

For the degree of M aster of Arts (Asian Studies)A candidate who has qualified for the degree of Bachelor of Arts

222

South Asian and Buddhist Studies

(Asian Studies) with at least second class honours in South Asian and Buddhist Studies may be admitted to proceed directly to the master's degree by seminar, thesis and/or examination.

Master o f Arts (Asian Studies) — Qualifying Examination A candidate who has qualified for the degree of Bachelor of Arts (Asian Studies) with third class honours in South Asian and Bud­dhist Studies, the pass degree of Bachelor of Arts (Asian Studies) with a major in Sanskrit or a degree with a major in Sanskrit from this or any recognised university may, with the approval of the Head of the Department, proceed to the master's degree after first passing specified qualifying examinations.

The subjects for such examinations will be prescribed by the Head of the Department after taking into consideration the nature of the work already done and the student's specialised plans for advanced study.

For the degree of D octor of PhilosophyCandidates for this degree will usually hold the degree of Master of Arts (Asian Studies), though candidates with the degree of Bachelor of Arts (Asian Studies) with first class honours may be admitted to the program.Candidates should consult the Head of the Department concerning the fields of supervision which will be available in 1 972.

223

Degree Rules

Courses of Study (Degree of Bachelor of Arts (Asian Studies)) Rules1 . (1) In these Rules, unless the contrary intention appears, 'the Faculty' means the Faculty of Asian Studies.(2) For the purposes of these Rules, a major consists of a sequence of three units, and a sub-major con­sists of a sequence of two units, approved in accordance with these Rules.2. The degree of Bachelor of Arts (Asian Studies) may be conferred as a pass degree or as a degree with honours.3. (1) A candidate for the degree shall, before commencing his course secure the approval of the Faculty to his proposed choice of units for the degree and the order in which he proposes to take those units and shall thereafter secure the approval of the Faculty to any proposed alter­ations in the choice and order of the units to be so taken.(2) The number of units that a candidate may take in any year shall be determined by the Faculty.4. (1) Subject to the next succeed­ing sub-rule a candidate shall not be admitted to examination in a unitof the course unless the unit forms part of a course that has been approved by the Faculty and is in accordance with these Rules and the candidate has attended such classes and performed such work in that unit as are required by the head of the appropriate department.(2) A candidate may, in special circumstances, with the approval of the Faculty, be admitted to exami­nation in a unit not forming part of his approved course.4A. Where, after the commence­

224

ment of this Rule, an amendment relating to the courses of study that may be taken by candidates for the pass degree of Bachelor of Arts (Asian Studies) or the degree with honours is made to these Rules, the amendment does not apply to a candidate who, before the making of the amendment, completed one or more units of a course of study approved by the Faculty unless—(a) the candidate elects that the amendment apply to him and sub­mits to the Faculty proposed alterations to his course that are in accordance with these Rules as amended by the amendment and the Faculty approves those altera­tions; or(b ) the Faculty otherwise determines.

The pass degree5. A candidate for the pass degree shall, unless he has been granted status for work performed, or one or more units passed in another faculty or at another university or institute of higher learning, pursue an approved course of studies for at least three years in accordance with these Rules and shall submit him­self to the examinations prescribed for the degree.6. (1) Subject to these Rules the course for the degree shall consist of:(a) six units constituting two majors, one of which is a major in an Asian language, selected from the majors referred to in the next succeeding rule; and(b ) four units, constituting one major and one single unit, two sub­majors or one sub-major and two single units, being units referred to

Degree Rules

in the next succeeding rule or units offered by the Faculty of Arts.(2) A unit offered by the Faculty of Arts shall be taken in accordance with the Course of Study (Degree of Bachelor of Arts) Rules.7. (1) Subject to these Rules, the units and approved sequences of units are as follows:(a) MajorsModern Chinese I, II and III Classical Chinese I, II and III Japanese I, II and III Bahasa Indonesia and Malay I, II

and IIIIntroduction to Asian Civilizations

A or B and Asian Civilization II (East) and III (East)

Introduction to Asian Civilizations A or B and Asian Civilization^!I (South-East) and III (South- East)

Introduction to Asian Civilizations A or B and Asian Civilization II (South) and III (South)

Sanskrit I, II and III Linguistics I, II and III Linguistics I, and Linguistics II

and Australian Linguistics (in either order)

(b ) Sub-MajorsTwo consecutive units specified in paragraph (a) of this sub-rule Literary Japanese and Japanese

Literature ALiterary Japanese and Japanese

Literature BJavanese A and B (in either

order)Javanese B and Sanskrit I (in

either order)Javanese A and Elementary

Literary Arabic (in either order) Introduction to Japanese Litera­

ture and Literary Japanese Sanskrit I and Pali Sanskrit I and Prakrit

Pali and Prakrit (in either order)Hindi I and II(c) Single UnitsA unit specified in paragraph (a) or(b) of this sub-rule Buddhist Civilization Islamic Civilization Literary Persian(2) Subject to these Rules, there shall be such other units and sequences of units as are approved by the Faculty.8. Except with the permission of the Faculty:(a) a candidate shall not take the second-year unit of a subject unless he has completed the first year of that subject, or take the third-year unit of a subject unless he has completed the second-year unit of that subject{b) a candidate shall not take Intro­duction to Japanese Literature unless he has passed in, or is con­currently enrolled for, Japanese II(c) a candidate shall not take Literary Japanese unless he has passed in, or is concurrently enrolled for, Japanese III as part of a major in Japanese(d) a candidate shall not take Japa­nese Literature A or Japanese Literature B unless he has passed in, or is concurrently enrolled for, Japanese III(e) a candidate taking a major in General Linguistics shall also take a major in a language offered by the Faculty(f) a candidate taking a major in Classical Chinese shall also take—(i) a major in Modern Chinese,

being a major commenced before, or concurrently with, the major in Classical Chinese; or

(ii) a major in Sanskrit(fa) a candidate shall not take Modern Chinese I as part of a

225

Faculty of Asian Studies

major unless he has passed in, or is concurrently enrolled for, Classical Chinese I(gO a candidate shall not take Ele­mentary Literary Arabic or Literary Persian until he has completed three units of his course (h ) a candidate shall not take Pali or Prakrit unless he has passed in Sanskrit I and(/') a candidate shall not take Australian Linguistics unless he has completed Linguistics I.8A. A candidate shall not have both the unit Asian Civilization III (South) and the unit History lllc credited towards the degree.9. A candidate who has completed the course for the degree of Bachelor of Arts and who wishes to take the course for the degree of Bachelor of Arts (Asian Studies) shall take in the Faculty of Asian Studies, in accordance with such conditions (if any) as are determined by the Faculty, six units other than units for which he has previously received credit towards the degree of Bachelor of Arts.10. Except with the approval of the Faculty a candidate shall not be admitted to the degree unless.(a) he has completed the prescribed number of units of the course for the degree and has otherwise complied with these Rules; and(b ) he completed those units within the period of eight years from the beginning of the academic year in which he completed the first of those units.

The degree w ith honours11. A candidate for the degree with honours shall unless he has been granted status for work performed, or one or more units passed, in

another faculty or at another university or institute of higher learning, pursue his studies for a period of at least four years in an honours school in the Faculty, or in a combined honours course in two honours schools one, at least, of which is an honours school in the Faculty and submit himself for the examinations prescribed for the degree.12. (1) There shall be the following honours schools in the departments specified opposite to those schools:

H o n o u r s S c h o o l D e p a r t m e n t

A s ia n C iv i l i z a t io n s D e p a r t m e n t o f

A s ia n

C iv i l i z a t io n s

M o d e r n C h in e s e

S t u d ie s

D e p a r t m e n t o f

C h in e s e

C la s s ic a l C h in e s e

S t u d ie s

D e p a r t m e n t o f

C h in e s e

J a p a n e s e S t u d ie s D e p a r t m e n t o f

J a p a n e s e

S o u th A s ia n a n d

B u d d h is t S t u d ie sD e p a r t m e n t o f

S o u th A s ia n a n d

B u d d h is t S t u d ie s

S o u t h - E a s t A s ia n

S t u d ie s

D e p a r t m e n t o f

In d o n e s ia n

L a n g u a g e s a n d

L ite r a tu r e s

L in g u is t ic s D e p a r t m e n t o f

L in g u is t ic s

(2) The Faculty may from time to time name a member to be the member of the Faculty responsible for an honours school.13. The Faculty shall not admit a candidate to an honours school except on the recommendation of the member of the Faculty respon­sible for that honours school.

226

Degree Rules

14. (1) A candidate admitted to an honours school shall take, in the first three years of his course, such courses as are specified for the degree with honours by the member of the Faculty responsible for the honours course in the honours school to which the candidate is admitted.(2) A candidate admitted to the honours school of Asian Civilization shall take a major in a language offered by the Faculty being a language relevant to the civilisation that the candidate is studying.15. (1) A candidate shall not be admitted to the fourth year of an honours course by the Faculty unless the Faculty is satisfied that he has reached a satisfactory stan­dard in the first three years of that honours course.(2) Except with the permission of the Faculty, a candidate shall not be admitted to the fourth year of an honours course if the pass degree of Bachelor of Arts (Asian Studies) has been conferred upon him.(3) The requirements for the fourth year of an honours course shall be such as are determined by the mem­ber of the Faculty responsible for the honours school, and approved by the Faculty.16. Except with the permission of the Faculty, a candidate for the degree with honours shall not attempt the fourth year more than once.17. Except with the approval of the Faculty, a candidate for the degree with honours shall not be admitted to the degree unless-(a ) he has completed the first three years of the course within five years after the commencement of his course; and

(b ) he has completed the fourth year of the course:

(i) within one year after he completed the third year of the course; or

(ii) where the member of the Faculty responsible for the honours school in which the candidate is enrolled has permitted the candidate to undertake the fourth year of the course as a part-time student, within two years after he completed the third year ofthe course.

18 . ......................................................

19. A candidate shall not be admit­ted to the degree of Bachelor of Arts (Asian Studies) with honours unless he has complied with the provisions of these Rules relating to the degree with honours and has reached a standard satisfactory to the Faculty in the units of his course and in any other work that he is required to perform.20. The degree with honours may be awarded with first class honours, second class honours division A, second class honours division B,or third class honours.21. Where a candidate for the degree with honours desires to abandon the course for that degree and to supplicate, or proceed with the course for the pass degree, the Faculty may determine what further work (if any) the candidate is to be required to complete in order to qualify for admission to the pass degree.2 2 . .................................................................

Courses of Study (Degree of Master of Arts (Asian Studies)) RulesIn these Rules, unless the contrary

227

Faculty of Asian Studies

intention appears, 'the Faculty' means the Faculty of Asian Studies.1.(1) Subject to this rule, the Faculty may admit a person as a candidate for the degree of Master of Arts (Asian Studies) if:(a) he has completed the require­ments for the degree of Bachelor of Arts (Asian Studies) with first class honours, second class honours division A or second class honours division B(b) he has:(i) completed the requirements for

the degree of Bachelor of Arts (Asian Studies) with third class honours or for the pass degree of Bachelor of Arts (Asian Studies)

(ii) except where the Faculty other­wise permits, subsequently pursued for one year in the case of a candidate who has completed the requirements for the degree of Bachelor of Arts (Asian Studies) with third class honours or two years in any other case such further studies as the Faculty, on the advice of the head of the appropriate department and having regard to the candidate's qualifications and proposed field of study, determines; and

(iii) at a qualifying examination satisfied the Faculty of his ability to undertake studies for the degree of Master of Arts (Asian Studies); or

(c) he has:(i) completed the requirements for

a degree in a Faculty other than the Faculty of Asian Studies or for a degree of another univer­sity in Australia or of another university outside Australia approved by the Faculty; and

(ii) unless the Faculty otherwise 228

permits, subsequently pursued such further studies as the Faculty determines and satis­fied the Faculty, in such manner as the Faculty deter­mines, of his ability to under­take studies for the degree of Master of Arts (Asian Studies).

(2) A reference in the last preceding sub-rule to the Degree of Bachelor of Arts (Asian Studies) shall be read as including a reference to the Degree of Bachelor of Arts (Oriental Studies) and the reference in sub-paragraph (iii) of paragraph (b) of that sub-rule to the Degree of Master of Arts (Asian Studies) shall be read as including a refer­ence to the Degree of Master of Arts (Oriental Studies).2 . (1) A person may be admitted as a candidate for the degree of Master of Arts (Asian Studies) at anytime in the academic year.(2) At the time of the annual re-enrolment of a candidate, the member of the academic staff appointed to be his supervisor shall report to the Dean of the Faculty on the progress of the candidate.(3) If the Dean, after consultation with the head of the department concerned, considers that a candi­date is not making satisfactory pro­gress, he may recommend to the Faculty the cancellation of the can­didate's enrolment, and the Faculty may direct the cancellation of the candidate's enrolment or take such action as it thinks fit.3 . A candidate shall pursue the required studies and sit for examina­tion in one of the following schools:(a) Asian Civilizations(b) Chinese Studies(c) Japanese Studies(d ) South Asian and Buddhist Studies

Degree Rules

(e) South-East Asian Studies, or(f ) Linguistics.4. (1) Subject to the next succeed­ing sub-rule, a candidate shall pur­sue his studies for not less than one calendar year after admission as a candidate.(2) If a candidate is engaged in employment otherwise than at a university, the Faculty may require him to pursue his studies for not less than two calendar years.5. (1) The form of examination for the degree shall be determined by the Faculty on the recommendation of the head of the appropriate department and may include a thesis.(2) The subject of the thesis shall be approved by the Faculty on the recommendation of the head of the appropriate department not later than the end of the first term of the academic year in which the candi­date begins the studies for the degree.(3) A candidate shall not:(a ) submit a thesis that includes any work that he has submitted for the purposes of a degree or diploma of the Australian National Uni­versity or of any other university or institution of higher learning, being a degree or diploma for which he has already qualified; or(b ) except with the permission of the Faculty, submit a thesis that includes any work that he has sub­mitted for the purposes of a degree or diploma of the Australian National University or of any other university or institution of higher learning, being a degree or diploma for which he has not qualified.6. (1) A thesis or the other results of research or study submitted by a candidate shall be examined by at least two examiners, one of whom

shall be an external examiner.(2) A candidate may be required to pass an oral examination on the subject of his research or study.(3) A candidate who complieswith the requirements of these Rules and whose research or study is adjudged to be of sufficient merit may be admitted to the degree of Master of Arts (Asian Studies).

229

Academic Progress Rules

Academic Progress of Students (Faculty of Asian Studies) Rules1. (1) In these Rules-'enrol' includes re-enrol and 'enrol­ment' includes re-enrolment 'Faculty' means the Faculty of Asian Studies'the Board' means the Board of the School of General Studies(2) A reference in these Rules to a 'course', 'subject' or 'unit' means a course or a subject or a unit of a degree, as the case may be, for which the Faculty is responsible.2. (1) Subject to this rule, where a person-(a) has previously been enrolled in the University or in another uni­versity or institute of higher learning or education; and(b ) has not, in the opinion of the Faculty, achieved satisfactory aca­demic progress in the University or in that other university or institute of higher learning or education, the Faculty may direct that the person-(c) shall not be admitted to a course of study(d ) shall not be permitted to con­tinue in a course of study(e) shall be admitted to or permitted to continue in a course of study only upon specified conditions(f ) shall not be permitted to enrol in a subject or unit, or(g ) shall be permitted to enrol ina subject or unit only upon specified conditions.(2) Before giving a direction under the last preceding sub-rule, the Faculty shall give the person concerned an opportunity of making representations to the Faculty with respect to his enrolment and shall take into account any representa­tions so made to the Faculty by the person.230

(3) A person in respect of whom a direction has been given under sub-rule (1) of this rule may appeal to the Board against the direction.(4) Sub-rules (2) and (3) of this rule do not apply to a person who, before applying for enrolment, had not previously been enrolled in the Faculty or to a person who is per­mitted to enrol in a subject or unit or continue in a course only upon specified conditions.

Criteria adopted in application of the Academic Progress (School of General Studies) Statute and the Academic Pro­gress (Faculty of Asian Studies) Rules1. The Faculty has adopted the following criteria in application of the Academic Progress (School of General Studies) Statute and the Academic Progress (Faculty of Asian Studies) Rules. These criteria are intended as a guide to the practice of the Faculty and the case of each individual person will be considered by the Faculty on its merits.

2. Unsatisfactory Progress Render­ing a Person Liable to be Not Admitted to a Course of StudyThe Faculty may direct that a person shall not be admitted to a course of study if, having been a student of this or another University or institute of higher learning, he has:(i) failed in all the units in which

he enrolled in his previous year(ii) failed in more than half of the

units in which he enrolled in his previous two years, or

(iii) accumulated four or more failures.

3. Unsatisfactory Progress Render­ing a Person Liable to be Not

Academic Progress Rules

Permitted to Continue in a Course of StudyThe Faculty may direct that a person shall not be permitted to continue in a course of study if he has:(i) failed in all the units in which

he enrolled in his previous year(ii) failed in more than half of the

units in which he enrolled in his previous two years, or

(iii) accumulated four or more failures.

4. Unsatisfactory Progress Render­ing a Person Liable to be Admitted to or Permitted to Continue in a Course of Study Only Upon Specified ConditionsThe Faculty may direct that a person under paragraph 2 or 3 above or a person who has failed in three units in his previous year or who has failed in half of the units in which he enrolled in his previous two years shall be admitted to or permitted to continue in a course of study only on specified conditions. These conditions may include:

(i) a condition that he complete two units as a part-time student or three units as a full-time student in the next academic year or be liable to exclusion from the Faculty

(ii) a condition that he pass one or more specified units or be liable to exclusion from the Faculty.

5. Unsatisfactory Progress Render­ing a Person Liable to be Not Permitted to Enrol in a Subjector UnitIn the absence of a recommenda­tion to the contrary from the head of the department concerned the Faculty may direct that a person be not permitted to enrol in a subject or unit if he has, whether in the Faculty or in the University or in

another University or institute of higher learning:

(i) failed in that subject or unit at two annual examinations

(ii) been excluded from examina­tion in that subject or unit, or

(iii) shown signally poor per­formance.

6. Withdrawals from unitsFor the purposes of these criteria, withdrawals after the last day of second term will be counted as failures. Withdrawals during second second term may be counted as failures.

7. ReadmissionAction taken under the Academic Progress Rules is effective for the following academic year and thereafter may be reviewed on the grounds that the person is better able to cope with the course than he was in the first instance. All cases of readmission after one year must be considered by Faculty.

8. Other requirementsOther requirements for enrolling are set out in the Faculty's Degree Rules.

231

Faculty o f Econom ics IBS

C ontentsIT he E c o n o m ic s D egrees 2 3 5

D e ta ils o f u n its a n d b o o k lis ts

A c c o u n t in g and P u b lic F in a n ce 2 4 6

C o m p u te r S c ie n ce 2 5 3

E c o n o m ic H is to ry 2 5 6

E c o n o m ic s 2 6 2

P o lit ic a l S c ie n ce 2 7 4

S ta tis t ic s 2 7 5

D egree R u les 2 8 0

A c a d e m ic P rog ress R u les 2 9 5

The Faculty of EconomicsThe Economics degreesThe Faculty of Economics provides courses and supervision for the degree of Bachelor of Economics which may be taken as a pass degree or a degree with honours; the degree of Master of Economics, by thesis or by course work; the degree of Master of Agricultural Development Economics; the Diploma in Economics; the degree of Doctor of Philosophy.

For the pass degreeAdmission: To be admitted a student must meet the general requirements for admission, details of which are given in the General Information Section of the Hand­book.

Students enrolling in the Faculty for the first time are required to have their choice of units approved at a personal interview with a Student Adviser. Successful applicants will be told by letter of the days set aside for course approval and registration of enrolment.Mathematical requirements: There are prerequisites for admission to the Arts units, Pure Mathe­matics I and General Mathematics: a pass in mathematics at level 2F or better in the New South Wales Higher School Certificate or an equivalent is necessary for admission to Pure Mathematics I, a pass at level 2S or better is necessary for admission to General Mathematics.

Candidates for tne economics degree will find it an advantage to have taken New South Wales Higher School Certificate mathematics at second level or higher, or an equivalent.Other students are advised that

they will need to remedy that deficiency in the long vacation preceding the commencement of their courses: see the introduction to the entry for the Department of Economics.

Candidates for the degree without at least 2S level mathematics or the equivalent will be required to take Statistics A03 (Mathematical Methods) and Statistics A01 (Introductory Statistics) concurrently with Economics I. Candidates with at least 2S level mathematics who do not wish to take mathematical statistics or econometrics in later years will take Statistics A01 and Statistics A02 (Applied Statistics). Students who are strong in mathematics and who wish to take later year units in mathematical statistics or econometrics may omit these first-year Statistics units from their courses, taking a first-year Mathematics unit as preparation for second-year work in Statistics. Students who are not confident of their mathematical ability are normally advised to take the first year in Statistics even if they also take a first-year Mathematics unit. Length of course: The pass degree extends over three calendar years of full-time work, or an appropriately longer time if undertaken part-time with a minimum period of five calendar years. The maximum period for the course is eight calendar years.Course requirements: The course for the degree must be chosen so that the units have a total value of not less than twenty points (a full-year unit has a value of two points and a semester unit has a a value of one point). The course must contain the major in

235

Faculty of Economics

Economics (Economics I, II and III); one other approved major offered by the Faculty of Economics; one of the fo llow ing combinations of Statistics units: Statistics A01 and A02 Statistics A03 and A01 Statistics B01 and

either Statistics B02 or Statistics B03

The remaining units are chosen from among units offered by the Faculty of Economics and by other faculties.Arrangement o f course: Full-time students normally take units w ith a value of eight points in the first year, and take units w ith a value of six points in each of the second and third years. Part-time students normally take units w ith a value of

four points in each year of the course. The Faculty usually requires part-time students to take Economics I in their first year of enrolment and to complete the other first-year units of their approved course before proceeding to later-year units. Intending students are asked to indicate on their application forms the units they have chosen for their full course. At the beginning of the second academic year they w ill have an opportunity to confirm or revise their choice, subject to the limits which w ill have been imposed by their original choice.

The standard course structure for a fu ll-tim e student is given in the fo llow ing table.

1A c a d e m icyear

2

M a jo r

3

M a jo r

4O th e ru n its

5S in g leu n it

1 s t year E c o n o m ic s I 1st yea r u n it in an a p p ro v e d m a jo r

1 st year u n it

1 st ye a r u n its inS ta tis tic s ;o r1 st yea r u n it (see n o te b e lo w )

2 n d yea r E c o n o m ic s II 2 n d yea r u n it (s ) in an a p p ro v e d m a jo r

La ter yea r u n it (s )

3 rd year E c o n o m ic s III 3 rd yea r u n it ( s ) in an a p p ro v e d m a jo r

La te r yea r u n it (s )

P o in ts v a lu e 6 6 6 2

NOTES:1 . For approved majors, see the table in Rule 8 of the Courses of Study (Degree of Bachelor of Economics) Rules below.

2. The other units in Column 4 of the above table may consist(a) entirely of units offered by theFaculty of Economics, or236

(b ) entirely of units offered by another Faculty, or(c) a combination of units offered by the Faculty of Economics and units offered by another faculty.

3. In Column 5, a student who does not take the first-year units in Statistics and who intends to take a Mathematics unit in first year

The Economics Degree

followed by second-year Statistics units, takes another full first-year unit in place of the first year of Statistics.4. No more than three units offered by the Department of Political Science may be included in an approved course (unless the student is taking the honours degree course in Political Science, when he must take four units of Political Science) and where three such units are included no unit offered by a depart­ment outside the Faculty may be included in the course except Pure Mathematics I or General Mathematics.5. Students must take at least four first-year units, but not more than four (in addition to Pure Mathema­tics I if taken). No more than one tirst-year unit may normally be taken from another faculty, but Pure Mathematics I, General Mathematics and Applied Mathematics I are not counted for this purpose.6. A full list of units offered by departments in the Faculty of Economics is given in the tablein Rule 7 of the Courses of Study Rules. In proposing a course stu­dents should check from that table that they will have the appropriate corequisites or prerequisities for later-year units. In particular it should be noted that there is a mathematics prerequisite (usually Pure Mathematics I, but in some cases Applied Mathematics I and General Mathematics are alter­natives) for the following units: second and third-year Statistics units, Computer Science C01 and C02, Mathematical Economics IA, IB, 11A and MB. For Statistics C01 and C02 (third-year Mathematical

Statistics) Pure Mathematics II is also a prerequisite.7. Status may be granted in the B.Ec. course to graduates for three or four full-year units, depending on their previous studies. See also below for status towards the honours course for graduates in fields other than Economics. Enquiries concerning status should be directed to the Faculty Secretary or the Sub-Dean.Units available in 1972: The following full-year and semester units will not be offered in 1972: Agricultural Production and Prices Political Communication Statistics C05 and C05 (Honours). The semester unit Economic Policy will be offered if staff are avail­able to teach it.

The semester in which semester units are expected to be taught is shown under the Details of Units in the entry for each department.Semester dates: Semester dates for 1972 are as shown in the list of Important Dates in 1972 at the beginning of this Handbook.Withdrawal without failure: Students who withdraw from units by the following dates will not be considered to have failed in the units concerned, except that a student who repeatedly withdraws from a unit may be considered to have failed in that unit:Full-year units:

First semester units:

Second semester units:

The last day of second term. The last day of first term.The first day of third term.

Enrolment in units at honours level: Students who hope to enrol in the fourth honours year of one of the honours courses offered by the

237

Faculty of Economics

Faculty will wish to enrol in some at least of their units at honours level—see 'The degree with hon­ours' below. Other students may wish to take some units at honours level. There is no separate honours course in Accounting I, first- year Statistics units, or in some later-year units in the Department of Economics. Enrolment at honours level in Economics I and Economic History I is arranged between the Depart­ment and the student during first term. Students wishing to take Pure Mathematics I (Honours) should consult the Department before the start of lectures. Enrol­ment at honours level in later years in some units (but not the Economics major) is dependent on the student having reached a certain standard in earlier units offered by the department. Examination gradings: In units for which it is possible to enrol at either pass or honours level, the following gradings apply:Pass enrolment in unit:

FailPassPass with Merit

Honours enrolment in unit:Fail Pass Credit Distinction High Distinction

Units in which there are no separate honours classes, and for which it is therefore not possible to enrol for honours, are graded through the full range of gradings (excluding Pass with Merit).Units from other faculties: In addition to the restrictions mentioned above, the units from other faculties

which may be included in an approved course are also subject to any prescribed prerequisite, any restriction which may arise from the time-table and any departmental limitation of enrolment.

Units from other faculties are taken and examined in accordance with the Courses of Study Rules of the faculty concerned. The points value of full-year and semester units of other faculties is normally (but not always) the value of units of similar weight in the Faculty of Economics.Law subjects: Students may take up to four Law subjects, including Legal Method (value two points), and receive credit for them towards the degree of Bachelor of Eco­nomics for up to six points. From 1 972 the Faculty of Law will limit the number of candidates for the degree of Bachelor of Economics who will be admitted to Legal Method. The other subjects may be chosen from those listed in the following table, although occasionally permission may be given for the inclusion of some other Law subject. See also the entry for the Department of Accounting and Public Finance.

238

The Economics Degree

S u b je c tP o in ts

v a lu e P re re q u is ite

A d m in is tra t iv e L a w 14

C o m m e rc ia l L a w 14 C o n tra c ts

C o m p a n y L a w 14 C o n tra c ts ( I t is a lso d e s ira b le th a t s tu d e n ts s h o u ld s tu d y C o m m e rc ia l L a w c o n c u rre n tly w ith C o m p a n y L a w .)

C o n tra c ts 2

In te rn a tio n a l L a w 14 A d m in is tra t iv e L a w

L a b o u r R e la tio n s 14

Law o f E m p lo y m e n t 14

Law o f In d u s tr ia l P ro p e rty 14

La w o f In te rn a tio n a l B us iness T ra n s a c tio n s 14 C o m m e rc ia l L a w

La w o f In te rn a t io n a l O rg a n is a tio n s 14

S o v ie t L a w 14

T a x a tio n 14 A c c o u n t in g I

The L e g is la t iv e P rocess 14

The degree w ith honoursThe course for the degree of Bachelor of Economics with honours is a four-year course for full-time students. During the first three years, students take the pass course, with additional honours work in the more important units. Admission to the fourth year depends on the achievement of a sufficiently high standard, including the attainment of distinction level in the more important units, during the first three years of the course. Admission to the fourth honours year is at the discretion of the head of the relevant department and the Faculty. Students enrolled in the Faculty of Economics are not formally enrolled in the course for the degree with honours until

their fourth honours year, but students hoping to undertake the fourth honours year should consult a Student Adviser concerning the general structure of their courses and the units for which they should enrol in the first year.

In the fourth honours year students specialise in one of the following honours courses: Accounting, Economic History, Economics, Political Science, Public Finance or Statistics. In general the year consists of advanced work in the chosen subject together with a thesis and other work as prescribed by the head of the department.

During the first three years, students take the pass course in­cluding the compulsory units

239

VFaculty ot Economics

(Economics I, II. and III, first or second-year Statistics) together with such additional honours work in the more important units as may be prescribed.

The following are the basic requirements for admission to the fourth year in the honours courses for the degree of Bachelor of Economics:Accounting: Major in Economics, first or second-year Statistics, a major in Accounting, additional honours classes.Economic History: Major in Econo­mics, first or second-year Statistics, major in Economic History, additional honours classes. Economics: Major in Economics (with additional honours classes), first or second-year Statistics, and (except with the permission of the head of the department) Mathe­matics for Economists or another mathematics unit.Political Science: Major in Econo­mics, first or second-year Statistics, Political Science I (Honours) and II (Honours) and two third-year Political Science options (Honours). Public Finance: Major in Economics, first or second-year Statistics, Welfare and Taxation, Expenditure and Fiscal Institutions, additional honours classes.Statistics: In the fourth honours year students may specialise in either mathematical statistics or econometrics, for which the requirements are as follows:Mathematical statistics: Major in Economics, Pure Mathematics I,II and III preferably at honours level, Statistics B01 (Honours) and B02 (Honours), Statistics C01 (Honours) and C02 (Honours).

This course involves a heavy third year.Econometrics: Major in Economics, Pure Mathematics I and II preferably at honours level,Statistics B01 (Honours) and B03 (Honours), and Statistics C05 (Honours).

Graduates of a faculty other than Economics in this or another University who have been admitted to status in the course for the pass degree of Bachelor of Economics may be admitted to the fourth honours year of the degree of Bachelor of Economics with honours after satisfactorily com­pleting at the required standard the following units: Economics I, II and III, and one other approved unit, or, where the Faculty is willing to recognise previous work in economics, four approved units. Students interested in such a course should initially propose a full course for the pass degree and should consult the Sub-Dean of the Faculty or the Faculty Secretary.

Com bined course in Economics and LawA student wishing to take a com­bined course leading to the degrees of Bachelor of Economics and Bachelor of Laws must submit details of his proposed course to both Faculties.

Full-time students must spend a minimum of five years and part-time students a minimum of eight years to complete a combined course. The length of the combined course renders part-time study inadvisable and the Faculties will examine such applications carefully.

The combined course consists of all the Law subjects prescribed for the degree of Bachelor of Laws,

240

The Economics Degree1

with the exception of two optional subjects, together with —(i) the major in Economics

(Economics I, II and III); and(ii) either (a) an additional major

from those offered by the Faculty of Economics and listed in the Courses of Study (Degree of Bachelor of Economics) Rules; or(b) two first-year semester units in Statistics and a sequence of two full-year units (or their equivalent in semester units) approved by the Faculty of Economics.

Economics I should be attempted in the first year of the course, together with one other first-year unit.

Where a student chooses to take the first-year semester units in Statistics and a sequence of two units, the Faculty of Economics may permit him to take the first part of that sequence before he takes the Statistics units. Such sequences will normally contain one of the first-year units Accounting I, Economic History I, Political Science I, Pure Mathematics I or General Mathematics, although in exceptional cases the Faculty of Economics may authorise a sequence not containing one of these. Students who have taken Political Science I as the first unit in the sequence may take one of Political Science II, Political Sociology and Public Policy and Administration to complete the sequence. Students who have taken one of the other first-year units may complete the sequence with any later-year unit(s) for which they have the prerequisites, whether in the same field as the first-year unit or not. The table in

Rule 7 (4) of the Courses of Study (Degree of Bachelor of Economics) Rules below sets out the pre­requisites for admission to later- year units.

Under the standard pattern for the combined course a student may graduate in economics at the end of his third year, provided he has completed the six Economics units (or their equivalent in semester units) and seven Law subjects (normally the four Law subjects of the first year and three of the compulsory subjects of the second year of the course for the degree of Bachelor of Laws).He may graduate in Law two years later by completing the one remain­ing compulsory second-year Law subject, the third-year Law subjects with the exception of one optional subject and the fourth-year Law subjects of the course for the degree of Bachelor of Laws.

The Faculty of Law will advise each student on the desirable ordering of the Law subjects in the combined course after the end of the second year.

Students are informed that their academic progress in the combined course will be reviewed by both Faculties at least once each year, usually in December, and that unsatisfactory progress in the combined course may lead to their exclusion from one or both Faculties.

The following are the standard patterns of the combined Economics/ Law course. Other combined course structures may be approved, after they have been considered by both Faculties.

241

rFaculty of Economics

I

1st year Economics I 2 first-year semester units in Statistics

Legal Method Legal and Consti­tutional History

2nd year Economics II 1 st unit in an approved sequence of 2

Contracts Criminal Law andProcedure

3rd year Economics III 2nd unit in an approved sequence of 2

3 subjects specified for the 2nd year of the LLB course

4th year 1 remaining compulsory subject of the 2nd year of the LLB course; and All subjects specified for the 3rd year of the LLB course with the exception of an optional subject.

5th year All subjects specified for the 4th year of the LLB course.

II

1 st year Economics I 1 st unit in an approved BEc major

Legal Method Legal and Consti­tutional History

2nd year Economics II 2nd unit in an approved BEc major

Contracts Criminal Law andProcedure

3rd year Economics III 3rd unit in an approved BEc major

3 subjects specified for the 2nd year of the LLB course

4th year 1 remaining subject of the 2nd year of the LLB course; andAll subjects specified for the 3rd year of the LLB course with the exceptionof an optional subject

5th year All subjects specified for the 4th year of the LLB course.

Combined honours course in Economics and LawStudents who intend to proceed to the fourth honours year for the degree of Bachelor of Economics with honours, must consult with the the Sub-Dean of the Faculty of Economics before the beginning of first term in the year in which they first enrol in the combined course.

Some heads of departments may require that certain units or subjects, 242

in addition to an appropriate major, be completed before the candidate is admitted to the honours year in the Faculty of Economics. Con­sequently, some students may be required to complete four years, instead of three years, before they qualify for admission to that honours year.

In particular, students are re­minded that honours candidates in the Department of Economics are required to have taken Mathematics

The Economics Degree

for Economists or another mathe­matics unit, except with the per­mission of the head of the department. Such a unit may be taken as part of an approved major or as part of an approved sequence of two units.

The prescriptions for the degree of Bachelor of Laws with honours appear under the Faculty of Law.

Combined course in Economics and Asian StudiesDuring 1971 discussions have taken place between the Faculties of Economics and Asian Studies on the details of a combined course leading to the degrees of Bachelor of Economics and Bachelor of Arts (Asian Studies). Interested students should consult the Faculty Secretaries or the Sub-Deans of both Faculties.

The Diploma in EconomicsFaculty has recently introduced in the Department of Economics a course of study leading to the Diploma in Economics. The course is of one year's duration at fourth- year level and will be available to honours graduates in Economics and must be taken as a full-time course except with the permission of the Head of the Department of Economics, which will only be granted in exceptional circum­stances. Candidates who obtain the Diploma in Economics at a level at least equivalent to upper second class honours will be eligible for consideration for admission to a course for the degree of Master of Economics.

For the degree of Master of EconomicsGraduates wishing to enrol for the degree of Master of Economics

should first consult with the head of the department in which they wish to study for the degree.

In order to be eligible for con­sideration for admission as a candidate for the degree of Master of Economics, a student must have completed either (a) the course for the degree of Bachelor of Econo­mics with first class or upper second class honours, or an equivalent degree from another university approved by the Faculty; or (b) the course for the degree of Bachelor of Economics with a lower grade of honours or as a pass degree, or an equivalent degree from another university approved by the Faculty.A student in category (b ) must also complete a preliminary course of study at a high level in fields prescribed by the head of the department, over a period of from one to two years. Before admission to a preliminary course a student who has a pass degree of in­sufficient quality will be required to take two advanced units from those offered for the degree of Bachelor of Economics at honours level over a period of one calendar year.

A more detailed paper concerning admission to the degree of Master of Economics and other post­graduate matters is available from the Faculty office.Degree of Master of Economics by research and thesis In all departments candidates may proceed to the degree of Master of Economics by research and thesis. They must undertake study as prescribed by the Head of the Department concerned for a period of at least one year as a full-time student or two years as a part-time student and must present a satis­factory thesis of no more than

243

Faculty of Economics

60,000 words on a topic approved by the Faculty of Economics. A candidate may also be required to undergo an oral examination on the subject of his thesis.

A candidate must enrol at the beginning of each year, both during the period leading up to the preliminary examination and during his candidature for the degree.

A copy of the rules for the format of theses may be obtained from the Faculty office.Degree of Master of Economics by course work and examination The degree of Master of Economics may also be taken by course work and written examination: see entry for the Department of Economics. Further information concerning the course is available from the Faculty office.

For the degree of Master of Agricultural Development Economics (by course work)It is hoped that this new one-year course will be offered for the first time in 1 972. Only full-time students will be admitted. The course is directed towards young administrators and research workers now employed in agricultural development institutions in the South-East Asian and Pacific areas. However, a limited number of Australian graduates can also be accommodated.

Overseas applicants may be eligible for fellowships, and should enquire of the appropriate section of their own government concern­ing possible assistance. Applicants from within Australia may qualify for a University Masters Degree Scholarship or a Commonwealth Postgraduate Course Award.

Prerequisites: A candidate may be admitted by the Faculty to the course if he has a first or upper second class honours degree in economics, agricultural science, or a closely allied subject from an approved university, each degree including a major in agricultural economics. He will be given preference if he has had several years of field experience in agricultural development. A person whose mother tongue is not English will be required to pass a language test.Syllabus: The course will involve a full program of lectures and seminars, some field exercises and a sub-thesis. The main topics covered include:(a) The economics of agricultural production and marketing(b) statistical methods(c) farm management(d) agricultural development, and(e) data collection and analysis. Courses will be given by members of various University departments, and by visitors from other universities and institutions. Examinations: There will be both written and oral examinations at the conclusion of studies. The presentation of a series of papers throughout the year, and of a sub-thesis towards the end of the course, will also be required.

Further details are available from the Faculty Office.

For the degree of Doctor of PhilosophyAll departments in the Faculty offer supervision for candidates under­taking a course leading to the degree of Doctor of Philosophy in fields within the research interests

244

The Economics Degree

of the departments. Applicants for admission to the course for the degree of Doctor of Philosophy should have capacity for research and should hold, or be eligible for the award of a bachelor's degree with at least upper second class honours or a master's degree, or equivalent, from a recognised University.

245

Details of units and book lists

Accounting and Public Finance

R. L. M athew s, BCom (M elb) Professor and Head of the Department

IntroductionAccounting may be studied for the pass degree either as a single first- year unit or as a major sequence consisting of Accounting I, Accounting II and tw o semester units chosen from:(a) Financial Accounting Theory(b) Company Finance(c) Accounting Control(d) Public Authority Accounting(e) National Economic Accounting.

Students wishing to specialise inpublic finance may take a major sequence consisting of Accounting I and four semester units:(a) Public Authority Accounting(b ) National Economic Accounting(c) Welfare and Taxation(d) Expenditure and Fiscal Institutions.

The latter tw o units may also be combined w ith other units offered in the Faculty to form a composite major as set out in Group 9 of Rule 8 of the Courses of Study (Degree of Bachelor of Economics) Rules.

Accounting I considers accounting as an information system concerned w ith recording, measuring and interpreting economic transactions and activities. Accounting II is a course in management accounting, integrated w ith m icro-economic theory studied in Economics II.A student may enrol for one or more of the third-year semester units for which he has passed the prerequisite units and which are

available to him under the degree rules. Students w ishing to specialise in accounting may enrol for four semester units in accounting.

Financial accounting theory is an advanced course in income measurement, valuation theory and financial reporting, while company finance is especially concerned w ith the theory of financial management.

Accounting control is a semester course in auditing and information systems relevant to management decision-making.

The courses in public authority accounting and national accounting are concerned w ith the role of accounting in providing govern­ments w ith the information they need to manage their own affairs and to control the economy.

Two semester units are offered in public finance:(a) Welfare and Taxation and(b ) Expenditure and Fiscal Institutions.

These courses are concerned chiefly w ith taxation theory and policy, public expenditure theory and policy and Commonwealth- State financial relations.

Accounting IV (Honours) is the fourth-year course for students taking the honours degree w ho wish to specialise in accounting. Public Finance IV (Honours) is the fourth- year course for those who wish to specialise in public finance.

Accounting is concerned w ith the recording and analysis of the econ­omic transactions of business enter­prises, public authorities and the national economy, in order to pro­vide information that may be used as a basis for planning, decision­making and control. Accounting techniques often need to be applied

246

Accounting and Public Finance

in conjunction with other techni­ques of quantitative analysis, notably those of a statistical and mathematical nature (including the use of computers). Students enrol­ling in Accounting I will, as part of the requirements for the degree of Bachelor of Economics, be required to take the first-year course in Statistics. Those planning to major in accounting should consider the desirability of taking units in Mathematics and Computer Science.

The accounting major has been designed to provide a rigorous educational preparation for the accountancy profession and for a career in business management or public financial administration.

To obtain admission to the accountancy profession, students must seek membership of either the Australian Society of Accountants or The Institute of Chartered Accountants in Australia. Full details of the membership require­ments of both professional bodies should be obtained direct from them. Their general requirements are as follows:Australian Society o f Accountants. Students who have completed an approved course will be admitted to provisional membership, without further examination. For students in this Faculty, it is expected that the approved course will require completion of an accounting sequence which includes Financial Accounting Theory, Company Finance and Accounting Control, and a sequence of units offered by the Faculty of Law including Company Law, and Taxation.

The institute o f Chartered Accountants in Australia.Students who have completed an approved course will be required also to complete a professional qualifying year in the service of a practising member of the Institute.At the end of that qualifying year, there will be an examination con­ducted by the Institute. The requirements of an approved course for students in this Faculty have not yet been definitely determined, but it is expected they will be similar to those established by the Society (see above).

Students who intend to enter the accountancy profession will find it difficult to fit all the above requirements satisfactorily into a well-rounded degree course, confined to units having a value of 20 points. The requirements for completion of units offered by the Faculty of Law may emphasise, for some students, the merit of under­taking the combined course in Economics and Law. For others, it may appear preferable to obtain some of the professional require­ments by taking non-degree units after completion of the degree of Bachelor of Economics or by taking courses offered at the Canberra College of Advanced Education. All students intending to enter the accountancy profession should seek specific advice on the structure of their courses from members of this Department through the Sub-Dean

A graduate who has obtained a bachelor's degree in economics or commerce at a recognised university may enrol for the degree of Master of Economics in accounting or public finance. This involves writing a research thesis under the super-

247

Faculty of Economics

vision of a member of the Depart­ment. A first or good second class honours graduate is permitted to proceed immediately to work on the thesis, but other students are required to have completed, at an approved standard, a qualifying course consisting of the fourth- year program in accounting or public finance and economic theory. Admission to the qualifying course is itself dependent on satisfactory performance in third-year distinction units. The qualifying course may be taken by part-time students over two years.

In 1972 the degree of Master of Economics may also be taken by examination following a course work program in Economic Policy which includes one unit offered by the Department of Accounting and Public Finance, viz. Public Expenditure Policy. Admission requirements are generally similar to those for the degree of Master of Economics by thesis, but candidature must be approved by the Committee of Graduate Studies in Economics.

Suitably qualified graduates may also undertake studies and research in accounting or public finance leading to the degree of Doctor of Philosophy.

Failure to complete essays, class work and assignments in any unit, or unsatisfactory progress in examinations during the year, may result in a student's exclusion from the course or from the final examination.

For the pass degree Accounting I (2 points)(Accounting: a Measurement System)Full year.248

Two lectures and one tutorial (of ninety minutes) a week throughout the year, together with practical work as prescribed.Syllabus: Relationship of accounting to economic activity; values in accounting:— historical or realised value, present (discounted) value, current value, index-adjusted trans­action values; matching values to events; designing a simple accounting system based on duality: — organising information inputs, processing, classifying and aggre­gating accounting data; simple information outputs:— non-trading organisations, businesses, divisional activities within organisations; measuring and reporting company financial performance, including case studies of contemporary Australian company financial reports.Prescribed Books□ Bruns, William J., Jr., Introduc­tion to Accounting: Economic Measurement for Decisions, Addison-Wesley.□ Mathews, R. L, The Accounting Framework, Cheshire.Examination: Two three-hour papers, one at the end of each semester. Performance in tutorial assignments, essays and other class work will be taken into account in the examinations.

Accounting II (2 points)(Management Accounting)Full year.Two lectures and one tutorial a week throughout the year, together with practical work as prescribed. Prerequisites: Accounting I must be passed before this unit is taken. Economics II must be passed before or taken concurrently with Account­ing II.

Accounting and Public Finance

Syllabus(a) Cost accounting for inventory valuation and income measure­ment: cost terminology; absorption costing and variable costing; process costing; job costing; costing of joint products and by-products.(b ) Cost accounting as an aid to management planning and control: cost-volume profit relationships; budgeting; standard costs; divisionalised performance; relevant costs for decision making; control of non-manufacturing costs. Integrated with those topics will be various aspects of modern organisation theory.Prescribed Books□ Bierman, H. & Smidt, S., The Capital Budgeting System, 2nd ed., Collier-Macmillan.□ Horngren, C. T., Cost Accounting: A Managerial Emphasis, 2nd ed., Prentice-Hall.Examination: Two three-hour papers, one at the end of each semester. Performance in tutorial assignments and essays will be taken into account in the examinations.

Financial Accounting Theory(7 point)First semester.Two lectures and one tutorial a week together with practical work as prescribed.Prerequisite: Accounting II must be passed before this unit is taken. Syllabus: Concepts of income and valuation in economics and accounting; accounting in condi­tions of price instability; corporate financial measurement and repor­ting.

Prescribed Book□ Hendriksen, E. S., Accounting Theory, Irwin.Examination: One two-hour paper. Performance in tutorial assignments, essays and other class work will be taken into account in the examination.

Company Finance (7 point)Second semester.Two lectures and one tutorial a week, together with practical work as prescribed.Prerequisite: Accounting II must be passed before this unit is taken. Syllabus: Financial management; the cost of capital; the capital budgeting decision; investment management.Prescribed Books□ Van Horne, J. C., Financial Management and Policy, Prentice- Hall.□ Solomon, E., The Theory of Financial Management, Columbia UP.Examination: One two-hour paper.Performance in tutorial assign­ments, essays and other class work will be taken into account in the examination.

Accounting Control (7 point) Second semester.Two lectures and one tutorial a week, together with practical work as prescribed.Prerequisite: Accounting II must be passed before or taken concurrently with this unit.Syllabus: Development, objectives and nature of present auditing practice; rights, duties and liabilities of company auditors; internal control; audit evidence,

249

Faculty of Economics

procedures and reports; recent developments and theories of auditing; nature and design of accounting information systems; information systems relevant to management decision making. Prescribed Books: To be notified. Examination: One two-hour paper. Performance in tutorial assignments, essays and other class work will be taken into account in the examination.

Public A u tho rity A ccounting(7 point)First semester.Two lectures and one tutorial a week together with practical work as prescribed.Prerequisite: Accounting I must be passed before this unit is taken. Syllabus: Parliamentary control of expenditure in Great Britain and Australia; the budgetary process in the United States; the fund accounting system; reform of existing accountability systems; functional and economic classifi­cation of government transactions; planning-programming-budgeting systems; the accounts of public enterprises; government accounts and national accounting.Prescribed Books□ Commonwealth of Australia, Budget Speech and Related Docu­ments, Cwlth Govt Printer, Canberra.□ Jay, W. R. C. & Mathews, R. L. (eds.), Government Accounting in Australia, Cheshire.□ Mathews, R. L, Accounting for Economists, pt 3, Cheshire.□ UN Department of Economic Affairs, Budgetary Structure and Classification of Government Accounts.

□ UN Department of Economic and Social Affairs, A Manual for Government Accounting. Examination: One three-hour paper. Performance in tutorial assignments, essays and other class work will be taken into account in the examination.

N ational Economic A ccounting(7 point)Second semester.Two lectures and one tutorial a week together with practical work as prescribed.Prerequisite: Accounting I must be passed before this unit is taken. Syllabus:(a) National income and expenditure accounts: The Keynesian identities; components of aggregate expenditure, production and income; economic activity accounts; sectorising the economy; balance of payments data; gross product at constant prices; economic forecasting; relevance of national accounting data to economic policy problems.(b ) Other national accounting systems: Input-output tables; flow of funds accounts; national balance sheets and national wealth state­ments; uses of these national accounting systems; integration of national accounting systems. Prescribed Books□ Commonwealth of Australia, Australian National Accounts (last issue), Cwlth Govt Printer, Canberra.□ Commonwealth Bureau of Census and Statistics, Balance of Payments (last issue), Cwlth Govt Printer, Canberra.□ Commonwealth Bureau of Cen­sus and Statistics, Input-Output Tables 1 962-63.

250

Accounting and Public Finance

□ Holmes, A. S., Flow-of-funds, Australia. 1953-54 to 1961-62, Reserve Bank of Australia.□ Mathews, R. L, Accounting for Economists, pt 3, Cheshire.□ Abraham, W. I., National income and Economic Accounting,Prentice- Hall.Examination: One three-hour paper. Performance in tutorial assignments, essays and other class work will be taken into account in the examination.

W elfare and Taxation (7 point) Second semester.Two lectures and one tutorial a week together with written work as prescribed.Prerequisite: Economics II is a pre­requisite for this unit, but under special circumstances, with the approval of the Head of the Depart­ment, Economics II and Welfare and Taxation may be taken concurrently. Syllabus: Old and new welfare theories; the post-Keynesian frame­work of objectives; taxation theory and policy for equity, allocation and stabilisation.Preliminary Reading□ Eckstein, O., Public Finance, Prentice-Hall.Prescribed Books□ Musgrave, R. A., The Theory of Public Finance, McGraw-Hill.□ Simons, H. C., Personal income Taxation, Chicago UP.Examination: One two-hour paper. Performance in essays and class work will be taken into account in the examination.

Expenditure and Fiscal Institutions (7 point)First semester.Two lectures and one tutorial a

week together with written work as prescribed.Prerequisite: Economics II is a pre­requisite for this unit, but under special circumstances, with the approval of the Head of the Depart­ment, Economics II and Expenditure and Fiscal Institutions may be taken concurrently.Syllabus: The theory of public expenditure; public investment criteria; government expenditure policy with special reference to public investment and social services; problems of federal finance with special reference to Australian Commonwealth-State fiscal rela­tions.Prescribed Books□ Commonwealth Grants Commis­sion, latest report, Cwlth Govt Printer, Canberra.□ Commonwealth of Australia,Dept of the Treasury, Common­wealth Payments to or for the States, latest report. Cwlth Govt Printer, Canberra.□ Mathews, R., Public Investment in Australia, Cheshire.Examination: One three-hour paper. Performance in essays and class work will be taken into account in the examination.

For the degree w ith honoursDetails of honours units offered in the Department and of the final honours courses Accounting IV (Honours) and Public Finance IV (Honours) are given below. Permission to attempt honours units or the final honours courses will be given only to students who have performed well in earlier years.

251

Faculty of Economics

Accounting II (Honours)(2 points)Full year.Lectures and tutorials as for the pass unit with one additional honours class a week throughout the year. Honours candidates will undertake written work additional to that for the pass unit.Syllabus: As for the pass degree with additional subject matter as prescribed.Prescribed books: As for the pass degree with additional reading as prescribed.Examination: Two three-hour papers as for the pass degree and a third two-hour paper upon the subject matter of the honours work.

Financial Accounting Theory (Honours)(7 point)First semester.

Company Finance (Honours)(7 point)Second semester.

Public A uthority Accounting (Honours)(7 point)First semester.

National Economic Accounting (Honours)(7 point)Second semester.

W elfare and Taxation (Honours)(7 point)Second semester.

Expenditure and Fiscal Institutions (Honours)(7 point)First semester.In each of these semester units,

lectures and tutorials will be as for the pass unit with one additional honours class a week throughout the semester. Additional subject matter and reading will be pre­scribed and written work additional to that for the pass unit will be required.Examination: One three-hour paper for each of these semester units. Performance in class work will be taken into account in the examination.

Accounting IV (Honours)This course, which involves about nine hours a week of lectures and seminars throughout the year, constitutes the fourth-year course for honours degree students specialising in accounting. Admission to the Accounting IV (Honours) course will be restricted to students who, having completed a major in accounting or a public finance specialisation, have obtained the Faculty's approval to study for the honours degree. Syllabus:(a) Five approved fourth-year honours units chosen from those available in Accounting IV (Honours), Public Finance IV (Honours) and Economics IV (Honours). The semester units expected to be available in Accounting IV (Honours) are: accounting measurement theory; accounting and information systems; behavioural effects of accounting information; the theory of financial management; planning­programming-budgeting systems; national accounting systems.(b) two approved semester units offered for the pass degree (at honours level) or one approved full-year unit.

252

Com puter Science

(c) a short thesis on a topic approved by the Head of the Department.Books: To be prescribed. Examination: To be prescribed. The thesis assignment forms part of the examination.

Public Finance IV (Honours)This course, which involves about nine hours a week of lectures and seminars throughout the year, constitutes the fourth-year course for honours degree students specialising in public finance. Admission to the course will be restricted to students who, having completed the economics major and the pass degree courses (at honours level) in Welfare and Taxation and Expenditure and Fiscal Institutions, have obtained the Faculty's approval to study for the honours degree.Syllabus:(a) Two semester units, public finance theory and applied public finance(b ) three approved semester units chosen from Economics IV (Honours), Accounting IV (Honours) or other fourth-year honours courses offered in the Faculty(c) two approved semester units offered for the pass degree (at honours level) or one approved full-year unit(d) a short thesis on a topic approved by the Head of the Department.Books: To be prescribed. Examination: To be prescribed.The thesis assignment forms part of the examination.

IntroductionFor the first time, in 1972, five semester units in Computer Science, two at second-year level and three at third-year level, will be offered for inclusion in degree courses in the Faculties of Arts, Economics and Science. Computer Science I, a full-year unit offered in 1971 at second-year level, will be replaced by the two semester units Computer Science B01 and Computer Science B02. Computer Science B01 is to be offered both as a service course for those students desiring only a working knowledge of computer concepts, programming and applications and also as a broad general introduction to Computer Science for those who will continue studies in the area. Computer Science B02 has a considerable theoretical content and is meant both as an introduction to subjects of a more specialised nature than those of Computer Science B01 and as a sound basis for the more advanced courses at third-year level. Three advanced semester courses in Computer Science will be offered at third-year level. In addition, honours level courses will be offered in the sense that additional work equivalent to one lecture per week will be expected of students taking these options.In general, Computer Science C02 and Computer Science C03 are to be taken as alternatives in the second part of the year.

For inclusion of Computer Science units in the course structure for the degree of Bachelor of Economics for various majors see the Courses of Study (Degree of Bachelor of Economics) Rules (table for Rule 8). For inclusion of

253

Faculty of Economics

Computer Science units in the course structures for the degrees of Bachelor of Arts and Bachelor of Science refer to the Arts and Science sections of the Handbook, respectively.

Computer Science B01 (7 point)(Introduction to Computer Science) First semester.

Three lectures and one tutorial a week plus specified exercises.Prerequisite: (for inclusion in the Economics degree)Pure Mathematics I or Applied Mathematics I or General Mathematics or Statistics A01 and Statistics A02 or Statistics A03 and Statistics A01.Syllabus: Basic machine organisation, algorithms and flow charts, FORTRAN language, numerical methods, applications. Prescribed Books□ McCracken, D. D., A Guide to Fortran IV Programming, Wiley.□ Rice, J. K. & Rice, J. R., Introduction to Computer Science, Holt, Rinehart & Winston. Examination: One three-hour paper and assessment of specified exercises.

Computer Science B02 (7 point) (Computers: Hardware. Software and Theory )Second semester.

Three lectures and one tutorial a week plus specified exercises.Prerequisite: (for inclusion in the Economics degree)Pure Mathematics I or Applied Mathematics I or General Mathematics or Statistics A01 and Statistics A02 or Statistics

A03 and Statistics A01 and Computer Science B01, or with the approval of the Head of Department.Syllabus: Boolean algebra and minimisation theory, computer arithmetic units, machine architecture, introduction to finite state machines and Turing machines, computer systems, hybrid computing, applications.Prescribed Books□ Gill, A., Introduction to the Theory of Finite-State Machines, McGraw-Hill.□ Minski, M. L, Computation:Finite and Infinite Machines, Prentice-Hall.Examination: One three-hour paper and assessment of specified exercises.

Computer Science C01 (7 point)(Advanced Computer Systems)First semester.

Three lectures and two tutorials a week plus specified work during semester.Prerequisite: Computer Science B01 and Computer Science B02 (or with the approval of the Head of Department, Computer Science B02) and Pure Mathematics I, or with the approval of Head of Department.Syllabus: Assembly language, software structures, hardware configuration, compiler theory, comparison of computer languages, overall computer system design, information systems, applications..Prescribed Books: To be advised. Examination: One three-hour paper, assessment of specified work during semester.

254

Computer Science

Computer Science C02 (/ point) (Computer Methods)Second semester.

Three lectures and two tutorials a week plus specified work during semester.Prerequisite: Computer Science C01.Syllabus: Iterative methods, file handling, linear programming, optimisation techniques, Monte Carlo methods, simulation, applications.Prescribed Books: To be advised. Examination: One three-hour paper and assessment of specified work during semester.

Computer Science C03 (/ point) (Learning Systems and Automata Theory)Second semester.

Three lectures and two tutorials a week plus specified work during semester.Prerequisite: Computer Science C01.Syllabus: Automata theory,Turing machines, adaptive mechanisms, pattern recognition, picture processing, interactive graphics, game playing, applications.Prescribed Books□ Gill, A., Introduction to the Theory of Finite-State Machines, McGraw-Hill.□ Minski, M. L., Computation:Finite and Infinite Machines, Prentice-Hall.One book title to be advised. Examination: One three-hour paper and assessment of specified work during semester.

Computer Science C01 (Honours)First semester.

Computer Science C01 plus additional work equivalent to one lecture per week.

Computer Science C02 (Honours)Second semester.

Computer Science C02 plus additional work equivalent to one lecture per week.

Computer Science C03 (Honours)Second semester.

Computer Science C03 plus additional work equivalent to one lecture per week.Note: Computer Science C02 and Computer Science C03 are second semester alternatives and are not normally taken concurrently.

255

Economic History

G. S. L. Tucker, BCom (Melb), PhD (Cantab)Professor and Head of the Department

IntroductionEconomic history and history of economic thought can be studied either in the Faculty of Economics or in the Faculty of Arts. Economic History I can be taken as a single unit or as the first part of a wider study of the subject. Students taking the Economic History major proceed to Economic History II, and may choose as the third part of the sequence either (a) two of the following three semester units, The Economic Development of Modern Japan, Recent Economic Experience in Europe and North America, Problems of Under­development: India, or (b) History of Economic Thought. (Note, however, that prerequisites differ for these two alternatives.)

Although economic history is deserving of study in its own right, it may be particularly useful to those whose other interests lie in economics, history, or political theory and organisation. Clearly it is a basic part of general history; at the same time it helps to give per­spective and depth to other social sciences. Thus, for example, it has an important role to play in relation to economics, where it throws light on modern forms of economic organisation, economic problems and policies by tracing the recent processes of growth out of which they have evolved. In fact, the line of demarcation between economics and economic history has become increasingly difficult to define. This has followed from the resurgence of interest shown by economists in

questions of economic develop­ment, which now provide a com­mon field where each discipline can hope to learn from the other.

Similarly, history of economic thought may assist students to gain a better understanding of modern economic theory. It should also be interesting in that the writings of those who have made major con­tributions to the development of economics are studied in the orig­inal, rather than in textbook com­mentaries, so giving students a worthwhile opportunity to form their own interpretations and opinions.

Courses offered in economic history all relate to modern periods of development, the main areas of study being Britain, the United States, Australia, Japan, India, and some economies in the post 1945 period. Details of syllabuses are set out below.

The honours course in economic history is a four-year course. Stu­dents are required to take a pass course including majors in econ­omics and economic history with some additional distinction work in the first three years, and a fourth honours year in which they will do further advanced work in econ­omics and economic history. (An elementary knowledge of statistical methods would be an advantage to candidates for the fourth honours year.)

Graduates who have obtained a bachelor's degree at any recognised university may be enrolled for the master's degree (MEc or MA) in economic history for which they qualify by writing a research thesis under the supervision of members of the Department. Provided their courses for the degree of bachelor

256

Economic History

have included satisfactory work in economic history, first or good second class honours graduates will be permitted to proceed immediately to work on the thesis; others will be required to take an advanced one or two year preliminary course.In some cases candidates will be required to take two units at distinction level before they are considered for admission to the advanced preliminary course.

For the pass degree

Economic History I (2 points) Full year.Two lectures a week with tutorials throughout the year.Syllabus(a) The economic development of modern Britain from about the mid­eighteenth century to the present time( b ) the economic development of the United States, with particular reference to the period from the beginning of the nineteenth cent­ury to the present time Honours: With the approval of the Head of the Department students may take this unit at honours level. They may be required to attend additional tutorials for this purpose and will be expected to read more widely in the same field.Preliminary Reading□ Ashton, T. S., The Industrial Revolution 1760-1830, Oxford UP.□ Deane, Phyllis, The First Indus­trial Revolution, Cambridge UP.□ Faulkner, H. U., Economic His­tory of the United States, Collier- Macmillan.□ Brown, A. J. Youngson, The American Economy, Allen Et Unwin.Prescribed Books□ Ashton, T. S., The Industrial

Revolution 1760-1830, Oxford UP; An Economic History of England:The 18th Century, Methuen.□ Ashworth, W., An Economic History o f England 1870-1939, Methuen.□ Mathias, P.( The First Industrial Nation: An Economic History of Britain 1700-1914, University Paperbacks.□ North, D. C., The Economic Growth of the United States, 1790- 1860; Growth and Welfare in the American Past, Prentice-Hall.□ Sayers, R. S., A History of Eco­

nomic Change in England, 1880- 1939, Oxford UP.Examination: One three-hour paper. Honours candidates may be required to sit a second three-hour paper. Performance in essays, tests and class work will be taken into account in the examination.

Economic History II (2 points) Full year.Two lectures a week with tutorials throughout the year.Prerequisite: Economics I or Economics A must be passed before or taken concurrently with this unit.Syllabus: The economic develop­ment of Australia, with particular reference to the period from the mid-nineteenth century to the present time.Preliminary Reading□ Shaw, A. G. L, The Economic Development of Australia, 5th ed., Longmans.Prescribed Books□ Butlin, N. G., Investment in Australian Economic Development 1861 -1900, Cambridge UP.□ Forster, C. (ed.), Australian Economic Development in the

257

Faculty of Economics

Twentieth Century, Allen & Unwin.□ Report of the Committee of Economic Enquiry 1965, vol. 1, Cwlth Govt Printer, Canberra. Reading lists will be issued to stu­dents throughout the year. Examination: One three-hour paper. Performance in essays will form part of the examination.

Economic History II (Honours)Enrolment requires approval of Head of Department.

Lectures and tutorials as for the pass course, together with additional tutorials throughout the year.Syllabus: As for the pass course, together with wider reading in the same field.Books: Reading guides will be distributed.Examination: One three-hour paper in addition to the examination for the pass course.

The Economic Development of Modern Japan ( ! point)First semester.Two lectures a week with tutorials throughout the semester. Prerequisite: Economics I or Economics A must be completed before this unit is taken. Except with the approval of the Head of Department, a candidate for this semester unit must also have completed Economic History II. Syllabus: The economic development of modern Japan from the mid-nineteenth century to the present time.Preliminary Reading□ Allen, G. C., A Short Economic History of Modern Japan, Allen & Unwin.

Prescribed Books□ Allen, G. C., A Short Economic History of Modern Japan, Allen & Unwin; Japan's Economic Expansion, Oxford UP.□ Lockwood, W. W., The Economic Development of Japan, Princeton UP.□ Lockwood, W. W. (ed.), The

State and Economic Enterprise in Japan, Princeton UP.Examination: One three-hour paper. Performance in essays will form part of the examination.

The Economic Development of Modern Japan (Honours)Enrolment requires approval of Head of Department.

Lectures and tutorials as for the pass course, together with additional tutorials throughout the semester.Syllabus: As for the pass course, together with wider reading in the same field.Books: Reading guides will be distributed.Examination: One three-hour paper in addition to the examination for the pass course.

Recent Economic Experience in Europe and North America(1 point)First semester.Two lectures a week with tutorials throughout the semester. Prerequisite: Economics I or Economics A must be completed before this unit is taken. Except with the approval of the Head of Department, a candidate for this semester unit must also have completed Economic History II. Syllabus: A survey of comparative development since 1945 and

258

Economic History

characteristics of the international economy during this period. To this will be added more detailed studies of postwar experience and policies in selected economies, including some or all of the following: the United Kingdom, the United States, France, West Germany, Italy, the Soviet Union. Preliminary Reading□ Kuznets, S., Postwar Economic Growth, Harvard UP Prescribed Books□ Denison, E. F., Why Growth Rates Differ, Brookings Institution.□ Maddison, A., Economic Growth in the West, Twentieth Century Fund; Allen & Unwin.□ Postan, M. M„ An Economic History of Western Europe 1945-1964, University Paperbacks.Examination: One three-hour paper. Performance in essays will form part of the examination.

Recent Economic Experience in Europe and North America (Honours)Enrolment requires approval of Head of Department.

Lectures and tutorials as for the pass course, together with additional tutorials throughout the semester.Syllabus: As for the pass course, together with wider reading in the same field.Books: Reading guides will be distributed.Examination: One three-hour paper in addition to the examination for the pass course.

Problems of Under-develop­ment: India (7 point)Second semester.Two lectures a week with tutorials throughout the semester. Prerequisite: Economics I or Economics A must be completed before this unit is taken. Except with the approval of the Head of Department, a candidate for this semester unit must also have completed Economic History II. Syllabus: An examination of the economic problems of a contemporary under-developed economy, namely India, since the advent of Independence in 1947. Major emphasis will be placed on population growth, agriculture, capital formation, under­employment, productivity and the balance of payments. In addition, particular attention will focus on the various economic policies introduced to facilitate economic development, including development planning, population control, foreign economic assistance and education reform. Preliminary Reading□ Bhagwati, J „ The Economics of Underdeveloped Countries, Weidenfeld & Nicolson.□ Reddaway, W. B., The Development of the Indian Economy, Allen & Unwin. Prescribed Books□ Bhagwati, J. N. & Desai, P.,India Planning for Industrialization; Industrialization and Trade Policies since 1951, Oxford UP.□ Maddison, A., Economic Progress and Policy in Developing Countries, Allen & Unwin.□ Malenbaum, W., An Introduction to the Indian Economy, Merrill.

259

Faculty of Economics

□ Meier, G. M., Leading Issues in Development Economics, Oxford UP.□ Seers, D. & Joy, L, (eds.), Development in a Divided World, Penguin.Examination: One three-hour paper. Performance in essays will form part of the examination.

Problems of Under-develop­m ent: India (Honours)Enrolment requires approval of Head of Department.

Lectures and tutorials as for the pass course, together with additional tutorials throughout the semester.Syllabus: As for the pass course, together with wider reading in the same field.Books: Reading guides will be distributed.Examination: One three-hour paper in addition to the examination for the pass course.

History of Economic Thought(2 points)Full year.Two lectures a week with tutorials throughout the year.Prerequisite: Economics III must be passed before or taken concurrently with this unit except that, with permission of the Faculty, it may be taken concurrently with Economics II. (There is no other prerequisite for this unit.)Syllabus: This subject is intended as an introduction to the history of economic theory in its relation to policy. While the major stages in the development of economics (in the technical sense) will be studied, the aim throughout will be to treat them against the background of their260

historical environment. Some partic­ular subjects which may be dis­cussed are:(a) 'Mercantilism': the beginnings of 'modern' economic thinking in the seventeenth century.(d) English 'Classical' Theory and Policy: the concept of the economic system as a whole, as developed during the eighteenth century (Can- tillon, the Physiocrats). Adam Smith and economic liberalism. Central questions, c. 1800-1850: the theory of population (Malthus); economic progress and the Corn Laws (Ricardo); colonial development and the export of capital; Say's Law, economic crises and the business cycle.(c) Economic Nationalism (List, David Syme).(d) 'Socialist' Thought: radical opinion in Britain after 1815.Marx's theory of capitalist develop­ment.(e) Economic Theory and Policy in the Second Half of the Nineteenth Century and Later: the theory of marginal utility. Controversies con­cerning scope and method; historical economics. Welfare economics at the turn of the century. 'The Keynesian Revolution'. Preliminary Reading□ Heimann, E., History of Econ­omic Doctrines, Oxford UP.□ Keynes, J. M., Essays in Bio­graphy, new ed., Hart-Davis, 1951. Prescribed Books□ Mun, Thomas, England's Treasure by Forraign Trade, Blackwell.□ Smith, Adam, The Wealth of Nations, Everyman or University Paperbacks.□ Sraffa, P. (ed.), The Works and Correspondence of David Ricardo, vol. 1, Cambridge UP.

Economic History

No formal book on the history of economic thought is prescribed, but any of the following will be useful:□ Heimann, E., History of Economic Doctrines, Oxford UP.□ Mitchell, W. C., Lecture Notes on Types o f Economic Theory, Kelley.□ Roll, E„ A History of Economic Thought, Faber.□ Schumpeter, J. A., Economic Doctrine and Method, Allen £t Unwin.Examination: One three-hour paper, with a second paper for honours. Performance in essays will form part of the examination.

H istory o f Economic Thought (Honours)Enrolment requires approval of Head of Department.

Lectures and tutorials as for the pass course, together with additional tutorials throughout the year.Syllabus: As for the pass course, together with wider reading in the same field.Books: Reading guides will be distributed.Examination: One three-hour paper in addition to the examination for the pass course.

For the degree w ith honours

Economic History I Economic History II The Economic Developm ent of

M odern JapanRecent Economic Experience

in Europe and North America Problems of U nder-deve lop­

ment : IndiaHistory of Economic ThoughtDetails of the above units are as for the pass degree but honours degree

students will be required to take them at honours level. They will be expected to read more intensively in the same fields and may be required to attend additional tutorials.

Economic History IV (Honours) This unit constitutes the fourth- year course for honours degree stu­dents specialising in economic history. Admission to the course requires approval by the Faculty.The unit consists of:(a) a course of four hours a week of lectures and seminars on selected problems of economic development in their historical contexts(b) lectures and seminars com­prising part of the fourth-year course in advanced economic theory or other work as approved by the Faculty(c) an assignment (essay or short thesis) as approved by the Head of the Department.Syllabus: The course on selected problems of economic development is not defined geographically but will discuss, in the context of several economies, the nature of the his­torical process of growth and its relationship with some of the fol­lowing: population change, capital formation, technological change and innovation, structural adjustment, forms of economic organisation, international trade and international factor mobility.Books: To be prescribed.Examination: To be prescribed. The assignment will form part of the examination.

261

Economics

B. D. Cameron, MEc (Syd) PhD (Cantab)Professor of Applied Economics and Head of the Department

introductionThe courses given by the Depart­ment of Economics seek to give the student an understanding of the economic system and to analyse the central problems of government economic policy— such as unem­ployment, inflation, resource allo­cation, economic growth, income distribution and foreign trade.

A student should consider in advance what he is seeking from the economics major since the completion of three years study of economics and allied subjects does not automatically give the same professional status as is accorded to say the graduate in geology or forestry or medicine. Nor is the study of economics to be confused with business administration. Students enrolling in economics courses fall into three broad categories: those who seek a gen­eral education; those who plan to become either professional econ­omists or executives in an organisa­tion where economics training is essential; third, those for whom a systematic knowledge of econ­omics is an advantage in their own profession— for example, law­yers, journalists and teachers.

The subject economics can be studied in the Faculties of Arts, Asian Studies and Science and in the Economics-Law combined course. Moreover, economics can be studied in combination with an Asian language, or mathematics, or law, or a science major within the Economics Faculty. Such course combinations may be both attrac­

tive and rewarding.The student who aims to become a

professional economist or econ­omics-trained executive must not only have a rigorous training in economics but also requires training in quantitative analysis. For this reason a student aiming at these vocations should seriously consider taking courses in accounting, mathematics or statistics. Economic theory borrows concepts heavily from each of these three quantita­tive disciplines so that their study is complementary.f

A student may choose to supple­ment the economics major by also enrolling (in second and third year) in various courses in applied econ­omics and mathematical economics. A student who qualifies for the pass degree of Bachelor of Economics or Bachelor of Arts and obtains a distinction in Economics III may be admitted to the fourth honours year. Graduates from other faculties (e g. Science) may also be admitted to the fourth honours year provided they first take four approved units in the Faculty of Economics including a distinction in Economics III.

f Students who have passed second level Mathematics should feel confident of their ability to handle the mathematics used in the Economics major. Students who have not passed second level Mathematics in the New South Wales Higher School Certificate, or equivalent, will be at a disadvantage unless they devote January and February to serious study of the prescribed mathematical texts listed under Economics I. The Canberra College at Advanced Education expects to offer an Intensive Course in Calculus during February of 1972. Intending students who feel that they might benefit from undertaking such a course should contact the Registrar of the Canberra College of Advanced Education.

262

Economics

Graduates who, at the end of their fourth year, obtain either a first class or upper second class hohours degree, are eligible to proceed to the course for the degree of Master of Economics. Here the candidate has a choice between writing a thesis or taking a set of examined courses. The Department also accepts candidates for the degree of Doctor of Philosophy.

The Department encourages grad­uates from other faculties to enrol for economics courses. Graduates should seek information from the Faculty Secretary as to the status they can obtain for previous courses. The Head of the Department may approve a graduate's request to study Economics I and II simult­aneously if he has already passed Pure Mathematics I.

In all courses in the Department, performance in essays, class work and examinations during the year may be taken into account in the Annual Examination. If a student's written work during the year is unsatisfactory or does not meet standards prescribed by the academic staff, the Head of the Department may exclude him from the Annual Examination.Honours: First-year students who plan to study for honours are not required to consult with Department staff before the start of first term.In first year, preparation for the honours degree course usually takes the form of an additional honours program and interested students will be informed of arrangements at the opening lecture.

For the pass degree Economics I (2 points)(Macroeconomics: theory and

policy)

Full year.Two or three lectures a week with tutorials throughout the year. Studying first-year Economics: A student who enrols in Economics I should begin to prepare himself as early as possible in January and February. It should be noted that the student has to sit for a com­pulsory term examination in May or June— and experience shows that success or failure in this examination is critical. If he has not passed Higher School Certificate second level mathematics the student should revise basic algebra and read some elementary differential calculus. (Two useful books Teach Yourself Algebra, Teach Yourself Calculus pages 1 -100,EUP can be used.) BEc students without at least 2S Mathematics in recent years will be required to take Statistics A03 (Mathematical Methods) in the first semester of the year in which they take Economics I, and BA students in this position are advised to take Statistics A03 concurrently with Economics I.Syllabus: Economic growth; national product, income and employment; monetary theory and institutions; inflation; balance of payments and foreign trade.

In first term two lectures weekly are given with minimum use of mathematics. A third weekly lecture shows how the same range of ideas can be handled mathematically, in a rigorous and productive fashion. Students must sit a term examination involving the handling of economic problems in both literary and mathematical form.

263

Faculty of Economics

Preliminary Reading□ Samuelson, Hancock 8- Wallace, Economics, Australian ed., McGraw-Hill.Prescribed Books□ Cameron, B. D., Australia's Economic Policies, Cheshire.□ Cameron, B. D., Theory of National income and Employment, Cheshire.□ Arndt, H. W. 8 Harris, C. P„ The Australian Trading Banks, 3rd ed., Cheshire.□ Downing, R. I., National income and Social Accounts, latest ed., Melbourne UP.□ National income and Expenditure, latest issue, Cwlth Govt Printer, Canberra.□ Australian National Accounts, latest issue, Cwlth Govt Printer, Canberra.For Reference□ Keynes, J. M., The General Theory of Employment, interest and Money, Macmillan.□ Henry, S. G. B., Elementary Mathematical Economics,Routledge 8 Kegan Paul.Reference Books on Mathematics□ Allen, R. G. D., Mathematical Analysis for Economists,Macmillan.□ Huang, D„ Introduction to the use of Mathematics in Economic Analysis, Wiley.Examination: For pass students: assignments, essays and term examinations are prescribed. In November there is one three-hour paper in economic theory. There will be a mid-year examination in Economics I, expected to be at the end of the first semester.Students accepted into the honours program will follow the course of study referred to under

Economics I (Honours), see below.

Economics ATwo or three lectures a week.There will be no honours level in this unit.Syllabus: This is a terminal first- year course in Economics for stu­dents not enrolled in the Faculty of Economics. The content of the course is essentially that of Economics I but with these differences.

(i) The student sits a November exam but does not sit any term examination. Thus the student sits only an essay- type examination and is neither required to sit the third weekly first-term lecture on the use of mathematics in economics nor to be examined on that material.(ii) As opportunity offers a further series of lectures will be given in third term on the major economic problems of non-western economies.This section of the course, which will change from time to time, could deal for example with any one of the following: Japan, India,Soviet Russia, economic theory basic to specific methods of economic planning.

A student who so wishes may enrol in Economics I at the start of the year and then transfer his enrolment to Economics A at the close of first term.Books: As for Economics I.Examination: One three-hour paper in Economic Theory.

264

Economics

Economics II (2 points)(Microeconomics— Resource

Allocation)Full year.Two hours of lectures weekly and one hour of tutorials with an additional hour for honours candidates throughout the year. Syllabus: Scarcity and the price mechanism, the determination of market prices, consumption theory, production theory, types of compe­tition and their influence on prices, economic efficiency and growth, pricing of factor services, general equilibrium, input-output analysis, welfare economics, linear programming, allocation over time, measurement and estimation in microeconomics, industrial organisation in Australia, restrictive practices and case studies of Australian industry. The role of the government in resource allocation, aspects of public economics, cost-benefit analysis, pricing and output policy of public enterprise, case studies of Australian public enterprise, the economics of socialism.General Reading□ Samuelson, P. A., Hancock, K., Wallace, R., Economics, Aust. ed., pts 1, 3 Et 4 & ch. 40, McGraw-Hill.Prescribed Books□ Mansfield, E., Microeconomics, Norton.□ Tisdell, C., Microeconomics, Wiley. (Available early 1972).□ Henderson, J. M., & Quandt,R. E., Microeconomic Theory, McGraw-Hill.□ Köhler, H., Welfare and Planning, Wiley.Examination: One three-hour paper at the end of the year. In addition, a

mid-year examination will be held which counts towards the final mark. Performance in essays and classwork will be taken into account.

Students accepted into the honours program will follow the course of study laid down under Economics II (Honours), see below.

Economics III (2 points)(International Trade and

Macroeconomics)Full year.Three lectures a week with tutorials throughout the year. Syllabus: The pure theory of international trade; international payments theory; problems in international economic policy; development economics; advanced macroeconomics.Preliminary Reading□ Snape, R. H.( International Trade and the Australian Economy, Long­mans.□ Heller, H. R., International Trade, Prentice- Hall.□ Johnson, H. G., Economic Policies Towards Less Developed Countries, Allen & Unwin.

Myint, H., The Economics of Developing Countries, Hutchinson,(1 967 edition.)

Kogiko, K., An Introduction to Macroeconomic Models, McGraw- Hill.Prescribed Books

Staley, C. E., International Trade, Prentice-Hall.□ Kindleberger, C. P., International Economics, 4th ed., Irwin.

Meier, G. M., The International Economics of Development,Harper.

Nevile, J. & Stammer, D. W„ (eds.), Inflation and Unemployment, Penguin.(Plus preliminary reading books.)

265

Faculty of Economics.

Examination: Two two-hour papers for pass students: performance in essays and classwork is also taken into account in the examinations.

Students accepted into the honours program will follow the course of study laid down below under Economics III (Honours).

Labour Economics A (1 point) (Micro)First semester.Two lectures a week with tutorials for half the year. Prerequisite: Economics II must be passed before, or taken con­currently with, this semester unit. Syllabus: The supply of labour, including the work-leisure choice and occupational choice, with an introduction to human capital analysis; the demand for labour by the individual firm and the industry as a whole, emphasising marginal productivity analysis; the theory and structure of wages; and the economic impact of trade unions.Prescribed Books □ Fleisher, B., Labor Economics: Theory and Evidence, Prentice-Hall.

Cartter, A., Theory of Wages and Employment, Irwin.Examination: One three-hour paper at the end of first semester. There is no separate honours paper. Honours grades are awarded on performance throughout the semester.

Labour Economics B (7 point) (Macro)Second semester.Two lectures a week with tutorials throughout the semester. Prerequisite: Economics II must be passed before or taken

concurrently with this semester unit. Completion of Labour Economics A is required (unless exemption is given).Syllabus(a) The supply of labour, including work force structure, participation rates, population change, and labour mobility and migration.(b ) The demand for labour and unemployment, covering structural and deficient demand factors.(c) Labour and the Phillips Curve. {d) Wages and incomes policy, both in Australia and overseas.(e) Labour in a context of economic growth.Prescribed Books□ Perlman, R., Labor Theory,Wiley.□ Fleisher, B., Labor Economics: Theory and Evidence, Prentice- Hall.Examination: To be advised.

Agriculture in the National Economy (7 point)Second semester.Two lectures and one tutorial throughout the semester. Prerequisite: Economics II must be passed before, or taken con­currently with, this semester unit. Syllabus: An application of econ­omic analysis to problems of agri­cultural policy. Agriculture in the national economy, trends in the economic organisation of agricul­ture; agricultural capital formation and rural credit, price support and stabilisation programs in selected Australian rural industries and their economic effects, comparative studies of agricultural policies in selected overseas countries, inter-

266

Economics

national trade and commodity policy; public investment in agri­culture and the application of cost- benefit analysis.Prescribed Book□ Williams, D B., (ed.), Agriculture in the Australian Economy, Sydney UP.Reference Books□ Fox, K. A. & Johnson, D. G.,(eds ), Readings in the Economics of Agriculture, Irwin.□ Hathaway, D. E., Government and Agriculture-Public Policy in a Democratic Society, Collier-Mac­millan.□ Hallett, G., The Economics of Agricultural Policy, Blackwell. Examination: One three-hour paper. There is no separate honours paper. Honours grades are awarded on performance throughout the semester.

Agricultural Production and Prices (7 point)This unit will be offered first semester 1973.Two lectures and one tutorial throughout the semester. Prerequisite: Economics II must be passed before, or taken con­currently with, this semester unit. Syllabus: Agricultural production functions and optimal resource combinations; the effects of risk and uncertainty on agricultural pro­duction and investment decisions; supply and demand relationships in agriculture; price behaviour and cobweb phenomena, the theory of storage and futures markets. Preliminary Reading□ Bishop, C. E., and Toussaint,W. D., Introduction to Agricultural Economic Analysis, Wiley.

Prescribed Books□ Doll, J. P., Rhodes, V. J., and West, J. G., Economics of Agricul­tural Production, Markets and Policy, Irwin.□ Shepherd, G. S., Agricultural Price Analysis, 5th ed., Iowa State UP.Reference Book□ Heady, E. 0., Economics of Agri­cultural Production and Resource Use, Prentice-Hall.Examination: One three-hour paper. There is no separate honours paper. Honours grades are awarded on performance throughout the semester.

M athem atics for Economists(2 points)Full year.Two lectures a week with tutorials throughout the year.Prerequisite: Economics I must be passed before this unit is taken. A pass with merit or credit in Econo­mics I will normally be required. Students who have completed Pure Mathematics I or General Mathe­matics or who intend to complete these units are not permitted to enrol for Mathematics for Economists. This unit is a terminal one.Syllabus: Graphs and functions used in economic theory —demand and supply functions and the exponen­tial function; differential calculus applied to consumption and pro­duction theory and problems of economic maxima; elementary integral calculus and its use in capital theory and aspects of wel­fare economics; difference and differential equations applied to dynamic market adjustment, growth and trade cycle theory; vectors,

267

Faculty of Economics

matrices and determinants and their use in analysis economic systems, linear production theory, program­ing and qualitative economics.

Other topics include: dynamic sys­tems and stability of equilibrium, optimum planning over time and causal ordering and its application to model construction.Preliminary Reading□ Henry, S. G. B., Elementary Mathematical Economics,Routledge & Kegan Paul.□ Peston, M. H„ Elementary Matrices for Economics,Routledge & Kegan Paul.Prescribed Books□ Chiang, A. C., Fundamental Methods of Mathematical Econo­mics, McGraw-Hill.□ Yamane, T„ Mathematics for Economists, 2nd ed., Prentice-Hall. Examination: Term examinations will be held in the last week of each of the three terms. Students who fail to pass each of the term exam­inations will be required to sit a three-hour paper in November. Students who pass all the term examinations need not sit the examination in November unless they wish to attempt honours.There is no separate honours paper. Honours grades are awarded on performance throughout the semester.

M athem atica l Economics IA(7 point)First semester.Two lectures a week with tutorials throughout the semester. Prerequisite: Pure Mathematics I must be passed before this unit is taken and Economics II must be passed before, or taken concurrently with, Mathematical Economics 1A.

Syllabus: The application of optimising techniques and stability analysis to the theory of consumer behaviour, production and pricing in partial and general equilibrium contexts.Preliminary Reading□ Allen, R. G. D., Mathematical Analysis for Economists, Macmillan.

Prescribed Books□ Lancaster, K., Mathematical Economics, Macmillan.□ Quirk, J. and Saposnik, R., Intro­duction to General Equilibrium Theory and Welfare Economics, McGraw-Hill.□ Henderson, J..M. & Quandt, R. E., Microeconomic Theory, McGraw- Hill.□ Allen, R. G. D., Mathematical Economics, Macmillan.□ Kooros, A., Elements of Mathe­matical Economics, Houghton Mifflin.□ Samuelson, P. A., Foundations of Economic Analysis, Harvard UP. Examination: To be determined. There is no separate honours paper. Honours grades are awarded on performance throughout the semester.

M athem atica l Economics IB(7 point)Second semester.Two lectures a week with tutorials.Prerequisite: As for Mathematical Economics IA, plus completion of that semester unit.Syllabus(a) Descriptive dynamic models in such areas as inflation, trade cycles and growth(b) dynamic optimising models(c) input-output and other linear economic models.

268

Economics

Honours: There is no separate honours paper. Honours grades are awarded on performance throughout the semester.Prescribed BooksAs for Mathematical Economics IAtogether with:□ Gale, D., The Theory of Linear Economic Models, McGraw-Hill. Examination: To be determined.

M athem atica l Economics IIA and MBThese two semester units are chosen from a prescribed list of courses. It is envisaged that the courses available will change from time to time, and will include units which will also be available to the fourth year and course work master's students. The prerequisites for the courses will be Economics II and either Mathematical Economics IA and IB or Pure Mathematics II, and it will be expected that students undertaking the course will have passed their prerequisite unit at a high level. The tentative list of courses proposed is two of:

Optimal Control Theory A and B Competitive Equilibrium

Details of these courses are set out below. Interested students should enquire at the Economics Department as to which units will be offered this year.

Optim al Control Theory A(/ point)First semester.Two one-hour lectures and one one-hour tutorial per week. Prerequisite: Economics II, and either Mathematical Economics IA and IB or Pure Mathematics II.It will be expected that students undertaking the course will have

passed their prerequisite unit at a high level.Syllabus(a) Non-Linear Programming {b) Calculus of Variations(c) Pontryagin's Maximum Principle(d) Dynamic Programming to a variety of economic problems.After treating necessary and sufficient conditions for optimal solutions for the respective maximising problems attention will be focused on the issues associated with applying these theorems. There is no settled body of literature on methods of applying Pontryagin's Maximum Principle except in some simple cases, and this section of the course will take the form of a seminar series with PhD and master's students and members of staff contributing.Prescribed Books□ Pontryagin, L. S., Boltyanskii,V. G., Gamkrelidze, R. V. & Mishchenko, E. F., The Mathematical Theory of Optimal Processes, Wiley.□ Arrow, K. J„ 'Applications of Control Theory to Economic Growth', Mathematics of the Decision Sciences, Pt.2.,American Mathematical Society, Providence, Rhode Island.□ Shell, K., Essays on the Theory of Optimal Economic Growth, MIT.□ Hestenes, M. R„ 'On Variational Theory and Optimal Control Theory', J. Siam Control, September, 1 965.□ Dorfman, R., 'An Economic Interpretation of Optimal Control Theory' American Economic Review, December, 1969. Examination: To be determined.

269

Faculty of Economics

There is no separate honours paper. Honours grades will be awarded on performance throughout the semester.

Optimal Control Theory B(7 point)Second semester.Two one-hour lectures with tutorials throughout the second semester.Prerequisites: Economics II, and either Mathematical Economics IA or Pure Mathematics II. It will be expected that students undertaking the course will have passed their prerequisite unit at a high level. Syllabus: The course would essentially be concerned with the theory of short-run economic policy, particularly stabilisation policy.Prescribed Books□ Tinbergen, J., On the Theory of Economic Policy, North Holland.□ Tinbergen, J., Economic Policy, Principles and Design, North Holland.□ Fox, K. A., Sengupta, J. K. & Thorbecke, E., The Theory of Quantitative Economic Policy with Applications to Economic Growth and Stabilisation, North Holland.□ Hansen, B., Lectures in Economic Theory II: The Theory of Economic Policy and Planning, Studentlitteratur. Examination: To be determined.There is no separate honours paper. Honours grades will be awarded on performance throughout the semester.

Competitive Equilibrium(7 point)Prerequisites: Economics II, and either Mathematical Economics IA and IB or Pure Mathematics II. It

will be expected that students undertaking the course will have passed their prerequisite unit at a high level.Syllabus: Analysis of the problems of existence, uniqueness, stability, and welfare properties of competitive equilibrium.Prescribed Books□ Quirk, J. & Saposnik, R. S., Introduction to General Equilibrium Theory and Welfare Economics, McGraw-Hill, 1968.□ Kuenne, R. E., The Theory of General Economic Equilibrium, Princeton UP.□ Debreu, G., Theory of Value,Wiley, 1 959.□ Lancaster, K„ Mathematical Economics, Macmillan, 1968. Examination: Jo be advised.

Economic Policy (7 point)First semester.Students will be required to attend two sessions each week. These may be of up to two hours' duration. They will not usually take the form of lectures, but will consist primarily of papers presented by students and comments by visiting authorities, or at times addresses by visitors with question and comment by students. The staff member conducting the course will give introductory lectures, guide discussion and summarise debate.Prerequisite: Economics III must be passed before, or taken concurrently with this semester unit.Syllabus(a) Stabilisation Policy: Topics will include rules versus discretion in stabilisation policy, the use of indicator series and econometric

270

Economics

models in forecasting, Commonwealth-State financial relations, incomes policy, inflation, problems of monetary policy, microeconomic aspects of stabilisation policy.(b ) Resources Policy: Discussion will centre on an integrated fuel policy for Australia and on the mining industry. Topics for discussion will include the taxation of extraction, the exhaustion of reserves, export policy (including the question of domestic processing), the conflict between mining and conservation, regional development and the provision of infrastructure. Special reference will be made to iron ore, nickel, alumina and coal.

No textbooks cover the course but students will be referred to a wide range of reference material, some of which will be made avail­able by the Department.

Students enrolled for the course should collect a synopsis from the Department in the last week of January, as preliminary work will be required and the first assignment will be due in the first week of term.Examination: Class work will contribute significantly to the overall assessment. Students will be required to sit one three-hour paper at the end of the semester. There will be no separate honours paper and grades will be awarded on the basis of overall assessment.

Economic GeographyPrerequisite: Economics II must be passed before, or taken con­currently with, this unit.

Details of this unit are given

under the Faculty of Arts {see section on Geography).

For the degree w ith honours

Economics I (Honours)Lectures and tutorials as for the pass degree, together with one honours class a week in the second half of the year. Individual students will be required to lead discussion on particular topics and may find written preparation necessary. Students arrange to enrol in Economics I (Honours) with the Department in the week before honours classes commence. An additional synopsis and reading guide will be supplied when students commence classes at the beginning of second term.

Economics li (Honours)Lectures as for the pass degree, together with one honours class a week throughout the year Syllabus(a) As for pass degree(b) Special aspects of equilibrium theories of markets, an examination of consumption and production theory in terms of the propertiesof convex sets and other recent developments, Paretian optimality, perfect competition and market failure, some applications of decision theory and game theory to'resource allocation, public policy and market failure.Prescribed Books□ Breit, W. & Hochman, H. M., Readings in Microeconomics, 2nd ed., Holt, Rinehart & Winston.□ Henderson, J. M. &- Quandt,R. E., Microeconomic Theory, McGraw-Hill.□ Tidsell, C., Microeconomics— Theory of Economic Allocation,

271

Faculty of Economics

Wiley. (Available early 1972.)A reading list will also be provided.Examination: At the end of the year, one three-hour paper as for the pass degree and a second three- hour paper based upon the subject matter of the honours work. In addition, a mid-year examination, as for the pass course, will be held which counts towards the final mark.Performance in essays and classwork will be taken into account.

Economics III (Honours)Two hours per week throughout the year.Syllabus: The course surveys recent developments in the pure theory of international trade and the theory of trade and economic development. Project work on policy problems and empirical testing of trade theory is an integral part of the course. References□ Corden, W. M., Recent Developments in the Theory of International Trade, Princeton, International Finance Section, Princeton UP.□ Meier, Gerald M„ The International Economics of Development, Harper International.□ Caves, Richard E., Trade and Economic Structure, Harvard UP.□ Corden, W. M., The Theory of Protection, Oxford UP.Examination: One three-hour examination at the end of the year, in addition to the three-hour paper at pass level.

Economics IV (Honours)(a) A course of five hours a week of lectures and seminars in advanced economic theory 272

(b) two hours of lectures, with tutorials in one economics unit or other unit approved by the Faculty. Prerequisite: The standard require­ment is that a student shall have taken a mathematics unit at University— such as Mathematics for Economists— and shall have a Distinction in Economics III. Syllabus:(a) Five half units in advanced economic theory. In recent years these have been chosen from the following list (though changes in the list may be made):

(i) Growth Theory(ii) International Trade Theory(iii) Value Theory(iv) General Equilibrium Analysis(v) Theory & Policy of Inter­

national Trade Discrimination(vi) Monetary Theory & Policy(vii) Economic Policy(viii) Public Finance (half-units

provided by the Department of Accounting and Public Finance at fourth-year level)

{b) One approved undergraduate unit at distinction level (e.g. Mathematical Economics IA and IB, Agricultural Economics semester units, etc.)(c) A sub-thesis on a topic approved by the Head of the Department.Prescribed Books: List available from Department.Examination: Papers in advanced economic theory and two three- hour papers in unit (b) above. The sub-thesis is counted as one part of the examination.

For the Diploma in EconomicsPrerequisite: A candidate may be admitted by the Faculty to the course for the Diploma in Econo-

Economics

mies if he has completed a course for the degree of Bachelor of Economics with honours at an approved university.

The course is intended for full­time students. Except with the permission of the Head of Depart­ment, a candidate for the Diploma shall complete his course in one academic year.SyllabusThe course consists of a fourth-year level program in the Department of Economics. At present the program is the same as for the fourth-year honours students in the Department.

For the degree of M aster of EconomicsPrerequisites:1 . All honours students with first class honours or second class A honours proceed straight to the master's degree by thesis or course work.2 . All second class B honours students take a one-year preliminary course which will be equivalent to approximately one-half of the fourth-year work, the content to be decided in the light of individual student's needs.3 . All third class honours students and those whose pass degree would admit them to the fourth year will take a two-year part-time or one-year full-time course en­compassing the whole of Economics IV.4 . All pass students who do not have sufficient credits, distinctions etc. to admit them to the fourth year will take two advanced pass units at distinction level. If they satisfy the standards appropriate for admission to fourth year they will then take the Economics IV course under 3 above.

Candidature must be approved by Faculty.

For the degree of M aster of Economics (by course w ork)The course work program occupies two semesters. Each semester involves twelve weeks of lectures (including seminars and tutorials) followed by written examinations at an advanced level.

Only full-time students will be admitted, save in exceptional cases. However, in 1970 and 1971 (the initial years of the program), Faculty admitted a limited number of part-time students.

Applicants are eligible to apply for an ANU Masters Degree Scholarship and a Commonwealth Postgraduate Course Award. Applicants may also be eligible to apply for a Commonwealth Public Service Full-Time Award.Syllabus: Each semester candidates may select four units from the list of units being offered. The selected course is subject to approval by Faculty.

A list of the units offered in the first two years of the program includes the following:Semester 7Economic Development Planning I Monetary Theory Urban Economics Economists' History— Recent

Australian Economic Develop­ment

Microeconomic Analysis Elementary Econometric Theory Methods of Time Series Problems

in Econometrics.Semester IIEconomic Development Planning II International Trade and Trade Policy

273

Public Expenditure Policy Contemporary Economic Policy

ProblemsEconomists' History— Methodology

and Workshop Macroeconomic Theory Systems Estimation and Model

BuildingCase Studies in Applied Econo­

metricsTime Series Problems in Econo­

metricsCandidates may include the equivalent of two semester units at honours level from those offered by the Faculty at the undergraduate level. Details of the program to be offered in 1972, together with preliminary reading lists, can be obtained from the Faculty office.

For the degrees of Master of Economics and Doctor of Philosophy (by thesis)The Department's staff has research interests ranging over economic theory and applied economics (including labour economics and agricultural economics). Currently there is a degree of specialisation of interest with a majority of staff and research students working in the following four fields:(a) Economic policy (including monetary, fiscal)(b ) mathematical economics(c) resource allocation and industry studies (including agricultural and manufacturing)(d ) Pacific region.

The Department will provide supervision in other fields provided staff are available.

274

Political Science

G. S. Reid, BCom(Melb), PhD(Lond)Professor and Head of the DepartmentThe following units, details of which are given under the Faculty of Arts, are available as pass and honours units for the degree of Bachelor of Economics:Political Science I Introduction to Modern Political

ThoughtPolitical Science II Political Sociology Asian Government International Relations Public Policy and Administration Political Science IV

Statistics

C. R. Heathcote, BA (W Aust),MA (Melb), PhDProfessor andHead of the Department

IntroductionThe statistics course for the pass degree is divided into three parts which will ordinarily be taken in successive years.

The first part studies the basic methods of statistics and their application in the social sciences, particularly in economics. It is normally taken by all students proceeding to the degree of Bachelor of Economics! and can also be taken by arts and science students interested in the application of statistics. Students with a standard of school mathematics equivalent to the NSW Higher School Certificate 2S level or better should take the semester units Statistics A01 and Statistics A02. However students with a weaker mathematical background will be required to take the mathematical methods unit Statistics A03 in the first semester before proceeding to Statistics A01 which is offered in both the first and second semesters.

The two remaining parts are made up of semester units which provide a study both of the mathematical theory and the practice of statistics. Four appropriately chosen units, together with the first part described in the preceding paragraph, constitute a major in the Faculty of Arts. Students in

f Students in the Faculty of Economics who take Pure Mathematics I in their first year may fulfill the compulsory statistics requirement by taking instead two statistics semester units in their second year.

arts, economics or science may major in statistics without taking any of the first part provided they fulfill a mathematics prerequisite. Arts and science students would take the options Statistics B02 and Statistics CÜ2 in the second semester of their second and third year respectively. On the other hand students in the Faculty of Economics interested in econometrics would, in second semesters, take Statistics B03 and Statistics C05 which provide at undergraduate level an introduction to the theory and applications of econometrics.

In addition to these courses in statistical and econometric theory and practice the Department provides two semester units. Statistics C03 and Statistics C04, in the related subject of Operational Research. This subject is concerned with problems of optimal systems' control, which arise, for example, in industry and government.

Students proceeding to a degree with honours in the Faculties of Economics, Arts, or Science may pursue their studies in probability statistics, or econometrics further by taking an approved selection of options offered at the fourth- year level. Additional lectures, and in some cases an entirely separate course, must be attempted by students wishing to take second or third-year units at honours level. Attainment of a satisfactory level in second and third year is required before admission to the final fourth year. Students may be admitted to the honours courses in second and third-year units even though they do not intend to proceed to an honours degree.

275

Faculty of Economics

Graduates who have obtained a bachelor's degree including an adequate study of statistics, at any recognised university, may be enrolled for a master's degree (MEc, MA or MSc) for which the graduates may qualify by com­pleting a thesis written under the supervision of members of the Department. Where graduates have not obtained a degree with first or second class honours in statistics they will be required to take an advanced qualifying course, usually of one or two years' duration. Students with a good honours degree or who have taken a master's degree, in both cases with an adequate study of mathematics and statistics, may enrol for the degree of Doctor of Philosophy.

For the pass degreeA complete list of text books will be available before the start of first semester.

The examination in each semester unit consists of one three-hour paper and prescribed work as required. Before admission to the examination candidates must have satisfactorily completed the exercises.

Statistics A01 (7 point)First and second semesters.Three lectures and one tutorial a week.Prerequisite: At least NSW Higher School Certificate 2S level Mathe­matics or equivalent or with the permission of the Head of the Department.Syllabus: Introductory probability and statistical inference; sample spaces, combination of events, joint and conditional probabilities, 276

elements of estimation and inference, non-parametric me’hods, multiple regression.

Statistics A02 (7 point)Second semester.Three lectures and one tutorial a week.Prerequisite: Statistics A01.Syllabus: Applied statistics wth emphasis on applications in Economics and the Social Sciences such as the use of probability as a measure of diversity in classifed data, probabilistic models, elementary decision procedures, multiple regression procedures, seasonal adjustment of data, non-parametric procedures, sample surveys.

Statistics A03 (7 point)First semester.Three lectures and one tutoricl a week.Prerequisite: See introduction above. Syllabus: Mathematical methods with emphasis on applications in Economics and the Social Sciences; summation, functions, limits, elements of differential and integral calculus, matrix algebra.

Statistics B01 (7 point)First semester.Three lectures and two tutorials a week.Prerequisite: Pure Mathematics I or Applied Mathematics I or General Mathematics or with permission of the Head of the Department.Syllabus: A first course in Mathematical Statistics; probability, random variables, joint and conditional distributions, weak law of large numbers; point

Statistics

and interval estimation, including maximum likelihood.

Statistics B02 U point)Second semester.Three lectures and two tutorials a week.Prerequisite: Statistics B01.Syllabus: Introduction to linear models of full rank, Gauss-Markov theorem; elementary decision theory and inference, analysis of variance and the simpler experimental designs.

Statistics B03 (7 point)Second semester.Three lectures and two tutorials a week.Prerequisite: Statistics B01.Syllabus: Introductory Econometrics. The single equation classical linear model in economics, generalised least squares, aggregation over entity and time, simultaneous equation problems, non-linear estimation, cross-section estimation, the use of a priori information and specification error.

Statistics C01 (7 point)First semester.Three lectures and three tutorials a week.Prerequisite: Statistics B01, B02 and Pure Mathematics II.Syllabus: General theory of point and interval estimation, decision theory, classical theories of inference, non-parametric methods, multivariate analysis.

Statistics C02 (7 point)Second semester.Three lectures and three tutorials a week.Prerequisite: Statistics C01.

Syllabus: The general linear model, experimental design, sample surveys.

Statistics C03 (7 point)First semester.Three lectures and three tutorials a week.Prerequisite: Statistics B01, or A02 and Pure Mathematics I. Syllabus: Introduction to Operational Research; linear programming, games and networks.

Statistics C04 (7 point)Second semester.Three lectures and three tutorials a week.Prerequisite: Statistics B01, or A02 and Pure Mathematics I. Syllabus: Introduction to Operational Research; stochastic models.

Statistics C05 (7 point)Second semester.(Not offered in 1972)Three lectures and three tutorials a week.Prerequisite: Statistics B03 and Economics II.Syllabus: Econometric Applications. The application of methods developed in B03 to investigations of: Production and Cost Functions and Demand for factors of production; Consumer, Investment, Import and Export demand functions; The generation of prices and wages, and the estimation and simulation of Macro and Micro economic models.

For the degree w ith honoursA complete list of text books will available before the start of first semester.

277

Faculty of Economics

The examination in each semester unit consists of one three-hour paper and prescribed work as required. Before admission to the examination candidates must have satisfactorily completed the exercises.

Details of the honours work in the second and third-year semester units are given below. Permission to attempt these units will only be given to students who have performed well in earlier years.

Statistics B01 (Honours)(7s points)First semester.Four lectures and two tutorials a week.Prerequisite: Pure Mathematics I. Students are strongly advised to also take Applied Mathematics I in their first year.Syllabus: As for Statistics B01 treated at a higher level with additional probability theory.

Statistics B02 (Honours)( 7 i points)Second semester.Four lectures and two tutorials a week.Prerequisite: Statistics B01 (H). Syllabus: As for Statistics B02 treated at a higher level, together with a special topic.

Statistics B03 (Honours)(7 i points)Second semester.Four lectures and two tutorials a week.Prerequisite: Statistics B01. Syllabus: As for Statistics B03 treated at a higher level, together with a special topic.278

Statistics C01 (Honours)(7\ points)First semester.Four lectures and three tutorials a week.Prerequisite: Statistics B01 (H), B02(H) and Pure Mathematics II including measure theory. Syllabus: Two lectures a week on each of (i) the material of Statistics C01 treated at a higher level (ii) probability theory.

Statistics C02 (Honours)(7i points)Second semester.Four lectures and three tutorials a week.Prerequisite: Statistics C01 (H). Syllabus: As for Statistics C02 plus one additional lecture per week.

Statistics C03 (Honours)(7 point)First semester.Four lectures and three tutorials a week.Prerequisite: Statistics B01, or A02 and Pure Mathematics I. Syllabus: As for Statistics C03 plus one additional lecture per week.

Statistics C04 (Honours)(7 point)Second semester.Four lectures and three tutorials a week.Prerequisite: Statistics B01, or A02 and Pure Mathematics I.Syllabus: As for Statistics C04 plus one additional lecture per week.

Statistics

Statistics C05 (Honours)(7J points)Second semester.(Not offered in 1972)Four lectures and three tutorials a week.Prerequisite: Statistics B03 and Economics II.Syllabus: As for Statistics C05 plus one additional lecture per week.

Final fourth -year honoursStudents proceeding to final fourth-year honours either in part or wholly within the Department will be able to select options from the general fields of probability,

mathematical statistics, and econometrics. Entry to the fourth- year program requires the approval of Faculty and interested students should discuss their proposed course with the Head of the Department. Pure Mathematics III is a prerequisite for the courses in probability and mathematical statistics. However students within the Faculty of Economics wishing to attempt the fourth year econometrics options may do so provided they have reached a sufficiently high standard in economics and statistics.Table of units and semester offered:

7 s t se m e s te r 2 n d se m e ste r

1 st year S ta tis tic s A01 S ta tis tic s A 0 2S ta tis tic s A 0 3 S ta tis t ic s A 01

2 n d year S ta tis tic s B01 an d B01 (H ) S ta tis t ic s B 0 2 an d B 0 2 (H ) S ta tis t ic s B 0 3 an d B 0 3 (H )

3rd year S ta tis tic s C01 and C 0 1 (H ) S ta tis t ic s C 0 2 an d C 0 2 (H )S ta tis t ic s C 0 3 an d C 0 3 (H ) S ta tis t ic s C 0 4 and C 0 4 (H )

S ta tis t ic s C 0 5 an d C 0 5 (H )

279

Degree Rules

Courses of Study (Degree of Bachelor o f Economics) Rules

1. In these Rules, unless the con­trary intention appears 'first-year unit' means—(a) a unit offered by the Faculty of Economics, being a unit opposite the name of which, as set out in the second column of the table in sub-rule (4) of rule 7 of these Rules, no condition is specified in the fourth column of that table;(aa) Statistics A01;(ab) Statistics A02; and(b) a unit from another Faculty, being a unit or subject that isa first-year unit or subject within the meaning of the Rules in accordance with which that unit is, by virtue of sub-rule (6) of rule 7 of these Rules, to be taken;'the Faculty' means the Faculty of Economics; 'unit from another Faculty' means a unit chosen from the units and subjects referred to in paragraphs (b), (c), (d) and (e) of sub-rule (1) of rule 7 of these Rules.2 . The degree of Bachelor of Economics may be conferred as a pass degree or as a degree with honours.3. (1) A candidate shall secure the approval of the Faculty for the proposed choice and order of the units of his degree course and shall secure the approval of the Faculty to any proposed alterations of the course originally approved.(2) The number of units that a candidate may take in any year shall be determined by the Faculty.4 . A candidate shall not be admitted to examination in any unit of the course unless he has attended such classes and performed satisfactorily 280

such work in the appropriate units of the course as is required by the head of the appropriate department.

The pass degree5. A candidate for the pass degree—(a) * * * * * * *(b) shall, unless he has been admitted to advanced status under rule 12 of these Rules, pursue an approved course of studies for at least three years in accordance with these Rules.6. (1) Subject to this rule, to complete the course for the pass degree a candidate shall pass units set out or referred to in the next succeeding rule the total value of which is not less than twenty points.(2) The course shall include—(a) not less than two approved majors, one of which is the ap­proved major set out as group 1 in the table in rule 8 of these Rules;(b) first-year units the total value of which is not less than eight points; and(c) one of the following combinations:(i) Statistics A01 and Statistics

A02;(ii) Statistics A03 and Statistics

A01;(iii) Statistics B01 and Statistics

B02, Statistics B02 (Honours), Statistics B03 or Statistics B03 (Honours); and

(iv) Statistics B01 (Honours) and Statistics B02, Statistics B02 (Honours), Statistics B03 or Statistics B03 (Honours),

whether taken in partial satisfaction of the requirements set out in the last two preceding paragraphs or otherwise.7. (1) The units for the pass degree

Degree Rules

shall be chosen from —(a) the units offered by the Faculty of Economics;(b) the units (other than Economics A) offered by the Faculty of Arts;(c) the units offered by the Faculty of Asian Studies;(d) the units offered by the Faculty of Science; and(e) Legal Method and such other subjects offered by the Faculty of Law as are approved by the Faculty for the purposes of this paragraph.(2) The units offered by the Faculty of Economics are the units the names of which are set out in the second column of the table in sub­rule (4) of this rule, and the value,

for the purposes of these Rules, of each of those units is the number of points specified in the third column of that table opposite the name of that unit.(3) Except with the permission of the Faculty, a candidate shall not take a unit the name of which is set out in the second column of the table in the next succeeding sub­rule unless he satisfies the condition or conditions (if any) specified in the fourth column of that table opposite the name of that unit.(4) The units, points and conditions referred to in the last two preceding sub-rules are those set out in the following table.

FirstColumn

Ite m N o.

SecondColumn

U n its

ThirdColumn

P o in ts

FourthColumn

C o n d it io n s

1 A c c o u n t in g I 2

2 A c c o u n t in g II 2 1. C o m p le tio n o f A c c o u n t in g I; and2. C o m p le tio n o r c o n c u rre n t ta k in g

o f E c o n o m ic s II

3 A g r ic u ltu ra l P ro d u c tio n and Prices

1 C o m p le tio n o r c o n c u rre n t ta k in g o f E c o n o m ic s II

4 A g r ic u ltu re in th e N a tio n a l E co n o m y

1 C o m p le tio n o r c o n c u rre n t ta k in g o f E c o n o m ic s II

5 A s ia n G o v e rn m e n t 2 C o m p le tio n o f P o lit ic a l S c ie n c e II

6 C o m p a n y F in a n ce 1 C o m p le tio n o f A c c o u n t in g II

7 C o m p u te r S c ie n c e B01 1 C o m p le tio n o f—(a ) A p p lie d M a th e m a tic s I;(b ) G en e ra l M a th e m a tic s ;(c ) P ure M a th e m a tic s I; o r( d ) S ta tis t ic s A 01 a n d —

( i) S ta tis t ic s A 0 2 ; o r( i i ) S ta tis t ic s A 0 3

7 A C o m p u te r S c ie n c e B 0 2 1 1. C o m p le tio n o f—(a ) A p p lie d M a th e m a tic s I;( b ) G en e ra l M a th e m a tic s ;(c ) P ure M a th e m a tic s I; o r( d ) S ta tis t ic s A01 and

S ta tis t ic s A 0 2 ; an d

281

Faculty of Economics

F irs tC o lu m n

S e c o n dC o lu m n

T h irdC o lu m n

F o u rthC o lu m n

Ite m N o. U n its P o in ts C o n d it io n s

2. C o m p le tio n o f, o r e x e m p tio n by th e H ead o f th e D e p a rtm e n t o f S ta tis t ic s fro m , C o m p u te r S c ie n c e B01

7B C o m p u te r S c ie n c e C01 1 C o m p le tio n o f—(а ) C o m p u te r S c ie n c e B 02 ; and(б ) P ure M a th e m a tic s I

7C C o m p u te r S c ie n c e C 0 2 1 C o m p le tio n o f—C o m p u te r S c ie n c e C01

7D C o m p u te r S c ie n c e C 0 3 1 C o m p le tio n o f—C o m p u te r S c ie n c e C01

8 E c o n o m ic D e v e lo p m e n t o f M o d e rn Ja p a n

1 C o m p le tio n o f—E c o n o m ic s I a n d —(a ) E c o n o m ic H is to ry II; o r(b ) w ith th e a p p ro v a l o f th e

H ead o f th e D e p a rtm e n t o f E c o n o m ic H is to ry , E c o n o m ic H is to ry I

9 E c o n o m ic H is to ry I 2

10 E c o n o m ic H is to ry II 2 1. C o m p le tio n o f E c o n o m ic H is to ry I; an d

2. C o m p le tio n o r c o n c u rre n t ta k in g o f E c o n o m ic s I

11 E c o n o m ic P o lic y 1 C o m p le tio n o r c o n c u rre n t ta k in g o f E c o n o m ic s III

12 E c o n o m ic s I 2

13 E c o n o m ic s II 2 C o m p le tio n o f E c o n o m ic s I

14 E c o n o m ic s III 2 C o m p le tio n o f E c o n o m ic s II

15 E x p e n d itu re an d F isca l In s t itu t io n s

1 C o m p le tio n o r c o n c u rre n t ta k in g o f E c o n o m ic s II

16 F in a n c ia l A c c o u n t in g T h e o ry 1 C o m p le tio n o f A c c o u n t in g II

17 H is to ry o f E c o n o m ic T h o u g h t 2 C o m p le tio n o r c o n c u rre n t ta k in g o f E c o n o m ic s III

18 In te rn a tio n a l R e la tio n s 2 C o m p le tio n o f P o lit ic a l S c ie n c e II

1 8 A In tro d u c t io n to M o d e rn P o lit ic a l T h o u g h t

2

19 L a b o u r E c o n o m ic s A 1 C o m p le tio n o r c o n c u rre n t ta k in g o f E c o n o m ic s II

1 9 A L a b o u r E co n o m ics B 1 1. C o m p le tio n o f L a b o u r E c o n o m ic s A ; and

282

Degree Rules

F irs tC o lu m n

S e c o n dC o lu m n

T h irdC o lu m n

F o u rthC o lu m n

Item N o. U n its P o in ts C o n d it io n s

2. C o m p le tio n o r c o n c u rre n t ta k in g o f E c o n o m ic s II

20 M a th e m a tic a l E c o n o m ic s IA 1 1. C o m p le tio n o f Pure M a th e m a tic s I; and

2. C o m p le tio n o r c o n c u rre n t ta k in g o f E c o n o m ic s II

2 0 A M a th e m a tic a l E c o n o m ic s IB 1 1. C o m p le tio n o f M a th e m a tic a l E c o n o m ic s IA ; and

2. C o m p le tio n o r c o n c u rre n t ta k in g o f E c o n o m ic s II

21 M a th e m a tic a l E c o n o m ic s 11A 1 C o m p le tio n o f E c o n o m ic s II a n d —(a ) M a th e m a tic a l E c o n o m ic s IA

and M a th e m a tic a l E c o n o m ic s IB ; o r

(b ) P ure M a th e m a tic s II

2 1 A M a th e m a tic a l E c o n o m ic s MB 1 C o m p le tio n o f M a th e m a tic a l E c o n o m ic s 11A

22 M a th e m a tic s fo r E c o n o m is ts 2 C o m p le tio n o f E c o n o m ic s I

2 3 N a tio n a l E c o n o m ic A c c o u n t in g 1 C o m p le tio n o f A c c o u n t in g I

24 *

2 5 P o lit ic a l C o m m u n ic a tio n 2 C o m p le tio n o f P o lit ic a l S c ie n c e II

2 6 P o lit ic a l S c ie n c e I 2

2 7 P o lit ic a l S c ie n c e II 2 C o m p le tio n o f P o lit ic a l S c ie n c e I

2 8 P o lit ic a l S o c io lo g y 2 C o m p le tio n o f P o lit ic a l S c ie n c e I

2 8 A P ro b le m s o f U n d e r­d e v e lo p m e n t: Ind ia

1 C o m p le tio n o f E c o n o m ic s I a n d — (a ) E c o n o m ic H is to ry II; o r {b ) w ith th e a p p ro v a l o f th e H ead

th e D e p a rtm e n t o f E c o n o m ic H is to ry , E c o n o m ic H is to ry I

2 9 P u b lic A u th o r ity A c c o u n t in g 1 C o m p le tio n o f A c c o u n t in g I

3 0 P u b lic P o lic y and A d m in is tra t io n

2 C o m p le tio n o f P o lit ic a l S c ie n c e I

31 R e ce n t E c o n o m ic E xpe rie nce in E u rope and N o rth A m e r ic a

1 C o m p le tio n o f E c o n o m ic s I a n d —(a ) E c o n o m ic H is to ry II; o r(b ) w ith th e a p p ro v a l o f th e H ead

o f th e D e p a rtm e n t o f E c o n o m ic H is to ry , E c o n o m ic H is to ry I

283

Faculty of Economics

FirstColumn

SecondColumn

ThirdColumn

FourthColumn

Item No. Units Points Conditions

32 Statistics A01 1 Unless the Head of the Department of Statistics otherwise permits, completion of—(a) 2S Mathematics for the New

South Wales Higher School Certificate or work in mathematics at an equivalent level; or

(b ) Statistics A03

33 Statistics A02 1 Completion of Statistics A01

34 Statistics A03 1

35 Statistics B01 1 Unless the Head of the Department of Statistics otherwise permits, completion of—(a) Applied Mathematics I;(b) General Mathematics; or(c) Pure Mathematics I

36 Statistics B01 (Honours) H Completion of Pure Mathematics I

37 Statistics B02 1 Completion of Statistics B01 or Statistics B01 (Honours)

38 Statistics B02 (Honours) 1 * Completion of Statistics B01 (Honours)

39 Statistics B03 1 1. Completion of Statistics B01 or Statistics B01 (Honours); and

2. Completion or concurrent taking of Economics II

40 Statistics B03 (Honours) "I i 1. Completion of Statistics B01 or Statistics B01 (Honours); and

2. Completion or concurrent taking of Economics II

41 Statistics C01 1 Completion of—(a) Pure Mathematics II; and(b ) Statistics B02 or Statistics

B02 (Honours)

42 Statistics C01 (Honours) 1 i Completion of—(a) Pure Mathematics II; and(b) Statistics B02 (Honours)

43 Statistics C02 1 Completion of Statistics C01 or Statistics C01 (Honours)

44 Statistics C02 (Honours) 1£ Completion of Statistics C01 (Honours)

284

Degree Rules

F irs t C o lu m n

Item N o.

S e c o n dC o lu m n

U n its

T h irdC o lu m n

P o in ts

F o u rthC o lu m n

C o n d it io n s

4 5 S ta tis t ic s C 0 3 1 C o m p le tio n o f P ure M a th e m a tic s I a n d —(a) S ta tis t ic s A 0 2 ;(b) S ta tis t ic s B 0 1 ; o r(c ) S ta tis t ic s B01 (H o n o u rs )

46 S ta tis t ic s C 0 4 1 C o m p le tio n o f P ure M a th e m a tic s 1 a n d —(a ) S ta tis t ic s A 0 2 ;(b) S ta tis t ic s B 0 1 ; o r(c ) S ta tis t ic s B01 (H o n o u rs )

47 S ta tis t ic s C 0 5 1 C o m p le tio n o f—(a ) E c o n o m ic s II; an d(b) S ta tis t ic s B 0 3 o r S ta tis t ic s

B 0 3 (H o n o u rs )

4 8 S ta tis t ic s C 0 5 (H o n o u rs ) H C o m p le tio n o f—(a ) E c o n o m ic s II; and(b) S ta tis t ic s B 0 3 (H o n o u rs )

49 W e lfa re an d T a x a tio n 1 C o m p le tio n o r c o n c u rre n t ta k in g o f E c o n o m ic s II

(5) The value, for the purposes of these Rules, of a unit from another Faculty is such number of points as is determined by the Faculty.(6) A unit from another Faculty shall be taken in accordance with the Courses of Study (Degree of Bachelor of Arts) Rules, the Courses of Study (Degree of Bachelor of Arts (Asian Studies)) Rules, the Courses of Study (Degree of Bachelor of Laws) Rules, or the Courses of Study (Degree of Bachelor of Science) Rules as the case requires.(7) Notwithstanding anything con­tained in these rules—(a) a candidate may not receive credit—(i) for both Mathematics for

Economists and Pure Mathe­matics I; or

(ii) except with the permission of the Faculty, for more than one

unit from another Faculty that is a first-year unit;

(b) a candidate may not, except with the permission of the Faculty, receive credit for more than eight points in respect of first-year units taken by him;(c) a candidate who takes the approved major set out as group 5 in the table in rule 8 of these Rules shall not receive credit for—(i) more than three of the units

specified in that group or, if he is a candidate for the degree with honours in Political Science, more than four of those units;or

(ii) any unit from another Faculty other than General Mathematics or Pure Mathematics I;

(d) a candidate shall not take Statistics A01 or Statistics A02 concurrently with, or after com­pletion of, Statistics B01; and

285

Faculty of Economics

(e) a candidate shall not take Statistics A03 —(i) concurrently with, or after

completion of, Applied Mathe­matics I, General Mathematics, Pure Mathematics I or Statistics B01; or

(ii) if the Faculty requires him to take Statistics A01 in its stead.

(8) In the application of sub- paragraph (ii) of paragraph {a), and paragraph (b), of the last preceding sub-rule, Pure Mathematics I shall be deemed not to be a first-year

unit.(9) In the application of sub- paragraph (ii) of paragraph (a) of sub-rule 7 of this rule, Applied Mathematics I and General Mathematics shall be deemed not to be first-year units.8. Subject to these Rules, the groups of units set out in the following table, when taken in the sequences specified in that table, are approved majors for the pass degree.

F irs tC o lu m n

G ro u p

S e c o n dC o lu m n

F irs t-Y e a r U n its

T h irdC o lu m n

S e c o n d -Y e a r U n its

F o u rthC o lu m n

T h ird -Y e a r U n its

1 E co n o m ics I E c o n o m ic s II E c o n o m ic s III

2 A c c o u n t in g I A c c o u n t in g II T w o o f—(a ) C o m p a n y F inance ;(b ) F in a n c ia l A c c o u n t in g T h e o ry ;(c ) N a tio n a l E c o n o m ic

A c c o u n t in g ;(d ) P u b lic A u th o r ity A c c o u n t in g

3 A c c o u n t in g I 1. N a tio n a l E c o n o m ic A c c o u n t in g ; an d

2. P u b lic A u th o r ity A c c o u n t in g

1. E x p e n d itu re and F isca l In s t itu t io n s ;and

2. W e lfa re an d T a x a tio n

4 E c o n o m ic E c o n o m ic 1. T w o o f —H is to ry I H is to ry II (a ) E c o n o m ic D e v e lo p m e n t

o f M o d e rn J a p a n ;(b ) P ro b le m s o f U n d e r­

d e v e lo p m e n t: Ind ia ;(c ) R e ce n t E c o n o m ic

E xpe rie nce in E urope and N o rth A m e rica ;or

2. H is to ry o f E c o n o m ic T h o u g h t

5 P o lit ic a l P o lit ic a l O ne o f —S c ie n c e I S c ie n c e II (a ) A s ia n G o v e rn m e n t;

(b ) In te rn a tio n a l R e la tio n s ;(c ) P o lit ic a l C o m m u n ic a tio n ;(d ) P o lit ic a l S o c io lo g y ;(e ) P u b lic P o lic y and

A d m in is tra t io n

286

Degree Rules

F irs t S e c o n d T h ird F o u r thC o lu m n C o lu m n C o lu m n C o lu m n

G ro u p F irs t-Y e a r U n its S e c o n d -Y e a r U n its T h ird -Y e a r U n its

6 P ure 1. C o m p u te r T w o o f —M a th e m a tic s 1 S c ie n c e B01 or (a ) C o m p u te r S c ie n c e C 01 ;

w ith th e (b ) C o m p u te r S c ie n c e C 02;p e rm is s io n o f (c ) C o m p u te r S c ie n c e C 03;th e H ead o f id ) S ta tis t ic s C 03 ;th e D e p a rtm e n t o f S ta tis tic s , a n o th e r u n it o ffe re d b y th e F a c u lty th e v a lu e o f w h ic h is on e p o in t; an d

(e ) S ta tis t ic s C 0 4

2. C o m p u te rS c ie n c e B 02

7 P ure 1. M a th e m a tic a l 1. M a th e m a tic a l E c o n o m ic sM a th e m a tic s 1 E c o n o m ic s IA ; 11 A ;

and and2. M a th e m a tic a l 2. M a th e m a tic a l E c o n o m ic s

E c o n o m ic s IB MB

8 O n e o f — T w o o f —(a ) Pure S ta tis t ic s B01 or (a ) S ta tis t ic s B 0 3 o r

M a th e m a tic s 1; S ta tis t ic s B01 S ta tis t ic s B 0 3 (H o n o u rs ) ,(b ) A p p lie d (H o n o u rs ) and: w h e re n o t ta k e n as pa rt

M a th e m a tic s 1; (a ) S ta tis t ic s o f th e s e c o n d -y e a r(c ) G enera l B 0 2 o r re q u ire m e n t o f th e m a jo r;

M a th e m a tic s S ta tis tic s (b ) S ta tis t ic s C01 orB 0 2 (H o n o u rs ) , S ta tis t ic s C01 (H o n o u rs ) ;o r (c ) S ta tis t ic s C 0 2 o r

(b ) S ta tis t ic s S ta tis t ic s C 0 2 (H o n o u rs ) ;B 0 3 o r (d ) S ta tis t ic s C 03 ;S ta tis t ic s B 0 3 (e ) S ta tis t ic s C 04;(H o n o u rs ) ( f ) S ta tis t ic s C 0 5 o r

S ta tis t ic s C 0 5 (H o n o u rs )

P A R T II

F irs t S e c o n d T h irdC o /u m n C o lu m n C o lu m n

G ro u p F irs t-Y e a r U n its S e c o n d an d T h ird -Y e a r U n its

9 O ne o f— S u c h u n its o ffe re d(a ) A c c o u n t in g 1; b y th e F a c u lty ,(b ) E c o n o m ic b e in g u n its o th e r

H is to ry 1; th a n :(c ) G enera l (a ) f irs t-y e a r u n its ;

M a th e m a tic s ; (b ) u n its o ffe re d by(d ) P ure th e D e p a rtm e n t

M a th e m a tic s 1 o f P o lit ic a l S c ie n ce ;

287

Faculty of Economics

First Second ThirdColumn Column ColumnGroup First-Year Units Second and Third-Year Units

(c) units that,together with the unit taken as the first-year unit of the major, form another of the majors specified in this table,

as together have a value of four points

9. * * ............................10. (1) With the permission of the head of the department in which a unit is taken, a candidate may enrol for distinction in a unit.(2) A candidate who has enrolled for distinction in a unit may only sit for a distinction examination in that unit with the approval of the head of the department in which the unit is taken.10A. The performance of a candi­date in a unit shall be classified as 'High Distinction', 'Distinction', 'Credit', 'Pass with Merit', 'Pass' or 'Fail'.11. Except with the permission of the Faculty, a candidate shall not be admitted to the pass degree unless—(a) he has completed the course for the degree and has otherwise complied with these Rules; and(b) subject to the next succeeding rule, he completed that course within the period of eight years from the beginning of the academic year in which he first submitted himself for the Annual Examination in a unit of that course.12. (1) The Faculty may admit a candidate who has performed work or passed a unit or subject—(a) in another faculty;(b ) in another university in Aus- 288

tralia, or at another university out­side Australia approved by the Faculty, being work performed, or a unit or subject passed, after matricu­lation at that university; or(c) in a college of advanced education or similar institution, being work performed, or a unit or subject passed, that is, in the opinion of the Faculty, of degree standardto such advanced status in the course for the pass degree as theFaculty determines, having regard to that work, unit or subject.(2) Where the Faculty admits a candidate to advanced status under the last preceding sub-rule, the Faculty shall fix a time, not being more than eight years from the date of admission of the candidate to the course for the pass degree at this University, within which the candi­date must comply with the require­ments of these Rules.(3) Unless in a particular case the Faculty otherwise determines—(a) a candidate shall not be granted status in relation to work performed, or a unit or subject passed, more than ten years before the date on which the candidate applied for status in relation to that work or unit; and(b) a candidate shall not be permit-

Degree Rules.

ted to enrol for a unit forming part of a sequence of units where the candidate seeks status in relation to work performed or a unit or subject passed in relation to that sequence of units more than ten years before the date on which the candidate applies to enrol for that first- mentioned unit.

The degree w ith honours13. Unless admitted to advanced status, a candidate for the degree with honours shall pursue his studies for at least four years after admis­sion to the course.13A. The Faculty may admit a candidate who has performed work or completed part of a course at this University, at another university or at a college of advanced education or a similar institution to such advanced status in the course for the honours degree as the Faculty determines, having regard to all the circumstances of the case.14. (1) A candidate for the degree with honours may be awarded honours in one of the following honours courses:(a) Economics (to be taken in the Department of Economics);(b) Economic History (to be taken in the Department of Economic History);(c) Political Science (to be taken in the Department of Political Science);(d ) Statistics (to be taken in the Department of Statistics); or(e) Accounting or Public Finance (to be taken in the Department of Accounting and Public Finance).(2) A candidate who has been awarded honours in one course may, with the approval of the Faculty, be awarded honours in a

second course after satisfactorily completing one further year's work as specified by the head of the department responsible for his second honours course.15. The Faculty may admit a candi­date to an honours course on the recommendation of the head of the department in which the honours course is proposed to be taken.16. A candidate for the degree with honours shall, in the first three academic years, take such courses as are approved by the Faculty for the pass degree together with such additional work as is specified by the head of the department respons­ible for the honours course to which he is admitted.17. (1) A candidate may be admit­ted to the fourth year by the Faculty if he has reached a sufficiently high standard in the first three years of his degree course.(2) Except with permission of the Faculty, a candidate shall not be admitted to the fourth year if the pass degree of Bachelor of Econ­omics has been conferred upon him at the end of his third year.18. (1) Except with the permission of the Faculty, a candidate for the degree with honours shall not be admitted to the degree unless he has pursued his studies for the fourth year of the course—(a) if he is a full-time student— throughout the period of one year next following the completion by him of the requirements for the pass degree; or(ö) if he is a part-time student— throughout the period of two years next following the completion by him of the requirements for thepass degree,and has completed that fourth year

289

Faculty of Economics

of the course at the expiration of that period.(2) At the expiration of the first year of candidature of a part-time student in the fourth year of the course, the Faculty may, on the recommendation of the head of the department in which the honours course is being taken, if, in the opinion of the Faculty, the candidate is not making satisfactory progress in that course, cancel his enrolment as a candidate for the degree with honours.(3) Where, in pursuance of the last preceding sub-rule, the Faculty has cancelled the enrolment of a person as a candidate for the degree with honours, that person shall be deemed, for the purposes of rule 22A of these Rules to have abandoned the course for the degree with honours.19. A candidate in the fourth year shall take the honours course and shall also submit a thesis in the field of his honours work as specifiedby the head of the department.20. Except with the permission of the Faculty, a candidate for the degree with honours shall not attempt the honours year more than once.21. The degree with honours shall be awarded with first class honours, second class A honours, second class B honours and third class honours.22. A candidate who has complied with the provisions of these Rules relating to the degree with honours and who has reached a standard satisfactory to the Faculty in the units of his course and any other work that he is required to perform may be admitted to the degree of

Bachelor of Economics with honours.22A. A candidate for the degree with honours who-(a) fails to attain the required standard for the award of that degree; or(b ) abandons the course for that degree,may be admitted to the pass degree if he has complied with the require­ments of these Rules for admission to that degree.23. Where, after the commencement of this rule, an amendment affecting the courses of study that may be taken by candidates for the pass degree of Bachelor of Economics or the degree of Bachelor of Econ­omics with honours is made to these Rules, the amendment does not apply to such a candidate who, before the making of the amend­ment, completed one or more units of a course of study approved by the Faculty unless-(a) the student elects that the amendment apply to him and sub­mits to the Faculty proposed altera­tions to his course that are in accordance with these Rules as amended by the amendment and the Faculty approves those altera­tions; or(b ) the Faculty otherwise deter­mines.

Courses of Study (Combined Course for Degrees of Bachelor of Economics and Bachelor of Laws) Rules1. In these Rules, unless the cont­rary intention appears- 'combined course' means a com­bined course of study for the degrees in accordance with these Rules

290

Degree Rules

'the degrees' means the degree of Bachelor of Economics and the degree of Bachelor of Laws 'the Faculties' means the Faculty of Economics and the Faculty of Law 'the law subjects' means the sub­jects prescribed for the degree of Bachelor of Laws by rule 4 of the Courses of Study (Degree of Bachelor of Laws) Rules other than —(a) the subject required to be taken in accordance with paragraph (e) of sub-rule (2) of that rule; and(b ) one of the subjects required to be taken in accordance with paragraph (d ) of sub-rule (3) of that rule.2 . * * * * * * *

3. A candidate who is permitted to undertake a combined course shall, before commencing the course, submit the details of the course to the Faculties for approval in accordance with these Rules and shall submit any variations of the course for the approval of the Faculties.4. (1) Subject to this rule, the Faculties shall not approve a course or variation of a course under the last preceding rule unless the course, or the course as varied, as the case may be-(a) consists o f-(i) units prescribed for the pass

degree of Bachelor of Econo­mics the total value of which, for the purposes of the Courses of Study (Degree of Bachelor of Economics) Rules, is not less than twelve points; and

(ii) the law subjects; and{b) requires the candidate to pass all of the units referred to in sub- paragraph (i) of the last preceding paragraph before taking more than

eleven of the law subjects.(2) The units referred to in sub- paragraph (i) of paragraph (a) of the last preceding sub-rule shall include a major in Economics I,II and III and-(a) an additional major approved by the Faculty of Economics; or(b ) If the sequence of units Statistics A01 and A02 or the sequence of units Statistics A03 and A01 is also completed by the candidate, a sequence of units approved by the Faculty of Economics, the total valueof which, for the purposes of the Courses of Study (Degree of Bachelor of Economics) Rules, is not less than four points, but shall not in any case include any units that are also among the law subjects that have been or are to be taken by the candidate for the degree of Bachelor of Laws.(3) The Faculties may, in special circumstances, approve a course or a variation of a course that does not comply with paragraph (b ) of sub­rule (1) of this rule.

5. A candidate undertaking a com­bined course shall—(a) pursue his approved course-(i) in the case of a candidate for

the pass degree of Bachelor of Economics and the degree of Bachelor of Laws (not being a candidate admitted by the Faculties to advanced status) — for not less than five years; or

(ii) in any other case— for such period as the Faculties deter­mine; and

(b ) submit himself for examination in the units and subjects of his course.

6. (1) A candidate undertaking a combined course who passes the

291

Faculty of Economics

examinations prescribed for the units referred to in sub-paragraph (i) of paragraph (a) of sub-rule (1) of rule 4 of these Rules and passes the examinations prescribed for not less than seven of the law subjects may be admitted to the pass degree of Bachelor of Economics.(2) A candidate undertaking a combined course who complies with the last preceding sub-rule and complies with the requirements prescribed for the degree of Bache­lor of Economics with honours may be admitted to that degree.

7. *8. Except where inconsistent with these Rules, the Courses of Study (Degree of Bachelor of Economics) Rules and the Courses of Study (Degree of Bachelor of Laws)Rules apply to and in relation to a candidate undertaking a combined course.

Courses of Study (D egree of M aster o f Economics) Rules t1. In these Rules, unless the cont­rary intention appears, 'the Faculty' means the Faculty of Economics in the School of General Studies.2. A person is not eligible for admission by the Faculty as a candidate for the degree of Master of Economics unless—(a) he is approved as a candidate for the degree by the head of the department in which he proposes to enrol; and(b) he has—(i) completed the course for the

degree of Bachelor of Econo­mics at the University; or

(ii) completed the course for some other degree at the University,

fThese Rules are currently under review.

292

being a degree approved by the Faculty; or

(iii) completed the course for adegree approved by the Faculty at some other university approved by the Faculty.

3. (1) Subject to the next suc­ceeding rule, a candidate for the degree of Master of Economics shall, for a period of one year, under­take research, or pursue a course of study, approved by the Faculty, under such supervision as the Faculty determines, or both under­take such research and pursue such a course of study.(2) If the Dean of the Faculty, after consultation with the head of the department concerned, considers that a candidate is not making satisfactory progress, he may recom­mend to the Faculty the cancella­tion of the candidate's enrolment and the Faculty may direct the can­cellation of the candidate's enrol­ment or take such other action as it thinks fit.4. (1) Except with the approval of the Faculty, a candidate for the degree of Master of Economics other than a candidate who—(a) has completed the course for the degree of Bachelor of Econ­omics at the University with first class honours or second class A honours; or(b ) has completed a course referred to in sub-paragraph (ii) or (iii) of paragraph (b) of rule 2 of these Rules at a standard that, in the opinion of the Faculty, is equivalent to the standard specified in the last preceding paragraph in relation to the course for the degree of Bache­lor of Economics at the University, shall, either before or during the undertaking of research or the pur-

Degree Rules

suing of a course of study in accordance with the last preceding rule also pursue a preliminary course of study prescribed by the Faculty and submit himself for an examina­tion prescribed by the Faculty in respect of that preliminary course of study.(2) The preliminary course of study referred to in the last preceding sub­rule shall be pursued by the can- didate-(a) subject to the next succeeding paragraph-for a period of one year; or(b) if the Faculty, on the recom­mendation of the head of the department in which the candidate proposes to enrol, so directs—for a period of two years.(3) Where a candidate is directed by the Faculty to pursue a prelimin­ary course of study for a period of two years, the Faculty may prescribe as part of that course that the can­didate shall enrol for and pass examinations at a specified standard in two of the units prescribed for the degree of Bachelor of Econ­omics.(4) Where a candidate is required in pursuance of this rule, to pursue a preliminary course of study and submit himself for an examination in respect of that preliminary courseof study, the results of the research or study undertaken or pursued by the candidate for the degree shall not be accepted by the Faculty for examination unless the candidate has satisfied the Faculty in his work in the preliminary course of study and in his results at the examination in respect of that preliminary course of study that he is suitably qualified to undertake research or pursue a course of study for the degree.

5. (1) A candidate shall be examined for admission to the degree in a manner determined by the Faculty on the recommendation of the head of the appropriate department or, where there is no appropriate department or the Faculty so determines, on the recommendation of a committee appointed by the Faculty for the purpose, and the examination may comprise the submission of a thesis, the submission of a series of papers or reports, written examination, oral examination or a combination of all or any of those means of examination.(2y . . . . . .(3) Where a candidate submits a thesis, he shall also submit with the thesis a statement in writing, signed by the candidate, declaring whether all sources of the thesis have been acknowledged and whether the thesis is his own composition.(4) A candidate shall not submit for examination-(a) any work in respect of which he has already qualified for a degree at the University or at any other uni­versity; or(b) except with the permission of the Faculty, any work,he has pre­viously submitted for such a degree.6. (1) A thesis or a series of papers or reports relating to research or study submitted by a candidate shall be examined by at least two examiners, of whom at least one shall be an examiner external to the University.{2). . . . . . .(3) A candidate who complies with the requirements of these Rules and whose research or study is adjudged by the Faculty to be of sufficient merit may be admitted to the degree of Master of Economics.

293

Faculty of Economics

Courses of Study (Degree of M aster of Agricultural Develop­m ent Economics) RulesRules for the newly established degree of Master of Agricultural Development Economics are being prepared.

Courses of Study (D ip lom a of Economics) Rules1. In these Rules, unless the contrary intention appears—'the Department' means the Department of Economics;'the Faculty' means the Faculty of Economics.2. The Faculty may admit to the course for the Diploma of Econo­mics a person who has completed a course for the Degree of Bachelor of Economics with Honours, or a degree deemed by the Faculty to be equivalent to such a degree, at a university approved by the Faculty for the purposes of these Rules.3. The course for the Diploma of Economics shall consist of studies, at a level equivalent to that of the fourth year of the course of studies for the Degree of Bachelor of Economics under the Courses of Study (Degree of Bachelor of Economics) Rules, in the Depart­ment of Economics.4. Except with the permission of the Head of the Department, the course for the Diploma of Economics shall be completed in one year.5. (1) A candidate for the Diploma of Economics shall be examined in the work prescribed for the course in such manner as the Faculty, on the recommendation of the Head of the Department, determines.(2) A candidate shall not be admitted to any such examination in respect of any part of the course

294

unless he has attended such classes and performed satisfactorily such work as is required by the Head of the Department.

Academic Progress Rules

Academic Progress of Students (Faculty o f Economics) Rules1 . (1) In these Rules-'enrol' includes re-enrol and 'enrol­ment' includes re-enrolment 'Faculty' means the Faculty of Economics'the Board' means the Board of the School of General Studies.(2) A reference in these Rules to a 'course', 'subject' or 'unit' means a course or a subject or unit, as the case may be, of a degree for which the Faculty is responsible.2. (1) Subject to this rule, where a person-(a) is enrolled or has previously been enrolled in the University or in another university or institute of higher learning or education; and(b ) thas not in the opinion of the Faculty, achieved satisfactory aca­demic progress in the University or in that other university or institute of higher learning or education,the Faculty may direct that the person-(c) shall not be admitted to a course of study(d) shall not be permitted to con­tinue in a course of study or shall be permitted to continue in a course of study only upon specified condi­tions(e) shall not be permitted to enrol or re-enrol in a subject or unit or shall be permitted to enrol or re- enrol in a subject or unit only upon specified conditions; or(f ) shall not be permitted to con­tinue in a subject or unit or shall be permitted to continue in a subject or unit only upon specified condi­tions.(2) Before the Faculty gives a direction under the last preceding sub-rule in relation to a person who

has been previously enrolled in the Faculty of Economics, the person shall be given an opportunity of making representations to the Faculty with respect to his enrol­ment and the Faculty shall take into account any such representa­tions.(3) Where a person is refused per­mission under sub-rule (1) of this rule to continue in a course of study or to enrol or re-enrol in a compulsory unit without which no student may qualify for the degree of Bachelor of Economics, he may appeal to the Board.I

fFor the purpose of assessing academic progress the Faculty will recognise, generally, that a student who notifies the Academic Registrar in writing of his intention to cancel his enrolment in a full-year unit in any year before the last day of the second term will not be considered to have failed in that unit, except that a student who repeatedly cancels his enrolment may be con­sidered to have failed in that unit.A student who notifies the Academic Registrar in writing of his intention to cancel his enrolment in a semester unit in any year by the following times will not be considered to have failed in that semester unit, except that a student who repeatedly cancels his enrolment may be considered to have failed in that unit: First semester units: The last day of first term.Second semester units: The first day of third term.|A paper explaining the detailed pro­cedures of the Faculty of Economics in relation to academic progress is available in the office of the Faculty Secretary.

295

Faculty of Law 297

Contents

T he L a w degrees 2 9 9

G enera l 3 0 8

D e ta ils o f su b je c ts and b o o k lis ts 3 2 0

D egree R u les 3 3 3

A c a d e m ic P rog ress R ules 34 1

298

The Faculty of LawThe Law degrees

The Faculty of Law offers courses for the pass degree of Bachelor of Laws, the degree of Bachelor of Laws with Honours and the degree of Master of Laws. It also super­vises students for the degree of Doctor of Philosophy.

The number of places for undergraduate students in the Faculty of Law in 1 972 will be limited. Those who satisfy the University's general admission requirements will not necessarily gain entry to the Faculty of Law.

Applicants for enrolment in the LLB, BA/LLB, BA (Asian Studies)/LLB or BEc/LLB degree courses will be advised as soon as possible after 25 January 1972 whether they have been selected. Those selected will then be given a limited time to notify the University whether or not they wish to accept the offer of a place.

There is no separate quota for each different law course.Applicants for the four courses are ranked together in one order of academic merit for selection to the Faculty of Law. Thus in stating his order of preference for degree courses on the enrolment application form an applicant should list only one of the four law courses.

An applicant for a place in the Faculty of Law may apply in writing to change his selected law course but an application for a change to the BA/LLB degree course received after 5 pm on Friday 21 January 1972 may not be accepted.

There are no matriculation pre­requisite subjects and there is no subject which serves as a special

preparation for legal studies. A wide range of matriculation subjects pro­vides the best background for under­graduate studies in law. The most important requirement of the law student, however, is that he be able to express himself clearly in English. Clarity of expression, like clarity of thought, is essential for lawyers.The policy of the Faculty on this matter is set forth under the heading 'Advice to New Students' on page 312.

Enrolments are accepted for full­time or part-time study. In the view of the Faculty, a student who is able to enrol on a full-time basis would be wise to do so. A degree in law can be gained only by a course of prolonged and intensive study which makes heavy demands on time and intellectual energy. If this study is pursued as the student's primary concern, rather than as an adjunct to some other form of employment, it should provide the most effective preparation for the expanding range of careers which are open to law graduates.

The degree of Bachelor of LawsA candidate for the degree of Bachelor of Laws is required to pass in twenty-two subjects. Fif­teen subjects are compulsory. They are designed to ensure that every student gains a sufficient grounding in the fundamental branches of the law. The remaining seven subjects may be chosen from a range of optional subjects, according to the student's interests and plans for the future.

A full-time student may complete the course in four years and a part- time student in not less than six years. A full-time student usually takes four compulsory subjects in

299

Faculty of Law

the first year, four compulsory sub­jects and one optional subject in the second year, four compulsory and three optional subjects in the third year, and three compulsory and three optional subjects in the fourth year. Part-time students in their first year are normally required to take two subjects. Legal Method and Legal and Constitutional His­tory. Usually a full-time student spends about twelve hours a week attending formal classes. Part-time students after their first year of enrolment are normally required by the Faculty to attempt a work load involving about eight hours of formal classes a week. The Faculty determines the number of subjects which a student may take each year and their order.

The Faculty plans to offer the following eighteen optional subjects in 1972:Advanced Commercial Law Air & Space Law Company Law Comparative Law Conflict of Laws Criminology Law of Employment Family LawLaw of Industrial Property International Business Transactions International LawLaw of International OrganisationsJurisprudenceLabour RelationsThe Legislative ProcessLocal Government and Town

Planning Law Soviet Law Taxation

It is hoped to introduce some additional optional subjects in the near future. The range is sufficiently wide to allow a student either to develop a specialised interest in

particular fields such as commercial law or public law, or to make a broad selection of subjects which will provide him with a wide scope for later decisions concerning his career. The division of the optional subjects into third and fourth-year groups is not inflexible. Subject to the inevitable limitations on choice set by the time-table, the Faculty is prepared to approve a selection of optional subjects that best serves the student's requirements, without restricting him to a stipulated number of subjects from each of the groups, or insisting that the subjects must in all cases be taken in the order indicated in the Rules.

The optional subjects at present approved under Rule 4(1)(e) in the second year of the course are Company Law, Comparative Law, Criminology, Law of Employment, Law of Industrial Property, Inter­national Law, Law of International Organisations, and Local Govern­ment and Town Planning Law.The Sub-Dean is prepared to help any student who requires advice before choosing his optional subjects.

Students intending to enter legal practice in Victoria should note that unless they pass Taxation in the course for the degree of Bachelor of Laws they must pass a postgraduate examination in the subject before they can qualify for admission to practice.

Students must pass Contracts before attempting Commercial Law or Law of Employment, Property I before attempting Property II or Trusts and Commercial Law before attempting International Business Transactions. Taxation may only be taken by students who have com­pleted or are concurrently doing the

300

The Law Degrees

subject of Company Law.Advanced Commercial Law may only be undertaken by students who have completed Company Law and who have completed or are con­currently doing a course in Taxation. It is desirable that students should pass Criminal Law before attempting Criminology.

The degree of Bachelor of Laws for graduates in other disciplinesThe Faculty plans to introduce shortly a degree of Bachelor of Laws for graduates in other disciplines with a good academic record in their first degree. A full­time student may complete the course in three years and a part- time student in five years.Enquiries about the course should be directed to the Academic Registrar.

The degree of Bachelor of Laws w ith honoursThe length of the course of study for the degrees of Bachelor of Laws and Bachelor of Laws with Honours is the same. Students may be invited by the Faculty to be candidates for the final examination for the degree with honours if they obtain a suffic­iently high standard in the subjects prescribed for the first, second and third years of the pass degree course.

The final honours examination comprises two parts, Part A and Part B. Seven-tenths of the total marks are allotted to Part A and three-tenths to Part B.

Part A is constituted by the exam­inations in all subjects taken for the pass degree. The Faculty may, in its discretion, use either of two meth­ods in assessing the results of Part

A. Under the first method, all sub­jects are weighted equally. Under the second method, a student's results in subjects in the first year of the course for the degree of Bache­lor of Laws may be disregarded, and all other subjects are weighted equally. It is the Faculty's intention that the method which produces the more favourable assessment will be used to determine the student's result in Part A.

Part B comprises a research paper of approximately 12,000 words on a topic approved by the Faculty. Its object is to enable the honours candidate to undertake sustained, intensive work on a specific piece of legal research, thoroughly testing his critical powers of analysis of the problems raised by his topic, his ability to bring relevant knowledge to bear upon them, and his creative powers in framing solutions for them.

The Faculty considers the eligibility of a full-time candidate to be admit­ted to Part B of the final honours examination as soon as possible after the candidate has sat the annual examinations for all sub­jects of the third year of the course leading to the pass degree. The eligibility of a part-time student will usually be determined after the annual examinations preceding his final year. Eligibility will normally be determined on the basis of the student's results in all subjects pre­scribed for the first, second and third years of the course for the degree of Bachelor of Laws . A stu­dent must obtain at least a credit average to qualify for an invitation.In exceptional circumstances, how ever, the Faculty may also admit to Part B of the final honours exami­nation a candidate transferred from

301

Faculty of Law

another university who has attained a satisfactory standard at this uni­versity in subjects of the course leading to the pass degree.

A candidate who is admitted to Part B of the final honours examina­tion will be required to submit his research paper to the Faculty on or before 1 5 Aprilj of the final year of his course of study for the degree of Bachelor of Laws. Honours results are announced at the same time as other annual examination results.The objective sought in the time­tabling of the Part B research paper is to enable candidates to carry out the necessary research work in the long vacation immediately preceding their final year. It is very important for a candidate to obtain prompt approval for his proposed research paper topic from the Faculty as soon as he receives an invitation to enter for Part B of the final honours examination. Invitations are issued about mid-December and research paper topics should be approved by Christmas. Candidates should arrange appointments to see or should write to the lecturer-in­charge of the subject most closely related to their proposed research topic.

Combined courses The University offers combined courses in the Faculties of Arts and Law, Asian Studies and Law, and Economics and Law. A student may gain two degrees, either Bachelor of Arts and Bachelor of Laws, Bachelor of Arts (Asian Studies) and Bachelor of Laws or Bachelor of Economics and Bachelor of Laws, in a period of

fA revision of this requirement is under consideration where there are exceptional circumstances.302

five years full-time study. It is the policy of the Faculty of Law to encourage students to take one of these combined courses. One of the reasons for this is to widen the student's education and under­standing and to enable him to study society from a viewpoint outside that of legal scholarship. But the reasons for the combined courses go beyond this important aim. The law reaches into all areas of society and interlinks with other fields of study, particularly the social sciences. The broader the lawyer's education, therefore, the better lawyer he is likely to be. The student who, for example, wishes to become a com­mercial lawyer or has a general interest in commerce or public fin­ance, will find that the combined course in Economics and Law offers a comprehensive framework for his vocational interests.

Combined course in Arts and LawAny student wishing to take a com­bined course leading to the degrees of Bachelor of Arts and Bachelor of Laws must submit details of his proposed course to both Faculties.

Full -time pass students must spend a minimum of five years and part- time students a minimum of eight years to complete the combined course. The length of the combined course renders part-time study inad­visable and the Faculties will exam­ine such applications carefully.

The combined course consists of all the subjects prescribed for the degree of Bachelor of Laws except for the optional subject in the second year, and any five units so chosen that an arts major (sequence of three units in one subject, e.g. English IA, 11A and IIIA, or History

The Law Degrees

1C, History 11C, and History MIC) is included. Normally the arts units should be completed in the first three years of the course. A pass student successfully following a standard pattern of the combined course may graduate in arts at the end of three years and in law two years later.

A student wishing to take an hon­ours degree in arts should consult the head of the appropriate depart­ment and the Sub-Dean of the Faculty of Arts. Most departments in the Faculty of Arts require an honours student to take more than a major in the subject and extra hon­ours work is set in the second and

third years of the course. It is there­fore usually not feasible for an Arts/Law student to contemplate honours in an arts subject unless he is prepared to lengthen his coursef and to accept an extremely heavy workload. He would probably take four years, instead of three, to qualify for admission to the hon­ours year in his arts subject. He sus­pends his law studies whiie undertaking his final honours in arts, which is completed in one year by a full-time student. The prescriptions for honours work in law are set out above. j-A revision of the requirements for honours in arts subjects is under consideration.

The following are the standard pat- any arts subject, I, II and III repre-terns of the combined course for sent a sequence of units in the samepass students (x, y and z represent arts subject).

1 st year xl y! Legal Method Legal and Constitu­tional History

2nd year xll y ll or zl Contracts Criminal Law and Procedure!

3rd year X 111 Commercial Law Administrative Law Property I T orts !

4th year All subjects specified for the 3rd year of the LLB degree course.

5th year All subjects specified for the 4th year of the LLB degree course.

1 st year xl yi zl Legal Method

2nd year xll Legal and Consti­tutional History

Contracts Criminal Law and Procedure!

3rd year x lll Commercial Law Administrative Law Property I T orts !

4th year All subjects specified for the 3rd year of the LLB degree course (see page 333)

5th year All subjects specified for the 4th year of the LLB degree course (see page 333)

tV a r ia t io n s in th e o r d e r o f la w s u b je c t s f o r t h e 2 n d a n d 3 rd y e a r s o f th e c o u r s e w i l l b e c o n s id e r e d b y th e

F a c u l t y o f L a w .

303

Faculty of Law

Combined course in Asian Studies and LawA combined course leading to the degrees of Bachelor of Asian Studies and Bachelor of Laws will be offered for the first time in 1 972. Only students who have proven ability in language studies should consider enrolling for this combined course as the workload is very heavy. Any student wishing to undertake the combined course should consult the Sub-Deans or Faculty Secretaries of both Faculties.

Full-time students must spend a minimum of five years to complete this combined course. Part-time study is inadvisable.

The combined course consists of all the law subjects prescribed for the degree of Bachelor of Laws with the exception of two optional subjects together with six Asian studies units to be taken as two majors. One of these majors must be an Asian language but two language majors cannot be attempted unless there is a relationship between the languages. The two majors should normally be completed in the first three years of the course and would, unless special approval was given to vary the course, fall into one of the following groups:(i) an Asian Civilization major

with a second major in Modern Chinese Classical Chinese

Bahasa Indonesia and MalaySanskritHindi, orJapanese;

(ii) a Linguistics major with a second major in

Modern ChineseClassical ChineseBahasa Indonesia and MalaySanskritHindi, orJapanese;

(iii) majors in Modern Chinese and Classical Chinese;

(iv) majors in Classical Chinese and Sanskrit;

(v) majors in Sanskrit and Hindi.A student successfully following

a standard pattern of the combined course may graduate in Asian Studies at the end of his third year when he has completed six Asian Studies units, comprising two majors, and any seven law subjects. Unless the Faculties give special permission a candidate is not permitted to take more than eleven law subjects before completing the Asian Studies component of the course. Honours work cannot be undertaken in the Asian Studies component of the combined course.

The following is the standard pat­tern of the combined Asian Studies/ Law course. Other combined course structures may be approved after they have been considered by both Faculties.

304

The Law Degrees

1 st year 1 st unit in an Asian language major

1 st unit in a second approved Asian Studies major

Legal Method Legal & Con­stitutional History

2nd year 2nd unit in an Asian language major

2nd unit in a second approved Asian Studies major

Contracts Criminal Law & Procedure

3rd year 3rd unit in an Asian language major

3rd unit in a second approved Asian Studies major

3 compulsory subjects specified for the 2nd year of the LLB course

4th year 1 remaining compulsory subject of the 2nd year of the LLB course; andAll subjects specified for the 3rd year of the LLB course w ith the exception of an optional law subject.

5th year All subjects specified for the 4th year of the LLB course.

Combined course in Economics and LawA student wishing to take a combined course leading to the degrees of Bachelor of Economics and Bachelor of Laws must submit details of his proposed course to both Faculties.

Full-time pass students must spend a minimum of five years and part-time students a minimum of eight years to complete a combined course. The length of the combined course renders part-time study in­advisable and the Faculties will examine such applications care­fully.

The combined course consists of all the law subjects prescribed for the degree of Bachelor of Laws with the exception of two optional subjects, together with —(i) the major in Economics (Eco­

nomics I, II and III); and(ii) either

(a) an additional major from those offered by the Faculty of Economics and listed in the Courses of Study (Degree of Bachelor of

Economics) Rules; or 0b) two first-year semester

units in Statistics and a sequence of two full-year units (or their equivalent in semester units) approved by the Faculty of Economics, sequence of two full-year units (or their equivalent in semester units) approved by the Faculty of Economics.

Economics I should be attempted in the first year of the combined course, together with one other first-year unit.

Where a student chooses to take the first-year semester units in Statistics and a sequence of two units, the Faculty of Economics may permit him to take the first part of that sequence before he takes the Statistics units. Such sequences will normally contain one of the first-year units Accounting I, Economic History I, Political Science I, Pure Mathematics I or General Mathematics, although in exceptional cases the Faculty of Economics may authorise a

305

Faculty of Law

sequence not containing one of these. Students who have taken Political Science I as the first unit in the sequence may take one of Political Science II, Political Sociology and Public Policy and Administration to complete the sequence. Students who have taken one of the other first-year units may complete the sequence with any later-year unit/s (for which they have the prerequisites), whether in the same field as the first-year unit or not. The table in Rule 7 (4) of the Courses of Study (Degree of Bachelor of Economics) Rules sets out the pre­requisites for admission to later- year units.

Under the standard pattern for the combined course a student may graduate in economics at the end of his third year provided he has completed the six economics units (or their equivalent in semester units) and seven law subjects (normally the four law subjects in

the first year and three of the compulsory law subjects in the second year of the course for the degree of Bachelor of Laws). He may graduate in law two years later by completing the one remain ng compulsory second-year subject, the third-year subjects with the exception of one optional subject and the fourth-year subjects of the course for the degree of Bachelor of Laws.

The Faculty of Law will advise each student on the desirable order­ing of the law subjects in the combined course after the end of the second year.

All students who are interested in undertaking an honours course in economics should consult the Faculty of Economics.

The following are the standard patterns of the combined Economics /Law course. Other combined course structures may be approved, after they have been considered by both Faculties.

1st year Economics I 2 first-year Legal Method Legal and Consti-semester units in tutional HistoryStatistics

2nd year Economics II 1st unit in an Contracts Criminal Law andapproved sequence Procedureof 2

3rd year Economics III 2nd unit in an 3 subjects specified for the 2nd year approved sequence of the LLB course of 2

4th year 1 remaining compulsory subject of the 2nd year of the LLB course; andAll subjects specified for the 3rd year of the LLB course with the exaeption of an optional subject.

5th year All subjects specified for the 4th year of the LLB course.

306

The Law Degrees

1 s t y e a r E c o n o m ic s I 1 s t u n i t in an a p p ro v e d B E c m a jo r

L e g a l M e th o d L e g a l a n d C o n s t i ­tu t io n a l H is to r y

2 n d y e a r E c o n o m ic s II 2 n d u n i t in an a p p ro v e d B E c m a jo r

C o n t r a c ts C r im in a l L a w a n d P ro c e d u re

3 rd y e a r E c o n o m ic s III 3 rd u n i t in an a p p ro v e d B E c m a jo r

3 s u b je c ts s p e c if ie d fo r th e 2 n d y e a r o f th e L L B c o u rs e

4 th y e a r 1 re m a in in g s u b je c t o f th e 2 n d y e a r o f th e L L B c o u rs e ; a n dA l l s u b je c ts s p e c if ie d to r th e 3 rd y e a r o f th e L L B c o u rs e w i t h th e e x c e p t io no f a n o p t io n a l s u b je c t .

5 th y e a r A l l s u b je c ts s p e c if ie d fo r th e 4 th y e a r o f th e L L B c o u rs e .

Higher degreesTo be admitted as a candidate for the degree of Master of Laws, a student must normally have grad­uated Bachelor of Laws with honours from an Australian univer­sity or a university outside Aus­

tralia recognised by the Faculty.In order that the Faculty may exercise adequate supervision a candidate must also be resident in the Australian Capital Territory. Candidates proceed to the degree by thesis.

307

General

The M o o t Court programThe Faculty conducts a Moot Court program in order to give students practical experience in the proce­dures and techniques of preparing and presenting a case to a court.After he has passed the first year, each student is required to partici­pate as solicitor, junior counsel or senior counsel, in at least one moot each year. Moots are held in the specially designed Moots Court­room on the ground floor of the Law School. The program is directed by Mr D. L. Pape, a mem­ber of the Faculty. A Moots Hand­book is obtainable from the Faculty's Moots Secretary.

Federal Law ReviewThe Federal Law Review, a schol­arly journal which is published annually, provides a forum for legal research and writing by law teachers, practising lawyers and members of its editorial board. The editorial board of the Review is composed entirely of students, who are selected on the basis of their academic performance. Mr J. L. R. Davis, a member of the Faculty, is adviser to the board.

Law reviews have had great influence in fostering and facilitating the publication of legal research.The standard of a law review is regarded as a measure of the stand­ing of the law school which produces it.

Members of the editorial board select articles for publication, arrange for recently published books to be reviewed, and gain valuable research experience by writing notes themselves on recent cases or current legal problems. They prepare the Review for publication, a task which requires meticulous attention

to detail in matters such as footnote checking and proof-reading. Senior members are appointed by the editor to the positions of case-note editor, book review editor and business manager. The editor is elected at a general meeting of the editorial board.

At the Annual Dinner of the Law Review the members of the editorial board act as hosts to members of the Faculty, members of the judi­ciary and leaders of the profession who have assisted in the publication of the Review.

It is regarded as an honour to be invited to join the editorial board of the Review. While work on the Review makes heavy demands on time, it provides the student with a fine training in legal research and writing.

The A NU Law SocietyThe ANU Law Society is composed of the entire student body enrolled in Law. Its program is directed by a committee of nine which is elected by popular student vote in third term of each year.

Throughout the year the Society sponsors a number of extracurricular academic activities, such as talks by leading members of the profes­sion, debates and career forums, and an extensive social program, highlights of which are the Law Dinner and the Law Ball.

Perhaps the Society's most impor­tant function is its contribution to the cordial relationship which exists between the staff and students of the Faculty. Its executive committee meets regularly with the Faculty to discuss matters of mutual concern and to report suggestions from the students to the Faculty.

All students must pay annually

308

Faculty of Law

with other University fees a compul­sory $2.00 levy, the ANU Law Society fee. The moneys raised assist the Society to finance its activities and to provide facilities for law students.

Faculty Education Com m itteeThis is a committee designed to provide a channel of communication between the Faculty and students on educational matters.

Faculty OfficersAt the head of the Faculty is the Dean. Fie is assisted by the Sub- Dean and the Faculty Secretary, and it is to these officers that students should apply on matters concerning regulations, courses and general administration. Their offices are situated in the administrative area on the ground floor of the Law School, and appointments for inter­views with them should be made with their secretary. Members of the teaching staff also are willing to advise students on problems arising from the course in general or from particular subjects.

Law SchoolThe Faculty moved at the end of 1968 to a new building. The Law School includes a law library housing 26,000 volumes and seating 170 readers, a student common room with seating for sixty students, rooms for the executive of the ANU Law Society and the editorial committee of the Federal Law Review and a moot court furnished appropriately for the conduct of moots.

Smoking is not permitted in the ground floor classrooms or lecture theatre, in the moot court, the moot preparation room or the law library.

In 1972 considerable use for law lectures will be made of the H. C. Coombs Lecture Theatre where there must on no account be any smoking.

Notice-boardsPosting on the Faculty notice- boards is to be taken as sufficient notice to all students. Students should accordingly make a practice of consulting these boards regularly.

Division of classes and tutorialsIn 1972 lecture classes in many compulsory subjects especially first and second-year subjects will be divided into two or more groups. In addition there is a comprehensive tutorial program in first-year subjects. The number of class hours specified in each subject in the section 'Details of Subjects and Booklists' refers only to lecture and not to tutorial classes.Notices advising students of their lecture and tutorial groups will be posted on the notice board towards the end of Orientation Week. Any student who cannot join the group to which he has been allotted must apply in writing at the Faculty office to change his group by the second day of first term. Students must always attend their correct group. No changes between groups will be allowed after the end of the first week of first term unless there are exceptional circumstances.

LockersA limited number of lockers is available for hire to students. The annual locker fee is $1.00. Keys are issued by the Faculty office at the beginning of the academic year on payment of the fee and must be

309

Faculty of Law

returned during the week following the annual examination period.

ExaminationsIn general, the examinations take the form of an annual examination of three hours' duration in each subject. Mid-year tests are held in some subjects. Performance in these tests, in tutorials and lecture classes and written exercises throughout the year are frequently taken into account, together with the results of the Annual Examination, in assess­ing a student's academic perform­ance. Precise details about compulsory written work required in each subject will be posted on the law notice-board during first term.

The Faculty may refuse to admit to an examination in a subject a student who has been repeatedly absent from classes or who has not submitted, in accordance with instructions, any prescribed written work in the subject.

Results in each annual examina­tion with the exception of Practice and Procedure are recorded according to the following gradings:FID: High Distinction 80-100%D: Distinction 72-79%CR: Credit 63-71%P: Pass 50-62%N: Fail Below 50%

Special examinations Generally, the Faculty is prepared to grant special consideration in assessing examination results or special examinations where there is medical or other evidence that a student's studies have been signi­ficantly affected during the academic year or the examination period by ill-health or domestic dislocation. Any application will be treated in strict confidence and should be made

in writing to the Academic Registrar before the examination is held. In any case of urgency students should telephone either the Officer- in-Charge of Examinations or the Faculty Secretary and follow this as soon as possible with a written submission. Unless a written sub­mission is received by the Aca­demic Registrar within 72 hours after the beginning of an annual examination no student will be granted a special examination in the subject. In addition, a student may inform the supervisor that his performance is impaired at any time during the course of an examination. Students should never communicate directly with their examiners.

Final year students only Where a student who would other­wise qualify to graduate LLB has failed to pass one annual exam­ination in his final year, the Faculty will grant him one special examina­tion provided his initial performance that year has reached a minimum standard required by the Faculty.

Cancellation or variation of enrolm entAny student who wishes to cancel or vary his enrolment in any way must inform the Academic Registrar immediately by completing a Variation of Enrolment form, which may be obtained at the Student Administration office in the Chan­cery. Cancellation of an enrolment in a subject at any stage of the academic year without the approval of the Faculty may be regarded as a failure in that subject. Unless exceptional circumstances are shown, a cancellation after the last day of second term will be regarded as a failure in the subject.

310

Faculty of Law

Any student who cancels his enrolment in full and who plans to seek admission to a law course in a future year should seek a deferment of his enrolment. Applications should be made in writing to the Academic Registrar giving full details of the reasons.

Academic ProgressThe Faculty has decided to announce the following statement of the policies which are applied pursuant to the Academic Progress (School of General Studies) Statute and the Academic Progress (Faculty of Law) Rules. It is emphasised, however, that these policies are not applied rigidly and that the case of each individual person is considered by the Faculty on its merits.Statement1. (a) The Faculty may review the academic progress of any person who fails in a subject at the Annual Examination(b) In reviewing academic progress the failure of a person to pass an examination shall, except where in a particular case the Faculty otherwise determines, be taken to include:

(i) withdrawal from any subject at any time during the academic year unless evidence establishes illness or other personal difficulties

(ii) the failure of a person to sit for or the absence or exclusion of a person from the Annual Exami­nation in a subject for which he is enrolled.

2. (a) The Faculty may direct that a person be not permitted to re-enrol in a subject or course where:(i) he fails two or more examina­

tions in the subjects for which he is enrolled in his first year and obtains in his first-year

subjects an average of less than 50%

(ii) he fails three or more examina­tions during his course

(iii) he fails an examination twice in any subject.

(b) Unless exceptional circum­stances are shown the Faculty will so direct where:

(i) he fails all examinations in the subjects for which he is en­rolled in his first year

(iA) he fails four or more examina­tions in the subjects for which he is enrolled in his first two years

(ii) he fails a total of six examina­tions at any time during his course

(iii) he fails an examination three times in any subject

(iv) he fails more than half the number of the examinations in the subjects for which he has enrolled in the preceding two years.

Examples of exceptional circum­stances which are taken into account are as follows:(i) a record of results which

establishes that a person has rehabilitated himself during the later years of his course of study

(ii) evidence showing that a person has had a record of illness during the course supported by medical certificates produced to the Academic Registrar.

3. Wherever a person's academic progress is unsatisfactory the Faculty may impose conditions:(a) limiting or prescribing the num­ber of subjects for which he may enrol in any subsequent year; or(b ) specifying particular subjects for which a person must enrol in any subsequent year.

311

Faculty of Law

4. Where a person has failed sub­jects in any other faculty in this University or any other university or any institute of higher learning or education the Faculty may take account of such failures as if they were failures in a course of study for which this Faculty is responsible.5. Where students are undertaking a combined course in Arts and Law, Asian Studies and Law, Economics and Law, their academic progress will be reviewed each year by both Faculties. Un­satisfactory progress in a combined course may lead to exclusion from one or both Faculties.

Advice to new studentsNew students are referred to The Study of Law, a booklet by Professor Leslie Zines, which contains intro­ductory information concerning the branches of the law, the structure of the ANU Law course and careers for graduates in law.

Students should realise that in many university courses the lecturer does not cover the whole subject matter in class. A considerable amount of general reading is left to the student's own efforts. In particu­lar, students should read the books recommended for preliminary read­ing in each of their subjects before lectures begin in first term. They should remember, too, that the University year is quite short — there are only 26 weeks of lectures. Thus the vacation at the end of first and second terms are not holidays: they are periods left for the student to consolidate and revise his work.

Many students encounter early difficulties in developing efficient study methods. Indeed, some indus­trious students do not succeed because they do not learn how to 312

work effectively. The University leaves students to work how and when they wish. If a student feels he needs advice on study methods he should consult his tutors or lec­turers. If he has serious difficulties, he should arrange to talk with a Student Counsellor.

It is essential that a law student should be able to express himself clearly in English. Assistance in Efficient English is offered by the University Counselling Service to students who wish to improve their English expression. Law students are urged to take advantage of this help, for their chances of success in their studies are poor unless their powers of expression are of a high standard. If the Faculty is dis­satisfied with this aspect of a student's work, it may require him to undertake special studies and subsequently to satisfy the Faculty that he has sufficient ability to be permitted to continue his course.

Law LibraryThe Law Library contains a collec­tion of books, periodicals, reports and statutory material related to the courses of study in the Faculty of Law. Students may expect to find most of their references in this collection. There are catalogues, indexes, guides and manuals in the Library to assist in locating ref­erences, but the Library staff is available at all times to answer queries and to give assistance to readers.

Students should make themselves thoroughly acquainted with the layout of the Library as early as possible, to avoid waste of time later. For this, there is an intro­ductory booklet 'Guide to the Law Library' (available from the Law

Faculty of Law

Library) containing a plan of the Library, instructions for use of the catalogues, and keys to the location and use of reference material, indexes, guides and manuals. As the Library is open throughout the summer vacation from 9 am to 5 pm Monday to Friday, this would be a suitable time to visit and browse.

The Library is a place for quiet study. Smoking and eating are prohibited, and talking is restricted to the circulation area.

Students may borrow most of the books for a two week loan period, but use of reference books, periodi­cals, reports and statutory material is restricted to the Library reading areas.

As there is excessive demand at certain times for prescribed refer­ences, these are placed on reserve at the circulation desk, where they are available for a four hour loan period, and may not be taken from the Library. These loans, as well as the two week loans, may be renewed for a further period, provid­ing no other person has requested the book.

The Library holds several copies of some of the most used titles, but students should buy the pre­scribed texts.

Material which is not available in the Law Library may as a rule be requested on interlibrary loan at the circulation desk.

Moot preparation necessitates the collection of volumes from the Library collection on tables reserved in the stack room adjacent to the Library circulation desk. These may be gathered by the students in­volved, but must be brought to the circulation desk for a record to be made of their removal to the moots preparation room.

During the academic year, the Library is open:Monday-Friday: 8.30 am-11 pm Saturday: 10 am-6 pm Sunday: 10 am-10 pm

Admission to Legal Practice in the Australian Capital Territo ry and the States o f N ew South Wales and VictoriaThe Bachelor of Laws degree of the University is recognised for admis­sion purposes in the states of New South Wales and Victoria. After admission in either state a graduate may have his name entered on the High Court register which entitles him to practise in all federal juris­dictions including the Australian Capital Territory.

The following information has been compiled for the guidance of students who may be interested in seeking admission to practice in the Australian Capital Territory, New South Wales or Victoria. The Faculty is also building up information about admission to practice in jurisdictions further afield. Any student wishing to make enquiries should see the Faculty Secretary.

All persons seeking admission to practice in the courts of New South Wales or Victoria or Federal courts must be natural-born or naturalised British subjects.

N e w South WalesThe legal profession in New South Wales is divided into barristers and solicitors, and it is not possible to practise as both at the one time. There are different requirements for admission to each branch of the profession but a final decision can be left until a student qualifies to graduate. Provisions exist for quali­fied practitioners to transfer from

313

Faculty of Law

one branch of the profession to the other.

The requirements for admission to practice are set out in the Rules of the Supreme Court of New South Wales relating to the admission of Barristers and Solicitors. Any stu­dent is welcome to consult the copy in the Faculty Secretary's room.

BarristersAll students seeking to practise at the New South Wales Bar must register as students-at-law with the Barristers Admission Board of New South Wales for a period of two years before admission. Information leaflets setting out precisely what documents must be lodged for registration are available from the Faculty office. The appropriate time to register as a student-at-law is at the end of the second year of the Law course.

When a student-at-law of two years' standing has completed the course for the degree of Bachelor of Laws he is qualified immediately for admission to the Bar provided he has also, if he registered on or after 1 October 1965, passed a two- hour examination set by the Barris­ters Admission Board on Legal Ethics and Trust Accounts. The prescribed syllabus is:

Legal Ethics and Trust Accounts□ Atkins, N.S.W. Solicitors Manual, The Law Society of N.S.W.□ Darvall, C., Solicitors Book­keeping, Law Book Co.□ Teece, R. C., & Harrison, C., Law and Conduct o f the Legal Profession in N.S.W.Two examination sessions are held each year in April and September/ October. Admission forms and sample examination papers are available from the Faculty office.314

Entries for the examination with a fee of $6 must be lodged six weeks before each examination with the Secretary of the Barristers Admission Board, Supreme Court, King Street, Sydney.The University is an examination centre for all Barristers Admission Board examinations and students who have entered for the examina­tion will be advised about the time and place for examinations by the Student Administration office.

Students who wish to be admitted to the Bar as soon as possible after their final examinations are advised to enter for the Legal Ethics and Trust Accounts examination at the April session in their final year, but may, if they wish, attempt the examination at any session after the beginning of their third academic year in the Faculty.

Sections 36-44 of the Barristers Admission Rules set out the precise documents which must be lodged with the Secretary of the Board before a student-at-law who has fulfilled the qualifications may be admitted to the Bar. Students who lodge these papers with the Board immediately after final examinations results are announced may be admitted at the February sitting in the following year.

Any student who is in doubt about his future field of employment is advised to register as a student-at- law in New South Wales. The advantage is that a student can, after completing the course for the degree of Bachelor of Laws, gain an immediate qualification to practise which may be of benefit even if he decides on a career in government or commerce. A student may also transfer registration as a student-at- law to registration as a student-

Faculty of Law

clerk as described in the section Solicitors. Those who register as students-at-law are not bound to apply for admission to the New South Wales Bar if they decide their future lies elsewhere.

Graduates who have been ad­mitted to the Bar and intend to practise normally serve a term of pupilage in the chambers of an experienced junior (i.e. a barrister who has practised at the Bar for at least seven years but is not a Queen's Counsel). Anyone who has been admitted to the Bar and wishes to read in chambers may make arrangements to do so either privately or with the assistance of the Bar Association of New South Wales, 180 Phillip Street, Sydney. The pupil is expected to attend his tutor's chambers each day so that he may gain knowledge and experience of all facets of professional conduct.The barrister, in the role of tutor, undertakes to instruct the pupil in the techniques of advocacy, court usage, legal ethics and etiquette, and in other matters associated with the practice of the profession. No remuneration is payable to the pupil, nor is it permissible for the tutor to require or accept any fee from his pupil.SolicitorsThose seeking admission as solici­tors in New South Wales must undertake, after qualifying to grad­uate, articles with a master solicitor in either New South Wales or the ACT. After completing a year's articles a graduate may be admitted as a solicitor but for a further year he cannot practice on his own or in partnership.

Before entering into articles with a solicitor, registration as a student- clerk must be lodged with the

Secretary of the Solicitors Admis­sion Board of New South Wales. Details of the documents required for registration are set out in a booklet Admission to Practice as a Solicitor in New South Wales issued by the ANU Law Society. A copy may be obtained from the Faculty office.

Student-clerks who have grad­uated in law must before their admission pass an examination in Legal Ethics and Trust Accounts. Details about the examination, and the syllabus are set out under the preceding heading, Barristers.

VictoriaIn the State of Victoria, the two branches of the profession were, until 23 November 1891, separate, but since that date persons admitted by the Supreme Court of Victoria are allowed to practise as barristers and solicitors. But in actual practice, separation exists in Victoria. Those who wish to practise as barristers sign the Roll of Counsel and under­take not to practise as solicitors.

The admission of barristers and solicitors in Victoria is governed by the Rules of the Council of Legal Education, a copy of which is held by the Faculty Secretary. No person will be admitted who is not a British subject aged 21 or more.

Candidates who have obtained the degree of Bachelor of Laws of the University are required to serve for twelve months in articles.

They must also pass whether as part of the course for the degree or otherwise in the subjects of Evi­dence, Taxation, Procedure, Accounts and Professional Conduct, Classes in Procedure, Accounts and Professional Conduct are offered by the University of Melbourne.

315

Faculty of Law

The following are extracts from the details of subjects listed in the Melbourne Faculty of Law Hand­book 1971:

'ProcedureA course of one class per week throughout the year.Syllabus: This subject is concerned with the rules applicable in the conduct of civil actions in the Supreme Court, to a lesser extent with the jurisdiction and practice in Magistrates' Courts, the control of those Courts by the County Court and by the Supreme Court, and with appeals from a judgment of the Supreme Court to the High Court. Litigation is regulated conflict and the regulation of that conflict is largely embodied in and stems from the rules of procedure known as the Rules of the Supreme Court. The current Rules of the Supreme Court are those made in 1 957 although amendments have been made to those rules from time to time since 1 957.

The course studies those rules in relation to all the steps necessary to bring a case on for hearing, from the day when a writ is issued, the steps which are taken thereafter e g. service of the writ of summons, the defendant's entry of appearance thereto, the pleadings exchanged between the parties, the principal forms of interlocutory proceedings e.g. discovery, interrogatories, the rules determining whether a case is to be tried by a Judge alone or by a Judge with a jury, the way in which a judgment may be enforced e.g. by Writ of fieri facias, Writ of posses­sions, etc., attachment of debts, etc. The course also deals with appeals from a single Judge to the Full Court of the Supreme Court 316

and from the Supreme Court to the High Court.

Lastly, the course examines the jurisdiction, ordinary and special, of Magistrates' Courts and the principal procedural provisions applicable thereto as contained in the Justices Act 1958 and dis­cusses appeals therefrom to the County Court and to the Supreme Court.BooksStudents are required to obtain:□ Rules of the Supreme Court 1 957. (Reprinted Government Printer, 1969.)

Commonwealth Service and Execution of Process Act 1901 -1968.Recommended for reference:□ Odgers, W. B., Principles of Pleading and Practice (19th ed., Stevens, 1 966).□ Williams, N. J., Supreme Court Practice, (Butterworth, 1964, with supplement to 1 970).Examination: One three-hour paper, for pass only.

AccountsA course of one class per week throughout the year with such class exercises as may be directed by the lecturer.Syllabus: A general knowledge of the principles of accounting and the practice of bookkeeping; partner­ship and company accounts; book­keeping in a solicitor's office; exec­utors' and trustee accounts.BooksRecommended for reference:□ Yorston, K. R., Smyth, B. E., and Brown, S. R., Elementary Account­ing (3rd ed., Law Book Co., 1960).□ Yorston, K. R„ Smyth, B. E., and Brown, S. R., Accounting

Faculty of Law

Fundamentals (5th ed., Law Book Co., 1963).□ Woodman, C. E„ The Solicitor's Office—Practical Management and Accounts (Law Book Co., 1936).□ Allen, P. H., Reynolds, R. G„ and Irish, R. A., Australian Execu­torship Law and Accounts (Law Book Co., 1942).Further references will be given by the lecturer.Examination: One three-hour paper for pass only.

Professional ConductA course of sixteen classes in first and second terms.Syllabus: This subject relates to the rules established by law and custom for the conduct of legal practice in Victoria.The course includes:(a) The characteristics of a profes­sion and their application to the legal profession(b ) The history and organisation of the Victorian legal profession(c) The sources from which the principles of legal professional con­duct are derived(d) The duties owed by a practi­tioner to -

(i) the law(ii) the Court(iii) his client(iv) his fellow practitioners

(e) Special statutory obligations of solicitors under the Legal Profession Practice Act.BooksPrescribed textbook:□ Heymanson, A., and Gifford,K.H., The Victorian Solicitor (2nd ed., Law Book Co., 1963).□ Legal Profession Practice Act. (Vic.) 1958. As amended. (Reprint [No. 2] [1st May, 1968] incorpor­

ates amendments up to and includ­ing Act No. 7539 which is the last amending Act at present.)□ Auditors (Disclosure of Informa­tion) Rules as amended.□ Solicitors (Audit and Practising Certificates) Rules as amended.□ Solicitors (Professional Conduct and Practice) Rules.□ Sharing of Remuneration Rules. Note: that the above rules are set out in Heymanson and Gifford's book and the second supplement to such book brings the Rules up to 1965.Detailed references to other works will be given by the lecturer.Examination: One three-hour paper, for pass only.'

Students undertaking Victorian articles should enrol for the subjects at the University of Melbourne. Enrolments must normally be lodged and fees paid by mid-January. Internal and external enrolments are accepted. No formal tuition is given to external students.

The Melbourne Faculty of Law Handbook carefully draws the attention of external students to the regulations, which provide that no student shall be admitted to exam­inations in any subject in which he has not entered either for lectures or for external studies within one month after the beginning of first term. Applications for extension of time for enrolment must be made to the Registrar. The examinations are held in November. Again the Uni­versity supervises Canberra can­didates on behalf of the University of Melbourne.

Students may alternatively enrol to take these courses at a summer school conducted by the University

317

Faculty of Law

of Melbourne from January to March. Only those qualified to graduate LLB are eligible to enrol.

Articles of clerkship may be served either in the State of Victoria or out­side Victoria with the approval of the Board of Examiners of the Council of Legal Education.

Details of the form prescribed for articles of clerkship and the docu­ments which must be lodged prior to admission are set out in the rules.

Upon admission to practice in Victoria a person, if he intends to practise exclusively as a barrister, can apply to the Victorian Bar Council for permission to sign the Roll of Counsel kept by the Council. Such an applicant is not required to pass any further examinations but must undertake to practise exclus­ively as a barrister and abide by the rulings of the Victorian Bar Council.

The newly-admitted barrister is required to spend his first six months in practice as a pupil in the chambers of a barrister of more than five years' standing. He is entitled to accept briefs for himself during this read­ing period.

Federal CourtsPractitioners Admission Rules under the Judiciary Act 1903 provide for the admission of persons to prac­tice in Federal Courts as barristers and solicitors only. It should be noted that the States of the Com­monwealth have no provisions for reciprocity in admitting to practice those qualified under these Rules.

A law graduate of any Australian university, a university in the British Dominions or an approved university may apply to register with the Secretary, Commonwealth Prac­titioners Board, Attorney-General's Department, Canberra, as a federal

student-at-law. Details of the forms required for registration are held by the Faculty Secretary. A student- at-law who is a graduate in law must be registered for at least a year before his admission. In addition he must be a bona fide resident within the Commonwealth and must pass Section IV of the final examination of the Commonwealth Practitioners Board. This comprises examinations of three hours' duration in The Con­stitution of the Commonwealth and the States, the Statutes of the Com­monwealth and the Jurisdiction and Practice of the High Court. Exam­inations are normally held twice a year in July and November. They are supervised by the University on behalf of the Commonwealth Prac­titioners Board.

The Australian Capital TerritoryThe Legal Practitioners Ordinance (No. 2) 1970 which came into operation on 14 December 1970 provides for direct admission to practice in the Australian Capital Territory. There is a combined roll for both barristers and solicitors and admission gives the right to practise simultaneously in both sections of the profession.

Amongst those eligible for admission to practice in the Territory are Bachelor of Laws degree graduates of any Australian university who have either served under articles for twelve months in the Territory, or as an alternative to articles have 'completed a course of legal education of not less than six months' duration prescribed for the purposes of this sub- paragraph [of the Ordinance]'.The Legal Workshop course to be offered by the University for the

318

Faculty of Law

first time starting in January 1 972 will be prescribed as a 'course of legal education'.

Legal Workshop courseOne Legal Workshop course will be offered each year from January until June. Only full-time students who have graduated or qualified to graduate Bachelor of Laws from an Australian university will be accepted for enrolment. Thirty places are available in 1972.

Full details of the course are being published in a separate brochure which may be obtained from the Academic Registrar.

The chief aim of the Legal Workshop course is to introduce the graduate student to an under­standing of the professional skills and techniques which are required for the practice of law. It is designed to teach the student how to apply and adapt the legal knowledge and the intellectual skills which he has acquired during his academic course to the problems which arise in legal practice.

The course will provide common training for all practitioners, whether they ultimately propose to practise as barristers or solicitors or both It will consist mainly of practical instruction and exercises in professional problems and procedures, but will also include instruction in office management and procedures, accounting and professional conduct. Some instruction will be given in additional subjects which are not part of academic training, but the amount of substantive law to be studied will be kept to a minimum In all areas of instruction, the emphasis will be, not on telling or

showing these students what to do, but making them do it themselves under supervision and subject to correction.

The course does not aim to produce a fully equipped practitioner, but is seen as pro­viding an alternative to the system of articles.

319

Details of subjects and book lists

Unless otherwise specified students should obtain the latest edition of any book in the following lists.

Adm inistrative LawFifty-two classes.Syllabus: A study of the principles of administrative law. The course is mainly concerned with the law relating to judicial review of admin­istrative action and of subordinate legislation. An examination is also made of some administrative author­ities and administrative tribunals and the law developed and administered by these bodies. The special posi­tion of the Crown and Crown ser­vants in administrative law is con­sidered.Prescribed Books□ Benjafield, D. G. 8- Whitmore, H„ Principles of Australian Administra­tive Law, Law Book Co.□ Cases and Materials (available from the Law School).Examination: One three-hour paper.

Advanced Commercial LawThis subject may not be offered in 1972.Fifty-two classes.SyllabusThe course will consist of two sections:(a) Stamp, Gift, Estate and Death Duties and Estate Planning. (Two terms.) An introduction to the main principles of the stamp, gift, estate and death duty legislation of New South Wales, Victoria and the Commonwealth.

Consideration of some of the means used to minimise income tax and death duties. This section of the course involves discussion of the use of partnerships and proprietary companies in estate planning. Reference is made to taxation law. 320

Prescribed Books\3 Probate Duty Act *\ 962 (Vic.).□ income Tax Assessment Act 1936-1971 (Cwlth)□ Partnership Act, 1892 (N.S.W.)□ Adams, P. R., Australian Tax Planning with Precedents, 2nd ed., Butterworth.□ Hill, D. G., Stamp, Death,Estate and Gift Duties (with supplement), Law Book Co. 1970 (includes the following legislation) or□ Stamp Duties Act, 1 920-1 968 (N.S.W.)□ Estate Duty Assessment Act 1914-1970 (Cwlth)□ Estate Duty Act 1914-1 966 (Cwlth)□ Gift Duty Act 1941 -1966 (Cwlth)□ Gift Duty Assessment Act 1941 -1967 (Cwlth)EITHER(ib) (i) Business Planning. (One term.) An examination of selected public company operations. In one term only a few topics can be covered and these are selected after some indication is gained of the interests of the class—the 'flotation' of a public company, drafting and registration of memor­anda and articles and prospectuses, takeovers, means of financing public companies, bonus shares issues and their taxation. Time permitting, certain specialised areas of public company operations will be examined; e.g. mining company activities, joint ventures, mutual funds, dual funds and unit trusts. Stock Exchange requirements and practice will be discussed.Prescribed Books□ Companies Ordinance 1 962-1 971 (A.C.T.)□ Listing Requirements of the

Faculty of Law

Associated Stock Exchanges.OR(ii) Restrictive Practices and Monopolies (One term). An analysis of the Trade Practices Act (Cwlth) and its application through the Commissioner of Trade Practices and the Trade Practices Tribunal. Consideration of the scope and limitations of the Act, especially by comparison with some of the antitrust laws of the United States and the legislation controlling monopolies and restrictive practices in the United Kingdom.Prescribed Books□ Richardson, J. E., Introduction to the Australian Trade Practices Act, Hicks, 1 968.□ Trade Practices Act 1 965-1971 (Cwlth)Examination: One three-hour paper.

Air and Space LawFifty-two classes.Syllabus: Consideration of sover­eignty and the legal status of the air space and the right to fly.Study of the status of outer space, specific problems relating to the exploration and use of outer space and the Outer Space Treaty. Exam­ination of the major multilateral aviation conventions including the Chicago, Warsaw, Rome, Tokyo and Geneva conventions and their implementation in Australia. Out­line of bilateral and other arrange­ments creating international traffic rights. Examination of Common­wealth and State legislation affecting aviation in Australia and the common law rules relevant to the operation of aircraft. Study of the two-airline policy in Australia.

Preliminary Reading□ Cooper, J. C., The Right to Fly, Henry Holt & Co., NY.□ Fawcett, J. E. S., International Law and the Uses of Outer Space, Manchester UP.□ Richardson, J. E„ Aviation Law in Australia (1965), 1, Federal Law Review, p. 242-91.Examination: One three-hour paper and one research paper.

Commercial LawSeventy-eight classes.Syllabus: The course comprises a study of the law relating to—(a) sale of goods(b) hire purchase(c) negotiable instruments(d) bankruptcy(e) insurance.Prescribed Books□ Atiyah, P. S., Sale of Goods, Pitman.or Sutton, K. C. T., The Law of Sale of Goods in Australia and New Zealand, Law Book Co.□ Goods Act 1958 (Vic.) as amended.

Else-Mitchell, R. & Parsons, R., FUre Purchase Law, 4th ed., Law Book Co.

FUre Purchase Act, 1 960-1 970 (N.S.W.)□ Lewis' Australian Bankruptcy Law, (ed. D. J. Rose), 6th ed.,Law Book Co. 1 970.□ Bankruptcy Act 1 966-1 970 (Cwlth)□ Riley, B. B., Law Relating to Bills of Exchange in Australia, Law Book Co.□ Bills of Exchange Act 1 909-1 971 (Cwlth)□ Life Insurance Act 1 945-1 965 (Cwlth)Examination: One one-and-a-half-

321

Faculty of Law

hour paper in mid-year and one three-hour paper at the end of the year.

C om m onw ealth Constitutional LawSeventy-eight classes.Syllabus: A study of the Constitu­tion of the Commonwealth of Australia, and its judicial interpre­tation.Preliminary Reading□ Sawer, G., Australian Govern­ment Today, Melbourne UP.□ Deakin, A., The Federal Story, Melbourne UP, or Robertson & Mullens.Prescribed Books□ The Commonwealth of Australia Constitution Act and the Statute of Westminster Adoption Act 1 942, Cwlth Govt Printer, Canberra.□ Sawer, G., Australian Constitu­tional Cases, 3rd ed., Law Book Co. Examination: One three-hour paper.

Company LawFifty-two classes.Syllabus: A detailed study of com­pany law including the law relating to the winding up of companies. Prescribed Books□ Gower, L. C. B., Principles of Modern Company Law, 3rd ed., Stevens.□ Companies Ordinance 1962-1971 (A.C.T.)□ Security Industry Act, 1 970-1971 (N.S.W.)Examination: One three-hour paper.

Comparative LawFifty-two classes.Syllabus: Purpose and method of study of comparative law. Roman law and its influence on modern

legal systems. Comparative treat­ment of selected topics in conti­nental law—-in particular French and German law— and in the com­mon law.Prescribed Book□ Ryan, K. W., An Introduction to the Civil Law, Law Book Co.Examination: One three-hour paper.

Conflict of LawsFifty-two classes.Syllabus: The course covers, in general, the problems which arise from causes which involve a legal relationship not exclusively refer­able to the law of one state or territory of the Commonwealth. A study is made, in particular, of the concept of domicile; the rules for the choice of a law to be applied by local courts; the jurisdiction of Australian courts; the recognition and enforcement of foreign judg­ments; problems of choice of law, jurisdiction and enforcement of judgments as between the states and territories of the Common­wealth.Prescribed Books□ Nygh, P. E„ assisted by Sykes,E. I. Er MacDougall, D. J., Conflict Laws in Australia, Butterworth.□ Webb, P. R. H. & Davis, J. L. R„ Casebook on the Conflict of Laws in Australia, Butterworth.Examination: One three-hour paper.

ContractsSeventy-eight classes.Syllabus: Definition of contract. Formation of contracts (including the principles governing offer and acceptance, consideration, form, capacity of parties, reality of con­sent, and illegality). Operation of

322

Faculty of Law

contracts. Interpretation of con­tracts. Discharge of contracts. Remedies for breach of contract. Preliminary Reading□ Atiyah, P. S., Introduction to the Law of Contract, Oxford UP.Prescribed Books□ McGarvie, R. E„ Pannam, C. L., & Hocker, P. J., Cases and Materials on Contract, Law Book Co., 2nd ed., 1971.□ Cheshire, G. C. & Fifoot, C. H. S., The Law of Contract (Australian eds. J. G. Starke & P. F. P. Higgins), Butterworth.Examination: One mid-year paper. One three-hour paper at the end of the year.

Criminal Law and ProcedureFifty-two classes.Syllabus: A study of the general principles of the criminal law as developed in England and now applied in New South Wales, Vic­toria and the Australian Capital Territory. A study of the procedure governing criminal proceedings in New South Wales, Victoria and the Australian Capital Territory.Preliminary Reading□ Williams, G., Criminal Law; the general part, 2nd ed., Stevens.□ Howard, C., Australian Criminal Law, Law Book Co.□ Watson, R. & Purnell, H.,Criminal Law in N.S.W., Vol. 1, Indictable Offenses, Law Book Co.□ Hamilton, H. M. & Addison, G. C., Criminal Law and Procedure in N.S.W., 6th ed., Law Book Co. Prescribed Books□ Kenny, C. S., Outlines of Criminal Law, ed. J. W. C. Turner, 18th ed., Cambridge UP.□ Cross, R., & Jones, P. A., Cases

on Criminal Law, 4th ed., Butter- worth.□ Cross, R., & Jones, P. A., Introduction to Criminal Law, 6th ed., Butterworth.□ Crimes Act, 1900 (N.S.W.) (as amended).□ Crimes Act 914-1 966 (Cwlth)□ Crimes Act 1958 (Vic.) (as amended).Examination: One term paper and one three-hour examination at the end of the course.

CriminologyFifty-two classes.Syllabus: Criminology is the study of the phenomenon of crime; of its conditioning, prevention and treat­ment. It is concerned with three main topics: the nature and preval­ence of crime; the causation of crime or the explanation of criminal behaviour; and problems asso­ciated with and methods of approach to the prevention and control of crime and the treatment of offenders.Reference Books□ Sutherland, E. H„ &■ Cressy,D. R., Principles of Criminology, Lippincott.□ Cressy, D. R. & Ward, D A., Delinquency, Crime and Social Process, Harper.□ Void, G. B., Theoretical Crimin­ology, Oxford UP.□ Mannheim, H., Comparative Criminology, vols 1 & 2, Routledge 8- Kegan Paul.□ Reckless, W. C., The Crime Problem, 3rd ed., Appleton-Cen- tury-Crofts.Examination: One research paper and one three-hour paper.

323

Faculty of Law

Law of EmploymentThis subject may not be offered in 1972.Fifty-two classes.Syllabus: This subject is concerned with the employment relation and the law— those rights and duties which attach to employers and employees, considered as individ­uals and not as members of col­lective organisations. It covers the formation and termination of the employment relationship, the com­mon law duties of the employee (those of the employer are dealt with in Torts), workers' compensa­tion, leave with pay (long service, annual and sick leave) and social security legislation. It also examines certain important industrial statutes, notably the Factories, Shops and Industries Act and the Scaffolding and Lifts Act.Prescribed BooksThere is no suitable textbook. Cases and materials are issued by the Law School. The following Acts will be used in class:□ Commonwealth Employees' Compensation Act 1 930-1 970.□ Compensation (Commonwealth Employees) Act 1971.□ Annual Holidays Act, 1944-1970 (N.S.W.)□ Factories, Shops and Industries Act, 1962-1970 (N.S.W.)□ Long Service Leave Act, 1 955- 1969 (N.S.W.)□ Scaffolding and Lifts Act, 1 91 2- 1960 (N.S.W.)□ Workers' Compensation Act, 1926-1970 (N.S.W.)□ Labour and Industry Act 1958 (Vic.) (as amended).□ Workers Compensation Act 1958 (Vic.) (as amended).Examination: One three-hour paper.

324

EvidenceThirty-eight classes.Syllabus: The law of evidence applicable in New South Wales, Victoria and the Australian Capital Territory.Prescribed Books□ Cross, R., Evidence, 3rd ed., and Supplement, Butterworth.□ Evidence Act, 1898-1966 (N.S.W.)□ Evidence Act 1 958 (Vic.) (as amended).□ Evidence Act 1905-1 964 (Cwlth)□ State and Territorial Laws and Records Recognition Act 1901 - 1964 (Cwlth)□ Evidence Ordinance 1 971 (A.C.T.)Examination: One three-hour paper.

Family LawFifty-two classes.

Syllabus: This course seeks to examine the interaction between two of man's creations for the development and social control of human beings, the family and the law. The syllabus falls into three divisions.(a) Marriage: the nature of marriage and the family, the creation of marriage and the legal relationship of husband and wife.(ib) Broken Marriage: the forms of matrimonial relief; the grounds for matrimonial relief; maintenance and settlements after divorce; custody of children; maintenance of deserted spouses and children.(c) Parent and Child: legitimacy, legitimation, adoption and guardian­ship; the legal relationship of parent and child.

In addition to the strictly legal

Faculty of Law

aspects, attention is given to the practical administration of the law and the ethical problems which are posed for the family lawyer. An attempt is made to introduce the student to selected materials from other disciplines which are relevant to the lawyer's adequate discharge of his responsibilities in this field.Preliminary Reading□ Dominian, J., Marital Breakdown, Pelican.Prescribed Books□ Hambly, A. D. & Turner, J. N., Cases and Materials on Australian Family Law, Law Book Co.□ Matrimonial Causes Act 1959- 1966 (Cwlth)□ Matrimonial Causes Rules (Cwlth)□ Marriage Act 1961-1 966 (Cwlth)□ Adoption of Children Ordinance 1965 (A.C.T.)□ Maintenance Ordinance 1 968 (A.C.T.)Examination: One three-hour paper.

Law of Industrial PropertyFifty-two classes.Syllabus: A study of the law of copyright, patents, trade-marks and industrial designs. The course will also include a study of the common law relating to actions for passing- off and the protection of trade secrets.Prescribed Books: There is no suitable text-book. Cases and materials are issued by the Law School. The following Acts will be used in class:□ Copyright Act 1968 (Cwlth)□ Patents Act 1952-1969 (Cwlth) C Trade Marks Act 1955-1958 (Cwlth)□ Designs Act 1906-1968 (Cwlth)

Examination: One three-hour paper.

International Business TransactionsFifty-two classes.Syllabus: The Law of International Trade comprising:(a) The parties; buyers and sellers; exclusive sales agreements; exclus­ive agencies confirming (export) houses and forwarding agents.(b ) The law of international sales; in particular detailed study of f.o.b. and c.i.f. contracts; conflict of laws so far as relevant; the Uniform Laws on International Sale (these will only be studied in detail if and when they are ratified by the Commonwealth); the effect on contracts of sale of government regulations, in particular prohibitions on import and export, and licensing and/or quota regulations.(c) The carriage and insurance of the goods. (Only carriage by sea will be studied.){d) The financing of the transaction; confirming houses and del credere agents; bank guarantees; banker's commercial letters of credit, the "Uniform Customs and Practice of Documentary Credits" (1962 revision); insurance with the Export Payments Insurance Corporation; the effect on particular transactions of exchange control regulations and variations in exchange rates. Prescribed Books□ Schmitthoff, C. M., The Export Trade, Stevens.□ Gutteridge, H. C. & Megrah, M„ The Law of Banker's Commercial Credits, Europea Publications Ltd.□ Payne, W., The Carriage of Goods by Sea, Butterworth. Examination: One three-hour paper, written work counting towards the

325

Faculty of Law

final examination may be required during the year.

International LawFifty-two classes.Syllabus: The nature and operation of the international legal system with emphasis on the Australian perspective. Institutions, policies, principles and rules of international law relating to transnational claims of: participation; control of resources and people; strategies of diplomacy, agreements and force; jurisdiction; settlement of disputes.Prescribed Books□ Holder, W. E. & Brennan, G. A., The International Legal System, Butterworth (to be publishedin 1972).□ Charter of the United Nations and Statute of the International Court of Justice, U N.Examination: One three-hour paper and one research paper (3,000- 4,000 words).

Law of International OrganisationsFifty-two classes Syllabus: The subject includes an analysis of the legal problems of intergovernmental organisations with special emphasis on the structure and law of the United Nations including the role of the International Court of Justice. The course deals with the constitutional framework of European institutions such as the Council of Europe and the European Economic Community as well as legal aspects of inter­national and regional arrangements of special relevance to Australia. These include: Defence, Anzus and Seato Agreements; Trade Relations, the GATT (including Commonwealth

preference), NAFTA and relevant Commodity agreements; External Aid, Colombo Plan, Asian Develop­ment Bank, South Pacific Com­mission, Asian Pacific Council,United Nations Development Program.Prescribed Books□ Bowett, D. W., The Law of International Institutions, 2nd ed.,(1 970) Stevens.□ Charter of the United Nations and Statute of the International Court of Justice.Examination: One two-hour paper and two essays.

JurisprudenceFifty-two classes.Syllabus: The course is primarily a study of the logic of the language of law. Specific matters to be treated include: legal reasoning; justifica­tion of judicial decisions; relationship between law and morality; analysis of legal concepts; theoretical explanations of law offered by Austin, Kelsen and advocates of natural law theories. Preliminary Reading□ Lloyd, D., The Idea of Law, Penguin.Prescribed Books□ Hart, H. A. L., The Concept of Law, Oxford UP.□ Fuller, L. L„ The Morality of Law, Yale UP.□ Hodgson, D. H., Consequences of Utilitarianism, Oxford UP.Examination: One three-hour paper.

Labour RelationsThis subject may not be offered in 1972.Fifty-two classes.Syllabus: This subject is concerned

326

Faculty of Law

essentially with the law of indus­trial relations, that is the law which deals primarily with the collective relationships of employers and employees. It is complementary to the Law of Employment. It deals with the development of trade union law, the legal status of trade unions, control of internal union affairs, the structure and powers of indus­trial tribunals (Commonwealth and State) and the law relating to strikes, lockouts and other forms of industrial action.Prescribed BooksThere is no suitable textbook. Cases and materials are issued by the Law School. The following Acts will be used in class:□ Conciliation and Arbitration Act 1904-1970 (Cwlth)□ Industrial Arbitration Act, 1 940- 1970 (N.S.W.)□ Trade Union Act, 1881 -1970 (N.S.W.)Examination: An essay of about 3,500-6,000 words to be submitted at the end of second term and one three-hour paper. The essay counts for 25% of the annual examination and the written paper for 75%.

The Legislative ProcessFifty-two classes.Syllabus7. The Formulation of Legislation(1) The formulation of policy objec­tives for legislation including the obtaining of legal advice in relation to policy proposals.(2) The submission of proposals to Cabinet and the role of Cabinet in relation to the legislative process.(3) Drafting of legislation—(a) the role of the Parliamentary

Draftsman in relation to proposed legislation(b) the techniques of parliamentary drafting.2. Parliamentary Law and Practice in the Commonwealth andthe States(1) Parliamentary procedure.(2) The respective powers of the Houses of Parliaments particularly their relationships with each other.(3) Parliamentary reform, particularly the use of committees.(4) Parliamentary powers and privileges.(5) The relationship between the courts and Parliament.3. Statutory interpretation4. The process of law reform and the role of legislation in the law.Prescribed BooksThere is no suitable textbook. Cases and materials are issued by the Law School. The following will be used in class:□ The Commonwealth of Australia Constitution Act and the Statute of Westminster Adoption Act 1942, Cwlth Govt Printer, Canberra.□ Acts Interpretation Act 1 901 - 1966 (Cwlth)□ Interpretation Ordinance 1967 (A.C.T.)Examination: One two-hour paper, one essay and exercises in parlia­mentary drafting.

Legal andConstitutional HistoryFifty-two classes.Syllabus: The course entails a study of legal doctrines, institutions and processes from immediately before the Norman Conquest to the present century. Emphasis is placed on the relationship of legal

327

Faculty of Law

development to society generally. The reception of the common law, the development of legal institu­tions in Australia and the Australian federal movement are studied towards the end of the course.Preliminary Reading□ Harding, A., A Social History of English Law, Pelican.□ Stenton, D. M., English Society in the Early Middle Ages (1066- 1307), Pelican.□ Geldart, W„ Elements of English Law (ed. D. C. M. Yardley), Oxford UP.Prescribed Books□ Potter, H„ Historical Introduction to English Law, Sweet & Maxwell.□ Stephenson, C. & Marcham,F. G., Sources of English Constitutional Law, Harper. Examination: One three-hour paper and essays during the year.

Legal D raftingTwenty-six classes.Syllabus: The preparation and con­struction of commercial, real pro­perty and testamentary documents.Prescribed BooksA booklist will be available from the Faculty of Law Office in February 1972.Examination: One two-hour paper and drafting exercises during the year.

Legal M ethodFifty-two classes.Syllabus: The course provides a general introduction to the struc­ture of the legal system and to basic legal concepts; with emphasis on the judicial process, including statutory interpretation.

Preliminary Reading□ Derham, D. P., Maher, F. K. H. & Waller, P. L„ Introduction to Law, 2nd ed., Law Book Co.□ Williams, G., Learning the Law, 8th ed., Stevens.Prescribed Books□ Maher, F. K. H., Waller, P. L., & Derham, D. P., Cases & Materials on the Legal Process, 2nd ed.,Law Book Co.□ Campbell, E. & MacDougall, D., Legal Research: Materials and Methods, Law Book Co.□ Acts Interpretation Act 1901 - 1966 (Cwlth)□ Interpretation Act of 1 897-1969 (N.S.W.)□ Acts Interpretation Act 1 958 (Vic.)Reference Books□ Allen, C. K„ Law in the Making, 7th ed., Oxford UP.□ Cross, R., Precedent in English Law, 2nd ed., Oxford UP.□ Osborn, P. G., A Concise Law Dictionary, Sweet & Maxwell. Examination: One three-hour paper and a mid-year examination. Com­pulsory written work accounts for 25%.

Local Government and Tow n Planning LawFifty-two classes.Syllabus: This course comprises a study of the most significant aspects of Local Government and Town Planning Law in Australia. The course covers such matters as the constitution and alteration of local government areas, elections and qualifications of officers and elec­tors, appointment and tenure of servants, the conduct of council meetings, local government powers and judicial control of those powers,

328

Faculty of Law

rating and valuation of land, con­trols over building construction, roads and subdivisions and legal proceedings by and against local government authorities. Special emphasis is placed on town and country planning in all its aspects. Prescribed Books Case materials and lecture notes (available from the Law School). Examination: An essay on a topic selected by the student, and one three-hour paper.

Practice and ProcedureThirty classes.Syllabus: A study of civil procedure and pleading at common law in the Courts of New South Wales, Victoria and the Australian Capital Territory.Prescribed Books□ Supreme Court Act, 1970 (N.S.W.)□ Supreme Court Rules, 1 970 (N.S.W.)□ District Courts Act, 1 91 2-1968 (N.S.W.)□ The District Court Rules (N.S.W.)□ Small Debts Recovery Act, 1912-1968 (N.S.W.)□ Australian Capital Territory Supreme Court Act 1 933-1 971 (Cwlth)□ Rules of the Supreme Court of the Australian Capital Territory, 1938-1970.□ Odgers on Pleading and Practice, 19th ed., Stevens. Examination: One three-hour paper

Property ISeventy-eight classes.Syllabus: The course is concerned primarily with the basic principles and rules underlying the law of property, both real and personal,

with particular emphasis on their historical development. It includes such introductory references to equity as are necessary for an under­standing of the course, a study of legal and equitable estates and interests in land, both present and future, rules against remoteness, trusts for sale and the Settled Land Acts, co-ownership, covenants affecting land, incorporeal heredita­ments, Statutes of Limitations, and an introduction to the subject of the registration of instruments affecting land. While the course is primarily concerned with the law relating to land, references are also made, where relevant and practic­able, to the law relating to pure personalty, including some treat­ment of the ownership and posses­sion of such property.Preliminary Reading□ Hargreaves, A. D. 8- Helmore,B. A., An Introduction to the Prin­ciples of Land Law (N.S. W.),Law Book Co.

Prescribed Books□ Helmore, B. A., Law of Real Property in New South Wales, Law Book Co.□ Megarry, R. E. & Wade, H. W. R„ The Law of Real Property, Stevens.□ Cases and materials (available from the Law School).□ Conveyancing Act, 1919-1970 (N.S.W.)□ Real Property Act, 1 900-1 967 (N.S.W.)□ Registration of Deeds Act, 1897- 1967 (N.S.W.)□ Limitations of Actions Act 1958 (Vic.)□ Property Law Act 1 958 (Vic.)□ Transfer of Land Act 1 958 (Vic.)□ Perpetuities and Accumulations Act 1968 (Vic.)

329

Faculty of Law

Examination: One three-hour paper and one mid-year examination.

Property IIForty-eight classes.Syllabus: The course entails a study of the law of landlord and tenant, mortgages, Torrens legislation and conveyancing in New South Wales, Victoria and the Australian Capital Territory. There is an examination of conveyancing transactions in their various aspects, including such matters as contracts for sale, investigation of title and transfer of title, as well as of other vendor and purchaser problems.Prescribed Books□ Sackville, R. & Neave, M.A., Property Law Cases and Materials, Butterworth.□ Helmore, B. A., Law of Real Property in New South Wales, Law Book Co.□ Conveyancing Act, 1919-1969 (N.S.W.)□ Real Property Act, 1900-1 969 (N.S.W.)□ Land Vendors Act, 1 964 (N.S.W.)□ Sale of Land Act 1962 (Vic.)□ Conveyancing (Strata Titles) Act, 1961 (N.S.W.)□ Strata Titles Act 1967 (Vic.)□ Registration of Deeds Act, 1897 (N.S.W.)

□ Property Law Act 1 958 (Vic.)□ Transfer of Land Act 1958 (Vic.)□ Landlord and Tenant Act, 1899- 1969 (N.S.W.)□ Landlord and Tenant (Amend­ment) Act, 1948-1969 (N.S.W.)□ Landlord and Tenant Act, 1 958(Vic.)Examination: One three-hour paper.

Soviet LawFifty-two classes.Syllabus: The course will begin with a general examination of the Marxist analysis of the nature and function of law and of the legal theories of prominent earlier Soviet jurists (Reisner, Pashukanis and Stuchka, Vyshinsky), and will then proceed to an examination of the structure and organisation of the Soviet State, Courts and judiciary. The change and development of Soviet law will be examined through study of property, contracts, torts, criminal law and procedure, public organi­sations, administrative and labour law, family law, etc. The course will discuss the function and character of courts, police and volunteer bri­gades, popular tribunals, extra­judicial measures for dealing with 'anti-social behaviour', the prison system and the Soviet view of punishment. In the latter part of the course, the Soviet legal pattern will be compared with that of other socialist countries, especially Poland, Yugoslavia and China with a view to eliciting whether there is a socialist system of law.Preliminary Reading□ Carmichael, Joel, A Short History of the Russian Revolution, Nelson.□ Conquest, Robert, The Great Terror: Stalin's Purge of the Thirties, Macmillan.□ Conquest, Robert, (ed.), Justice and the Legal System in the U.S.S.R., Bodley Head.□ De George, Richard T„ Patterns of Soviet Thought: The Origins and Development of Dialectical and Historical Materialism, Michigan UP.Prescribed Books□ Berman, H. J., Justice in the

330

Faculty of Law

U.S.S.R.: An Interpretation of Soviet Law, rev. & enl. ed., Harvard UP.□ Hazard, J. N., The Soviet System of Government, 4th ed. (rev.), Chicago UP.□ La Fave, W. R. (ed.), Law in the Soviet Society, University of Illinois Press, Urbana.□ Romashkin, P. S. (ed.), Funda­mentals of Soviet Law, Foreign Languages Publishing House, Moscow.□ Chkhikvadze, V. M. (ed.),The Soviet State and Law,Progress, Moscow.Examination: One three-hour paper and one long essay during the year.

SuccessionThirty-five classes.Syllabus: The course examines the law governing succession to property after the death of the owner, with special reference to the law of New South Wales, Victoria, and the Australian Capital Territory. This involves a study of the law relating to intestate succession, the family provision statutes, and other forms of succession post mortem, as well as the making, revocation, and probate of wills, personal representatives and the administra­tion of estates.Prescribed Books□ Hutley, F. C. & Woodman, R. A., Cases and Materials on Succession, Law Book Co.□ Wills, Probate and Administration Act, 1898 (N.S.W.)□ Testator's Family Maintenance and Guardianship of Infants Act, 1916-1954 (N.S.W.)□ Administration and Probate Act 1958 (Vic.) (as amended).□ Wills Act 1958 (Vic.) (as amended).

□ Administration and Probate Ordinance 1929-1970 (A.C.T.)□ Wills Ordinance 1968 (A.C.T.)□ Family Provision Ordinance 1969 (A.C.T.)Examination: One three-hour paper.

TaxationFifty-two classes.Syllabus: A study of the principles and practice of income taxation under the Commonwealth Income Tax Assessment Act 1936 as amended, together with case materials introduced in lectures. Prescribed Books□ Bock, F. C. & Mannix E. F„The Guide to Australian Income Tax, 17th ed., Butterworth.□ Mannix, E. F., Australian Income Tax Leading Cases, Butterworth.□ Income Tax Assessment Act 1936-1971 (Cwlth)Examination: One three-hour paper.

TortsSeventy-eight classes.Syllabus: In this subject, to put the matter very generally, the student examines those rules of law which enable a person, by suit in the courts if need be, to obtain com­pensation (or some other form of satisfaction) from those who inter­fere unjustifiably with his person, property, or other legally protected interest. (We exclude the law of contracts from this field and teach it separately.) The syllabus covers the Law of Torts generally and includes an examination of such topics as assaults and other trespasses; a range of accidents of one kind or another—for example, road acci­dents, injuries caused by defective products, injuries sustained while on another person's property, accidents

331

Faculty of Law

suffered at work; problems that arise between neighbouring land-owners; libel and slander; the respective liability of the master and his servant to injured persons. Although impor­tant statutes exist in this field, and will be studied, the rules of the Law of Torts are still primarily common law rules, and the student will therefore be expected to read a large number of cases. Emphasis will be placed on the operation of tort law in practice, on the relationship between tort law and insurance, and on modern discussions about the future of tort law. Particular attention is given to the law of New South Wales, Victoria and the Australian Capital Territory.Prescribed Books□ Morison, Sharwood & Pannam, Cases on Torts, Law Book Co.□ Fleming, J. G., The Law of Torts in Australia, Law Book Co.□ Compensation (Fatal Injuries) Ordinance 1968 (A.C.T.)□ Law Reform (Miscellaneous Pro­visions) Ordinance 1955-1968 (A.C.T.)Examination: One three-hour paper. Written assignments may also be set during the year which will count towards the final result.

TrustsFifty-two classes.Syllabus: A study of the general principles governing the establish­ment and administration of private and charitable trusts, created inter vivos or by will and a study of the legislation of New South Wales, Victoria and the Australian Capital Territory affecting the administration of trusts.Preliminary Reading□ Maitland, F. W., Lectures on332

Equity, Cambridge UP.Prescribed Books□ Ford, H. A. J., Cases on Trusts, 2nd ed., Law Book Co.□ Trustee Act, 1925-1969 (N.S.W.)□ Trustee Act 1958 (Vic.) (as amended).□ Trustee Ordinance 1957-1968 (A.C.T.)Examination: One three-hour paper.

Degree Rules

Courses of Study (Degree of Bachelor of Laws) Rules1 . In these Rules, unless the con­trary intention appears, 'the Faculty' means the Faculty of Law.2. The degree of Bachelor of Laws may be conferred as a pass degree or as a degree with honours.

Degree of Bachelor of Laws3. A candidate for the degree of Bachelor of Laws shall unless he has been given credit towards the degree under sub-rule (1) of rule 1 5 of these Rules for work performed, or for three or more subjects passed, at another university, pursue an approved course of studies for at least four years and pass examina­tions in accordance with these Rules.4. | (1) The subjects for the exami­nations in the first year are—(a) Legal Method(b) Legal and Constitutional History(c) Contracts; and{d) Criminal Law and Procedure.(2) The subjects for the examina­tions in the second year are—(a) Administrative Law(b) Commercial Law(c) Property I(d) Torts; and(e) a subject, being a subject speci­fied in paragraph (d) of the next succeeding sub-rule, that is, in respect of a particular candidate, approved by the Faculty for the purposes of this paragraph.(3) The subjects for the examina­tions in the third year are—(a) Property II(b) Succession

tFor students enrolled prior to 1 970 there are transitional arrangements and rules. These are set out at the end of the rules for the degree of Bachelor of Laws.

(c) Trusts; and{d) three of the following sub­jects:

(i) Advanced Commercial Law(ii) Company Law(iii) Company Law and Business

Planning(iv) Comparative Law(v) Criminology(vi) Law of Employment(vii) Family Law(viii) Law of Industrial Property(ix) International Law(x) Local Government and Town

Planning Law(xi) Military Law(xii) Soviet Law(xiii) Taxation(xiv) any other area of law deter­

mined by the Faculty to be a subject for the purposes of this paragraph.

(4) The subjects for the examina­tions in the fourth year are—(a) Commonwealth Constitutional Law'(b) Evidence(c) Legal Drafting(ca) Practice and Procedure; and {d) three of the following subjects:

(i) Air and Space Law(ii) Comparative Law(iii) Conflict of Laws(iv) International Business Transac­

tions(v) Law of International Organisa­

tions(vi) Jurisprudence(vii) Labour Relations(viii) The Legislative Process(ix) any other area of law deter­

mined by the Faculty to be a subject for the purposes of this paragraph.

(5) Subject to the next succeeding sub-rule, the Faculty may, in circumstances considered by it to be appropriate, permit a candidate to

333

Faculty of Law

take, in substitution for a subject specified in, or determined under, paragraph {d) of sub-rule (3) of this rule or paragraph (d) of the last preceding sub-rule, a subject specified in, or determined under, paragraph (d) of the last pre­ceding sub-rule or paragraph (d) of sub-rule (3) of this rule.(6) A subject completed by a candidate for the purposes of a sub-rule of this rule shall not, notwithstanding that that subject is a subject that may be taken for the purposes of another sub-rule of this rule, be taken by, or credited to, that candidate for the purposes of that other sub-rule.(7) A candidate may not receive credit for both(a) Company Law; and(b) Company Law and Business Planning.5. The Faculty may determine the order and number of subjects in which a candidate may present him­self for examination from time to time.6. (1) Except with the permission of the Faculty a candidate shall not present himself for examination in more than four subjects when pur­suing the first year of the course, in more than five subjects when pur­suing the second year of the course in more than six subjects when pursuing the third year of the course or in more than eight subjects when pursuing the fourth year of the course.(2) For the purposes of this rule, a candidate shall be deemed to be pursuing the first year of the course until he has received credit for three subjects of the course, thereafter to be pursuing the second year until he has received credit for seven sub­

jects of the course, thereafter to be pursuing the third year until he has received credit for fourteen sub­jects of the course and thereafter to be pursuing the fourth year.7. A candidate shall not be admitted to examination in a subject of his course unless he has, to the satis­faction of the Faculty, attended such classes and performed such work in that subject as the Faculty determines.7A (1) A candidate shall perform such moot work in each year of his course as the Faculty determines.(2) Where, in any year, a candidate fails to perform to the satisfaction of the Faculty the moot work required under the last preceding sub-rule to be performed by him in that year, the Faculty may require him to perform such additional moot work or other academic work as the Faculty determines.(3) Where a candidate fails to per­form to the satisfaction of the Faculty any additional moot work or other academic work that he is required under the last preceding sub-rule to perform and the can­didate would, but for this sub-rule, qualify for admission to the degree of Bachelor of Laws, he shall not, unless the Faculty otherwise determines, be taken to have com­pleted the approved course.8. The Faculty may, in special cir­cumstances, hold a special examina­tion for a candidate in a subject.9. A candidate's performance in an examination for a subject shall be classified as 'Fail', 'Pass', 'Credit', 'Distinction' or 'High Distinction'.10. A candidate shall not be admitted to the degree of Bachelor of Laws unless—

334

Degree Rules

(a) he has completed the require­ments of the course as set out in these Rules; and(b) subject to the next succeeding rule, he completed those require­ments within ten years from the commencement of the academic year in which he passed the first unit of his course or within the time fixed under sub-rule (2A) of rule 15 of these Rules, as the case may be.10A. A candidate who fails to comply with paragraph (b ) of the last preceding rule may, with the approval of the Faculty and subject to such conditions as the Faculty may impose, continue his studies for the course for the degree of Bachelor of Laws but shall be admitted to that degree only if he complies satisfactorily with the conditions, if any, imposed by the Faculty.

The degree w ith honours11. A candidate for the degree of Bachelor of Laws with honours shall comply with the preceding rulesof these Rules and shall, in addi­tion, satisfy the requirements of these rules with respect to the Final Honours Examination.12 . (1) The Final Honours Examina­tion shall consist of two Parts,Part A and Part B.(2) Part A shall be constituted by the examinations in all subjects taken by the candidate under rule 4 of these Rules but in respect of a particular student the Faculty may, in its discretion, disregard the results obtained by that student in the examinations in the subjects taken by him under sub-rule (1) of that rule.(3) Part B shall comprise a paper of approximately twelve thousand

words in length prepared by the candidate on a research topic approved by the Faculty.(4) A candidate shall attain a satisfactory standard in both the research paper and the oral examination.(5) Seven-tenths of the total marks for the Final Honours Examination shall be allocated to Part A and three-tenths of the marks for the Final Honours Examination shall be allocated to Part B.13. (1) A candidate shall not be admitted to Part B of the Final Honours Examinations unless, in the opinion of the Faculty, he has attained a satisfactory standard in the subjects taken under sub-rules(1) , (2) and (3) of rule 4 of these Rules but in respect of a particular student the Faculty may, in its discretion, disregard the results obtained by that student in the examinations in the subjects taken by him under sub-rule (1) of that rule.(2) The Faculty shall consider the eligibility of a candidate to be admitted to Part B of the Final Honours Examination as soon as possible after the candidate has sat for the annual examinations for all subjects taken by him under sub­rule (3) of rule 4 of these Rules.(3) The Faculty may, at its discre­tion, and on such terms and condi­tions as it thinks fit, admit to Part B of the Final Honours Examination a candidate who has transferred to this University from the law school of another university and who has attained at this University a satis­factory standard in the subjects taken by him under rule 4 of these Rules.(4) A candidate who is admitted to Part B of the Final Honours Exami-

335

Faculty of Law

nation shall submit the research paper referred to in paragraph (b ) of sub-rule (3) of the last preceding rule to the Faculty on or before the fifteenth day of April of the final year of his course of study for the degree of Bachelor of Laws.(5) Where, because of course varia­tions, a candidate will be attempting in his final year fewer subjects than those specified in sub-rule (4) of rule 4 of these Rules, the Faculty may, at its discretion, require sub­mission of the research paper on or before the fifteenth day of Aprilof the year preceding the final year of his course.(6) Unless the Faculty otherwise decides, a candidate for the degree of Bachelor of Laws with honours shall not be permitted to attempt Part B of the Final Honours Examination more than once.(7) In this rule, the 'final year' means, in relation to a candidate, the year in which, if fie success­fully completes all of the subjects taken by him in that year, he will have completed all of the subjects required to be taken by him for the purposes of rule 4 of these Rules.14. (1) There shall be three classes of honours— First Class, Second Class, Division A and Second Class, Division B.(2) A candidate who has been so classified and has qualified for the degree of Bachelor of Laws may be admitted to the degree of Bachelor of Laws with Honours.

Admission to status15. (1) The Faculty may grant a candidate who has performed work or passed a subject at another university in Australia, or at another university outside Australia approved by the Faculty, being work per­336

formed, or a subject passed, after matriculation at that university, such credit for that work or subject towards the degree of Bachelor of Laws as the Faculty determines.(1A) Unless in a particular case the Faculty otherwise determines, a candidate shall not be granted credit for work performed, or a sub­ject passed, more than ten years before the date on which the candi­date applied for credit for that work or subject.(2) Where the Faculty so grants credit to a candidate—(a) the Faculty shall determine the further subjects, being not less than five and not including the subject Evidence or the subject Practice and Procedure, that the candidate is required to take to satisfy the requirements of these Rules for the degree; and(b) unless the candidate has been given credit for work performed in respect of the law of New South Wales relating to procedure and pleading, he shall, in addition to satisfying the requirements of these Rules in relation to the subjects referred to in the last preceding paragraph, take the subject Practice and Procedure.(2A) Where the Faculty grants credit to a candidate under this rule, the Faculty shall fix a time, not being more than ten years from the date of admission of the candidate to the course for the degree of Bachelor of Laws in this University, within which the candidate must comply with the requirements of these Rules.16. Where, after the commencement of this rule, an amendment of these Rules that affects the courses of study that may be taken by candi­dates for the degree of Bachelor of

Degree Rules

Laws or the degree of Bachelor of Laws with Honours is made, the amendment does not apply to such a candidate who, before the making of the amendment, had completed one or more subjects of a course of study approved by the Faculty, unless(a) the student elects that the amendment apply to him and submits to the Faculty proposed alterations to his course that are in accordance with these Rules as so amended and the Faculty approves those alterations; or(b ) the Faculty otherwise deter­mines.

tRule 5 of the Amendments to the Courses of Study (Degree of Bachelor of Laws) Rules made on 13 December 1968 reads:'Where a candidate for the degree of Bachelor of Laws has, before the com­mencement of these Rules, successfully completed, for the purposes of the Courses of Study (Degree of Bachelor of Laws) Rules in force immediately before the commencement of these Rules, a unit offered by another faculty, those Rules shall continue to apply to that candidate as if the amendments made by rules 3 and 4 of these Rules had not been made.'Rule 15 of the Amendments to the Courses of Study (Degree of Bachelor of Laws) Rules made on 13 September 1 968 reads:'(1) Unless the Faculty otherwise determines, a candidate for the degree of Bachelor of Laws who, before the commencement of the 1969 academic year—(а) had successfully completed Com­mercial Law I; and(б) had not successfully completed Commercial Law II,shall, notwithstanding the amendment of the Courses of Study (Degree of Bachelor of Laws) Rules by these Rules take Commercial Law II in the 1969 academic year.(2) A candidate for the degree of Bachelor of Laws who has successfully completed a subject (other than Reme­dies), being a subject that was, under rules previously in force, specified as part of the course of studies for that degree and is not so specified in rule 4

of the Courses of Study (Degree of Bachelor of Laws) Rules, as amended by these Rules, shall be deemed to have successfully completed such subject, being a subject specified in that rule, as is determined by the Faculty to be, for the purposes of this sub-rule, equivalent to the subject so passed.(3) A candidate for the degree of Bachelor of Laws who, before the com­mencement of the 1 969 academic year—(a) had taken Remedies; and(b) had not successfully completed that subject,shall for the purposes of sub-rule (3) of rule 4 of the Courses of Study (Degree of Bachelor of Laws) Rules, as amended by these Rules, take, in substitution for that subject, such subject as the Faculty shall, in relation to that candidate, determine.'

Courses of Study (Degree of M aster of Laws) Rules1. In these Rules, unless the con­trary intention appears, 'the Faculty' means the Faculty of Law.2. (1) A person who desires to be admitted as a candidate for the degree of Master of Laws shall apply in writing to the Academic Registrar.(2) Subject to this rule, the Faculty may, in its discretion, admit or refuse to admit a person as a candidate for the degree.(3) A person shall not be admitted as a candidate for the degree unless:(a) he is a graduate in law with honours of a university in Australia, or of a university outside Australia approved by the Faculty; or(b ) he is(i) a graduate in law (not being a graduate with honours) of a uni­versity in Australia, or of a university outside Australia approved by the Faculty; or(ii) a legal practioner (not being a graduate in law) qualified to practise as a barrister or solicitor before the High Court or the Supreme Court of a State, and has

337

Faculty of Law

satisfied the Faculty of his ability to pursue the studies for the degree.(4) Except where the Faculty other­wise directs, a person who is not a graduate in law with honours of a university in Australia, or of a uni­versity outside Australia approved by the Faculty, shall not be admitted as a candidate for the degree unless he has passed a preliminary exami­nation prescribed by the Faculty.(5) Where the Faculty is satisfied that by reason of the place of resi­dence or the nature of employment of a person who has applied to be or has been admitted as a candi­date for the degree, the Faculty will be unable to exercise or continue to exercise adequate supervision over the work of the person the Faculty may refuse to admit that person as a candidate or terminate his candida­ture.3. (1) Subject to the next suc­ceeding sub-rule, a candidate shall pursue studies for at least one academic year.(2) Where a candidate is engaged in employment other than university studies, he may be required by the Faculty to pursue studies for at least two academic years.4. (1) A candidate shall submit a thesis on a topic approved by the Faculty.(2) Except with the permission of the Faculty, a full-time candidate shall submit his thesis within three years, and a part-time candidate within five years, from the date on which he is accepted as a candidate for the degree.5 . (1) The thesis submitted by a candidate shall be referred to at least two examiners, of whom at least one shall be an examiner who is not a member of the academic

338

staff of the University.(2) A candidate may be orally examined on the subject of his thesis.(3) A candidate who satisfactorily completes the requirements of these Rules and whose thesis is adjudged by the Faculty to be of sufficient merit may be admitted to the degree of Master of Laws.

Courses of Study (Combined Course fo r Degrees of Bachelor of Arts and Bachelor of Laws) Rules1 . In these Rules, unless the con­trary intention appears:'combined course' means a com­bined course of study for the degrees in accordance with these Rules'the degrees' means the degree of Bachelor of Arts and the degree of Bachelor of Laws'the Faculties' means the Faculty of Arts and the Faculty of Law 'the law subjects' means the sub­jects prescribed for the degree of Bachelor of Laws other than the subject referred to in paragraph (e) of sub-rule 2 of rule 4 of the Courses of Study (Degree of Bachelor of Laws) Rules.2 . * * * * * *

3. A candidate who is permitted to undertake a combined course shall, before commencing the course, sub­mit the details of the course to the Faculties for approval in accordance with these Rules and shall submit any variations of the course for the approval of the Faculties.4 . (1) Subject to this rule, the Faculties shall not approve a course, or a variation of a course, under the last preceding rule unless the course, or the course as varied, as the case may be—

Degree Rules

(a) consists of—(i) not less than five units for the

pass degree of Bachelor of Arts; and

(ii) the law subjects; and(b ) requires the candidate to pass the units referred to in sub-para­graph (i) of the last preceding para­graph before taking more than eight of the law subjects.(2) The units referred to in sub- paragraph (i) of paragraph (a) of the last preceding sub-rule shall, unless the Faculties otherwise approve in special circumstances, include a major.(3) The Faculties may, in special circumstances, approve a course or a variation of a course, that does not comply with paragraph (b) of sub-rule (1) of this rule.5. A candidate undertaking a com­bined course shall—(a) pursue his approved course—

(i) in the case of a candidate for the pass degree of Bachelor of Arts and the degree of Bachelor of Laws (not being a candidate admitted by the Faculties to advanced status) for not less than five years; or

(ii) in any other case—for such period as the Faculties deter­mine; and

(b ) submit himself for examination in the units and subjects of his course.6. (1) A candidate undertaking a combined course who passes the examinations prescribed for the units referred to in sub-paragraph

(i) of paragraph (a) of sub-rule (1) of rule 4 of these Rules and passes the examinations prescribed for not less than eight of the law subjects may be admitted to the pass degree of Bachelor of Arts.

(2) A candidate undertaking a com­

bined course who complies with the last preceding sub-rule and passes the examinations prescribed for the degree of Bachelor of Arts with honours may be admitted to that degree.7 * * * * * *

8. Except where inconsistent with these Rules, the Courses of Study (Degree of Bachelor of Arts) Rules and the Courses of Study (Degree of Bachelor of Laws) Rules apply to and in relation to a candidate undertaking a combined course.

Courses of Study (Combined Course fo r Degrees of Bachelor of Economics and Bachelor of Laws) Rules1. In these Rules, unless the con­trary intention appears—'combined course' means a com­bined course of study for the degrees in accordance with these Rules'the degrees' means the degree of Bachelor of Economics and the degree of Bachelor of Laws 'the Faculties' means the Faculty of Economics and the Faculty of Law 'the law subjects' means the sub­jects prescribed for the degree of Bachelor of Laws by Rule 4 of the Courses of Study (Degree of Bachelor of Laws) Rules other than(a) the subject required to be taken in accordance with paragraph (e) of sub-rule (2) of that ruleand(b ) one of the subjects required to be taken in accordance with para­graph (d) of sub-rule (3) of that rule.2. * * * * * *

3. A candidate who is permitted to undertake a combined course shall,

339

Faculty of Law

before commencing the course, submit the details of the course to the Faculties for approval in accordance with these Rules and shall submit any variations of the course for the approval of the Faculties.4. (1) Subject to this rule, the Faculties shall not approve a course or variation of a course under the last preceding rule unless the course, or the course as varied, as the case may be—(a) consists of—

(i) units prescribed for the pass degree of Bachelor of Econo­mics the total value of which, for the purposes of the Courses of Study (Degree of Bachelor of Economics) Rules, is not less than twelve points; and

(ii) the law subjects; and(b ) requires the candidate to pass all of the units referred to in sub- paragraph (i) of the last preceding paragraph before taking more than eleven of the law subjects.(2) The units referred to in sub- paragraph (i) of paragraph (a) of the last preceding sub-rule shall include a major in Economics I, II and III and—(a) an additional major approved by the Faculty of Economics; or(b) if the sequence of units Statistics A01 and A02 orthe sequence of units Statistics A03 and A01 is also com­pleted by the candidate, a sequenceof units approved by the Faculty of Economics, the total value of which, for the purposes of the Courses of Study (Degree of Bachelor of Eco­nomics) Rules is not less than four points, but shall not in any case in­clude any units that are also among the law subjects that have been or are to be taken by the candidate for the degree of Bachelor of Laws.340

(3) The Faculties may, in special circumstances, approve a course or a variation of a course that does not comply with paragraph (b) of sub­rule (1) of this rule.5. A candidate undertaking a com­bined course shall—(a) pursue his approved course—

(i) in the case of a candidate for the pass degree of Bachelor of Economics and the degree of Bachelor of Laws (not being a candidate admitted by the Faculties to advanced status) — for not less than five years; or

(ii) in any other case—for such period as the Faculties deter­mine; and

(b) submit himself for examination in the units and subjects of his course.6. (1) A candidate undertaking a combined course who passes the examinations prescribed for the units referred to in sub-paragraph (i) of paragraph (a) of sub-rule (1) of rule 4 of these Rules and passes the examinations prescribed for not less than seven of the law subjects may be admitted to the pass degree of Bachelor of Economics.(2) A candidate undertaking a com­bined course who complies with the last preceding sub-rule and com­plies with the requirements pre­scribed for the degree of Bachelor of Economics with honours may be admitted to that degree.y * * * * * * *

8. Except where inconsistent with these Rules, the Courses of Study (Degree of Bachelor of Economics) Rules and the Courses of Study (Degree of Bachelor of Laws) Rules apply to and in relation to a can­didate undertaking a combined course.

Academic Progress Rules

Academic Progress of Students to the Board against the direction.

'Faculty' means the Faculty of Law Faculty.'the Board' means the Board of theSchool.(2) A reference in these Rules to a 'course', 'subject' or 'unit' means a course or a subject or unit of a degree, as the case may be, for which the Faculty is responsible.2. (1) Subject to this rule, where a person—(a) has previously been enrolled in the University or in another uni­versity or institute of higher learning or education; and(b ) has not, in the opinion of the Faculty, achieved satisfactory academic progress in the University or in that other university or insti­tute of higher learning or education, the Faculty may direct that the person—(c) shall not be admitted to a course of study(d ) shall not be permitted to con­tinue in a course of study(e) shall not be permitted to enrol in a subject or unit; or(/) shall be permitted to enrol in a subject or unit only upon specified conditions.(2) Before giving a direction under the last preceding sub-rule, the Faculty shall give the person con­cerned an opportunity of making representations to the Faculty with respect to his enrolment and shall take into account any representa­tions so made to the Faculty by the person.(3) A person in respect of whom a direction has been given under sub-rule (1) of this rule may appeal

(Faculty of Law) Rules1.(1) In these Rules—'enrol' includes re-enrol and 'enrolment' includes re-enrolment

(4) Sub-rules (2) and (3) of this rule do not apply to a person who, before applying for enrolment, had not previously been enrolled in the

341

Faculty o f Science

ContentsIT he S c ie n c e D egrees 3 4 5

D e ta ils o f u n its a n d b o o k lis ts

B io c h e m is try 3 4 8

B o ta n y 3 5 2

C h e m is try 3 5 7

C o m p u te r S c ie n ce 3 6 5

Fo res try 3 6 5

G e o lo g y 3 7 8

M a th e m a tic s 3 8 5

P hys ics 3 8 7

P s y c h o lo g y 3 9 2

S c ie n c e L a n g u a g e s 3 9 8

S ta tis tic s 4 0 0

T h e o re tic a l P h ys ics 4 0 1

Z o o lo g y 4 0 4

D egree Rules 41 1

A c a d e m ic P rogress Rules 4 2 2

The Faculty of ScienceThe Science degrees

The pass degree of Bachelor of ScienceThe departments of the Faculty are, in general, named according to the traditional divisions of the physical and natural sciences. Many under­graduates specialise in one of these divisions while studying certain parts of others as auxiliary to their main interest. Such specialisation can be associated with particular careers as set out in the depart­mental entries. Departments in the Faculty offer various topics for study as units, each unit covering a fairly narrow field within science. This aids the student in selecting those auxiliary units that are most appropriate to his need.

As the major divisions have grown, their boundaries have become less clearly defined; fields of study such as genetics, geo­chemistry, are examples of the gradual overlap of disciplines. The structure of the Bachelor of Science degree course provides the student with a wide choice of curricula, so that he may, if he so desires, spread his studies over a range of interest.

The course for the pass degree of Bachelor of Science normally may be completed in three years of full­time study. The units available have a value of half, one, two or three points and at least twenty points must be accumulated to qualify for the degree.

In the first year a student normally will take four units, each having a value of two points, extending over the full academic year.

The units to be taken in succeed­ing years will vary in value but most will be worth one point and will

extend over half the academic year, each half-year being called a semester. To complete in minimum time, a full-time student will need to accumulate six points in each of his second and third years, or three points in each semester.

Since the limitation on admission to a unit is the fulfilment of its prerequisite and the availability of space, units are not grouped by year, but by level. Units of Group A are available to students who have been admitted to a degree course whereas, with a few exceptions, Group B units have prerequisites in Group A, and Group C units have prerequisites in Group B. A minimum number of points must be accumulated from each group; these are specified in Rule 5 of the Courses of Study (Degree of Bachelor of Science) Rules.

The Rules allow the inclusion of units from the Department of Forestry (Group D units) and from other faculties (Group E units) and provide a measure of flexibility in the tailoring of a course best suited to a student's needs.

Any course selected must be approved by the Faculty. The Sub- Dean will assist the student in making his choice. Heads of depart­ments may be consulted on the choice of units relevant to a particular field of study.

The degree w i th honoursStudents who attain a sufficient standard in the pass degree may be admitted to the honours year to become candidates for the degree with honours. The work of the honours year will consist of advanced work in the selected field of study, details of which are given under the individual departments.

345

Faculty of Science

The degree of Bachelor of Science (Forestry)Students may enrol for the degree of Bachelor of Science (Forestry).For a description of the course see pages 365 to 377.

Higher degreesFacilities for postgraduate work leading to the degree of Master of Science or Doctor of Philosophy are available in all departments. Details of the requirements for postgraduate degrees are given under the individual departments.A number of postgraduate scholar­ships is available.

Non-degree students Students not proceeding to a degree may be admitted to classes under certain conditions (see General Information section).

Absence during the yearAttendance at practical classes, tutorials and seminars prescribed for individual units is compulsory. Students who are unable to meet this requirement should apply to the Academic Registrar for leave of absence. In cases of illness the letter of application should be accompanied by a medical certificate.

Students who absent themselves from classes without permission may be refused permission to take the examinations.

CareersThe degree of Bachelor of Science provides a general scientific training. Graduates may choose to build an administrative or teaching career on this general foundation and a demand exists in both government and private industry for science graduates of this kind.346

In most cases, further training is required, or at least advisable, in these careers. Graduates may choose to do a further course of formal training, such as a Diploma in Education or Librarianship, or to enter an in-service training pro­gram, such as the Commonwealth Graduate Training Program, or a similar program in industry. The abilities of the science graduate can be as useful in these fields as those acquired by say, the Arts or Economics graduate. In such areas as the production and marketing of chemical and other technical pro­ducts, science graduates are in demand to fill administrative and sales positions.

Alternatively, the Science degree, particularly with honours, provides an entry to several areas of pro­fessional work, depending on the major areas of undergraduate study. In many cases, a postgraduate degree is required for professional appointments, particularly for those in which a capacity for research is important.

Listed below are the major areas in which professional workers from the various scientific disciplines can find employment.BiochemistryOpportunities are mainly in the following areas: University teaching and research; hospitals and medical research units; CSIRO (e.g. Divisions of Plant Industry, Entomology, Protein Chemistry, etc.); the Public Service (e.g. Departments of Health and Agriculture); industrial con­cerns manufacturing agricultural and pharmaceutical chemicals and pro­cessing agricultural products and foodstuffs.BotanyHonours graduates in Botany find

The Science Degrees

employment in research organisa­tions— both government and private. There are also openings in universities.ChemistryChemistry can offer an entry into many interesting and satisfying occupations: teaching in secondary or tertiary education; industrial, government or academic research; control of operations in chemical manufacture, or in providing infor­mation and patent services.ForestryThe major employers are the State and Commonwealth Forest Services and private forestry or wood pro­cessing companies. Other employ­ment opportunities available are with planning authorities, national parks, CSIRO and government departments.GeologyThere are excellent career oppor­tunities available to both men and women graduates. Those with an honours (fourth year) degree are eligible to proceed to higher degrees and may find employment as teachers and research assistants in universities. Outside the University, honours graduates in geology are widely sought by Federal and State geological and geophysical surveys, mineral prospecting companies (metallic and non-metallic, including petroleum and coal), geochemical, petrological and palaeontological laboratories, museums, and local instrumentalities (dam-sites, high­way construction, hydrology, etc.). Graduates with a pass degree in geology find employment in teach­ing, library work, or as technical assistants in industrial concerns.MathematicsThere is a strong demand for grad­

uates in applied mathematics in CSIRO, universities, government departments (especially meteor­ology, aeronautical research, hydro­logy), secondary and tertiary teaching. For positions outside uni­versities, a knowledge of statistics is often a useful adjunct.

Employment fields for graduates in pure mathematics exist in second­ary and tertiary teaching, uni­versities, CSIRO, government departments and private industry. Computer programming and ana­lysis provides many opportunities.PhysicsCareer opportunities for physicists are mainly in secondary or tertiary teaching, or in research in uni­versities, government departments, or CSIRO. However, the range of interest is wide and includes defence research (aeronautics and weapons), atomic energy, medical research, oceanography, geophysics, bio­physics, nuclear physics, plasma physics, solid state physics, and optics. There is a wide choice of careers overseas.PsychologyMost psychologists find employ­ment in universities or in govern­ment service of one kind or another. However, depending on the grad­uate's own interest fields of activity cover a wide range: experimental psychology in universities; per­sonnel and industrial psychology in government and orivate industry; clinical and counselling psychology in schools, universities, state govern­ment departments and hospitals; human engineering research in government departments; and vocational and educational guidance. It should be noted that four years of academic preparation

347

are required as a basis for recogni­tion as a professional psychologist. StatisticsAlmost all government departments and instrumentalities, for example the Commonwealth Bureau of Census and Statistics and the Defence Department or state government agriculture depart­ments, employ statisticians and probabilists. There are also many opportunities in manufacturing industry, commerce and mining. These institutions employ statisti­cians in research and also research in theoretical statistics and proba­bility is carried out but the latter is mainly done by people working in universities, CSIRO (Mathema­tical Statistics Division) or special government institutions (e.g. aeronautical research laboratories or weapons research establish­ments).ZoologyThere are openings in school or university teaching; in biological research in hospitals, medical veterinary or agricultural institu­tions, CSIRO, or industrial firms manufacturing biological products (such as drugs and insecticides).

Details of units and book listsBiochemistryL. M . B irt, BAgrSc, BSc, PhD (Melb), DPhil (Oxon)Professor and Head of the Department

In troductionBiochemistry, as the name implies, is concerned with the study of living things by the use of chemical procedures and chemical concepts.It deals with the study of the chemical constituents of living matter, the metabolism and func­tions of these chemical entities, the molecular mechanisms involved in heredity, and the development and regulation of the extremely com­plex web of chemical interactions in biological systems.

The undergraduate course will stress particularly those chemical themes which are common to the entire living kingdom, but will also consider examples of the specialisa­tion which distinguishes certain organisms at a biochemical level. Thus, it will provide a detailed coverage of modern biochemistry as a fundamental biological science.Its aim is to equip graduates with training for the widest possible choice of a postgraduate career in biology-whether in agriculture, science, teaching and research, clinical work or industry. The honours degree will require a fourth year's work, which will involve a period of directed research and formal course work.

The research interests of the Department are centred around the molecular biology of development and differentiation. Topics under investigation include: RNA meta­bolism in Drosophila mutants in

348

Biochemistry

relation to development; the com­parative biochemistry of virus repli­cation in insect and mammalian cells in tissue culture; the biogenesis of mitochondrial membranes and the relation of Ca + + movements in mitochondria to the mechanism of oxidative phosphorylation; the regulation of metabolism in various mammalian tissues with special emphasis on the role of membranes; the biochemistry of insect meta­morphosis and the biochemistry of early amphibian development.

For the pass degree Biochem istry B01(General Biochemistry)(7 point) Group B (1)First semester.Three lectures and five hours of laboratory work a week.Prerequisite: Chemistry A01 or Chemistry A02.Syllabus: The functions of biolog­ically important compounds in rela­tion to their chemical structures; the degradation of carbohydrates, lipids and nitrogenous compounds during energy transformation; the biosynthesis of carbohydrates, lipids, proteins and nucleic acids; the genetic code.

Biochemistry A01 will provide a general introduction to modern bio­chemistry; it will serve both as a basis for further advanced work in the subject and as a terminal unit for other students of biology.Prescribed Books No books are prescribed; a list of reference books can be obtained from the Department.Examination: As arranged. A pass in laboratory work is required in order to qualify for a pass in the unit.

B iochem istry C01 (Metabolic Regulation)(7 point) Group C Second semester.Three lectures and five hours of laboratory work a week. Students are expected to attend all laboratory classes.Prerequisite: Biochemistry B01.Syllabus: The course will consist of a more detailed study of the chemi­cal organisation of cells, and will emphasise the regulatory aspects of metabolism. The integration and control of metabolic pathways in mammalian tissues will be stressed, with particular reference to the following topics:(a) cellular permeability and active transport(b) the regulation of enzyme synthesis(c) the metabolite control of enzyme systems(d) the role of hormones in develop­ment and adaptation.(e) tissue specialisation.Prescribed BooksNo books are prescribed; references to the current literature will be given during the course. Examination: As arranged.

B iochem istry C02 (Perspectives in Biochemistry)(1 point) Group C Second semester.Lectures and seminar/discussions as arranged.Prerequisite: Biochemistry B01.Syllabus: The course will comprise a critical examination of topics df current concern to biochemists in a series of reading and essay assign­ments and in seminar/discussions. Topics will be chosen at the begin­ning of each course and some

349

Faculty of Science

emphasis will be put on. biochemistry in relation to man. Topics to be covered include the biochemistry of the cancer cell, inborn errors of metabolism, immunology, and the origin of life. Students are advised that it w ill be advantageous to have completed Biochemistry C01 before taking Biochemistry C02. Prescribed Book: No book is prescribed.Examination: To be arranged.

Biochem istry C03(Biochemistry of Macromolecules)(1 point) Group C First semester.Three lectures and five hours of laboratory work a week.Prerequisite: Biochemistry B01.

Syllabus: The main emphasis of the course will be placed on a more detailed study of the biochemistry of proteins and nucleic acids with particular reference to the structural basis of function. This will include discussion of physical methods of analysis and advanced enzyme kinetics. Aspects of membrane structure and immunochemistry will also be reviewed.Prescribed Book□ Dickerson, R. E. Er Geis, I., The Structure and Action of Proteins, Harper.References to the current literature will also be given during the course.Examination: As arranged.

B iochem istry C04(Bioenergetics)(1 point) Group C Second semester.Three lectures and five hours of

laboratory work a week.Prerequisite: Biochemistry B01.

Syllabus: The enzymology, organisa­tion, development and control of energy transformations in animal, plant and microbial systems. Particular reference will be made to the mechanisms involved in the production of ATP in mammalian systems.

Prescribed BooksNo books are prescribed; references to the current literature will be given during the course.Examination: As arranged.

B iochem istry C05(Molecular Genetics)(7 point) Group C First semester.Three lectures and five hours of laboratory work a week.

Prerequisite: Biochemistry B01.Syllabus: The course will concen­trate on the expression and regula­tion of the genetic system of micro­organisms but w ill also refer to such processes in higher organisms. The following topics will be discussed:(a) the structure and chemistry of animal and bacterial viruses(b) the nature and replication of bacterial and viral chromosomes(c) bacterial mating systems and the genetic analysis of bacteria(d) conditional lethal mutants and the genetic analysis of viruses(e) the biochemistry of muta­genesis and recombination.(f ) the control of viral and bacterial nucleic acid replication.(g ) virus-induced transformation of animal cells (tumour viruses). Prescribed Book: No book is prescribed; students will be ex-

350

Biochemistry

pected to read references from the current literature in the field.Examination: As arranged.

For the degree w ith honoursStudents who have attained a suf­ficient standard in the course for the pass degree may be admitted to an honours year. In this year they will be engaged in individual laboratory work under supervision, together with course work, symposia and colloquia. Students will be required to submit a written report describing their laboratory investigations.

For the degree o f M aster of ScienceCandidates for this degree will usually be graduates, holding the degree of Bachelor of Science with honours, who do not propose to proceed to the degree of Doctor of Philosophy. A candidate who does not have an honours degree will be required to take a qualifying course of one to two years and an exam­ination covering topics specified by the Head of the Department.

All candidates for the degree of Master of Science will undertake research in an approved field and produce a detailed report of the work performed in the form of a thesis.

For th e degree o f D octor o f PhilosophyCandidates for this degree will usually hold the degree of Bachelor of Science with honours.

Research facilities are available in the fields of protein and nucleic acid metabolism in Drosophila mutants in relation to development; the comparative biochemistry of virus replication in insect and mam­malian cells in tissue culture; the

biochemistry of insect meta­morphosis; RNA metabolism in cultured insect cells; the biogenesis of mitochondrial membranes and the relation of Ca + + movements in mitochondria to the mechanism of oxidative phosphorylation; the regulation of metabolism in various mammalian tissues with special emphasis on the role of membranes; the biochemistry of insect meta­morphosis and the biochemistry of early amphibian development.

351

Botany

L. D. Pryor, DSc (Adel)Professor and Head of the Department

introductionBotany involves the comprehensive study of plants. Attention is given to their form and function, relationship to the environment, their develop­ment, derivation, classification, diseases and genetics. The close relationship of botanical study to other scientific disciplines is emphasised. Considerable attention is given to fieldwork and to the experimental approach in the study of plants.

Botany A01 is an introductory course in which the student gains some familiarity with the plant kingdom and begins the study of anatomy, morphology, physiology, cell biology, ecology and genetics. The semester units in Group B (1) elaborate selected parts of the first- year course and these lead to more advanced study in the Group C semester units.

Students who have completed the requirements for the pass degree may be admitted to an honours year in which they take a selected, specialised course of study and undertake a project related to the research interests of the Depart­ment. These at present are in the fields of ecology, experimental taxonomy, genetics, physiology, ultrastructure, microbiology, mem­brane biophysics, soils and micro­meteorology.

Facilities are available for post­graduate work leading either to the degree of Master of Science or Doctor of Philosophy.

For the pass degreeRecommended Books A list of books recommended for reading or reference will be provided within the Department.

Botany A01(2 points) Group A Full year.Three lectures and three hours of laboratory work a week together with field work as arranged.Syllabus(a) The Flowering Plant. Morpho­logy, anatomy and an outline of systematics.(b) Introduction to the Plant King­dom. Structure and reproduction in the various phyla illustrated by a few specific examples from each group.(c) Physiology. An outline of plant physiology with reference to both flowering and non-flowering plants.(d) Cell Biology, Cytology and Genetics. Elementary cytology and genetics and an introduction to the theory of evolution.(e) Ecology. Examples are taken from some plant communities in the Australian Capital Territory and southern New South Wales.Laboratory: Details of instruments and practical notebooks required are available in the Department of Botany. Students are required to collect, preserve and submit fifty specimens of vascular plants. Prescribed Books□ Weisz, P. B. & Fuller, M. S„ The Science of Botany, International Students' Edition.or Weier, T. E., Stocking, C. R. & Barbour, M. G., Botany, An Introduction to Plant Biology,Wiley International.

352

Botany

or Muller, W. H., Botany: A Functional Approach, Collier- Macmillan.or Tortora, G. J., Cicero, D. R. & Parish, H. I., Plant Form and Function. An Introduction to Plant Science, Collier-Macmillan.Examination: One three-hour written paper, one three-hour practical examination, one field test on the ecology of a region close to Canberra and other assessments.

Botany B01(Plant and Microbial Systematics)(7 point) Group B (7)First semester.Three lectures and six hours of laboratory work a week together with field work as arranged.Prerequisite: Botany A01 (unless otherwise approved by Faculty). Syllabus: Comparative studies of micro-organisms (viruses, bacteria, fungi), lower plants (algae, bryo- phytes, pteridophytes), higher plants (gymnosperms, angiosperms); with special emphasis on the general principles of evolutionary classifi­cation.Prescribed Books□ Heywood, V. H., Plant Taxonomy (Studies in Biology no. 5), Edward Arnold.□ Bell, P. R. & Woodcock, C. L. F., The Diversity of Green Plants, Edward Arnold.Examination: One three-hour paper plus assessment on practical work.

Botany B02 (Plant Metabolism)(7 point) Group B (1)First semester.Three lectures and six hours of laboratory work a week together with field work as arranged.

Prerequisites: Botany A01 or Zoology A01 and one of the following: Chemistry A01, Chem­istry A02, Physics A01 or Phy­sics A02.Syllabus: Plant and fungal metabolism, including respiration, translocation of organic substances, photosynthesis. Relevant electron microscope techniques will be introduced.Prescribed Books□ Rabinowitch, E. & Govindjee, Photosynthesis, Wiley.□ Crafts, A. S., Translocation in Plants, Holt, Rinehart & Winston.□ Beevers, H., Respiratory Metabol­ism in Plants, Harper.□ Burnett, J. H., Fundamentals of Mycology, Edward Arnold.Examination: One three-hour paper, plus assessment on practical work.

Botany B03(Plant Development)(1 point) Group B (1)Second semester.Three lectures and six hours of laboratory work a week together with field work as arranged.Prerequisites: Botany A01 (unless otherwise approved by Faculty).Syllabus: Plant growth and develop­ment; physiology of vegetative growth, flowering and breeding systems.Prescribed Book□ Leopold, A. C., Plant Growth and Development, McGraw-Hill.□ Galston, A. W. & Davies, P. J., Control Mechanisms in Plant Development (Foundations of Developmental Biology Series), Prentice-Hall.Examination: One three-hour paper plus assessment on practical work.

353

Faculty of Science

Botany B04(Genetics)(7 point) Group B (1)First semester.Three lectures and six hours of laboratory work a week.Prerequisite: Botany A01 or Zoo­logy A01 or Human Biology A02 (unless otherwise approved by Faculty).Syllabus: Mendelian genetics and cytogenetics; physiological and population genetics; elementary biometrics.Prescribed Books□ Srb, A. M., Owen, R. D. & Edgar, R. S., General Genetics, Freeman.□ Strickberger, M. W., Genetics, Collier-Macmillan.Examination: One three-hour paper plus assessment on practical work.

Botany C01(Plant Physiology)(1 point) Group C Second semester.Three lectures and six hours of laboratory work a week together with field work as arranged.Prerequisites(a) Botany B02; or(b) Botany A01 and BiochemistryB01; or(c) Botany A01 and Zoology B05. Syllabus: Water relations; photo- synthetic efficiency and productivity. Prescribed Books□ Davis, K. S. & Day, J. A., Water.The Mirror of Science, Heinemann.□ Kozlowski, T. T., Water Metabo­lism in Plants, Harper & Row Biological Monographs.□ Sutcliffe, J., Plants and Water (Studies in Biology no. 14),Edward Arnold.Examination: One three-hour paper 354

plus assessment on practical work.

Botany C02(Plant Ecology)(1 point) Group C Second semester.Three lectures and six hours of laboratory work a week together with field work as arranged. Prerequisite: Botany B01.Syllabus: The study of natural and artificial vegetation with emphasis on quantitative methods.Prescribed Book □ Greig-Smith, P., Quantitative Plant Ecology, Butterworth.Examination: One three-hour paper plus assessment on practical work.

Botany C03(Membrane Biophysics)(1 point) Group C First semester.Three lectures and six hours of laboratory work a week together with field work as arranged.Prerequisites(a) Biochemistry B01 or Botany A01 or Zoology A01 or Human Biology A02 (unless otherwise approved by the Faculty).(b) Physics A01 or Physics A02or Chemistry A01 or Chemistry A02. Syllabus: Ultrastructure, transport mechanisms, ionic relations and electrical properties of membranes in single cells and tissues.Examination: One thTee-hour paper plus assessment on practical work.

Botany C04(Plant-Microbe Relationships)(1 point) Group C Second semester.Three lectures and five hours of laboratory work a week together

Botany

with field work as arranged. Prerequisites: Botany B01; or Zoology B04 and Botany A01. Syllabus: The ecology of soil and airborne microbial populations and their various interactions with higher plants, especially the estab­lishment of stable symbiotic and parasitic relationships.Prescribed Books□ Jackson, R. M. & Raw, F., Life in the Soil (Studies in Biology no. 2), Edward Arnold.□ Scott, G. D., Plant Symbiosis (Studies in Biology no. 16),Edward Arnold.□ Deverall, B., Fungal Parasitism (Studies in Biology no. 17),Edward Arnold.Examination: One three-hour paper plus assessment on practical work.

Botany C05(Genetics)(1 point) Group C Second semester.Three lectures and six hours of laboratory work a week together with field work as arranged.Prerequisite: Botany B04 or Bio­chemistry C05 (unless otherwise approved by Faculty).Syllabus: Biometrical genetics; advanced physiological and popula­tion genetics.Prescribed Book□ Prentice-Hall Foundations of Modern Genetics Series.Examination: One three-hour paper plus assessment on practical work.

Botany C06(Micrometeorology and the Microenvironment)(1 point) Group C First semester.

Three lectures and five hours of laboratory work a week, together with field work as arranged.Prerequisites: Any one of the following— Botany B01, Botany B02, Botany B03, Botany B04, Zoology B04, Geology B01, Geo­logy B02, Physics B04, Psychology B04, Psychology B06 or Physical Geography.Syllabus: Significance and measure­ment of parameters of the micro­environment. Solar radiation; the energy balance and study of its various components. The micro­environment of various habitats including cities; survival, adaptation and comfort. Physico-chemical properties of soils, and the soil environment.Prescribed Books□ Baver, L. D., Soil Physics, Wiley.□ Gates, D. M., Energy Exchange in the Biosphere, Harper & Row Biological Monographs.□ Lowry, W. P., Weather and Life, Academic Press.□ Penman, H. L„ Humidity (Institute of Physics Monograph), Chapman & Hall.□ Shields, A. J., Australian Weather. Jacaranda.Examination: One three-hour paper plus assessment on practical work.

Botany C07(Plant Development)(1 point) Group C Second semester.Three lectures a week.Prerequisites: Botany B03 or Bio­chemistry B01 or Chemistry B02 Syllabus: Selected topics in whole plant physiology including the cellular and molecular basis of plant growth and development.

355

Faculty of Science

Seminars, essay assignments and appropriate experimental work on aspects of current interest to plant physiologists will form an integral part of the course.Laboratory: Up to six hours a week including seminar/essay discussions. Field work: As arranged.Prescribed Books□ Leopold, A. C., Plant Growth and Development, McGraw-Hill.□ Galston, A. W. & Davies, P. J., Control Mechanisms in Plant Development (Foundations of Developmental Biology Series), Prentice-Hall.Examinations: To be arranged.

For the degree w ith honoursStudents who have attained an adequate standard in the course for the pass degree may be admitted to an honours year. The candidate will be guided in the selection of a suitable course by a supervisor who will direct his research project.A course of study in specialised topics will be approved and must be followed. Candidates must submit a concise report of the method and results of their investigation in the form of a thesis. Examinations will be arranged as required.

For the degree of M aster o f ScienceCandidates will be required to pursue a course of study and original research. The choice of the field of research will be decided in consultation with the Head of the Department. Research interests of the Department are in the fields of experimental taxonomy, ecology, aspects of genetics, mycology, physiology, ultrastructure, bio­physics, soils and micrometeorology.

356

Candidates who do not hold the degree of Bachelor of Science with honours will be required to take a qualifying course and pass a written examination and if required an oral test before admission to the course for the degree of Master of Science.

A supervisor will be appointed for each candidate to advise upon the course of study and direct the research project.

Candidates will submit a thesis embodying the results of their research, together with a critical review of the cognate literature, including that in foreign languages.

For the degree of D octor o f PhilosophyCandidates for this degree will usually hold the degree of Bachelor of Science with honours.

Research facilities are available in experimental taxonomy, ecology, aspects of genetics, mycology, physiology, ultrastructure, bio­physics, soils and micrometeorology.

Chemistry

I. G. Ross, MSc(Syd), PhD(Lond), FRACIProfessor and Head of the Department

IntroductionChemistry is the study of matter, in relation to its structure at the level of individual atoms and mole­cules, and of the manner in which such structures can be transformed by chemical reactions. Between physics on the one hand, and biology on the other, it forms the principal interface. The subject may thus be pursued in many ways: at the one extreme at a purely theoreti­cal level (for which a strong back­ground in physics and mathematics is desirable) and at the other through experimental investigations (informed nowadays by a wide range of qualitative principles) of structure and change.

Chemistry is also an essential part of the background to the study of most other science disciplines, and to medicine and engineering. The courses offered are designed to meet the needs of students to whom chemistry is their principal concern, and of students whose interest is subsidiary to another branch of science.

Of the two first-year courses, Chemistry A01 assumes some prior knowledge of the subject and is the usual precursor to subsequent study of chemistry. Chemistry A02 is more wide ranging, and is mostly taken by students with relatively little prior chemistry, or none at all, or who do not propose to proceed to take any Group B chemistry unit. Students who obtain a pass in Chemistry A02 at credit level, or better, may proceed to further Chemistry units.

The semester units in Group B (1) commence the systematic study of the three main streams of chemistry, and lead to appreciably more advanced study in the Group C semester units.

Admission to the fourth honours year requires completion of the requirements for the pass degree, at a good standard and with a suffi­cient measure of specialisation in chemistry. In this year, students take selected specialised courses of study and undertake a project of original investigation. Other students may be admitted to a similar course to qualify for admission as candi­dates for the degree of Master of Science. Both avenues lead to admission for higher degrees.

Research in the department is diverse. In physical chemistry spectroscopy is a major theme, with emphasis on questions on energy transfer between molecules and their environment and on spectro­scopy as a tool for the investigation of molecular crystals. The chemical reaction process—its mechanism and energetics—are studied in the gas phase and in solids. Biological physical chemistry is represented by investigations of the conformations of proteins and of the complex structure of wool. In inorganic chemistry, research is divided between the development of new coordination complexes and of compounds of non-metals, sup­ported by X-ray crystallography. Radiochemistry, and the associated technique of Mössbauer spectro­scopy, are new developments. In organic chemistry the principal themes are: novel molecular re­arrangements effected by exposure to high temperatures and to ultra­violet irradiation; identification of

357

Faculty of Science

the natural chemical reagents which control selected biological processes; the synthesis of large-ring com­pounds and of novel heterocycles; and the mechanism of reactions in solution.

Upon graduation, BSc chemistry graduates at present disperse fairly evenly between higher study (leading to senior research and academic appointments), employ­ment in Commonwealth and State laboratories, employment in industry (control and process development in the chemical, pharmaceutical, food and mineral processing industries), and secondary school teaching.

For the pass degree

Chem istry A01(2 points) Group A Full year.Three lectures and three and a half hours of laboratory work a week.

This course should be taken by all students who propose to take other units in chemistry.A knowledge of chemistry to the 2F level in Science at the Higher School Certificate level in New South Wales will be assumed. Syllabus: The following syllabus provides a general guide to the topics to be discussed.(a) Inorganic Chemistry. Electronic structure of atoms and an intro­duction to the concepts of chemical bonding. A discussion of the properties of elements and compounds in relation to the bond type present. Electron affinity, ionisation energy and electro­negativity. Bond energies, bond lengths and atomic, ionic and covalent radii. Molecular geometry, crystal chemistry. Nomenclature.358

Periodicity and the comparative chemistry of some elements in the main groups.(b) Organic Chemistry. The scope and elementary procedures of organic chemistry. An introductory study of the following classes of aliphatic compounds: hydro­carbons, alkyl halides, alcohols, ethers, aldehydes, ketones, acids and amines.

Electronic structure and stereo­chemistry of carbon compounds. Functional, structural, geometric and optical isomerism. The mechan­isms of simple displacement reac­tions, Lewis theory of acids and bases. The structure of aromatic hydrocarbons.

An introductory study of the following classes of aromatic com­pounds: halides, nitro-compounds, sulphonic acids, phenols, amines.(c) Physical Chemistry. Elements of the kinetic theory of gases, deviations from ideal gas behaviour, van der Waals' equation, energy of interaction of pairs of particles.

Phase changes, liquefaction of gases and critical phenomena, vapour pressure. Phase rule, solid- liquid equilibrium in two com­ponent systems, melting point diagrams. Colligative properties of solutions. Elementary thermodyna­mics, the first law, Kirchhoff's law, Born-Haber cycle. Chemical equi­librium, an introductory treatment of free energy.

Elementary collision theory and reaction kinetics, simple theory of uni-molecular reactions.

Electrochemistry: ionic theory, conductance, non-ideality of ionic solutions, electrochemical cells, Nernst equation, electrode potentials.

Chemistry

Laboratory: The principles of inor­ganic, organic and physical chemistry will be illustrated. Exercises in quantitative analysis will be included. The apparatus used in the course is supplied by the Depart­ment of Chemistry. Attendance at laboratory classes is compulsory.Prescribed Books□ De Puy, C. H. & Rinehard, K. L, Introduction to Organic Chemistry, Wiley.□ Pimentel, G. C. & Spratley, R. D., Understanding Chemistry, H olden- Day.

Students will be expected to have access to a set of molecular models (FMO Molecular Models—student kit, or Maruzen Co.—student kit) for organic chemistry.

Students proceeding to further study of inorganic chemistry are advised to purchase, early in their course,□ Cotton, F. A. &• Wilkinson, G., Advanced Inorganic Chemistry, Interscience.Examination: One three-hour written paper in inorganic and physical chemistry and one two-hour paper in organic chemistry. There will be a mid-year examination and the practical work of the student will be assessed throughout the year. The results of the mid-year examination and the quality of the practical work performed will be taken into account in determining the success of candi­dates at the Annual Examination.

Chem istry A02(General Chemistry)(2 points) Group A Full year.Three lectures and three and a half hours of laboratory work a week.

This is a broad course to provide

for the diversity of academic aims of students taking General Chemisty as a prerequisite. While it is not regarded as the usual route to further units of chemistry, students who obtain a pass at credit level at the annual examinations may be permitted to proceed to further studies in chemistry.Syllabus: The properties of gaseous, liquid and solid systems; equilibrium in chemical reactions; colligative properties of solutions; conduct­ance and electrolysis; electrode potentials; thermodynamics and kinetics, photochemistry, physical techniques.

Atomic structure and chemical bonding, the periodic table of elements, its structure and develop­ment as a basis for the study of the comparative chemistry of the principal compounds of the main families. The nature and chemical applications of radioactivity. Stoi­chiometry, crystal chemistry and chemical nomenclature.

The reactions and structures of the simpler classes of organic com­pounds, particularly those of biological and industrial importance.Laboratory: Exercises illustrating the simpler principles of analytical, inorganic, organic and physical chemistry. The apparatus used in the course is supplied by the Depart­ment of Chemistry. Attendance at laboratory classes is compulsory.Prescribed Books□ Brescia, F., Arents, J., Meislich,H. & Turk, A., Fundamentals of Chemistry. A Modern Introduction, Academic Press.□ Abbott, D., Introduction to Periodic Table, Dent.□ DePuy, C. H. & Rinehard, K. L,

359

Faculty of Science

Introduction to Organic Chemistry, Wiley.

Access throughout the year to molecular models (Maruzen Co. student kit or FMO student kit) is considered highly desirable, and their purchase is encouraged.Examination: One three-hour written paper in inorganic and physical chemistry and one two-hour paper in organic chemistry. There will be terminal examinations and the prac­tical work of the student will be assessed throughout the year. The results of the terminal tests and the quality of the practical work per­formed will be taken into account in determining the success of candi­dates at the Annual Examination.

C hem istry B01(Inorganic Chemistry)(7 point) Group B (7)First semester.Three lectures and six hours of laboratory work a week.Prerequisite: Chemistry A01 or a credit in Chemistry A02.Syllabus: The stereochemistry of atoms in molecules and ions; factors determining the structures of covalent compounds. Co-ordination chemistry, isomerism of co-ordina­tion compounds, valence bond and crystal field theories. Chemistry of non-metallic elements and transi­tion metals. Non aqueous solvent systems.Prescribed Book □ Cotton, F. A. & Wilkinson, G., Advanced Inorganic Chemistry,2nd ed., Interscience.Examination: One three-hour paper; the quality of the laboratory work will be taken into account in determining the success of the candidate in this unit.360

Chem istry B02(Organic Chemistry)(7 point) Group B (7)Second semester.Three lectures and six hours of laboratory work a week.Prerequisite: Chemistry A01 or a credit in Chemistry A02.Syllabus: Chemistry of aromatic compounds, with particular reference to electronic effects and their influence on properties and reac­tivity. A critical analysis of reaction mechanisms in substitution, addi­tion and elimination reactions. Stereochemistry in organic com­pounds about carbon, nitrogen, sulphur and phosphorus atoms; an introduction to the principles of conformational analysis. The chemistry of carbonium, ions, carbanions, carbenes and radicals as illustrated by polyfunctional molecules. A brief introduction to the use of physical methods in determination of structure.Prescribed Books□ Morrison, R. T. & Boyd, R. N., Organic Chemistry, Allyn & Bacon.□ Sykes, P., A Guidebook to Mechanism in Organic Chemistry, Longmans.Examination: One three-hour paper; the quality of the laboratory work will be taken into account in determining the success of the candidate in this unit.

C hem istry B03(Physical Chemistry)(7 point) Group B (7)First semester.Three lectures, one tutorial and four hours of laboratory work a week.Prerequisites: Chemistry A01 or a credit in Chemistry A02; Physics A01 or Physics A02; Pure Mathe-

Chemistry

matics I or Applied Mathematics I or General Mathematics.Syllabus: An introduction to the main apparatus of physicochemical theory— quantum mechanics, thermodynamics, statistical behav­iour of molecular systems, rate pro­cesses—illustrated by applications to molecules in isolation, to polymers, and to the solid, liquid and gaseous states.Prescribed Book □ Castellan, G. W., Physical Chemistry, Addison-Wesley.Examination: One three-hour paper; the quality of laboratory work will be taken into account in determi­ning the success of the candidate in this unit.

C hem istry B04(Physical Chemistry)( / point) Group B (7)First semester.Three lectures, one tutorial and four hours of laboratory work a week.Prerequisite: Chemistry A01 or a credit in Chemistry A02. Physics and mathematics, to the level at least of Physics A02 and General Mathematics are also highly desirable.Syllabus: About half the lectures of this course are taken in common with Chemistry B03, and comprise the core material of that course.The remaining lectures deal with the applications of physical methods to the elucidation of mol­ecular structure and the course of chemical reactions. This course is designed particularly for students whose experience in physics is limited.

Prescribed Book□ Castellan, G. W., Physical Chemistry, Addison-Wesley.

Examination: One three-hour paper; the quality of the laboratory work will be taken into account in determining the success of the candidate in this unit.

C hem istry C01(Transition Elements and

Organo-metallics)(7 point) Group C First semester.Three lectures and six hours of laboratory work a week.

Prerequisite: Chemistry B01. Also, Chemistry B03 or B04 is normally taken as a complement to this unit, and familiarity with some of the material of Chemistry B03 or B04 will be assumed. Students who have taken neither of these units should be prepared to do additional reading.

Syllabus: Advanced coordination chemistry, complexes of carbon monoxide and nitrogen, organo- metallics, lanthanides and actinides.Prescribed Book□ Cotton, F. A. & Wilkinson, G., Advanced Inorganic Chemistry, 2nd ed., Interscience.Examination: One three-hour paper; the quality of the laboratory work will be taken into account in determining the success of the candidate in this unit.

C hem istry C02(Structural Inorganic Chemistry)(7 point) Group C Second semester.Three lectures and six hours of laboratory work a week.Prerequisite: Chemistry B01. Also, Chemistry B03 or B04 is normally

361

Faculty of Science

taken as a complement to this unit. Students who have taken neither of these units should be prepared to do considerable additional reading. Syllabus: Application of ligand field theory to absorption spectra, optical rotatory dispersion, circular dichro- ism, magnetochemistry, inorganic reaction mechanisms, crystallo­graphy, radiochemistry, nuclear chemistry, Mössbauer effect.Prescribed Book □ Cotton, F. A. & Wilkinson, G„ Advanced Inorganic Chemistry,2nd ed., Interscience.Examination: One three-hour paper; the quality of the laboratory work will be taken into account in determining the success of the candidate in this unit.

Chem istry C03(Organic Structure and Mechanism) (/ point) Group C First semester.Three lectures and six hours of laboratory work a week.Prerequisite: Chemistry B02. Familiarity with some of the material of Chemistry B03 or B04 will also be assumed, and students who have taken neither of these units should be prepared to do additional reading.Syllabus: A study of the basic reac­tion mechanisms encountered in organic chemistry, extending into the generation, reactions and rear­rangements of electron-deficient species. Radicals and photo­chemistry. An introduction to the elementary theory and applications of nuclear magnetic resonance techniques in structural and mech anistic studies. Stereochemistry, conformational analysis and carbo- cyclic chemistry.362

Prescribed Books□ Morrison, R. T. & Boyd, R. N., Organic Chemistry, Allyn & Bacon.□ Pasto, D. J. & Johnson, C. R., Organic Structure Determination, Prentice-Hall.□ March, J„ Advanced Organic Chemistry, McGraw-Hill. Examination: One three-hour paper; the quality of the laboratory work will be taken into account in determining the success of the candidate in this unit.

C hem istry C04(Heterocycles, Synthesis and

Natural Products)(7 point) Group C Second semester.Three lectures and six hours of laboratory work a week.Prerequisite: Chemistry B02. Syllabus: An introduction to the chemistry of the main five and six- ring heterocyclics containing one and two heteroatoms. Particular attention will be given to biologi- cically important systems. Syn­thetic methods and reagents, including a study of the chemistry of carbanions, and organic compounds of phosphorus, sulphur and boron. Selected topics in natural product chemistry will be used to illustrate the course, and an introduction to the use of mass spectrometry will be given.Prescribed Books□ Paquette, L. A., Principles of Modern Heterocyclic Chemistry, Benjamin.□ Ireland, R. E., Organic Synthesis, Prentice-Hall, Paperback.□ Pasto, D. J. &- Johnson, C. R., Organic Structure Determination, Prentice-Hall.□ Bu'Lock, J. D., Biosynthesis of

Chemistry

Natural Products, McGraw-Hill.Examination: One three-hour paper; the quality of the laboratory work will be taken into account in determining the success of the candidate in this unit.

Chem istry C05(Physical Chemistry)(7 point) Group C First semester.Three lectures and six hours of laboratory work a week.Prerequisite: Chemistry B03 or B04. Students who have taken neither Chemistry B01 nor B02 should be prepared to do additional reading. Syllabus: Theory of molecular spectra. Electrochemistry. Macro­molecules. Rates and mechanism of chemical reactions. Chemical thermodynamics.Prescribed Book□ Castellan, G. W., Physical Chemistry, Addison-Wesley.□ Shoemaker, D. P. & Garland,C. W., Experiments in Physical Chemistry, McGraw-Hill. Examination: One three-hour paper; the quality of the laboratory work will be taken into account in deter­mining the success of the candidate in this unit.

Chem istry C06(Chemical Physics)(7 point) Group C Second semester.Four lectures a week. Laboratory sessions will include seminars and tutorials.Prerequisite: Chemistry B03 or B04. This prerequisite may be waived for students with a strong background in Physics or Applied Mathematics.Syllabus: Quantum mechanics,

statistical mechanics, crystals and crystal growth. Physicochemical instrumentation. Special topics e.g. structure of liquids, inter- molecular transfer of energy, applications of computers.

Prescribed Book□ Anderson, J. M„ Introduction to Quantum Chemistry, Benjamin.Examination: One three-hour paper. The quality of tutorial work will be taken into account in determining the success of the candidate in this unit.

For the degree w ith honoursStudents who have attained a sufficient standard in the course for the pass degree may be admitted to an honours year. The normal date for commencing the honours course is the first Monday in February, but there is some flexibility in this matter. Further, students who complete the requirements for the pass degree at the end of the first semester may, if admitted to honours, commence in mid-year.

There is also a requirement for some proficiency in scientific German. This requirement will be deemed to have been satisfied in the case of students who pass, or have already passed, the unit Science German. Students who have not elected to take this unit will be required to sit for an internal examination held towards the end of the second term.

Students may receive permission to substitute another suitable lan­guage for German, e.g. Russian.

A supervisor, who will guide the candidate in the selection of a suitable course of study and who will direct his research project, will be appointed for each honours

363

Faculty of Science

candidate. The course of study must be selected from a special schedule of lecture courses, details of which will be made available within the Department, and must be approved by the Head of the Department. Candidates will be able to select their general field of investigation.

Attendance at colloquia held in the Department constitutes a part of the course and the candidates will be required to prepare and deliver a paper on a prescribed topic.

Candidates must submit a thesis describing the method and results of their investigation by a date to be advised early in December of the year in which they take the course; or in the case of candidates com­mencing in mid-year at a date to be arranged approximately ten months after they commenced their course.

There will be written examina­tions during the year, and an oral test.

The classification for honours will be based on the report of the in­vestigation, the results of the written and oral examinations and a report by the supervisor.

For the degree of M aster of ScienceCandidates will be required to pursue a course of study and orig­inal research. The choice of the field of research will be decfded by the student in consultation with the Head of the Department. Candi­dates who do not hold the degree of Bachelor of Science with honours will be required to take a qualifying course and pass a written examina­tion and an oral test before admis­sion to the course for the degree of Master of Science.

The recognised method of meet­ing this requirement is to enrol for364

the Master of Science Qualifying Course, which is conducted along lines very similar to the honours course described above. A report describing the method and results of the investigation is required.

Candidates for the degree of Master of Science may be required to meet a language requirement as described above for the degree of Bachelor of Science with honours.

A supervisor will be appointed for each candidate, who will advise on the course of study and direct the research project.

Candidates will submit a report embodying the results of their research, together with a critical review of the cognate literature.

For the degree o f D octor of PhilosophyCandidates for this degree will usually hold the degree of Bachelor of Science with honours though candidates with the degree of Master of Science may be admitted to the course.

Facilities are available in the De­partment of Chemistry for study and research in this course in the fol­lowing fields: molecular spectros­copy, chemistry of organic natural products, synthesis of new types of heterocyclic compounds, X-ray crystallography, protein synthesis, chemistry of complex salts, Möss- bauer spectroscopy, chemical kinetics, photochemistry, reaction mechanism studies, and reactions of molecules under high energy con­ditions, theoretical chemistry and thermochemistry.

The normal duration of the course is three years. The degree is awarded on the basis of a thesis, examined externally, and an oral examination.

Com puter Science

The following units of Computer Science, offered by the Department of Statistics, are available as units for the degree of Bachelor of Science:Computer Science B01(7 point) Group B (2)Computer Science B02(7 point) Group B (2)

Computer Science C01(7 point) Group C

Computer Science C02(7 point) Group C

Computer Science C03(7 point) Group C

The prerequisites for Computer Science B01 in the Faculty of Science are at least three Group A units to the value of six points.

Only one of the units Computer Science C02 and Computer Science C03 may be counted for the degree of Bachelor of Science.

For details of the units see Faculty of Economics.

Forestry

J. D. Ovington, PhD, DSc (Sheff), FFS, FI Biol Professor and Head of the Department

IntroductionThe University has taken over the functions of forestry education car­ried out by the former Australian Forestry School which was estab­lished in 1925 to provide a national centre for higher forestry education. Advice on the professional aspects of forestry education at the Uni­versity is provided by an Advisory Committee which includes in its membership representatives of all State Forest Services and other persons with special relevant knowledge.

The forestry course provides train­ing for the professional forest officers required to manage Australian forests. The forestry curriculum is designed to give a thorough appre­ciation of the basic biological, physical and social sciences as well as a comprehensive knowledge of the science, art and business of forestry. Whilst particular attention is paid to the needs of wood pro­duction and utilisation, it is recog­nised that forest officers should be concerned with all uses of forest land; for instance, water supply, erosion control, recreation and wild­life conservation. Consequently, the forestry course provides a broad- based education rare among uni­versity disciplines and is an emi­nently suitable training for the variety of professions where renewable natural resources and land management are involved. The concept of forest ecosystems is used to overcome artificial, inter­disciplinary barriers, a forest being considered as a complex

365

Faculty of Science

system of living organisms and their remains, and a variety of inter­related environmental factors and processes, all of which are modified by and affect human activities.

Many applicants for admission to the course are recommended by Australian State, Commonwealth or overseas forest authorities. Stu­dents so nominated are usually given financial support by the nominating service. A prospective student desiring nomination in Australia should apply to his State Forest Service or to the Forestry and Timber Bureau, Canberra, for a Commonwealth Forestry Scholar­ship.

Students nominated by a State Forest Service are normally assured of employment upon the satisfac­tory completion of their course, and it is customary for them to under­take to serve the nominating auth­ority for a specified period. Grad­uates who have carried out the course under a Commonwealth Forestry Scholarship are free at the time of graduation to accept em­ployment in any position offering in forestry in Australia. Students proceeding to the degree at their own expense can accept any posi­tion available when they complete the course. The various Australian forest authorities have indicated they anticipate little difficulty in employing suitable students who have completed the course.

For the degree of Bachelor of Science (Forestry)The course for the degree of Bachelor of Science (Forestry) is normally a four-year course. By arrangement, students who have completed satisfactorily one year of an approved course at another uni­

versity may transfer to this Uni­versity for the final three years of the forestry course. The first-year requirements vary according to the university in which the work is completed.

The general requirements for the four-year course of study at this University leading to a degree of Bachelor of Science (Forestry) are given in the degree rules. The part of the course available in the De­partment of Forestry has a value of seventeen points; the total number of points required being twenty- six. Sponsored students should note that, in selecting units to be taken, they must not only have in mind the fulfilment of the require­ments of the rules, but also the wishes of their sponsors.

The Department of Forestry offers the following twenty-five units:(1) Units having a value of half a point Semester 1Forestry D16 (Soil science)Forestry D17 (Forest meteorology,

climate and fire)Forestry D18 (Dendrology)Forestry D19 (Forest communities) Forestry D20 (Wood anatomy

and timber identification) Forestry D21 (Pathology of

forest trees and ornamentals) Forestry D22 (Wildlife and range

management)Forestry D23 (Principles of pest

control)Forestry D24 (Growth and

nutrition of forest trees)Forestry D25 (Metabolic control

of tree growth)Semester 2Forestry D26 (Forest hydrology) Forestry D27 (Forest engineering)

366

Forestry

Forestry D28 (Principles of tree improvement)

Forestry D29 (Ecology of soil micro-organisms)

Forestry D30 (Ground and aerial surveying)

Forestry D31 (Forest biometrics and computer methods)

(2) Units having a value of one pointSemester 1Forestry D35 (Physical and

chemical properties of wood) Forestry D36 (Plantation

silviculture)Forestry D37 (Harvesting and

utilisation of forest products) Semester 2Forestry D32 (Forestry and

resource economics)Forestry D33 (Silviculture of

indigenous forests)Forestry D34 (Mensuration) Forestry D38 (Forest planning

and operations analysis)Forestry D39 (Conservation,

multiple use and resource management)

Forestry D40 (Forest manage­ment, administration and policy) Normally, units having a value of one point are taken after Semester I of the third year; units D32, D33 and D34 in Semester 2 of the third year, units D35, D36 and D37 in Semester I of the fourth year and units D38, D39 and D40 in Semester 2 of the fourth year.

Except with the approval of the Head of the Department students must attend all laboratory classes and field excursions. Some field excursions are held in interterm; details of such excursions can be obtained from the Department.

Forestry D16(Soil science)( i point) Group D First semester.Forty-eight hours of lectures and practical work.Syllabus: The physical, chemical and biological constitution of soils. Soil forming factors and their effects on forest ecosystems. Soil forming processes. Soil classifica­tion and mapping. The major Australian soil classes, in relation to use and treatment of forest soils. Natural and induced changes in forest soils.Prescribed Books□ Leeper, G. W., Introduction to Soil Science, 4th ed., Melbourne UP.□ CSIRO, The Australian Environ­ment, (ed. G. W. Leeper, 4th ed.) Melbourne UP.□ Green, C. C., The Water Cycle— Concepts and Processes, Cassell. Examination: As arranged.

Forestry D17(Forest meteorology, climate and

fire)( i point) Group D First semester.Forty-eight hours of lectures and practical work.Syllabus: Atmospheric elements and meteorological instruments.Patterns of world and Australian weather and climate. The forest microclimate and its effects on the forest ecosystem. Weather fore­casting in relation to theoretical and practical aspects of forest fire, fire prevention and fire fighting.

Behaviour of fire under various fuel, weather and topographic conditions. Effects of fire on the forest. Causes of forest fires.

367

Faculty of Science

Controlled use of fire. Combating forest fires, including detection, communication and transport. Fire danger forecasting.Prescribed Books□ Australian Meteorological Observers' Handbook, Common­wealth of Australia, Bureau of Meteorology.□ Davis, K. P., Forest Fire Control and Use, McGraw-Hill.□ Fire Weather, Agriculture Hand­book 360, USDA Forest Service, 1970.Examination: As arranged.

Forestry D18(Dendrology)(i point) Group D First semester.Forty-eight hours of lectures and practical work.Syllabus: Cause and nature of variation in tree species. Com­parative morphology and taxonomy of forest trees, their habits and ranges. Identification and field study of indigenous and introduced trees including eucalypts, conifers, rainforest trees and deciduous hardwoods. Ecology of communities in selected localities.Field work: Interim field work one week. (Not compulsory if taken as part of D1 9).Prescribed Books□ Forest Trees of Australia, Forestry 8- Timber Bureau, Canberra.□ Chippendale, G. M., (ed.), Eucalyptus Buds and Fruits,Forestry 8 Timber Bureau,Canberra.□ Francis, W. D., Australian Rainforest Trees, Forestry 8 Timber Bureau, Canberra.□ Dallimore, V. M. H. 8 Jackson,

A. L. S., Handbook of the conifers, Edward Arnold.□ Pryor, L. D., Trees in Canberra, Department of the Interior,Canberra.Examination: As arranged.

Forestry D19(Forest communities)(i point) Group D First semester.Forty-eight hours of lectures and practical work.Syllabus: Definitions of ecology and ecosystems. Ecological methods, community analysis, sampling and description of vegetation. Life-forms of plants. Plant communities, stratification, floristic diversity, patterns of vegetation. Biotic and edaphic factors in the spatial distribution of forest species and forest succession. World vegetation, biome concept, distribution of forests. Australian vegetation and its origin, descrip­tion of plant formations and classification of major communities. Historical notes on Australian vegetation, influence of man, problems of conservation.Field work: Interim field work one week. (Not compulsory if taken as part of D18)Prescribed Books□ CSIRO, The Australian Environ­ment, (ed. G. W. Leeper, 4th ed.) Melbourne UP.□ Green, C. C., The Water Cycle— Concepts and Processes, Cassell.□ Billings, W. D., Plants and the Ecosystem, Macmillan.□ Daubenmire, R., Plant Communities, Harper.Examination: As arranged.

368

Forestry

Forestry D20(Wood anatomy and timber

identification)(i point) Group D First semester.Forty-eight hours of lectures and practical work.Syllabus: Significance and origin of cambium. Periclinal and anti­clinal division of cambium initials. Gross, microscopic and sub- microscopic characteristics of wood. Wood cell types, cell wall sculpturing. Anatomy of reaction wood.

Anatomical and other features used in wood identification. Principles and use of keys for wood identification. Recognition of characteristics of wood of main commercial tree species.Prescribed Books□ Zimmermann, M. H., The formation of wood in forest trees, Academic Press.□ Jane, F. W„ The structure of wood, A & C Black.Examination: As arranged.

Forestry D21(Pathology of forest trees and

ornamentals)(i point) Group D First semester.Forty-eight hours of lectures and practical work.Syllabus: Symptoms and diagnosis of pathological conditions in perennial hosts. Host pathogen reactions and infection phenomena. Pathogenesis and disease resist­ance. Epidemiology of soil and air borne diseases of perennial plants. Assessment of pathogen populations and evaluation of disease potential. Disease control and prevention. Techniques for

examining pathological material and determining causality. Decay of standing trees and timber in service. Prescribed Books□ Boyce, J. S., Forest Pathology, McGraw-Hill.□ Garrett, S. D„ Biology of Root Infecting Fungi, Cambridge UP. Examination: As arranged.

Forestry D22(Wildlife and range management)(i point) Group D First semester.Forty-eight hours of lectures and practical work.Syllabus: Management of range for grazing by domestic animals and interactions with wildlife. Assess­ment of range carrying capacity based on primary productivity, and methods of improvement. The problems of over-exploitation, range deterioration and erosion. Over-exploitation through develop­ment of pest levels of wild animal populations. Population counting and methods of control. Techniques of selective culling. Management for species conservation and for game. The systems approach as a means towards more efficient management. The value of the computer as an aid to manage­ment of range and wildlife. Prescribed Books□ Giles, R. H„ Wildlife Manage­ment Techniques, The Wildlife Society, D.C.□ Ehrlich, P. R. &■ Ehrlich, A. H., Population, Resources, Environ­ment, Freeman.Examination: As arranged.

369

Faculty of Science

Forestry D23(Principles of pest control)( i point) Group D First semester.Forty-eight hours of lectures and practical work.Syllabus: Vertebrates and invertebrates in forests. Outline of insect morphology and physio­logy. Population ecology and measurement of populations.Causes of population outbreaks. Natural controls. Interactions of pests and trees and determina­tion of damage levels justifying artificial control. Principles of bio­logical control. Integrated control. Use of pesticides. Application of pesticides in theory and practice. Major pesticides and their mode of action. Environmental and eco­system consideration.Prescribed Books□ Graham, S. A. & Knight, F. B., Principles of Forest Entomology. McGraw-Hill,or Graham, K., Concepts of Forest Entomology, Reinhold.□ Martin, H„ The Scientific Principles of Crop Protection, Edward Arnold.□ Cherrett, Ford, Herbert & Probert, The control of injurious animals, EUP.Examination: As arranged.

Forestry D24(Growth and nutrition of forest

trees)( i point) Group D First semester.Forty-eight hours of lectures and practical work.Syllabus: Organisation of trees as woody perennials, and their growth characteristics. Mineral nutrition, photosynthesis, respiration, and

translocation with particular reference to special physiological relationships of trees arising from their size and longevity, and to physiology as the basis of silviculture.Prescribed Books□ Kramer, P. J. & Kozlowski, T. T, Physiology of Trees, McGraw-Hill. Examination: As arranged.

Forestry D25(Metabolic control of tree growth)(J point) Group D First semester.Forty-eight hours of lectures and practical work.Syllabus: Influences on tree physiology of external environ­mental factors: light, temperature, wind, water relations. Internal factors affecting growth and development. Correlating systems and mechanisms of growth regulating substances. Dormancy and ageing. Physiology of seeds and seed germination. Flowering and seed production. Nature of herbicide action with particular reference to woody weed control.Prescribed Books□ Kramer, P. J. & Kozlowski, T. T., Physiology of Trees, McGraw- Hill.Examination: As arranged.

Forestry D26(Forest hydrology)( i point) Group D Second semester.Forty-eight hours of lectures and practical work.Syllabus: Principles of hydrology. Measurement and estimation of precipitation on forests and the theory of interception. Influence of forest cover on ground water

370

Forestry

recharge. Evapotranspiration from forests. Surface runoff in forested catchments and rainfall runoff relations.

Water resources. The effects of land management and forest treatments on water yield, rate of runoff and water quality. Water catchment studies. Forest operations in water supply catchments. Prescribed Books: No books are prescribed.Examination: As arranged.

Forestry D27(Forest engineering)( i point) Group D Second semester.Forty-eight hours of lectures and practical work.Syllabus: Transportation needs in forests. Planning co-ordinated transportation systems. Layout of forest road systems. Requirements and costs of road transportation. Vehicle limitations on public roads and road transport regulations.

Location, design and construction of forest roads. Selection and design of drainage works. Engineering properties and classification of soils. Pavement materials and soil stabilisation. Road construction and maintenance machines and practices.

Engineering structures for soil conservation and water storage.Flow of water in pipes and open channels. Pump characteristics.

Structural materials. Engineering specifications and contracts.Field work: Interterm field work one week.Prescribed Books □ Pearson, R. G., Kloot, N. H. & Boyd, J. D., Timber Engineering Design Handbook, Jacaranda.

Examination: As arranged.

Forestry D28(Principles of tree improvement)( i point) Group D Second semester.Forty-eight hours of lectures and practical work.Syllabus: The mechanisms of hereditary transmission. Genetic variation in forest tree species. Natural variation within and between tree populations, including wood properties. Provenance. Heritability. Selection. Genetic gain and breeding methods. Controlled breeding in forest tree species, seed orchards, progeny trials. Clonal selection and propagation.Prescribed Books □ Srb, A. M., Owen, R. D. &Edgar, R. S., General genetics. Freeman.Examination: As arranged.

Forestry D29(Ecology of soil micro-organisms) (J point) Group D Second semester.Forty-eight hours of lectures and practical work.Syllabus: The emphasis of the course will be mainly but not exclusively on soil fungi. Taxo­nomic composition of soil mycofloras. Significance of substrate composition. Fungal successions. Significance of microbial interactions. Survival in soil.

Influence of soil physical factors. Soil water; potential, solute diffusion, movement and micro­organisms in soil water. Oxygen. Carbon dioxide. Temperature. Hydrogen ion concentration.

371

Faculty of Science

Ecology of selected species or genera of fungi.Prescribed Books: No books are prescribed.Examination: As arranged.

Forestry D30(Ground and aerial surveying)(J point) Group D Second semester.Forty-eight hours of lectures and practical work.Syllabus: Applications of ground surveying in forestry. Principles of plane surveying. Measurement and setting of distances and angles. Computation and closure of traverses. Degrees of accuracy. Instruments and techniques for forest surveys. Precision of field measurements. Planning field surveys. Ground surveys for location design and setting out of forest roads. Computation and mapping of survey data.

Fundamentals of aerial photo interpretation and its use in forestry. Stereoscopic vision tests. Elements of aerial photography. Forestry requirements for aerial photography. Elements of photogrammetry. Principles and techniques of map­ping from aerial photographs. Photo interpretation.Prescribed Books: No books are prescribed.Examination: As arranged.

Forestry D31(Forest biometrics and computer

methods)( i point) Group D Second semester.Forty-eight hours of lectures and practical work.Syllabus: Statistical methods and their forestry applications in design 372

of experiments and handling of data. Frequency distributions and diagrams. Measures of central tendency and dispersion. The normal distribution. Standard error. Null hypothesis and significance. Comparison of sets of measure­ments. Chi-squared and tests of reality of association. Analysis of variance. Simple design and analysis of experiments. Inter-relation of sets of measurements; multiple regression. Sampling, particularly as applied to forestry problems.

The application of computers to forestry.Prescribed Books: No books are prescribed.Examination: As arranged.

Forestry D32(Forestry and resource economics)(7 point) Group D Second semester.Ninety-six hours of lectures and practical work.Syllabus: Forestry in the Australian economy. Theory of demand and consumer behaviour. Derived demand functions. Marketing methods and research, and the pricing of forest products.

Production economics. Theory of the firm. Theory of costs and cost analysis. Forms of ownership in firms and the analysis of balance sheets. Time preference functions and discounting. The rate of interest and resource allocation over time. Residual imputation, stumpage appraisal, and the theory of rent. Evaluation of forestry projects. Valuation and damage appraisal. Cost-benefit analysis and program budgeting. Economics of resource conservation and multiple use.

Forestry

Comparative advantage and trade in forest products. Forestry in economic development. Con­sumption of forest products in Australia and forecasting techniques.Prescribed Books□ Dorfman, R., The Price System, Prentice-Hall.□ Worrell, A. C., Economics of American Forestry, Wiley. Examination: As arranged.

Forestry D33(Silviculture of indigenous forests)(7 point) Group D Second semester.Ninety-six hours of lectures and practical work.Syllabus: Ecological background to silviculture. Silvicultural practice as affected by stand structure and dynamics. Influence of plant species on site conditions. Competition within stands. Relationships of silviculture to forest utilisation, management and economics.

Silviculture systems, clear cutting, seed tree and irregular forest systems. Determination of the appropriate silvicultural system. Design of forests to lessen wind damage. Principles and use of weedicides in forest treatment. Silviculture of indigenous forests. Silvicultural characteristics of indigenous forest species.Flowering and seedling cycles. Seedling establishment. Lignotubers and advance growth in eucalypt forests. Tolerance of species. The silvicultural treatment of the east coast, inland, riverain and jarrah forests. Silviculture of wet sclerophyll forests including ash- type forests. Structure and

regeneration of rainforest. Special problems and different silvicultural treatments of tropical forests.

Forest growth and environment. Climatic classification of homo­climes. Natural distribution limits and their relevance to species intro­ductions. Site quality evaluation.Soil nutrients and use of fertilisers. Field work: Interim field work one week.Prescribed Books □ Smith, D. M., The Practice of Silviculture, Wiley.Examination: As arranged.

Forestry D34(Mensuration)(7 point) Group D Second semester.Ninety-six hours of lectures and practical work.Syllabus: Fundamental relationships between tree and stand variables and their use for quantitative estimation and for understanding tree behaviour.

Measurement and estimation of the diameter, height, volume and age variables of individual trees, standing and felled. Stem form and taper. Growth processes and tree shape. Stem profile. Stem bole area. Crown dimensions. Increment in tree variables and its measurement. Factors influencing the estimation of stand variables. Tree size distributions. Stand basal area. Stand height. Stand volume. Site productivity. Stand density. Increment and yield.

Principles and methods of forest resource and management inventories. Use of aerial photo­graphs. Contribution of forest mensuration to forest management.

373

Faculty of Science

Field work: Interterm field work one week.Prescribed Books □ Carron, L. T, An outline of Forest Mensuration with Special Reference to Australia, AN UP. Examination: As arranged.

Forestry D35(Physical and chemical properties

of wood)(7 point) Group D First semester.Ninety-six hours of lectures and practical work.Syllabus: Chemical constitution of wood (cellulose, hemicelluloses, lignin, pectins). Wood extractives (polyphenols, tannins). Cell wall structure. Chemical and physical factors affecting the utilisation of wood with particular reference to pulping processes.

Distribution of water in wood and in the tree stem. Structural factors affecting the permeability of wood. Shrinkage, swelling and dimensional stabilisation of wood. Capillarity and diffusion. Drying of wood.

Wood preservation and durability. Chemical nature of decay and variation of decay resistance within trees.

Mechanical, electrical and acoustical properties of wood. Thermal properties including insulation and combustion. Mechanics of wood deformation and separation. Application of wood science to seasoning and preserva­tion of timber.Prescribed Books: No books are prescribed.Examination: As arranged.

Forestry D36(Plantation silviculture)(7 point) Group D First semester.Ninety-six hours of lectures and practical work.Syllabus: Plantation establishment. Tree nursery practice. Character­istics, variability and treatment of tree seed. Forest nursery soils. Control of nursery and plantation weed species. Plantation design. Preparation of planting sites and planting.

Plantation silviculture. Periodicity of tree growth. Silvicultural characteristics, growth and yield of selected plantation species. Dominance, tolerance and competition. Thinning. Effects of thinning on production of wood. Factors affecting thinning decisions. Economic aspects of thinning treatment. Natural and artificial pruning. Effects of artificial pruning on trees, stands and wood quality. Rotations.Field work: Interterm field work two weeks.Prescribed Books□ Brown, A. Et Hall, N., Growing Trees on Australian Farms, Forestry & Timber Bureau, Canberra.□ Smith, D. M., The Practice of Silviculture, Wiley.Examination: As arranged.

Forestry D37(Harvesting and utilisation of forest

products)(7 point) Group D First semester.Ninety-six hours of lectures and practical work.Syllabus: Harvesting, including stump operations, extraction of logs from stump to forest landing

374

Forestry

and transport of logs from forest to processing plant. The layout of forest road systems in relation to logging requirements. Thinning, clear felling and selective logging. Short-wood, single log length, multi-log length, tree length and whole tree systems of logging. Logging of water catchments.

Logging systems in relation to the requirements of sawmills and other wood processing plants. Log reception, storage, sorting and selection at sawmills and other wood processing plants. Saws, saw teeth, types of saw and their functions in a sawmill. Sawing patterns for various species, sizes and qualities of logs. The movement of material through sawmills and the disposal of waste. Sawmill productivity and efficient mill design.

Defects in timber. Visual and mechanical stress grading. The manufacture of plywood, particle­board, fibreboard and pulp and paper. Optimum utilisation and waste elimination. Integration of forest industries. Siting of forest industries in relation to supplies of raw materials, availability of labour, power, water supply, effluent disposal and markets for finished products.

The role of utilisation in forest establishment, cultural techniques and management.

Safety procedures and practices. Field work: Interterm field work one week.Prescribed Books□ Wallis, N. K., Australian Timber Handbook, A & R.□ Wackerman, A. E., Hagenstein,W. D. & Michell, A. S., Harvesting Timber Crops, McGraw-Hill. Examination: As arranged.

Forestry D38(Planning and operations analysis)(7 point) Group DThis unit will not be offered in1972.Second semester.Ninety-six hours of lectures and practical work.Syllabus: The principles of problem-solving techniques and their application to natural resource systems. The theory of systems; objectives, models, feedback and controj. Deterministic models; marginal analysis and investment analysis. Probabilistic models; analysis involving risk and un­certainty, statistical decision theory and game theory. Management planning, normal forest, linear programming, dynamic program­ming and simulation models. Pro­duction and pricing policy with respect to regional, state and na­tional goals, technological change, macroeconomic and institutional problems.Prescribed Books: No books are prescribed.Examination: As arranged.

Forestry D39(Conservation, multiple use and

resource management)(1 point) Group D Second semester.Ninety-six hours of lectures and practical work.Syllabus: World population trends and the increasing demands placed by man on the resource base. Nature of renewable natural resources. Resource surveys. Conceptual framework of defining policy objectives, decision making and implementation of programs of resource use. The forester as a

375

Faculty of Science

natural resource manager. Forest values with respect to timber production, wildlife, grazing, water yield, protection, recreation, amenity and conservation considerations. Integration of different uses of forest land and of forestry with other forms of land use.

Concept of natural systems and of unsuitable equilibriums. Biotic and environmental change.Pollution. Introductions and invasions. Relative attributes of native and man-made forests. Interpretation of dynamics of forest ecosystem processes in terms of (a) organic production and turnover, (b ) nutrient circulation,(c) hydrologic cycle and (d ) solar radiation, energy balance and flow. Application of analog computer models to forest eco-system func­tioning. Site potential and factors limiting biological and economic production of forests.

The recreational need. Impact of recreation on resources and forest management. Selection, establishment and management of scenic areas, nature reserves and national parks. Economic and social functions of National Parks and Forest areas. Land use planning and landscape design.Role of trees and forests in rural and urban landscapes.Prescribed Books: No books are prescribed.Examination: As arranged.

Forestry D40(Forest management, administration

and policy)(7 point) Group D Second semester.Ninety-six hours of lectures and practical work.

Syllabus: History of management. Management theory. The manager. Forest management, singularities, objects of management and factors affecting them. Territorial and administrative organisation. Mensuration and management concepts and tools, rotations, cutting cycles. Management inventory. Regulation of forests. Yield calculation and determination of cut. Planning, control and records. History and status of forest management, and manage­ment of the main forest types in Australia.

Factors influencing the develop­ment of forest policy. The main elements of forest policy, as illustrated by various countries. Forest resources and the historical development of forest policy in Australia. Likely future trends.Forest law and regulations, in general and in Australia.Field work: Interterm field work three weeks.Prescribed Books: No books are prescribed.Examination: As arranged.

For the degree w i th honoursStudents may be admitted to the honours course in one of two ways: (1) Students who have attained a sufficient standard in the first two years of the course may be admitted to the course for the degree with honours at the beginning of third year.

Such students are required to attend the third and fourth-year lectures and practical classes for the pass degree of Bachelor of Science (Forestry) plus additional honours lectures, seminars and practical classes. Honours students

376

Forestry

are required also to undertake original work on a selected problem and to submit a report on this work. A supervisor from the Department of Forestry will guide the candidate in selecting a suit­able subject for study and will direct the research project.(2) Students who are not admitted to the honours course at the beginning of third year but who attain an adequate standard in the course for the pass degree may be admitted to a final honours year on completion of the requirements of the pass degree. The candidate will be guided in the selection of a suitable course by a supervisor who will direct his research project. A course of study in specialised topics will be approved and must be followed. Candidates must submit a concise report of the method and results of their investigation in the form of a thesis. Examinations will be arranged as required.

A candidate who fails to qualify for the degree with honours may be admitted to the pass degree.

For the degree of M aster of ScienceCandidates may be admitted to the course for the degree of Master of Science if they have an appropriate science degree with honours. Other students may be admitted upon passing a qualifying course of one to two years.

Candidates for the degree are required to pursue a course of study and original research. The choice of the field of research will be decided in consultation with the Head of the Department.

A supervisor will be appointed for each candidate to advise upon the course of study and direct the research project.

Candidates are required to submit a thesis embodying results of their research, together with a critical review of the cognate literature, including that in foreign languages.

For the degree of D octor of PhilosophyCandidates for this degree will usually hold the degree of Bachelor of Science with honours or Bachelor of Science (Forestry) with honours or equivalent.

Research facilities are available in pedology, soil micro-organisms, forest botany, wildlife management, forest protection, fire, pathology, pesticides, dendrology, ecology, physiology, silviculture, wood science, utilisation, engineering, hydrology, biometrics, mensuration, ecomonics, operations analysis, forest management and planning conservation, recreation and photogrammetry.

377

Geology

D. A. Brown, MSc (NZ), PhD,DIC,(Lond)Professor and Head of the Department

IntroductionOne of the most attractive aspects of geology is the variety of topics that may be studied during the university curriculum. This is partly because the student is dealing with the planet Earth, an object of end­less change in itself, and partly because, in order to carry out this study, he has to draw on information from nearly all other branches of science.

From the purely scientific or cultural aspect, geology is concerned with such features as the immensity of time and the philosophy that, in considerable measure, physical processes observed today were operative in the past. It investigates the structural and geochemical factors that influence the building of the crustal units— continents, oceans, mountain ranges; the pro­cession of life through past ages; and the reconstruction of the geo­graphy in past geological times.

On the practical side, geology is applied to the problems of geo­logical surveying, the search for industrial raw materials, the siting of engineering projects, the location of supplies of water, petroleum and coal and the possible forecasting of volcanic eruptions and earthquakes.

For the pass degree in geology, students are trained at appropriate levels in crystallography, mineralogy, petrology and petrogenesis, geo­chemistry, palaeontology, strati­graphy, sedimentology, structural geology, tectonics, geophysics and economic geology. Lectures are supplemented by an intensive

course of practical work, including field excursions and mapping projects to illustrate features of geological interest in the local area and to prepare students for in­dependent geological mapping elsewhere.

For the degree with honours and the degree of Master of Science students are required to make a detailed investigation, involving preparation of a thesis, of a speci­fied topic. Advanced work is also carried out on topics studied in the pass degree, with additional investi- tions depending on the students' inclinations.

Postgraduate research facilities are available in a number of specialised fields of investigation (see page 384).

The completion of a university degree in geology opens the door to a wide variety of professional activi­ties with government geological surveys, with the laboratory and exploration sections of petroleum and mining organisations, with civil engineering and various industrial undertakings, and in teaching insti­tutions.

F or a ll G eo logy units a pass in th e p rescrib ed p rac tic a l w ork w ill be re q u ire d in o rder to gain a pass in th e unit.

For the pass degreeGeology A01(2 points) Group A Full year.Three lectures, one tutorial and three hours of laboratory work a week.Syllabus: Elementary physical geology, crystallography, mineralogy, petrology, structural geology, inter­pretation of geological maps, palae-

378

Geology

ontology and stratigraphy, pedology and economic geology.Field work: This forms an essential part of the course and is conducted on occasional Saturdays during the session. A three-day excursion is also held in the August vacation.Prescribed Books□ Holmes, A., Principles of Physical Geology, 2nd ed., Nelson Paper­back,□ Rutley, F. (Read), Elements of Mineralogy, 26th ed., Murby,or Dana, E. S. (Hurlbut), Minerals and How to Study Them, 3rd ed., Wiley.□ Tyrrell, G. W., Principles of Petrology, Methuen.□ Black, Rhona M., The Elements of Palaeontology, Cambridge UP.□ Bradshaw, M. J. Er Jarman, E. A., Reading Geological Maps, EUP. Examination: Two three-hour papers and assessment of laboratory and field work.

Geology B01(Mineralogy and Petrology)(/ point) Group B (1)First semester.Three lectures and six hours of laboratory work each week. Prerequisite: Geology A01; or Chemistry A01 or A02.Syllabus(а) Mineralogy. Geometrical crystal­lography, optical crystallography and a study of selected mineral groups with particular reference to ele­mentary crystal chemistry and structure.(б) Petrology. One-half of this course is devoted to a study of rocks crystallised from melts (igneous rocks) and the other to those that have crystallised in the solid state (metamorphic rocks).

Emphasis is placed in lectures on the chemical composition and mineral phase relationships (petrol­ogy) of these two rock groups and in the practical classes on des­cription and classification (petro­graphy).Prescribed Books□ Bishop, A. C., An Outline of Crystal Morphology, Hutchinson.□ Bloss, F. D., An Introduction to the Methods of Optical Crystallo­graphy, Holt, Rinehart Et Winston.□ Deer, \N. A., Howie, R. A. Et Zussman, J., An Introduction to the Rock Forming Minerals, Longmans.□ Joplin, G. A., A Petrography of Australian Igneous Rocks, (2nd ed ); A Petrography of Australian Metamorphic Rocks, A Er R.Examination: One three-hour paper and assessment of laboratory and field work.

Geology B02(Stratigraphical Geology)(7 point) Group B (7)Second semester.Three lectures and two three-hour periods of laboratory work a week.Prerequisite: Geology A01.Syllabus: The palaeontological con­tribution to evolutionary theory. Morphology, systematics, evolution and stratigraphical evolution of the main invertebrate phyla. Principles of taxonomy. Palaeoecology. Bio­stratigraphy.Prescribed Books□ Beerbower, J. R., Search for the Past, Prentice-Hall.□ Imbrie, J. Et Newell, N. D„ Approaches to Paleoeco/ogy, Wiley. Examination: As arranged.

379

Faculty of Science

Geology B03(Structural and Economic Geology; (7 point) Group B Second semester.Three lectures and two three-hour periods of laboratory work a week.Prerequisite: Geology A01.Syllabus: Economic Geology of mineral, petroleum and coal depo­sits. Structural Geology-rock deformation; stress and strain effects in rocks; elementary geo­metric analysis and classification of structures. Practical work consists of a study of economic minerals and mineral deposits; and the solution of structural problems, elementary geometric analysis of folds, re­construction of faults, diamond drillhole problems and block diagrams.Prescribed Books□ Park, C. F. & MacDiarmid, R. A., Ore Deposits, 2nd ed., Freeman.□ Ragan, D. M., Structural Geo­logy—An Introduction to Geometri­cal Techniques, Wiley.□ Spencer, E. W., An Introduction to the Structure of the Earth, McGraw- Hill.Examination: As arranged.

Geology C01(Field Geology)t (J point) Group C First or second semester.Prerequisite: Geology B01 or B02 or B03.Syllabus: Field-mapping procedures and techniques: preparation of geological maps and cross-sec­tions; the writing of geological reports.

The course is in three parts,(a) The geological interpretation of air photographs on three days im­

mediately prior to the field camp;(b) A field-mapping training camp of approximately ten days' duration, normally held in late February^ During this period, maps, cross- sections and summary geological reports of the area examined are prepared under supervision; and(c) A small field area is allocated to each student at the beginning of the first semester in which the course is taken. A comprehensive geological report on the area, based largely on independent work, is required by the end of the second semester.Prescribed Books□ Allum, J. A. E., Photogeology and regional mapping, Pergamon.□ Compton, R. R., Manual o f Field Geology, Wiley.

Geology C02(Crystallography and Mineralogy)(^ point) Group C First semester.Eighteen lectures and twelve three- hour periods of laboratory work. Prerequisite:(a) Geology B01, or(b ) Geology A01 and Chemistry B01, or(c) Geology A01 and Physics B01 or B02.Syllabus: Laue groups, point groups and space groups; generation and absorption of X-rays; diffraction by a lattice and by a crystal; study of polycrystalline (powder) material with X-rays.

tExcept with the permission of the Head of the Department of Geology, students must complete this unit before being admitted to the honours course. ^Students intending to take this course should note that the field-camp com­ponent, which falls in the long vacation, must be taken before the independent mapping project.

380

Geology

Structural principles in sulphides and oxides (silicates); factors affecting element distribution in minerals; imperfections in crystals; crystal growth; mineralogy of selected mineral groups.Practical work: Space group geo­metry, preparation and interpreta­tion of X-ray powder photographs and diffractograms, determination of structural formula.

An essay (2000 words) on a selected mineral or mineral group will be required.Examination: As arranged.

Geology C03(Australian Stratigraphy)(^ point) Group C First semester.Eighteen lectures and twelve three- hour periods of laboratory work. Prerequisite: Geology B01 or B02 or B03.Syllabus: The geological develop­ment of the Australian continent is broadly treated. The stratigraphy of the Tasman Geosyncline and the major sedimentary basins is reviewed, and palaeogeographic syntheses are presented. Emphasis is placed on the integration of information from all sources in understanding the regional strati­graphy. Special attention is paid to the Precambrian and to the economic aspects of the study. Practical work consists of the original study of some stratigraphic problem including literature research and interpretation.Prescribed Book□ Brown, D. A., Campbell, K. S. W. & Crook, K. A. W., Geological Evolution of Australia and New Zealand, Pergamon.

Examination: As arranged.

Geology C04 (Geophysics)( i point) Group C Second semester.Eighteen lectures and twelve three- hour periods of laboratory work.Prerequisite: Geology B03.Syllabus: This course concerns the basic physical properties of the Earth. It deals with seismology, gravity, magnetism, palaeomagne- tism and heat flow, and with the methods of geophysical surveying. Practical work consists of visits to geophysical laboratories and demonstrations of instrumental methods as can be arranged. An essay on a selected topic will be required.Prescribed Books□ Griffiths, D. H. & King, R. E., Applied Geophysics for Engineers and Geologists, Pergamon, Paper­back.□ Stacey, F. D., Physics of the Earth, Wiley.Examination: As arranged.

Geology C05(Microscopy of Opaque Minerals) ( i point) Group C Second semester.Eighteen lectures and twelve three- hour periods of laboratory work.Prerequisite: Geology B03.Syllabus: This is an introduction to the methods employed in micro­scopic study of opaque minerals. The emphasis is on identification procedures, but problems of inter­pretation are reviewed in lectures and examined in the laboratory. Examination: As arranged.

381

Faculty of Science

Geology C06(Geochemistry)(J point) Group C First semester.Twenty-four lectures.Prerequisite: Any Group B unit in Geology or Chemistry.Syllabus: The Earth in relation to the universe. The solar system. Meteorites. Abundance of elements and nuclides. Evolution of the Earth. The core, mantle and crust. The atmosphere, hydrosphere and bio­sphere. Geochemistry of magma- tism and igneous rock. Sedimenta­tion and sedimentary rocks and metamorphism and metamorphic rocks. The geochemical cycle.Isotope studies.Examination: As arranged.

Geology C07(Sedimentology B)( i point) Group C First semester.Eighteen lectures and twelve three- hour periods of laboratory work.Prerequisite or Corequisite: Geology B01 or B02.Corequisite: Geology C12.Syllabus: Mineralogy of sedimentary rocks. Petrology and petrogenesis of sandstones, mudrocks, limestones and chemical sediments. Provenance and dispersal of terrigenous sedi­ments. Practical work is concerned with the petrography of sedimentary rocks.Prescribed Book □ Folk, R. L, Petrology of Sedi­mentary Rocks, Hemphill's Book Stores.Examination: As arranged.

Geology C08(Igneous Petrology)( i point) Group C First semester.Eighteen lectures and twelve three- hour periods of laboratory work.

Prerequisite: Geology B01.

Syllabus: Theoretical igneous petrology with particular reference to experimental igneous petrology; mineralogy and phase relationships of silica minerals, feldspars, olivines, pyroxenes, etc.; processes of dif­ferentiation. Practical work includes petrographic calculations and graphical representations and a laboratory study of classical igneous rock suites.Examination: As arranged.

Geology C09(Tectonics)( i point) Group C Second semester.Eighteen lectures and twelve three- hour periods of laboratory work.Prerequisite: Geology B03.Syllabus: The tectonic features of the oceanic and continental crust, orogens, shields, platforms, multiple deformations and reactivation cf basements during orogeneses, pluton emplacement; theories of orogenesis. Practical work consists of analyses of tectonic situations using geological maps.Prescribed Books□ Park, C. F. & MacDiarmid, R. A., Ore Deposits, 2nd ed., Freeman.□ Ragan, D. M., Structural Geology—An Introduction to Geometrical Techniques, Wiley.□ Spencer, E. W., An Introduction to the Structure of the Earth, McGraw-Hill.Examination: As arranged.

382

Geology

Geology C10(Metamorphic Petrogenesis)(i point) Group CThis unit will not be offered in 1 972. First semester.Eighteen lectures and twelve three- hour periods of laboratory work.Prerequisite: Geology B01.Syllabus: The metamorphic facies series concept; mineralogy and phase relationships of common metamorphic rock-forming minerals and parageneses, e.g. alumino­silicates, epidotes, epidote-plagio- clase relationships, etc., glauco- phanitic metamorphism and the phase relationships of minerals of the glaucophane schist facies; and granulites and eclogites. Practical work includes the petrography of suites of specimens from classical regional and contact metamorphic terrains— Barrow's zones, Abukuma Plateau metamorphic rocks, Broken Hill metamorphic rocks, and the Comrie, Barr-Andlau and Ardara contact aureoles.Prescribed Book □ Turner, F. J., Metamorphic Petrology, McGraw-Hill. Examination: As arranged.

Geology C12(Sedimentoiogy A)(s point) Group C First semesterEighteen lectures and twelve three- hour periods of laboratory work or their equivalent.Prerequisite or Corequisite: Geology B01 or B02.Syllabus: Detritics: the origin and physical constitution of detrital sediments. Sedimentary structures, their origin and environmentalsignificance. Environmental analysis. Practical work emphasises

techniques of sedimentological and environmental analysis.Prescribed Books□ Conybeare, C. E. B. & Crook,K. A. W., Manual of Sedimentary Structures, Aust. Bureau of Mineral Resources, Geology & Geophysics, Bull. 102.□ Selley, R. C., Ancient Sedimentary Environments, Chapman & Hall.□ Folk, R. L, Petrology of Sedi­mentary Rocks, Hemphill's Book Stores.Examination: As arranged.

Geology C l 3(World Structure and Stratigraphy) ( i point) Group C Second semester.Eighteen lectures and twelve three- hour practical periods.Prerequisite: Geology B02 or B03. Syllabus: Stratigraphical environ­ments in relation to the tectonic elements of the Earth's crust; structures and tectonic processes affecting stratigraphical interpreta­tions; principles and practice in stratigraphy. Specific regional examples will be studied to illustrate the theoretical concepts. Examination: As arranged.

For the degree w ith honoursA candidate for this degree shall, after completing the course for the pass degree of Bachelor of Science with satisfactory merit, such course normally having included all Group B units and at least six Group C units, pursue a course of advanced study during a period of ten months, including course work and seminars, as well as the preparation of a detailed report. Appropriate courses of half­point value (see Group C units

383

Faculty of Science

above) in a variety of topics will be provided by the Department and of these, the candidate will be expected to select up to four, or to undertake approved course work in other disciplines, which will result in an overall approximate total value of four half-point units.A large amount of the field work that will be required for the report should be carried out during University vacations.

A candidate shall be required to pass written examinations or an oral examination or both in certain aspects of his subject, which shall be notified to the candidate before the end of the first term of his course for the degree.

Students will be required to pass a test in translation of scientific texts from Russian or German into English. Candidates are advised to com­mence their language studies, unless already prepared, not later than the third year of their course, so that they may sit the test either before they enter, or at the beginning of, their fourth year. Courses in science languages will be available in the appropriate departments in the Faculty of Arts. No exemption from the test will be granted but attend­ance at the course is not compulsory.

For the degree of M aster of ScienceA candidate for the degree of Master of Science is required to undertake research in an approved field and to submit a thesis embodying the results. The candidate will normally be required to work under super­vision in the Department of Geology, but may be exempted from this requirement. A candidate who does not hold a degree of Bachelor of Science with first or second class

honours, or its equivalent, will be required to pass a qualifying exam­ination covering topics specified by the Head of the Department, before proceeding to the course for the degree of Master of Science.

Candidates for the degree of Master of Science in geology will be required to produce evidence of their ability to read a foreign lan­guage by passing a test conducted by the Department of Geology in the translation of scientific texts from Russian or German into English. Exemption will only be granted to those candidates who have passed the test required for the degree of Bachelor of Science with honours of this University. Courses in science languages will be available in the appropriate departments in the Faculty of Arts. Attendance at the course is not compulsory.

For the degree of Doctor of PhilosophyCandidates for this degree will normally hold the degree of Bachelor of Science with honours.

Research facilities are available in the fields of mineralogy and crystal structure analysis, igneous and metamorphic petrology, sedimento- logy, surficial geology (including some aspects of pedology), inverte­brate palaeontology, stratigraphy, structural geology, economic geology and petroleum geology.

384

Mathematics

A. Brown, MA (Glas),PhD (Cantab)Professor and Head of the Depart­ment of Applied MathematicsHanna Neumann, DPhil, DSc (Oxon) FAAProfessor and Head of the Depart­ment of Pure Mathematics

IntroductionMathematics may be studied as a science in itself. This requires a long period of learning the known tech­niques, theorems, relationships and some of their applications before the student can experiment with new methods and carry out research into new relationships and better tech­niques, In addition, a knowledge of mathematics is basic to a great deal of modern research, in fields as diverse as geophysics and genetics, aerodynamics and astrophysics, or cosmology and circuit theory. Naturally, an undergraduate course cannot hope to cover all these topics and, particularly in first and second years, the main emphasis is on the teaching of principles and techniques that can serve as a basis for more advanced study.

For both the pass and the honours degree, work done during the year will be taken into account in assess­ing the results for each unit. Tutorial classes or practice classes are held in all first, second or third-year units. Students are expected to attend these classes each week and to hand in the exercises or other assignments for correction. The work done in these classes, and the results of tests held during the year, will carry con­siderable weight in the Annual Examination and students whose work during the year is unsatisfac­tory may be excluded from the Annual Examination.

For the pass degree and the degree w ith honoursThe units General Mathematics,Pure Mathematics I, II, III and Applied Mathematics I, II, III are available for the pass degree in the Faculty of Science. In addition, honours courses in Mathematics are offered; details and conditions for the available honours courses in Mathematics are given in the entry for Mathematics in the Faculty of Arts to which students are advised to refer. The arrangement of units available for the degree of Bachelor of Science is set out below.

For the degree of Master of ScienceExamination for the master's degree is by thesis and candidates will be required to undertake research and to write a thesis on a topic approved by the Head of the Department. For a full-time student the work for the degree will normally extend over one year.

A candidate who holds the pass degree of Bachelor of Science but not the degree with honours will be required to pass a qualifying exam­ination before commencing research. The course of study for the qualify­ing examination will be prescribed by the Head of the Department after taking into consideration the nature of the work already done and the field of study in which the candidate proposes to do research.

A candidate for the degree of Master of Science will be required to satisfy the Head of the Depart­ment of his knowledge of German, French or Russian by passing a test conducted by the Department in translation of a scientific text into English.

385

Faculty of Science

Details will be arranged by the Heads of the Departments.

For the degree of Doctor of PhilosophyDetails will be arranged by the Heads of the Departments.

DETAILS OF UNITS IN APPLIED MATHEMATICS Applied Mathem atics I (Pass or Honours)(2 points) Group A

Applied M athem atics II (Pass(2 points) Group B (2)

Applied Mathem atics II (Honours)(3 points) Group B (2)

Applied M athem atics III (Pass)(2 points) Group C

Applied M athem atics III (Honours)(3 points) Group CFor details see entry for Mathematicsunder the Faculty of Arts.

DETAILS OF UNITS IN PURE MATHEMATICSThe units Pure Mathematics II and III in the Faculty of Arts are, respectively, identical with Pure Mathematics 11A and MB and Pure Mathematics 111A and NIB. The units Pure Mathematics II and III (Honours) in the Faculty of Arts are, respectively, identical with Pure Mathematics 11A (Honours), MB (Honours) and 11C and with Pure Mathematics IMA (Honours), NIB (Honours) and MIC.

For a description of the content of courses offered in the Department of Pure Mathematics see entry for Pure Mathematics under the Faculty 386

of Arts. The sections referred to below are set out in a table on page 11 9.

Pure M athem atics I (Pass or Honours)(2 points) Group A

General Mathem atics(2 points) Group A

Pure M athem atics IIA (Pass or Honours)(7 point) Group B (2)Normally consists of three unstarred sections or two starred sections chosen in consultation with the Department from the sections listed under Pure Mathematics II and III.Prerequisites: Pure Mathematics I (Pass or Honours). Successful com­pletion of Pure Mathematics I (Honours) or a good result in the unit Pure Mathematics I (Pass) is required for admission to Pure Mathematics 11A at honours level.

Pure M athem atics IIB (Pass or Honours)(7 point) Group B (2)Normally consists of three unstarred or two starred sections chosen in consultation with the Department from the sections listed under Pure Mathematics II and III.Prerequisite: Pure Mathematics 11A (Pass or Honours).

Pure M athem atics IIC (Honours)(7 point) Group B (2)Consists of two starred sections.Corequisites: Pure Mathematics IIA and IIB, normally at honours level.

Pure M athem atics IIIA (Pass or Honours)(7 point) Group C

Physics

Consists of three unstarred or two starred sections chosen in consulta­tion with the Department from the sections listed under Pure Mathe­matics II and III.Prerequisites: For Pure Mathematics IIIA; Pure Mathematics 11A and IIIB, Pass or Honours. For Pure Mathe­matics IIIA (Honours): Pure Mathe­matics 11 A, IIB and 11C.

Pure Mathematics IIIB (Pass or Honours)(1 point) Group C Consists of three unstarred or two starred sections chosen in consulta­tion with the Department from the sections listed under Pure Mathe­matics II and III.Prerequisite: Pure Mathematics IIIA (Pass or Honours).

Pure Mathematics IIIC (Honours)(7 point) Group CConsists of two starred sections.Corequisites: Pure Mathematics IIIA and IIIB, normally at honours level.

Pure Mathematics MID (Honours)(7 point) Group C Consists of two fourth-year sections chosen with the approval of the Head of the Department.Corequisites: Pure Mathematics IIIA (Honours), IIIB (Honours) and IIIC (Honours).

S. Hinds, BSc, PhD(Liv)Professor and Head of the Depart­ment

IntroductionFirst-year units in Physics are designed to serve two groups of students.

Physics A01 is for those students intending to become professional physicists or who wish to proceed further in Physics and is restricted to students who have obtained first level or second levei full course passes in both Science and Mathematics at the NSW Higher School Certificate examination, or other equivalent qualifications.

Physics A02 is for students who intend to specialise in other branches of science for which some knowledge of physics is essential and who do not propose to proceed further with the study of Physics.

The units offered in the later years of the course for the degree of Bachelor of Science cover the principal branches of physics.Among topics included are fluid dynamics, thermodynamics, optics, spectroscopy, electromagnetism, solid state physics, quantum mech­anics and nuclear physics. This basic course is intended to provide the training necessary for a physicist to enter any branch of a profession which includes such diverse fields as atomic energy, meteorology and school teaching.

After the completion of the third year of the Bachelor of Science course students may proceed further to a Bachelor of Science honours degree. This course is strongly recommended to those students seeking a career in a university or research laboratory. As well as continuing to study certain special

387

Faculty of Science

branches of physics, students at this level have an opportunity of embarking on a research project which, although it must be approved by the Head of the Department, may be of their own choosing. By following this course of combined study and directed research, the student is prepared to cope with the sort of problems which may later confront him in his chosen profession.

Postgraduate research facilities in several fields (see page 391) are available for students wishing to proceed to the degrees of Master of Science or Doctor of Philosophy.

For the pass degreeFor all units (except Physics A02) having laboratory work, an extra prescribed book is:□ Squires, G. L, Practical Physics, McGraw-Hill.Attendance at laboratory sessions at the specified times is compulsory.

Physics A01(2 points) Group A Full year.Three lectures and three hours of laboratory work a week.Syllabus: Mechanics; properties of matter; thermodynamics; wave motion and sound; electricity and magnetism; geometrical and physical optics; introductory quantum physics.Prescribed Book□ Resnick, R. Ft Halliday, D„ Physics, (combined ed.), Wiley & Toppan, 1966.Also recommended□ Beiser, A., Concepts of Modern Physics, International Students' Edition. Also covers some of B01 syllabus.

Examination: One main three-hour end-of-year paper, plus term and practical examinations and project work as arranged. There will also be an optional three-hour paper for students seeking a credit or distinc­tion pass.

Physics A02(General Physics)(2 points) Group A Full year.Three lectures and three hours of laboratory work a week.Syllabus: Mechanics; properties of matter; heat; wave motion and sound; electricity and magnetism; geometrical and physical optics; atomic and nuclear physics.Prescribed Book □ Semat, H., Fundamentals of Physics, 4th ed., Holt, Rinehart & Winston.Examination: As for Physics A01.

Physics B01(Atomic Physics I and Quantum

Mechanics)(7 point) Group B ( /)First semester.Three lectures and six hours of laboratory work a week.Prerequisite: Physics A01 or a credit in Physics A02. A pass in Applied Mathematics I is desirable. Syllabus: The course will present the evidence for the modern atomic theory of matter together with a selection of related topics of physical interest viz. fundamental atomic constants, fluctuations and random walks, special theory of relativity, the nuclear atom, spectroscopy, X-rays, particles and waves, elementary solid state physics. The funda-

388

Physics

mentals of quantum mechanics will be introduced including: wave mechanics, matrix mechanics, barrier penetration and simple perturbation theory.Prescribed Book□ Beiser, A., Perspectives of Modern Physics, McGraw-Hill.Examination: One three-hour paper plus practical examinations and project work as arranged.

Physics B02(Electromagnetic Fields and

Waves)(7 point) Group B { 7)Second semester.Three lectures and six hours of laboratory work a week.Prerequisites: Physics A01 or a credit in Physics A02; and Applied Mathematics I.Syllabus: A selection from:(a) Electromagnetism — Electro­static fields in free space and dielectrics. Magnetic fields due to steady and unsteady currents. Magnetic materials. Concepts from relativity. Maxwell's equations, propagation of electromagnetic waves. Radiation from accelerated charges. Dipole and quadrupole radiation.(b ) Physical Optics—Classical theory of light. Interference and diffraction. Fourier theory. Experimental methods.Prescribed Book□ Corson, D. R. & Lorrain, P„ Introduction to Electromagnetic Fields and Waves, Freeman.□ Jenkins, F. A. & White, H. E„ Fundamentals of Optics, McGraw- Hill.Examination: One three-hour paper plus practical examinations and project work as arranged.

Physics B03(Electronics)(7 point) Group B (7)First semester.Three lectures and six hours of laboratory work a week.Prerequisites: Physics A01 or Physics A02; General Mathematics or Pure Mathematics I or Applied Mathematics I.Syllabus: A selection from:(a) Alternating current and network theory. Circuit laws. Transient response. Complex notation. Coupled circuits. Transformers. Fourier series. Bandwidth, Q, phase shift and resonance. Trans­mission lines and wave guides.(b) Thermionic Valves. Brief historical discussion.(c) Semiconducting devices and circuits. Transistor equivalent circuit and hybrid parameters. Various transistor configurations. Field effect transistors. Silicon controlled rectifiers. Integrated circuits. Amplifiers. Oscillators. Noise. Negative feedback. Operational amplifiers. Pulse techniques. Electronic measure­ments.Prescribed Book□ Brophy, J. J„ Basic Electronics for Scientists, International Students' Edition.Examination: One three-hour paper plus practical examinations and project work as arranged.

Physics B04(Thermal Physics)(7 point) Group B (2)Second semester.Three lectures a week and regular assignments.Prerequisites: Physics A01 or a credit in Physics A02; and

389

Faculty of Science

Applied Mathematics I.Syllabus: A selection from temperature, specific heats, equation of state. Thermo­dynamics and applications. Boltz­mann and quantum statistics. Statis­tical mechanics and kinetic theory. Prescribed Books□ Vincenti, W. G. & Kruger, C. H. Jr., Introduction to Physical Gas Dynamics, Wiley.□ Fermi, E., Thermodynamics,Dover.Also recommended:□ Reif, F., Fundamentals of Statistical and Thermal Physics, McGraw-Hill.Examination: One three-hour paper and project work as arranged.

Physics C01(Physics of Fluids)(1 point) Group C Second semester.Three lectures and six hours of laboratory work a week.Prerequisite or corequisite: Physics B04. A pass in Physics B02 is desirable.Syllabus: Basic aspects of fluid dynamics relating to aerophysics, astrophysics, biophysics, geo­physics and other fields of science. Topics covered include—(a) incompressible flows—laminar and turbulent flow, boundary layers, vorticity, dynamics of the atmos­phere, free surface waves, surf, magneto-hydrodynamics.(b) compressible flows—shock waves, unsteady flows, shock tubes, reacting flows, low density flows.Prescribed Book□ Liepmann, H. W. & Roshko, A., Elements of Gas Dynamics, Wiley. Examination: One three-hour paper

plus practical examinations and project work as arranged.

Physics C02(Atomic Physics II and Nuclear

Physics)(7 point) Group C First semester.Three lectures and six hours of laboratory work a week. Prerequisite: Physics B01. A pass in Physics B02 is desirable. Syllabus: A selection from:(a) Atomic Physics—classical and quantum collision theory, electron- atom and atom-atom collisions. Experimental methods. The glow discharge, plasma diagnostics Applications.(b) Nuclear Physics—properties of nuclei, nuclear structure, interactions of nuclear radiations with matter, particle detectors, radioactive decay, nuclear reactions and fission.(c) Spectroscopy—Vector model, multiplet analysis, absorption, and dispersion, transition probabilities, lasers, molecular spectroscopy, nuclear and electron magnetic resonance.Prescribed Books□ Llewellyn-Jones, F., The Glow Discharge, Methuen.□ Meyerhof, W. E., Elements of Nuclear Physics, McGraw-Hill.□ Herzberg, G., Atomic Spectra and Atomic Structure, Dover. Examination: One three-hour paper plus practical examinations and project work as arranged.

Physics C03(Solid State Physics)(7 point) Group C Second semester.Three lectures and six hours of

390

Physics

laboratory work a week. Prerequisites: Physics B01 and Physics B04.Syllabus: Classical and quantum theories of electrons in solids— energy bands in metals, semicon­ductors and insulators; properties of intrinsic and extrinsic semiconduc­tors; semiconductor devices; elemen­tary superconductivity. Defect solid state— introductory crystallography; specific heat and lattice vibrations; point defects, diffusion and ionic conductivity; dislocations and mechanical properties.Prescribed Book□ Kittel, C., Introduction to Solid State Physics, 3rd ed., Wiley.Examination: One three-hour paper plus practical examinations and project work as arranged.

For th e degree w ith honoursStudents who have attained a sufficient standard in the course for the pass degree may be admitted to an honours year. It would normally be expected that such students will have suitably qualified in the three Group B units, two Group C physics units and in either Theoretical Physics C01 or Applied Mathematics III.

The unit will consist of approx­imately five lectures a week on specialised aspects of physics such as the following topics: quantum mechanics, solid state physics, nuclear physics, gas discharge pro­cesses, atomic collision phenomena, plasma physics and high tempera­ture gas dynamics.

Candidates will also be required to undertake original work on a selected research problem and to submit a report on this work.

Written examinations will be held

from time to time throughout the year and may be supplemented by an oral test.

For the degree of M aster of ScienceCandidates for this degree will usually be graduates who hold the degree of Bachelor of Science who do not propose to proceed to the degree of Doctor of Philosophy or higher degree. For those students who are required under rule 3 (2) of the Courses of Study (Degree of Master of Science) Rules to enrol for a course of study and to pass a qualifying examination, the course will closely resemble the course and examination for the degree of Bachelor of Science with honours.

Candidates are required to write a thesis on a topic approved by the Head of the Department and may be orally examined on the subject of this thesis.

In 1972 research facilities in the fields of laser physics, atomic colli­sion processes in solids, solid state diffusion, nuclear structure and high temperature gas dynamics will be available.

For the degree of D octor of PhilosophyCandidates for this degree will usually hold the degree of Bachelor of Science with honours.

In 1972 research facilities in the fields of laser physics, atomic colli­sion processes in solids, solid state diffusion, nuclear structure and high temperature gas dynamics will be available.

391

Psychology

C. A. Gibb, OBE, MA, BEc(Syd), PhD (III), FBPsS Professor and Head of the Department

IntroductionPsychology may be studied either as a single unit, designed to give some insight into the objective and scientific study of human behaviour, or as a major field concentration in either an arts or science degree. The first year of the course is largely an introduction to the methods used in psychological science and to the type of problems with which it deals. However, a good deal of substantive information is included upon such subjects as motivation, perceiving, learning, remembering, thinking, individual differences and personality. Subsequent courses treat more specialised subject matter and offer training in more advanced techniques. Laboratory and practical work are a normal part of courses in psychology and attendance at practical classes is compulsory.

A student with leanings towards the biological sciences will ordinarily take psychology within a Bachelor of Science degree course. One whose interests incline him rather to the social sciences may pursue the Bachelor of Arts degree course with a concentration on honours in psychology.

The pass degree courses are not planned with a view to providing specialised professional training. Students who wish to become practising psychologists will usually need to pursue an honours course and, in most circumstances, to proceed to postgraduate studies in psychology.

In general, a student who has a

good bachelor's degree with honours in arts or science may enrol directly for the degree of Doctor of Phil­osophy. The pass degree student with at least a major in psychology may enrol for a master's degree in arts or science (depending upon the faculty in which his first degree was taken) after completing a qualifying course but may not enrol directly for the degree of Doctor of Philosophy.

For the pass degreeLists of prescribed books are obtainable from the Department of Psychology.

Psychology A01(2 points) Group A Full year.Three lectures and three hours of laboratory work a week.Syllabus: An introduction to behaviour and methods of observing it; the biological and social bases of behaviour; physical stimuli and the senses, perception; motivation and emotion; learning; thinking; intelli­gence and ability; nature and development of personality; indi­vidual differences in abilities and personality; psychological measure­ment; the individual in society; elementary statistics.Examination: Assignments and tests during the year, one half-year and one final three-hour paper.

Human Biology A02(2 points) Group A Full year.Course run jointly by the Depart­ments of Psychology and Zoology. See Zoology Department entry for details.

392

Psychology

Psychology B01(Intermediate Psychology)(7 point) Group B First semester.Three lectures and four hours of laboratory work a week.Prerequisite: Human Biology A02 or Psychology A01 Syllabus: The study of three par­ticular areas within Psychology:(a) Learning: Basic principles of learning; reinforcement; extinction; learnable drives and rewards; aversive control; generalisation and discrimination; concept formation; verbal learning, retention and forgetting.(b ) Psychophysiology: Gross nervous anatomy, neuronal physio­logy, methods of study in neuro­psychology; relations between the autonomic and endocrine systems and behaviour; anatomical and physiological bases of perceptual and motor skills.(c) Psychological Statistics: Des­criptive statistics—frequency distributions; central tendency; dispersion; correlation; regression and prediction. Inferential statistics — sampling distributions and hypothesis testing. Non-para- metric statistics.Examination: One three-hour paper and assessment of laboratory and class work.

Psychology B02(Personality and Assessment)(7 point) Group B (7)Second semester.Three lectures and three hours of laboratory work a week.

Prerequisite: Psychology B01.Syllabus: The nature of personality. Personality theory-psychoanalytic

theory; social psychological theo­ries; phenomenological theories; factor theories; learning theories. Determinants of personality differ­ences—biological, experiential, social. Personality assessment—aptitude and ability testing; personality question­naire; objective personality tests; projective techniques; rating methods; interviewing.

Examination: One three-hour paper and assessment of laboratory and class work.

Psychology B03(Intelligence and Ability)(7 point) Group B (2)This unit w ill not be offered in 1972.First semester.Two lectures and one seminar a week.Prerequisite: Psychology A01 or Human Biology A02.Corequisite: Psychology B01.A point for this unit may not be counted for the degree i f a point for Psychology B05 is so counted.Syllabus: Intelligence-its nature and development. Structure of abilities. Genetics and individuality. Nature- nurture interaction. Learning and human ability. Ability and experi­ence. Intelligence and creativity. Ability and performance. Constancy of I.Q. Intellectual superiority. Mental retardation and mental defi­ciency. Mental deficiency and specific brain pathology. Sex, age, social class and race differences in human abilities. Talent and society.Examination: One three-hour paper and assessment of class work and essays.

393

Faculty of Science

Psychology B04(Developmental Psychology)(7 point) Group B (1)Second semester.Three lectures and four hours of laboratory work a week.Prerequisite: Psychology B01.Syllabus: The concept of develop­ment. Genetic and constitutional factors in development— prenatal developmental sequences, structure- function relationships, critical periods, species-specific behaviour patterns. Developmental processes, including learning, imitation, identi­fication, maturation. Components of development— perception and cognition, including language; emotional development; social development, including social relationships, attitudes and values. Environmental determinants— cultural; social; physical; inter­personal, with particular reference to the mother-child relationships. Theoretical approaches to develop­ment.Examination: One three-hour paper and assessment of laboratory and class work.

Psychology B05(Comparative Behaviour)(7 point) Group B (2)First semester.Two lectures and a two-hour seminar a week.Prerequisite: Psychology A01 or Human Biology A02.Corequisite: Psychology B01.Syllabus: A close examination in depth of one major area of behaviour common to species at various levels, including man.Examination: One three-hour paper

and assessment of laboratory and class work.

Psychology B06(Sensation and Perception)(7 point) Group B (7)Second semester.Three lectures and three hours of laboratory work a week.Prerequisite: Psychology B01.Syllabus: An examination of the mechanisms by which perceptual systems receive sensory information and employ this to construct a model of the external world. The course will consider the physical basis of stimulation; anatomical, physiological and behavioural aspects of receptor systems; mechanisms underlying the perception of form and optional relationships; attentional mechanisms; perceptual learning and development.Examination: One three-hour paper and assessment of laboratory and class work.

Psychology C01(Learning and Motivation)(7 point) Group C First semester.Three lectures and six hours of laboratory work a week.Prerequisite: Psychology B02 or B04 or B06.Syllabus: Verbal learning; learning of skills; transfer; classical and instrumental conditioning; dis­crimination learning; emotion and conflict; systematic theories of learning— behaviourist, cognitive, mathematical.Examination: One three-hour paper and assessment of laboratory and class work.

394

Psychology

Psychology C02(Human Skills and Applied Experi­

mental Psychology)(/ point) Group C Second semester.Three lectures and six hours of laboratory work a week.Prerequisite: Psychology C01 or B06.Syllabus: Analysis of man- machine systems. Theories of communication and control.Creation of optimum environments for living and work. Criteria for automation. Attention will be devoted to such functions, with their related concept and theories, as signal detection, information transmission, skill, learning, decision making and monitoring.Examination: One three-hour paper and assessment of laboratory and class work.

Psychology C03(Social Psychology)(1 point) Group C First semester.Three lectures and two two-hour laboratory classes a week.Prerequisite: Psychology B02 or B04 or B06.Syllabus: Concepts of social psych­ology. The individual in society. Culture, class and family—their nature and their role in the socialisa­tion of the individual. Processes of social learning. Social influences including language on intra-indivi­dual processes such as perception, cognition and motivation. Person- perception and stereotypes. Atti­tudes—their nature, assessment and change. Communication, and effects of mass media. Theoretical approaches to social psychology.

Research methods in social psycho­logy. Applied social psychology.Examination: One three-hour paper and assessment of laboratory and class work.

Psychology C04(Cognitive Processes)(7 point) Group C Second semester.Three lectures and four hours of laboratory work a week.Prerequisite: Psychology B02 or B04 or B06 or C01 or C03.Syllabus: Theoretical approaches to the conceptualisation and explana­tion of human cognitive activities such as concept formation, reason­ing, problem solving, and meaning­ful verbal learning. Behaviourist and neo-behaviourist theories, and mediating processes. Cognitive, non-associative theories, and cogni­tive structures. Information proces­sing approaches. Computer and symbolic models. Language in cognitive functioning. Cognition in children, and cognitive develop­ment. Educational implications of research findings.Examination: One three-hour paper and assessment of laboratory and class work.

Psychology C05(Advanced Personality)(1 point) Group C First semester.Three lectures and three hours of laboratory work a week.Prerequisite: Psychology B02. Syllabus: Experimental research in social motivation and personality dynamics. Multivariate statistical techniques and case study methods of assessment, prediction and hypo-

395

Faculty of Science

thesis testing. Basic problems in personality research and theory concerned with integration and purposive behaviour. Interpersonal and individual aspects of self- concept, decision making, anxiety, stress and conflict. The relationship between experimental and survey methods. Introduction to inter­disciplinary work in study of the person in the social context. Educa­tional implications of personality research findings.Examination: One three-hour paper and assessment of laboratory and class work.

Psychology C06(Group Dynamics)(1 point) Group C Second semester.Three lectures and two three-hour laboratory classes a week.Prerequisite: Psychology C03 or C05.A point for this unit may not be counted for the degree i f a point for Psychology C08 is so counted.Syllabus: The concept of group- definitions, nature. Interpersonal perception and attraction. Group process development. Group and individual performance. Group prob­lem solving. Communication. Group productivity. Norms, Roles, Role strain and Conformity. Deviant behaviour and social control. Leadership. Intergroup relations.Examination: One three-hour paper and assessment of laboratory and class work.

Psychology C08(Psychopathology)(1 point) Group CThis unit will not be offered in 1972. Second semester.396

Three lectures and six hours of laboratory work a week.Prerequisite: Psychology C03 or C05.A point for this unit may not be counted for the degree if a point for Psychology C06 is so counted.

Syllabus: Introduction to basic considerations in the description and measurement of abnormal behaviour, its causes and deter­minants and in the study and modi­fication of psycho-pathology. The course will include an examination of some systems of treatment including group methods. Areas of social psychology relevant to an understanding of deviant behaviour and its treatment will be included in the course.Examination: One three-hour paper and assessment of laboratory and class work.

Psychology C10(Experimental Neuropsychology)(7 point) Group C Second semester.Eight hours of lecture, seminar, laboratory work a week arranged as two four-hour periods.Prerequisites: Either Psychology B02, B04 or B06; or Psychology A01 and Zoology C06.Syllabus: Structure of the central nervous system— surface features, dissection and examination of the internal structure. Principles of neurosurgery—electrodes, anaes- thetisation, placing of lesions, implanting electrodes, perfusion and removal of the brain, histology. Experiments in neuropsychology— changes in behaviour related to feeding, mating, general activity and intra-cranial stimulation.

Psychology

Examination: One three-hour paper and assessment of laboratory and class work.

For the degree w ith honoursCandidates for the degree with honours must devote their full time in fourth year to the study of psych­ology. The work of the honours year will consist of selected topics in psychology taken at an advanced level. There will be few formal lectures, and the work will be covered by directed reading, seminars and tutorials with labora­tory work. Candidates will also be required to undertake original work on a selected research problem and to submit a report which must be satisfactory to the examiners.

In outline the work of the honours year will consist of:(a) Research Methods in Psychology: One seminar through­out the year will be devoted to problems of method and research techniques. Topics will be selected within areas of multivariate statistics, electronic data processing, sample survey methods, instrumentation and automatic monitoring and recording techniques. A three-hour written examination will be set.(b) Current Problems in Psychology: This seminar will be conducted each week throughout the year to examine areas of rapid growth or particular current interest in psychology.

Practical work will accompany certain aspects of the course and in some cases will involve particular research techniques.

Students will be expected to contribute papers from time to time (in relation to their essay

topics) and to undertake reading as required.Examination: A comprehensive examination in psychology will be required of all honours candidates.(c) Theoretical Essays: These are designed to provide training in understanding, analysing and evaluating the state of knowledge in chosen areas of psychology. Two substantial essays of not more than 6,000 words will be set in consulta­tion with an agreed supervisor.(d) Research Project: An independ­ent research project will be carried out by each student under the direction of a staff member, arranged according to area of specialisation. The area of research and choice of supervisor shouldbe made before Christmas in the student's third year so that details may be worked out in the long vacation. The report of the research must be finalised and submitted for examination by an agreed date in third term.(e) Staff Seminar: Students are required to attend the staff seminar which is held during term to discuss the research work in progress in the Department. Examination: Written examinations may be held from time to time throughout the year and laboratory work, research reports and essays will be assessed.

For the degree of M aster of ScienceCandidates for the degree of Master of Science in psychology must already hold the degree of Bachelor of Science with honours. A candi­date with a pass degree from an approved university with at least a major in psychology may be admit-

397

Science Languages

ted upon completion of a qualifying course of one or two years.

The course for the degree of Master of Science itself is of one to two years duration. Candidates will be required to pass such examinations as may be prescribed and must sub­mit a thesis on a topic approved by the Head of the Department.This work will normally be carried out in the Department of Psychology but in special circumstances approval may be given to undertake part of the work elsewhere. The candidate may be required to satisfy examiners in an oral examination on the field of knowledge of his thesis.

For the degree of D octor of PhilosophyCandidates for this degree will usually hold the degree of Bachelor of Science with honours or the degree of Bachelor of Arts with honours, though candidates with degrees of Master of Science or Master of Arts may be admitted to the program.

Facilities exist in the Department for work towards the degree of Doctor of Philosophy in the areas of social psychology, group dyna­mics, counselling psychological development, personality, cog­nitive processes, human skills, physiological psychology and general experimental psychology.

Until 1970 a candidate for the degree of Bachelor of Science with honours, the degree of Bachelor of Science (Forestry) with honours or the degree of Master of Science was required to satisfy the head of the department concerned of his know­ledge of such language or languages useful for the purposes of science as the head of that department determined.

This requirement now applies only to candidates taking honours in Applied Mathematics, Pure Mathematics, Geology and some areas of Chemistry. However in some other departments it is recog­nised that knowledge of a particular foreign language may be useful and indeed a head of department may require an honours or masters candidate engaged in a particular field of study to have some com­petence in a relevant language.

A one-unit (Group A) course in Science German, is offered by the Department of Germanic Languages; this unit may be credited towards the pass degree of Bachelor of Science and Bachelor of Science (Forestry) and a pass in the unit will also satisfy those departments which specify a know­ledge of German as part of the honours and master's degree courses.

The Department of Russian will offer a course in Science Russian for students who need it for their honours or master's degree courses but a pass in Science Russian will not count towards the pass degree.

Details of the courses are as follows:

398

Science German(1 po in t) Group AThree hours a week throughout the

Science Languages

year, consisting of one two-hour Science Russian lecture and one tutorial Details to be announced.

Science German may not be counted for the degree of Bachelor of Science or Bachelor of Science (Forestry) if points in respect of Elementary German or German / are so counted.Syllabus: Introductory historical comparison of German and English, basics of German grammar and syntax, refinement of translating skill via exercises dealing with student's particular area of interest culminating in the full translation of a recent journal article from the student's particular area of speciali­sation (or part thereof, depending on length) and an introduction to the main bibliographical handbooks of scientific German book and article literature. The course pre­sumes no previous knowledge of the language. Special provision can be made for students who have passed the New South Wales Higher School Certificate in German or its equivalent in that they can work privately through the lecturer, commencing at a higher level.Prescribed Books□ De Vries, German-English Scientific Dictionary, McGraw-Hill.□ Rosenberg & Horwood, German for Science Students, Cheshire.□ Velder, C., Das moderne Bild der Naturwissenschaften, Hueber.For physics students oniy□ Beaton & Boulton, A German Source-book in Physics, Oxford UP.(Notes entitled, Course outline and exercises, are available from the iecturer.)Examination: One three-hour paper.In addition work completed during the year will account for up to 50% of the final mark.

399

Statistics

C. R. Heathcote, BA (WAust),MA (Melb), PhD Professor and Head of the Department.

IntroductionThe Statistics Department teaches probability and statistics in the Faculty of Science. These two, closely related, subjects form that branch of applied mathematics which deals with circumstances in whose determination chance plays a part. The theory of probability is concerned with the underlying (mathematical) basis of the laws of chance but also with the analysis of probabilistic models of the real world. Statistics is concerned with the determination from data (experi­mental observations) of the nature of the probabilistic laws obtaining in a physical situation.

Units to be offered for the pass degree in 1972Statistics B01 (Pass)(7 point) Group B{2)Statistics B01 (Honours)(7 i points) Group B(2)Statistics B02 (Pass)(7 point) Group B(2)Statistics B02 (Honours)(7^ points) Group B{2)Statistics C01 (Pass)(7 point) Group C Statistics C01 (Honours)(7^ points) Group C Statistics C02 (Pass)(7 point) Group C Statistics C02 (Honours)(7^ points) Group C Statistics C03 (7 point) Group C Statistics C04 (7 point) Group C

For details see entry for Statistics under the Faculty of Economics.

For the degree w ith honoursAs indicated above, students may take additional work in statistics to prepare them for entry to a final honours year. In each of the semester units listed above which has an honours course at least one half of the honours course is entirely separate from the pass course and is more extensive and is taught at a higher level.Additional honours lectures are also given during the part of the course which coincides with the pass course. Full details are given under the Faculty of Economics. Admission to the final honours year will depend upon the attainment of a sufficiently high standard in mathematics and statis­tics in the course for the pass degree.

Details of the course for Statistics IV also are given under the Faculty of Economics. Students in the Faculty of Science (who will often be com­bining part of Statistics IV with parts of other fourth year Faculty of Science subjects) will take a selection appropriate to the scientific interests of the students.

There will be a written examination at the end of the year.

For the degree of Master of ScienceGraduates who have obtained the degree of Bachelor of Science at any recognised university, including an adequate study of statistics, may be enrolled for the degree of Master of Science, for which candidates may qualify by completing a thesis written under the supervision of members of the Department. Where candidates have not obtained a

400

degree with first or second class honours in statistics they will be required to take an advanced quali­fying course, usually of one year's duration.

For the degree of Doctor of PhilosophyDetails will be arranged by the Head of the Department.

Theoretical Physics

H. A. Buchdahl, DSc (Lond), FAA Professor and Head of the Department

IntroductionThe purpose of theoretical physics is to contemplate the results of observation and experiment obtained in the past; by a process of abstraction, concept-formation and inductive generalisation to formu­late theories which will coherently describe them and which are then, hopefully, endowed with predictive power; to analyse the formal struc­ture of such theories and of the physical laws which are part of them; to discover, if possible, features common to a variety of otherwise disparate theories, and to summarise these in the form of metalaws, i.e. of laws about laws; and finally to suggest what further observations or experiments might be made for the purpose of verifying the validity of existing theories or else to give new material towards their modification or extension.

The successful pursuit of theoretical physics probably pre­supposes a certain aptitude for formal or mathematical reasoning. Given this, the student should feel encouraged to take up its study; not least because it can claim to be the main heir of that branch of intel­lectual inquiry once called natural philosophy.

Towards a pass degree, students are trained at third-year level, through the medium of lecture courses, in a number of topics listed below.

Students whose main interests are in other fields of study can also benefit from some training in theoretical physics. For students with the following main interests,

401

Faculty of Science

suitable choices of units in theoreti­cal physics are as follows: experi­mental physics, Theoretical Physics C01 and C02; mathematics, Theore­tical Physics C01 and C03; chem­istry, Theoretical Physics C04.

After completion of the third year of the Bachelor of Science course, students may proceed further to the Bachelor of Science honours degree, or to the degree of Master of Science or Doctor of Philosophy. This course is strongly recom­mended to those students seeking a career in a university or research laboratory. The honours year is regarded, in principle, as constitut­ing a first introduction to the methods of scientific research. Emphasis will therefore normally be placed mainly on a fairly sub­stantial amount of independent work done by the student, and such work should contain an element of originality. In addition there will be courses of lectures of a standard well above that en­countered in third year. The topics covered vary from year to year, and it should be borne in mind that because of the small number of students involved all arrangements are flexible.

Postgraduate research facilities are available in a number of specialised fields of investigation (see page 404).

For the pass degreeA list of suitable reference books for each unit and advice on text books for special selections can be obtained from the Department.Notes{a) Students intending to proceed to honours in theoretical physics are strongly advised to take C01, C02 and C03.402

(b) Students enrolling for the C04 course cannot enrol for C01 or C02.

Theoretical Physics C01(1 point) Group C First semester.Three lectures and at least one tutorial a week.Prerequisites: Physics B01; two points of mathematics from Group B Syllabus: Elementary quantum mechanics, together with a selec­tion from: classical mechanics; statistical mechanics; special relativity; elementary particle physics- astrophysics; computer program­ming; geometrical optics.Prescribed Book

Merzbacher, E., Quantum Mechanics, Wiley.Examination: One three-hour paper. Weight will also be given to prob­lem work and written tests.

Theoretical Physics C02(/ point) Group C Second semester.Three lectures and at least one tutorial a week.Prerequisite: Theoretical Physics C01; Physics B02.Syllabus: Advanced quantum mechanics, together with a selection from: plasma physics; thermo­dynamics; statistical mechanics; electromagnetism; elementary par­ticle physics; astrophysics; com­puter programming; variational principles; geometrical optics. Prescribed Books□ Lindsay, R. B. Ö- Margenau, H., Foundations of Physics, Dover.□ Merzbacher, E., Quantum Mechanics, Wiley.Examination: One three-hour paper. Weight will also be given to

Theoretical Physics

problem work and written tests.

Theoretica l Physics C03(7 point) Group C Second semester.Three lectures and at least one tutorial a week.Prerequisites: Physics B02; two points of mathematics from Group B.Syllabus: A selection from: tensor calculus, electromagnetism and special relativity; plasma physics; elementary particle physics; thermo­dynamics; variational principles; mathematical methods.Prescribed Books□ Lichnerowicz, A., Tensor Cal­culus, Methuen.□ Rindler, W., Special Relativity, Oliver & Boyd.□ Chandrasekhar, S., Plasma Physics, Chicago UP.Examination: One three-hour paper. Weight will also be given to problem work and occasional written tests.

Theoretica l Physics C04(/ point) Group C Full year.Students enrolling for this unit should consult the Department.Prerequisites: Physics B01; either Applied Mathematics II or both Physics B02 and one point of pure mathematics from Group B.

Syllabus: Classical mechanics; elementary quantum mechanics; advanced quantum mechanics.

For th e degree w ith honoursStudents who have attained a suffi­cient standard in the course for the pass degree may be admitted to an honours year. The attention of

students is drawn to the appropriate sections of the Courses of Study (Degree of Bachelor of Science) Rules.

As explained in the introduction, this unit is regarded, in principle, as a first introduction to the methods of scientific research. Candidates are therefore normally expected to carry out independent work which should preferably contain an element of originality. The results of this work are to be embodied in a thesis. In addition there will be courses of lectures on topics such as non-relativistic and relativistic quantum mechanics, quantum field theory, plasma astrophysics; but in all respects there is a high degree of flexibility on account of the small number of students involved. Atten­dance at certain seminars, colloquia and short courses of lectures in other departments of the university will also normally form an integral part of the unit.

For the degree of M aster o f ScienceAttention is drawn to the appro­priate sections of the Courses of Study (Degree of Master of Science) Rules. Candidates for the degree of Master of Science are required to undertake research in an approved topic, and to write a thesis covering the work carried out. Candidates whose theoretical back­ground has not reached the required level may be required to attend such lectures and to undergo such addi­tional tests as are specified by the Head of the Department.

For the degree of D octor o f PhilosophyCandidates for this degree will usually hold the degree of Bachelor

403

Zoology

of Science with honours. Research facilities in the fields of quantum mechanics, scattering theory, plasma physics, astrophysics, general rela­tivity theory and optical aberration theory are available.

S. A. B arnett, BA, MA (Oxon) Professor and Head of the Depart­ment

IntroductionZoology may be broadly defined as the study of the animal kingdom in all its aspects. It may be studied as a subject leading to a science degree or as a prerequisite for a professional training in medicine, veterinary science, pharmacy or agriculture. Students who proceed to a degree in zoology may find openings in school or university teaching; in biological research in hospitals, medical, veterinary or agricultural institutions, the Com­monwealth Scientific and Industrial Research Organisation, or in industrial firms manufacturing biological products (such as drugs and insecticides).

Modern zoology uses many of the tools and techniques developed by the biochemists, the biophysicists and the physiologists, and it is important therefore that students reading zoology should have studied at least chemistry, and preferably mathematics and physics as well, to a reasonable level, at school.

The first-year courses are designed to provide a general zoological background. It deals with the structure and physio­logy of selected animal types as exemplified by study of the living organisms, by dissection and by examination of miscoscopic preparations. It also deals with the variety of organisms in the animal kingdom, and the principles under­lying their embryonic development, heredity and evolution. The practical work covers a range of organisms and techniques.

The semester units offered, after

404

Zoology

first year, in the Department of Zoology, cover a wide range of topics in the biological sciences.The particular combinations selected by the individual student will depend largely on his interests and whether he wishes to obtain a general or specialised biological training. Students who intend to proceed with a biological career are strongly advised to discuss the suitability of the course they propose, with some member of the academic staff of the Department.

Students normally take a pass degree at the end of three years.An honours degree requires a further year's work, involving special read­ing, field work and project work. Postgraduate research facilities for higher degrees are available in a number of specialised fields (see page 410).

The field covered by zoology is wide, and the extent to which it is covered at an honours or post­graduate level by a university department depends on the local conditions, the facilities available, and the research interests of the staff. Interests in this Department centre around ethology, cell biology, developmental biology, community ecology, parasitology, entomology, herpetology, the ecology and reproductive physio­logy of marsupials, and the ecology and physiology of fresh­water fish.

Practical work of various kinds including both laboratory and field studies plays an important part in the study of Zoology. It is designed primarily to familiarise the student with the ways in which the subject has been developed and the way in which the biologist approaches problems and draws conclusions.

The learning of useful techniques plays a minor part. Most of the units taught by the Department require the student to complete pre­scribed practical work in addition to sitting for formal examinations.Some units include prescribed tutorials, essays or seminars. A student should bear this in mind in constructing his proposed course in Zoology.

For the pass degreeZoology A01(2 points) Group A Full year.Three lectures and three hours of laboratory work a week together with field work as arranged.Syllabus: An introduction to animal biology; structure and physiology of cells; general physiology of multi­cellular organisms; nutrition, diges­tion, metabolism; respiration; excretion, integration (nervous and endocrine systems), reproduction; cell division, the chromosomes in mitosis and meiosis; gamete forma­tion and fertilisation, elementary genetics (Mendelian ratios, linkage and crossing over, inheritance of the blood groups in man); sex deter­mination; developments of the amphibian and bird embryos (cleav­age, gastrulation and organ forma­tion); classification of animals; the invertebrate phyla; outline of the comparative anatomy of vertebrates; the theory of evolution and the evidence for it; modern work on the mechanism of evolution and specia- tion.Prescribed Book □ Keeton, W. T„ Biological Science, Norton.

405

Faculty of Science

Laboratory Manual f □ Freeman, W. H., Bracegirdle, B., An Atlas of Embryology, Fleinemann.Examination: Assessment will be based on laboratory work, projects, essays, tutorials, field work and examinations as will be pre­scribed during the course.

Hum an Biology A02 +(2 points) Group A Full year.Three lectures and three hours of laboratory work a week.Points for this unit may not be counted for the degree if points in respect of either Psychology A01 or Zoology A01 are so countedSyllabus: Anatomy, histology and physiology of vertebrates with special reference to man. Cellular and genetic basis of human sexuality, sex determination and diversity. Population genetics, linkage. The place of primates in the classification of animals. Human evolution including ethnic differ­ences in structure and behaviour. Biological and cultural basis of human behaviour. Perceptual and motor skills, emotion, motivation, higher mental processes. Disease. Ecology and man, including utilisation of resources and energy, population growth, pollution, conservation.Prescribed Books: Titles may be obtained from the Departments of Zoology and Psychology.

tStudents must provide themselves with a set of approved dissecting instruments (available at the shop in the University Union), a notebook, a drawing book, a set of coloured pencils, drawing pencils, a fine paint brush.JCourse run jointly with the Department of Psychology.

Examination: Assessment will be based on laboratory work, projects, essays, tutorials, field work and examinations as will be prescribed during the course.

Zoology B01(Animal Physiology)(7 point) Group B (7)First semester.Three lectures and five hours of laboratory work a week. Prerequisites: Zoology A01 or Human Biology A02 and one of the following: Chemistry A01, Chemistry A02, Physics A01,Physics A02.Syllabus: Basic concepts of physio­logy; nutrition, digestion, assimila­tion, metabolism, respiration, vascu­lar systems, excretion. Ionic regula­tion, osmoregulation, water balance, thermoregulation. Physio­logy of nerves, sense organs and effector organs. Nervous coor­dinations, hormonal control and integration.Prescribed Book□ Hoar, W. S., General and Com­parative Physiology, Prentice-Hall. Examination: Assessments will be based on laboratory work, projects, essays and examinations as will be prescribed during the course.

Zoology B02(7 point) Group B (7)

Zoology C02(Comparative Invertebrate Zoology) (7 point) Group C Offered in 1972 and alternate years. First semester.Three lectures and five hours of laboratory work a week together with field work as arranged

406

Zoology

Prerequisites:for Zoology B02—Zoology A01 or Human Biology A02.for Zoology C02—Zoology A01 or Human Biology A02 and a Group B Zoology unit.Syllabus: Morphology, comparative anatomy and systematics of the invertebrate phyla.Prescribed Books□ Imms, A. D., Outlines of Ento­mology, 1959 edition or later, Methuen.□ Wigglesworth, V. B., Insect Physiology, Methuen Monograph.□ Barnes, R. D., Invertebrate Zoology, Saunders.□ Barrington, E. J. W., Invertebrate Structure and Function, Nelson.Examination: Assessments will be based on laboratory work, projects, essays and examinations as will be prescribed during the course.

Zoology B03(7 point) Group B (7)

Zoology C03(Comparative Vertebrate Zoology)(7 point) Group COffered in 1973 and alternate years.First semester.Three lectures and five hours of laboratory work a week together with field work as arranged. Prerequisites:for Zoology B03—Zoology A01 or Human Biology A02for Zoology C03—Zoology A01 or Human Biology A02 and a Group B Zoology unit.Syllabus: Morphology, comparative anatomy and systematics of the vertebrates.Prescribed Books□ Römer, A. S., Vertebrate Paleon­tology, Chicago UP.

□ Ballard, W. W„ Comparative Anatomy and Embryology, Ronald.Examinations: Assessments will be based on laboratory work, projects, essays and examinations as will be prescribed during the course.

Zoology B04(General Ecology)(7 point) Group B (7)First semester.Three lectures and five hours of laboratory work a week together with field work as arranged. Prerequisites: Botany A01 or Zoology A01 or Human Biology A02 and either Chemistry A01 or Chemistry A02.Syllabus: A critical study of the concept of the ecosystem and related topics such as energy flow and productivity, followed by a consideration of single species particularly with reference to their physiological tolerances, and consi­deration of the structure, dynamics and regulation of populations.Prescribed Books□ Odum, E. P„ Fundamentals of Ecology, latest ed., Saunders.□ Cox, G. W.( Readings in Conser­vation Ecology, Appleton-Century- Crofts.Examination: Assessment will be based on laboratory work, projects, essays, tutorials, field work and examinations as will be prescribed during the course.

Zoology B05(Cell Physiology I )(7 point) Group B (7)Second semester.Two lectures and six hours of laboratory work a week. Prerequisites: Chemistry A01 and Zoology A01.

407

Faculty of Science

Syllabus: Cytological technique; cell physiology; histology; histo­chemistry; cell differentiation.Prescribed Book□ Pantin, C. F. A., Notes on Micro­scopical Technique for Zoologists, Cambridge UP.Examination: Assessment will be based on laboratory work, projects, essays, and examinations as will be prescribed during the course.

Zoology C01(Endocrinology and Develop­

mental Biology)(7 point) Group C Second semester.Three lectures and five hours of laboratory work a week. Prerequisites: Zoology B01; or Biochemistry B01 and Zoology A01. Syllabus: Mechanisms concerned with reproduction and cellular dif­ferentiation; gametogenesis, fertilisa­tion, embryogenesis and organo­genesis; differentiation and growth; metamorphosis and regeneration. The nature and actions of vertebrate hormones; neurosecretions, meta­bolic and reproductive hormones.Prescribed Books□ Turner, C. Et Bagnara, J., General Endocrinology, Saunders.□ Balinsky, B. I., An Introduction to Embryology, Saunders. Examination: Assessments will be based on laboratory work, projects, essays and examinations as will be prescribed during the course.

Zoology C04(Parasitology)( / point) Group COffered in 1972 and alternate years.Second semester.Three lectures and five hours of laboratory work a week.408

Prerequisites: Zoology A01 and a Group B Zoology unit.Syllabus: The nature of parasitism. Morphology, systematics, physi­ology and epidemiology of animal parasites. Host-specificity; host- parasite relationships; histopath- ology and immunity to parasites.Prescribed Books□ Smyth, J. D., Introduction to Animal Parasitology, 2nd ed., EUP.□ Maclnnis, A. J. & Voge, M., Experiments and Techniques in Parasitology, Freeman.Examination: Assessment will be based on laboratory work, projects, essays and examinations as will be prescribed during the course.

Zoology C05(Animal Ecology)(7 point) Group C Second semester.Three lectures and five hours of laboratory work a week together with field work as arranged. Prerequisite: Zoology B02 or Zoology B03 or Zoology B04 or Zoology C02 or Zoology C03. Syllabus: Introduction to population dynamics in theory and practice, including population self-regulation, regulation by external factors, and utilisation of matter and energy by population; niche concept; competition, prey-predator systems, other forms of population inter­actions. Applications of ecology to problems of population manage­ment, pesticides and pollution, biological control and conservation. Other aspects such as radio­ecology, human ecology. Central theme of this course is the study of the animal population.

Zoology

Prescribed Book□ MacFadyen, A., Animat Ecology, 2nd ed.( Pitman.Examination: Assessment will be based on laboratory work, projects, essays, tutorials, field work and examinations as will be prescribed during the course.

Zoology C06(Ethology)(7 point) Group C Second semester.Three lectures and five hours of laboratory or field work as arranged. Prerequisites: Zoology A01 and a Group B Zoology unit.Syllabus: A syllabus may be obtained from the Department. Prescribed Book: Titles may be obtained from the Department. Examination: To be arranged.

Zoology C07(Cell Physiology II)(7 point) Group C First semester.Two lectures and six hours of laboratory work a week.Prerequisite: Zoology B05.Syllabus: Aspects of comparative cell physiology, biochemistry and immunology.Prescribed Book□ Ambrose, E. J. & Easty, D. M„ Cell Biology. Nelson.or De Robertis, E. D. P., Nowinski, W. W. & Saez, F. A., Cell Biology, 5th ed., Saunders.Examination: Assessment will be based on laboratory work, projects and essays as will be prescribed during the course.

Zoology C08(Theoretical Zoology)(7 point) Group CSecond semester (preferably takenin third year of course).Three lectures a week.Prerequisite: Not less than three units from Group B and/or Group C being:(a) Zoology units; or(b ) at least one Zoology unit and other biological units approved by Faculty.Syllabus: Selected topics from among the following: Origin of life, biological organisation, animal associations, growth and form, animal radiations, evolutionary theory, biological models.Prescribed Books A reading list will be provided by the Department.Examination: Assessment will be based on essays and tutorials as will be prescribed during the course.

For th e degree w ith honoursStudents who have attained a suffi­cient standard in the course for the pass degree may be admitted to an honours year. In this year the work will consist of selected topics taken to an advanced level. This work will be covered by a special reading course together with seminars, laboratory work and field work.A special project of a practical nature, on which a candidate is expected to provide a written report, may be given.

For the degree o f M aster of ScienceCandidates for the degree of Master of Science are required to undertake research in an approved field and

409

Faculty of Science

produce a detailed report on the work carried out. The work shall normally be carried out in the De­partment of Zoology, but in special circumstances approval may be given to undertake part of the work elsewhere. Candidates whose theo­retical or practical background has not reached the required level, may be required to undergo such addi­tional written or practical tests as are specified by the Head of the Department.

For the degree of D octor of PhilosophyCandidates for this degree will usually hold the degree of Bachelor of Science with honours.

In 1972 research facilities in the fields of parasitology, invertebrate physiology, histochemistry, com­parative biochemistry, ecology and reproductive physiology will be available.

410

Degree Rules

Courses of Study (Degree of Bachelor of Science) Rules1. (1) In these Rules, unless the contrary intention appears:'the Faculty' means the Faculty of Science;'the table' means the table in sub­rule (2) of rule 5 of these Rules.(2) A candidate shall be taken to have passed a unit if he attains a satisfactory standard in the exami­nations in respect of that unit and in such practical work as the head of the department concerned specifies in relation to that unit.2. The degree of Bachelor of Science may be conferred as a pass degree or as a degree with honours.

The pass degree3. A candidate for the pass degree of Bachelor of Science shall, unless he has been admitted to advanced status, pursue his studies for at least three years in accordance with these Rules.4. (1) Subject to this rule, to com­plete the course for the pass degree of Bachelor of Science a candidate shall pass such units set out in the next succeeding rule as will enable him to obtain a total of at least twenty points in accordance with that rule.(2) The total of the points to be obtained by a candidate shall, unless the Faculty otherwise determines, be made up of—(a) at least twelve points com­prising—

(i) six points from Group A in the table

(ii) two points from Part I of Group B in the table; and

(iii) four points from Group C in the table;

(b ) at least four points from all or

any of Group B, Group C or Group D in the table(c) subject to the next succeeding sub-rule, at least four points from all or any of Group A, Group B, Group C, Group D or Group E in the table.(3) For the purposes of paragraph (c) of the last preceding sub-rule, a candidate may not count more than two points from Part 1 of Group E in the table or more than two points from Part 2 of Group E in the table.(4) A candidate may not count more than four points in respect of the units Chemistry A02, General Mathematics and Physics A02.(4A) A candidate may not receive credit towards the degree for both Computer Science C02 and Computer Science C03.(5) A candidate may not count for the purposes of a paragraph of sub-rule (2) of this rule a point or points that he has counted for the purposes of another paragraph of that sub-rule, notwithstanding that the unit in respect of which that point was, or those points were, obtained is a unit that is set out in more than one of the groups, or in more than one of the parts of a group, in the table in sub-rule (2) of the next succeeding rule.5. (1) The units for the pass degree of Bachelor of Science are the units set out in the first column of the table.(2) Subject to the next succeeding rule, a candidate who passes a unit set out in the first column of the following table shall obtain the points set out in the second column of the table opposite to that unit:

Faculty of Science

First Column Second Column

Group AApplied Mathematics I

(Pass or Honours) 2Botany A01 2Chemistry A01 2Chemistry A02 (being General

Chemistry) 2General Mathematics 2Geology A01 2Human Biology A02 2Physics A01 2Physics A02 (being General Physics) 2 Psychology A01 2Pure Mathematics I (Pass or Honours) 2Science German 1Zoology A01 2

Group B (Part 1)Biochemistry B01 (being General

Biochemistry) 1Botany B01 (being Plant and

Microbial Systematics) 1Botany B02 (being Plant Metabolism) 1 Botany B03 (being Plant

Development) 1Botany B04 (being Genetics) 1Chemistry B01 (being Inorganic

Chemistry) 1Chemistry B02 (being Organic

Chemistry) 1Chemistry B03 (being Physical

Chemistry) 1Chemistry B04 (being Physical

Chemistry) 1Geology B01 (being Mineralogy

and Petrology) 1Geology B02 (being Stratigraphical

Geology) 1Geology B03 (being Structural and

Economic Geology) 1Physics B01 (being Atomic Physics I

and Quantum Mechanics) 1Physics B02 (being Electromagnetic

Fields and Waves) 1Physics B03 (being Electronics) 1Psychology B01 (being Intermediate

Psychology) 1Psychology B02 (being Personality

and Assessment) 1Psychology B04 (being Developmental

Psychology) 1Psychology B06 (being Sensation

and Perception) 1Zoology B01 (being Animal

Physiology) 1Zoology B02 (being Comparative

Invertebrate Zoology) 1412

First Column Second Column

Zoology B03 (being ComparativeVertebrate Zoology) 1

Zoology B04 (being General Ecology) 1 Zoology B05 (being Cell Physiology I) 1

Group B (Part 2)Applied Mathematics II (Pass) 2Applied Mathematics II (Honours) 3Computer Science B01 1Computer Science B02 1Physics B04 (being Thermal Physics) 1Psychology B03 (being Intelligence

and Ability) 1Psychology B05 (being Comparative

Behaviour) 1Pure Mathematics 11A

(Pass or Honours) 1Pure Mathematics MB

(Pass or Honours) 1Pure Mathematics IIC (Honours) 1Statistics B01 (Pass) 1Statistics B01 (Honours) 1 iStatistics B02 (Pass) 1Statistics B02 (Honours) I 5Statistics B03 (Pass) 1Statistics B03 (Honours) I 5

Group CApplied Mathematics III (Pass) 2Applied Mathematics III (Honours) 3Biochemistry C01 (being Metabolic

Regulation) 1Biochemistry C02 (being Perspectives

in Biochemistry) 1Biochemistry C03 (being Biochemistry

of Macromolecules) 1Biochemistry C04 (being

Bioenergetics) 1Biochemistry C05 (being Molecular

Genetics) 1Botany C01 (being Plant Physiology) 1 Botany C02 (being Plant Ecology) 1Botany C03 (being Membrane

Biophysics) 1Botany C04 (being Plant Microbe

Relationships) 1Botany C05 (being Genetics) 1Botany C06 (being Micrometeorology

and the Microenvironment) 1Botany C07 (being Plant

Development) 1Chemistry C01 (being Transition

Elements and Organometallics) 1Chemistry C02 (being Structural

Inorganic Chemistry) 1Chemistry C03 (being Organic

Structure and Mechanism) 1

Degree Rules

First Column Second Column First Column Second Column

Chemistry C04 (being Fleterocycles, Synthesis and Natural Products) 1

Chemistry C05 (being PhysicalChemistry) 1

Chemistry C06 (being ChemicalPhysics) 1

Computer Science C01 1Computer Science C02 1Computer Science C03 1Geology C01 (being Field Geology) iGeology C02 (being Crystallography

and Mineralogy) ^Geology C03 (being Australian

Stratigraphy) \Geology C04 (being Geophysics) \Geology C05 (being Microscopy of

Opaque Minerals) iGeology C06 (being Geochemistry) JGeology C07 (being Sedimentology B) i Geology C08 (being Igneous

Petrology) JGeology C09 (being Tectonics) 5Geology C10 (being Metamorphic

Petrogenesis) \Geology C12 (being Sedimen­

tology A) 1Geology C13 (being World Structure

and Stratigraphy) JPhysics C01 (being Physics of

Fluids) 1Physics C02 (being Atomic Physics II

and Nuclear Physics) 1Physics C03 (being Solid State

Physics) 1Physics C04 (being Optical Physics) 1Psychology C01 (being Learning

and Motivation) 1Psychology C02 (being Human Skills

and Applied Experimental Psychology) 1

Psychology C03 (being SocialPsychology) 1

Psychology C04 (being CognitiveProcesses) 1

Psychology C05 (being AdvancedPersonality) 1

Psychology C06 (being GroupDynamics) 1

Psychology C08 (being Psycho­pathology) 1

Psychology C10 (being Experimental Neuropsychology) 1

Pure Mathematics 111A(Pass or Honours) 1

Pure Mathematics 111B(Pass or Honours) 1

Pure Mathematics MIC (Honours) 1Pure Mathematics HID (Honours) 1Statistics C01 (Pass) 1Statistics C01 (Honours) 1^Statistics C02 (Pass) 1Statistics C02 (Honours) I 5Statistics C03 1Statistics C04 1Theoretical Physics C01 1Theoretical Physics C02 1Theoretical Physics C03 1Theoretical Physics C04 1Zoology C01 (being Endocrinology

and Developmental Biology) 1Zoology C02 (being Comparative

Invertebrate Zoology) 1Zoology C03 (being Comparative

Vertebrate Zoology) 1Zoology C04 (being Parasitology) 1Zoology C05 (being Animal Ecology) 1Zoology C06 (being Ethology) 1Zoology C07 (being Cell Physiology

II) 1Zoology C08 (being Theoretical

Zoology) 1

Group DForestry D16 (being Soil Science) iForestry D17 (being Forest

Meteorology, Climate and Fire) iForestry D18 (being Dendrology) JForestry D19 (being Forest

Communities) iForestry D20 (being Wood Anatomy

and Timber Identification) ^Forestry D21 (being Pathology of

Forest Trees and Ornamentals) iForestry D22 (being Wildlife and

Range Management) \Forestry D23 (being Principles of Pest

Control) * 1Forestry D24 (being Growth and

Nutrition of Forest Trees) 1Forestry D25 (being Metabolic Control

of Tree Growth) 1Forestry D26 (being Forest

Hydrology) iForestry D27 (being Forest

Engineering) 1Forestry D28 (being Principles of

Tree Improvement) 1Forestry D29 (being Ecology of Soil

Micro-organisms) 1Forestry D30 (being Ground and

Aerial Surveying) 1

413

Faculty of Science

First Column Second Column

Forestry D31 (being Forest Bio­metrics and Computer Methods) 5

Forestry D32 (being Forestry andResource Economics) 1

Forestry D33 (being Silviculture ofIndigenous Forests) 1

Forestry D34 (being Mensuration) 1Forestry D35 (being Physical and

Chemical Properties of Wood) 1Forestry D36 (being Plantation

Silviculture) 1Forestry D37 (being Harvesting and

Utilisation of Forest Products) 1Forestry D38 (being Forest Planning

and Operations Analysis) 1Forestry D39 (being Conservation,

Multiple Use and Resource Management) 1

Forestry D40 (being ForestManagement, Administration and Policy) 1

Group E (Part 1)A unit approved for the degree course of another faculty taken in accord­ance with the rules of that faculty

Such number of points as the Faculty determines

Group E (Part 2)A unit which has as its prerequisite one of the units from Part I of this Group, taken in accord­ance with the rules of the faculty concerned

Such number of points as the Faculty determines

6. (1) A candidate shall pursue his course for the pass degree of Bachelor of Science subject to the following conditions:(a) the units to be taken by the candidate shall be approved by the Faculty(b ) except with the approval of the Faculty, a candidate shall not take a unit set out in Group C of the table unless he has obtained at least six points in respect of the units set out in Group A of the table,(2) The Faculty may determine that a candidate may not take a unit 414

specified in the determination unless he has passed another unit speci­fied in the determination or takes that unit concurrently.(3) tThe Faculty may determine that the content of a unit approved for the degree course of the Faculty or of another faculty is substantially the same as the content of another unit for the degree course of the Faculty or of another faculty and, in such a case, a candidate for the pass degree of Bachelor of Science may take only one of those units for his degree.7. A candidate's performance in a unit shall be classified as 'High Dis­tinction', 'Distinction', 'Credit','Pass', 'Conditional Pass' or 'Fail'.8. (1) A candidate may be granted a conditional pass in not more than two of the units specified in the next succeeding sub-rule.(2) The units in respect of which a conditional pass may be granted are-

tThe Faculty of Science w ill apply the following working rule in determining the units approved for the degree course of the Faculty or of another faculty which may not be taken for the purpose of the degree of Bachelor of Science.A candidate may not count for the degree points in respect o f-(a ) the unit Chemistry A02 if points in respect of Chemistry A01 are so counted(b ) the unit General Mathematics if points in respect of Pure Mathematics I are so counted(c) the unit Physics A02 if points in respect of Physics A01 are so counted(d ) the unit Human Biology A02 if points in respect of either Psychology A01 or Zoology A01 are so counted(e) the unit Chemistry B04 if points in respect of Chemistry B03 are so coun­ted(/) the unit Psychology C06 if points in respect of Psychology C08 are so counted(g) the unit Science German if points in respect of Elementary German or German I are so counted.

Degree Rules

(a) one unit from Group A in the table(b ) one unit from Group B in the table in respect of which the can­didate may count one point for the degree; and(c) one unit from Group C in the table in respect of which the candidate may count one point for the degree being a unit approved by the Faculty.(3) In determining whether or not to classify a candidate's perform­ance in a unit as 'Conditional Pass', the Faculty shall take into account the candidate's overall performance in his course.(4) A candidate who obtains a con­ditional pass in a unit shall, for the purposes of rules 4 and 5 of these Rules, be deemed to have passed the unit.(5) Except with the approval of the head of the department concerned, a candidate who obtains a condi­tional pass in a unit shall be deemed not to have passed that unit for the purposes of the operation of a determination made by the Faculty under sub-rule (2) of rule 6 of these Rules.9. Except with the approval of the Faculty, a candidate shall not be admitted to the pass degree of Bachelor of Science unless he has completed the requirements for the degree within the period of ten years from the date of commencement of the academic year in which he passed the first unit of his course.10. A candidate who has complied with the preceding provisions of these Rules may be admitted to the pass degree of Bachelor of Science.

The degree w ith honours13. A candidate for the degree of Bachelor of Science with honours

may specialise in Botany, Chemistry, Geology, Mathematics, Physics, Psychology, Statistics, Theoretical Physics, Zoology or any other field of study approved by the Faculty.14. The degree of Bachelor of Science with honours may be awarded with first class honours; second class honours, division A; second class honours, division B; or third class honours.15. (1) The course for the degree with honours shall extend over one academic year of ten months of full­time study, shall consist of such work as the head of the department concerned may direct and may include any of the units prescribed for the pass degree.(2) Except with the approval of the Faculty, the course for the degree with honours shall be continuous with the course for the pass degree.16. A candidate is eligible to enrol for the degree with honours if:(a) he has completed the require­ments for the pass degree of Bachelor of Science and has reached a standard in the field of study in which he proposes to specialise that, in the opinion of the Faculty, acting on the recom­mendation of the head of the depart­ment concerned, is satisfactory; or(b ) he has been admitted to equiv­alent status towards the degree.17. In order to qualify for the degree of Bachelor of Science with honours, a candidate is required:(a) to pass such examinations and reach such standard in other required work, as the Faculty, on the recommendation of the head of the department concerned, directs; and(ib) if the head of the department concerned thinks fit, to satisfy the

41 5

Faculty of Science

head of the department, in such manner as the head of department directs, of the candidate's know­ledge of such language or languages useful for the purposes of science as the head of that department determines.18. Except with the approval of the Faculty, a candidate may not, or may not continue to, pursue the course for the degree with honours if, at any time during that year, he enrols for a diploma or another degree course in the University or for a unit forming part of a diploma or another degree course.19. A candidate who fails to qualify for the degree with honours may be admitted to the pass degree.20. Except with the approval of the Faculty, a candidate who has enrol­led for the degree with honours and fails to qualify for that degree shall not be permitted to re-enrol for that degree.21. Where, after the commencement of this rule, an amendment affecting the courses of study that may be taken by candidates for the pass degree of Bachelor of Science or the degree of Bachelor of Science with honours is made to these Rules, the amend­ment does not apply to such a candidate who, before the making of the amendment, completed one or more units of a course of study approved by the Faculty unless:(a) the student elects that the amendment apply to him and sub­mits to the Faculty proposed altera­tions to his course that are in accordance with these Rules as amended by the amendment and the Faculty approves those alterations; or(b ) the Faculty otherwise deter­mines.

Courses of Study (Degree of Bachelor of Science (Fores try )) Rules1. (1) In these Rules, unless the contrary intention appears-'the Faculty' means the Faculty of Science;'the table' means the table in sub­rule (2) of rule 5 of the Courses of Study (Degree of Bachelor of Science) Rules.(2) A candidate shall be taken to have passed a unit if he attains a satisfactory standard in the exami­nations in respect of that unit and in such practical work as the head of the department concerned specifies in relation to that unit.(3) Subject to these Rules, a can­didate for the degree of Bachelor of Science (Forestry) who passes a unit set out in the first column of the table shall obtain the points set out in the second column of the table opposite to that unit.2. The degree of Bachelor of Science (Forestry) may be con­ferred as a pass degree or as a degree with honours.

The pass degree3. A candidate for the pass degree of Bachelor of Science (Forestry) shall, unless he has been admit­ted to advanced status, pursue his studies for at least four years in accordance with these Rules.4. To complete the course for the pass degree of Bachelor of Science (Forestry), a candidate shall pass such units referred to in these Rules as will enable the candidate to obtain a total of at least twenty-six points in accordance with these Rules.5. To complete the first year of the

416

Degree Rules

course for the pass degree, a can­didate shall obtain eight points in accordance with the Courses of Study (Degree of Bachelor of Science) Rules by passing the units-(a) Chemistry A01 or Chemistry A02(b) Botany A01(c) one of the following units or combinations of units:

(i) Applied Mathematics I(ii) Economics I(iii) Economics A(iv) General Mathematics(v) Physics A01(vi) Physics A02(vii) Pure Mathematics I(viii) Statistics A01 and A03(ix) Statistics A03 and A01, and

(d) a unit set out in Group A or Part I of Group E other than a unit that the candidate has passed for the purposes of complying with the preceding paragraphs of this rule.6. To pass the remainder of his course for the pass degree, a candidate shall obtain-(a) nine points in respect of the units Forestry D32 to Forestry D40, inclusive;(b ) five points in respect of other units set out in Group D in the table; and(c) four points, not being points counted for the purposes of the last two preceding paragraphs:

(i) by passing units selected from the units set out in Group D in the table;

(ii) by passing such units for the pass degree of Bachelor of Science, being units referred to in all or any of Group A,B or C in the table, as would, if the candidate were a candidate for that degree, enable the candidate to obtain those points; or

(iii) by passing some of the units referred to in both of the last two preceding sub-paragraphs.

7. (1) The units to be taken by a candidate shall be approved by the Faculty.(2) The Faculty may determine that a candidate may not take a unit specified in the determination unless he has passed another unit specified in the determination or takes that unit concurrently.8. A candidate's performance in a unit shall be classified as 'High Distinction', 'Distinction', 'Credit', 'Pass', 'Conditional Pass' or 'Fail'.9. (1) A candidate may be granted a conditional pass in not more than two of the units specified in the next succeeding sub-rule.(2) The units in respect of which a conditional pass may be granted are-(a) a unit referred to in rule 5 of these Rules(b) a unit referred to in sub-rule (2) of rule 6 of these Rules being a unit in respect of which a candidate may obtain one point; and(c) a unit set out in Group D in the table being a unit approved by the Faculty.(3) In determining whether or not to classify a candidate's perform­ance in a unit as 'Conditional Pass', the Faculty shall take into account the candidate's overall performance in his course.(4) A candidate who obtains a con­ditional pass in a unit shall, for the purposes of rules 4, 5 and 6 of these Rules, be deemed to have passed the unit.(5) Except with the approval of the head of the department con­cerned, a candidate who obtains a conditional pass in a unit shall be

417

Faculty of Science,

deemed not to have passed that unit for the purposes of the opera­tion of a determination made by the Faculty under sub-rule (2) of rule 7 of these Rules.10. Except with the approval of the Faculty, a candidate shall not be admitted to the pass degree of Bachelor of Science (Forestry) unless-(a) he has completed the require­ments of the course as set out in these Rules; and(b ) subject to the next succeeding rule, he completed those require­ments within ten years from the commencement of the academic year in which he passed the first unit of his course.11. (1) The Faculty may grant to a candidate who has performed work or passed a subject at another uni­versity in Australia, or at another university outside Australia approved by the Faculty, being work per­formed, or a subject passed, after matriculation at that university, such credit for that work or subject towards the pass degree of Bachelor of Science (Forestry) as the Faculty determines.(2) Where the Faculty grants credit to a candidate under the last pre­ceding sub-rule, the Faculty shall fix a time, not being more than nine years from the date of admission of the candidate to the course for the pass degree of this University within which the candidate must complete the requirements of these Rules.

The degree w ith honours15. (1) The course of study for the degree of Bachelor of Science (Forestry) with honours comprises the work prescribed for the pass degree together with the additional 418

work specified in rule 17 of these Rules.(2) The additional work referred to in the last preceding sub-rule shall be taken—(a) concurrently with the final two years of the course of studies for the pass degree; or (,b ) in one academic year of ten months, full-time study.(3) Except with the approval of the Faculty, the full-time study referred to in paragraph (b ) of the last preceding sub-rule shall be continuous with the course of studies for the pass degree.16. A person shall not be entitled to be enrolled as a candidate for the degree with honours unless-(a) in the case of a person who proposes to pursue the course of studies for that degree in the manner specified in paragraph (a) of sub-rule (2) of the last preceding rule— he has obtained fourteen points for the pass degree and has attained an academic standard that, in the opinion of the Faculty, acting on the recommendation of the Head of the Department of Forestry, is satisfactory; or(b) in the case of a person who proposes to pursue the course of studies for that degree in the manner specified in paragraph (b) of sub-rule (2) of the last preceding rule—

(i) he has completed the require­ments for the pass degree and has attained a standard that, in the opinion of the Faculty, acting on the recommendation of the Head of the Department of Forestry, is satisfactory; or

(ii) he has been admitted to equivalent status towards the honours degree.

Degree Rules

17. In order to qualify for the degree of Bachelor of Science (Forestry) with honours a candidate is required- fa) to pursue that part of his course of study that is taken in pursuance of rule 1 5 of these Rules for that degree as a full-time student(b ) to pass such examinations and reach such standard in them and in other required work as the Faculty, on the recommendation of the Head of the Department of Forestry directs(c) to attend such lectures and seminars as the Head of the Depart­ment of Forestry directs(d) to present a thesis giving an account of original research in a field approved by the Head of the Department of Forestry and carried out under the supervision of a member of the staff of the Depart­ment of Forestry; and(e) if the Head of the Department of Forestry thinks fit, to satisfy the Head of the Department of the can­didate's knowledge of such language or languages useful for the purposes of science as the Head of the Department determines and in such manner as he directs.18. Except with the approval of the Faculty, a candidate may not, or may not continue to, pursue the course for the degree with honours if, at any time during the currency of that part of his course of study that is taken in pursuance of rule1 5 of these Rules, he enrolsfor a diploma or another degreecourse in the University orfor a unit forming part of a diplomaor another degree course.

19. The degree with honours may be awarded with first class honours, second class honours division A,

second class honours division B or third class honours.20. A candidate who fails to qualify for the degree with honours may be admitted to the pass degree.21. Except with the approval of the Faculty, a candidate who has enrolled for the degree with honours and fails to qualify for that degree shall not be permitted to re-enrol for that degree.

22. Where an amendment affecting the courses of study that may be taken by candidates for the pass degree of Bachelor of Science (Forestry) or the degree of Bachelor of Science (Forestry) with honours is made to these Rules, the amend­ment shall not apply to a candidate who, before the making of the amendment, completed one or more units of a course of study approved by the Faculty unless-(a) the student elects that the amendment apply to him and sub­mits to the Faculty proposed altera­tions to his course that are in accordance with these Rules as amended by the amendment and the Faculty approves those altera­tions; or(b) the Faculty otherwise determines.

Courses o f Study (Degree of M aster o f Science) Rules

1. In these Rules, unless the contrary intention appears, 'the Faculty' means the Faculty of Science.2. Subject to the next succeeding rule, the Faculty may, on the recommendation of the head of the department concerned, admit a person as a candidate for the degree of Master of Science.3. (1) A candidate is eligible to

419

Faculty of Science

enrol for the degree if he has qualified for the degree of Bachelor of Science with honours or has been granted equivalent status by the Faculty.(2) A candidate shall not be granted such equivalent status unless he enrols for a course of study to be arranged by the head of the depart­ment concerned and satisfies the head ofthat department that he is a suitable candidate by passing a qualifying examination to be taken not earlier than one year or later than two years after his enrolment for that course of study.4 . A candidate shall, before enrolling for the degree, obtain the approval of the head of the department con­cerned for his proposed courseof research or study.5. Unless the Faculty otherwise permits, a candidate's course of research or study shall be pursued in the University under the supervision of a member of the staff of the University appointedby the Faculty on the recommenda­tion of the head of the department concerned.6 . A candidate who has enrolled for the degree or for a course of study under rule 3 of these Rules shall enrol for any unit or for any degree or diploma course in the University approved by the head of the department concerned, but shall not, except with the approval of the Faculty, enrol for any other unit or for any other degree or diploma course.7 . A candidate who has enrolled for the degree shall—(a) pursue his course of research for at least one year, and(b) unless the Faculty otherwise permits, either in respect of a class 420

of candidates or in a particular case, complete the requirements of the course of research within two years after his enrolment for the degree.8. Except with the approval of the Faculty, the course of study of a candidate who qualified for enrol­ment for the degree by passing a qualifying examination shall be consecutive upon the course of study pursued by him for that examination.8A. The Faculty may, on the recommendation of the head of the department concerned, suspend the course of research or study being pursued by a candidate for such time as it thinks fit, and the Faculty shall determine whether the period of the suspension shall be taken into account for the purposes of the application of sub-rule (2) of rule 3, and rule 7 of these Rules in relation to the candidate.9 . (1) A candidate who is pursuing a course of study that is solely a course of research shall—(a) submit for examination a thesis embodying a description and the results of the research carried out by him on a subject previously approved by the head of the depart­ment concerned;(b ) pass an examination in any unit or course specified in accordance with rule 6 of these Rules by the head of the department concerned;(c) if the head of the department concerned thinks fit, satisfy the head of department, in such manner as the head of the department directs, of the candidate's knowledge of such language or languages useful for the purposes of science as the

Degree Rules

head of the department deter­mines, and(d ) undergo such further examina­tion, whether by written paper or otherwise, as the head of the department concerned determines.(2) A candidate who is pursuing a course of study other than a course of study that is solely a course of research shall—(a) attend such classes and satisfactorily perform such work as are required by the head of the department concerned;(b ) undergo such examination or examinations, whether by written paper or otherwise, as the head of the department concerned determines; and(c) submit for examination an essay on a topic approved by the headof the department concerned that is related to the work performed by the candidate under paragraph (a) of this sub-rule.(3) A candidate shall submit with the thesis or essay a statement in writing setting out the extent to which the thesis or essay represents the original work of the candidate or work done in collaboration with other persons.(4) A candidate shall not submit for examination—(a) any work in respect of which he has already qualified for a degree at the University or at another university; or(b) except with the permission of the Faculty, work that he has previously submitted for such a degree.

10. The thesis or essay submitted by a candidate in pursuance of the last preceding rule shall be referred to at least two examiners, of whom at least one shall be an examiner who is not

a member of the academic staff of the University, and the candidate may be called upon to submit him­self to an oral examination on the subject of his thesis or essay.11. A candidate who complies satisfactorily with the requirements of these Rules and whose thesis or essay is judged by the Faculty, in the light of the examiners' reports, to be of sufficient merit, may be admitted to the degree of Master of Science.

421

Academic Progress Rules

A cadem ic Progress o f S tudents (F acu lty of Science) Rules

1 . (1) In these Rules—'enrol' includes re-enrol and 'enrol­ment' includes re-enrolment;'Faculty' means the Faculty of Science;'the Board' means the Board of the School.(2) A reference in these Rules to a 'course', 'subject' or 'unit' means a course or a subject or unit of a degree, as the case may be, for which the Faculty is responsible.

2 . t ( 1 ) Subject to this rule, where a person —

fThe Faculty of Science has adopted the following criteria concerning academic progress:(a) Progress in any one unit:

(i) A student whose performance of class work is unsatisfactory may be excluded from the unit. This exclusion will count as a failure.

(ii) A student excluded from a unit in any given year may not re-enrol in that unit without the approval of the Faculty on the recommendation of the head of the department concerned.

(iii) A student who fails a unit at two Annual Examinations may not re- enrol in that unit without the approval of the Faculty on the recommendation of the head of the department concerned.

(iv) A student who has failed in a unit in another faculty or university may not enrol in that unit as part of a science course without the approval of the Faculty on the recommenda­tion of the head of the department concerned.

(b) Overall progress:(i) A student who on his first enrolment

at this University does not pass in any of the units which were approved for him at the beginning of that academic year shall have his progress reviewed by the Faculty and may be liable to exclusion on

the grounds of unsatisfactory academic progress.

(ii) A student wiil be liable to exclusion on the grounds of unsatisfactory academic progress if he fails either to pass or, without the permission of the Faculty, to attend the examina­tions in units for the degree of Bachelor of Science having a value of eight points, before he has passed in and received credit towards the degree for units having a value of twelve points.

This rule applies to all students except that a student transferring from another faculty in this or another university who, in the opinion of the Faculty of Science, has an unsatisfactory academic record, may be refused admission or admitted only on condition that he obtain credit for a given number of points in his first year.

(iii) A student previously enrolled in the Faculty of Science in another university may be refused admission to the Faculty if he is not eligible to re-enrol in the Science Faculty at the other university.

(iv) Where a student at another univer­sity fails in all the units which in accordance with the rules of that university comprise the full academic year's work, he will be considered to have failed in the number of units which comprise the corresponding academic year in the Faculty of Science of this University.

(c) Withdrawals from units:Withdrawals from units will be countedas failure—

(i) in the case of a unit extending over a full year, if the withdrawal is made after the last day of second term;

(ii) in the case of a unit extending over the first semester, if the withdrawal is made after the thirty-first day of May;

(iii) in the case of a unit extending over the second semester, if the w ith­drawal is made after the thirtieth day of September.

(d) Readmission:An application for readmission from astudent who has been excluded from the

422

Academic Progress Rules

Faculty will not normally be accepted for consideration unless at the time of exclusion the Committee on Unsatis­factory Progress resolved to inform the candidate that he might apply for recon­sideration of his enrolment one academic year after the date of exclusion.

If in the Faculty's judgment such a can­didate is in a better position to pursue successfully his academic studies his application for readmission may be accepted.

(a) has previously been enrolled in the University or in another univer­sity or institute of higher learning or education, and(b) has not, in the opinion of the Faculty, achieved satisfactory aca­demic progress in the University or in that other university or institute of higher learning or education,the Faculty may direct that the person —(c) shall not be admitted to a course of study,(d) shall not be permitted to con­tinue in a course of study,(e) shall not be permittedto enrol in a subject or unit, or(f) shall be permitted to enrol in a subject or unit only upon specified conditions.(2) Before giving a direction under the last preceding sub-rule, the Faculty shall give the person con­cerned an opportunity of making representations to the Faculty with respect to his enrolment and shall take into account any representa­tions so made to the Faculty by the person.(3) A person in respect of whom a direction has been given under sub­rule (1) of this rule may appeal to the Board against the direction.(4) Sub-rules (2) and (3) of this rule do not apply to a person who, before applying for enrolment, had

not previously been enrolled in the Faculty of Science.

423

425T im e-tab le

426

The Australian National University

Lecture T im e - ta b le fo r 1972

(1) All students enrolling for units offered in the Faculty of Science are advised to use both First and Second Semester Time-tables when planning their courses for the academic year. Both Semester Time-tables, when used in conjunction with the Lecture Time-tables for units offered in the Faculties of Arts, Asian Studies, Economics and Law, will indicate those units or subjects, in the other faculties, which will be available to the student throughout the academic year; that is, during both semesters.(2) Further information concerning

tutorials, seminars and other class commitments has been included under the syllabuses for units in the Faculty Handbook, 1972.(3) The Lecture Time-table for subjects offered in the Faculty of Law will be available in January 1 972 from the Faculty and Student Administration. Students attempting combined BA/LLB and BEc/LLB courses should assume that, in almost every instance, they will be able to proceed with the units which they will have selected in the Faculties of Arts and Economics.

Key:D D a y h o u rs

E E v e n in g h o u rs

a L a b o ra to r y o r p ra c t ic a l p e r io d o f t w o h o u rs

b L a b o ra to r y p e r io d o f th re e h o u rs

c L e c tu re p e r io d o f t w o h o u rs

d P ra c t ic a l, p ro b le m s o r la b o ra to ry p e r io d o f o n e h o u r

e L a b o ra to r y p e r io d o f fo u r h o u rs

f L a b o ra to r y p e r io d o f th re e a n d a h a lf h o u rs

g P e r io d re s tr ic te d to h o n o u rs d e g re e o r d is t in c t io n s tu d e n ts

h H o n o u rs c la s s e s b y a r ra n g e m e n t

k L a b o ra to r y p e r io d o f s ix h o u rs ( e x c lu d in g lu n c h h o u r 1 p .m . - 2 p .m .)

m F o u r a d d it io n a l la b o ra to ry h o u rs to be a r ra n g e d

n L a b o ra to r y p e r io d o f f iv e h o u rs

p C o m b in a t io n s o f u n i ts ta k e n b y s tu d e n ts p e r m it t in g , it is in te n d e d th a t th e s e t w o le c tu re s fo r T h e o re t ic a l P h y s ic s C 0 3 w i l l be h e ld a t e a r lie r h o u rs d u r in g th e w e e k .

t O n e a d d it io n a l la b o ra to ry h o u r to b e a r ra n g e d .

X A lte rn a t iv e c la s s

y A lte rn a t iv e c la s s a v a ila b le o r t o be a r ra n g e d

Z T h is le c tu re fo r f i r s t te rm o n ly .

L e c tu re o r p e r io d re p e a te d

R e p e a t o f le c tu re o r p e r io d

0 0T w o a d d it io n a l h o u rs fo r R u s s ia n II a n d R u s s ia n I II (P a s s ) a n d u p to fo u r a d d it io n a l h o u rs fo r R u s s ia n II a n d R u s s ia n II I ( H o n o u rs ) t o b e a r ra n g e d .

427

Lecture Time-table for 1972

Key: Continued

RR Students taking Zoology B02 or C02 in the First Semester and students takingZoology C01 in the Second Semester are advised that on occasions the 2 pm lecture on Tuesdays w ill be given at 12 noon on Thursdays and that the five-hour laboratory class on Thursdays w ill then be offered over two periods, 2-5 pm on Tuesdays and 2-5 pm on Thursdays. That is, students taking these Semester units should not enrol for other units offered at 3 pm and 4 pm on Tuesdays.

Time-table A

U N IT S B Y D E P A R T M E N T SM o n d a y T u e s d a y W e d n e s d a y T h u rs d a y F r id a y

D E D E D E D E D E

D ep a rtm e n t o f A cco u n tin g and Public Finance

Accounting I . . . . 9 10

Accounting II . . . . 2 . . 2

Company Finance (Semester Unit) (2nd Half of Year)

12 . . 11

Financial Accounting Theory (Semester Unit) (1 st Half of Year)

12 11

National Economic Accounting (Semester Unit) (2nd Half of Year)

. . . . 12 12

Public Authority Accounting (Semester Unit) (1st Half of Year)

. . . . 12 12

Accounting Control(Semester Unit) (2nd Half of Year)

11 .................... 10

Accounting IV Classes by arrangement

Expenditure and Fiscal Institutions (Semester Unit) (1st Half of Year)

.................... 4 2 .............

Welfare and Taxation (Semester Unit) (2nd Half of Year)

.................... 4 2 .............

Public Finance (Honours) Classes by arrangement

D ep a rtm e n t o f A pplied M a th e m a tic s

Applied Mathematics I 11 . . 12 . 10dy,11,12dy

Applied Mathematics I (Honours) 11 .. 12 . 10dy,11.12dy

Applied Mathematics II . . . . 9,11 dy 11dy . . 9 9

Applied Mathematics II (Honours) .. .. 9,11 dy 11dy . . 9 9

Applied Mathematics III 9 .................... 9 2 10

Applied Mathematics III (Honours) 9 .................... 9 2 10

Applied Mathematics IV Classes by arrangement

428

Lecture Time-table for 1972

Monday Tuesday Wednesday Thursday Friday

D E D E D E D E D E

D epa rtm e n t o f Asian C iv iliza tio n s

Introduction to Asian Civilizations A (and Introduction to Asian Civilizations B) as selected — Segments i, iii, v

— Segments ii, iv, vi. . . . 9 ........................................ 4

1211

Asian Civilization II (East) . . . . 12 .................... 12

Asian Civilization II (South) ............................. 11 11

Asian Civilization II (South-East) 3 9 ....................

Asian Civilization III (East) ............................. 12 2

Asian Civilization III (South) . . . . 11 .................... 10

Asian Civilization III (South-East) 11 .................... 2

Asian Civilization IV Classes by arrangement

Buddhist Civilization 4 ............................. 4

Islamic Civilization . . . . 2 .................... 12

D epa rtm e n t o f Chinese

Classical Chinese I 9 11 10

Classical Chinese II 10 . . 2g .................... 3c

Classical Chinese III .. . . 9 10.2g 11

Classical Chinese IV Classes by arrangement

Modern Chinese I 11 10 9

Modern Chinese II 12 .. 1 g . . 9,11 g 9

Modern Chinese III . . . . 10,2g 11,3 . . 2g . .

Modern Chinese IV Classes by arrangement

D epa rtm e n t o f C lassics

Greek la 3 11 .................... 12 11

Greek lb 4 3 .................... 12 4

Greek II . . . . 10 3 3 2

Greek III 11 10 . . . . 4 3

Greek IV Classes by arrangement

Latin la 9 9 9 . . 9

Latin lb 10 10 11 11

Latin II 12 .................... 10 9 9

Latin III 12 . . . . 12 11 9

Latin IV Classes by arrangement

Greek Civilization

Greek Civilization(S)

429

Lecture Time-table for 1972

U N IT S B Y D E P A R T M E N T SM o n d a y T u e s d a y W e d n e s d a y T h u rs d a y Friday

D E D E D E D E D E

Roman Civilization . . . . 10 . . . . 11

Roman Civilisation (S) 5 1 0 . . . . 11

Classical Tradition 9 ..................... 2

D e p a rtm e n t o f C om p u ter Science

Computer Science B01 (Semester Unit) (1st Half of Year)

.................... 5 5 5

Computer Science B02 (Semester Unit) (2nd Half of Year)

.................... 5 5 5

Computer Science C01 (Semester Unit) (1st Half of Year)

.................... 4 9g 3 2

Computer Science C02 (Semester Unit) (2nd Half of Year)

.................... 4 9g 3 2

Computer Science C03 (Semester Unit) (2nd Half of Year)

.. . . 12 .. 9g,2 2

D e p a rtm e n t o f Econom ic H is to ry

Economic History I . . . . 1 1 * 4 * * . . 11* 4 "

Economic History II 12 .............................. 12

Economic Development of Modern Japan (Semester Unit) (1st Half of Year)

10 ..................... 10

Recent Economic Experience in Europeand North America(Semester Unit) (1st Half of Year)

2 .................... 2

Problems of Under-development: India (Semester Unit) (2nd Half of Year)

10 ..................... 10

Economic History IV Classes by arrangement

History of Economic Thought . . . . 9 . . . . 9

D e p a rtm e n t o f Econom ics

Economics I 10* 7 " . . . . 10* 5 ” 2* 7 "

Economics A 10" 7 ” . . . . 10* 5 " 2* 7 "

Economics II 5 11 * 1 " . .

Economics III 5 .................... 4 9

Economics IV Classes by arrangement

Agriculture in the National Economy (Semester Unit) (2nd Half of Year)

. . . . 12 . . . . 11

Agricultural Production and Prices (Semester Unit) (2nd Half of Year)

Not offered in 1972.

Economic Geography See Geography— Economic

Economic Policy(Semester Unit) (1st Half of Year)

9c 9c

Labour Economics A (Semester Unit) (1st Half of Year)

.............................. 3 12

430

Lecture Time-table for 1972

Monday Tuesday Wednesday Thursday Friday

D E D E D E D E D E

Labour Economics B(Semester Unit) (2nd Half of Year)

3 12

Mathematics for Economists . . . . 10 11

Mathematical Economics IA (Semester Unit) (1st Half of Year)

1,2g . . 1

Mathematical Economics IB (Semester Unit) (2nd Half of Year)

. . 1,2g . . 1

Mathematical Economics 11A (Semester Unit) (1st Half of Year)

Classes by arrangement

Mathematical Economics MB (Semester Unit) (2nd Half of Year)

Classes by arrangement

D epa rtm e n t o f English

English IA,h 1 1 *4 * * . . . . 6* 12* 9* 4 "

English 11A 4 4,5

English 11A (Honours) 11c* 4 4c 2c**

English IMA — Class A . . . . 11c . . 5 2c

English MIA — Class B .. .. 2c 5 11c

English MIA — Class C .................... 4c 5 4c

English MIA (Honours) 2c 2c 4c 2cEnglish IB 2* 5” . . 4c

English MB . . 6c- . . . . 2c‘ * 5c 9c##

English MB (Honours) 10 .................... 7c

English IIIB Classes by arrangement

English IV Classes by arrangement

American Literature 5 . . . . 5 5

Australian Literature 12 .................... 10 12

D epa rtm e n t o f French

French Lang Et Lit I .. . . 2- 7** 3* 7 " 10* 4**

French Lang Et Lit II 2- 5** 10 ' ..(i) (i) (Ü)

4*(iii)

10”(iii)

5 "(ii)

French Lang Et Lit III 2* 5” 10- 4*(i) (i) (ii) (iii)

5 "(Ü)

2*.

(iii)

French IV Classes by arrangement

French Studies A 3 2c

French Studies B 3 2c

French Studies C .................... 5 5 9

D epa rtm e n t o f G eography

Geography I .................... 4 4

431

Lectu re T im e -ta b le for 1972

Monday Tuesday Wednesday Thursday FridayU N I T S BY D E P A R T M E N T S

D E D E D E D E D E

Geography I (Lab) (2 hrs) 10a . . 7a

Applied Geography 5 . . 5

Applied Geography (Lab) 7b . . . .

Economic Geography 9 . . . , 9 12 ....................

Economic Geography (Lab) 7b

Regional Geography A 5 2 .................... 5 . . . .

Regional Geography B 5 2 .................... 5 . . . .

Systematic Geography A 9 . . . . 9 12 ....................

Systematic Geography A (Lab) 7b

Systematic Geography B 9 . . . . 9 12 ....................

Systematic Geography B (Lab) 7b

Systematic Geography C 9 . . . . 9 12 ....................

Systematic Geography C (Lab) 7b

Geography IV Classes by arrangement

D e p a r t m e n t o f G e r m a n i c L a n g u a g e s

Elementary German 2d 4 4 9,3 . . . . . . 2d ..

German Language 1 (Half-Unit) 12*,2d 2 * * , 3 ....................

German Literature I (Half-Unit) . . . . 9 11* 5“ 12

German l(S) (Half-Unit) 7c . . . . . . . . 12

German Language II (Half-Unit) . . . . 10,11 1 1 c ....................

German Literature II (Half-Unit) 11 2 11 11 ....................

German Literature II (Honours) (Half-Unit) 10c . .

German Language & Literature III 10c . . . . . . 9,11 1 0 c ....................

German Literature III (Honours) (Half-Unit)

10c

German IV Classes by arrangement

German Studies A Not offered in 1 972

German Studies B

German Post-Graduate Seminar 10c

Science German 6c* 6d,7c*‘

Dutch I

Old Norse I (Half-Unit) Not offered in 1 972

Old Norse II (Half-Unit) Classes by arrangement

Swedish I

Swedish II Not offered in 1 972

432

Lecture Time-table for 1972

UNITS BY DEPARTMENTSMonday Tuesday Wednesday Thursday Friday

D E D E D E D E D E

D ep ar tm e n t o f H is tory

History IA 10 ..................... 1C ......................................

History IB . . . . 5 . . . . 5 . . . .

History IC . . . . 4 . . . . 4 . . . .

History ID 5 .................. . . . . 5 . . . .

History 11A 4 . . 4

History MB 12 . . . .................... 12

History I IC 4 . . 5 . . . .

History IID 1 1 * 4 * * . 2* 6** . . . .

History ME ............................. 5

History IIF 11 . . . .................... 11

History MIA 10 . . . 10 ....................

History IIIB 9 .................... 9 .........................History 111C 2 2 ....................

History MID Not offered in 1972

History IIIE Not offered in 1972

History IMF .................... 5 . .

History IV Classes by arrangement

D ep ar tm e n t of Indonesian Languages and L iteratures

Bahasa Ind. & Malay I 5 5 5

Bahasa Ind. & Malay I (Lab) 10a 7a 10a 7a 10a 7a 10a 7a . . . .(4 hrs, by classes) — (i) (Ü) (Hi) (iv) (i) (ii) (•ii) (iv) . . . .Bahasa Ind. & Malay II 5 4 . . . . . . 5

Bahasa Ind. & Malay III 2 . . . . . . 9 2

Bahasa Ind. & Malay IV Classes by arrangement

Elementary Literary Arabic . . . . 3 3 3

Javanese A 9 10 10

Javanese B Not offered in 1 972

D ep a r tm e n t of Japanese

Japanese I 11 10 10 11

Japanese II 10 1 0 .................. 10 10

Japanese III 11 .................... 11 11 11

Japanese IV Classes by arrangement

Introduction to Japanese Literature Not offered in 1972

Literary Japanese . . . . 11 3 3

433

Lecture T im e-tab le fo r 1972

U N IT S B Y D E P A R T M E N T SM o n d a y T u e s d a y W e d n e s d a y T h u rs d a y F rid a y

D E D E D E D E D E

Japanese Literature A Classes by arrangement

Japanese Literature B Classes by arrangement

D e p a r tm e n t o f L in g u is t ic s

L inguistics I 3 ...................... 3 10

Linguistics II . . . . 11 12 3 .

L inguistics III 11 ...................... 12 12

Australian L inguistics Classes by arrangement

L inguistics IV Classes by arrangement

D e p a r tm e n t o f M e d ie v a l S tu d ie s

Medieval Studies A 3 .......................................... 12 10 .

Medieval Studies B . . . . 9 9 9

D e p a r tm e n t o f P h ilo s o p h y

Philosophy I:—

Phase I ...................... 4* 1 0 " . . 4* 1 0 " . .

Phase IIOption C Option D

................................ 1010

Option E 4 ................................Option F

Option G

...................... 4

4

Phase III:Option A 4 ................................Option B ...................... 4Option C Option F Option G

................................ 10

4

10

Phase IV:Option A Option B

................................ 1010

Option D 4 ................................Option E Option H

...................... 4 . . . .4

Ethics & Politics 5 ...................... 5

Greek Philosophy 2 ...................... 11

H istory o f Philosophy . . . . 2 12

Logic ................................ 2 2 . .

Philosophy o f Science . . . . 12 ...................... 12

Philosophy III (H onours) Classes by arrangement

Philosophy IV Classes by arrangement

434

Lecture T im e-table fo r 1972

U N IT S B Y D E P A R T M E N T SM o n d a y T u e s d a y W e d n e s d a y T h u r s d a y F r id a y

D E D E D E D E D E

D ep a rtm e n t o f P o litica l Science

Political Science I 4 5

Political Science II 1 5

Political Science II (Honours) 2 5

Asian Government: India (H alf-Year course) (1st Half o f Year)

4 5

Asian Government: China (H alf-Year course) (1st Half o f Year)

4 4

Asian Government: Japan (H alf-Year course) (2nd Half o f Year)

4 5

Asian Government: Comparative Communism (Half-Year course) (2nd Half o f Year)

4 4

International Relations 12 3 . .

In troduction to M odern Political Thought 12 5

Political C om m unication Not offered in 1 972

Political Socio logy 12 10 , .

Public Policy and Adm in istra tion 10 12

Political Science IV Classes by arrangement

D e p artm e n t o f Psychology See 1st AND 2nd Semester Tim e-tables, Faculty o f Science

D ep artm e n t o f Pure M a th e m a tic s

General M athematics 5 5 5 5 12dy, 2dx

Pure M athematics I 12 12 9dy,1 2 5 3dx . .

Pure M athematics I (Honours) 12 12 12 5

Pure M athematics II 11 10 10 11,1 2d

5dyV

1O dx . .

Pure M athematics II (H onours) 11 10 10,12 11

Pure M athematics III 12 11 10 11

Pure M athematics III (Honours) 12 11 10 11

Pure M athematics III (H onours) Classes by arrangement(Advanced Topics)

Pure M athematics IV Classes by arrangement

D ep artm e n t o f Russian

Russian I 9 . 9,12 . . 2 . . 2d 3

Russian II,h DID 3 3 2 2

Russian III,h DO 3 9 4 12

Russian IV Classes by arrangement

435

Lecture Time-table for 1972

UNITS BY DEPARTMENTSMonday Tuesday Wednesday Thursday Friday

D E D E D E D E D E

Science Russian Classes by arrangement

D e p a rtm e n t o f S oc io log y

Sociology I .................... 7 . . . . 3

Sociology II 3 ..................... 3 .................... 3z

Social Organisation A .Sociology of Religion(Half-Year course) (1st Half of Year)

10 .................... 11 ....................

Social Organisation B !Sociology of Education (Half-Year course) (1st Half of Year)

4 4

Social Organisation C Man and His Environment (Half-Year course) (2nd Half of Year)

10 .................... 11 ....................

Social Organisation DSociology of Rural and Urban Communities (Half-Year course) (2nd Half of Year)

4 . . . . 4 . . . .

D epa rtm e n t o f S ou th Asian and B udd h is t S tud ies

Sanskrit I . . . . 2 . . . . 4 9

Sanskrit II Classes by arrangement

Sanskrit III Classes by arrangement

Sanskrit IV Classes by arrangement

Hindi I 12 12 . . . . 10

Hindi II Classes by arrangement

Literary Persian Classes by arrangement

Pali Not offered in 1972

Prakrit Classes by arrangement

D epa rtm e n t o f S ta tis tic s

Statistics A01 (Semester Unit) (1st E t 2nd Half of Year)

5 7 3

Statistics A02 (Semester Unit) (2nd Half of Year)

5 . . 7 3

Statistics A03 (Semester Unit) (1 st Half of Year)

5 7 3

Statistics B01 (Semester Unit) (1st Half of Year)

. . .. 3 4d 4,5d 3 4d

Statistics B01 (Honours) (Semester Unit) (1 st Half of Year)

1 3 4d 4,5d 3 4d

Statistics B02 (Semester Unit) (2nd Half of Year)

. . .. 3 4d 4,5d 3 4d . . .

Statistics B02 (Honours) (Semester Unit) (2nd Half of Year)

1 3 4d 4,5d 3 4d . . .

436

Lecture Time-table for 1972

U N IT S B Y D E P A R T M E N T SM o n d a y T u e s d a y W e d n e s d a y T h u rs d a y F r id a y

D E D E D E D E D E

Statistics B03 (Semester Unit) (2nd Half of Year)

3 4d 4,5d 3 4d . . . .

Statistics B03 (Honours) (Semester Unit) (2nd Half of Year)

1 3 4d 4,5d 3 4d . . . .

Statistics C01 (Semester Unit) (1 st Half of Year)

2,3d . . 11,1 2d 4,5d . . . .

Statistics C01 (Honours) (Semester Unit) (1 st Half of Year)

11 10,3d 11,12d 4,5d . . . .

Statistics C02 (Semester Unit) (2nd Half of Year)

2,3d . . 11,1 2d 4,5d . . . .

Statistics C02 (Honours) (Semester Unit) (2nd Half of Year)

11 2,3d . . 11,1 2d 4,5d . . . .

Statistics C03 (Semester Unit) (1 st Half of Year)

3 4d 11,1 2d 1 0,11 d

Statistics C03 (Honours) (Semester Unit) (1 st Half of Year)

3 4d 11,1 2d 5 10,11 d . . ..

Statistics C04 (Semester Unit) (2nd Half of Year)

3 4d 11,1 2d 10,11 d . . . .

Statistics C04 (Honours) (Semester Unit) (2nd Half of Year)

3 4d 11,1 2d 5 10,11 d . . ..

Statistics C05 (Semester Unit) (2nd Half of Year)

Not offered in 1 972

Statistics C05 (Honours) (Semester Unit) (2nd Half of Year)

Not offered in 1 972

Statistics IV Classes by arrangement

Tim e-table B

Faculty of Science First Semester, 1972

D e p a rtm e n t o f B io ch em is try

Biochemistry B01 . . . . 9 .................. 9 9

Biochemistry B01 (Lab) ............................. 11 n .

Biochemistry C03 10 1 2 .................. 10

Biochemistry C03 (Lab) 11 n . .

Biochemistry C05 .. . . 10 10 10

Biochemistry C05 (Lab) 12 n ....................................

Biochemistry IV Classes by arrangement

D e p a rtm e n t o f B otany

Botany A01 9 11 9

Botany A01 (Lab) (3 hours) . . . . 2 b .................. 2b

437

Lecture T im e-table fo r 1972 FIRST SEMESTER

U N IT S B Y D E P A R T M E N T SM o n d a y T u e s d a y W e d n e s d a y T h u rs d a y F riday

D E D E D E D E D E

Botany B01 10 11

Botany B01 (Lab) 11 n . . 10a . .

Botany B02 9 9 . . 1 2

Botany B02 (Lab) 2b 2b

Botany B04 10 12 10

Botany B04 (Lab) 10k .

Botany C03 9 9 1 2

Botany C03 (Lab) 2b . . 2b

Botany C06 9 9 9 . .

Botany C06 (Lab) 1 1 n . .

Botany IV Classes by arrangement

D e p a rtm e n t o f C h em istry

Chemistry A01 11 1 0 11

Chemistry A01 (Lab) ( 3 i Hours) 1,3 0 f. . 1 .3 0 f . . 1 .3 0 f. . 1 .3 0 f. . 1.30f .

Chemistry A02 10 10 . . 12

Chemistry A02 (Lab) ( 3 i hours) 1 3 0 f . . 1 3 0 f . . 1 .3 0 f. . 1 .3 0 f. . 1.30f .

Chemistry B01 9 . . 9 1 2

Chemistry B01 (Lab) 2b 2b

Chemistry B03 10 12 10 11

Chemistry B03 (Lab) 1 30e

Chemistry B04 10 12 10 . . 11

Chemistry B04 (Lab) 1 30e

Chemistry C01 10 12 10 . .

Chemistry C01 (Lab) 10k .

Chemistry C03 9 9 . . 9 ..

Chem istry C03 (Lab) 11k . .

Chemistry C05 9 9 12

Chemistry C05 (Lab) 2b 2b

Chemistry IV Classes by arrangement

D e p a rtm e n t o f C o m p u te r S c ience

Com puter Science B01 5 5 5

Com puter Science C01 4 9 g ,3 2

D e p a rtm e n t o f Forestry

Forestry D1 6 11 10

438

Lecture Time-table for 1972 FIRST SEMESTER

U N IT S B Y D E P A R T M E N T SM o n d a y T u e s d a y W e d n e s d a y T h u r s d a y F r id a y

D E D E D E D E D E

Forestry D16 (Lab) 2b .........................................................

Forestry D1 7 ............................................... 10

Forestry D17 (Lab) 10k . .

Forestry D1 8 9 2 ......................................

Forestry D18 (Lab) 3a ......................................

Forestry D1 9 .............................. 9 12

Forestry D1 9 (Lab) ................................................ 2b

Forestry D20 10 12 ......................................

Forestry D20 (Lab) Class to be arranged

Forestry D21 . . . . 9 2 ....................

Forestry D21 (Lab) ............................. 3a

Forestry D22 12 ...................................... 11

Forestry D22 (Lab) . . . . 1 0 a ......................................

Forestry D23 ............................................... 9 9

Forestry D23 (Lab) ............................. 1 1 a ....................

Forestry D24 9 2 ......................................

Forestry D24 (Lab) 3a .............................

Forestry D25 ............................. 9 2

Forestry D25 (Lab) ................................................ 3a

Forestry D27 11 .................... 10 ....................

Forestry D27 (Lab) 2b .........................................................

Forestry D35 10 12 .................... 10 10

Forestry D35 (Lab) 12e . .

Forestry D36 .. . . 10 d y . . 10 1111 dx

Forestry D36 (Lab) 11n

Forestry D37 9 .................... 9 9

Forestry D37 (Lab) .............................. 11n . .

D e p a r tm e n t o f Geology

Geology A01 10* 5** . . 5* 5* 10** 10**(i) (i) (ii) •• (iii) (ii) . . (iii) . .

Geology A01 (Lab) (3 Hours) 2b 7b 2b

Geology B01 12 11 12

Geology B01 (Lab) ............................. 2b .................... 9a

Geology C01 Classes by arrangement

Geology C02 .............................. 11 9

439

Lecture T im e-table fo r 1972 FIRST SEMESTER!

UNITS BY DEPARTMENTSMonday Tuesday Wednesday Thursday Friday

D E D E D E 0 E D E

Geology C02 (Lab) Classes by arrangement

Geology C03 1 0 ...................... 11

Geology C03 (Lab) Classes by arrangement

Geology C06 . . . . 9 9

Geology C07 9 ...................... 9 12

Geology C07 (Lab) . . 2b

Geology C08 11 ...................... 10

Geology C08 (Lab) 2b ......................

Geology C10 Not offered in 1 972.

G eology C12 . . . . 12 10

Geology C1 2 (Lab) 2b

Geology IV Classes by arrangement

D e p a r tm e n t o f M a th e m a t ic s — A p p lie d M a th e m a t ic s

Applied M athematics I 11 12 10dy, 1112dy

Applied M athem atics I (Hons) 11 12 10dy, 1112dy

Applied M athem atics II . . . . 9,11 dy

11dy . . 9 9 . .

Applied M athematics II (Hons) . . . . 9,11 dy

11dy . . 9 9 . .

Applied M athem atics III 9 ...................... 9 2 . . 10

Applied M athem atics III (H ons) 9 ...................... 9 2 10

Applied M athematics IV Classes by arrangement

D e p a r tm e n t o f M a th e m a t ic s —-P u re M a th e m a t ic s

General M athematics 5 5 5 5 1 2dy, 2dx

Pure M athematics I 12 12 9dy, . . 12

5 3dx . .

Pure M athematics I (Hons) 12 12 12 5

Pure M athematics 11A 11 10 10 11, 5dy 12dy

1O dx..

Pure M athematics 11A (Hons) 11 10 10 11

Pure M athematics MB 11 10 10 11, 5dy 12dy

1 0 d x ..

Pure M athematics MB (H ons) 11 10 10 11

Pure M athematics MC (Hons) 11 10 10 11

Pure M athematics MIA 12 . . 11 10 11

440

Lecture Time-table for 1972 FIRST SEMESTER

UNITS BY DEPARTMENTSM onday Tuesday W ednesday Thursday Friday

D E D E D E D E D E

Pure Mathematics MIA (Hons) 12 11 10 11

Pure Mathematics IiIB 12 11 10 11

Pure Mathematics 111B (Hons) 12 11 10 11

Pure Mathematics MIC (Hons) 12 11 10 11

Pure Mathematics IV Classes by arrangement

D epa rtm e n t o f Physics

Physics A01 9 9 9 . .

Physics A01 (Lab) (3 Hours) 2b 2b 2b 2b

Physics A02 9 9 9 . .

Physics A02 (Lab) (3 Hours) 2b 2b 2b 2b

Physics B01 9 9 12

Physics B01 (Lab) 2b 2b

Physics B03 10 12 10

Physics B03 (Lab) 11 n . .

Physics C02 10 12 10

Physics C02 (Lab) 2b 2b

Physics IV Classes by arrangement

D epa rtm en t o f Psychology

Psychology A01 12* 5** 12* 5** 12* 5**

Psychology A01 (Lab) (3 Hours) 2b 7b 9b,2b.7b 9b,2b 7b 9b,2b

Human Biology A02 10 10 10

Human Biology A02 (Lab) (3 Hours) 2b

Psychology B01 9* 5** 11* 5** 9* 4**

Psychology B01 (Lab) (2 Hours) 2ay 7ay 2ay 7ay 2ay

Psychology B01 Statistics Class (2 Hours) la y 7ay 9ay 7ay 10ax . .

Psychology B03 Not offered in 1 972

Psychology B05 4 10

Psychology B05 (Lab) 10a

Psychology C01 10 10 11

Psychology C01 (Lab) 11 n . .

Psychology C03 5 4 4

Psychology C03 (Lab) (4 Hours) 2ay 4ax 2ay 4ay 2ax

Psychology C05 10 10 2

Psychology C05 (Lab) 2by . . 1Obx..

441

Lecture Tim e-table fo r 1972 FIRST SEMESTER

Monday Tuesday Wednesday Thursday Friday

D E D E D E D E D E

Psychology IV Classes by arrangement

D e p a r tm e n t o f S ta t is t ic s

Statistics A01 5 . . 7 3

Statistics A03 5 . . 7 3

Statistics B01 . . . . 3 4d 4, 3 4d5d

Statistics B01 (H onours) 1 . . 3 4d 4, 3 4d5d

Statistics C01 . . . . 2.3d 11, 4.1 2d 5d

Statistics C01 (H onours) 11 10,3d 11, . . 4,12d 5d

Statistics C03 3 4d 11, .. 10, . .12d l i d

Statistics C03 (H onours) 3 4d 11, 5 10, . .12d 11 d

S tatis tics IV Classes by arrangem ent

D e p a r tm e n t o f T h e o re t ic a l P h ys ics

Theoretical Physics C01 11 1Od . . 12 12

Theoretical Physics C04 1 1 ...................... 12

D e p a r tm e n t o f Z o o lo g y

Zoology A01 11 12 11

Zoology A01 (Lab) (3 Hours) 2b ...................... 2b 2b

Human B iology A02 10 ...................... 10 10

Human B iology A02 (Lab) (3 Hours) . . . . 2b

Zoology B01 . . . . 11 10 11

Zoology B01 (Lab) 11 n ......................

Zoology B02 9 . . 2RR . . 9

Zoology B02 (Lab) 1 2nRR

Zoology B03 Not offered in 1 972

Zoo logy B03 (Lab) Not offered in 1 972

Zoology B04 10 12 10

Zoology B04 (Lab) 11 n ..

Zoo logy C02 9 . . 2RR . . 9

Zoology C02 (Lab) 1 2nRR

Zoology C03 Not offered in 1972

Zoology C03 (Lab) Not offered in 1972

442

Lecture Time-table for 1972

UNITS BY DEPARTMENTSM onday Tuesday W ednesday Thursday Friday

D E D E D E D E D E

Zoology C07 3 . . . . 9 ....................

Zoology C07 (Lab) 1 1 k .......................................

Zoology IV Classes by arrangement

T im e-tab le C

D e p a r tm e n t of B iochem istry

Biochemistry C01 9 9 9

Biochemistry C01 (Lab) 11 n . .

Biochemistry C02 10 10 11 ....................

Biochemistry C02 (Lab) 11 n . .

Biochemistry C04 10 12 10 ....................

Biochemistry C04 (Lab) . . . . 11 n . .

Biochemistry IV Classes by arrangement

D e p a r tm e n t of Botany

Botany A01 9 11 9

Botany A01 (Lab) (3 Hours) 2b 2b ....................

Botany B03 10 11 ....................

Botany B03 (Lab) 11 n . . 10a .

Botany C01 9 9 12 ....................

Botany C01 (Lab) 2b 2b ....................

Botany C02 9 9 12 ....................

Botany C02 (Lab) 2b 2b ....................

Botany C04 9 9 9 . .

Botany C04 (Lab) 11 n . .

Botany C05 10 12 10 ....................

Botany C05 (Lab) 10k . .

Botany C07 10 11 ....................

Botany C07 (Lab) 11 n . . 10a .

Botany IV Classes by arrangement

D e p a r tm e n t of Chemistry

Chemistry A01 11 . . 10 1 1 ....................

Chemistry A01 (Lab) (3 j Hours) 1 3 0 f. . 1 3 0 f. 1 3 0 f. . 1 3 0 f. . 1 3 0 f. .

443

Lecture Time-table for 1 972 SECOND SEMESTER

Monday Tuesday Wednesday Thursday Friday

D E D E D E D E 0 E

Chemistry A02 . . . . 10 10 12

Chemistry A02 (Lab) (3 j Hours) 1,3 0 f. . 1 3 0 f. . 1 3 0 f. . 1 3 0 f. . 1,3 0 f. ,

Chemistry B02 10 12 .................... 10

Chemistry B02 (Lab) 10k . .

Chemistry C02 9 .................... 9 . . 12

Chemistry C02 (Lab) . . . . 2b .................... 2b

Chemistry C04 . . . . 9 .................... 9 9

Chemistry C04 (Lab) ............................. 11k . .

Chemistry C06 10 12 .................... 10 11

Chemistry C06 (Lab) 2b

Chemistry IV Classes by arrangement

D epa rtm e n t o f C om p u te r Science

Computer Science B02 .................... 5 5 5

Computer Science C02 .................... 4 9g,3 . . 2

Computer Science C03 . . . . 12 .. 9g 2 2

D epa rtm e n t o f Fo restry

Forestry D26 9 2 ....................

Forestry D26 (Lab) • • •• 3a .....................

Forestry D27 .............................. 9 12

Forestry D27 (Lab) 2b

Forestry D28 10 ...................................... 10 11c . .

Forestry D29 . . . . 12 .................... 10

Forestry D29 (Lab) 2b

Forestry D30 ............................. 12,2 .

Forestry D30 (Lab) ............................. 3b

Forestry D31 .. .. 9 11 9 9

Forestry D32 9 . . 2c 9

Forestry D32 (Lab) 12e . .

Forestry D33 . . . . 10 10 11

Forestry D33 (Lab) 11 n .......................................

Forestry D34 . . . , 12 .................... 10 10

Forestry D34 (Lab) 11 n . ,

Forestry D38 Not offered in 1972

Forestry D38 (Lab) Not offered in 1 972

444

Lecture T im e-table fo r 1972 SECOND SEMESTER

UNITS BY DEPARTMENTSMonday Tuesday Wednesday Thursday Friday

D E D E D E D E D E

Forestry D39 9 . . 9 9

Forestry D39 (Lab) 11 n . .

Forestry D40 10 12 10

Forestry D40 (Lab) 11 n

D e p a r tm e n t o f G e o lo g y

Geology A01 10* 5 ” . . 5*( ') ( ') (Ü)

5*(iii)

10** . . (ii)

10** . . ( iii)

Geology A01 (Lab) (3 Hours) . . . . 2b 7b 2b

Geology B02 12 11 12

Geology B02 (Lab) 2b 9at . .

Geology B03 9 ...................... 9 12

Geology B03 (Lab) . . . . 2b . . 2b

Geology C01 Classes by arrangement

Geology C04 10 12

Geology C04 (Lab) 2b

Geology C05 9 ...................... 12

Geology C05 (Lab) 2b

Geology C09 . . . . 9 9

Geology C09 (Lab) 2b

Geology C1 3 11 ...................... 10

Geology C1 3 (Lab) 2b ......................

Geology IV Classes by arrangement

D e p a r tm e n t o f M a th e m a t ic s — A p p lie d M a th e m a t ic s

Applied M athematics I 11 12 1Ody . . 11,12dy

Applied M athematics I (Hons) 11 12 10dy, . . 11,12dy

Applied M athematics II . . . . 911 dy

11dy . . 9 9

Applied M athematics II (Hons) . . . . 911 dy

11dy . . 9 9

Applied M athematics III 9 ...................... 9 2 10

Applied M athematics III (Hons) 9 9 2 10

Applied M athematics IV Classes by arrangement

D e p a r tm e n t o f M a th e m a t ic s — P ure M a th e m a t ic s

General M athematics 5 5 5 5 1 2dy, . . 2dx

445

Lecture Time-table for 1972 SECOND SEMESTER

U N IT S B Y D E P A R T M E N T S

M o n d a y T u e s d a y W e d n e s d a y T h u r s d a y F r id a y

D E D E D E D E D E

Pure Mathematics I 12 12 9dy,12

5 3dx . .

Pure Mathematics 11A 11 10 10 11, 5dy 12dy

1Odx . .

Pure Mathematics 11A (Hons) 11 10 10 11

Pure Mathematics IIB 11 10 10 11, 5dy 1 2dy

10dx . .

Pure Mathematics IIB (Hons) 11 10 10 11

Pure Mathematics 11C (Hons) 11 10 10,12

11

Pure Mathematics IIIA 12 11 10 11

Pure Mathematics IIIA (Hons) 12 11 10 11

Pure Mathematics 111B 12 11 10 11

Pure Mathematics NIB (Hons) 12 11 10 11

Pure Mathematics MIC (Hons) 12 11 10 11

Pure Mathematics IV Classes by arrangement

D ep a rtm e n t o f Physics

Physics A01 9 9 . . 9 . .

Physics A01 (Lab) (3 Hours) 2b 2b 2b 2b

Physics A02 9 . . 9 . . 9 . .

Physics A02 (Lab) (3 Hours) 2b 2b 2b 2b

Physics B02 10 12 10

Physics B02 (Lab) 10k . .

Physics B04 9 9 12

Physics C01 10 12 10

Physics C01 (Lab) 2b 2b . .

Physics C03 9 . . 9 . . 9

Physics C03 (Lab) 11k

Physics IV Classes by arrangement

D e p a rtm e n t o f Psychology

Psychology A01 12* 5” 12' 5 " 12' 5 "

Psychology A01 (Lab) (3 Hours) 2b 7b 9b,2b

7b 9b, 7b 2b

9b, ■ ■2b

Human Biology A02 10 10 10

Human Biology A02 (Lab) (3 Hours) 2b

Psychology B02 9 ' 5” 11* 5 " 9 ' 4”

Psychology B02 (Lab) (3 Hours) 7bx 2by 2bx , .

Psychology B04 11 10 11

446

Lecture Time-table for 1972 SECOND SEMESTER

Monday Tuesday Wednesday Thursday Friday

D E D E D E D E D E

Psychology B04 (Lab) (3 Hours) 2b 2b . . . .

Psychology B06 9 . . . . 9 1 2 ...........................

Psychology B06 (Lab) 2b ....................

Psychology C02 1 0 1 2 . . . . 1 0 ....................

Psychology C02 (Lab) .................... 1 0 k ..

Psychology C04 1 0 1 0 11 ...........................

Psychology C04 (Lab) 1 2 e . .

Psychology C06 5 4 ........................... 4

Psychology C06 (Lab) (4 Hours) 2ay 4ax 2ay 4ax

Psychology C08 Not offered in 1 972

Psychology C08 (Lab) Not offered in 1972

Psychology C10

Psychology C10 (Lab) 12em

Psychology IV Classes by arrangement

D e p a rtm e n t o f S ta tis tic s

Statistics A01 5 7 3

Statistics A02 5 7 3

Statistics B02 3 4d 4,5d 3 4d .. . .

Statistics B02 (Honours) 1 3 4d 4,5d 3 4d . . ..

Statistics B03 3 4d 4,5d 3 4d .. . .

Statistics B03 (Honours) 1 3 4d 4,5d 3 4d . . ..

Statistics C02 2,3d 11,1 2d

4,5d . . . .

Statistics C02 (Honours) 11 2,3d 11, 4,5d .1 2d

Statistics C04 3, 4d 11, 10,1 2d 11 d

Statistics C04 (Honours) 3, 4d 11, 5 10,1 2d 11 d

Statistics C05 Not offered in 1 972

Statistics C05 (Honours) Not offered in 1 972

Statistics IV Classes by arrangement

D e p a rtm e n t o f T h eo re tic a l Physics

Theoretical Physics C02

Theoretical Physics C03

Theoretical Physics C04

447

Lecture Tim e-table for 1972 SECOND SEMES'ERl

U N IT S BY D E P A R T M E N T SM o n d a y T uesday W edn esd ay Thursday Friday

D E D E D E D E D E

D e p artm e n t o f Zoo lo gy

Zoology A01 . . . . 11 12 11

Zoology A01 (Lab) (3 Hours) 2b . . . . 2b 2b

Human B iology A02 10 ................................ 10 10

Human B iology A02 (Lab) (3 Hours) 2b ..........................................

Zoology B05 10 12 ..........................................

Zoology B05 (Lab) 11k ..

Zoology C01 9 2RR . . 9 ......................

Zoology C01 (Lab) ................................ 12nRR

Zoology C04 9 ...................... 9 9

Zoology C04 (Lab) . . . . 11 n ......................

Zoology C05 10 12 ...................... 10

Zoology C05 (Lab) 11 n ..

Zoology C06 11 10 11

Zoology C06 (Lab) 11 n . .

Zoology C08 11 11 ...................... 11

Zoology IV Classes by arrangement

C. G. PLOW M AN, AC ADEM IC REGISTRAR

448

Index 449

IndexA cadem ic Progress, 22, 44; rules:

Arts, 184; Asian Studies, 230-1; Economics, 295; Law, 341; Science, 422-3

A cadem ic Year, 17 A ccom m o dation , see Student

ResidenceA ccou nting and Public Finance,

Department and Details o f units and book lists, 246-53; Faculty o f Arts, 57; staff, 7

A d m in is tra tive Law, 320 Adm ission, undergraduate, 18-19;

postgraduate, 19-20; requirements, 27-8; rules 28

Advanced Com m ercial Law, 320-1 A esthetics, 131A ffilia te d Colleges, 36; staff, 12 A g ricu ltu ra l Production and Prices,

267A g ricu ltu re in the N ational

Economy, 266-7 A ir and Space Law, 321 A m erican L iterature, 69 A pplied G eography, see Geography A pplied M ath em atics , see Mathematics A rabic, E lem entary L iterary, 209 A rts, Faculty (Accounting and Public

Finance, Classics, Computer Science, Economic History, Economics, English, French, Geography, Germanic Languages, History, Linguistics, Mathematics, Medieval Studies, Philosophy, Political Science, Psychology, Russian, Sociology, Statistics); academic progress, 22, 44; rules, 184; combined A rts/Law , 56, 302-3; rules, 338-9; degrees, 16-17, 55-6; courses o f study rules, Bachelor, 163-81; Master, 1 81 -3; units from other faculties, 55; staff, 4-6

Asian C ivilizations, Department and Details o f units and book lists, 192-200; staff, 6

Asian G overnm ent, 136-8, 141 Asian Studies, Faculty (Asian

Civilizations, Chinese, Indonesian Languages and Literatures, Japanese, Linguistics, South Asian and Buddhist Studies); academic progress, 22, 44; rules, 230-1; units from Faculty of Arts, 187; rules, 225; degrees, 16-17,187; courses o f study rules. Bachelor, 224-7; Master, 227-9; staff, 6-7

A ustralian Linguistics, 110, 218 A ustralian L iterature , 68-9 A ustralian N ational U n iversity Law

Society , 308-9

Bachelor Degrees, see Arts, Faculty; Asian Studies, Faculty; Economics, Faculty; Law, Faculty; Science,Faculty

Bahasa Indonesia and M alay , see Indonesian Languages and Literatures

Banking Facilities, 42 Biochem istry, Department and Details

o f units and book lists, 348-51; staff, 9 Botany, Department and Details o f units

and book lists, 352-6; staff. 9 Bruce Hall, 12, 36 Buddhist C iv ilization , 198 Burgm ann College, 12, 36 Burton Hall, 12, 36

Careers and A ppointm ents, 12, 40 C hem istry, Department and Details o f

units and book lists, 357-64; staff.9-10

Chinese, Department and Details o f units and book lists, 201 -5; staff, 6

Classical Chinese, see Chinese Classical T rad ition , 60 Classics, Department and Details o f

units and book lists, 57-64; staff, 4 Com bined degree courses, see Arts,

Faculty; Asian Studies, Faculty; Economics, Faculty; Law, Faculty

C om m ercial Law, 321 -2 C om m onw ealth C o nstitu tional Law,

322Com pany Finance, 249, 252 Com pany Law, 322 C om parative Law, 322 C o m p etitive Equilibrium , see

EconomicsC om puter Science, 65, 253-5, 365 C onferring o f Degrees, 44 C o n flic t o f Laws, 322 C ontracts, 322-3 Counselling Service, 12, 40 C rim inal Law and Procedure, 323 C rim ino logy, 323

Dean o f Students, 12, 39 D e fin itio n o f Term s, 21 Degree Rules, Arts, 163-84; Asian

Studies, 224-31; Economics, 280-95 Law, 333-41; Science, 411 -23

Degrees, 16-17D ip lom a in Economics, 243, 272-3;

rules, 273-4 Discipline, 23D octo rates , Laws, Letters, Science,

16-17; Philosophy, 16-17 and relevant department entry

D utch , 92

451

Index

Economic Geography, 81,271 Economic H istory, Department and

Details of units and book lists. Faculty of Economics, 256-61; Faculty of Arts, 65; staff, 7

Economics, Department and Details of units and book lists. Faculty of Economics, 262-74; Faculty of Arts,66; staff, 7-8

Economics, Faculty (Accounting and Public Finance, Computer Science, Economic History, Economics, Political Science; Statistics); academic progress, 22, 44; rules, 295; combined Econo­mics/Law, 240-3; rules, 290-2; degrees. 16-17, 235; courses of study rules. Bachelor, 280-90; Master,292-4; units from other Faculties,236; staff, 7-8

E ffec tive W ritin g , 56 E ffic ien t English Tutorials , 12, 40 E ffic ien t Reading Courses, 12, 40 Elem entary G erm an, 84-5 Elem entary Q u an tita tiv e Economics,

see Economics Department Elem entary L iterary Arabic, 209 Em ploym ent, see Careers and

AppointmentsEnglish, Department and Details of units

and book lists, 66-71; staff, 4Enrolm ent, 20-7Epistem ology and the Philosophy of

M in d , 131Ethical and Po litical Philosophy, 131 Ethics and Politics, 126 Evidence, 32Exam inations, 43-4; rules, 44-7 Expenditure and Fiscal Institu tions,

251, 252

Faculties, Arts, 55-184; Asian Studies, 187-231; Economics, 235-95; Law, 299-341; Science, 345-423

Fam ily Law, 324-5 Federal Law Review , 308 Fees, 23-7Financial A ccounting Theory, 249,

252Forestry, Department and Details of

units and book lists, 365-77; staff,10

French, Department and Details of units and book lists, 71 -6; staff, 4

Garran Hall, 12, 36 General M ath em atics , see M athe­

maticsG eography, Department and Details of units and book lists, 77-82; staff, 4

452

G eology, Department and Details of units and book lists, 378-84; staff, 10

G erm anic Languages, Department and Details of units and book lists. 83-93; staff, 4

G reek, see ClassicsGreek C iv ilization , see ClassicsGreek Philosophy, 127, 131

H ealth Service, 12, 39-40 Hindi, 221-2H istoriography, see History H istory, Department and Details of units

and book lists, 94-107; staff, 4 -5 H isto ry o f Economic Thought, 260-1 H istory o f Philosophy, 126-7 Honours, Arts, 55-6, rules, 179-81

Asian Studies, 188, rules, 226-7 Economics, 239-40, rules, 289-90;Law, 301 -2, rules, 335-6; Science,345; rules, 415-6; Science (Forestry), 346; rules, 418-9

Hum an Biology A02, 143, 392, 406

Indonesian Languages and L ite ra ­tures, Department and Details of units and book lists, 206-10, staff. 6-7

In te rn atio na l Business Transactions,325-6

In ternationa l Law, 326 In te rnationa l Relations, 138, 141 In troduction to Japanese L ite ra ture ,

212Islam ic C iv ilization , 198, 209

Japanese, Department and Details of units and book lists, 211-4; staff, 1

Javanese, see Indonesian Languages and Literatures

John XXIII College, 12, 36 Jurisprudence, 326-7

Kant, 131

Labour Economics, see Economics Labour Relations, 326-7 Latin, see Classics Law, Faculty, General, 308-19;

academic progress, 22, 44, 311-2, rules, 341; combined courses. 302-7, rules, 338-40; degrees. 16-17; 299-302, 307; courses of study rules. Bachelor, 333-7, Master, 337-8; Details of subjects and book lists, 320-32; library. 309, 312-3; staff,8-9, 12

Law o f Em ploym ent, 324 Law o f Industrial Property , 325

Index

Law o f In tern ational Organisations,326

Legal and C o nstitu tional H istory,327-8

Legal D ra ftin g , 328 Legal M e th o d , 328 Legal W orkshop, 319 Library, 12, 37-8Linguistics, Department and Details of

units and book lists. Faculty of Arts, 107-11; Faculty of Asian Studies, 215-9; staff, 5

L iterary Japanese, 212-3 L iterary Persian, 222 Local G overnm ent and Tow n

Planning Law, 328-9 Logic, 127, 132

M an and His Environm ent, 159-60 M a s te r Degrees, see Arts, Faculty;

Asian Studies, Faculty; Economics, Faculty; Law, Faculty; Science,Faculty

M ath em a tic a l Economics, seeEconomics

M ath em a tic s fo r Economists, seeEconomics

M ath em atics , Departments and Details of units and book lists. Faculty of Arts, 112-21; Department of Pure Mathe­matics, 113-8; Department of Applied Mathematics, 118-21; Faculty of Science, 385-7

M ed ieval Philosophy, 131 M ed ieval Studies, 122 M etaph ysics and Philosophical

Logic, 131M o d ern Chinese, see Chinese M o d ern (Post Kantian) Philosophy,

130M o o t C ourt, 308

N atio n al Economic Accounting ,250-1, 252

N o n -D eg ree S tudents, 18-19

O ffice rs and S ta ff, 3-12 Old Norse, 91 -2O p tim a l C ontro l Theory, see Econo­

micsO rien ta tio n W eek, 37, 41

Pali, 221Persian, Literary, 222 Phenom enology, 131 Philosophical Psychology, 132 Philosophy, Department and Details of

units and book lists. 132-33; staff, 5 Philosophy, D octo r o f, see Doctorates

Photographs, 21Physics, Department and Details of units

and book lists. 387-91, staff. 10-11 Political Science, Department and

Details of units and book lists,Faculty of Arts, 133-42; Faculty of Economics, 274; staff, 6

Political Sociology, 136, 140-1 Postal Facilities, 42 Practice and Procedure, 329 P rakrit, 221 Prehistory, 106-7 Prizes, 47-51Problem s o f U nder-developm ent:

India, 259 Property , 329-30 Property , Care of, 23 Psychology, Department and Details of

units and book lists, Faculty of Arts, 142-50; Faculty of Science, 392-8; staff. 11

Public A u th o rity Accounting , 250,252

Public Policy and A d m in istra tion ,138-9, 141

Pure M ath em atics , see Mathematics

R e-enro lm ent, 21Regional Geography, see Geography Roman C iv ilization , 59-60 Rules, Admission. 28; Examinations,

44-7; Faculty of Arts, Bachelor (pass). 163-79; (honours), 179-81; Master,181 -3; Academic Progress, 184;Faculty of Asian Studies, Bachelor (pass), 224-6; (honours). 226-7; Master, 227-9; Academic Progress. 230-1; Faculty of Economics,Bachelor (pass), 280-9; (honours).289- 90; combined Economics/Law,290- 2; Master. 292-4; Academic Progress. 295; Faculty of Law,Bachelor (pass), 333-5; (honours). 335-7; Master. 337-8; combined Arts/ Law, 338-9; combined Economics/ Law, 339-40; Academic Progress, 341: Faculty of Science, Bachelor (pass),411 -50; (honours), 41 5-6; Bachelor of Science (Forestry), (pass), 41 6-8; (honours). 418-9; Master, 419-21 Academic Progress, 422-3

Russian, Department and Details of units and book lists, 151 -3; staff, 6

Sanskrit, see South Asian and Buddhist Studies

453

Index

Science, Faculty (Biochemistry, Botany, Chemistry, Computer Science, Forestry, Geology, Mathematics, Physics, Psychology, Science Languages, Statistics, Theoretical Physics, Zoology); academic progress, 22, 44; rules, 422-3; degrees, 16-17, 345; courses of study rules, Bachelor 411 -6; Bachelor (Forestry), 416-9; Master, 419-21; Science careers,346-8; staff, 9-11

Scholarships, undergraduate, 29-32 postgraduate. 33-5

Science Languages, 398-9 Smoking, 23Sociology, Department and Details of

units and book lists, 154-61; staff, 6 South Asian and Buddhist Studies,

Department and Details of units and book lists, 220-3; staff, 7

Soviet Law, 330-1 Sports Union, 41 -2 Statistics, Department and Details of

units and book lists, Faculty of Arts, 162; Faculty of Economics, 275-9; Faculty of Science, 400-1; staff, 8

Student Loan F und ,35"Student Residence, halls, 36; affiliated

colleges, 36; private lodgings, 37 Students' Association, 41 Succession, 331 Swedish, 90-1Systematic Geography, see Geography

Taxation, 331 The Empiricists, 131 The Legislative Process, 327 The Rationalists, 131 Theoretical Physics, Department and

Details of units and book listsi 401 -4; staff. 11

Time-tables, 22, 425-48 Torts, 331 -2 Traffic Control, 23 Trusts, 332

University, 1 5-16University Co-operative Bookshop

42University Union, 38-9 Ursula College, 12, 36

Vice-Chancellor's Discretionary Fund, 35

W elfare and Taxation, 251, 252

454

Zoology, Department and Details of units and book lists, 404-10; staff, 11

Notes

LO CATIO N G U ID E

School o f General Studies

Admission

Academic Register: Chancelry (35)Inquiries, Student Adm inistration office,

Examinations o ffice : Chancelry (35)

Faculty offices-A rts: Haydon-Allen Building (27)Asian S tudies: Asian Studies Building (36) Economics: Copland Building (28)Law: Law School (37)Science: Chemistry Building (25)

Arts

Classics: Haydon-Allen Building (27)Computer Science: Copland Building (28)English: Haydon-Allen Building (27)French: Haydon-Allen Building (27)Geography: Haydon-Allen Building (27)Geography Laboratory: Haydon-Allen Building (27) Germanic Languages: Haydon-Allen Building (27) History: Haydon-Allen Building (27)Linguistics: Haydon-Allen Building (27)Mathematics: Haydon-Allen Building (27)Medieval Studies: Haydon-Allen Building (27) Philosophy: Haydon-Allen Building (27)Political Science: Childers Street Buildings (2S)

(till approximately February 1972)Psychology: Psychology Building (20)Russian: Haydon-Allen Building (27)Sociology: Haydon-Allen Building (27)

Asian Studies

Asian Civilizations: Asian Studies Building (36) Chinese: Asian Studies Building (36)Indonesian Languages and Literatures: Asian Studies

Building (36)Japanese: Asian Studies Building (36)Linguistics: Haydon-Allen Building (27)South Asian and Buddhist Studies: Asian Studies

Building (36)

EconomicsAccounting and Public Finance: Copland Building

(28)Computer Science: Copland Building (28)Economic H istory: Copland Building (28)Economics: Copland Buiiding (28)Statistics: Copland Building (28)

Law: Law School (37)

ScienceBiochemistry: Biochemistry Building (23)Botany: Botany Building (16)Chemistry: Chemistry Building (25)Forestry: Forestry Building (14)Geology: Geology Building (26)Physics: Physics Building (22)Psychology: Psychology Building (20)Theoretical Physics: Physics Building (22)Zoology: Zoology Building (19)

Language LaboratoriesOld Adm inistration Buildings (38)Haydon-Allen Building (27)

University LibraryGeneral Studies Collection and office: J . B. Chifley

Building (32)Law Collection (General Studies): Law School (37) Advanced Studies Collection and office: R. G.

Menzies Building (40)Asian Studies Division: R. G. Menzies Building (40)

Student ServicesDean of S tudents: Chancelry (35)University Health Service: Copland Building (28) University Counselling Service: Copland Building

(28)Careers and Appointm ents: Copland Building (28) Efficient Reading Laboratory: Childers Street

Buildings (29)Efficient English Tutorials: Copland Building (28)

Halls o f Residence Bruce Hall (21)Burton Hall (18)Garran Hall (17)

A ffilia ted Residential Colleges

Burgmann College (11)John XXIII College (12)Ursula College (13)

University Union: Union Building (30)

Examination H a ll: Melville Hall (31)

Key to s i te m apT H E A U S T R A L I A N N A T I O N A L U N I V E R S I T Y

1 University Information2 University House3 Lennox House

(University Pre-School and Child Care Centre4 University Staff Centre5 Vice-Chancellor's House6 Old Hospital Buildings7 Research School of Physical Sciences8 Research School of Biological Sciences

(see also 34)9 John Curtin School of Medical Research

10 Central Store11 Burgmann College12 John XXIII College13 Ursula College14 Forestry Building15 Botany Department Experimental Area16 Botany Building17 Garran Hall18 Burton Hall19 Zoology Building20 Psychology Building21 Bruce Hall22 Physics Building23 Biochemistry Building24 Research School of Chemistry25 Chemistry Building

(Department of Chemistry, School of General Studies)

26 Geology Building27 Haydon-Allen Building, Dedman Building

and Arts III(Faculty of Arts)

28 Copland Building(Faculty of Economics, University Health Service, University Counselling Service)

29 Childers Street Buildings(Department of Political Science and Centre for Continuing Education until approximately February 1972)

30 University Union31 Melville Hall32 University Library—J. B. Chifley Building33 Maintenance Depot and Boiler House34 Research School of Biological Sciences

(under construction)35 Chancelry36 Asian Studies Building37 Law School38 Old Administration Buildings

(including Post Office, Banking Centre, Canteen and Credit Union)

39 H. C. Coombs Building(Research Schools of Social Sciences and Pacific Studies)

40 University Library—R. G. Menzies Building41 University Telephone Exchange (P.A.B.X.)